artin 


LIBRARY 


UNIVERSITY   OF   CALIFORNIA 

GIRT  OK 


R&etved 

Accessions 


Shelf  No. 


PRINCIPIA    LAT  INA;  ' 


INTRODUCTION 


LATIN    LANGUAGE 


BT  , 


CHARLES  D'URBAN  MORRIS,  M.  A., 

RECTOR  OP  TRINITY  SCHOOL,  NEW  YORK. 
FORMERLY    FELLOW    OF    ORIEL    COLLEGE,    OXFORD. 

0"  TH« 

W7ERS1TY; 


NEW 

PUBLISHED    BY    MASON    BROTHERS, 

5  AND  1  MEECER  STREET. 

1  8  t  >  0  . 


Entered,  according  to  the  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  I860,  by 

MASON    BROTHERS, 
In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  for  the  Southern  District  of  New  York. 


0.  A.  ALVORD,  STEREOTYPES  AND  PRINTER,  XEW  YORK. 


PREFACE. 


THIS  book  is  the  result  of  a  conviction  that  if  the  Latin  language  is 
to  be  well  learned  in  the  time  usually  devoted  to  its  study  in  this 
country,  it  is  necessary  that  the  whole  subject  should  be  simplified,  and 
that  if  possible  the  number  of  separate  facts  which  have  to  be  remem- 
bered should  be  diminished.  It  is  not  denied  that  many  of  the  grammars 
and  introductory  exercise  books  in  general  use  contain  sufficiently  full  and 
correct  statements  of  these  separate  facts,  but  it  is  believed  that  in  none 
of  them  are  the  facts  classified  in  the  most  scientific  way,  and  that  in 
none  is  the  most  judicious  method  adopted  of  presenting  them  to  the 
youthful  mind.  It  seems  to  be  considered  that  boys  have  plenty  of  time 
to  learp,  first  the  Latin  equivalent  for  an  English  word  for  one  thing, 
its  mode  of  declension  or  conjugation  for  another,  its  gender  for  a  third, 
and  the  quantity  of  its  vowels  for  a  fourth,  and  that  it  is  unnecessary  to 
try  to  present  the  facts  in  such  a  way  as  that  in  recollecting  one  they 
shall  recollect  all.  It  seems  again  not  to  have  occurred  to  the  framers 
of-  the  books  in  use  that  the  lengthy  statement  of  rules  of  syntax  not 
only  renders  the  acquisition  of  them  by  young  people  a  work  of  enor- 
mous labor,  and  of  nearly  infinite  time,  but  that  the  same  lengthy 
statement  almost  certainly  precludes  the  efficient  use  of  them  when 
acquired.  For  what  teacher,  even  the  most  indefatigable,  can  call  upon 
his  pupils  to  give  the  rules  for  the  various  constructions  of  nouns  and 
verbs  which  occur  in  a  lesson,  when  the  mere  enunciation  of  them  in 
the  most  rapid  and  unthinking  way  involves  as  great  an  expenditure 
of  time  as  can  be  devoted  to  the  whole  recitation  ?  The  consequence 
of  this  want  of  condensation  is  believed  to  be,  in  most  cases,  that  prac- 
tically the  only  analysis  to  which  a  lesson  is  subjected  is  that  which 
is  commonly  called  "  parsing;"  i.  e.,  no  more  is  in  general  attempted  than 
to  ascertain  whether  the  pupils  know  in  what  case,  tense,  or  mood  any 
noun  or  verb  appears.  This,  though  of  course  an  absolutely  essential 
element  in  the  true  grammatical  analysis,  can  only  be  regarded  as 
subsidiary  to  that  higher  insight  which  understands  the  logical,  nay,  the 
almost  mathematical  necessity  of  the  employment  of  one  form  rather 
than  another.  But  in  order  to  attain  this  insight,  pupils  must  have 
their  attention  continually  called  afresh  to  the  illustrations  of  various 


IT  PREFACE. 

constructions  as  they  occur  in  their  lessons ;  and  to  effect  this,  it  is 
necessary  that  they  should  be  furnished  with  simple,  definite,  and 
condensed  phraseology,  which  can  be  applied  without  needless  loss  of 
time,  as  often  as  it  is  required,  i.  e.,  as  often  as  constructions  to  which 
it  is  applicable  occur  in  a  lesson. 

The  aim  of  this  book  is  then  twofold:  first,  to  present  the  facts  of 
declension  and  conjugation  in  their  most  distinct  and  scientific  aspect ; 
second,  to  systematize  and  condense  the  rules  of  syntax  applicable  to 
simple  and  compound  sentences,  and  to  offer  such  a  concise  nomen- 
clature, as  may  without  any  more  expenditure  of  time  than  is  usually 
devoted  to  "  parsing,"  admit  of  the  rules  being  called  for  and  given 
until  they  are  indelibly  impressed  on  the  understanding. 

In  this  preface  will  be  given — 

(1.)  A  statement  of  the  principle  upon  which  this  book  is  con- 
structed. 

2.)  A  brief  defence  of  this  principle  upon  philological  grounds. 

3.)  A  statement  of  the  advantages  of  teaching  Latin  in  this  way. 

4.)  Answers  to  objections  which  may  be  made  to  the  adoption  of 
this  principle  in  practice. 

(5.)  A  statement  of  other  points  in  which  this  book  differs  from  most 
introductory  Latin  books  which  have  preceded  it. 

(6.)  Remarks  upon  the  way  in  which  the  writer  hopes  the  book  may 
be  used. 

§  1.   OF  THE  PRINCIPLE  UPON  WHICH  THIS  BOOK  IS  CONSTRUCTED. 

In  this  book  all  inflected  words,  whether  substantives,  adjectives, 
pronouns,  or  verbs,  are  presented  in  that  shape  in  which  they  may  be 
supposed  to  have  existed  before  any  suffixes  were  appended  to  them, 
to  mark  distinctions  of  case,  tense,  person.  &c.  This  primary  form,  which 
is  called  the  stem  in  this  book,  has  been  named  in  some  German  and 
English  books  the  crude  form:  that  is,  the  form  in  which  the  word  ex- 
ists before  it  is  fitted  to  take  its  place  in  the  spoken  or  written  language ; 
it  is  unfit  for  use,  because  it  is  destitute  of  all  means  of  showing  in  what 
relation  it  stands  to  other  words  with  which  it  is  connected  in  a  sen- 
tence. Instead,  then,  of  presenting  to  pupils  the  nominative  case 
singular  as  the  simplest  and  primary  form  of  a  noun,  or  the  first  person 
singular  of  the  present  tense  of  the  indicative  mood  as  the  simplest 
form  of  a  verb,  in  this  book  the  stems  of  both  are  given  as  the  forma 
which  must  be  carried  in  the  mind  as  the  simple  representatives  of  the 
corresponding  English  words.  For  example,  instead  of  teaching  pupils 
to  call  to  mind  vultus  as  the  simple  equivalent  of  the  English  noun 
'•face,"  or  rego  as  the  simple  equivalent  of  the  English  verb  "rule," 
this  book  tells  them  to  regard  the  stems  vultu-  and  reg-  as  the  simple 
equivalents  of  the  English  words ;  and  to  look  upon  the  formed  words, 
vultus,  rego,  as  comprehending,  beside  the  simple  meaning,  particular 
indications  of  the  place  in  a  sentence  which  each  of  them  is  fitted  to  fill. 


PREFACE. 


§   2.    OF  THE  PHILOLOGICAL  TRUTH  OF  THE  PRINCIPLE. 

This  subject  can  of  course  be  but  briefly  touched  upon  in  this  book, 
which  aims  only  at  providing  elementary  instruction  in  Latin  for  young 
.  pupils.  It  must  suffice  here  to  say,  that  it  is  admitted  by  all  modern 
philologers  that  all  inflected  Latin  or  Greek  words  consist  of  a  base,  or 
crude  form,  or  stem,  and  suffixes  or  endings.  This  fact  was  brought 
prominently  to  notice  by  the  introduction  into  modern  Europe  of  a 
knowledge  of  the  Sanscrit  language  and  grammar.  Now  in  all  San- 
scrit grammars  it  is  the  practice  to  give  first  the  naked  or  unformed 
word,  and  then  the  endings,  which,  when  attached  to  it,  in  accordance 
with  the  complex  laws  of  euphony  which  prevail  in  that  language, 
fit  it  to  fill  a  place  in  the  spoken  or  written  language.  Professor  Key 
of  the  London  University  was  the  first  to  propose  (in  1830),  to  apply 
the  same  method  to  the  classical  languages;  and  he  subsequently 
published  a  Latin  grammar  arranged  upon  this  principle. 

All  inflected  words  then  having  stems  or  crude  forms,  of  course  these 
stems  must  end  either  in  a  consonant  or  in  one  of  the  five  vowels.  Of 
substantives  we  have  in  this  way  a  complete  set  of  classes  answering 
to  the  five  declensions  of  ordinary  grammars : 


Nouns  with  stems  ending  in  a  fall  into  the  first  declension. 
"  "  "  o       "       "       second     " 

«  (i  K  u      u       «      fourth      " 

"  "  "  i       "       "       fifth         " 

«  »  «<  i        ii        u        third         it 

"  "  "  a  consonant        "       "  " 


So  also  for  verbs  we  have  the  same  natural  distribution ;  there  is 
not,  however,  any  class  of  verbs  with  stems  ending  in  o. 


Verbs  with  stems  ending  in  a  fall  into  the  first  conjugation. 
"  "  "  e      "      "        second     " 

"  "  "  i      "       "        fourth      " 

"  "  "  u      "       "        third       " 

"  "  '"  a  consonant       "         "  " 


It  is  thought  that  in  nearly  all  these  cases'  the  presence  of  the  char- 
acteristic letter  of  each  declension  and  conjugation  will  be  easily  enough 
detected  by  even  a  cursory  examination.  Those  who  wish  to  see  the 
grounds  of  these  assumptions  fully  discussed  may  consult  (7.  L.  Struve, 
iiber  die  Lateinische  Declination  und  Conjugation ;  or  of  more  acces- 
sible books,  Donaldson,  Varronianus,  chap.  viii. ;  or  Anthoris  edition  of 
Zumpt's  Grammar,  appendix  V. ;  or  Key,  Latin  Grammar,  appendix  I. 


PREFACE. 


§    3.  OF  THE   ADTANTAGES   OP  TEACHING  LATIN   IS  THIS   WAT. 

Teachers  who  may  adopt  this  method  of  Latin  instruction  will  find 
that  it  possesses  among  others  the  following  advantages : 

(1.)  It  insures  certainty  as  to  the  declension  or  conjugation  of  each 
word  which  abides  in  the  memory  of  the  pupil. 

(2.)  In  a  large  majority  of  instances  it  insures  the  same  certainty  in 
regard  to  the  gender  of  substantives. 

(3.)  It  brings  prominently  to  notice  the  distinction  between  what 
is  radical  in  an  inflected  word  and  what  is  a  merely  formative  and 
temporary  addition  to  it. 

(4.)  It  affords  much  more  clearly  than  the  old  method  can  do,  an 
insight  into  the  laws  of  derivation  and  composition ;  and  particularly 
so  in  the  case  of  those  words  which  have  passed  into  the  modern  lan- 
guages. 

(5.)  It  admits  of  a  separate  treatment  of  the  cases  of  nouns,  and  the 
tenses  and  moods  of  verbs  to  a  greater  extent  than  is  at  least  attempted 
in  books  constructed  on  other  methods. 

"We  will  speak  of  each  of  these  points  separately. 

(1.)  The  experience  of  all  teachers  must  have  shown  them  how  liable 
boys  are  to  error  in  the  inflection  of  nouns  and  verbs.  Unless,  beside 
the  nominative  case  of  a  noun,  the  pupil  has  in  his  mind  the  genitive 
also,  there  is  no  security  that  he  will  not  inflect  a  noun  of  the  second 
declension,  for  example,  like  the  fourth.  And  even  if  he  recollect  the 
genitive  case,  he  may  yet  in  some  cases,  consistently  with  the  rules  of 
his  grammar,  go  wrong.  For  instance,  a  boy  is  taught  by  Andrews 
and  Stoddart  that  the  words  which  make  their  genitive  singular  in  ei 
are  of  the  fifth  declension.  He  may  naturally,  therefore,  when  he  sees 
the  words  alvel,  cunel,  Dei.  pilei,  &a,  inflect  them  like  rel,  fidel.  It  is 
clear,  that  if  upon  the  method  adopted  in  this  book,  a  boy.  by  remem- 
bering one  word,  can  be  more  certain  of  declining  a  noun  rightly  than 
he  can  upon  the  old  method  by  remembering  two,  the  new  system  must 
be  adjudged  the  palm  of  superiority,  if  economy  of  time  and  labor  be 
of  any  moment.  As  Professor  Key  says,  "  The  words  puer,  linter,  pater, 
are  only  deceitful  guides  to  the  declension  until  we  know  some  other 
case  or  cases,  whereas  the  crude  forms  puero-,  lintri-,  pair-,  at  once  give 
a  direction  which  cannot  be  mistaken.  A  treacherous  similarity  exists 
between  equus,  virtus,  and  senatus,  between  servos  and  arbos,  between 
dies  and  paries ;  but  there  is  no  chance  of  the  pupil  referring  to  the 
same  declensions  cqua-,  virtut-,  and  senatur,  or  servo-  and  arbos-,  or  die- 
and  pai'let-" 

(2.)  It  will  be  found  that  if  nouns  be  fixed  in  the  memory  in  their 
stem-form,  they  admit  of  being  grouped  into  classes  as  to  gender,  of  a 
much  wider  extent  than  if  their  nominative  cases  only  be  remembered. 
If  the  teacher  will  look  at  the  simple  general  rules  for  gender  given  in 


PREFACE.  vii 

the  introduction,  and  will  then  cast  his  eye  over  the  vocabulary  to  this 
book,  in  which  only  those  nouns  have  their  gender  marked  which  can- 
not be  determined  by  these  general  rules,  he  will  see  how  great  an 
abridgment  of  labor  in  this  matter  is  effected  by  adopting  the  method 
of  this  book. 

(3.)  All  teachers  will  admit,  that  the  one  thing  needful  for  pupils  who 
Study  the  Latiii  or  Greek  languages  is,  that  they  should  arrive  at  a  cer- 
tain and  intuitive  knowledge  that  a  noun  or  verb  in  one  form  has  an 
absolutely  different  use  and  different  properties  from  the  same  word  in 
another  form.  Surely,  then,  that  method,  which  presents  in  the  most 
distinct  way  the  formative  and  the  radical  parts  of  words,  must  be  en- 
titled to  the  preference  of  all  who  really  desire  to  accomplish  perfectly 
what  they  profess  to  teach. 

(4.)  The  general  doctrine  of  derivation  is  much  more  clearly  exhibited 
upon  the  method  of  this  book  than  on  that  of  those  which  proceed  upon 
the  old  system.  To  quote  again  Professor  Key — ''From  the  sub- 
stantives clvi-,  fide-,  tribu-,  we  more  readily  proceed  to  the  adjectives, 
clvlli-,  fideli-,  tribuli-,  than  we  can  from  the  nominatives,  clvis,  fides, 
tribus.  Again,  the  diminutives,  ndvicula-,  virguncula-,  diecula-,  sucula-, 
ratiuncula-,  are  with  little  difficulty  referred  to  the  crude  forms,  ndvi-, 
virgon-,  die-,  su-,  ration-."  "  Our  English  adjectives,  re-al,  reg-al, 
gradu-al,  manu-al,  vertic-al,  nation-al,  are  less  easily  referred  to  the 
nominative  res,  rex,  gradus,  manus,  vertex,  natio,  than  to  the  crude  forms 
which  present  themselves  at  once  to  the  eye.  The  same,  or  nearly  the 
same,  is  true  of  the  words  lapid-ary,  avi-ary,  sanguin-ary,  salut-ary, 
station-ary." 

(5.)  It  is  an  incidental  but  very  great  advantage  of  the  method 
adopted  in  this  book,  that  it  is  necessary  to  treat  of  the  cases  and  tenses 
separately.  All  the  best  books  constructed  upon  the  old  system  give 
a  declension,  and  then  short  sentences  in  which  the  various  cases  are 
introduced,  in  order  that  by  having  to  use  them  the  pupils  may  be  made 
to  remember  the  forms.  In  this  way  they  may  get  a  vague,  general 
notion  of  the  meaning  of  a  case ;  such,  for  instance,  as  that  if  an  Eng- 
lish noun  is  preceded  by  "of"  it  must  be  in  the  genitive  case,  if  by 
"  to"  it  must  be  in  the  dutive  case.  But  in  this  book  the  forms  of  the 
nominative  and  accusative  cases,  which  stand  in  the  simplest  relation 
to  each  other  and  the  verb,  are  alone  at  first  Introduced ;  and  the  num- 
ber of  exercises  upon  these  is  so  great  that  pupils  cannot  fail,  while 
learning  the  forms,  to  acquire  an  indelible  impression  that  each  of  these 
is  fitted  for  a  certain  peculiar  office  in  a  sentence.  And  so,  when  these 
are  fully  understood,  sentences  come  which  are  rendered  more  complex 
by  the  use  of  the  genitive  case  and  no  other ;  and  thus  the  pupils,  fully 
understanding  the  use  of  the  nominative  and  accusative,  are  able  to 
direct  all  their  thoughts  to  the  meaning  and  use  of  the  strange  case. 
The  same  thing  holds  with  regard  to  the  other  cases,  the  tenses  of 


viii  PREFACE. 

the  verb,  and  its  moods.     But  enough  has  been  said  to  call  the  atten- 
tion of  teachers  to  this  matter. 


§   4.    ANSWERS     TO    OBJECTIONS   WHICH   MAT   BE   MADE    TO    THE   ADOP- 
TION  OF   THIS   METHOD. 

These  possible  objections  resolve  themselves  into  two,  one  having 
reference  to  teachers,  and  the  other  to  pupils. 

It  may  be  said,  that  before  teachers  can  make  use  of  this  book  they 
must  learn  their  Latin  over  again.  This,  however,  is  only  a  first-sight  and 
superficial  view.  Any  one  who  takes  the  least  pains  to  understand  the 
principles  set  forth  in  the  second  section  of  this  preface,  must  see  that 
the  ordinary  division  into  declensions  and  conjugations  is  riot  ignored  or 
overthrown  in  this  book,  but  that  the  system  adopted  here  and  that  of  the 
grammars  exactly  coincide  as  regards  the  particular  words  which  either 
would  class  together.  The  only  difference  is,  that  in  this  book  the 
division  is  based  upon  a  clear  and  positive  principle,  in  the  grammars 
it  is  merely  arbitrary  and  empirical.  It  is  certain,  that  an}-  one  who 
is  competently  acquainted  with  Latin,  acquired  upon  the  old  system, 
if  he  will  take  the  pains  to  write  half-a-dozen  exercises,  taken  at  ran- 
dom at  dine  rent  parts  of  the  work,  looking  out  all  the  words  in  the 
vocabulary,  will  be  perfectly  able  to  use  it,  as  far  as  any  peculiarity 
of  its  method  is  concerned. 

Then,  as  to  pupils,  it  may  be  said :  "  How,  if  they  are  taught  Latin 
upon  this  system,  will  they  be  able  to  hold  their  own  in  college  classes, 
the  larger  part  of  which,  to  say  the  least,  have  been  trained  to  parse 
words  upon  an  entirely  different  method  ?"  In  answer  to  this  it  may  be 
said,  that  the  objection  has  been  refuted  by  abundant  experience.  Boys 
who  are  taught  as  this  book  recommends  that  they  should  be,  are  taught 
to  be  equally  familiar  with  words  in  their  crude-form  shape,  and  in  the 
form  in  which  they  are  ordinarily  presented.  So  that,  in  the  writer's 
experience,  no  boy  has  ever  had  the  least  difficulty  in  using  an  ordinary 
dictionary  when  it  has  been  placed  in  his  hands.  It  is  believed  that 
if  the  directions  as  to  the  use  of  this  book,  given  in  this  preface  and  in 
the  subsequent  parts  of  it,  are  adhered  to,  not  only  will  no  difficulty  be 
found  in  getting  boys  to  analyze  words  in  the  ordinary  method,  but  that 
those  who  are  trained  in  this  way  will  be  actually  more  ready  at  that 
work  than  those  who  have  been  taught  upon  the  received  system. 

§    5.   OF   SOME   OTHER   POINTS  'WHEREIN   THIS   BOOK  DIFFERS  FROM  MOST 
OF  ITS  PREDECESSORS. 

(1.)  In  this  book  the  tenses  of  the  verb  have  a  double  name  given 
them,  which  mark  not  only  the  time  they  denote,  but  also  the  character 
of  the  action,  whether  imperfect,  perfect,  or  intended.  This  change  ne- 
cessitates the  introduction  of  no  new  names,  but  merely  a  re-distribution 
of  the  old  ones ;  and  it  is  sanctioned  though  not  adopted  by  McClintock 


IX 

and  Crooks,  by  Andrews  and  Stoddard,  and  in  effect  by  all  the  modern 
grammarians.  It  is  strange  that,  while  so  many  have  admitted  the 
truth,  so  few  have  seen  that  the  adoption  in  practice  of  terms  which 
express  it  would  be  necessarily  a  more  compendious  method  of  teach- 
ing it,  than  the  systematic  use  of  names  which  ignore  it.  No  one  who 
has  not  tried  the  more  complete  phraseology  can  justly  estimate  the 
degree  to  which  the  use  of  the  tenses,  particularly  of  those  of  the  sub- 
junctive mood,  is  made  simple  and  easy  to  the  understanding  of  young 
people. 

(2.)  The  cases  are  arranged  in  the  tables  in  a  different  order  from 
that  generally  adopted.  It  is  believed  that  a  glance  at  the  tables,  as 
given  in  this  book,  will  satisfy  an  unprejudiced  mind  of  the  great 
advantage  of  thus  placing  in  juxta-position  cases  of  identical  or  similar 
forms.  But  for  those  to  whom  authority  is  every  thing,  it  would  seem 
to  be  enough  to  say  that  the  order  used  in  this  book  is  that  deliberately 
preferred  and  adopted  by  Professor  Madvig  of  Copenhagen. 

(3.)  It  has  been  attempted  in  this  book  to  condense  rules  of  syntax  as 
far  as  possible  into  single  words,  and  thus  not  only  to  lighten  the  labor 
of  pupils,  but  to  render  it  possible  to  bring  more  constantly  into  practice 
the  knowledge  of  syntactical  principles  which  has  been  acquired. 

(4.)  There  have  been  hardly  any  new  names  introduced  into  this  book. 
It  is  thought  that  the  term  logical,  applied  to  a  class  of  pronouns,  and 
nominal,  used  to  designate  propositions  when  standing  as  the  object  or 
subject  of  a  verb,  will  justify  their  admission  by  their  convenience. 
The  only  word  for  which  any  apology  seems  necessary  here  is  "  sub- 
junction,"  which  has  been  adopted  to  denote  those  conjunctions  which 
attach  dependent  sentences  to  independent  ones.  It  is  believed  to  be 
a  very  convenient  and  simple  addition  to  the  ordinary  grammatical 
nomenclature ;  but  if  it  be  still  regarded  by  any  as  an  offence,  it  may  be 
looked  upon  as  only  a  syncopation  for  subordinating  con] junctions. 

(5.)  Another  peculiarity  of  this  book  is,  that  in  it  the  long  vowels 
only  have  their  quantity  marked,  the  short  quantity  being  assumed  in 
all  cases  as  the  normal  condition  of  a  vowel,  unless  the  long  quantity  is 
expressly  asserted  to  belong  to  it.  It  is  thought,  that  by  the  adoption 
of  this  method,  the  difference  of  the  quantity  of  the  vowels  in  a  word  is 
brought  out  more  strikingly  than  if  every  syllable  has  some  mark  over 
it :  and  it  is  quite  possible  to  insist  on  the  pupils  keeping  the  long 
vowels  in  their  exercises  always  marked,  and  to  correct  these ;  while 
it  would  be  nearly  impossible  to  scrutinize  sufficiently  an  exercise  in 
which  all  the  vowels  were  marked. 


PREFACE. 


§   5.   ON  THE  METHOD  OF  USING  THIS  BOOK 

There  will  be  found  throughout  this  book  constant  suggestions  to 
teachers  as  to  the  way  in  which  it  is  thought  best  that  particular  points 
should  be  made  clear  to  the  understanding  of  pupils.  But  it  may  be 
well  here  to  speak  more  generally  about  the  method  in  which  the  writer 
hopes  this  book  may  be  used. 

(1.)  It  is  not  designed  that  any  thing  in  this  book  should  be  learned 
by  heart,  except  the  tables,  &c.,  which  are  specially  mentioned  as  being 
given  to  be  committed  to  memory.  It  is  the  practice  of  some  teachers, 
when  lists  of  words  or  vocabularies  are  given,  to  expect  pupils  to  come 
to  recitation  prepared  to  repeat  those  lists  as  well  as  with  the  exer- 
cises written  and  learned.  It  is  thought  that  such  labor  must  be  very 
distasteful  to  pupils,  and  it  certainly  is  wholly  useless.  It  is  not  in- 
jurious but  rather  profitable  for  young  people,  when  they  have  to  trans- 
late a  given  exercise,  to  have  before  their  eyes  a  list  of  the  principal  new 
words  contained  in  it.  A  boy  has,  suppose,  to  translate  a  Latin  sen- 
tence. He  finds  himself  ignorant  of  the  meanings  of  two  words  in 
it;  but  he  sees  those  words  in  the  vocabulary  prefixed  to  the  lesson; 
and  he  learns  their  meaning  while  his  faculties  are  in  their  most  ex- 
cited state,  and  are  most  likely  to  retain  whatever  they  take  hold  of. 
It  is,  however,  a  good  plan,  after  the  lesson  has  been  read  and  analyzed, 
for  the  teacher  to  call  upon  the  class  to  give  the  Latin  for  the  most  im- 
portant words  that  have  occurred  in  it.  The  experience  of  the  writer 
proves  that  boys  can  acquire  the  meanings  of  a  number  of  words  in 
this  way  with  ease  to  themselves,  and  quite  as  rapidly  as  they  could 
do,  if  a  large  part  of  their  time  and  labor  wer.'  expended  in  committing 
lists  of  words  to  memory. 

(2.)  The  tables  of  the  formation  of  the  cases,  which  occur  in  the 
early  part  of  the  book,  should  in  no  case  be  learned  by  heart.  It  is 
thought  that  a  mature  mind  will  at  once  perceive  their  import.  But 
young  people  may  at  first  find  a  little  difficult}1-  in  understanding  the 
arrangement.  The  teacher  should  therefore  go  over  each  of  these  tab- 
ular statements  with  his  pupils  as  they  occur,  and  should  see  that  they 
know  how  they  are  to  be  read.  They  are  intended  merely  as  a  guide 
for  the  pupil  in  writing  his  exercises,  until  by  this  practice  they  be- 
come fastened  in  his  memory. 

(3.)  As  this  book  teaches  the  proper  inflection  of  nouns  and  verbs 
by  reference  to  the  letter  in  which  the  stem  ends,  it  is  considered  of 
the  last  importance  that  every  means  should  be  taken  to  see  that  pu- 
pils know  the  stems  of  the  words  in  their  reading  exercises.  In  order 
to  secure  this  it  is  recommended  that  the  reading  lesson  should  be  used 
in  the  following  way :  After  any  one  sentence  has  been  translated  by 
one  pupil,  the  whole  of  the  class  should  be  called  upon  to  indicate  (by 
holding  up  the  hand,  or  by  remaining  seated)  whether  they  are  pre- 


PREFACE.  xi 

pared  to  give  the  stem  (and  the  gender  of  substantives)  of  each  inflected 
word  in  the  sentence.  When  it  is  thus  ascertained  who  profess  acquaint- 
ance with  the  subject  (the  pupils  who  decline  to  be  called  upon  either 
standing  up  or  not  holding  up  their  hands)  the  teacher  can  rapidly  call 
upon  one  pupil  after  another  to  give  the  stem  (and  gender)  of  each 
word  in  the  sentence  successively.  An  illustration  may  perhaps  make 
this  clearer:  Suppose  the  sentence  to  be  the  4th  of  Exercise  2.  After 
one  boy  lias  translated  it,  let  the  teacher  say,  ''Now,  who  can  read  the 
stems  and  give  the  genders  of  the  words  in  this  sentence?  Those  boys 
who  cannot  will  stand  up."  When  the  class  is  by  this,  or  any  other 
method,  divided  into  two  sections,  the  teacher  may  call  upon  any  one  of 
the  volunteers,  thus,  "Smith."  Smith  is  expected  to  answer,  "Fllio-, 
masculine."  "Jones."  Jones  answers,  "Cani-,  common/1  "Brown." 
Brown  answers,  "  quaer-."  The  same  method  should  then  be  pursued 
iu  examining  the  class  as  to  the  construction  of  the  words  in  that  sen- 
tence before  proceeding  to  the  next.  And  as  soon  as  the  pupils  have 
learned  the  declension  of  any  one  class  of  nouns,  they  should  immedi- 
ately after  reading  the  stems  be  called  upon  to  volunteer  in  the  same 
way  to  decline  each  word  in  succession,  or  as  many  as  their  present 
acquirement  enables  them  to  go  through;  and  then  the  teacher  should 
select  some  boy  at  random  to  repeat  the  declension,  and  should  see 
that  all  those  who  have  professed  their  inability  to  do  the  same,  have 
the  page  of  their  book  open  before  them,  on  which  that  declension 
is  found,  that  they  may  follow  with  the  eye  the  declension  which 
the  other  pupil  is  repeating.  If  a  system  of  marks  is  in  use,  all  the 
pupils  who  volunteer  to  do  any  thing  which  is  required,  may  be  allowed 
to  score  one,  provided  it  prove  that  they  were  justified  in  their  con- 
fidence. They  may,  in  nearly  all  cases,  be  safely  allowed  to  keep  this 
record  for  themselves,  and  to  tell  at  the  end  of  the  lesson  how  many 
questions  they  have  answered  or  could  have  answered,  it  being  under- 
stood that  each  boy  who  volunteers  to  answer  and  then  fails,  or  would 
huve  failed  if  called  upon,  is  to  rub  oft'  one  of  his  preceding  marks.  If 
the  teacher  himself,  or  one  of  his  pupils  for  him,  keeps  a  record  of  the 
total  number  of  questions  asked  (counting  each  word  declined,  and 
each  stem  recited  as  a  separate  question),  the  marks  of  each  pupil  can 
of  course  easily  be  reduced  to  any  required  standard.  The  above  me- 
thod of  questioning  is  recommended  as  the  best  with  which  the  writer 
is  acquainted  for  arresting  and  sustaining  the  attention  of  a  large  class. 
And  for  learning  the  declensions  he  has  no  doubt  that  it  is  a  far  better 
way  to  insist  that  the  boys  who  do  not  know,  should  have  the  page 
with  the  declension  open  before  their  eyes,  while  the  other  bojrs  are 
declining,  than  merely  to  tell  them  to  come  better  prepared  to  the  next 
lesson. 

(4.)  When  any  grammatical  principle  is  explained,  the  teacher  should 
make  his  pupils  look  at  several  of  the  succeeding  English  sentences  in 
which  it  is  involved,  and  then  ask  questions  in  regard  to  it  in  the  same 
way,  before  expecting  them  to  translate  any  sentences.  For  exam- 


xii  PREFACE. 

pie,  at  page  85,  note  2d.  there  is  a  suggestion  made  to  enable  pnpfls 
to  determine  the  case  of  the  relative  pronoun.  Let  the  teacher  first 
make  one  of  his  pupils  read  that  passage  aloud,  and  then  go  over 
some  half-dozen  of  the  next  English  sentences,  and  call  upon  several 
boys  in  succession  to  apply  the  rule  in  those  cases.  This  will,  it  is  be- 
lieved, be  found  the  best  and  a  sufficient  method  in  the  case  of  all  the 
other  syntactical  principles  explained. 

(5.)  In  correcting  written  exercises,  the  teacher  may  in  the  same  way 
call  for  the  exercise  of  some  one  boy  at  random,  and  having  examined 
this,  he  should  read  aloud  to  the  class  the  correct  Latin,  mentioning, 
as  well  as  expressing  by  his  voice,*  the  long  vowels.  And  lie  should 
then  require  each  boy  who  has  any  thing  different  from  the  words  as 
correctly  read,  to  rise  in  his  place  and  remain  standing  till  the  teacher 
has  had  an  opportunity  of  going  round  the  class,  calling  upon  each  boy 
separately  to  state  his  error,  and  explaining  to  him  individually  the 
grounds  of  it  Or  he  may,  perhaps  better,  call  upon  the  class  in  gen- 
eral to  volunteer  to  explain  the  mistakes.  He  should  by  all  means 
always  insist  on  his  pupils  marking  all  the  long  vowels  in  their  ex- 
ercises. 

(6.)  After  the  three  stems  of  the  verbs  are  understood,  and  the  in- 
finitive mood  is  introduced,  it  will  be  well  for  the  pupils  to  be  ready 
to  give  the  parts  of  the  verb  indifferent  ways  on  alternate  days.  Thus, 
on  one  day  in  reading  aloud  the  stems,  when  they  come  to  a  verb,  say 
amavit,  they  should  be  made  to  give  its  parts  thus,  ama-,  amav-,  amato-; 

*  In  order  that  the  teacher  should  be  able  himself  to  mark  by  his  voice  the  dif- 
ference of  the  quantity  of  vowels,  and  to  make  his  pupils  do  the  same,  it  is  believed 
to  be  absolutely  essential  that  each  vowel  should  always  be  made  10  have  the  same 
sound:  and,  as'there  can  be  no  doubt  that  what  is  called  the  continent-il  method 
of  sounding  them  is  more  correct  than  that  which  prevails  lor  the  most  part  here, 
and  nearly  uni verbally  in  England,  it  is  here  recommended  that  that  method  be, 
as  well  as  may  be,  adopted. 

That  is, 

should  be  sounded  as  a  in  hat.  5  should  be  sounded  aso    in  tone. 

"  a  in  ah.  u  u  u    \nfull. 

"  e  in  let.  fi  "  "  "  oo  iiifoot. 

'•  a  in  mate.  au  "  u  ou  in  mouse. 

"  i  in  it.  ae  "  **  "  ay  in  ay  e. 

"  ee  in  meet.  oe  "  "  "  oi  in  toil. 

u  o  in  on. 

It  also  recommended  that  the  consonants  c  and  g  should  always  have  their 
hard  sound  given  them,  and  that,?  should  always  be  pronounced  as  y. 

An  admirable  little  book,  called  "Roman  Orthoepy,"1  by  Professor  E'chardson, 
of  Rocboster  University,  may,  with  great  profit,  be  consulted  on  this  subject. 
The  professor  is  not,  however,  responsible  for  the  choice  of  the  English  words 
used  above  to  illiterate  the  Litiin  sounds,  and  he  would  not  sanction  all  of  tln-m. 
But  the  above  tal.le  is.  believed  to  prtsent  a  series  which  admits  of  a  practically 
observable  difference  being  made  between  the  long  and  short  vowels:  and  one  o'r 
two  slight  iniccuracies  may  be  excused  if  th.s  be  the  case. 


PREFACE.  xiii 

and  on  the  next  they  should  parse  the  same  verb,  saying,  amo,  amare, 
amavl,  amdtum. 

(7.)  It  will  be  observed  that  the  Latin  reading  exercises  cease  at 
Lesson  GILT.  It  is  intended,  that  wlien  pupils  have  reached  that  point 
they  shall,  except  in  cases  of  unusual  proficiency,  begin  to  read  the 
Outlines  of  Roman  History,  which  will  be  found  immediately  before  the 
final  vocabulary.  There  is  constant  reference  therein  made  by  num- 
bers to  the  grammatical  principles  explained  in  the  previous  part  of  the 
book.  This  might  have  been  done  much  more  fully.  Little  more,  how- 
ever, is  intended  than  to  show  how  the  writer  wishes  that  little  history 
to  be  used  in  connection  with  the  rest  of  the  book.  The  references  will 
serve  to  keep  fresh  in  mind  the  rules  of  syntax1  before  explained,  while,  at 
the  same  time,  they  will  fulfil  the  best  uses  of  notes,  by  enabling  pupils, 
while  making  out  their  lessons,  to  ascertain  the  construction,  and  often 
the  meaning,  of  the  phrases  they  meet  with.  As  the  Latin  of  that  little 
history  is  in  general  very  good  and  simple,  it  is  believed  that  if  a  teacher 
has  the  courage  to  make  his  pupils  learn  the  whole  of  it  by  heart, 
though  he  may  thereby  spend  a  little  more  time  over  it  than  others,  he 
will  have  done  more  to  give  his  class  a  correct  and  living  sense  of  the 
genius  of  the  language,  and  to  facilitate  their  further  progress,  than  if 
he  made  them  commit  to  memory  the  whole  of  the  syntax  of  Andrews 
and  Stoddard's  Grammar. 


It  is  believed,  that  if  these  methods  be  adopted,  the  lessons  given  in 
this  book  will  seldom  be  found  too  long  for  a  single  recitation  by  a 
class  of  moderate  size.  But  if  the  teacher  finds  them  so,  he  may  best 
curtail  the  writing  exercise,  not  that  for  reading;  for  this  book  is  not 
intended  to  teach  the  art  of  Latin  composition.  If  he  have  not  time  to 
go  through  all  the  reading  sentences,  he  may  make  his  class  prepare  the 
whole,  and  then  take  up  as  many  sentences  as  he  has  time  for  in  any 
order.  It  should,  of  course,  always  be  understood,  that  the  object  of 
each  lesson  is  to  insure  and  to  give  evidence  of  a  complete  acquaintance, 
on  the  part  of  the  pupils,  with  all  the  facts  and  principles  theretofore 
spoken  of.  The  judicious  teacher  will  not  allow  himself  to  be  under 
the  tyranny  of  any  book,  but  will  shorten  or  lengthen  the  period  during 
which  a  class  is  kept  over  one  lesson,  according  to  the  proficiency  of 
the  average  of  the  members  of  it. 

The  above  suggestions  as  to  the  method  of  teaching  in  general,  and 
the  use  of  this  book,  are  offered  without  any  design  of  dictating  to 
teachers  whose  experience  may  have  provided  them  with  means  which 
they  deem  better.  But  the  writer  is  conscious  that  at  the  commence- 
ment of  his  own  career  as  a  teacher  he  would  have  accepted  with  grat- 
i'ude  any  such  hints.  Ho  has  a  keen  remembrance  of  labor  honestly 
and  earnestly  spent,  while  little  or  no  fruit  was  the  result,  because  it 


xir  PREFACE. 

was  not  judiciously  employed.  He  hopes,  therefore,  that  those  into 
whose  hands  this  book  may  come,  will  accept  these  suggestions  as  they 
are  offered;  that  is,  riot  as  being  absolutely  the  best,  but  as  being 
a  great  deal  better  than  others  which  the  writer  has  in  former  times 
acted  upou. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  length  of  this  preface  will  not  prevent  its  being 
read.  It  seemed  necessary,  in  putting  forth  a  book  which  has  so  many 
points  of  difference  from  its  predecessors,  to  speak  at  large  upon  these, 
and  to  anticipate  some  of  the  objections  which  may  be  made  to  it. 

It  only  remains  for  the  writer  to  express  his  obligations  to  previous 
laborers  in  the  same  field.  He  is  particularly  indebted  to  Robsoris 
Constructive  Latin  Exercises ;  and  he  has  had  constantly  in  his  hands 
the  Latin  Grammars  of  Key,  Kiihntr,  Madvig,  Zumpt,  and  Billroth.  He 
has  besides  to  acknowledge  much  aid  and  many  valuable  suggestions 
from  his  friends  and  coadjutors,  Mr.  R.  Holden,  M.  A.,  and  Mr.  \V.  M. 
Ferriss,  M.  A. 

Since  a  large  part  of  the  present  work  was  stereotyped,  the  writer 
observed  an  announcement  in  one  of  the  London  papers  of  a  forthcoming 
Latin  book  by  Dr.  TV.  Smith,  the  editor  of  the  Classical  Dictionaries.  &c., 
which  is  to  bear  the  same  name  as  the  present  work.  As  the  name 
chosen  for  this  book  was  selected  because  it  was  thought  to  be  reason- 
ably expressive  of  its  character,  it  has  not  been  deemed  either  necessary 
or  expedient  to  change  it. 

TRINITY  SCHOOL,  NEW  YORK,  Dec.  3,  1859. 


CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION xxi 

I.  Nominative  and  accusative  cases  sin- 
gular.     Active  person-endings         .       X 
II.  Changes  of  guttural  and  dental  stems 

before  *  ...  .4 

IV.   Changes  of  letters  in  the  stems  before 

syllabic  endings       ....       6 
V.  Stems   which  do  not  take  the  ending 

S  to  make  the  nominative  singular  .       7 
VI.  Compound  words.     List  of  prefixes    .       9 
VII.  Conjugation  of  the  present  imperfect 

tense,  indicative  mood.     .         .         .11 
VIII.  Adjectives.     Doctrine  of  Agreement  .     13 
IX.  Past  imperfect  tense  .         .         .         .15 
X.    Nominative  and  accusative  cases  plu- 
ral           17 

XII.  Formation  and  use  of  adverbs  .  .20 

XIV.  Nominative   and   accusative   cases   of 

neuter  nouns    .         .         .         .          .23 
XV.  Future  imperfect  tense        .         .         .24 
XIX.  Prepositions.      List   of  those    which 

govern  an  accusative        .         .         .29 
XX.  Statement  of  the  chief  uses  of  the  ac- 
cusative case  .         .         .  .30 
XXI.  General  meaning  and  uses  of  the  gen- 
itive case         .         .        .         .         .32 
XXII.  Formation  of  the  genitive  case  singu- 
lar and  plural  .         .         .         .         .33 


xvi  CONTEXTS. 


XXIX.   General  meaning  and  uses  of  the  dative 

ease         ......     41 

XXX.  Formation  of  the  dative  case  singular 

and  plural        .         .         .         .          .43 

XXX  Y.   General  meaning  and  uses  of  the  abla- 
tive case.    List  of  preposition*  which 
govern  the  ablative  .         .         .48 

XXXVI.  Formation  of  the  ablative  case  singu- 

lar and  plural  .         .         .         .50 

XXXVIII.    Vocative  case     .....     52 

XXXIX.  Degrees  of  comparison       .        .         .53 
XL.  Adjectives  compared  irregularly          .     56 
XLII.  Comparison  of  adverbs       .         .         .57 
XL11I.  The  three  imperfect  tenses  indicative 

of  the  verb  es-         .          .          .         .58 

XLIV.  Genitive  and  dative  of  the  f>ossessor. 

Dative  of  the  end  .         .         .         .60 

XLV.   Comparative  degree  followed  by  quam 

or  by  the  ablative   .         .         .         .61 

XL  VI.  Perfect  tenses,  particularly  of  the  ac- 

tive voice         .....     62 

XLVII.  Present  perfect  or  aorist.    Second  stem 

made  by  the  ending  -V  .         .         .65 
XLVIII.  Compound  sentences.     Conjunctions  .     66 
XL1X.  Pronouns:   particularly  the   personal 

and  possessive  pronouns  .         .         .68 
LT.  Second  stem  made  by  the  ending  u    .     71 
L1I.  Demonstrative  pronouns.     Declension 

of  ho-.     Apposition         .         .         .72 
LIII.  Second  stem  made  by  the  ending  s     .     74 
L1V.  Declension  of  illo-,  and  isto-       .         .     76 
LV.   7/0-,  and  illo-,  used  for  "  the  latter," 

"the  former"  ...  .77 

LVI.  Second  stern  made  by  reduplication    .     78 
LVII.  logical  pronouns.    Declension  of  eo-   .     79 
LVIII.  Second  stem  made  by  lengthening  the 

root-vowel       .         .         .         .          .81 

L1X.  Declension  of  ev-dem  .  .     82 

LX.  Second  stem  the  same  as  the  first        .     83 


CONTENTS.  xvii 

LFSSON  PAGK 

LXI.  Secondary  sentences,  particularly  ad- 
jectival sentences.    Declension  of  the 
relative  pronoun  quo-       .         .          .84 
LXITI.  Perfect  tenses  of  es-  .         .         .         .     8J3 
LXIV.  Adverbial  sentences     .         .         .         .88 
LXVI.  Conjugation  of  potes-,  and  prodes-      .     91 
LXV1I.  Meaning  of  the  passive  voice.     Pas- 
sive person-endings.    Conjugation  of 
the  imperfect. tenses  passive.     Abla- 
tive of  the  agent      .         .         .         .92 
LXIX.  Participles;    particularly   the  perfect 

participle  passive     .         .         .         .96 

LXX.  Ablative  absolute         .         .         .         .97 

LXXI.  Perfect  passive  tenses          .         .         .99 

LXX  1 1 1.  Deponent  verbs 101 

LXXVI.  Historical  present.    Passive  verbs  used 

impersonally  .         .         .         .         .105 
LXX  VI 1 1.  Imperfect  participle  active        .         .106 
LXXX.  The  injinitive  mood :  its  general  use, 

and  forms         .         .         .         .         .110 
LXXXI.  Tenses  of  the  infinitive.     Semi-depo- 
nent verbs 112 

LXXXTT.  Nominal  sentences.     Nominal   asser- 
tions       .         .         .         .         .         .114 

LXXXIII.  Use  of  the  genitive  case  to  denote  a 

-point  of  character  .         .         .         .117 

LXXXVII.  Interrogative    sentences.      Fact-ques- 
tions       .         .         .         .         .         .119 

LXXXVIII.   Word-questions.      Interrogative    pro- 
nouns     .         .         .         .         .         .121 

XC.  Declension  of  utro-,  alio-,  &c.     .         .123 
XCI.  Imperative   sentences.     The  forms  of 

the  imperative  mood         .         .          .124 
XCTT.  Use  of  the  present  imperative    .         .  126  \ 
XCIII.  Use  of  the  future  imperative    .         .  127  / 
XCIV.  Form  and  use  of  the  gerund       .         .128 
XCVI.  Employment  of  the  gerundive  for  the 

gerund 130 


iii  CONTEXTS. 

LWBOW  PAvJB 

XCXV'llI.  Use  of  the  gerundive  with  es-,  to  de- 
note obligation       .         .         .         .133 
XCIX.  Impersonal  use  of  the  gerundive  with 

es- 135 

CI.  Supines.    Use  of  the  accusative  su- 

pine         .         .         .         .         .         .137 

CII.  Use  of  the  ablative  supine.     Future 

infinitive  passive      .         .          .         .138 

CIV.  General  use  and  forms  of  the  subjunc- 
tive mood 141 

CV.  Tables  illustrative  of  the  relations  of 
various   sorts  of  sentences,  and  of 
the  use  of  the  moods       .         .         .145 
CVI.  The  subjunctive  in  secondary  senten- 
ces.    Final  sentences        .         .         .148 
CVIII.    Consecutive  sentences  .         .         .151 

CX.  Future  infinitive  expressed  by  fore  ut 

with  the  subjunctive         .          .         .153 
CXI.  Subjunctive  after  quo-minus,  &c.          .  154 
CXII.  Subjunctive  after  qu~m  .         .155 

CXIV.  Subjunctive  in   adjectival  consecutive 

sentences          .         .         .         .         .156 
CXYI.  Subjunctive  in  descriptive  sentences     .  158 
CXVII.    Causal  sentence s  (adjectival)       .         .158 
CXVIII.  Causal  sentences  (adverbial)        .         .   159 
CX1X.    Temporal  sentences     ....  160 
CXX.  Latin  equivalents  for  participial  ex- 
pressions .         .         .         .         .162 
CXXTT.  Nominal  questions     .         .         .         .164 
CXX111.  Disjunctive    questions,   principal    and 

nominal   .         .         ,          .         .         .165 
CXXIV.  Nominal  commands  ....  166 
CXXV.  Subjunctive   used  for   the   imperative 

in  principal  commands     .         .         .167 
CXX VI.  Other  uses  of  the  subjunctive  in  prin- 
cipal sentences         .         .         .          .    ] 68 
CXXVIII.  Subjunctive    in    secondary   sentences, 

attached  to  nominal  ones,  <fcc.          .   170 
CXXJX.   Of  the  ordtio  obl'iqua         .         .         .171 


CONTENTS.  xix 

PAGE 

CXXXl.  The  irregular  verbs  vol-,  nol-,  mdl-     .   174 
CXXX i I.  The  irregular  verb  fer-        .         .         r  176 
CXXXUL  The  irregular  verbs/-  and  i-        .          .178 
CXXX  IV.  Nominal    questions    of  the   first    and 

third  persons  .         .         .         .         .179 
CXXX  VI.   The  indicative  mood  in  secondary  sen- 
tences in  ordtio  obUqua  .        .         .181 
CXXX VII.  Impersonal  verbs  of  feeling       .         .182 
CXXXIX.  The  impersonal  verbs  lice-  and  libe-     .   184 
CXL.  The  impersonal  verbs  dece-  and  oporte-  185 
CXLL  The    impersonal    verbs    interes-    and 

refer- .186 

CXLIII.   Of  conditional  propositions       .         .188 
CXLVI1F.  The  indefinite  pronoun  quo-        .         .192 
CXL  IX.   The  other  indefinite  pronouns,  partic- 
ularly quo-que          .         .         .         .193 
CL.  The  indefinite  pronouns  quo-vis  and 

quo-libet          .         .         .         .         .195 

CLI.  The  indefinite  pronoun  quo-dam         .   196 

CL1I.  The  indefinite  pronoun  aliquo-    .         .197 

CLIII.  The  indefinite  pronoun  quo-quam        .   198 

Tables  of  declensions          .         .         .200 

Outlines  of  Roman  History         .         .   209 

Vocabulary        .         .         .         .         .235 

Synopsis  of  the  Latin  Conjugations,        282 


INTRODUCTION. 


IT  is  intended  in  this  introduction  to  give  some  simple 
statements  on  points  of  general  grammar,  a  perfect  ac- 
quaintance with  which  is  taken  for  granted  in  this  book. 
There  are  also  included  in  it  remarks  on  some  of  the  pe- 
culiarities of  the  Latin  language,  which,  as  being  of  gen- 
eral application,  it  has  been  thought  desirable  to  insert 
here,  rather  than  to  disperse  them  through  the  book. 
The  statements  which  are  here  made  are,  it  will  be  seen, 
very  brief  and  they  are  not  enforced  by  examples  and  illus- 
trations :  as  it  is  thought  that  for  many  pupils  who  com- 
mence the  study  of  Latin  such  elucidation  of  these  sim- 
ple principles  would  be  needless ;  while,  for  the  rest,  the 
judicious  teacher  will  find  in  the  first  half-dozen  English 
exercises  ample  material  for  his  use  in  illustrating  what  is 
here  said.  The  study  of  the  euphonic  changes  in  Latin 
consonants  and  vowels  may  be  deferred  till  the  pupil  has 
reached  the  sixth  lesson. 

1.  A  sentence  is  a  thought  expressed  in  words. 

2.  Words  are  of  various  kinds,  or  may  be  arranged  in 
different  classes,  according  to  the  parts  they  are  fitted  to 
play  in  a  sentence.     These  classes  are  called  " parts  of 
speech"     We   shall   only   mention   the   three   principal 
classes  here. 

3.  A  noun  is  a  word  which  names  something.     This  is 
called  in  the  grammars  "  a  noun  substantive,"  but  is  in 
this  book  called  "  a  noun,"  simply. 


xxii  INTRODUCTION. 

4.  A  verb  is  a  word  which  asserts  something ;  or  which 
tells  what  things  do  or  suffer. 

5.  An  adjective  is  a  word  which  describes  something ; 
or  which  tells  the  quality  of  things. 

6.  &.  proposition  is  a  sentence  which  contains  an  asser- 
tion. 

7.  Every  proposition  consists  of  two  parts,  a  subject 
and  a  predicate. 

8.  The  subject  is  that  about  which  the  assertion  is 
made. 

9.  The  predicate  is  all  that  which  is  asserted. 

10.  An  active  verb  is  one  which  asserts  that  the  subject 
does  an  action;  as,  "I  run." 

11.  A  static  verb  is  one  which  asserts  that  the  subject 
is  in  some  state;  as,  "the  boy  sleeps." 

12.  With  all  active  verbs  the  subject  marks  the  quar- 
ter from  which  the  action  proceeds. 

13.  The  object  is  that  towards  which  an  action  is  di- 
rected. 

14.  In  English  we  know  which  noun  is  to  be  regarded 
as  the  subject  of  a  sentence  by  its  position  before  the  verb' 
and  which  is  to  be  regarded  as  the  object  by  its  position 
after  the  verb. 

15.  In  Latin  we  know  which  noun  is  to  be  regarded  as 
the  subject  and  which  as  the  object  by  particular  endings 
attached  to  the  nouns,  which  are  thus  fitted  for  taking 
each  place. 


INTRODUCTION.  xxiii 

1 6.  A  Latin  word  before  it  is  fit  to  take  a  place  in  a 
sentence  is  called  a  stem;  and  if  the  word  be  a  noun,  it 
is  called  a  noun-stem. 

17.  A  noun  or  adjective  when  it  is  fitted  to  take  its 
place  in  a  sentence,  is  said  to  be  in  a  case. 

18.  When  a  noun  has  had  the  ending  attached  to  it 
which  fits  it  to  stand  as  the  subject,  it  is  said  to  be  in  the 
nominative  case. 

1 9.  When  a  noun  has  had  the  ending  attached  to  it 
which  fits  it  to  stand  as  the  object,  it  is  said  to  be  in  the 
accusative  case. 

20.  The  nominative  case,  then,  with  an  active  verb, 
marks  the  quarter  from  which  the  action  proceeds. 

21.  The  accusative  case,  with  an  active  verb,  marks  the 
quarter  towards  which  the  action  proceeds. 

The  following  illustration  may  perhaps  be  useful  in 
impressing  these  latter  statements  on  the  .minds  of  the 
pupils. 

The  arrow  denotes  the  action  of  a  verb. 

Subject  (nominative) >    Object  (accusative). 

22.  The  stems  of  nouns  and  verbs  end  of  course  either 
in  one  of  the  five  vowels,  a,  e,  i,  o,  u,  or  in  a  consonant ; 
and   stems   are    called  in   this   book    a-stems,   e-stems, 
i-stems,  o-stems,  w-stems,  or  consonant-stews,  according 
to  the  letter  in  which  they  end. 

23.  Verbs  are  said  to  be  in  either  the  first,  the  second, 
or  the  third  person. 

24.  If  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  the  person  speaking, 
— i.  e.,  if  the  subject  asserts  something  about  himself — 
the  verb  is  said  to  be  in  the  first  person;  and  in  English 
is  marked  by  the  word  I  or  -we  before  it. 


xxi?  INTRODUCTION. 

25.  If  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  the  person  spoken  to, 
the  verb  is  said  to  be  in  the  second  person .  •  and  in  Eng- 
lish is  marked  by  the  word  thou,  or  you,  or  ye,  before  it. 

26.  If  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  not  either  the  person, 
speaking  or  the  person  spoken  to,  the  verb  is  said  to  be 
in  the  third  person ;  and  in  English  is  marked  by  the 
word  he,  or  she,  or  it,  or  they,  or  any  noun  before  it. 

27.  Verbs  are  said  to  be  either  in  the  singular  or  the 
plural  number. 

28.  If  the  subject  is  only  one  person  or  thing,  the  verb 
is  said  to  be  in  the  singular  number. 

29.  If  the  subject  is  more  than  one  person  or  thing,  the 
verb  is  said  to  be  in  the  plural  number. 

30.  Tenses  are  those  forms  which  verbs  take  in  order 
to  mark  the  different  times,  in  reference  to  which  asser- 
tions are  made. 

31.  If  the  assertion  is  made  in  reference  to  present  time 
(as  to-day),  the  verb  is  said  to  be  in  a  present  tense. 

32.  If  the  assertion  is  made  in  reference  to  past  time 
(as  yesterday],  the  verb  is  said  to  be  in  a  past  tense. 

33.  If  the  assertion  is  made  in  reference  to  future  time 
(as  to-morrow),  the  verb  is  said  to  be  in  &  future  tense. 

34.  Actions  or  states  may  be  described  as  either  fin- 
ished, unfinished,  or  intended. 

35.  If  the  verb  asserts  a  finished  action  or  state,  it  is 
said  to  be  in  a  perfect  tense. 

36.  If  the  verb  asserts  an  unfinished  action  or  state,  it 
is  said  to  be  in  an  imperfect  tense. 


INTRODUCTION". 


acxr 


37.  If  the  verb  asserts  an  intended  action  or  state,  it  13 
said  to  be  in  an  intended  tense. 

[The  following  diagram  (borrowed,  with  slight  alterations,  from 
Key's  Grammar)  may  assist  the  teacher  in  making  his  pupils  under- 
stand the  way  in  which  these  words  are  combined  to  form  names  for 
the  tenses  of  the  Latin  verb. 

The  vertical  lines  denote  respectively,  y  (yesterday)  past  time,  n 
(now)  present  time,  and  £  (to-morrow)  future  time.  The  horizontal  lines 
de  note  actions — if  the  horizontal  line  crosses  one  of  the  vertical  ones 
it  denotes  an  unfinished  (imperfect)  action  ;  if  it  lies  to  the  left  of  it,  a 
finished  action,  if  to  the  right,  an  intended  one. 


pf 


pf.- 


imp. 


imp.- 


imp. 


iiit- 


irit.- 


irti.- 


F. 


xxvi  INTRODUCTION. 


pf.  denotes  an  action  finished  at  a  past  time,  past  perfect  tense. 
imp.  "         "        "       unfinished       "         "      past  imperfect  teiise. 
iilt.      "        "        "       iutended         "         "  ,  past  intended  tense. 


pf.          "         •'        "        finished  at- present  time,  present  perfect  tense. 
imp.       "         "        "        unfinished        "         "      present  imperfect  tense. 
int.        "         "        "        intended          "         "      present  intended  tertse. 

pf.         u         "        "        finished  at  a  future  time,  future  perfect  tense, 
imp.      "         "        "        unfinished       "         "      future  imperfect  tense, 
int.        "         "        "        intended          "         "      future  intended  tense 

A  denotes  an  action  occurring  at  some  indefinite  point  of  past  time. 
Aorist  tense. 

F  denotes  an  action  occurring  at  some  indefinite  point  of  future  time. 
Future  tense. 

N.  B.  Professor  Key  says  that  what  is  called  in  this  book  the  future 
imperfect  tense  is  really  always  &  future  indefinite.^ 

38.  Nouns  are  said  to  be  of  one  or  other  of  three  gen- 
ders,  masculine,  feminine,  or  neuter. 

39.  If  a  noun  denote  a  thing  of  the  male  kind,  it  is  said 
to  be  of  the  masculine  gender. 

40.  If  a  noun  denote  a  thing  of  the  female  kind,  it  is 
said  to  be  of  the  feminine  gender. 

41.  If  a  noun  denote  a  thing  of  neither  the  male  nor 
the  female  kind,  it  is  said  to  be  of  the  neuter  gender. 

42.  In  Latin  this  proper  and  natural  distinction  is  not 
thoroughly   observed.      Many   nouns    are   masculine   or 
feminine  which  denote  neither  male  nor  female  animals. 
And  so  the  following  rules  had  best  be  learned  by  heart 
at  once. 


INTRODUCTION.  xxvii 

43.  The  following  classes  of  nouns  are  for  the  most 
part  masculine. 

(a)  Nouns   denoting  male  animals,  rivers,  winds, 

months. 

(b)  Nouns  whose   stems  end  in  ll   (generally  til), 

OH,  Or  (generally  tor). 

44.  The  following  classes  of  nouns  are  for  the  most 
part  feminine. 

(a)  Nouns  denoting  female  animals,  countries,  trees. 

(b)  Nouns  whose  stems  end  in  a,  e,  ion,  on,  lit, 

tat,  trie.* 

45.  The  following  classes  of  nouns  are  for  the  most 
part  neuter. 

Nouns  whose  stems  end  in  eilto,  en,  es,  OS. 

46.  Nouns  which  are  found  used  both  as  masculine  and 
feminine  are  called  eoillllion. 

47.  All  nouns  whose  gender  is  not  determinable  by  the 
above  rules  are  marked  in  the  vocabularies  m.  (masculine), 
/.  (feminine),  n.  (neuter). 


*  Nouns  with  i-stems  are  mostly  feminine,  but  the  exceptions  are 
numerous.  Professor  Key  gives  the  following  acrostic  to  assist  the 
memory : 

M  asculini     generis     crtrri- 

A  mni-*     axi-     funi-*     flni-* 

S  enti-*     dent(i)-    calli-*    colli- 

C  auli-     fasci-     fusti-     folli- 

U  tri-     ventri-     vermi-     assi- 

L  eni-     posti-     torri-     cassi- 

I  gni-     iinbri-     pisci-     pont(i)- 

N  atali-     vec'ti-     font(i)-     mout(i)- 

E  nsi-     mensi-     pfmi-     orbi- 

S  augui-     angui-*     ungui-     corbi-. 

*  Many  e'en  of  the.fie,  as  f  mi- 
Are  also  generis  fOminlm. 


xxviii  INTRODUCTION. 

48.  The  vowels  of  Latin  words   arc  said  to  be  either 
long  or  short.     This  is  called  their  "  quantity" 

49.  A  long  vowel  is  one  which  is  pronounced  slowly  and 
fully,  and  is  considered  to  occupy  twice  as  much  time  in 
pronunciation  as  a  short  vowel  does. 

50.  All  diphthongs  are  long — except  these  all  the  long 
vowels  in  the  Latin  words  which  occur  in  this  book  are 
distinguished  by  the  mark  (-)  over  them. 

51.  A  syllable  maybe  long  for  purposes  of  versification, 
though  the  vowel  it  contains  be   short,  if  the  vowel  be 
followed  by  two  consonants  which  are  not  sounded  to- 
gether.    Such  syllables  are  said  to  be  long  by  position  ; 
but  the  vowels  in  them  are  not  marked  as  long  in  this 
book. 

52.  When   stems  are   inflected   or  different  parts    of 
words  are  joined  together  to  make  new  words  (compound 
or  derivative  words),  very  often  the  letters  of  one  or  both 
parts  experience  some  changes.     As  these   changes  are 
made  with  a  view  of  rendering  the  word  more  easy  to 
say  and  more  pleasant  to  hear,  they  are  called  euphonic 
(i.  e.,  well-sounding)  changes.     We  will  speak  first  of  the 
changes  which  the  vowels  undergo. 

53.  If  the  vowels  are  considered  in  regard  to  the  amount 
of  effort  which  is  made  to  sound  them,  or  as  to  the  quan- 
tity of  sound  they  represent,  it  will  be  found  that  they 
follow  one  another  in  this  order,  e,  e,  a,  o,  w,  the  first  of 
these  being  the  lightest  and  the  last  the  heaviest.     It  is 
of  course  here  taken  for  granted  that  the  vowels  have  the 
sounds  given  them  which  are  recommended  in  the  preface 
to  this  book,  and  are  not  pronounced  after  the  ordinary 
English  manner. 


54.  One  very  common  change  which  words  experience 
in  inflection  or  derivation  is  the  substitution  of  a  lighter 


INTRODUCTION.  xxix 

vowel  for  a  heavier  voicel,  when  the  addition  of  a  syllable 
renders  it  difficult  to  give  the  distinct  sound  of  the  orig- 
inal vowel.  Instances  of  this  occur  in  the  4th  lesson, 
where  it  is  seen  that  when  the  accusative-ending  em  is 
added  to  such  words  as  m'tlet-,  the  e  of  the  stem  is  changed 
to  the  lighter  vowel  i.  It  will  be  felt  at  once  that  it  is 
easier  to  say  mil-item  than  nittetem,  and  that  in  pronouncing 
such  words  rapidly  the  voice  naturally  gives  the  lightest 
possible  sound  to  the  middle  syllable. 

55.  This  general  principle  will  account  for  very  many 
changes  of  vowels. 

Thus,  instead  of  con-fac(i)-  we  have  con-fic(i}-. 
"          "          re-statu-  "     "     re-stitu-. 

"          "         princepem        "     "    principem. 
"          "          homonem         "     "     hominem. 
"          "          caputa  "     "     capita. 

"          "         tetagit  "     "     tetigit. 

56.  But   observe  that  if  the   vowel  which   is   to  be 
changed  is  followed  by  the  letter  r,  it  usually  passes  into 
e  instead  of  into  of  i. 

Thus,  for  peparit       we  have  peperit,     not  pepirit. 

"    conspargo     "     "     consperyo,  "  conspirgo. 

57.  Another  common  change  of  vowels  is  the  substitu- 
tion of  i  for  the  diphthong  ae. 

Thus,  for  occaedit        we  find  occidit. 

"   illaedo  "       ittido. 

58.  There  is  a  frequent  interchange  of  o  and  u. 

Thus,  from  col-  we  get  culto-. 

"      robor-  "       robitr. 

59.  The  changes  which  consonants  undergo  are  very 
frequent  and  important.     In  order  that  they  may  be  un- 
derstood, the  tables  given  in  61  and  68  must  be  carefully 
studied. 


xxx  INTRODUCTION. 

60.  The  consonants  are  divided  into  two  main  classes, 
mutes  and  fgmtaotoelff,  the  mutes  being  those  which  re- 
quire the  greatest  exertion  of  the  vocal  organs  for  their 
articulation. 

61.  The  mutes  are  classified  in  the  following  way: 

ORDERS. 


soft.  hard.  aspirated. 

Gutturals.         g  c  (k,  qu)          h 

CLASSES.  <(  Dentals.  d  t 

Labials.  b  p  f 

62.  The  three  classes  are  named  from  the  part  of  the 
vocal  organs  which  is  principally  concerned  in  their  pro- 
duction— the  Gutturals  being  £/jr0#Metters,  the  Dentals, 
fce^A-letters,  and  the  Labials,  ^>letters. 

63.  The  division  into  orders  has  reference  to  the  effort 
which  is  required  for  their  proper  articulation. 

64.  We  have  rules  which  govern  the  combination  of 
mutes  based  upon  each  of  these  classifications. 

65.  Mutes  of  different  classes  are  not  allowed  to  stand 
together  unless  the   second  be  a  dental.     But  when  in 
composition  there  would  be  such  a  combination,  the  first 
mute  is  generally  changed  into  the  second. 

Thus,  ob-cid-        (L.  G.^     becomes  oc-cid- 
ad-cid-       (D.  G.)  "        ac-cid- 

ad-ger-       (D.  G.)  "        ag-ger- 


sug-ger- 
ap-plaud- 


sub-ger-  (L.  G. 

ad-plaud-  (D.  L. 

ad-fic-  (D.  L. 

ec-Jic-  (G.  L.  "        tf-fio 

66.  When  mutes  are  thus  allowed  to  stand  together 


INTRODUCTION.  xxxi 

they  must  be  of  the  same  order  •  and  so  also  when  a 
guttural  or  labial  stands  before  a  dental;  that  is,  both 
mutes  must  be  hard,  both  soft,  or  both  aspirated.  The 
examples  in  the  preceding  section  are  instances  of  this. 
The  following  exhibit  the  same  law,  but  the  second  mate 
being  a  dental  letters  of  different  classes  may  stand  to- 
gether. 

ad-trah-  (s.  H.)  becomes  attrah     (n.  H.' 

scrib-to-  (s.  H.|  "        scrip-to-  (n.  H. 

reg-to-  (s.  n.\  "        rec-to-      (H.  H. 

veh-to  (A.  H.)  "        vec-to-     (H.  u. 

\  /  \ 

67.  The  prefixes  sub  and  ob  were  originally  subs*  obs  ; 
and  when  they  are  prefixed  to  words  beginning  with  one 
of  the  hard  mutes  the  letter  b  is  generally  dropped. 

Thus,  for   sub-dp-  we  find     sus-cip-. 

"     obs-tend  "          os-tend-. 

"     subs-pende-  "          sus-pende-. 

68.  The  semi-vowels  may  be  arranged  in  the  following 
classes  and  orders : 

ORDERS. 


Liquids.  Spirants. 
(  Gutturals.             r  j 

CLASSES.  •<  Dentals.  1,  n  s 

(  Labials.  m  v 


69.  The  liquids  are  so  named  because  they  easil 
together  and  combine  with  the  mutes  to  form  one  sound. 

70.  The  spirants  derive  their  name  from  the  continuity 
of  breath  with  which  they  are  sounded. 

71.  Since  n  is  a  dental  sound  and  m  a  labial,  when  n 
comes  before  a  labial  it  is  changed  to  m. 

Thus,      for  in-pet-  we  have       im-pet-. 

"    in-belli-  "  im-belli-. 


xxxii  INTRODUCTION. 

72.  Before  another  liquid,  n  is  assimilated  (/.  e.,  changed 
into  the  same  letter  as  that  which  follows  it). 

Thus,       for  in-muni-  we  find     im-mani. 

"  cor-rip-. 


73.  The  labial  mutes  before  s  generally  become  p. 
Tims,      for  scribsl  we  have      scrips!. 

74.  The  guttural  mutes  with  s  always  become  x. 

Thus,  for  gregs.  we  have      grex. 

•'   tey-n  "  tert. 

75.  The  dental  mutes  before  s  are  either  dropped,  or 
assimilated  to  s. 

Thus,          for  dents  we  have      d<-"ns. 

"   mit-so-  "  mis-so-. 


The  foregoing  remarks  upon  the  changes  of  vowels 
and  consonants  are  of  course  very  incomplete.  The  most 
that  is  designed  is  to  give  the  pupil  an  opportunity  of  be- 
coming familiar,  at  this  early  stage  of  his  progress,  with 
some  of  the  commonest  and  most  general  laws.  Fuller 
information  must  be  sought  for  in  systematic  grammars. 


LIST  OF  ABBREVIATIONS  USED  IN  THIS  BOOK. 


Abl stands  for  ablative. 

A.  or  ace accusative. 

adv adverb. 

c common;  i.  e.,  masculine  or  feminine. 

conj conjunction. 

D.  or  dat dative. 

dep deponent. 

f.  or  fern feminine. 

fut future. 

G.  or  gen genitive. 

imperat imperative. 

imperf.   imperfect. 

indie indicative. 

inftn infinitive. 

m.  or  masc   masculine. 

n.  or  neut neuter. 

n.  or  nom nominative. 

part  or  partic participle. 

perf, perfect. 

pi.  or  plur plural. 

prep preposition. 

pres present. 

S.  or4  sing singular. 

semi-dep semi-deponent. 

subj subjunctive. 

subjunc subj  unction. 

Y.  or  voc vocative. 

implies  the  repetition  in  that  place  of 
the  form  underneath  which  it  stands. 

implies  that  the  second  stem  of  a  verb 
is  the  same  as  the  first. 


2—''—. 


In  the  exercises — 

English  words  joined  by  hyphens  are  to  be  translated  by  one  Latin 
word. 

English  words  in  parentheses  are  not  to  be  translated. 

Latin  words  in  parentheses  are  to  be  used  for  the  English  words  after 
which  they  stand. 


PRINCIPIA   LATINA. 


LESSON    I. 

1  .  The  cases  of  Latin  nouns  are  formed  by  attaching 
various  endings  to  the  stems  of  the  nouns.  Thus,  for  the 

Q.       ,      j  nominative,    add  the  ending  s. 
>mguiar,  j  accusative^  «  u      m  or  em> 

This  is  the  general  rule  for  these  cases  :  the  exceptions 
and  variations  will  be  pointed  out  in  the  following  lessons. 
But  it  must  here  be  noted  that 

(1)  the  ending  em  is  used  for  consonant-stems  only. 
o  usually  becomes  u  in  the 


ace.  sng. 

Thus,  from  the  nom.  sing.     ace.  sing. 

o-stem  servo-  we  have  servus,  servum. 
w-stem  vultit-  "  vultus,  vultum. 
fc-stem  navi-  "  navis,  navem. 

consonant-stem  hiem-  "         hiems,         hiemem. 

2.  The  persons  of  the  verb  are  made  in  the  same  way 
by  attaching  endings  to  the  stems  of  the  verbs.  The 
following  table  gives  the  endings  opposite  to  the  persons 
which  they  make. 

Persons.  Endings. 

1.  I.  Ill     or     p. 

Singular,  ^  2.  thou  or  you.  -s       "      is. 

3.  he,  she,  or  it.  t       "      it. 

1.  we.  -mus  or  Iiiius. 

Plural,     -{  2.  ye  or  you.  -tis       "  itis. 

3.  they.  nt        "  lint 

As  at  present  the  third  person  singular  only  will  be 
introduced  in  the  exercises,  it  is  necessary  to  give  ex- 


2  LESSON  L  [2. 

amples  here  of  that  person  only  ;  but  it  must  be  partic- 
ularly observed  at  once  that  the  ending  it  is  to  be  used 
only  for  consonant-stems  and  w-stems. 

Thus,  from  the  3 d.  person  sing. 

o-stem  ama-  we  have  amat. 
6-stem  mone-         "       monet. 
i-stem  audi-          "       audit. 
co nsonan  Astern  reg-  "       regit. 

system  minu-         "       minuit. 

It  will  be  best  for  the  pupils  at  once  to  learn  by  heart 
both  the  columns  of  person-endings  given  above ;  and 
the  teacher  will  observe  that  the  mark  (-)  placed  before 
three  of  the  endings  in  the  first  column  means  that 
the  addition  of  those  endings  makes  the  vowels  a,  e,  and 
i  long. 

Before  commencing  the  following  exercise,  it  must  be 
understood  that — 

(1)  There  is  no  article  in  Latin. 

(2)  In  general,  the  order  of  words  in  Latin  sentences  is 
different  from  that  used  in  English,  the  verb  commonly 
standing  at  the  end  of  the  sentence. 

(3)  All  the  long  vowels  in  the  Latin  words  which  fol- 
low have  the  long  mark  (—)  of  quantity  placed  over  them. 
All  the  other  vowels  are  to  be  pronounced  short. 

(4)  The  verbs  are  printed  in  italics  in  the  first  column 
of  the  vocabularies,  and  in  Roman  letters  in  the  second. 


EXERCISE  1. 


1.  The  citizen  sees  the  house.  2.  The  army  conquers  the  state. 
3.  The  horse  drinks  the  water.  4.  The  dog  frightens  the  mare.  5. 
The  foal  goes-to  (its)  friend.  6.  The  son  cultivates  friendship.  7.  The 
slave  seeks-for  love.  8.  The  horse  preserves  the  fugitive.  9.  The 
attack  frightens  the  deserter.  10.  The  storm  throws  down  the  tower. 
11.  The  dog  bites  the  foal.  12.  The  tower  confines  the  prisoner. 
13.  The  garden  pleases  the  farmer.  14.  Culture  polishes  the  soul.  15. 
The  messenger  takes  the  letter.  16.  The  citizen  flees-from  the  dog. 


2.]  LESSON  I.                                            3 

army,  exercitu-  letter,  epistola- 
attack,  impetu-  love,  ama- 
We,  morde-  love,  amor- 
citizen,  clvi;  c.  lover,  amdtor- 
confine,  coerce-  mare,  equa- 
conquer,  vine-  messenger,  nuntio-,  m. 
cultivate,  col-  nymph,  nympha- 
culture,  cultu-  please,  delecta- 
daughter,  fllia-  polish,  poli- 
deserter,  perfuga-  preserve,  serva- 
dog,  cani-,  c.  prisoner,  captlvo-,  m. 
drink,  bib-  see,  vide- 
farmer,  agricola-  seek  for,  quaer- 
fl?e  from,  fug(i)-  slave,  servo-,  m. 
foal,  equuto-  Bon,fllio- 
friend,  amlco-,  m.  soul,  animo-,  m. 
friendship,  amlcitia-  state,  civitdt- 
frighten,  terre-  storm,  hiem-,  f. 
fugitive,  fugitivo-,  m.  take,  cap(i)- 
garden,  horto-,  m.  throw  doivn,  dejic(i)- 
go-to,  pet-  tower,  turri-,  f. 
horse,  equo-  water,  aqua- 
house,  domu-,  f.  wood,  silva- 

NOTE. — The  verbs  in  the  vocabularies  printed  like  cap(i)-,  belong 
partly  to  the  class  of  f-stems  and  partly  to  that  of  consonant-stems ;  their 
peculiarities  will  be  mentioned  further  on.  The  pupils  had  best  read 
such  stems  thus  :  cap  or  capi;  and  all  they  need  attend  to  now  is  this, 
that  all  the  letters  printed  are  to  be  used,  unless  particular  directions  to 
the  contrary  are  given. 


EXERCISE  2. 

1.  Hortus  nympham  delectat.  2.  Animus  cultum  amat.  3.  Turns 
civem  servat.  4.  Fllius  canem  quaerit.  5.  Exercitus  aquam  videt. 
6.  Equulus  equam  petit.  7.  Impetus  civem  terret.  8.  Equus  filiam 
delectat.  9.  Amicus  canem  capit.  10.  Canis  amatorem  mordet.  11. 
Nuntius  hortum  colit.  12.  Fugitivus  silvam  petit.  13.  Hiems  perfu- 
gam  terret.  14.  Pilius  agricolam  servat.  15.  Servus  equam  quaerit. 
16.  Captivus  equam  capit. 


LESSON  IL  [3. 


LESSON    II. 

3.  Though  the  general  rule  for  the  formation  of  the 
nominative  singular  is  that  given  in  Lesson  L,  viz. :  the 
addition  to  the  stem  of  the  ending  s,  it  must  here  be  noted 
that — 

•f      ^      ^^^Jtoa  guttural-stem  (c,  g),  we  must  write  x  for  cs  or  gs. 
**  I  to  a  dental-stem  (d,  t),  we  must  write  s  for  ds  or  ts. 

Thus  : 

theguttural-stemj^     \  becomes  {**   fteteado 
the  dental-stem  )  £f  [  becomes  |  g*  f «— *  of] 

NOTE. — In  the  following  vocabularies  some  nouns  are  printed  thus : 
cohort(i)- ;  the  meaning  of  this  will  be  explained  in  a  subsequent  lesson. 
Meanwhile  let  the  pupils  read  them  thus :  cohort  or  cohorti.  At  pres- 
ent only  the  consonant-stem  is  to  be  used. 

EXERCISE  3. 

1.  The  king  loves  the  state.  2.  The  soldier  governs  the  island.  3. 
The  hostage  throws  a  stone.  4.  The  law  frightens  the  thief.  5.  The 
priest  reads  the  letter.  6.  The  guard  hears  a  shout.  7.  The  foot- 
soldier  pushes  the  enemy.  8.  Praise  rouses  valor.  9.  Yalor  preserves 
the  state.  10.  Peace  charms  the  man,  11.  The  cohort  is  making  an 
attack.  12.  The  state  makes  the  law.  13.  The  flock  loves  the  shep- 
herd. 14  The  horse-soldier  is  leading  the  inhabitant  15.  The  bridge 
supports  the  wagon. 

bridge,  pontffr,  m.  man,  viro- 
charm,  delecta-  peace,  pdc-,  € 
cohort,  cohort^-,  f.  praise,  laud-,  £ 
enemy,  hosti-,  c.  priest,  sacerdot-c. 
flock,  greg-,  m.  push,  peM- 
foot-soldier,  pedet-  read,  leg- 
govern,  reg-  road,  via- 
guard,  custod-,  c.  rouse,  excita- 
guide,  due-,  c.  shepherd,  pastor- 
hear,  audi-  shout,  ddmor- 
horse-soldier,  equet-  show,  monstra- 
hostage,  obsed-,  c,  soldier,  mikt- 
inhabitant,  incofa-,  c.  stone,  lapid-,  m. 
island,  insular  support^  sustine- 
king,  reg-  thief,  fur-,  c. 
law,  leg-,  f.  throw,  jac(i)- 
lead,  due-  valor,  virtut- 
mate,  fac(i)-  wagon,  carro-,  m. 


( 


4.]  LESSON' 

EXERCISE  4. 

1.  Gustos  lapidem  jacit.  2.  Grex  pontem  petit.  3.  Pedes  amlcum 
terret.  4.  Dux  virtutem .  amat.  5.  Rex  insulam  vincit.  6.  Virtus 
sacerdotem  delectat.  7.  Eque,s  lapidem  dejicit.  8.  Carrus  pastorem 
sustinet.  9.  Miles  insulam  capit  10.  Hostis  gregem  ducit.  11.  Lex 
furem  coerce t.  12.  Pax  civitatem  polit.  13.  Obses  civem  excitat. 
14.  Servus  domuin  videt. 


LESSON    III. 

4.  It  will  be  well  for  the  pupils  to  begin  now  to  learn  the 
endings  of  the  third  or  consonant  declension  of  nouns. 
These  are  given  at  page  200 ;  and  the  teacher  should,  as 
soon  as  they  can  be  well  repeated  in  their  separate  form, 
make  his  pupils  learn  by  heart  the  examples  si  consonant- 
nouns  ending  in  different  letters,  which  are  given  immedi- 
ately after  the  endings.  The  special  rules  for  the  formation 
of  the  separate  cases  will  be  given  in  subsequent  lessons. 
But  as  nothing  can  supply  the  placo  of  a  perfect  acquaint- 
ance with  the  cases  arranged  tabularly,  it  is  best  to  be- 
gin at  once  to  learn  them  by  heart,  without  waiting  for 
the  particular  explanations.  And  it  is  of  the  utmost 
importance  that  each  noun  declined  should  always  be 
referred  to  its  stem. 

EXERCISE  5. 

1.  Peace  increases  happiness.  2.  The  judge  sets-free  the  prisoner. 
3.  The  heir  receives  the  money.  4.  The  torch  illuminates  the  cave. 
5.  The  tempest  alarms  the  sailor.  6.  Rest  refreshes  the  workman. 
7.  The  spike  wounds  the  horse.  8.  The  huntress  slays  the  stag.  9. 
The  bark  preserves  the  bough.  10.  Novelty  charms  the  woman. 

alarm,  perterre-  illuminate,  illustra- 

bark,  cortec-,  m.  increase,  auge- 

bough,  rdmo-,  m.  judge,  judec- 

cave,  spelunca-  money,  pecHnia- 

happiness,  fellcitdt-  name,  nomina- 

heir,  hered-  novelty,  novitdt- 

hold,  tene-  receive,  accip(i)- 

hope,  spe-  refresh,  recrea- 

huntress,  vendtric-  rest,  quiet-,  f. 
1* 


LESSON  IV.  [5. 

sailor,  nauta-  torch,  foe-,  f. 

set-free,  llbera-  warn,  mone- 

shake,  quat(i)-  wind,  vento-,  m. 

slay,  occld-  woman,  mulier- 

spike,  cuspid-,  f.  workman,  fabro- 

stag,  cervo-  wound,  vulnera- 
tempest,  tempestdt- 


EXERCISE  6. 

1.  Obses  cuspidem  tenet.  2.  Judex  furem  monet.  3.  Canis  cer- 
vum  excitat.  4.  Tempestas  navem  quatit  5.  Pax  regem  recreat.  6. 
Rex  heredem  nominal.  7.  Spes  virtutem  auget.  8.  Gustos  captlvum 
liberat  9.  Cervus  pastorem  fugit.  10.  Yentus  ramum  quatit. 


LESSON    IV. 

5.  In  some  cases  one  of  the  letters  of  the  stem  is 
altered  when  any  ending,  consisting  of  a  whole  syllable, 
is  added  to  it  •  e.  g.,  when  the  ending  em  is  added  to 
consonant-stems : 

Thus,  e  in  such  words  as  rmlet-,  princep-,  is  changed  to  i. 
on  "          ordon-  "          "         in. 

s  "         flos-  "          "        r. 

For  example : 
the  stem  milet-       makes  not  mlletem      but  militem. 

princep-       "      not  princepem  but  prindpem. 
ordon-         "      not  ordonem    but  ordinem. 
*'       flos-  "      notfldsem 


EXERCISE  7. 

1.  The  soldier  loves  the  chief.  2.  The  law  forbids  baseness.  3.  The 
nurse  plucks  the  flower.  4.  The  horse-soldier  deserts  (his)  rank.  5. 
The  colonist  retains  the  custom.  6.  The  king  praises  the  foot-soldier. 
7.  The  priest  advises  the  multitude.  8.  The  prisoner  fears  (his)  com- 
panion, 9.  The  hostage  kills  the  guest.  10.  The  guard  has  a  tree. 


6-S.]  LESSON  Y.  7 

baseness,  turpitudon-,  f.  Tiave,  habe- 
chief,  princep-  kill,  occld- 
colonist,  colono-,  m.  nurse,  nutric- 
coinpanion,  comet-,  c.  pluck,  carp- 
custom,  77i6s-,  m.  praise,  lauda- 

/ear,  time-  rank,  ordon-,  m. 

flower,  ./Zos-,  m.  retain,  retine- 

forbid,  veta-  tree,  arbor-,  f. 
guest,  ihospet-,  m. 

EXERCISE  8. 

1.  Fugitlvus  comitem  laudat.  2.  Cohors  ordiuem  servat.  3.  Pedes 
hospitem  terret.  4.  Civis  colonum  amat.  4.  Amicus  florem  colit. 
6.  Sacerdos furem  timet.  9.  Gustos  rnultitudinem  deserit.  10.  Nuntius 
morem  laudat.  11.  Princeps  insulam  capit.  12.  Dux  impetum  facit. 

NOTE. — It  is  thought  that  from  this  time  the  pupils  may  be  made  by 
their  teacher  to  decline  any  of  the  nouns  with  consonant-stems  which 
they  meet  with  in  the  subsequent  lessons. 


LESSON    V. 

6.  It  has  been  shown  in  the  preceding  lessons  that  the 
nom.  sing,  is  made  by  the  ending  s.  But  there  are  some 
exceptions  to  this  which  must  now  be  mentioned.  The 
rules  for  these  will  be  most  clearly  and  shortly  exhibited 
in  the  following  table,  with  the  examples  annexed  : 

To  form  the  nom.  sing. 
of  stems  ending  in 

ea,  1,  r,  s,          add  no  ending. 
on-,  on-,  "        "       omit  the  last  letter. 

eri-,  ero-,  iro-,  "       " 


(5)  tr-, 

7.  NOTE.—  1st.  Stems  ending  in  or-  make  the  6  short  in  the  nom. 
sing. 

8.  —  2d.  Adjectives  ending  in  eri-  or  ri-  form  their  nom.  sing. 
feminine  regularly  ;  that  is,  by  the  ending  s. 


8  LESSON  Y.  [8. 

Examples — 

from  the  stem  we  have  the  nom.  sing. 

{insula-,  island,  insula. 

consul-,  consul,  consul, 

viator-,  traveller,  viator, 

flos-,  flower,  flos. 

/2^  (  ordon-,  rank,  ordo. 

*  *  (  region-,  country,  regio. 

celeri-  (adjective),  quick,               celer,  masc.,  celeris,  fern. 

genero-,  son-in-law,  gener.* 

viro-,77wm,  vir. 

acri-,  (adjective),  keen,  acer,  masc.,  acris,  fern. 

lintri-,  wherry,  linter.     • 

agro-,  field,  ager. 

(  patr-,  /a^er,  pater. 

v"y  <  matr-,  mother,  mater. 

NOTE. — It  will  be  well  for  teachers  to  exercise  their  pupils  upon  other 
examples  of  the  above  classes,  with  this  table  before  their  eyes,  before 
allowing  them  to  commence  the  exercises. 


EXERCISE  9. 

1.  The  queen  sends  the  messe'nger.  2.  The  father  loves  (his)  son. 
3.  The  sun  charms  the  shepherd..  :4.  The  thief  despises  the  law.  5. 
The  multitude  hears  the  speech.  6.  The  workman  makes  a  wherry. 
7.  The  mother  leads  (her)  daughter.  8.  The  shower  moistens  the 
field, 

adorn,  orna-  girl,  pueUa- 
boy,  puero-  master,  magisfro- 
"break,  frang-  moisten,  humecta- 
brother,  fratr-  mother,  mdtr- 
cheat,  frauda-  plain,  campo-,  m. 
condemn,  damna-  queen,  regina- 
consul,  consul-  send,  mitt- 
country,  region-  shelter,  teg- 
cup,  cyatho-,  m.  shower,  imbri-,  m. 
despise,  contemn-  sister,  sorbr- 
dry,  sicca-  speech, 
earth,  terra-  sun,  sol-,  m, 
father,  patr-  teach,  doee- 
field,  agro-,  m.  wherry,  lintri-,  t 

*  The  following  nouns  make  the  nom.  sing,  according  to  the  general 
rule,  by  adding  s :  hespero,  humero,  numero,  utero. 


9.]  LESSON  VL  9 

EXERCISE  10. 

1.  Magister  puerum  docet.  2.  Oratio  hospitem  delectat.  3.  Insula 
regem  habet.  4.  Sol  terrarn  siccat.  5.  Rex  obsidem  damnat.  6. 
Pater  filiam  pellit.  7.  Ager  agricolara  delectat.  8.  Mater  puellain 
ornat.  9.  Nutrlx  puerum  deserit.  10.  Sacerdos  virtutem  retinet. 


LESSON    VI. 

We  have  now  given  all  the  rules  for  the  formation  of  the 
nom.  and  accus.  cases  singular  of  masculine  and  feminine 
nouns.  Before  proceeding  to  treat  of  adjectives,  and  the 
other  parts  of  nouns,  we  shall  introduce  some  exercises, 
with  the  view  of  giving  the  pupils  some  insight  into  the 
mode  in  which  compound  words  are  formed  in  Latin,  at 
the  same  time  that  the  rules  for  the  formation  of  the  nofii. 
and  ace.  cases  are  impressed  more  firmly  on  the  memory. 

9.  A  compound  word  is  one  formed  by  the  union 
of  a  root  and  a  prefix.  Words  so  formed  are  very  com- 
mon in  Latin.  A  list  of  some  of  the  prefixes  is  given 
below,  with  the  ordinary  meanings  which  they  bear  when 
compounded  with  roots.  It  must  be  understood  that,  as 
many  of  the  prefixes  end  in  consonants,  when  they  are 
joined  to  roots  which  begin  with  consonants,  they  are 
very  frequently  altered  in  accordance  with  the  laws  of 
euphony  which  are  explained  in  the  introduction.  The 
teacher  should  take  this  opportunity  of  seeing  that  the 
pupils  understand  these,  at  least  to  some  extent.  But 
in  order  to  simplify  the  matter,  in  the  next  English  exer- 
cise only  such  verbs  will  be  employed  as  can  be  translated 
by  compound  Latin  verbs  with  unaltered  prefixes.  And 
in  case  any  difficulty  in  translating  be  found,  the  pupils 
can  look  out  any  of  the  compound  words  used,  in  the  gen- 
eral vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the  book. 

a,  ab,  abs,/rom,  away.          circum,  around. 

ad,  to,  near.  con  (cum),  along  with. 

ante,  before^  in  front.  de,  down  from. 


10  LESSON  VI.                                       [9. 

dl,  dis,  apart.  pro,  before,  forth. 

(ec)  ex,  e,  out  of.  post,  after,  behind. 

in,  in.  praeter,  beyond,  beside. 

inter,  between,  among.  sub,  under. 

ob,  towards.  supra,  above. 

per,  through.  trans,  across. 

prae,  before.  re, 


The  pupil  must  form  for  himself  the  compound  words 
needed  in  the  following  exercise,  joining  the  proper  pre- 
fix to  the  root-verbs  given  in  this  and  the  foregoing 
vocabularies.  It  will  be  observed  that  in  many  of  the 
compound  verbs  used  in  this  and  the  following  lessons, 
the  prefix  does  not  always  bear  precisely  the  meaning 
assigned  to  it  in  the  above  table  ;  and  it  will  be  the  busi- 
ness of  the  teacher  to  point  out  how  that  derived  meaning 
arises  out  of  the  primitive  one. 


EXERCISE  11. 

1.  The  king  pushes-out  (expels)  the  inhabitant  2.  The  fanner  goes- 
across  the  country.  3.  The  father  leads-away  (his)  son.  4.  The 
senator  puts-forth  (his)  opinion.  5.  The  traveller  puts-down  (his) 
cloak.  6.  The  servant  puts-back  the  cup.  7.  The  wherry  carries- 
across  the  soldier.  8.  The  inhabitant  carries-out  (exports)  food.  9. 
The  conqueror  carries-back  glory.  10.  The  guard  leads-round  the 
army. 

boar,  apro-  poet,  poeta-,  m. 
carry,  porta-  put,  pon- 
cloak,  paenula-  senator,  senator- 
conqueror,  victor-  servant,  ministro-,  m. 
food,  cibo;  m.  traveller,  viator- 
go,  i-  verse,  versu- 
opinion,  sententia- 

EXERCISE  12. 

1.  Dux  exercitum  exponit.  2.  Pater  cibum  importat.  3.  Gustos 
captivum  impellit.  4.  Amiens  epistolam  transmittit.  5.  Faber  domum 
conficit.  6.  Poeta  versum  componit.  7.  Frater  lintrem  reficit.  8. 
Rex  servum  collaudat.  9.  Canis  aprum  praevidet.  10.  Servua  au- 
fugit  11.  Puer  lintrem  appellit.  12.  Puella  regem  adit. 


1O,  11.]  LESSON  VII.  11 


LESSON    VII. 

It  is  supposed  that  the  pupils  are  now  familiar  -with  the 
table  of  person-endings  given  in  Lesson  I.  In  the  pres- 
ent lesson  the  first  and  second  persons  singular  will 
be  introduced  as  well  as  the  third.  In  order  that  these 
may  be  easily  learned,  an  example  of  the  present 
imperfect  tense  of  each  of  the  conjugations  is 
here  given,  which  should  be  thoroughly  committed  to 
memory. 

The  endings  are  given  here  again,  with  letters,  etc., 
printed  over  each  column,  to  show  to  what  classes  of 
verbs  and  tenses  each  column  is  in  general  to  be  at- 
tached : 

For  stems  ending  in 


a,  e,  i,  u  or  a  consonant. 

l 
Sing. 


Plur. 


o. 

is, 

it. 

imus. 

ills, 

lint. 


1O.  1st.  Conj.  2d.  Conj.  4th.  Conj.    3d.  Conj. 
the  stem  -         U  or  a 

ends  in  €  *'  consonant. 

ama-,  love.  mone-,  advise,  audi-,  hear,  reg-,  rule. 

1.  amo/oramao,moneo,  audio,          rego. 

2.  amas,  mones,  audis,          regis. 

3.  amat,  monet,  audit,          regit. 

1.  amamus,  monemus,  audlmus,     regimus. 

2.  amatis,  monetis,  audltis,        regitis. 

3.  amant,  monent,  audiunt,      regunt. 

1 1 .  It  must  be  particularly  observed  that— 

(1)  Verbs  with  o-stems,  e-stems,  and  a-stems  take  the 


12  LESSON  VIL  [12. 

endings   given  in  the  first  column,  except  in  these  re- 
spects, that, 

(a)  the  first  person  sing,  of  the  present  imperfect 
tense  of  all  verbs,  takes  the  ending  o  from  the 
second  column,  instead  of  in  from  the  first. 

(b)  the    third  person  plar.   of  verbs   with   ^-sterns 
takes  lint  from  the  second  column,  instead  of  nt 
from  the  first. 

(2)  The  second  column  of  endings  is  used  for  verbs 
with  consonant-stems  and  -M-sterns  (the  3d  conjugation). 

(3)  The  endings  with  this  mark  (-)  before  them  make 
the  stem-vowel  long ;  and  the  same  thing  is  always  indi- 
cated throughout  the  book  by  this  sign. 

(4)  Verbs  printed  in  the  vocabularies,   like  cap(i)-, 
are  conjugated  for  the  most  part  like  verbs  of  the  4th 
conjugation;  but   the   vowel   i  remains   short  through- 
out, and  they  are  regarded  as  belonging  to  the  3d  con- 
jugation. 

1.2.  The  endings  O,  -s  (is),  t  (it),  in  general  mark  the 
persons  of  the  verb  sufficiently,  and  therefore  the  words 
"I,"  "thou,"  "he,"  "she,"  and  "it"  must  for  the  most 
part  not  be  translated. 

NOTE. — It  "will  be  well  as  soon  as  possible  to  make  the  pupils  con- 
jugate the  verbs  which  occur  in  the  exercises ;  at  first,  if  necessary, 
with  the  examples  before  their  eyes. 


EXERCISE  13. 

1.  I  kill  a  goat.  2.  I  plough  a  field.  3.  The  boy  fears-greatly  the 
multitude.  4.  You  hear  the  noise.  5.  The  girl  teaches  the  beggar. 
6.  I  burst-through  the  rank.  7.  The  speech  alarms  the  assembly. 
8.  The  consul  leads-together  the  common-people.  9.  You  advise 
(your)  son-in-law.  10.  I  love  (my)  father-in-law.  11.  You  call- 
down  the  hostage.  12.  He  calls-together  the  senate,  13.  I  adorn- 
greatly  (my)  daughter.  14.  You  enter  the  house.  15.  He  rules  th« 
state.  16."  Catiline  flies-off. 

adorn-greatly,  adorna-  burst-lhrougTi,  perramp- 

alarm,  permove-  Catiline,  Catittna- 

assembly,  conventu-,  call-together,  convoca- 

beggar,  mendtco-,  m.  common-people,  pleb-,  £ 


13,  14.]  LESSON  Yin.  13 

enter,  subi-  noise,  strepitu- 

f ear-greatly,  pertimesc-  plough,  ara- 

father-in-law,  socero-  senate,  senatu- 

fly-off,  evola-  son-in-law,  genero- 

goat,  capro-  thing,  re- 

kad-together,  conduc-  undertake,  suscip(i)- 


EXERCISE  14. 

1.  Hortum  colo.  2.  Florem  carpis.  3.  Lapidem  jacit.  4.  Clvitatem 
amo.  5.  Multitudinem  convocas.  6.  Magistrum  fraudat.  7.  Video 
regionera.  8.  Puellam  terres.  9.  Fratrem  monet.  10.  Rem  suscipio. 
11.  Polls  lapidem.  12.  Clamorem  audit.  13.  Canis  mendicum  mor- 
det.  14.  Rem  conficis.  15.  Aro  agrum.  16.  Cibum  importas. 


LESSON    VIII. 

It  is  now  necessary  to  speak  about  adjectives.  The 
first  thing  to  be  noted  is  the  agreement  of  Latin  adjectives 
with  the  nouns  which  they  qualify.  This  is  a  matter 
which  is  wholly  foreign  to  the  English  language.  The 
adjective  "large"  may  be  used  to  qualify  the  nouns 
"  man,"  "  men^"  "  woman,"  "  women,"  "  rock,"  "  rocks," 
without  any  change  in  its  form,  though  these  nouns  differ 
from  each  other  in  number  and  gender. 

1 3.  But  in  Latin,  adjectives  agree  with  their 
nouns  in  ease,  gender,  and  number ;  that 
is,  they  vary  their  form,  to  correspond  with  the  nouns 
which  they  are  used  to  qualify,  in  all  those  respects. 

For  example : 

If  I  wish  to  translate  I  must  write 

a  great  man,  magnus  vir. 

great  men,  magrii  mrl. 

a  great  woman,  magna  mutter. 

great  women,  magnae  mulieres. 

14.  It  will  be  seen  at  once,  that  the  agreement  of  an 
adjective  with  a  noun  does  not  at  all  imply  that  the  end- 

2 


14  LESSON  Vm.  [15. 

ing  of  the  adjective  is  to  be  the  same  as  that  of  the  noun ; 
but  only  that,  as  you  follow  certain  rules  in  order  to  make 
a  noun-stem  ending  in  a  particular  letter  into  any  case, 
so,  just  the  same  rules  must  be  followed  to  make  the  ad- 
jective which  is  to  qualify  it,  into  the  same  case.  The 
rules  given  for  forming  nouns  into  the  nominative  and 
accusative  cases,  hold,  in  all  respects,  except  such  as  will  be 
hereafter  mentioned,  for  adjectives  whose  stems  end  in  the 
same  letters.  The  only  thing  which  it  is  here  necessary 
to  say  besides  is,  that  all  adjectives  which  shall  be  given  in 
the  vocabularies  with  stems  ending  in  o,  must  be  under- 
stood to  have  another  stem,  which  is  not  printed,  ending  in 
a,  the  former  being  masculine,  the  latter  being  feminine  / 
that  is,  the  o-stem  is  to  be  used  if  the  noun  be  masculine, 
and  the  a-stein  if  the  noun  be  feminine. 

In  the  following  English  exercise,  the  sentences  are  just 
the  same  as  those  given  in  Latin  in  Exercise  14.  The 
only  difference  is,  that  each  noun  is  now  qualified  by  an 
adjective ;  and  each  adjective  must  be  formed  just  as  if 
it  were  a  noun,  so  that  it  shall  be  found  in  the  same  ease, 
gender,  and  number  as  the  noun  which  follows  it. 

15.  NOTE. — Adjectives  with  t-stems  must  alwaysh&ve  the t  changed 
to  e  when  they  take  the  accusative  ending  m.  See  §  1.  (2). 


EXERCISE  15. 

1.  I  cultivate  the  barren  garden.  2.  You  pluck  the  beautiful  flower. 
3.  He  throws  the  great  stone.  4.  I  love  the  wise  state.  5.  You  call 
together  the  foolish  multitude.  6.  He  cheats  the  kind  master.  7.  I 
see  the  fertile  country.  8.  You  frighten  the  timid  girl.  9.  He  warns 
(his)  wicked  brother.  10.  I  undertake  the  easy  thing.  11.  You  polish 
the  valuable  stone.  12.  He  hears  the  savage  shout.  13.  The  fierce 
dog  bites  the  poor  beggar.  14.  You  finish  the  difficult  thing.  15.  I 
plough  the  barren  field.  16.  You  import  the  valuable  food. 

and,  et.  fertile,  ferdc(i)- 

beautiful,  pulcro-  fierce./eroc(t)- 

barren,  sterili-  foolish,  stulto- 

difficult,  difficili-  great,  magno- 

easy,factii-  kind,  benigno- 


16.]  LESSON  IX.  15 

lose,  amitt-  valuable,  prctioso- 

mild,  mlti-  wicked,  improbo- 

poor,  pauper-  wise,  sapient(i)- 

savage,  saevo-  young,  juveni- 
timid,  timido- 

EXERCISE  16. 

1.  Magnus  amor  stultum  animum  vincit.  2.  Fer5x  aper  timidum 
cap  rum  occldit.  3.  Res  facilis  stultum  puerum  delectat.  5.  Saevum 
hostem  miles  abducit.  5.  Mater  improba  filiam  expellit.  6.  Sapiens 
coriventus  sterilem  regionem  contemnit.  7.  Fulcra  gloria  virum  et 
consulem  excitat.  8.  Pauper  fugitlvus  paenulam  amittit.  9.  Fratrem 
servat  beuigna  soror.  10.  Eques  magnam  gloriam  reportat. 


LESSON    IX. 

So  far  no  verbs  have  been  used  except  such  as  are  in  the 
present  imperfect  tense ;  and  it  has  been  seen  that  nothing 
more  was  to  be  done  to  form  them,  than  merely  to  add 
the  person-endings  to  the  stems  of  the  verbs. 

1O.  But  it  is  of  course  necessary  to  be  able  to  assert 
actions  as  going  on  in  past  or  future  time  as  well;  and 
this  difference  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  adding  endings  to 
the  stem  of  the  verb  before  adding  the  person-endings. 
The  form  in  which  the  verb  appears  when  a  tense-ending 
has  been  added,  will  be  called  a  tense-stem.  The  follow- 
ing table  will  exhibit  most  clearly  the  mode  of  forming 
the  past  imperfect  and  future  tense-stems : 

If  the  verb-stem  >  add,  to  make  the  tense-stem  of  the 

ends  in  >  Pres.  imperf.     Past  imperf.    Future  imperf. 

a,  e,  -ba-  -b- 

i  11,  or  any      >  . 

consonant,  ( 

At  present  only  the  past-imperfect  will  be  introduced. 
As  when  the  past-imperfect  tense-stem  has  been  formed, 
all  verbs  alike  end  (in  that  tense)  in  a,  the  1st  column  of 
person-endings  is  of  course  employed.  A  single  example 


16  LESSON  IX.  [17. 

will  suffice.     From  ara-,  "plough,"  we  have  the  past- 
imperfect  tense-stem,  araba-,  and  then, 


The  following  examples  will  show  various  modes  of 
expression  which  may  in  English  be  used  to  translate 
the  past  imperfect  tense. 

Stem-letters.  Verb-stem.  Tense-stem.  Persons  Singular.      Meanings. 

a.  ambula-  ambulafoa-  1st.  ambulabam,  I  was  walking. 

e  dole-  doleba-  2d.  dolebas,         you  used  to  grieve. 

i  dormi-  dormiefoa-  3d.  dormiebat,     he  slept. 

n  sternu-  sternueba-  1st.  sternuebam,  I  sneezed,  [bling. 

any  cons,  trem-  tremeba-  2d.  tremebas,       you   were    trem- 

"  curr-  curreba-  3d.  currebat,       he  used  to  run. 

17.  It  will  be  observed  from  these  examples  that 
the  past  imperfect  in  Latin  is  not  always  represented  by 
the  same  English  expressions.  In  general  it  is  to  be  em- 
ployed when  you  wish  to  express  that  an  action 
was  going  on,  was  unfinished,  or  was 
habitually  performed  at  a  past  time. 


EXERCISE  17. 

1.  I  was  praising-highly  the  general.  2.  You  used  to  govern  the 
state.  3.  The  brave  army  was  taking  the  beautiful  island,  4.  A  swift 
ship  carried  the  infantry.  5.  You  feared  the  cold  wind.  6.  The  man 
used  to  praise  the  powerful  chief.  7.  The  warlike  cohort  was-making 
a  bold  attack.  8.  The  timid  hare  deceived  the  dog.  9.  All  the  country 
touched-upon  the  fertile  province.  10.  The  skilful  workman  lessened 
the  difficulty. 

all,  omni-  lessen,  minu- 

bold,  auddc(i}-  man  (a  human  being),  homon- 

brave,  forti-  province,  prdvincia- 

cold,  frigido-  powerful,  potent^)- 

deceive,  fall-  ship,  ndvi-,  f. 

difficulty,  difficultat-  skilful,  per'ito- 

general,  imperdtor-  swift,  veldc(i)- 

hare,  kpos-,  m.  (nom.  s.  lepus).  touch-upon,  atting- 

heavy,  graii-  warlike,  betticoso- 

infantry,  peditdtu-  write,  scrib- 


18.]  LESSON  X.  IT 

EXERCISE  18. 

1.  Audax  eques  stultum  senatum  contemnebat.  2.  Sapientem  regera 
poeta  peritus  delectabat.  3.  Feracem  campum  habebat  bellicosus  ex- 
ercitus.  4.  Saevus  aper  improbum  hominem  occldebat.  5.  Pater 
benignus  sapientem  epistolam  scribit.  6.  Captivus  omnem  difficultatem 
perrumpebat.  7.  Arabas  feracem  agrum.  8.  Ministruiu  improbum 
monebam.  9.  Yelocem  lintrem  impellebas.  10.  Viator  gravem  paenu- 
lam  deponebat. 


LESSON    X. 

It  is  expected  that  by  this  time  masculine  and  feminine 
nouns  with  consonant-stems  present  no  difficulty  to  the 
pupil,  but  that  he  can  decline  any  one  throughout  with 
perfect  readiness. 

It  will  be  well,  if  this  is  the  case  (not  otherwise),  that  he 
commit  to  memory  the  list  of  endings  for  nouns  with 
«-stems  given  at  page  203 ;  and  as  soon  as  these  are 
learned  the  examples  of  masculine  and  feminine  nouns 
which  follow.  The  same  course  should  be  followed  in 
this  as  in  the  case  of  consonant-stems :  i.  e.,  as  soon  as  the 
given  examples  are  learned,  the  pupils  should  be  exercised 
upon  all  nouns  or  adjectives  with  ^-sterns  which  occur  in 
the  exercises.  This  can  very  soon  be  done  if  they  are 
allowed  at  first  to  have  the  page  with  the  examples  open 
before  them. 

We  will  now  speak  of  the  formation  of  the  nominative 
and  accusative  cases  plural : 

1 8.  If  the  stem  add,  to  make  the  plural 

end  in  Nom.  Ace. 

any  consonant,  es,  6s, 

€  or  u,  -S,  -S, 

i         (changed  to  e),        -S,  -S. 

Plural. 

Examples —  / * N 

Stem.  JVbm.  Ace. 

reg-  reges,  reges. 

die-  dies,  dies, 

gradu-  graduS,  gradtis. 

navi-  naves,  naves. 

2* 


18  LESSON  X.  [18. 

NOTE. — 1st.  Of  all  these  nouns  the  nom.  and  ace.  plur.  do  not  differ 
in  form ;  and  therefore  these  cases  can  only  be  distinguished  from  each 
other  by  the  meaning  of  the  sentences  in  which  they  occur. 

2d.  The  vowel  of  t-stems  is  occasionally  seen  unaltered  in  the  ace. 
plur.,  and  this  form  was  preferred  by  the  best  Latin  authors. 

3d.  Nouns  printed  in  the  vocabularies,  like  mont(i)-,  must  be  con- 
sidered to  have  their  plural  cases  formed  from  the  stem  monti-. 

All  the  persons  of  the  verb  will  now  be  introduced, 
and  the  words  "  we,"  "  ye,"  "  they"  need  not  generally 
be  translated. 


EXERCISE  19. 

1.  "We  were  fearing  the  bold  conspiracies.  2.  Ye  stretched  the  light 
bows.  3.  They  heard  the  foolish  speech.  4.  We  praise  highly  the 
noble  consuls.  5.  Ye  pluck  the  green  fruits.  6.  The  lying  thieves 
seize  a  large  sum-of-money.  7.  The  base  guards  deserted  the  gate. 
8.  Ye  were  selling  the  fertile  field.  9.  The  powerful  kings  enrol  brave 
armies.  10.  You  slew  (your)  kind  friend. 

and,  gue,  enclitic.*  lying,  mendac(i)- 

base,  turpi-  noble,  nobili- 

bow,  arcu-  seize,  rap(i)- 

demand.  pose-  sett,  vend- 

enrol,  conscrlb-  slay,  interfic(i)- 

gate,  porta-  stretch,  tend- 

green,  viridir  sum-of-money,  pecunia- 

light,  kvi~  tide,  aestu- 


EXERCISE  20. 

1.  Canes  lepores  excitabant  2.  Excitabas  omnes  equites.  3.  Ex- 
citamus  bellic5sam  cohortem.  4.  Difficulties  excitat  virtutem.  5. 
Aestus  feraces  regiones  attingunt.  6.  Sapientes  mures  civitates  servant. 
7.  Omnes  flores  carpebatis.  8.  Patres  matresque  conjurationes  time- 
bant.  9.  Fulcra  puella  amatores  juvenes  habebat.  10.  Mites  nutrices 
puerum  pueUamque  ducebant. 

*  The  word  enclitic  means  leaning  back,  and  is  applied  to  some  little 
words  which  are  never  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  but  always 
attached  to  some  other  word. 


19.]  LESSON  XI.  19 


LESSON    XL 

We  have  now  only  to  mention  the  mode  of  forming  the 
nominat.  and  accus.  plural  for  a-stems  and  o-stems. 
If  the  stem  to  make  the  plural 

end  in  Nom.  Ace. 

a,  add  e,  add  -s. 

o,  change  to  i,  "     -s. 

Examples — 

Stem.  Nom.  Plur.  Ace.  Plur. 

puella-  puellae,  puellas. 

viro-  viri,  viros. 

1O.  It  will  be  observed,  on  comparing  this  rule  with 
that  given  in  the  last  lesson,  that  all  vowel-stems  make 
the  accusative  plural  by  adding  -s. 

Observe  also,  that  when  a-stems  take  the  ending  e, 
these  two  vowels  form  a  diphthong. 


EXERCISE  21. 

1.  Careful  husbandmen  cultivated  the  beautiful  islands.  2.  The  allies 
embark-on  the  swift  ships.  3.  The  horses  were  crossing  the  broad 
rivers.  4.  Recent  wrongs  were  urging-on  the  soldiers.  5.  We  were 
cutting-away  the  old  bridges.  6.  All  the  boys  and  girls  run-together 
quickly.  7.  Lofty  mountains  surround  the  fortified  cities.  8.  Changes 
(say  new  things)  frighten  the  noble  and  the  rich  (men).  9.  I  bury  the 
unfortunate  citizens.  10.  You  feel  sharp  pains. 

ally,  socio-  old,  vetes- 
broad,  Idto-  pain,  dolor- 
bury,  sepeli-  quickly  (adverb),  cderiter 
careful,  dlligent(i)-  recent,  recent(t)- 
city,  urb(i)-,  f.  rich,  dlvet- 
cross,  transi-  river,  amni-,  m. 
cut-away,  rescind-  run-together,  concurr- 
embark-on,  conscend-  sharp,  acuto- 
feel,  senti-  surround,  cing- 
fortified,  munlto-  sword,  gladio-,  m. 
lofty,  celso-  unfortunate,  misero- 
mountain,  mont(i);  m.  urge-on,  incita- 
new,  novo-  wrong  (noun),  injuria- 


20  LESSON  XIL  [20,21. 

2O.  NOTE. — The  verb  t-,  "go",  with  all  its  compounds,  such  as  transi- 
"  go-across,"  used  in  this  exercise,  is  irregular  in  several  points.  One 
is,  that  in  the  past  imperfect  tense  it  takes  the  ending  -1m-  instead  of 
eba- ;  so  transi-  will  have  its  past  imperfect  tense-stem,  transiba-,  and 
not  trans  ieba-. 

EXERCISE  22. 

1.  Nauta  frigidos  ventos  timet.  2.  Potentes  principes  monebamus. 
3.  Fortes  pedites  multos  hostes  repellebant.  4.  Novus  incola  feracem. 
regiouem  amat.  5.  Novl  incolae  feraces  agros  amabant.  6.  Appello 
velocem  navem,  7.  Munitae  urbes  omnes  impetus  sustinent.  9. 
Acutos  gladios  tenebatis.  10.  AcQti  gladii  miseros  captives  perterrent. 
11.  Omnes  vias  mflites  reficiunt.  12.  Omnes  viae  novos  pontes  habeat. 


LESSON.  XII. 

In  the  sixth  sentence  of  Ex.  21,  an  adverb  is  introduced. 
Adverbs  are  words  used  to  modify  the  meaning  of  verbs, 
adjectives,  or  other  adverbs  beside  which  they  are  placed. 
All  such  words  (which,  with  prepositions  and  conjunc- 
tions, are  called  particles  in  some  grammars)  are  printed 
in  the  vocabularies  without  the  hyphen  (-)  after  them, 
to  indicate  that  their  form  is  never  changed.  It  is  best 
now  to  attend  to  the  general  rule  of  their  formation. 
Generally, 

2 1 .  Adjective-stems        are  formed  into  adverbs  by 
ending  in  o,  changing  o  to  e. 

"       "    i,  adding     ter. 

"     "   consonants,  adding    iter  or  er. 
Thus, 

lato-,  broad,  makes  late,  broadly. 

prudent-,  prudent ,  "     prudenter,  prudently. 

suavi-,  sweet,  "     suaviter,  sweetly. 

felic-,  happy,  "     feliciter,  happily. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  these  are  only  the  general 
rules  of  the  formation  of  adverbs.  There  are  many  which 
are  not  derived  from  adjectives  at  all,  and  others  again 


21.]  LESSON  XII.  21 

which  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  a  different  way. 
But  this  will  present  no  difficulty,  for  words  of  this  sort 
will  always  be  given  in  the  vocabularies. 


EXERCISE  23. 

1.  All  the  charioteers  immediately  urged  on  the  horses.  2.  Many 
women  hasten  to-the-same-place.  3.  The  thoughtless  king  foolishly 
let-go  the  hostages.  4.  Ye  cultivate  the  fertile  fields  far-and-wide. 
5.  The  bold  enemy  (pi.)  fight  bravely.  6.  The  unfortunate  sailors 
eagerly  repaired  the  ship.  7.  I  soon  assist  the  wounded  man.  8.  The 
soldiers  take  the  fortified  city  with -difficulty.  9.  Idle  messengers 
never  make-haste.  10.  Ye  compose  verses  beautifully. 

assist,  juva-  idle,  igndvo- 

beautif'ully,  pulcre.  let-go,  dlmitt- 

bravely,  fortiter.  never,  nunquam. 

charioteer,  aurlga-  eoon,  cito. 

eagerly,  cupide.  to-the-same-place,  eddem. 

far-and-wide,  late.  thoughtless,  imprudent(i)- 

foolishly,  stulte.  with  difficulty,  aegre. 

hasten,  propera-  wounded,  saucio- 
immediately,  statim. 


EXERCISE  24. 

1.  Veloces  capri  lupos  aegre  fugiunt.  2.  Ignavi  servi  cupide  aufu- 
giebant.  3.  Novam  lintrem  cito  rapimus.  4.  Doceo  ignavum  puerum. 
6.  Atrocem  imperatorem  nunquam  times.  6.  Res  periculosae  dlvites 
statim  terrent.  7.  Clamor  imprudentem  clvem  permovet.  8.  Miserum 
captlvum  stulte  monebas.  9.  Faber  sapiens  filium  filiamque  aegre 
docebat.  10.  Magnae  injuriae  omnes  viatores  terrent. 

NOTE. — It  is  expected,  that  by  this  time  the  pupils  are  able  to  de- 
cline with  facility  any  noun  with  a  consonant-stem  or  an  i-stem.  And 
they  should  also  be  able  to  conjugate,  without  hesitation,  the  two  tenses 
of  the  verb  hitherto  explained,  from  sterna  ending  hi  any  letter. 


LESSON  XHI.  [21, 


LESSON    XIII. 

Pupils  should  now  commit  to  memory  the  table  of  the 
endings  of  nouns  with  a-stems  (the  first  declension),  and 
the  example  given  of  it  at  page  205  ;  and  they  should  as 
soon  as  possible  be  made  to  decline  all  nouns  of  this  class 
which  occur  in  the  exercises,  as  well  as  those  of  the 
third  declension.  It  should  be  pointed  out  that  feminine 
adjectives,  ending  in  a,  have  the  same  declension  precisely. 


EXERCISE  25. 

1.  The  weary  citizens  lay  aside  (their)  gowns.  2.  The  active  maid- 
servants draw  water.  3.  The  savage  guards  quickly  bind  the  un- 
fortunate prisoner.  4.  We  were  propping-up  the  falling  house.  5. 
Ye  mend  the  old  clothes.  6.  All  the  soldiers  leaped-down  at  once. 
7.  I  come  to  (ad)  the  city.  8.  You  bury  the  unfortunate  commander 
by-night.  9.  The  priest  gladly  hears  the  wise  speech.  10.  The  eagles 
were  flying-together  from  all  sides. 


active,  gnavo-  fly-together,  convola- 

at  once  (together),  simul.  gladly,  libenter. 

bind,  vinci-  gown,  toga- 

by  night,  noctti.  leap  down,  desili- 

clothes,  vesti-,  f.  maid-servant,  famula- 

commander,  praefecto-  mend,  resarci- 

draw  (as  water),  hauri-  no  one,  nemon- 

eagle,  aquila-  prop  up,  fulci- 

falling,  caduco-  weary, 
from  all  sides,  undique. 


EXERCISE   26. 

1.  Veterem  turrim  celeriter  fulcls.  2.  Nemo  novam  togam  resarcit 
3.  Dives  pastor  benignum  amicum  sepeliebat.  4.  Collaudo  fortcm 
imperatorem.  5.  Omnes  agros  late  aras.  6.  Improbum  captivuin 
damnabatis.  7.  Turpes  senatores  miseram  multitudinem  fallunt.  8. 
Leporem  velocem  capit  canis.  9.  Recentes  injuriae  fortem  principem 
permoveut.  10.  Flos  caducus  dolorem  excitabat. 


22,  23.] 


LESSON  XIT. 


23 


LESSON    XIV. 

We  have  now  spoken  of  the  mode  of  forming  the 
nominative  and  accusative  cases  of  all  nouns,  masculine 
and  feminine.  It  remains  to  give  the  modes  of  forming 
the  same  cases  for  neuter  nouns.  And  it  must  be  observed, 
that  in  all  neuter  nouns  the  liom  and  JlCC.  sing1, 
do  not  differ  in  form,  nor  do  the  saossa.  and 
ace.  plur.  differ  in  form.  It  is  thought  best  to 
exhibit  in  one  view  all  the  rules  for  the  formation  of  these 
cases  of  neuter  nouns,  though  examples  will  be  introduced 
separately  in  the  exercises. 

23.  IVeilter-steins  form  their  nom.  and  ace.  sing,  and  their  nom. 
and  ace.  plur.  by  making  the  changes  and  additions  which  in  the  an- 
nexed table  are  stated  opposite  to  the  stem-letters. 

to  make  the  nom.  to  make  the  nom. 

Stem-letters.  and  ace.  sing.  and  ace.  plur. 


change 

add 

change 

add 

1.0, 

to  11, 

ill. 

0  to  a, 

nothing, 

2.  i, 

toe, 

nothing. 

nothing 

a, 

8.  e§,  o§, 

to  MS, 

M 

S  tor, 

it 

4.  ai,  ar, 

to  al,  ar, 

a 

nothing, 

<c 

5.  <].  t,  11,  rr,  ss, 

drop  last  letter, 

K 

(I 

II 

6.  any  thing  else, 

nothing, 

(i 

li 

(( 

Neuter  Stems. 

1.  regno- 

2.  gravi- 

3.  ones- 

4.  calcar(i)- 

5.  cord-  oss- 

6.  fulgur- 


EXAMPLES. 

Nom.  and  Ace.  Sing. 
regnum,  • 
grave, 
onus, 
calcar, 
cor,  os, 
fulgur, 


Nom.  and  Ace.  Plur 
regna. 
gravia. 
onera. 
calcaria. 
corda,  ossa. 
fulgura. 


NOTE. — 1st.  In  all  neuter  nouns  the  nom.  and  ace.  plur.  end  in  a. 

2d.  As  it  was  seen  in  §  5  that  the  e  in  words  like  mllet-is  changed 
to  i  when  any  ending,  making  a  new  syllable,  is  added,  so,  words  ending 
in  en  change  the  e  to  i,  under  the  same  circumstances :  thus,  flumen- 
makes  nom.  plur.  flumina :  so  also,  caput-  makes  nom.  plur.  capita  • 

3d.  The  four  words,  femor-,  jecor-,  ebor-,  robor-,  like  nouns  in  the 
3d  class,  change  o  to  u  in  the  nom.  sing. 


24  LESSON  XV.  [23. 

In  the  next  exercise,  no  neuter  words  will  be  intro- 
duced, except  such  as  end  in  o-,  making  class  1st  in  the 
above  table. 

EXERCISE  27. 

1.  The  fortified  town  easily  keeps-off  the  enemy  (pi.).  2. 1  see  the 
dangerous  conflagration.  3.  You  mix  the  new  wines.  4.  We  fear  the 
savage  battle.  5.  Ye  hold  many  kingdoms.  6.  The  sharp  missiles 
alarm  the  soldiers.  7.  Long-enduring  joy  kept  possession  of  the  mind. 
8.  The  black  herd  immediately  devoured  the  fodder. 

battle,  proelio-j  n.  keep-off,  prohibe- 

black,  nigro-  keep-possession  of,  obtine- 

conflagration,  incendio-,  n.  kingdom,  regno-,  n. 

devour,  vora-  missile,  telo-,  n. 

easily,  facile.  long-enduring,  diuturno- 

fodder,  pabub-,  n.  mix,  misce- 

hold,  tene-  town,  oppido-,rL 

joy,  gaudio-,  n,  wine,  vino-,  n. 

EXERCISE  28. 

1.  Acutum  telum  audacem  aurigam  vulnerat.  2.  Magnum  incen- 
dium  miseras  mulieres  terret.  3.  Xova  gaudia  juvenem  animum  ex- 
citant. 4.  Nignim  armentum  campum  latum  percurrebat.  5.  Magna 
armenta  alo.  6.  Difficilem  rem  celeriter  conficio.  7.  Pater  benignus 
puerum  amabat.  8.  Parva  oppida  imperator  et  mHites  servabant. 


LESSON    XV. 

By  looking  back  to  §  I/,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  future 
tense  -stem  is  made  in  two  ways,  which  may  be  thus 
briefly  represented  : 


take  the  ending 

a,  e,  -b-  Call  this  the  ^-future. 

i,  u,  or  a  consonant,     e-  Call  this  the  e-future. 

NOTE.  —  1st.  The  to-future,  as  ending  in  a  consonant,  of  course  takes 
the  person-endings  given  in  the  second  column  hi  Lesson  VII. 

2<L  The  e-future  takes  the  person-endings  given  in  the  first  col- 
umn. 


24,  25.]  LESSON  XY.  25 

3d.  The  tense-ending  e  is  changed  to  a  in  the  1st  person  sing. 

24.  The  verb  i-,  "go,"  and  all  its  compounds,  takes  the  to-future. 

25.  The  verb  da-,  "give,"  keeps  the  vowel  short  before  all  syl- 
labic endings. 

EXAMPLES. 


Sing. 
Plur. 

1. 

2. 
3. 
1. 
2. 
3. 

1st.  Conj. 
ama- 
/  shall,      amabo, 
Thou  wilt,  amabis, 
He  will  •    amabit  ; 
We  shall,  amabimus, 
You  will,  amabitis, 
They  will,  amabunt. 

2d.  Conj.    4ffi.  Conj. 
.mone-            audi- 
monebo,        audiam, 
monebis,       audies, 
monebit  ;       audiet  ; 
monebimus,  audiemus 
monebitis,     audietis, 
monebunt.    audient. 

3d.  Conj. 
rear-       i-,  "go," 
regam,     Ibo, 
reges,       Ibis, 
reget;       ibit; 
regemus,  Ibiraus, 
regetis,     ibitis, 
regent     ibunt. 

The  pupils  had  best  now  commit  to  memory  the  end- 
ings of  the  second  declension  (o-stems),  and  the  examples 
given  therewith  on  p.  206.  As  we  have  now  spoken  of  neu- 
ter nouns  of  this  declension,  it  will  be  well  to  call  atten- 
tion to  the  declension  of  the  adjective  at  page  206,  which 
presents  the  neuter  forms,  as  well  as  the  masculine.  It  is 
recommended  that,  as  a  general  rule,  boys  be  required  to 
decline  an  adjective  only  in  the  gender  in  which  it  is  used 
at  the  time,  though  they  should  of  course  be  able  to  give 
all  the  forms  together. 

EXERCISE  29. 

1.  The  kind  master  will  gladly  undertake  the  business.  2.  I  will 
finish  the  new  buildings.  3.  You  will  seize  the  wooden  shield.  4. 
We  will  quickly  buy-up  the  ripe  corn.  5.  The  conquered  allies  will 
fear  the  adverse  javelins.  6.  Ye  will  preserve  (your)  allies  and  the  for- 
tified town.  7.  I  will  give  the  signal,  and  will  lead-up  the  auxiliary- 
forces.  8.  Gold  and  silver  will  not  procure  happiness. 

adverse,  adverse-  javelin,  pllo-,  n. 
auxiliary  forces,  auxilio-,  n.  (pi.)        lead-up,  addiic- 

building,  aedificio-,  n.  not,  non. 

business,  negotio-,  n.  procure,  para- 

buy-up,  coem-  ripe,  maturo- 

corn,  frumento-  signal,  signo-,  n. 

conquered,  victo-  silver,  argento- 

give,  da-  shield,  scuto-,  n. 

gold,  auro-,  n.  wooden, 
3 


26  LESSON  XYT.  [25. 

EXERCISE  30. 

1.  Atroces  canes  armentum  prohibebunt  2.  Dives  rex  oppidum 
ornabit.  3.  Adversa  proelia  imperatorem  perterreut.  4.  Improbum 
captlvum  interficiam.  5.  Praefectus  multa  auxilia  adducet  6.  Frater 
ignavus  nunquam  negotium  conficiet.  7.  Milites  fessi  scuta  et  pila 
deponebant.  8.  Graves  lapides  pastor  dejicit. 


LESSON    XVI. 

In  the  following  exercises  neuter  nouns  with  i-stems 
will  be  introduced,  forming  the  second  of  the  classes 
given  in  Lesson  XIV.  Neuter  adjectives  with  consonant- 
stems  will  be  also  used :  and  in  regard  to  these  it  is  to  be 
particularly  noted  that  they  take  the  ending  s  in  the  nom. 
and  ace.  sing,  neuter,  just  as  the  nom.  sing.  mas.  does. 
As  nouns  with  consonant  and  with  i-stems  have  been 
already  learned  by  heart,  it  will  be  well  that  now  the 
adjectives  given  at  page  202,  as  examples  of  the  com- 
plete declension  of  these  stems  should  be  committed  to 
memory. 

EXERCISE  31. 

1.  The  thin  net  will  shut  in  all  the  birds.  2.  The  wide  sheepfolds 
will  Confine  the  sheep.  3.  The  sweet  wine  hardly  filled  the  cask.  4. 
The  wise  plan  will  charm  the  unfortunate  common-people.  5.  The  calm 
sea  will  again  allure  the  travellers.  6.  A  soft  couch  will  support  the 
weary  woman.  7.  A  great  multitude  quickly  fills  all  the  seats.  8.  The 
messenger  undertakes  the  disgraceful  business. 

again,  rursus.  •    plan,  consilio-,  n. 

allure,  allic(i)-  -  reward,  praemio-,  n. 

bird,  avi-,  f.  sea,  mari-,  n. 

calm,  placido-  seat,  sedili-,  n. 

cask,  cado~,  m.  sheep,  ovi-,  f. 

couch,  cublti-,  n.  sheepfold,  ovili-,  n, 

faithful,  fideli-  shut-in,  includ- 

fitt,  comple-  similar,  simili- 

hardly,  scarcely,  vix.  soft,  molli- 

meadow,  prato-,  n.  sweet,  suavi- 

net,  reti-,  n,  thin,  tenui- 


25.]  LESSON  XYII.  27 

EXERCISE  32. 

1.  Fidelia  consilia  audio.  2.  Difficilia  negotia  conficiebam.  3. 
Suavia  vina  hauriara.  1.  Fer5x  consiliura  proponis.  5.  Ovile  novum 
vendebas.  6.  Simile  praemium  contemnes.  7.  Avis  tenue  rete  videt. 
8.  Acutura  pilum  impetum  prohibebat.  9.  Agricola  matiirum  fruraen- 
tum  habebat.  10.  Pretiosa  praemia  dabamus.  11.  Mollia  cubilia 
ornabatis.  12.  Feracia  prata  elves  arabant. 


LESSON    XYII. 

In  the  following  exercises,  neuter  nouns  in  es  or  os,  will 
be  introduced,  which  constitute  the  3d  class  in  the  table 
given  in  Lesson  XIV.  Their  complete  declension  can  now 
be  learned  as  given  at  page  202. 

EXERCISE  33. 

1.  The  heavy  load  will  weary  the  beast-of-burden.  2.  The  lieuten- 
ants and  centurions  were  eagerly  hastening  the  works.  3.  The  old 
wound  again  torments  the  unfortunate  beggar.  4.  The  waves  soon 
wear  away  the  soft  shore.  5.  Food  nourishes  the  body.  6.  The 
hungry  sailors  will  at-once  tear-off  the  hard  hides.  7.  The  huge  weight 
presses  down  the  light  ship.  8.  Faithful  citizens  always  keep  a  treaty. 

at  once,  statim.  press  down,  deprim- 

beast-of-burden,  jumento-  shore,  lltos- 

body,  corpos-  tear-off,  derip(i)- 

centurion,  centurion-  torment,  crucia- 

hard,  duro-  treaty,  foedes- 

hasten,  matura-  wave,  fluctu- 

hide,  tergos-  wear  away,  atter- 

huge,  ingent(i)-  weary,  fatlga- 

hungry,  jcjuno-  weight,  pondes- 

lieutenant,  legato-  work,  opes- 

load,  ones-  wound,  vulnes- 
nourish,  al- 

EXERCISE  34. 

1.  Jumentum  gravia  pondera  aegre  portabit.  2.  Dlligentes  fabri 
magnum  opus  cito  conficiebant.  8.  Multae  aves  litus  petent.  4.  Ve- 
tera  foedera  injuriam  vetabant.  5.  Fortes  colonl  novas  terras  statim 


28  LESSON  XYin.  [25 

petunt.  6.  Nemo  magnum  onus  libenter  portabit  7.  Multa  tergora 
coemo.  8.  Rex  omne  frumentum  coemet,  et  fortes  mflites  conscribet. 
9.  Turpe  vulnus  ignavus  miles  accipit.  10.  Miserum  corpus  acutus 
gladius  vulnerabat.  11.  Imprudens  consilium  stultum  centurionem 
fallebat  12.  Ingentia  onera  vix  sustinebimus. 


LESSON    XYIII. 

In  the  following  exercises  neuter  nouns  will  be  intro- 
duced belonging  to  the  4th,  5th  and  6th  classes,  as  given 
in  Lesson  XIV.  See  also  the  notes  in  that  lesson.  The 
declension  of  the  other  neuter  nouns  given  at  page  202 
can  now  be  learned  by  heart. 

EXERCISE  35. 

1.  The  sharp  spur  wounds  the  side.  2.  The  horse-soldier  lays-aside 
(his)  spurs.  3.  We  will  pay  all  the  tax  every  year.  4.  The  bold  king 
seized  the  valuable  taxes.  5.  The  fortunate  conquerors  shall  eat  corn 
and  honey.  6.  The  faithful  heart  cultivates  honor.  7.  Severe  pains 
were  attacking  the  knees.  8.  I  will  bury  the  corpse  in  the  morning. 

attack,  invad-  in  the  morning,  mane. 

bee,  api-,  f.  knee,  genu-,  n. 

contest,  certdmen-  pay,  pend- 

corn,  farr-,  n.  river,  flumen- 

corpse,  cadaver-,  n.  severe,  gravi- 

eat,  ed-  side,  lates- 

every  year,  quotannls.  spur,  calcdr(\)-,  n. 

fortunate,  ftlK^-  strength,  robor-,  n. 

grass,  gramen-  tax,  vectlgdl(i)-,  n. 

heart,  cord-,  n.  thigh,  femor-,  n. 

honey,  mett-,  n.  threshold,  llmen- 

hoiior,  honestat-  war,  beUo-,  n. 

EXERCISE  36. 

1.  Nigrae  oves  omne  gramen  celeriter  edent.  2.  Ferox  bellum  im- 
perator  suscipit.  3.  Misera  femora  robur  amittunt.  4.  Felix  perfuga 
vetus  limen  libenter  transit.  5.  Grave  vectigal  aegre  pendetis.  6. 
Jejunum  armentum  viride  gramen  cupide  edebat.  7.  Molle  cublle 
fessum  latus  fulcit.  8.  Ingens  flumen  omnes  pontes  deripit.  9.  Suave 
mel  apes  reportant  10.  Magnum  gaudium  corda  complebit 


26,  27.]  LESSON  XIX.  29 


LESSON    XIX. 

Compare  the  sentences — 

1.  The  slave  kills  the  master.     Servus  dominum  occidit. 

2.  The  slave  runs.  Servus  currit. 

26.  Verbs  like  that  in  the  second  sentence,  since  they 
do  not  speak  of  an  action  as  directed  towards  an  object, 
and  do  not  therefore  admit  an  accusative  case  after  them, 
are  called  Intransitive  verbs,  while  verbs,  like  that 
in  the  first  sentence,  which  have  been  almost  wholly  em- 
ployed hitherto,  are  called  Transitive  verbs. 

If  intransitive  verbs  are  connected  with  an  accusative 
case,  it  must  be  generally  by  the  help  of  a  preposition. 

27.  Prepositions  are  undeclined  words  (or  par- 
ticles), the  primary  use  of  which  was  to  express  the  rela- 
tive positions  of  things  in  space  /  for  example :  in  the 
sentences,  "  the  bird  is  upon  the  branch :"  "  he  goes  into 
the  wood :"  "  the  boy  sleeps  on  the  grass :"  the  words 
upon,  into,  on,  are  prepositions. 

In  Latin,  prepositions  are  only  followed  by  nouns  in 
either  the  accusative  or  ablative  case.  At  present  we 
shall  only  give  the  principal  ones  which  are  followed  by 
an  accusative  case. 

ad,  to.  ob  (towards),  on  account  of. 

ante,  before.  per,  through,  across. 

apud,  near.  post,  after. 

circum,  round.  praeter,  beside,  beyond. 

contra,  (facing),  against.      sub,  under. 

erga,  towards.  supra,  above. 

in,  into,  against.  trans,  across. 

inter,  between,  among.  ultra,  beyond. 

NOTE. — 1st.  Some  of  these  are  the  same  as  some  of  the  prefixes 
given  in  Lesson  VI. 

2d.  It  has  been  said  that  the  above  prepositions  are  followed  by  an 
accusative  case :  and  it  may  generally  easily  be  seen  that,  when  so  used, 
the  accusative  case  has  the  same  kind  of  meaning  as  it  has  always  had 
in  the  preceding  exercises:  viz.,  that  of  being  the  object  or  end  of  action 
or  motion. 

3* 


30  •  LESSON  XX.  [28. 

EXERCISE  37. 

1.  I  come  to  the  city.  2.  You  go-acrosthe  broad  river  to  the  fortified 
town.  3.  The  base  deserter  flees-away  into  the  thick  wood.  4.  The 
unfortunate  boy  falls-down  into  the  lake.  5.  We  will  dig  a  deep  ditch 
around  the  camp.  6.  Ye  were  carrying  the  fodder  across  the  wide 
plain.  7.  The  general  sends  the  conquered  enemy  (2)1)  under  the  yoke. 
8.  The  commander  led  (his)  army  beyond  the  mountain. 

camp,  castro-,  n.  plur.  run,  cure- 
deep,  alto-  thick,  denso- 
dig.  fod(i)-  wood,  silva- 
ditch,  fossa-  wide,  Idto- 
fall-down,  decid-  yoke,j'u</0-,  n. 
lake,  fact*- 

EXERCISE  38. 

1.  Imperator  milites  m  durum  bellum  dQcit.  2.  Hostes  impetum 
contra  densus  ordines  ficriter  faciuut.  3.  Nuvem  ad  iitus  appellebam. 
4.  Timida  avis  in  silvam  evolat.  5.  Gniivus  faber  difficilia  opera  cito 
conficiet.  6.  Yelox  equus  per  agros  currit.  7.  Acuta  calcaria  equum 
in  hostem  incitant  8.  Magistrum  in  viam  devoco. 


LESSON    XX. 

In  all  the  preceding  exercises  the  nominative  and  the 
accusative  cases  of  the  noun  have  been  the  only  ones 
used.  Those  exercises  ought  to  have  taught  the  pupils 
distinctly  and  unmistakably  that 

38.  (1)  The  nominative  case  with  an  active  verb  ex- 
presses the  doer  of  the  action  described  by  the  verb  •  it  is 
always  either  the  subject  of  the  sentence  (that  about  which 
the  assertion  is  made),  or  some  word  in  agreement  with 
the  subject. 

(2)  The  accusative  case  is  used  in  general  to  express 
that  which  is  the  object  of  an  action,  or  that  toward 
which  some  motion  is  directed. 

Let  these  two  principles  be  firmly  fixed  in  the  memory 
and  understanding  before  proceeding  further. 


29,  3O.]  LESSON  XX^s^-JLJjL^^  '  31 


Let  this  rule  also  be  learnt.  Motion  to  towns  or 
small  islands,  and  also  motion  homeward  (domu-),  or  to 
the  country  (rus-),  is  expressed  by  putting  the  proper 
names  of  towns  or  small  islands,  or  the  words  domu-  and 
rus-,  in  the  accusative  case  without  a  preposition.  As, 

Regulus  Carthaginem  redit.  Hegulus  returns  to  Car- 
thage. 

Ibant  domum  capellae.  The  she-goats  were  going 
home. 

30.  Some  verbs,  moreover,  which  signify  "  asking," 
"teaching,"  "concealing,"  are  followed  by  two  accusatives, 
one  expressing  the  person  and  the  other  the  thing.  As, 

Pacem  te  poscimus  omnes.    We  all  beg  peace  of  you. 
Docebopuerumillamartem.  Twill  teach  the  boy  that  art. 
Iter  omnes  celat.  He  conceals  the  road  from  all. 


EXERCISE  39. 

1.  All  the  soldiers  will  return  to  Rome.  2.  The  ambassadors  has 
tened  to  Carthage.  3.  The  master  taught  the  boys  grammar.  4.  The 
ambassadors  demanded-back  the  image  from-the-praetor.  5.  Caesar 
every-day  (quotldie)  kept-calling-for  (flagita-)  corn  from-the-Aedui.  6. 
Caesar  conceals  all  (his)  plans  from-the-enemy  (pi). 

Aedui,  Aeduo-  image,  simulilcro-,  n. 
ask,  roga-  master,  magistro- 
Carthage,  CartMgon-,  f.  mind,  meni(i}-,  f. 
conceal,  cela-  return,  redi- 
country,  rus-,  n.  praetor,  praetor- 
demand-back,  repose-  Saguntum,  Sagunto-,  n. 
grammar,  grammatica- 


EXERCISE  40. 

1.  Imperator  R5mam  legates  mittit.  2.  Consul  praetorem  senteutiam 
rogabit.  2.  Improbus  homo  rus  avolat.  4.  Multi  philosophl  uunquam 
domum  revenient.  5.  Deum  rogat  bonam  men  tern.  6.  Res  Romanes 
amicum  non  celabat.  7.  Pater  multas  res  utiles  f  ilium  docebit.  .8. 
Hannibal  Saguutum  magnas  copiis  ducit. 


32  LESSON  XXI.  [31-38. 


LESSON    XXI. 

The  next  case  to  be  treated  of  is  the  genitive. 

3 1 .  The  genitive  case  in  its  primary  meaning  appears 
to  have  denoted  the  source  from  which  something  comes : 
this  notion  is  very  commonly  expressed  in  English  by  the 
preposition  o/1,  as  in  the  words  "  by  order  of  the  king," 
which  implies  that  the  order  proceeded  from  the  king ; 
and  the  word  "  of"  so  often  expresses  the  meaning  of  the 
genitive  case  that  it  is  said  in  many  grammars  to  be  the 
sign  of  the  genitive  case.  It  will  be  best,  however,  to 
get  such  a  clear  notion  of  the  general  use  of  the  genitive 
case  as  may  enable  us  to  decide  when  it  is  proper  to  em- 
ploy it,  without  regard  to  the  particular  preposition 
which  may  happen  to  be  used  in  the  English. 

35J.  The  commonest  use  of  the  genitive  case  is  to 
limit  the  meaning  of  a  noun  or  adjec- 
tive. For  example,  compare  the  following  sentences : 
"The  soldiers  fight  bravely:"  "The  soldiers  of  the  tenth 
legion  fight  bravely."  It  is  clear  that  the  word  "soldiers" 
is  used  in  a  narrower  sense,  is  more  limited  or  confined 
in  its  application,  in  the  second  sentence  than  it  is  in  the 
first. 

This  limitation  is  generally  effected  by  mentioning — 

CaJl  these  the 
33.  1.  "What  is  productive  of  the  limited  noun,  subjective  genitive. 


34.2.  "  theo$a*of 

35.  3.  "  inclusive  of 

36.  4.  "  the  possessor  of 

37.  5.  "  connected  with 
3§.  6.  "  descriptive  of 


objective 
"  inclusive 
"  possessive  " 
"  conjunctive  " 
"  descriptive  " 


Thus,  in  the  following  sentences  we  have 

1.  The  command  of  the  king,  the  subjective  genitive. 

2.  The  love  of  virtue,  the  objective 

3.  A  part  of  the  night,  the  inclusive  " 

4.  The  boy's  book,  the  possessive  " 

5.  Caesar's  father,  the  conjunctive  " 

6.  A  man  of  virtue,  the  descriptive  " 


39,  4O.]  LESSON  XXII.  33 

39.  NOTE. — The  subjective   and  objective  genitives  may  be  most 
readily  distinguished  by  supposing  the  limited  twun  to  be  changed  to  the 
corresponding  verb,  and  then  seeing  whether  the  word  in  the  genitive 
would  stand  as  the  subject  or  as  the  object  of  it ;  for  example : 

(1.)  "  The  command  of  the  king"  becomes  "the  king  commands." 
(2.)  "  The  love  of  virtue"  becomes  "  I  love  virtue." 

40.  It  must  be  observed  particularly  that  the  descriptive  genitive 
in  Latin  can  never  be  employed  unless  an  adjective  is  joined  with  it; 
thus,  we  cannot  say  "homo  virtutis"  though  we  can  say  "homo  magnae 
viriaHs." 

As  it  is  very  important  that  this  lesson  should  be  well  understood, 
no  exercise  will  be  here  given;  but  it  is  recommended  that  the 
teacher  should  avail  himself  of  the  examples  given  in  the  subsequent 
English  exercises  to  impress  firmly  on  his  pupils'  minds  the  general  use 
of  the  genitive  case,  and  the  distinctions  in  the  mode  in  which  the 
limitation  is  effected.  Time  spent  on  this  and  on  still  further  enforcing 
the  fundamental  uses  of  the  nominative  and  accusative  cases,  as  stated 
in  the  preceding  lesson,  will,  it  is  firmly  believed,  be  employed  in  the 
best  possible  way.  Of  course  it  is  not  intended  that  the  above  distinc- 
tions will  meet  every  case,  but  only  that  jn  most  of  the  sentences  here- 
after given  one  or  other  of  them  will  be  clearly  applicable. 


LESSON    XXII. 

The  rules  for  forming  the  genitive  case  singular  and 
plural  are  presented  here  in  one  view  :  but  it  is  not  ne- 
cessary that  they  should  all  be  learned  at  once,  as  exer- 
cises wih1  be  given  upon  them  separately. 


-rum 


Sterna  ending  ia  a         *>  form  the  genitive  case 

grammars.  Singular.  Plural. 

1.  any  consonant,  3d.  add      is,  add  mil. 

2.  i,  3d.  "         s, 

3.  11,  4th.  "       -g, 

4.  €,  5th.  "        i, 

5.  o,  2d.          change  to  i, 

6.  a,  1st.         add  e,    making  a 

[diphthong. 

In  the  present  lesson  no  genitive  cases  will  be  intro- 
duced but  those  made  on  consonant-stems,  which  form 
the  first  of  the  classes  given  in  the  above  table. 


34  LESSON  XXm.  [4O. 

EXERCISE  41. 

1.  The  friends  of  the  powerful  chief  were  opening  the  gates  of  the 
city..  2.  The  death  of  the  bold  soldier  will  increase  the  fear  of  the 
consul.  3.  You  will  overcome  the  soldiers  of  the  legion.  4.  The  hope 
of  liberty  will  at  length  prevail- with  the  man's  brother.  5.  I  will  bury 
the  corpse  of  the  scout  to-morrow.  6.  The  fear  of  death  will  not  deter 
the  robber's  children.  7.  The  pain  of  the  wound  still  torments  the 
skilful  workman.  8.  "We  love  the  commander's  wise  son. 

at  length,  tandem.  liberty,  Tibertat- 

children,  ttbero-,  m.,  plur.  open,  aperi- 

death,  mort(i)-,  f.  overcome,  supera- 

deter,  deterre-  prevail-with,  permove- 

fear,  timor-  robber,  latron- 

hope,  spc-  scout,  expldrdtdr- 

increase,  auge-  still,  etiamnum. 

legion,  legion-,  L  to-morrow,  eras. 

EXERCISE  42. 

1.  Fidelis  servus  pecuniam  pastoris  servat.  2.  Arbores  veteris  ne- 
moris  multas  aves  tegunt.  3.  Pondus  oneris  equus  vix  sustinet.  4. 
Multi  milites  audacis  cohortis  aegre  aufugiunt.  5.  LIberi  mulierum 
montem  escendebant.  6.  Mors  consulis  omnes  incolas  urbis  terret. 
7.  Frlgidus  ventus  dolorem  vulneris  augebit.  8.  oratio  principis  ani- 
mos  mflitum  excitat. 


LESSON    XXIII. 

In  the  following  exercises  genitive  cases  will  be  intro- 
duced which  foil  under  the  second  class  in  the  table  given 
in  Lesson  XXII.,  viz.,  those  made  on  i-stems. 

It  is  assumed  that  the  pupils  are  now  able  to  decline 
perfectly  the  first  three  declensions  as  well  as  the  three 
imperfect  tenses  of  the  active  verb ;  let  them  now  learn 
by  heart  the  endings  of  the  4th  or  w-declension,  as  given 
at  page  207,  and  the  example  of  it :  and  let  this,  as  well 
as  the  others,  be  constantly  gone  over,  as  examples  of 
them  occur  in  the  reading  exercises ;  but  always  the  stem 
of  the  word  should  be  given  before  the  declension  is  pro- 


41,  42.]  LESSON  XXIII.  35 

ceded  with,  that  the  connection  between  the  declension 
and  the  stem-letter  may  become,  as  it  were,  intuitive. 


EXERCISE  43. 

1.  The  arrival  of  the  fleet  immediately  lessens  the  boldness  of  the 
faithless  multitude.  2.  The  fewness  of  the  ships  alarms  the  heart  of 
the  chiefs.  3.  The  enraged  woman  tears  the  gown  of  the  citizen.  4. 
The  multitude  of  bees  quickly  fills  the  hive.  5.  The  breadth  of  the 
river  does  not  deter  the  attack  of  the  bold  soldiers.  6.  The  skill  of  the 
careful  general  overcomes  all  the  difficulty.  7.  The  fierce  barking  of 
the  dog  does  not  increase  the  boldness  of  the  robber.  8.  The  wise 
shepherd  defends  the  health  of  (his)  sheep. 

41.  N.  B.  The  following  i-stems  omit  the  i  before  the  ending  11111 
of  the  genitive  plural :  cani-,  "  dog,"  juveni-,  "youth,"  vati-,  prophet,  strut-, 
"  heap,"  and  sometimes  a  few  others. 

-  42  •  There  are  some  nouns  with  t-stems  which  make  their  nom.  sing. 
as  if  from  a  stem  ending  in  e.  Such  words  will  have  the  nom.  sing. 
given  in  the  vocabularies. 

animal,  animal(i)-,  n.  fewness,  paucilat- 

arrival,  adventu-  health,  salut- 

barking,  latratu-  heap,  strui-,  f.,  n.  s.  strues. 

boldness,  audada-  htve,  alveari-,  n. 

breadth,  latiltidon-  offspring,  proli-,  f.,  n.  s.  proles. 

defend,  defend-  prophet,  vafo'-,  e.,  n.  s.  vates. 

enraged,  Irdto-  skill,  perltia- 

faithless,  inftdeli-  tear,  discind- 

rleet,  classi-,  f.  wait-far ^  expecta- 


EXERCISE  44. 

1.  Yelocis  navis  praefectus  insulam  statim  capit.  2.  Audacia  juve- 
num  miserum  captivum  incitat.  3.  Vatum  oratioues  collaudo.  4. 
Multitude  canum  tergora  animalium  cito  deripiet.  5.  Strues  lapidum 
cadaver  regis  tegit.  6.  Infidelis  plebis  clamores  animum  consulis  per- 
terrebunt.  7.  Proles  ducis  omnem  patris  pecuniam  amittit.  8.  For- 
tium  imperatorum  llberl  adventum  classis  expectant. 


LESSON  XXIV.  [42. 


LESSON    XXIV. 

In  the  following  exercises  genitive  cases  will  be  intro- 
duced made  upon  w-stems,  forming  the  third  of  the  classes 
given  in  the  table  in  Lesson  XXII. 

NOTE. — The  two  stems  gru-,  "  a  crane,"  and  SM-,  "  a  boar,"  or  u  a  sow," 
are  declined  like  the  consonant  or  third  declension,  and  therefore  make 
the  gen.  sing. Ci  gruis,"  '•  suis/'  Also,  anu-,  "  old-woman,"  has  sometimes 
"  anuis"  instead  of  "  anus." 

Let  the  declension  of  a  neuter  noun  in  w,  given  at  page 
207,  be  now  learned. 

EXERCISE  45. 

1.  The  wagons  will  carry  the  wounded-men  and  the  baggage  of  the 
brave  army  at-the-same-time.  2.  The  quickness  of  the  disgraceful  re- 
treat wearies  the  horses  and  oxen.  3.  I  was  waiting-lbr  the  result  of 
the  bold  attempt,  4.  We  feared  the  greatness  of  the  waves  and  tem- 
pests. 5.  You  gladly  assisted  the  daughters  of  the  magistrate.  6.  The 
size  of  the  horns  of  the  animal  will  astonish  the  hunter.  7.  The  chiefs 
of  the  senate,  not  (being)  ignorant  of  the  result  of  the  contest,  feared 
the  tribunes  of  the  common-people.  8.  I  secretly  open  all  the  gates  of 
the  house. 

astonish,  stupefac(i)-  ox,  bov-,  c.,  n.  s.  bos. 

attempt,  conatu-  prayer,  prec-,  f- 

baggage,  impedlmento-  qL  result,  evtntu- 

cavalry,  cquiidtu-  retreat,  receptit- 

greatness,  magnitHdon-  secretly,  clam. 

harbor,  portu-  size,  amplitudon- 

horn,  cornur,  n.  tempest,  tempestat- 

hunter,  venator-  tribune,  tribuno- 

ignorant,  igndro-  wouuded-man,  vulnerato- 
magistrate,  mayistratur 


EXERCISE  46. 

1.  Adventus  exercitus  spem  fortis  regis  augebat.     2.  Omnes  ordines 
peditatus  statim  mittam.     3.  Ob  magnitudinem  aestuum  litora  vltabiis 

4.  Preces  senatus  potentem  equitatus  praefectum  vix  permovebunt. 

5.  Post  mortem  magistrates  omnes  incolae  domum  vatis  petunt     6. 
Paucitas  portuum  navigationem  impediebat.     7.  Cornua  animalis  vena- 
torem  vulnerant.     8.  Du^cultas  conatua  liberos  latronis  deterrebat. 


42.]  LESSON  XXY.  37 


LESSON    XXV. 

In  the  following  exercises  genitive  cases  made  upon  e- 
stems*  will  be  introduced,  forming  the  4th  of  the  classes 
given  in  Lesson  XXII.  It  will  be  worth  while  now  for 
the  pupils  to  learn  by  heart  the  endings  of  the  e-declen- 
sion  (the  5th)  and  the  example  of  it,  as  given  at  page  207. 
When  this  is  thoroughly  learned,  all  the  declensions  of 
nouns  and  adjectives  should  be  kept  in  constant  practice, 
that  the  connection  between  the  stem-letter  and  a  partic- 
ular mode  of  declension  may  be  printed  indelibly  on  the 
memory. 

EXERCISE  47. 

1.  The  companions  of  the  fortunate  merchant  will  not  observe- 
thoroughly  the  similarity  of  the  thing.  2.  The  fear  of  destruction 
takes-possession-of  the  woman's  mind.  3.  The  appearance  of  the  army- 
in-battle-array  alarms  the  barbarians.  4.  Idle  boys  let-slip  much  of 
the  day.  5.  Little  of  hope  remains  (superest).  6.  I  shall  at-length  re- 
ceive the  reward  of  fidelity.  7.  The  wise  man  examines  carefully  the 
nature  of  things.  8.  Delay  of  few  days  destroys  the  hope  of  victory. 

appearance,  specie-  fidelity,  fide- 

army-in-battle-array,  acie-  let~slip,  omitt- 

barbarian,  barbaro-,  m.  little,  paulo-,  n. 

carefully,  dlligenter.  merchant,  mercdtdr- 

day,  die-,  m.,  also,  f.  in  sing.  much,  multo-,  n. 

delay,  mora-  nature,  ndtura- 

destroy,  perd-  observe-thoroughly,  perspic(i)- 

destruction,  pernicie-  similarity,  similitudon- 

examine,  explora-  take-possession-of,  occupa- 

few,  pauco-  victory,  victoria- 

NOTE. — The  two  words  re-  and  die-  are  the  only  ones  of  this  declen- 
sion which  are  commonly  used  in  the  genitive  plural. 


EXERCISE  48. 

1.  Rei  audacia  uxorem  fratris  stupefaciet.     2.  Perniciel  timorem 
clamor  multitudinis  auget.     3.  Similis  rerum  species  animum  hominis 

*  "Words  with  e-stems  have  the  stem- vowel  marked  long.     It  is  al- 
ways long,  except  (perhaps)  in  the  ace.  sing.,  and  sometimes  in  the  gen. 
and  dat.  sing,  of  the  words  spe-,  "  hope,"  re-,  "  thing, "./ide-,  "faith." 
4 


38  LESSON  XXYL  [43. 

fallit.  4.  eventus  multorum  dierum  tandem  perspicimus.  5  Laudes 
tidel  libenter  dlcam.  6.  Robur  aciel  diligenter  exploras.  7.  Muito.s 
dies  auxilium  et  salutem  cupide  expectamus.  8.  Mercator  maguas  spC-s 
alit 

43.  NOTE. — In  the  7th  sentence  of  this  exercise  we  have  multos 
dtis  used  to  express  duration  of  time.  This  is  a  very  common 
use  of  the  accusative  case  without  a  preposition. 


LESSON    XXYI. 

In  the  following  exercises  the  genitive  of  o-stems  will 
be  introduced,  forming  the  5th  of  the  classes  given  in  the 
table  in  Lesson  XXII. 


EXERCISE  49. 

1.  I  will  gladly  undertake  our  friend's  difficult  business.  2.  The 
remaining  nations  of  the  Gauls  feared  the  ancient  valor  of  the  Roman 
people.  3.  The  boy's  lather  has  the  hope  of  great  rewards.  4.  I  was 
pleading  the  prisoner's  cause  boldly.  5.  The  allies  were  there  waiting- 
for  the  arrival  of  the  great  king.  6.  You  seize  the  horses  of  the  war- 
like chief.  7.  The  inhabitants  of  the  village  behold  the  light  of  the 
conflagration.  8.  The  archers  and  slingers  will  make  a  beginning  of 
the  battle. 

ancient,  antiquo-  our,  nostro- 

archer,  sagittdrio-  people,  popido-,m. 

beginning,  initio-,  n.  plead,  dic- 

bekold,  conspic(i)-  remaining,  rdiquo- 

cause,  causa-  Roman,  Romdno- 
Gaul,  Gatto-,  m. 

light,  luinen-  there,  ibi. 
nation,  gent(t)-,  f. 

EXERCISE  50. 

1.  Socilpopuli  Roman!  adventum  exercitusibi  expectabunt.  2.  Duces 
Gallorum  conjurationem  facient.  3.  Victae  copiae  sociorum  celeriter 
aufugiunt  4.  Audacgs  incolae  munitorum  oppidorum  vectlgalia  quo- 
tannTs  non  pendent,  5.  Per  vias  oppidi  miserum  captlvum  deducis. 
6.  Classis  Roman!  populi  praefectum  ibi  expectat  7.  Milites  magnam 
mwltitudinem  fugitivorum  occldebant.  8.  Cadum  suavis  vini  accipio. 


43.]  LESSON  XXVIII. 


LESSON    XXVII. 

In  the  following  exercises  the  genitive  of  ^-sterns  will 
be  introduced,  forming  the  6th  of  the  classes  given  in 
Lesson  XXII. 


EXERCISE  51. 

1.  The  army  of  the  queen  was  cruelly  laying-" waste  the  fertile  country. 
2.  The  sudden  arrival  of  the  sailors  charms  the  inhabitants  of  the  beau- 
tiful island.  3.  I  highly-praised  the  exploit  of  the  bold  deserter.  4. 
The  learned  judge  will  fix  a  day  for-the-pleading  (genii)  of  the  cause. 
5.  The  hope  of  victory  rouses  the  brave  chief.  6.  The  girls,  (being) 
desirous  of  beautiful  clothes,  at  once  undertake  the  business. 

cruelly,  crudeliter.  learned,  docto- 

exploit,  facinos-  pleading,  diction- 

fix,  constitu-  sailor,  nauta- 

judge,  praetor-  sudden,  repentlno- 
lay  waste,  vasta- 


EXERCISE  52. 

1.  Bellum  maritimae  orae  conficiebam.  2.  Mercator  onrne  fruraen- 
tum  agricolarum  dlligentium  coemet.  3.  Duces  Gallorum,  cupidl  rerum 
novarum,  foedus  non  servant.  4.  Longarurn  navium  magnam  partera 
eodem  conduco.  5.  Nautae  repentlna  mors  f  iliam  agricolae  permovebit. 
6.  Leges  victae  civitatis  praetor  servabit.  7.  Barbaii  partem  Romanae 
provinciae  crudeliter  vastabant.  8.  Spes  victoriae  animos  mllitum 
acriter  incitat.  9.  Copiae  barbarorum  exercitum  Roraanorum  superant. 
10.  Agricolae  equl  pabulum  edunt.  11.  Vir  magnae  prudentiae  rem 
suscipiet.-  12.  Legatos  eximiae  virtutis  ad  victSrem  mittam. 


40  LESSON  XXV  ill.  [43. 


LESSON    XXVIII. 

As  this  will  be  the  last  lesson  in  which  the  only  cases 
introduced  are  the  nominative,  the  accusative,  and  the 
genitive,  it  is  particularly  desirable  that  teachers  should 
avail  themselves  of  every  means  of  ascertaining  whether 
their  pupils  thoroughly  understand  the  various  uses  of 
these  cases  heretofore  explained,  before  they  allow  them 
to  proceed  to  sentences  which  are  rendered  more  complex 
by  the  introduction  of  another  case. 

EXERCISE  53. 

1.  By-order  (jussu)  of  the  consul,  I  was  leading  a  large  part  of  the 
army  through  the  defile.  2.  An  orator  of  singular  eloquence  will  plead 
the  cause  of  the  wretched  prisoners.  3.  Cicero's  daughter  will  go  to-the- 
country  to-morrow.  4.  The  robbers  carry-off  the  riches  of  the  avaricious 
citizen.  5.  Love  of  glory  rouses  orators  and  poets.  6.  A  mind  con- 
scious of  right  never  fears. 

ability,  ingenio-,  n.  pass,  transig- 

avaricious,  avaro-  public,  publico- 

carry-off,  abrip(i)-  the  rest,  reliquo-,  n 

change,  muta-  right,  recto-,  n. 

conscious,  conscio-  shape,  figura- 

defile,  augustia-,  pL  singular,  singuldri- 

fifteen,  quindedm,  indecL  skilled,  perlto- 

foot,  ped-,  m.,  n.  s.  pes.  sleepless,  insomni- 

form,  forma-  surpassing,  excellent^*)- 

generally,  plerumque.  thirty,  irlgintd,  indecL 

life,  vita-  vigorous,  acrir 
mistress,  dominatrlo 

EXERCISE  54. 

1.  Omnium  animalium  formam  vincit  hominis  figura.  2.  Yir  excellen- 
tis  ingenii  pueros  regis  grammaticam  docet.  3.  Agricola  sapiens,  rel 
publicae  peritus,  Romanum  exercitum  servat.  4.  Fortuna  rerum  domi 
natrlx  vitas  hominum  plerumque  mutat.  5.  Pompeii  fllius  acre 
bellum  contra  inimlcos  patris  fortiter  gerebat.  6.  Reliquum  noctis 
mllites  transigebant  insomnes.  7.  Caesar  Aeduos  flagitabat  frumentum 
triginta  diemm.  8.  Milites  decimae  legionis  fossam  quindecim  pedum 
tandem  perficient. 


44.]    v  LESSON  XXIX.  41 


LESSON    XXIX. 

We  now  come  to  treat  of  the  dative  case. 

In  many  grammars  the  English  prepositions  "to"  and 
"  for"  are  said  to  be  the  signs  of  the  dative  case.  But 
as  there  are  very  many  instances  in  which  it  is  proper 
to  employ  those  words,  where  the  English  could  not  be 
translated  by  the  dative  case  in  Latin,  it  will  be  best  here, 
as  we  did  with  the  genitive,  to  ascertain  the  primitive 
meaning  of  the  dative  case,  and  then  to  exhibit  its  com- 
monest uses. 

44.  An  examination  of  the  Latin  and  kindred  lan- 
guages shows  that  the  primary  use  of  the  dative  case 
was  to  express  rest  at  a  place,  or  nearness  to  a 
place.  This  meaning  is  apparent  in  many  instances,  as 
will  be  seen  below.  But  the  derived  meanings  are  much 
the  most  common.  The  connection  of  these  derived 
meanings  with  the  primitive  one  will  be  clear  from  the 
consideration  that  in  general  tiling's  do  not  affect 
us  for  good  or  ill,  unless  they  are 
brought,  in  some  sense,  into  near  con- 
nection with  US.  We  find  accordingly  that  nearly 
always  this  notion  of  being  affected  either  ibr 
good  or  ill  is  expressed  by  putting  the  noun  denot- 
ing the  person  or  thing  so  affected,  into  the  dative  case. 

The  following  are  instances  in  which  the  dative  case 
would  be  proper  in  Latin. 


(!.}  I  remain  at  Rome,  maneo.  Romae.* 

(2.)  I  do  good  to  the  soldier,  mllitl  "benefacio. 

(3.)  The  wind  hurts  the  tree,  ventus  arborl  nocet. 

(4.)  I  give  the  money  to  the  boy,  do  puero  pecuniam. 

49.  *  That  Eomae  is  here  the  dative  or  locative  is  admitted  by  the  best 
authorities.  See  Anthon's  edition  of  Zumpt's  Grammar,  p.  287  ;  An- 
drews and  Stoddard's  Grammar  (1857),  p.  221 ;  Key's  Grammar  (1858), 
p.  183;  Donaldson's  Latin  Grammar,  p.  124;  Yarronianus,  p.  282. 

The  forms  Tarentl,  Lesbl,  etc.,  are  really  remnants  of  an  old  dative 
or  locative,  Tarentoi,  Lesboi.  Compare  the  Greek  use  of  the  locative, 
4» 


42  LESSOR  XXIX.  [45-49. 

The  following  names  are  convenient  to  express  each  of 
these : 

45.  (1.)  The  dative  of  place,  or  dativns  loci. 

46.  (2.)  The  dative  of  advantage,    ordativu*  co  ill  modi. 

47.  (3.)  The  dative  of  disadvantage, or  da tlv us  iucoiiiiiiodi. 

48.  (4.)  The  dative  of  transmission,  or  dativiistraiisniissioiiis. 

The  three  last  may  perhaps  be  expressed  sufficiently 
by  calling  each  of  them  a  Dative  of  interest. 

As  was  done  in  treating  of  the  genitive,  exercises  will 
be  omitted  in  this  lesson,  to  give  the  teacher  an  oppor- 
tunity of  impressing  the  above  principles  and  distinctions 
upon  the  understanding  of  his  pupils.  It  will  be  ob- 
served in  the  third  of  the  above  instances  that  the  dative 
case  is  often  proper  in  Latin  where  the  English  idiom 
uses  a  regular  transitive  verb,  and  therefore  employs  no 
preposition.  The  verbs  which  require  a  dative  case  in 
Latin,  while  the  corresponding  English  ones  take  the 
accusative,  will  be  marked  in  the  vocabularies  by  the  syl- 
lable " dot"  printed  after  them.  Sometimes,  it  will  be 
observed,  Latin  verbs  take  a  dative  and  an  accusative 
case  at  the  same  time :  these,  of  course,  are  ah1  transitive 
verbs,  which  take  their  object,  as  usual,  in  the  accusative 
case,  but  require  a  dative  case  also  in  one  of  the  senses 
given  above. 

It  is  hoped  that  teachers  will  use  the  ensuing  English 
exercises  to  impress  these  facts  and  distinctions  on  the 
minds  of  .their  pupils,  before  they  have  to  write  any  sen- 
tences. 

OIKOI,  "at  home,"  with  the  regular  and  more  recent  dative,  OLKU. 
We  find,  moreover,  Tyro,  "at  Tyre,"  in  Virg.  Aen.  IV.,  36  (Wagner), 
and  Luvinio,  "at  Lavinium,"  in  Liv.  V.,  52  (Alschefski).  And  in  the 
Sd  declension  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  forms  Cartfwgim.  Tiburl,  etc., 
are  proper,  though  they  were  shortened  by  the  poets.  We  have  Tiburl 
in  Cic.  ad  Alt,  XVI..  ?>.  1,  (Nobb.e).  Of  course  in  the  same  way.  doml, 
hurnl,  mUitiae,  run,  6e//7,  are  locatives ;  and  as  we  have  seen  above  that 
we  find  the  regular  dative  form  for  the  locative,  so  good  MSS.  give 
alienae  domul  in  Cic.  Tusc.  L  22,  51.,  though  Orelli  reads  doml.  There 
are  many  other  instances  of  so-called  genitives,  which  are  best  explained 
as  locatives. 


49.]  LESSON  XXX.  43 


LESSON    XXX. 

The  following  table  presents  the  modes  of  forming 
the  dative  case  singular  and  plural  for  nouns  of  various 
stems. 

For  Stems  Declension  as  given    to  make  the  dative 

ending  in  in  the  Grammars.  Singular.  Plural. 

1.)  any  consonant,  3d.        add  I,  add  ibUS. 

n,  4th.        "   "  "    bus. 

e,  5th.        "    "  "       " 

i,  Bd.kngthenl,  "       " 

o,  2d.       "       o,  change  to  is. 

a,  1st.       add  e,  making  a       "         " 

[diphthong. 


NOTE. — In  class  (2),  the  u  of  the  stem  is  generally  changed  to  i  before 
the  ending  bus 

In  the  following  exercises  nouns  of  the  first  three  classes 
of  the  above  table  will  be  introduced. 


EXERCISE  55. 

1.  "We  were  selling  bread  and  eggs  to  the  traveller.  2.  I  gladly 
grant  the  remaining  part  of  the  village  to  the  army.  3.  The  wise  mer- 
chant persuades  the  king.  4.  The  violence  of  the  storm  is  injurious  to 
the  flowers.  5.  We  will  set-over  the  affair  the  skilful  workman.  6. 
The  cruel  conqueror  of  the  state  did  not  spare  the  multitude  of  women 
and  children.  7.  The  faithless  deserter  will  favor  the  attempts  of  the 
enemy.  8.  The  joyful  multitude  gives  thanks  to  the  merciful  magis- 
trate. 

be  injurious  to,  noce-,  dot.  merciful,  dement(i)- 

bread,  pani-,  m.  persuade,  persuade-,  dot. 

cruel,  crudeli-  set-over,  praefic(i)-,  dot. 

egg,  ovo-,  n.  spare,  pare-,  dat. 

favor,  fave-,  dat.  thanks,  gratia-,  plur. 

grant,  conced-,  violence,  vls(i}-,  f.  n.  s.  vis.* 

give  (as  thanks),  ag-,  village,  vico-,  m. 

*  The  stem  of  this  word  is  probably  that  given  in  the  text,  though 
the  singular  is  inflected  as  if  from  vl-. 


44  LESSON  XXXL  [49. 


EXERCISE  56. 

1.  Feroci  victor!  non  favemus.  2.  Multitudini  captlvorum  llberta- 
tem  concedemus.  3.  Sapiens  princeps  senatul  facile  persuadebit.  4. 
Yeteri  arbori  veutl  et  imbres  nocebant.  5.  ExercituI  sociorum  panem 
et  vlnura  dabimus.  6.  Sacerdotibus  gratias  agebam.  7.  Ferocibus 
gentibus  rex  magistratum  statim  praeficit  8.  AudacI  exploratori 
parco. 


LESSON    XXXI. 

In  the  following  exercises  examples  of  the  dative  made 
upon  t-stems  will  be  introduced.  These  form  the  4th 
class  given  in  Lesson  XXX. 


EXERCISE  57. 

1.  You  resisted  the  brave  citizen  boldly.  2.  The  wise  inhabitants 
favored  the  useful  thing.  3.  Ye  will  give  great  rewards  to-the-brave 
citizen.  4.  The  prudent  consul  carefully  provides-for  all  the  events  of 
a  long  war.  5.  Our  enemies  cruelly  betray  the  deserter  to-the-power- 
ful  magistrate.  6.  I  will  put-forth  a  new  plan  to-the-citizen.  7. 
Thieves  generally  prefer  nights  to-days.  8.  The  joyful  girl  will  give 
water  to-the-birds. 

"betray,  prod-  prudent,  prudent(i)- 

night,  noct(i}-,  f.  resist,  resist-,  dot, 

prefer,  antepon-,  dot.  sad,  tristi- 

providefor,  prospic(i)-,  dat.  useful,  utili- 


:  EXERCISE  58. 

1.  Tristi  patri  fllius  crudelis  non  prospicit.  2.  FortI  cohortl  mollia 
cubHia  incolae  stemunt.  3.  Honestae  mortl  turpitudinem  non  antepo- 
nebat.  4.  Saevi  lupl  ovilibus  nocent.  5.  Densum  nemus  avibus  amplam 
domum  praebet.  6.  ClassI  Romanorum  hiems  valde  nocebat.  7.  Cos- 
tra  hostibus  turpiter  prodes.  8.  Civibus  omnia  frumenta  vendimus. 


49.]  LESSON  XXXII.  45 


LESSON    XXXII. 

In  the  following  exercises  dative  cases  made  upon  o- 
stems  will  be  introduced,  forming  the  5th  of  the  classes 
given  hi  the  table  in  Lesson  XXX. 


EXERCISE  59. 

1.  The  brave  nations  will  willingly  submit  to-the-Roman  people.  2. 
The  general  sets  the  bold  soldier  over-the-hostile  town.  3.  Unfortu- 
nate prisoners  often  prefer  death  to-sad  exile.  4.  Ye  will  not  betray 
the  hostages  to-the-enraged  barbarians.  5.  The  slowness  of  the  enemy 
will  bring  safety  to-our  allies.  6.  The  cruel  king  was  staying  at- 
Gabii.  7.  The  army  will  not  trust  to-the-foolish  general.  8.  The 
centurions  are  selecting  a  place  suitable  for-the-camp. 

attend  to.  stude-,  dat.  report,  nuntia- 
bring  to,  aflfer-,  dat.  select,  delig- 
exile,  exsilio-,  n.  set-against,  oppon-,  dat. 
fiery,  igneo-  slowness,  tarditdt- 
Gabii,  Gabio-,  m.  plur.  stay,  remain,  mane- 
hostile,  hostlli-  submit,  obtempera- 
often,  saepe.  suitable,  idoneo- 
place,  loco-,  m.  (also  n.  in  pi.)  trust  to,  believe,  cred-,  dat. 


EXERCISE  60. 

1.  Legibus  clvitatis  diligenter  studeo.  2.  Improbls  puefis  magister 
nunquam  credebat.  3.  Spem  salQtis  fesso  militl  adventus  navis  afife re- 
bat.  4.  Praefectus  multum  pabulum  hostlli  oppido  imperabit.  5. 
Pulcro  flori  sol  igneus  nocet.  6.  Laetus  explorator  adventum  exerci- 
tus  miseris  clvibus  nuntiat.  7.  Miles  ligneum  scutum  tells  hostium 
opponebat.  8.  Diem  audacl  conatui  idoneam  statim  constituam. 


46  LESSON  XXXIT.  [49. 


LESSON    XXXIII. 

In  the  following  exercises  datives  made  upon  ct-stems 
will  be  introduced,  forming  the  6th  of  the  classes  given 
in  Lesson  XXX. 

EXERCISE  61. 

1.  You  will  buy  clothes  suitable  for  your  beautiful  daughter.  2.  The 
army  of  Hannibal  remained  at-Capua  many  mouths.  3.  The  conquered 
army  will  make  a  departure  like  a  flight  (dat.).  4.  The  foot-soldiers 
bring  assistance  to-the-troops  of  horse-soldiers.  5.  I  will  impose  severe 
labors  on-the-slothful  maid-servants.  6.  The  consul  remained  in-the- 
couutry  (dat.)  during  (per)  the  whole  assembly.  7.  The  general  remained 
the  whole  night  at-his-own-house  (suae  doml).  8.  I  promise  many 
beautiful  things  to  the  girls. 

assembly,  comitio-,  n.  pL  month,  mensi-,  m. 

assistance,  subsidio-,  n,  promise^  promitt- 

Capua.  Capuar  Rome,  Roma- 

departure,  profection-  slothful,  pigro- 

Hannibal,  Hannibal-,  m.  troop,  tvrma- 

impose,  impo^dai.  your,  tuo- 

EXERCISE  62. 

1.  Fessi  legionis  milites  turmls  equitum  aegre  resistunt.  2.  Capuae 
multos  equos  et  multum  frumentum  coemo.  3.  Praefectus  feracibus 
insulls  frumentum  pabulumque  imperat  4.  Potentes  principes  regmae 
libenter  parent.  5.  Ignavi  consules  Romae  mauebant.  6.  Stultis 
incolis  non  facile  persuades.  7.  Victi  mllites  gladios  et  pila  legatis 
tradunt.  8.  Principes  civitatis  agriculturae  student.  9.  Consul  suam 
domum  venit.  10.  Consul  suae  doml  manet.  11.  Tarquiuius  Gabios 
fugit.  12.  Tarquinius  Gabiis  nianebat. 


LESSON    XXXIV. 

All  the  forms  of  the  dative  case  have  now  been  treated 
of,  and  the  teacher  will,  it  is  hoped,  be  careful  in  these 
concluding  exercises  to  see  that  his  pupils  have  com- 
pletely mastered  the  principles  and  the  forms  already 
given. 


5O,  51-1  LESSON  XXXIV.  47 

It  will  have  been  observed  that  many  of  the  verbs  which 
are  followed  by  a  dative  case  are  compound  ones.  This 
general  rule  had  best  be  learned. 

50.  Verbs   compounded  with   prefixes 
which  denote  "  nearness  to?"  arc  followed 
by  a  dative  case. 

51.  The  datwus  incommodl  is  often  used  in  speaking 
of  acts  done  to  a  person  or  thing,  where  we  should  rather 
use  the  genitive  or  the  ablative,  as, 

Linguam  ei  praecidam,  I  will  cut  his  tongue  off  (for  him). 
Homini  vitam  eripit,  He  takes  the  mail's  life  ai0ay(for  him). 


EXERCISE  63. 

1.  The  foolish  people  often  give  (sing.)  honors  to-unworthy  (men). 
2.  We  owe  reverence  to-our  parents.  3.  New  countries  will-be-added 
(acccd-)  soon  to  the  Roman  empire.  4.  "We  prefer  the  virtues  of  the 
soul  to-the-goods  (bono-)  of  the  body.  5.  The  orator  will  place-upon 
the  free  necks  of  the  citizens  a  yoke  of  slavery.  6.  The  consul  exposes 
(his)  life  to-the-missiles  of  the  enemy. 

affection,  caritat-  innocent,  innocent(i)- 

advantage,  utilitat-  neck,  cervlc-,  f. 

lite,  morde-  old-age,  senectut- 


&p^  erip(i)-,  put-behind,  i.  e.,  )  nns.thahp 
duck,  anat-.  f.  esteem-less,        \  p( 

empire,  imperio-,  n.  reverence,  reverentia- 

expose,  objic(i)-  slavery,  servitut- 

finger,  digito-,  m.  stratagem,  dolo-,  m. 

free,  libero-  take-away,  adim- 

give-way,  succumb-  tender,  tenero- 

hen,  galllna-  unworthy,  indigno- 

honor,  honor-    .  virtue,  virtut- 
impress,  imprim- 

EXERCISE  64. 

1.  Mors  sola  innocentem  fortunae  eripit.  2.  Imperator  Hbertatera 
civibus  statim  adimet.  3.  Tarquinius  eventum  doll  Gabils  expecta- 
bat.  4.  Bom  magistii  utilia  praecepta  mentibus  tenerls  fideliter  impri- 
munt.  5.  Iratae  feles  digitOs  puellis  mordent.  6.  Anatum  ova 
galllnis  saepe  supponimus.  7.  Vir  magnus  senectuti  nunquam  succum- 
bet  8.  Consul  filii  caritatem  publicae  QtilitatI  posthabet. 


48  LESSON  XXXV.  "[52-58. 


LESSON    XXXV. 

The  last  case  to  be  treated  of  is  the  abla- 
tive. The  name  given  to  the  case  implies  that  the 
grammarians  supposed  the  characteristic  meaning  of  it 
to  be  connected  with  the  act  of  removing  or  separating 
one  thing  from  another.  This,  it  will  be  seen,  is  often 
the  force  of  the  ablative.  But  there  are  several  uses  of 
it  which  cannot  be  explained  by  this  notion,  and  in  which 
this  case  is  closely  allied  to  the  dative,  in  its  proper 
sense,  as  denoting  locality  or  rest  in  a  place.  And,  as 
the  ablative  has  always,  in  Latin,  the  same  form  as  the 
dative  in  the  plural,  and  not  seldom  in  the  singular,  it  is 
thought  that  the  case,  as  it  exists,  may  be  in  reality  the 
result  of  the  gradual  approximation  in  form  of  cases 
themselves  originally  different ;  namely,  the  dative  and  a 
true  ablative  (or  removal-case)  existing  in  the  oldest  pe- 
riod of  the  language.  However  this  may  be,  it  is  only 
necessary  here  to  state  the  commonest  uses  of  the  abla- 
tive, and  to  illustrate  them  by  examples ;  by  the  help  of 
which,  and  the  English  sentences  in  the  ensuing  exer- 
cises, it  is  hoped  that  a  sufficiently  clear  conception  of 
the  proper  mode  of  employing  this  case  may  be  obtained, 
before  the  pupils  proceed  any  further. 

The  ablative  case  then  is  used  to  express — 

53.  (1.)  The  place  where  a  thing  is  done,  called  the  ablative  of 
locality. 

54.  (2.)  The  time  when  a  thing  is  done,  called  the  ablative  of  TIIHE 
WHEff. 

55.  (3.)  The  manner  in  which  a  thing  is  done,  called  the  ablative  of 
manner. 

56.  (4.)  The  circumstances  under  which  a  thing  is  done,  called  the 
ablative  of  circumstances. 

57.  (5.)  The  respect  in  which   an  assertion  holds   true,   called  the 
ablative  of  limitation. 

5§.  (6.)  The  condition  or  quality  of  a  thing,  called  the  ablative  of 
DESCRIPTION. 


59-64.J  LESSON  XXXV.  49 

59.  (7.)  The  point  from  which  a  removal  takes  place,  called  the  ablative 
of  separation. 

60.  (8.)  The  source  or  cause  from  which  a  thing  arises,  called  the  ab- 
lative of  origin  - 

61.  (9.)  The  V  wins  or  instrument  by  which  a  thing  is  done,  called 
the  ablative  of  MJEAWS. 

62.  (10.)  The  price  at  which  a  thing  is  bought  or  valued,  called  the  ab- 
lative of  PJRICJE.* 

Very  frequently  the  force  of  the  ablative  in  these  va- 
rious uses  is  rendered  more  distinct  by  the  use  of  the 
prepositions,  which  are  given  below.  But  in  the  case 
of  those  which  are  printed  in  capitals  a  preposition  is  sel- 
dom, if  ever,  employed.  The  particular  facts  connected 
with  this  subject  must  be  learned  from  the  grammars  or 
from  observation.  But  the  following  rules  are  sufficiently 
clear  to  deserve  mention  here : 

63.  The  ablative  of  locality  nearly  always  requires  a 
preposition  unless  an  adjective  is  joined  with  it. 

64.  The  ablative  of  description  always  requires 
an  adjective  with  it,  without  a  preposition;  cf.  the 
note  on  the  descriptive  genitive  in  §  40. 

The  following  may  be  taken  as  examples  of  each  of  the 
above  uses : 
The  ablative  of 

1.  ^Locality.    Opportune  loco  castra  posuit.    He  pitched  the  camp 
in  a  favorable  place. 

2.  Time  wlieil.    Eadem  nocte  templum  deflagravit.    The  same 
night-  the  temple  was  burnt 

3.  ITIanner.    Silentio  copias  eduxit.  He  led  out  the  troops  in  silence. 

4.  Circumstances.    Magno  comitatu  legatl  veniunt.     The  am- 
bassadors come  with  a  great  company. 

5.  It  imitation.    Lepore  omnibus  praestitit.    In  wit  he  excelled  all 

6.  Description.     Rex  statQra  fuit  humilL     The  king  was  of 
small  stature. 

7.  Separation.     Corintho  fugit.     He  fled  from  Corinth. 

8.  Origin.     Mercurius  Jove  natus.    Mercury  born  of  Jupiter. 

9.  Means.     Tauii  corriibus  se  tutantur.     Bulls  defend  themselves 
with  their  horns. 

10.  JPrice.     Vile  est  viginti  minis.    It  is  cheap  at  twenty  minac. 

*  The  first  six  of  the  above  uses  are  supposed  to  belong  to  the  ab- 
lative in  consequence  of  its  relation  to  the  dative.   The  rest  are  thought 
to  be  derived  from  the  notion  of  separation  or  removal. 
5 


50  LESSON  XXXYI.  [65-67. 

60.  It  has  been  said  that  the  ablative  case  is  very 
often  joined  with  prepositions  in  some  of  the  foregoing 
uses.  The  principal  prepositions  that  are  joined  with  the 
ablative  are  the  following,  with  the  annexed  meanings : 

a,  ab  or  abs,  from,  by.  e  or  ex,  out  of. 

absque,  without.  prae,  before. 

cum,  along  with,  with.  pro,  before,  instead  of. 

de,  down  from,  concerning.  sine,  without. 

66.  The  following  also  govern  the  ablative,  with  the 
annexed  meanings,  when  they  do  not  imply 

motion.     Otherwise  they  are  usually  followed  by  the 
accusative. 

in,  in.  subter,  under. 

sub,  under.  super,  above. 

This  lesson  has  now  extended  to  a  considerable  length ; 
but  it  was  thought  best  to  put  what  was  to  be  said  in  one 
place.  No  exercises  will  be  given  here,  that  teachers  may 
have  an  opportunity  of  impressing  these  particulars  on  the 
minds  of  their  pupils.  The  sentences  in  the  ensuing  Eng- 
lish exercises  will,  it  is  hoped,  supply  a  sufficient  number 
of  examples  for  this  purpose. 


LESSON    XXXVI. 

671.  The  following  table  presents  in  one  view  the  mode 
of  forming  the  ablative  case  singular  and  plural. 

to  form  the 
M  ""*  ^  *lur' 


)-a  consonant,     3d.  add  e.                            add  ifous, 
i,                                   3d.  change  I  to  e,                               foils. 
H,                                4th.  lengthen  stem-vowel,    "        " 

e,                           5th.     "                  "              "      " 

o, 

2d. 

change  O  to  is. 

a, 

1st       " 

i(                                          ..            .»       ..      it 

6§.]  LESSON  XXXVI.  51 

6§.  NOTE. — 1st.  Many  words  with  i-stems,  particularly  neuter 
nouns  and  all  adjective§,  make  the  ablative  singular  by 
lengthening  the  stem-vowel  like  other  vowel -stems. 

2d.  Adjectives  printed  like  ferac(i}-  generally  make  the  ablative  sin- 
gular by  lengthening  the  i. 

3d.  The  ablative  plural  is  always  the  same  in  form  as  the  dative 
plural. 

In  the  following  exercises  words  with  any  of  the  above 
stems  will  be  introduced,  as  there  is  so  much  similarity  in 
the  mode  of  formation  that  it  is  thought  no  difficulty  will 
be  found  in  the  application  of  the  rules. 


EXERCISE  65. 

1.  I  will  send  all  the  women  and  children  ont-of  the  city  by-night. 
2.  The  bold  hunter  will  wound  the  wild-boar  with-a-spear.  3.  In-the- 
course-of  (de)  the  third  watch  the  consul  leads-out  (his)  army  from  the 
camp.  4.  The  stag  runs-down  from  the  mountain  with-great  quick- 
ness. 5.  The  victory  will  cost  the  Carthaginians  (dot.)  much  blood 
and  many  wounds.  6.  The  bold  shepherd  presses  the  snake  with-(his)- 
foot.  7.  He  was  buying  the  books  at-a-small  price.  8.  I  shall  escape 
out-of  the  wood  along-with  the  guide. 

blood,  sanguin-,  m.  n.  s.  sanguis.        quickness,  cekritat- 

book,  libro-,  m.  run-down,  decurr- 

Carthaginian,  Poeno-,  m.  small,  parvo- 

cost  (prop,  stand),  sta-  spear,  hasta- 

escape,  effug(i)-  third,  tertia- 

lead  out,  educ-  watch,  vigilia- 
price,  pretio-,  n. 


EXERCISE  66. 

1.  Ex  flumine  in  silvam  celeriter  fugiemus.  2.  In  litore  turris 
stabat.  3.  Celeritate  periculum  effugiam.  4.  Cum  custode  ex  carcere 
clam  exibis.  5.  Piscatorum  uxores  in  monte  stabunt.  6.  Nigrum 
anguem  sine  timore  tangebas.  7.  Multitudine  telorum  hostes  prohi- 
bebamus.  8.  Nostrae  copiae  a  litore  eras  discedent. 


62  LESSON  XXXVm.  [68. 

LESSON    XXXVII. 

EXERCISE   67. 

1.  We  will  encamp  in-a-level  place.  2.  At  Caesar's  coming  into 
Gaul,  the  Aedui  held  the  chief-power.  3.  I  will  easily  persuade  the 
slave  by-the-hope  of  liberty.  4.  You  will  soon  learn  from  the  brave 
inhabitant  concerning  the  danger  of  the  lieutenant  and  the  legion.  5. 
At  the  third  hour  of  the  day  we  inform  the  consul  of  (de)  the  destruc- 
tion of  the  cohort. 

Caesar,  Caesar-  Gaul,  Gallia- 

chief-power,  principafat-  hour,  hora- 

coming,  adi-entu-  inform,      certior-  fac(i)- 

destruction,  interitu-  learn,  cognosc- 

encamp,  consld-  level,  aequo- 

EXERCISE  68. 

1.  Praefectum  de  adventu  exercitus  epistola  certiorem  facio.  2. 
Milites  ex  nave  in  mare  audacter  desiliunt.  3.  Hostes  cum  tertia 
pane  copiarum  trans  fliiruen  considebant.  4.  Prudens  imperator  castra 
aperto  loco  ponet.  5.  Dicta  crudelium  latronum  mulieres  magno  dolore 
afficient. 


LESSON    XXXYIII. 

EXERCISE  69. 

1.  Te  were  surrounding  our  foot-soldiers  with  cavalry  and  chariots 
at-the-same-time.  2.  Meanwhile  the  prudent  centurion  surrounds  the 
camp  on  (ex)  every  side  with  a  high  rampart.  3.  The  messenger  carries 
the  report  of  (de)  our  victory  to  the  city  with-incredible  quickness.  4. 
Ambassadors  often  came  from  the  citizens  to  Caesar  about  (de)  peace. 
5.  The  shepherds  generally  lived  on-milk  and  flesh,  and  clothed  (their) 
bodies  with-skins  of  animals. 

ambassador,  legato-  meanwhile,  interea. 

chariot,  essedo-,  n.  milk,  loot-,  n. 

clothe,  vesti-  rampart,  vallo-,  n,  and  m, 

flesh,  caron-,  C  (o  omitted  ex-        report,  fama- 

[cept  in  nom.  s.)        side,  part(i)-,  £ 

incredible,  incredibili-  skin,  petti-,  £ 
live,  viv- 


69.]  LESSON  XXXIX.  53 

EXERCISE  70. 

1.  Aeduos  praecipuo  honore  semper  habebam,  pro  antlqua  et  con- 
stant! fide  in  Romanum  populum.  2.  Repenting,  re  perterritl,  principes 
barbarorum  trans  latum  flumen  in  suos  fines  magno  cum  periculo  re- 
cedent.  3.  Prima  luce  castra  ex  aequo  loco  movebit.  4.  Homines 
constant!  fide  collaudo.  5.  Hora  die!  circiter  tertia  laetl  incolae  de 
victoria  nostra  ex  fugitive  cognoscent. 


We  have  now  spoken  of  all  the  cases  of  nouns  except 
the  vocative,  or  the  case  used  in  speaking  to  a  person. 
This  case  is  invariably  the  same  as  the  nominative,  except 
in  the  singular  of  the  2d  declension  (o-stems)  ;  and  of 
these,  those  ending  in  ro-,  which  make  their  nom.  sing. 
in  er,  have  the  same  form  for  the  vocative  and  the 
nominative,  as  have  all  neuter  nouns.  On  this  account, 
the  vocative  case  has  been  omitted  in  the  tables  of  declen- 
sion, as  causing,  if  inserted  there,  needless  repetition.  It 
will  have  been  learned  from  the  table  of  the  2d  declension, 
that  in  the  only  case  where  the  vocative  differs  from  the 
nominative,  it  is  made  by  changing  o  of  the  stem  into  e. 
Proper  names  ending  in  io,  and  the  words  filio-,  "  son," 
and  genio,  "guardian  spirit,"  contract  the  letters  ie  of  the 
vocative  into  i,  as  Virgilio-  makes  Virgili,  filio-,  fill,  and 
genio,  gem. 

As  there  is  little  peculiarity  in  the  use  of  this  case,  it 
is  not  thought  necessary  to  insert  any  exercises  upon  it. 


LESSON    XXXIX. 

69.  As  adjectives  denote  qualities  as  possessed  by  the 
things  represented  by  nouns,  and  those  qualities  are  pos- 
sessed in  different  degrees,  it  is  necessary  to  have  modes 
of  indicating  this  :  and  these  forms  or  modes  of  expres- 
sion are  called  in  grammar  "  degrees  of  compar- 
ison." What  these  are,  and  the  mode  of  forming  them 
in  English,  will  be  at  once  seen  from  the  following  sen- 
tences : 
5* 


54  LESSON  XXXIX.  [7O-73. 

.Charles  is  iaU.  Positive  degree. 

Charles  is  taller,  or  more  tall  than  John.    Comparative  degree. 
Charles  is  the  tallest  of  the  family.  Superlative  degree. 

Of  course  the  Latin  language  must  have  means  of  ex- 
pressing these  same  distinctions.  We  must  now  show 
what  these  are: 

70.  The  general  rule  in  Latin  is  this — 

If  the  stem  end  in  a  vowel,  omit  it,  and  then 

The  Comparative  is  made  by  adding  the  ending  ior- 

The  Superlative  i»*iuio- 

To  this  general  rule  we  have  the  following  exceptions : 

71.  (1.)  If  the  stem  end  in  s,  r,  ro,  fi,  the  super- 
lative ending  is  rilUO  ,  and  if  the  r  is  not  preceded  by 
e,  an  e  must  be  inserted  there ;  note  also,  that  if  the  stem 
end  in  S  the  S  is  changed  to  r. 

72.  (2.)  For  the  words 


•Hi-,  difficili-,  } 
nil-,  dissimili-,  > 
icili-,  hwmiU-,  ) 


facili-, 

simili-,  dissimili-,  [•  the  superlative  ending  is   liliio- 

gracili 


73.  (3.)  If  the  stem  end  in  one  of  the  verbal  suffixes 
dico-,Jico-, 


The  Comparative  ending  is  eiitior- 
The  Superlative  ending  is  eiitissimo- 


EXAMPLES. — GENERAL  RULE. 

Comparative.  Superlative. 

alto-,  "high,  altior-,  higher,  altistimo-.  highest. 

audac(i)-,  bold,,  audacior-,  bolder,  audacissimo-,  boldest. 

1ST.    EXCEPTION. 

pauper-,  poor,  pauperior-,  poorer,  pauperrimo-,  poorest. 

acri-,  keen,  acrior-,  keener,  acerrilllO-,  keenest. 

vetes-,  old,  veterior-,  older,  veterrimo-,  oldest. 

pulcro-,  fair,  pulcrior-,  fairer,  pulcerrimo-,  fairest. 


74,  75.] 


LESSON"  XL. 


55 


2D.   EXCEPTION. 

facili-,  easy,  facilior-,  easier, 

humili-,  low,  humilior-,  lower, 

3D.    EXCEPTION. 

maledico-,  scurrilous,      maledicetltior-, 
munifico-,  bountiful,        munificeiltior-, 


facilliino-,  most  easy. 
humilliino-.  lowest. 


malediceiitissimo-. 

muriificeiitissiiiio-. 


EXERCISE  71. 

1.  I  see  the  lofty  tower.  2.  You  see  the  loftier  tower.  3.  He  sees 
the  loftiest  tower.  4.  We  send  a  faithful  slave  into  the  village.  5. 
Ye  have  a  more  faithful  slave  in  the  town.  6.  They  send  the  most 
faithful  slaves  with  their  (suo-}  children.  7.  I  help  the  poor  beggar.  8. 
You  kill  the  poorer  beggars  with  the  swords.  9.  The  king  drives  out 
the  poorest  beggars  from  the  state. 


EXERCISE   72. 

1.  Rex  pulcrae  puellae  parcit.  2.  Mulier  pulcriorem  avem  in  horto 
servat.  3.  Pulcerrimum  agrum  incolae  parvo  pretio  vendebas.  4. 
Facilem  rem  suscipio.  5.  Humiliorem  navem  magna  celeritate  con- 
scendet.  6.  Simillimo  conatu  difficile  negotium  conficiemus.  7.  Ho- 
minem  lingua  maledica  non  arnamus.  8.  Virura  munificentiorem 
omnes  urbis  incolae  ingentl  gaudio  collaudant.  9.  Rex  munificeutis- 
simus  aurum  et  argentum  civibus  dat. 


LESSON    XL. 

74.  The  rules  given  in  the  preceding  lesson  need  only 
this  single  modification — 

We  have  for  neuter  adjectives  the  comparative  ending  ios. 
"  nom.  and  ace.  sing.  ius. 

Of  course  the  s  of  the  stem  is  changed  to  r  before  all 
syllabic  endings.  The  complete  declension  of  a  compar- 
ative adjective  is  given  at  page  20/,  and  should  now  be 
learned  by  heart.  ty 

75.  We  may  here  introduce  the  principal  words  which 
form  the  comparative  and  superlative  irregularly : 


66  LESSON  XL.  [76. 

Positive.  Comparative.       Superlative. 

masc.  neut. 

bono-,  good,  melior-,  melios-,  optimo-. 

malo-,  bad,  P^jor-,  pejos-,  pessimo-. 

magno,  great,  major-,  majcs-,  maximo-. 

multo-,  miich,  many,  plur-  (plural),  plus-,  plurimo-. 

parvo-,  small,  minor-,  minos-,  miuimo-. 

76.  There  are  some  adjectives  also  which  have  only 
the  comparative  and  superlative  in  common  use  ;  of  these 
the  positive  is  either  an  adverb  or  a  preposition,  or  an  ad- 
jective used  in  a  peculiar  sense,  or  as  a  noun.  The  prin- 
cipal ones  are  here  given  : 


Positive. 

citra,  prep. 

extra,  prep,  (extero-) 

infra,  prep,  (infero) 

intra.  prep. 

prope,  prep. 

post,  prep,  (postero-) 

supra,  prep,  (supero-) 

ultra,  prep. 

pro,  prep. 


Comparative. 

citerior-,  on  this  side, 
exterior-,  outer, 
inferior,  lower, 
interior-,  inner, 
propior-,  nearer, 
posterior-,  later, 
superior-,  upper, 
ulterior-,  further, 
prior-,  former, 


Superlative. 

citimo-. 

extreme-. 

infimo-,  or  Irno-. 

in  tire  o-,  or  Imo-. 

proximo-. 

postremo-. 

supremo-,  or  summo-. 

ultimo-. 

primo-. 


EXERCISE  73. 

1.  The  beggars  will  quickly  go  across  the  broader  river.  2.  The 
swifter  animals  will  flee  out-of  the  wood.  3.  The  heavier  load  wearies 
the  beast-of-burden.  4.  The  more  recent  wound  was  tormenting  the 
soldier.  5.  The  greater  danger  will  frighten  the  common-people. 


EXERCISE  74. 


1.  acrius  certamen  socios  et  auxilia  fatlgat.  2.  Sapientissimus 
Iggatus  nobilius  facinus  perficit.  3.  Gravius  vulnus  fortior  centurio 
accipit.  4.  Yelocius  animal  cangs  vix  capient  5.  Minus  amentum 
agricola  vendet. 

[These  exercises  are  made  purposely  shorter  than  usual,  that  time 
may  be  had  for  exercising  the  pupils  thoroughly  in  these  forms.  If 
they  are  learned  well  once  they  will  present  no  further  difficulty ;  and 
it  is  recommended  that  in  future,  when  the  stems  of  the  Latin  words 
are  read  aloud,  whenever  a  comparative  or  superlative  degree  occurs, 
all  the  three  degrees  be  systematically  given.] 


TT.j  LESSON  XLIL  57 

LESSON    XLI. 

EXERCISE  75. 

1.  You  were  selling  the  worse  horse  to  the  foolish  traveller.  2. 
With  better  fortune  we  will  seize  the  larger  island.  3.  The  enemy 
will  set-on-fire  the  villages  nearest  to-their  (suo-~)  territories.  4.  On-the- 
first  days  of  the  war  we  conquer  the  enemy  with-a-very-great  slaughter. 
5.  The  orator  will  plead  the  cause  of  the  prisoner  with-very-many 
words.  6.  The  enemy  were  holding  the  top-of  (summo-  adj.)  the 
mountain. 

EXERCISE  76. 

1.  Summa  difficultate  Iatr5nes  in  spelunca  capimus.  2.  Ultima 
hiemis  parte  Caesar  per  citeriorem  provinciam  iter  faciebat,  et  conven- 
tus  agebat  3.  Pessimo  exemplo  improbis  proditoribus  parcetis.  4. 
Minima  spe  salutis  miser  captlvus  ex  carcere  ad  litus  fugiebat.  5.  Yir 
summa  virtute  et  prudentia  rem  difficiliorem  perficit.  6.  In  extremo 
ponte  turrim  constituit.  7.  Extrema  hieme  Pompeius  bellum  ingena 
parabat.  8.  Consul  optimus  mllites  ex  angustils  ducit. 


LESSON    XLIL 

As  adverbs  denote  the  presence  of  qualities,  so  we  want 
to  express  different  degrees  of  those  qualities.  We  have, 
therefore,  comparative  and  superlative  degrees  formed  on 
adverbs.  Their  mode  of  formation  is  generally  very- 
simple.  The  following  rules  comprise  nearly  all  cases  : 

77.  (1.)  The  comparative  adverb  is  the  same  in  form 
as  the  neuter  nominative  singular  of  the  comparative  of 
the  adjective  from  which  it  is  derived  ;  and  even  has  such 
a  form  when  it  is  not  derived  from  an  adjective. 

(2.)  The  superlative  adverb  is  formed  by  changing  the 
o  of  the  superlative  adjective  into  e ;  and  even  has  this 
form  when  there  is  no  corresponding  adjective. 


68  LESSON  XLm.  [78. 


EXAMPLES. 

Adjective.       Positive  advert.  Comparative  adverb.  Superlative  adverb. 

late-,  broad,          late,  latiua,  latissime. 

bouo-,  good,  bene,  melius,  optime. 

acri-,  keen,  acriter,  acrius,  acerrime. 

audac(i)-,  bold,      audacter,  audacius,  audacissime. 

saepe,  often,          saepius,  saepissime. 


EXERCISE  77. 

1.  The  very  powerful  (superl.)  nations  will  carry-on  the  war  more- 
keenly.  2.  The  braver  scouts  ascend  the  hill  more-eagerly.  3.  The 
horse-soldier  wounds  the  commander  more-severely  with  a  spear.  4. 
The  fugitives  escape  out-of  the  prison  into  the  wood  more-quickly. 
5.  I  shall  more-easily  overcome  the  slothful  chief.  6.  Ye  were  more- 
mercifully  sparing  the  inhabitants  of  the  conquered  province. 

carry  on,  ger-  prison,  career-,  m. 

learnedly,  docte.  severely,  graviter. 

mercifully,  clementer.  bountifully,  largiter. 


EXERCISE  78. 

1.  Vir  acerriml  ingenii  puerum  doctius  monet.  2.  Diligentiorea 
piscatores  retia  cupidius  contrahunt.  3.  Ampliorem  agrum  pauperi 
colono  largissime  das.  4.  Eques  ferocl  animo  impetum  acriorem  facit. 
5.  Magister  longiorem  librum  magno  studio  scribit  6.  Sapientior  sen- 
tentia  majore  gaudio  omnes  senatores  aflficit.  7.  Prima  luce  miseram 
multitudinem  dux  improbus  deserit.  8.  Tertia  hora  die!  mllites  ex 
omnibus  castrorum  portis  cum  magno  clamore  audacius  erumpunt. 


LESSON    XLIIL 

78.  The  three  imperfect  tenses  of  the  active  verb  have 
been,  it  is  hoped,  perfectly  learned.  As  the  verb  es-,  "  be," 
is  very  irregular,  the  three  imperfect  tenses  of  it  will  be 
here  given  to  be  committed  to  memory. 


79.]  LESSON 


Pres.  Imperf.  Past  Imperf.  Future  Imperf. 

I  1.  sum,  lam,  eram,  I  was,  ero,  I  shall  be, 

Sing.  •<  2.  es,  you  are,  thou  art,  eras,  you  were,  eris,  you  will  be, 

(  3.  est,  he  is.  erat,  he  was.  erit,  he  will  be. 

i  1.  sumus,  we  are,  eramus,  we  were,  erimus,  we  shall  be, 

Plur.  <  2.  estis,  ye  are,  eratis,  ye  were,  eritis,  ye  will  be, 

(  3.  sunt,  they  are.  erant,  they  were.  erunt,  they  will  be. 

79.  It  is  clear  that  this  verb  differs  from  all  the  ones 
hitherto  used,  in  that  it  does  not  (ordinarily)  make  a  com- 
plete assertion;  for  instance,  it  would  be  obviously 
absurd  to  say,  "The  slave  was"  without  adding  some 
noun  or  adjective  to  say  what  he  was.  This  verb  requires 
always,  (unless  it  is  used  in  the  sense  "  exist")  some  ad- 
jective or  noun  with  it,  which  is  said  to  complete  its 
meaning*.*  The  word  so  added  is  always  in  the  same 
case  (and,  if  possible,  in  the  same  gender  and  number),  as 
the  subject  of  the  verb ;  in  other  words,  the  verb  "  CS-" 

has  the  same  case  after  it  as  before  it. 

EXERCISE  79. 


1.  Faithful  slaves  are  worthy  of-praise.  2.  Of-all  friends  you-are 
the  dearest  3.  A  greater  herd  is  in  the  meadow.  4.  Virginia  was 
the  fairest  of-all  girls.  5.  Among  the  Helvetii  Orgetorix  was  by  far  tho 
noblest  and  wealthiest  (man).  6.  The  camp  is  placed  on-the  higher 
ridge.  7.  You  are  wicked  slaves  and  worthy  of-all  punishment.  8. 
The  judge  will  be  merciful  to-the-other  prisoners,  but  will  visit  the  de- 
serters with-the-utmost  punishments. 


but,  sea*, 
by  far,  longe. 
dear,  caro- 

Helvetii,  Helvetia-,  m.  plur. 
higher,  superior- 
meadow,  prato-,  n. 
Orgetorix,  Orgetorig-,  m. 
other,  alio- 
placed,  posito- 


punishment,  supplicio-,  n. 
ridge,  jugo-,  n. 
utmost,  ultimo- 
visit,  affic(i)- 
Virginia,  Virginia- 
wealthy,  divet-,  comp.  dltior-, 

superl.  dltissimo- 
worthy,  digno-,  abl. 


*  There  are  many  verbs  besides  es-  whose  meaning  is  incomplete, 
such  as  "become,"  "seem,"  "be  made,"  "be  elected,"  "be  thought," 
&c.,  &c.  These  have,  of  course,  a  completing  adjective  or  noun  just  as 
es-  does.  These  verbs  are  called  by  Dr.  Kennedy  Copulative 
verb§. 


60  LESSON  XLIV.  [§O,  81. 


EXERCISE  80. 

1.  Equus  est  omnium  animalium  velocissimus.  2.  Amplissirm  horti 
sunt  regis  ditissimi.  3.  Amicus  eram  Helvetils,  et  surumo  studio  fines 
sociorum  defendebam.  4.  la  nostra  patria  homines  sunt  llberi,  et 
legibus  virtutis  ultro  parent.  5.  VI  tempestalis  naves  erant  sauciae. 
6.  Viri  magnae  virtutis  amplls  honoribus  sunt  dignl.  7.  Vita  brevia 
est,  ars  longa.  8.  Capuae  multae  erant  deliciae,  et  milites  Hanni- 
balis  libenter  ibi  manebant. 


LESSON    XLIY. 

80.  In  the  2d  sentence  of  the  preceding  exercise  we 
had  the  genitive  regis  u$,e<i  possessively  with  the  verb  sunt. 
The  dative  also  is  very  commonly  used  with  es-  to  ex- 
press the  iiossessor  of  any  thing,  the  thing  possessed  being 
the  subject  of  the  verb.     But  there  is  a  difference  in  the 
meaning  of  the  genitive  and  dative,  used  in  this  way  : 

If  the  genitive  be  used,  the  notion  of  the  possessor  is 
made  prominent ; 

If  the  dative  be  used,  the  notion  of  the  thing  possessed 
is  made  prominent. 

An  example  will  make  this  clear : 
We  can  say, 

Hie  hortus  regis  est.  This  garden  is  the  king's  (and  not  some  other 
person's). 

Hie  hortus  regl  est.  This  garden  belongs  to  the  king  (as  well  as 
other  things). 

8 1 .  "We  may  mention  here  another  use  of  the  dative 
case  which  could  not  conveniently  be  introduced  before. 
The  dative  is   often  employed  to  denote  the    end  or 
result  of  an  action  or  a  state.     As, 

VirtutSs  hominibus  decorl  sunt.      Virtues  are  an  honor  to  men. 

Hunc  locum  domidlio  deligunt.     They  choose  this  place  for  a  residence. 


82,  83.]  LESSON  XLY.  61 

EXERCISE  81. 

1.  The  farmer  had  six  sons  (say :  there  were  six  sons  to  the  farmer). 
2.  Our  sou  has  many  books.  3.  The  greedy  sea  is  a  destruction  (dat.) 
to  sailors.  4.  The  poor  have  small  resources.  5.  Caesar  sends  five 
cohorts  as-aid  (dat)  to-the-legion.  6.  Cicero  had  a  brother  Quintus. 

anxiety,  cura-  greedy,  avido- 

destruction,  exitio-j  n.  owner,  domino-,  m. 

disgrace,  dcdecos-  Quintus,  Quinto- 

EXERCISE    82. 

1.  Domus  ampla  saepe  domino  dedecori  est.  2.  Quartam  legionem 
praesidio  castris  relinquam.  3.  Ignavis  hominibus  multa  sunt  curae. 
4.  Omnibus  sunt  memoria  et  amor  scientiae.  5.  Pueris  dlligentibus 
omnis  kora  est  emolumento.  6.  Piscatoribus  erant  multa  retia. 


LESSON   XLY. 

Many  of  the  sentences  in  the  preceding  exercises  have 
been  imperfect  in  this  respect,  that  the  comparative  de- 
gree has  been  often  used,  but  the  object  with  which  the 
comparison  is  made  has  not  been  mentioned.  In  English, 
this  object  is  always  preceded  by  the  word  "than." 
The  same  connection  is  expressed  in  Lathi  in  one  or  other 
of  two  ways. 

8£.  1st.  The  word  "than"  is  expressed  by  "quam," 
and  the  second  noun  is  placed  in  the  same  case  as  the 
first. 

83.  2d.  The  word  "than"  is  untranslated,  and  the  sec- 
ond noun  is  placed  in  the  ablative  case. 

EXAMPLES. 

Europe  is  smaller  than  Asia.  (1.)  Europa  minor  est  quam  Asia. 

(2.)  Europa  minor  est  Asia. 

The  daughter  is  fairer  than  the   (1.)  Fllia  estpulcrior  quam  mater 
mother.  (2.)  Fllia  est  pukrior  matre. 

NOTE. — The  ablative  must  not  be  used  instead  of  quam,  unless  the 
first  noun  is  in  the  nom.  or  the  ace.  case. 
6 


62  LESSON  XLYL  [84,  85. 

EXERCISE   83. 

1.  The  sun  is  larger  than  the  earth.  2.  The  earth  is  smaller  than  the 
sun.  3.  The  swan  is  larger  than  the  goose.  4.  The  goose  is  smaller 
than  the  swan.  5.  Stags  are  swifter  than  dogs.  6.  The  unfortunate 
soldiers  embark-on  the  ships  more  eagerly  (than  was  prudent).  7.  The 
boys  receive  larger  rewards  (than  they  deserved).  8.  The  third  legion 
will  ascend  the  hill  more  quickly  (than  they  ought). 

84.  NOTE  1st. — In  the  last  three  sentences  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
object  with  which  the  comparison  is  made  is  omitted:  and  the  whole 
notion  would  generally  be  expressed  in  English  by  substituting  the 
word  "  too"  for  the  word  "  ?no?-e."     In  future,  then,  such  expressions  as 
"  too  eagerly,"  are  to  be  expressed  by  tJie  comparative  degree. 

85.  2d.  The  word  "  quam"  when  used  before  a  superlative  degree, 
makes  it  mean  "  as  much  as  possible."   Thus :  quam  dlligentissime  means 
"as  carefully  as  possible;"  quam  gravissiml  labores  means  "labors  as 
severe  as  possible." 

EXERCISE  84. 

1.  Nostra  patria  potentior  est  quam  tua.  2.  Grnavus  puer  magistro 
doctior  est.  3.  Majora  praemia  ignavi  mllites  accipiunt,  quam  nautae 
dlligentissiml.  4.  Labores  quam  gravissimos  pigrls  miuistris  imponam. 
5.  Quam  plurimils  nigras  oves  mercator  coemebat.  6.  Probus  magis- 
tratus  audacl  latrone  erat  pigrior.  7.  Nihil  est  amabilius  virtute.  8. 
Sunt  domesticae  fortitudines  non  inferiores  militaribus. 


LESSON     XLYI. 

We  have  now  given  the  principal  rules  in  regard  to 
the  formation  and  uses  of  the  different  inflections  of  sub- 
stantives and  adjectives.  It  is  hoped  that  these  will  now 
present  no  difficulty,  and  that  the  pupils  are  well  prepared 
to  learn  the  remaining  tenses  of  the  indicative  mood, 
of  the  active  verb,  and  also  the  personal  and  other  pro- 
nouns. In  future,  no  special  vocabularies  will  be  given 
for  the  exercises?  The  words  that  occur  must  be  looked 
for  in  the  general  vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the  book, 
which  also  includes  all  the  words  hitherto  employed. 


86,  87.]  LESSON  XLYI.  63 

8G.  We  have  so  far  only  made  use  of  those  forms  of 
the  verb  which  describe  actions  as  incomplete  or  un- 
finished. But  it  is  clearly  necessary  to  the  perfection  of 
language,  that  it  should  have  means  to  describe  also 
finished  or  complete  actions.  In  English,  tenses  to  ex- 
press this  notion  are  formed  by  the  help  of  the  auxiliary 
verb  "  have."  But  in  Latin  the  mode  of  making  them  is 
similar  to,  though  not  the  same  as,  that  in  which  the  im- 
perfect tenses  were  seen  to  be  made. 

The  following  examples  will  show  the  form  and  the 
meaning  of  the  three  perfect  tenses  in  English : 

1.  Present  perfect.    "7"  have  come  to  pay  the 
money."     Clearly,  here  the  action  of  coming  is  spoken  of 
as  finished,  but  as  finished  only  in  the  time  now  present. 

2.  Past  perfect.    "  I  had  come  before  you  left." 
Here  the  action  of  coming  is  spoken  of  as  finished  before 
a  certain  time  now  past. 

3.  Future  perfect.     "I  shall  have   come  back 
before  night."     Here   the  action   of  coming  is  spoken 
of  as  being  likely  to  be  finished  by  a  certain  time  now 
future. 

87.  In  Latin  these  meanings  are  expressed  in  general, 

1st,  by  an  alteration  in  the  verb-stem. 

2d,  by  a  distinct  set  of  person  or  tense  endings. 

Nearly  all  Latin  verbs,  in  the  course  of  their  conjuga- 
tion exhibit  their  root  in  three  forms ;  of  these, 

The  1st  is  the  stem  on  which  are  formed  the  im- 
perfect tenses,  Active  and  Passive. 

The  2d  is  the  stem  on  which  are  formed  the  per- 
fect tenses,  Active. 

The  3d  is  the  stem  on  which  are  formed  the  per- 
fect tenses,  Passive. 

If  these  three  forms  of  the  stem  be  known,  the  whole 
conjugation  presents  not  the  least  difficulty.  And  as  this 
knowledge  can  be  best  attained  by  boys  by  continual 
observation,  it  is  recommended  that  in  future,  when  read- 
ing aloud  the  stems  of  each  sentence,  they  should  in  all 
cases  be  made  to  give  the  three  forms  of  the  "verb-stem. 


64  LESSON  XLVI.  [§§,  §9. 

when  there  are  such,  though  in  the  exercises  the  different 
modes  of  formation  will  be  explained  ;  and  thus  the  knowl- 
edge acquired  in  fragments  may  be  collected  under  gen- 
eral heads.  The  three  forms  will  always  be  given  in  the 
final  vocabulary. 

88.  We  are  going  now  to  speak  of  the  perfect  active 
tenses  ;  and  therefore  must  first  mention  the  2d  form  of 
the  verb-stem,  which  may  be  called  the  second  stem,  and 
is  marked  "  2"  in  the  vocabulary.     Most  verbs  with  a- 
stems  and  i-stems  (forming  the  1st  and  4th  conjugations), 
make  the  second-stem  by  adding  the  ending  -v-.     Thus, 

1st  Stem.  2d  Stem. 

ama-,  love,  amav- 

audi-,  hear,  audlv- 

The  present  perfect,  like  the  present  imperfect, 
has  no  te>*se-ending,  but  has  a  distinct  set  of  person  end- 
ings attached  directly  to  the  2d  stem. 

The  past  perfect  has  the  tense-ending  era-  attached 
to  the  2d  stem,  and  then  takes  the  regular  person-endings 
given  in  ihejirst  column  in  Lesson  VII. 

The  future  perfect  has  the  ending  er-  attached  to 
the  2d  stem,  and  then  the  regular  person-endings  given  in 
the  second  column  in  Lesson  VII.,  except  that  the  3d  per- 
son plur.  has  illt  instead  of  uiit. 

The  following  table  gives  these  endings  united  to  each 
other  ;  any  verb  may  be  conjugated  in  either  of  these 
tenses,  by  attaching  the  endings  here  given  to  the  second- 
stem. 

89.  2.  Audiv-,  heard. 
2.  Amav-,  loved. 

I.  Pres.  (  1.  i,  I  have, 

]  2.  isti,  thou  ha 

f  3.  It,  •       ne  nas. 

(  1  iimis,  we  have, 

Plur.  \  2.  istis,  ye  have, 

».(  3. 


. 
Sing.     2.  isti,  thou  hast,  or  you  have,      prescilt 


grunt,  or  ere,  they  have. 


90] 


LESSON  XLYII. 


65 


2.  Audiv- 

2.  Amav-. 

II 

Past.   (  1.  eram, 

I  had,                            1 

Sing.  •<  2.  eras, 

thou  hadst,  or  you  had, 

•        ¥»«•«£ 

(  3.  erat, 
il.  eramus, 
2.  erati§, 

he  had.                           \ 
we  had, 
ye  had, 

M.    €M>9mf 

perfect 
teiise. 

3.  eraut, 

they  had.                       J 

IIL 

Put. 

1.  ero, 

I  shall  have.                  "| 

£w</. 
Pfor. 

2.  eris, 
3.  erit, 
1.  erimus, 
2.  eriti§, 

thou  wilt  have, 
he  will  have, 
we  shall  have, 
ye  will  have, 

Future 
-  perfect 
tense. 

3.  erint, 

they  will  have. 

No  exercises  are  given  in  this  lesson,  as  it  is  thought 
the  pupils  will  have  done  well  if  they  have  mastered  the 
statements  and  tables  given  above. 


LESSON    XLYII. 

00.  In  the  table  given  in  the  last  lesson  the  first  tense 
was  called  "  the  present  perfect,"  and  the  present  tense  of 
the  English  verb  "  have"  was  used  to  translate  it.     But 
the  same  forms  are  also  used  in  Latin  to  describe  an  ac- 
tion as  having  occurred  in  some  indefinite  point  of  past 
time.     In  this  use  the  tense  is  called  "  aorist,"  which 
means  "  indefinite."     The  difference  will  be  perceived  on 
comparing  the  two  sentences  : 

1.  I  have  come  to  pay  you  the  money.     Present 
perfect. 

2.  I  came  to  pay  the  money.     Aorist. 

It  is  clear  that  the  second  of  these  expressions  would 
be  equally  correct  if  the  action  spoken  of  occurred  yes- 
terday, last  week,  last  month,  or  last  year.  But  the 
former  can  only  be  used  if  the  action  spoken  of  occurred 
to-day.  In  Latin  both  these  senses  are  expressed  by  the 
same  form,  by  adding  to  the  2d  stem  the  endings  given  in 
§  89,  I. 
6* 


66  LESSON  XLVriL  [91,  92. 

In  the  following  exercises  examples  of  the  present  per- 
fect or  aorist  tense  will  be  introduced,  made  from  stems 
in  a  and  i,  which,  as  was  said  in  §  88,  for  the  most  part 
make  the  second  stein  by  adding  the  ending  -v-. 


EXERCISE  85. 

1.  I  have  called-down  the  soldier  from  the  rampart.  2.  You  praised 
the  man  of-constant  fidelity.  3.  The  mother  has  adorned  (her)  daughter 
with  the  most  beautiful  clothes.  4.  "We  have-built  the  new  fortifications 
with-the-greatest  diligence.  5.  Ye  hastened  within  the  house.  6. 
They  have  changed  their  oldest  customs. 


EXERCISE  86. 

1.  Ivimus  in  urbem  cum  praefecto  equitatQs.  2.  Adventure  exer- 
citus  imperatori  nuntiavisti.  3.  Maesti  mllites  cadavera  sociorum  in 
agro  sub  umbrosls  lagls  sepellvere.  4.  Clamores  latronum  procul  au- 
dlvimus.  5.  Postero  die  munltum  oppidum  quam  fortissime  oppugna- 
vistL  6.  Incolae  miserae  provinciae  Romano  populo  multos  annos 
servivei*unt  7.  Quam  maximam  vim  frumentl  quaestor  parvo  pretio 
comparavit  8.  Lltus  ornne  classibus  late  occupavistL 


LESSON    XLYIII. 

9 1 .  Frequently  in  the  perfect  tenses  made  by  the  end- 
ing -v,  a  shortening  or  contraction  takes  place,  the  letter  -v 
being  omitted.  As  this  is  not  a  matter  of  any  difficulty, 
it  is  sufficient  here  to  say  that  occasionally  such  forms 
will  be  introduced  into  the  exercises  for  reading,  that  the 
teacher  may  have  an  opportunity  of  explaining  them.  But 
they  need  never  be  employed  in  the  writing  exercises. 

O2.  Nearly  all  the  sentences  used  so  far  have  been 
simple,  i.  e.,  they  have  consisted  of  one  subject  and  one 
predicate.  But  simple  sentences  are  often  combined  to- 
gether to  make  what  is  called  a  compound  sentence,  and 
the  words  used  to  indicate  this  combination  are  called 
conjunctions.  The  simple  sentences  so  combined 


92.]  LESSON  XLYIII.  67 

are  often  co-ordinate,  i.  e.,  each  stands  on  the  same 
level,  as  it  were,  in  the  speaker's  thought  •  neither  is  given 
as  in  any  way  dependent  upon  the  other.  Thus,  the  two 
simple  sentences,  "His  father  is  dead,"  "his  mother  is 
living,"  may  be  combined  into  one  compound  sentence : 
"His  father  is  dead  but  his  mother  is  living." 

The  conjunctions  which  join  sentences  together  in  this 
co-ordinate  way  will  be  called  by  the  name  "  conjunction" 
without  any  distinguishing  adjective. 

In  the  following  exercises  some  such  compound  sen- 
tences will  be  used. 

NOTE. — Some  verbs  with,  e-stems  also  make  the  2d  stern  by  the  end- 
ing -v-. 

EXERCISE  87. 

1.  The  legion  quickly  fortified  the  camp  with  a  ditch,  and  waited-for 
the  approach  of  the  enemy.  2.  The  commander  condemned  the  miser- 
able deserters  on-accouut-of  (their)  cowardice.  3.  The  women,  by  (their) 
prayers,  softened  the  enraged  mind  of  the  king.  4.  Ye  punished  the 
wicked  fugitives,  and  praised  the  diligence  of  the  guards.  5.  We  have 
at  length  overcome  the  difficulties  of  the  long  march.  6.  You  have- 
beeu-slaves  for-a-long-time  to-the-Romans. 


EXERCISE  88. 

1.  Sulla  non  solum  in  vivos  saeviit,  sed  etiam  in  mortuos.  2.  Pos- 
tero  die  Galll  multo  majoribus  copils  castra  oppugnarunt,  fossamque 
complerunt.  3.  Reliquo  certamine  noster  exercitus  hostes  facile  su- 
poravit.  4.  Locum  duplicl  altissimo  muro  muniistis,  et  praeacutas 
trabes  in  muro  collocastis.  5.  Pratrem  ad  horam  nonam  in  litore  ex- 
pectastl.  6.  Nautae  cantus  Sirenum  non  audierunt,  sed  rex  mlram 
vocis  dulcedinem  auribus  cupide  captavit.  7.  Equites  fugae  turpitu- 
dinem  virtute  deleverunt.  8.  Omnia  perlcula  multos  annos  vltavimus. 


68  LESSON  XLIX.  [93. 


LESSON    XLIX. 

OS.  We  must  now  speak  of  the  words  called  pro- 
nouns. 

Pronouns,  as  their  name  would  lead  us  to  expect,  are 
generally  said  to  be  words  used  instead  of  nouns,  in  order 
to  avoid  the  too  frequent  repetition  of  the  same  noun. 
But  upon  this  we  may  remark  that — 

1st.  The  frequent  repetition  of  the  same  pronoun  with- 
out offence,  shows  that  mere  repetition  is  not  a  thing  in 
itself  considered  objectionable. 

2d.  It  will  be  found  extremely  difficult,  if  not  impos- 
sible, to  represent,  even  by  complex  combinations  of 
nouns,  the  thoughts  and  relations  which  are  expressed 
simply  and  naturally  by  the  aid  of  the  words  called  pro- 
nouns. 

Instead,  therefore,  of  attempting  to  show  how  each  of 
the  words  so  called  is  entitled  to  the  name  in  its  literal 
sense,  we  shall  endeavor  to  point  out  the  meaning  of  each 
separately ;  but  it  will  be  seen  that  they  all  have  this  in 
common  :  they  all  denote  that  the  nouns  to  ichich  they  re- 
fer, or  in  connection  with  which  they  stand,  bear  some 
defined  relation  to  the  speaker,  or  to  the  things  spoken 
about. 

Pronouns  are  divided  into  six  classes : 

(i.)  Personal  pronouns  are  words  which  do 
indeed  refer  to  nouns  (or  at  least  to  things  which  have 
names)  but  only  to  this  extent,  that  they  imply  that  the 
nouns  they  refer  to  are  either 

il.)  The  person  or  persons  speaking ;  or, 
2.)  spoken  to  ;  or, 

3.)  "  "  or  things  spoken  about. 

(2.)  Possessive  pronouns  are  adjectives,  and 
imply  that  the  nouns  with  which  they  agree  either 

(1.)  belong  to  the  person  or  persons  speaking;  or, 
(2.)          "  spoken  to;  or, 

(3.)         "  "  "  or  things  spoken 

[about. 


it  U 

U  U 


94.]  LESSOR  XLIX.  69 

(3.)  Demonstrative  pronouns  are  adjectives, 
and  imply  that  the  nouns  with  which  they  agree  are 
either 

(1.)  near  the  person  or  persons  speaking ;  or, 

spoken  to ;  or, 
"         or  things  spoken  about. 

(4.)  Logical  pronouns  imply  that  the  words  they 
refer  to  either  are  already  known  and  definite  from  hav- 
ing been  mentioned  in  the  discourse,  or  (more  rarely)  are 
to  be  immediately  mentioned,  and  so  will  be  rendered 
definite. 

(5.)  Interrogative  pronouns  imply,  that  the 
things  they  refer  to  are  not  yet  definitely  known  to  the 
speaker,  but  that  he  asks  for  information  about  them. 

(6.)  Indefinite  pronouns  imply,  that  the  things 
they  refer  to  are  either  not  definitely  known  to  the 
speaker,  or  that  he  so  represents  them,  but  do  not  imply 
that  he  desires  more  information  about  them. 

It  will  be  observed,  that  the  first  three  classes  corre- 
spond exactly  with  the  three  persons  of  the  verb  •  and  we 
have  seen  that  the  person-endings  of  the  verb  constantly 
supply  the  place  of  the  personal  pronouns. 

We  shall  first  introduce  in  the  exercises  the  personal 
and  possessive  pronouns.  The  following  table  presents 
the  stems  of  these : 

Singular.  Plural. 

First    (  Personal,         me-,  I,  no-,  we. 

person,  (  Possessive,      meo-,  my,  nostro-,  our. 

«         ,  (  Personal,         te-,  thou,  vo-,  you, 

person  }  Possessive,      tuo-,  thy,  j  vostro'  [  your' 

Third  (Personal,          se-,  himself,  herself,  itself,  se-,  themselves. 

person  \  Possessive,       suo-,  his  own,  her  own,  its  own,  suo-,  their  own. 

O4r.  It  must  be  particularly  observed,  that  though  se-, 
suo-,  are  given  here  as  pronouns  of  the  third  person,  they 
are  only  used  in  a  reflective  sense  /  i.  e.,  generally  when 
they  refer  to  the  same  person  as  the  subject  of  the  verb. 
For  the  third  personal  pronoun,  when  not  reflective,  the 


70  LESSON  XLIX.  [91. 

logical  pronoun  eo-,  which  will  be  given  in  a  subsequent 
lesson,  is  generally  employed. 

The  declension  of  the  personal  pronouns  in  Latin  being 
very  irregular,  they  are  here  given  at  length,  to  be  learned 
by  heart. 

Singular. 

1st,  me-.  2d,  te-.  3d,  se-. 

Nom.  ego,  /.  tu,  thou. 

Ace.  me.  te.  se. 

Gen.  mei.  tuL  suL 

Dat.  mihi.  tibL  sibL 

Abl  me.  te.  se. 

Plural. 

1st,  no-.  2d,  vo-.  3d,  se-. 

JVwn.  nos,  we.  vos,  ye. 

Ace.  "                               "                        se. 

n~»  "    5  nostrum.  vostrum. 

Gen-  Jnostrt.  vostrL 

Dat.  nobis.  vobis.                     sibL 

Abl  "                                "                         se. 

NOTE. — 1st.  Se-  has  the  same  forms  for  singular  and  plural. 

2d.  Se-  has  no  nominative:  since,  as  it  is  reflective,  the  subject  of  the 
sentence  in  which  it  occurs  may  always  be  regarded  as  its  nominative 
case;  and  this,  of  course,  will  determine  its  gender  and  number. 

3d.  The  nominative  cases  of  the  First  and  Second  personal  pronouns 
are  only  used  when  they  are  emphatic ;  since  the  person-ending  of  the 
verb  supply  their  place  exactly,  and  sufficiently  in  ordinary  circum- 
stances. 

4th.  Ml  the  possessive  pronouns  are  declined  like  adjectives  in  o  or 
a,  except  that  the  vocative  singular  of  meo-is  ml. 

5th.  Most  modern  editions  of  Latin  authors,  following  the  later 
writers,  give  vestrum,  vestrl,  as  the  genitive  plural  of  the  2d  personal 
prononn,  instead  of  the  more  regular  vostrum,  voslrl. 

6th.  The  genitive  plural  of  the  1st  and  2d  personal  pronouns  has  two 
forms ;  of  these  the  one  ending  in  um  is  used  as  tlie  inclusive  genitive 
(§  35) :  the  form  in  l  for  the  other  uses. 

As  in  former  cases,  no  exercises  are  given  in  this  lesson, 
that  the  whole  time  of  the  pupils  may  be  devoted  to  the 
study  of  the  distinctions  and  explanations  given,  and  to 
the  learning  of  the  tables  of  the  personal  pronouns. 


94.]  LESSON  LI.  71 

LESSON    L. 

EXERCISE  89. 

1.  /  was  a  friend  to  the  Helvetii,  but  you  an  enemy.  2.  The  general 
gives  thanks  to-me.  3.  The  king  will  not  spare  you.  4.  The  boy  loves 
himself.  5.  All  boys  love  themselves.  6.  No  one  of-us  was  at  Rome 
at-the-coming  of  Caesar.  7.  The  general  praised  our  diligence.  8. 
The  soldiers  praised  their  own  diligence. 

EXERCISE  90. 

1.  Me  vita  rnstica  delectabat,  tu  autem  delicias  urbanas  laudabas. 
2.  Incolae  feracioris  insulae  suos  equos  laudaverunt.  3.  Prima  luce 
explorator  tibi  nuntiavit  adventum  hostium.  4.  Tuos  libros  tibi  liben- 
ter  reddam.  5.  Juvenis  ad  vitium  procllvior  se  nimium  amat,  et  suam 
voluptatem  studio  acriore  cupit.  6.  Omnis  natura  est  sui  conservatrlx. 
7.  Grata  mihi  vehementer  est  memoria  nostri  tua.  8.  Habetis  ducem 
memorem  vestri,  oblltum  sui. 


LESSON    LI. 

Most  verbs  with  e-stems,  and  many  others,  including 
some  with  a-stems  and  ^-sterns,  make  the  2d  stem  by 
adding  w,  and  omitting  the  final  vowel  of  the  1st  stem, 
if  there  be  one.  Thus,  we  have, 

1.  doce-  2.  docu- 

1.  aperi-  2.  aperu- 

1.  gem-  2.  gemu- 

NOTE. — No  doubt  this  ending  u  is  the  same  as  the  v,  which  we  have 
seen  used  for  most  a-stems  and  t'-stems :  the  u  being  employed  where 
the  2d  stem  is  formed  directly  from  the  primitive  root  of  the  word.* 

*  Very  often  the  form  given  as  the  imperfect  or  1st  stem  of  a  verb  is 
not  really  the  original  root  of  the  word.  In  these  cases  generally  ths 
2d  and  3d  stems  are  made  from  the  primitive  root,  and  not  from  the  im- 
perfect stem.  The  particular  facts  in  regard  to  this  matter  must  be 


72  LESSON  LIL  [94. 

In  the  following  exercises,  the  past  perfect  will  be  in- 
troduced as  well  as  the  present  perfect  or  aorist.  See 

§89. 

EXERCISE  91. 

1.  Ton  frightened  the  women  and  children  by-your  boldness.  2. 
The  wise  philosophers  had  taught  their-own  children.  3.  The  very 
base  traitor  had  opened  the  gates  of  the  city  to-the-enemy.  4.  You 
eagerly  snatched  the  gift  out-of  your  father's  hands.  5.  We  have  care- 
fully cultivated  our  own  fields.  6.  The  soldiers  of  the  cohort  leaped- 
down  from  their-own  ship  into  the  sea. 


EXERCISE  92. 

1.  Lex  turpissimam  rem  omnmo  vetuerat.  2.  Legiones  locum  non 
tenuenint :  sed  in  proximum  collem  se  recipient.  3.  Portas  aperuimus, 
universique  et  oppidan!  et  nrilites  obviam  Antonio  exiimus.  4.  Nemo 
inter  Latinos  dlligentius  tuo  patre  hortos  coluerat.  5.  Tempestas  hodie 
nostros  in  castrls  continuit,  et  hostem  a  pugna  prohibuit.  6.  Novum 
consilium  amicis  nobilium  civium  magnopere  placuerat.  7.  Magna 
pars  nostrum  pericula  silvartfru  vehementer  timuerat.  8.  Fortissimi 
legionarii  signum  mediis  ex  hostibus  rapuere. 


LESSON    LIL 

It  was  seen  in  Lesson  XLIX.,  that  hi  Latin  demonstrar 
twe  pronouns  follow  the  division  of  the  personal  pronouns, 
as  possessive  pronouns  do.  Their  name  indicates  that 

gathered  from  the  vocabulary.     But  it  may  be  worth  while  here  to 
state  the  principal  modes  of  deriving  imperfect-stems  from  roots. 

Root.     1st  stem. 


The  insertion  of  n  as  tag-  tang-  '  touch." 

"        "  in  "  cub-  cumb-  'lie." 

The  addition  of  n  "  cer-  cern-  'separate." 

"  "         "  sic  "  gno~  gnosc-  'learn." 

«  "        "  t  "  flee-  fleet-  'bend." 

«  "         «•  1  "  pel-  peU-  'push." 

EOBSOX'S  LATIN  EXERCISES. 


95.]  LESSON  LIL  73 

they  point  to  the  noun  with  which  they  agree,  as  with  the 
finger,  and  describe  its  position  by  representing  it  as — 

1.  Near  the  person  speaking ; 

2.  "          "         spoken  to ; 

3.  "          "         or  thing  spoken  of. 

There  are  therefore  in  Latin  three  demonstrative  pro- 
nouns : 

1.  llO-,  ha-,  meaning,  this  near  me  ; 

2.  IN  to-,  ista-,    "        that  near  you; 

3.  illo-,  ilia-,     "       that  near  Mm,  or  that  yonder. 

The  declension  of  these  being  in  several  respects  ir- 
regular, ho-  is  here  given  to  be  learned  by  heart.  The 
three  genders,  as  given  below,  had  best  be  learned  to- 
gether. 

Ho-,  this.  Singular.  Plural. 

Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

Nom,           hie  haec  hoc  hi  hae  haec 

Ace.             hunc  hanc           "  hos  has  " 

Gen.            hujus  horum  harum  horum 

Dai.  hulc  his 

AU.  hoc  hac  hoe  " 

NOTE. — Hujus,  hulc  and  his,  though  only  given  once,  are  of  all 
genders. 

95.  In  §  32  it  was  said  that  the  commonest  use  of 
the  genitive  case  was  to  limit  the  meaning  of  a  noun  or 
adjective.  The  genitive  case  always  denotes  something 
different  from  the  noun  which  it  limits.  But  nouns  some- 
times are  more  exactly  defined  by  the  addition  of  another 
word  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing  as  the  limited 
noun.  Nouns  so  employed  are  put  in  the  same  case,  and, 
if  possible,  in  the  same  gender  and  number  as  the  limited 
noun,  and  are  said  to  be  in  apposition  to  it.  The 
two  following  sentences  will  serve  to  illustrate  what  is 
here  said : 

1.  Servus  Caesaris,  Caesar's  slave.  Gen.  of  possessor. 

2.  Servus  Balbus,  The  slave  Balbus.  Nom.  of  noun  in 
apposition. 

7 


74  LESSON  IHI.  [96. 

EXERCISE  93. 

1.  I  will  sell  you  this  slave  (of  mine)  for-twenty  minae.  2.  This  law 
forbade  all  injustice,  3.  The  laws  had  strictly  forbidden  this  injustice. 
4.  This  woman  has  tamed  many  wild-beasts,  and  has  swayed  the  anger 
of  lions.  5.  "With-these  swords  we  kept-off  the  enemy.  6.  Balbus, 
the  wicked  slave,  (being)  alarmed  by-this  evidence,  kept-silence. 

EXERCISE  94. 

1.  Caesar  imperatpr  Dumnorigem,  improbum  Divitiaci  fratrem,  his 
verbis  monuit  2.  Evander  multis  ante  tempestatibus  haec  loca  tenue- 
rat.  3.  Haec  consilia  Camillo  consull  vehementer  placuerant  4.  Hi 
pueri  optimo  magistro  nunquam  paruerant.  5.  Caesar  cohortes  novem 
apud  se  retinuit,  et  his  copiis  castra  hostium  audacissime  oppugnavit. 
6.  Milites  ex  hac  nave  in  mare  desiluerunt.  7.  Hos  hortos  cum  max- 
ima cura  dlligens  sennis  coluerat  8.  Hunc  improbum  hominem  ut 
hostem  Gallia  Caesar  arcuit 


LESSON    LIII. 

96,  The  2d  stem  of  very  many  verbs,  mostly  with 
consonant-stems,  is  made  by  attaching  the  ending  s, 
which  combines  with  the  stem  in  the  ways  given  below. 
If  the  stem  end  in  a  vowel-,  the  vowel  is  omitted  before  the 
S.  See  Note  on  Lesson  LI. 

(1).   Gruttural-stems  (c,  g,  h,)  with  s  make  X : 

as,  1.  reg-  2.  rex- 

1.  due-  2.  dux- 

1.  veh-  2.  vex- 

1.  auge-  2.  aux- 

(2.)  Dental-stems  (d,  t,)  with  s  omit  the  dental,  or 
sometimes  change  it  to  s  : 

as,  1.  laed-  2.  laes- 

1.  mit(t)-  2.  mis- 

1.  ccd-  2.  cess- 

1.  ride-  2.  ris- 

1.  senti-  2.  sens- 


9?.]  LESSON  LIH.  75 

(3.)  r-stems  with  s  change  r  to  s,  and  sometimes 
omit  r: 

as,  1.  ger-  2.  gess- 

1.  haere-  2.  haes- 

(4.)  J-stems  with  s,  change  b  to  p,  and  sometimes  to  s  : 

as,  1.  scrib-  2.  scrips- 

1.  jube-  2.  juss- 

97.  NOTE. — It  is  very  common  in  Latin  to  find  an  adjective  or  an 
adjective  pronoun  used  without  a  noun.  In  such  cases,  if  the  adjective 
be  masculine,  the  word  "  man"  is  generally  to  be  supplied  in  English; 
if  it  be  feminine,  the  word  "  woman;"  and  if  neuter,  the  word  "thing." 

Thus,  boni    means     "  good  men." 

bonae      "         "  good  women." 
bona       "        "good  things." 


EXERCISE  95. 

1.  "We  said  all  these-things  boldly  in  the  council  of  the  states.  2.  Te 
had  plucked  the  largest  apples  from  this  tree.  3.  These  very  warlike 
nations  have  carried-on  many  wars  with  the  Romans  in  their-own  ter- 
ritories. 4.  The  horses  dragged  the  wagon  out-of  this  river  with-the- 
greatest-possible  difficulty.  5.  I  had  scattered  these  seeds  too-widely. 
6.  This  legion  remained  in  the  town  more  than  three  months. 


EXERCISE  96. 

1.  Multi  de  rebus  a  majoribus  suls  gestis  scripsere.  2.  Ab  hac  spg 
repulsi  vallo  pedum  undecim  et  fossa  pedum  quindecim  hiberna  cinx- 
eratis.  3.  Has  mumtiones  postero  die  dlligenter  auximus.  4.  Ad 
principem  legates  primes  clvitatis  mlsistis.  5.  Populus  Romanus  bel- 
lum  magnum  et  atrox  cum  Jugurtha  rege  Numidarum  gessit  6.  So- 
cii  cum  auxilils  ex  castris  domum  de  improvise  discesserunt. 


76  LESSON  LIY.  [97. 


LESSON    LIY. 

As  the  2d  and  3d  demonstrative  pronouns  are  declined 
exactly  alike,  only  one  of  them  is  here  given  to  be  learned 
by  heart — 

Isto-,  that  near  you,  and  illo-,  that  near  him,  or  that 
yonder. 

Singular.  Plural. 


Masc.    Fern.    Neut. 

Masc.      Fern.       Neut. 

Nom.  ille         ilia        illud 

ill!            illae         ilia 

Ace.    ilium      illam       " 

illos          illas 

Gen.    illius 

ill  drum    illdrum    illonun 

X>at.     ill! 

illis 

AU.     illo         ilia       illo 

u 

NOTE. — 1st.  Though  the  genii,  and  dot.  sing,  and  dat.  and  dbl  plur.  are 
given  only  once,  the  same  forms  are  used  for  all  genders. 

2d.  The  emphatic  adjective  ipso-,  "self,"  "very,"  is  declined  like  illo-, 
except  that  the  neut.  sing.  nom.  and  ace.  is  ipsum,  and  not  ipsnd. 


EXERCISE  97. 

1.  I  gave  the  book  to  that  boy  (yonder).  2.  That  speech  (of  yours) 
has  by-no-means  pleased  me.  3.  I  have  waited-for  your  letter  about 
those  affairs  (near  you)  a-long-time.  4.  Ye  led  the  Roman  army  across 
yonder  river  into  more  dangerous  places.  5.  We  beheld  the  forces  of 
the  enemy  drawn-out  upon  all  those  hills  (yonder).  6.  The  arrival  of 
that  fleet  (of  yours)  had  greatly  increased  our  hope  of  safety. 


EXERCISE  98. 

1.  Omnes  hostium  naves  in  illo  portu  praefectus  combussit.  2.  In 
illam  provinciam  imperator  exercitum  tmnsduxit,  et  bellum  Qno  se- 
cundo  proelio  f  Inivit.  3.  Maxima  m  istius  vicl  partem  tuis  mllitibus 
concesseriis.  4.  Ilium  miserum  captivum  trinis  catenis  vinctum  hostes 
in  fuga  secum  traxerant.  5.  De  istls  rebus  multi  commenta  absurdis- 
sima  finxerunt.  6.  Subdolus  ille  proditor  noctu  ex  urbe  evasit.  7. 
Omnes  illius  regionis  elves  novum  periculum  mature  Benscrant.  8. 
Multa  bella  superioribus  annis  fellciter  gesseratis. 


98,  99.]  LESSON  LY.  77 

9§.  NOTE. — In  sentence  4  of  this  exercise  we  have  secum,  for 
cum  se.  The  preposition  cum  is  placed  after  the  personal  pronouns, 
instead  of  before  them.  The  same  order  is  also  sometimes  adopted  with 
the  relative  pronoun  quo-. 

Thus  we  have  mecum  instead  of       cum  me. 

tecum  "         "        cum  te. 

secum  "        "        cum  se. 

noblscum  "        "        cum  nobls. 

voblscum  "         "         cum  vobls. 

quibuscum          "        "        cum  quibus  (sometimes). 


LESSON    LY. 

99.  The  pronouns  ho-  and  itto-,  besides  their  proper 
use  to  express  position  in  this  or  that  place,  are  employed 
to  express  the  latter  and  the  former  of  two  things  spoken 
about.  As  ho-  means  this  near  me  it  stands  for  the  latter, 
since  the  thing  last  mentioned  may  be  considered  as  the 
nearer  to  the  speaker.  And  so  illo-  stands  for  the  for- 
mer, or  that  which  is  conceived  of  as  farther  from  the 
speaker,  as  having  been  mentioned  previously  to  something 
which  has  just  been  spoken  of.  In  the  following  exer- 
cises these  pronouns  will  be  used  occasionally  in  these 
senses.  They  may  often  be  translated  by  "the  one," 
"  the  other." 

NOTE. — Though  isto-  has  been  explained  to  mean  that  near  you,  it 
is  often  used  in  cases  where  this  meaning  is  only  indirectly  apparent ; 
and  often  too  where  it  cannot  be  observed  at  all. 


EXERCISE  99. 

1.  The  latter  opinion  pleases  me,  the  former  displeases  (me).  2.  The 
latter  boy  is  industrious,  the  former  (is)  idle.  3.  I  praise  the  diligence 
of  the  one,  I  blame  the  idleness  of  the  other.  4.  Virtue  is  worthy  of 
praise  for  (per)  itself.  5.  The  general  dismissed  those  soldiers,  on- 
accouut-of  (their)  distinguished  valor.  6.  This  state  had  nourished  a- 
long-time. 
7* 


78  LESSON  LYI.  [1OO,  1O1, 


EXERCISE  100. 

1.  Caesar  aciem  instruxerat  in  ilia  valle.  2.  Hostes  ex  omnibus 
illius  silvae  partibus  in  unum  locum  convolaverunt.  3.  Ducea  cupid- 
itates  horum  militum  coercuerunt.  4.  Hoc  bellum  plurimas  nostrae 
urbis  op€s  absumpsit.  5.  Meutem  tuain  in  istis  studiis  probe  exer- 
cuistL  6.  Milites  per  totum  ilium  diem  sitierunt.  7.  Illud  incendium 
totam  fere  urbem  una  nocte  absumpserat.  8.  Patria  nobis  carior  est 
quam  nos  ipsl.  9.  Omne  animal  se  ipsum  diligit.  10.  Saepe  hominl 
nihil  est  inimlcius,  quam  sibi  ipse. 


LESSON    LYI. 

100.  The  2d  stem  of  many  verbs  is  made  without  the 
addition  of  any  ending.     The  first  class  of  these  to  be 
mentioned  consists  of  those  which  take  a  prefix  called 
a  syllable  of  reduplication.    This  syllable  is  made  by 
the  first  consonant  of  the  root,  followed  either  by  the  letter 
e,  or  by  the  first  vowel  of  the  root.    Often  the  vowel  hi  the 
root  is  changed  in  accordance  with  the  principles  stated 
in  the  introduction.     The  following  examples  will  make 
this  clear : 

1.  tend-,  stretch,  2.  tetend- 

1.  cad-,/«#,  2.  cecid- 

1.  fall-,  deceive,  2.  fefell- 

1.  morde-,  bite,  2.  momord- 

101.  NOTE. — In  compound  verbs,    the  syllable  of  reduplication  is 
generally,  though  not  always,  lost.     When  it  is  retained,  it  comes  be- 
tween the  prefix  and  the  root. 

Thus:  1.  decid-  2.  decid-. 

1.  concurr-  2.  concucurr-,  or  concurr-. 

EXERCISE  101. 

1.  We  have  spared  the  inhabitants  of  this  city.  2.  That  rash  young 
man  had  touched  the  beautiful  snake  with  his  fingers.  3.  We  learned 
many-things  from  those  old-men  (near  you).  4.  By  a  bolder  attack  ye 
quickly  drove  yonder  robbers  out-of  this  village.  5.  The  frightened 
horse  ran  as  quickly  as  possible  through  yonder  plain.  6.  Ye  gave  that 
(of  yours)  good  advice  to  the  magistrates  of  our  city. 


102.]  LESSON  LYII.  79 


EXERCISE  102. 

1 .  Subdoli  fares  stultos  carceris  custodes  hoc  consilio  penitus  fefelle- 
runt  2.  Silva  vetus  cecidit :  sed  nemo  arbores  ferro  cecldit.  3.  Imperator 
fidibus  praeclare  ceciait.  4.  Valde  me  momorderuut  epistolae  tuae. 
5.  Mater  hoc  pretiosum  praemium  suae  carae  filiae  spopondit.  6. 
ThebanI  uudique  ex  agrls  conourrerunt,  et  ex  arce  praesidium  pe- 
pulerunfr.  7.  Labore  operis  incitatl  non  mulieribus,  non  infantibus 
pepercimus.  8.  Multl  plura  ex  libris  quam  a  patribus  didicere. 


LESSON    LYII. 

1O2.  Logical  pronouns,  as  was  said  in  Lesson 
XLIX.,  define  the  words  with  which  they  agree,  or  to 
which  they  refer,  not  as  existing  in  this  or  that  part  of 
space,  but  as  being  mentioned  in  the  discourse,  generally 
before,  but  sometimes  afterwards.  The  following  sen- 
tences contain  pronouns  which  must  be  translated  by 
logical  pronouns  in  Latin : 

1 .  Sallust  is  an  elegant  writer ;  I  read  his  books  with 
pleasure. 

2.  Sallust  is  an  elegant  writer,  whose  books  I  read  with 
pleasure. 

It  is  clear  that  in  these  sentences  the  words  his,  whose^ 
refer  to  the  noun,  Sallust,  mentioned  in  the  previous  sen- 
tence ;  and,  as  this  is  the  case,  they  must  be  of  course 
in  the  same  sender  and  in  the  same 
number  as  the  noun  they  refer  to,  which  is  called  their 
antecedent.  It  will  be  seen,  too,  that  though  "  his" 
is  the  genit.  sing,  of  the  English  3d  personal  pronoun,  it 
is  to  be  rendered  by  the  logical  pronoun  eo-,  as  the  Latin 
3d  personal  pronoun  is  only  used  in  a  reflective  sense, 
as  was  said  in  §  94. 

As  eo-  is  quite  irregular  in  its  declension,  it  is  here  given 
to  be  learned  by  heart. 


LESSON  LYIL  [1O3,  104. 

Singular.  Plural. 


Masc.  Fern.  Neut.  Masc.      Fern.    Neut. 
Norn,  is         ea        id  ii  eae       ea 

Ace.    eum    earn      "  eos  eas        " 

Gen.   ejus  eorum      earum  eorum 

Dat.    ei  iis  or  els 

AbL    eo        ea       eo  "        " 

The  following  examples  may  assist  the  pupil  in  using 
this  pronoun  rightly : 

I  hold  his  sword,  ejus  gladium  teneo. 

Pompey  holds  his  sword  (reflective),  Pompeius  suum  gla- 

[dium  tenet. 

You  hold  her  garland,  ejus  corollam  tenes. 

She  holds  her  garland,  (reflective),  suam  corollam  tenet. 
I  hold  their  spears,  eorum  hastas  teneo. 

They  hold  their  spears  (reflective),  suas  hastas  tenent. 

NOTE. — The  gen.  and  dat.  cases  sing.,  and  the  dot.  and  abl.  plur.  are 
the  same  for  all  genders,  though  they  are  only  stated  once  in  the  table. 

103.  NOTE. — Sometimes  logical   pronouns  do   not  refer  to  any 
particular  word,  but  to  a  whole  statement.     In  this  case,  generally  a 
noun  is  introduced,  with  which  the  pronoun  agrees  just  like  an  ad- 
jective. 

104.  Let  this  be  learned  by  heart.    Logical  pronouns  agree  with 
their  antecedents  in  gender  and  number,  out  their  case  is  determined  by  the 
construction  of  their  own  sentences. 


EXERCISE  103. 

1.  We  had  put  the  enemy  to  (in)  flight,  and  had  spared  very-few  of 
them.  2.  Ye  overcame  the  consul  and  sent  his  army  under  the  yoke. 
3.  The  traitors  had  deceived  the  commander,  and  had  given  him  up  to 
the  enemy.  4.  The  Germans  held  Gaul :  no  one  had  ever  contended 
with  that  nation  without  his  own  destruction.  5.  The  Belgae  dwelt 
near  the  Rhine:  these  (people)  had  never  seut  ambassadors  to  Caesar 
concerning  peace.  6.  You  got-together  very  many  sheep  and  sheared 
them. 


1O5.]  LESSON  LYIII.  81 


EXERCISE   104. 

1.  Flumen  sine  perlculo  translveram ;  sed  magnam  impedlmentorum 
partem  in  eo  amiseram.  2.  Pugna  diu  duravit,  et  in  ea  multi  ex  nos- 
trls  ceciderunt.  3.  Aeduos  superaveramus  et  llberos  sacerdotum  ab 
iis  obsides  reduxeramus.  4.  Altum  flumen  ilium  cainpum  cinxit; 
itaque  Pompeius  in  eo  loco  sua  castra  summa  dlligentia  munlvit. 

5.  Helvelil  cum  Germanls  contendunt,  eosque  suls  f Inibus  prohibent. 

6.  In  eapugna  ex  essedls  ad  pedes  desiluerunt.     7.  Nostrl  amlci  fabroa 
vocaverunt,  et  iis  praemia  dederunt.     8.  Carthaginienses  pacem  pete- 
bant  ;  ea  gens  iusigues  calamitates  Romano  populo  olim  intulerat  (1. 
infer-). 


LESSON    LYIII. 

1O«>.  The  2d  stem  of  many  verbs  is  made  either  by 
lengthening  the  stem-vowel  or  by  changing  it  into  e-.  If 
the  1st  stem  end  in  a  vowel  that  vowel  is  dropped. 

1.  leg-,  read,  2.  leg- 

1.  jac(i)-,  throw,  2.  jec- 

1.  fave-,  favor,  2.  iav- 

1.  vide,  see,  2.  vid- 

1.  jnva-,  assist,  2.  juv- 

1.  vi(n)c-,  conquer,  2.  vie-  (see  note*  on 

[Lesson  LI.) 

NOTE. — It  is  supposed  that  the  2d  stem  of  such  verbs  was  originally 
made  by  reduplication,  and  that  the  long  vowel  was  produced  by  the 
contraction  of  the  syllable  of  reduplication  with  the  stem-syllable. 


EXERCISE  105. 

1.  The  soldiers  easily  broke-through  the  line  of  the  enemy,  and  put 
them  to  (in)  flight.  2.  The  barbarians  captured  the  city:  that  loss  the 
Romans  had  sustained  by  the  fault  of  the  lieutenant.  3.  Ye  had  con- 
quered the  consul,  and  had  taken  his  camp.  4.  Caesar  made  peace 
with  the  Aedui ;  that  state  had  carried-on  many  wars  with  the  nearest 
nations.  5.  You  had  collected  a  great  fleet  from  («x)  Asia,  and  had  sent 
it  into  Greece.  6.  Ye  had  collected  all  the  forces  of  the  allies,  and  had 
led  them  into  the  winter-quarters  of  the  eighth  legion. 


82  LESSON  LIX.  [105. 


EXERCISE  106. 

1.  Ubii  cum  Caesare  amicitiam  fecerant,  obsidesque  el  dederant.  2. 
Libertatem  a  majoribus  accepimus,  atque  in  ea  semper  pennanebimus. 
3.  Jam  per  angustias  vestras  copias  transduxeratis,  et  in  Aeduorurn 
flues  perveneratis,  eorumque  agros  vastabatis.  4.  Nondum  barbaro- 
rum  consilia  cognoveramus ;  tamen  eorum  oppida  obsidebamus.  5. 
Prlma  luce  ad  insulam  pervenisti,  ejusque  incolis  ista  tua  dementia 
pepercistL  6.  Superiore  anno  legatum  oppido  praefecl  et  legionem 
octavam  el  commisL  7.  Interim  nostri  militfis  impetum  hostium  sus- 
tinuerunt,  et  complures  ex  iis  ceperunt.  8.  Aper  in  venatores  ruit, 
eosque  ingentl  timore  afficit. 


LESSON    LIX. 

By  the  addition  of  the  syllable  deill  to  the  logical 
pronoun  eo-,  the  adjective  eo-dem  "  the  same"  is  formed. 
As  there  are  some  slight  variations  in  the  declension,  it  is 
here  given  at  length. 

Singular.  Plural. 


Masc.      Fern.  Neut.      Masc.        Fern.       Neut. 
em       eadem   idem     iidem         eaedem      eadem 
Ace;   eundem  eandem     "        eosdem      easdem          " 
Gen.  ejusdem  eorundem  earundem  eorun- 

Dat.  eidem  iisdem  or  elsdem        [dem 

All.    eodem     eadem  eodem      "  " 


EXERCISE  10T. 

1.  Next  day  they  moved  their  camp  from  that  place;  Caesar  did  the 
same  (thing).  2.  You  pleaded  all  causes  in-the-same  manner.  3.  The 
general  always  favored  the  wretched  prisoners  with-the-same  clemency. 
4.  The  boys  had  read  the  same  books.  5.  All  the  soldiers  fled  by  dif- 
ferent ways  into  the  same  wood.  6.  You  had  collected  all  those  ships 
into  the  same  harbor. 


1O6.]  LESSON  LX.  83 

EXERCISE  108. 

1.  Multi  homines  de  eisdem  rebus  eodem  die  non  eadem  sentiunt.  2. 
Insipiens  eldem  sententiae  modo  fidit,  modo  diffldit.  3.  In  eadem 
cnstra  mllites  ex  omnibus  legionibus  imperator  coegerat.  4.  Eodem  die 
hostes  in  proximum  collem  se  receperunt.  5.  Eadem  diel  hora  Caesar 
hostes  vicit,  eorumque  castra  uno  impetu  cepit.  6.  Idem  latro  et  domus 
parietes*  perrupit  et  omne  ex  ea  aurum  ademit.  7.  Eadem  animl  dili- 
gentia  omnes  inimlcl  insidias  cavistl.  8.  Consilio  ejusdem  hominis  ex 
eo  loco  in  illam  urbem  veneras. 


LESSON    LX. 

1 06.  Of  some  verbs  the  2d  stem  is  the  same  as  the  1st, 
and  in  this  case  the  difference  between  the  perfect  and 
imperfect  tenses  is  made  only  by  the  tense-endings. 
This  is  the  case  with  most  verbs  ending  in  u,  and  some 
ending  in  v,  d,  t ;  and  the  same  is  to  be  said  of  many 
compound  verbs,  whose  roots  make  the  2d  stem  by  re- 
duplication, since,  as  was  said  in  §  101,  the  syllable  of 
reduplication  is  generally  lost  when  a  prefix  is  appended : 
and  thus,  that  which  was  used  to  distinguish  the  1st  and 
2d  stem  is  lost  in  the  compounds. 

EXERCISE  109. 

1.  We  boldly  climbed  up  to  the  roof  of  yonder  house.  2.  The  trav- 
eller for-a-long-time  warded-off  the  sword  from  (his)  head  with-(his)- 
right  arm.  3.  We  had  driven-back  the  enemy,  and  had  slain  a  great 
number  of  them.  4.  All  the  citizens  ran-together  into  the  same  part  of 
the  forum.  5.  In-the-course-of  (de)  the  third  watch  we  loosened  the 
ships  from  the  harbor.  6.  The  workmen  have  set  up  a  huge  wooden 
tower  of  four  stories. 

EXERCISE   110. 

1.  Miseram  mulierem  occlderas,  et  caput  el  abscideras.  2.  Illud  rapidum 
flumen  ingentia  saxa  magno  cum  murmure  devolvit.  3.  Tandem  equi- 
tatus  noster  in  conspectum  venit,  hostesque  arma  statim  abjecerunt  ac 

*  The  six  words  abiet-,  ariet-,  pariet-,  seget-,  teget-,  and  interpret- 
keep  the  e  through  all  the  cases. 


84  LESSON  LXI.  [10r,  10§. 

terga  verterunt.  4.  Prlraa  luce  terram  attigimus  omnesque  incolumes 
naves  perduximus.  5.  Legionem  passibus  ducentls  ab  hoc  tumulo  con- 
stituL  6.  Injustus  rex  elves  hostesque  juxta  metuit.  7.  Omnibus  hi3 
rebus  permoti  equites  domum  contenderunt  8.  Milites  infima  saxa 
turns  convellerunt 


LESSON    LXI. 

107.  It  was  said  in  §  92,  that  compound  sentences 
are  such  as  are  made  up  of  two  or  more  simple  ones ;  and 
that  these  are  sometimes  combined  co-ordinately.     It  is 
hoped  that  this  expression  is  by  this  time  understood,  as 
it  now  becomes  necessary  to  speak  of  cases,  where  simple 
sentences  are  combined  to  form  compound  ones  in  such 
a  way  that  one  of  them  is  introduced  subordinately  to  the 
other.   The  following  examples  will  make  the  meaning  of 
this  clear : 

1.  The  man  whom  we  loved  is  dead. 

2.  He  still  lies  where  he  died. 

In  the  1st  of  these,  the  sentence  "whom  we  love"  is 
joined  like  an  adjective  or  attribute  to  the  noun  "  the  man." 

In  the  2d,  the  sentence  "  where  he  died"  is  joined  like 
an  adverb  to  the  word  "  lies." 

In  this  book  the  sentence  which  contains  the  main  as- 
sertion, and  to  which  the  other  is  joined,  will  be  called 
the  primary  sentence ;  and  the  sentence  which  is 
introduced  in  explanation  of  the  main  assertion,  and  in 
subordination  to  it,  will  be  called  the  secondary 
sentence.  As  these  terms  will  in  future  be  used  with- 
out further  explanation,  it  is  very  important  that  their 
meaning  should  be  well  understood  at  once. 

108.  We  shall  speak  at  present  only  about  secondary 
sentences,  which  constitute  the  1st  of  the  classes  given 
above,  and  which  may  be  called  adjective  second- 
ary sentences,  or,  more  shortly,  adjectival  sen- 
tences.    Adjectival  sentences  are  joined  to 
primary  sentences  by  means  of  a  logical  pronoun,  which 


108.]  LESSON  LXI.  85 

is  called  in  grammar  the  relative  pronoun.     In 

§  102  it  was  said  that  all  logical  pronouns  refer  to  some 
word,  generally  stated  in  a  previous  sentence,  which  is 
called  their  antecedent,  and  that  they  therefore  nearly 
always  are  found  in  the  same  gender  and  number  as  their 
antecedent.  But  what  has  been  often  seen  in  the  case  of 
the  logical  pronoun  eo-  is  equally  true  with  regard  to  the 
relative  pronoun,  namely,  that  the  case  of  the  logical  (or 
relative)  pronoun  depends  upon  the  construction  of  the 
words  in  its  own  sentence.  Thus,  in  the  1  st  example  given 
above,  the  antecedent,  "the  man,"  is  in  the  nominative 
case,  standing  as  the  subject  of  the  verb  "  is  dead;"  but 
the  relative  "  whom"  is  in  the  accusative  case,  standing 
as  the  object  of  the  verb  "we  love."  The  relative  pro- 
noun in  Latin  is  quo-,  and  it  is  thus  declined : 

Singular.  Plural. 


Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N'om 

.  qui 

quae 

quod 

qui 

quae 

quae 

Ace. 

quern 

quam 

u 

quos 

quas 

u 

Gen.    cujus)fnd        quorum  quarum     quorum 
Dat.    cui      \  quibus  )  f       „         -, 

All.     quo        qua       quo  «       f  «»  all  genders. 


NOTE. — 1st.  It  is  most  particularly  to  be  observed  that  a  relative  pro- 
noun introduces  a  perfect  sentence ;  and  therefore  all  the  words  which 
are  connected  with  it  in  construction  must  be  kept  separate  from  the  words 
which  constitute  the  primary  sentence. 

2d.  If  there  be  any  doubt  as  to  what  case  of  the  relative  pronoun  is 
to  be  employed,  take  in  its  place  its  antecedent,  and  join  it  with  the  re- 
maining words  of  the  adjectival  sentence;  and  it  will  thus  be  made 
clear  in  what  connection  the  relative  pronoun  stands  with  the  other 
words  in  its  sentence.  Thus:  "Sallust  is  a  writer  whose  books  I  read 
with  pleasure."  In  what  case  is  the  relative  whose  to  be  made  ?  The 
antecedent  is  clearly  "  Sallust."  Say  now:  "I  read  the  books  of  Sal- 
lust  with  pleasure."  Since  the  antecedent  now  appears  in  the  genitive 
case,  that  must  be  the  case  of  the  relative  pronoun  also. 

3d.  Since  the  sentences  we  are  speaking  of  are  adjectival,  sentences, 
which  are  used  to  qualify  some  nouns  in  the  primary  sentences,  they 
must  as  a  general  rule  be  inserted  immediately  after  the  nouns  which 
they  qualify. 


86  LESSON  LXIL  [109. 


EXERCISE  111. 

1.  Sallust  is  a  very  elegant  writer,  whose  books  I  read  with  pleasure. 
2.  We  have  buried  the  man  whom  ye  killed.  3.  "We  obey  the  king, 
whose  rule  is  mild  and  just.  4.  The  king  is  happy  whom  all  the  citizens 
love.  5.  Men  are  happy,  who  direct  (their)  life  by  the  laws  of  virtue. 
6.  We  will  send  home  the  prisoners  whom  we  have  spared. 


EXERCISE  112. 

1.  Deus  favet  homim  qui  virtutem  amat.  2.  Omnes  res  bonae  sunt 
quas  Deus  creavit.  3.  Magna  sunt  beneficia,  quibus  Deus  nos  quotidie 
cumulat.  4.  Propter  virtutem  et  probitatem  etiam  eos  dlligimus  quos 
nunquam  vidimus.  5.  Servl,  quos  misisti,  me  convenerunt.  6.  Britan- 
nia est  insula  natura  triquetra,  cujus  unum  latus  est  contra  G-alliam. 
7.  Multa,  quae  stultl  expetunt,  sapieutes  spernujit.  8.  Domus,  quam 
aedificamus,  est  ad  mare. 


LESSON    LXII. 

Very  often  the  logical  pronoun  eo-  is  used  as  the  ante- 
cedent of  the  relative  quo-,  or  agrees  with  it.  When  eo- 
stands  alone  as  the  antecedent  it  is  used  as  a  noun,  and 
means  either  "  those  men,"  "  those  women,"  or  "  those 
things,"  according  to  its  gender,  just  as  it  was  said  in  §  97 
that  adjectives  did. 

1O9.  Sometimes,  too,  the  relative  pronoun  does  not 
agree  in  gender  and  number  with  its  antecedent,  but  has 
another  noun  introduced  along  with  it,  which  stands  in 
place  of  the  true  antecedent,  whether  that  be  a  simple 
noun  or  a  whole  sentence.  The  particular  facts  in  con- 
nection with  this  subject  can  only  be  fully  stated  in  sys- 
tematic grammars ;  but  it  is  hoped  that  when  instances 
occur  in  the  reading  lessons  of  such  peculiarities,  the 
teacher  will  take  the  opportunity  thus  offered  of  explain- 
ing to  his  pupils  wherein  the  variation  from  the  ordinary 
rule  consists. 


110-112.]  LESSON  LXIII.  87 

1 1 0.  Very  often  the  relative  pronoun  is  used  in  Latin 
where  we  should  employ  a  personal  or  demonstrative 
pronoun  with  some  conjunctions.  It  thus  often  serves 
the  place  of  a  mere  connective. 

111.  NOTE. — The  two  logical  pronouns  eo-  and  quo-  may  be  used 
in  relation  to  words  of  the  1st,  2d,  or  3d  persons,  and  so  may  be  fol- 
lowed by  verbs  in  any  one  of  the  three  persons. 

EXERCISE    113. 

1.  That  is  the  pleasantest  friendship,  which  similarity  of  manners 
lias  yoked-together  (i.  e.,  has  brought  about).  2.  (It)  is  God  who  rules  this 
world.  3.  Many  states  will  revolt  from  Cyrus ;  which  thing  will  be  the 
cause  of  many  wars.  4.  Those-things  which  we  desire  we  easily  be- 
lieve. 5.  The  conquerors  did  not  spare  the  women  who  had  fled  into 
the  town.  6.  The  robbers  have  set-on-fire  the  ships,  which  ye  were 
repairing  in  yonder  harbor. 

EXERCISE    114. 

1.  Eas  res,  quas  commemoravistis,  memoria  teneo.  2.  Helvetil  le- 
gatos  ad  vos  miserant;  cujus  legationis  Dlvico  erat  princeps  qul 
superiore  bello  Helvetios  duxerat.  3.  Dux  Arvernos  bello  superavit, 
quibus  populus  Romanus  ignovit,  neque  stipendium  imposuit.  4.  Ob 
eas  causas  el  munition!,  quam  feceras,  me  praefecisti.  5.  Eos  duces 
delegimus,  qui  omnes  annos  una  cum  Sertorio  egerant.  6.  Vos,  qul 
Ariovistum  intra  fines  recepistis,  omnes  cruciatus  perferetis.  7.  In 
Eburones,  quorum  pars  maxima  est  inter  Mosam  ac  Rhenum,  cohortes 
quinque  mlsimus.  8.  Duces  et  auxilia  ex  Hispania  arcessemus,  quorum 
adventu  bellum  acriter  geremus. 


LESSON    LXIII. 

11^.  It  was  seen  in  §  78  that  the  imperfect  tenses  of 
es-,  "  be,"  are  irregular.  The  perfect  tenses  are  regularly 
formed,  but  the  2d  stem  is  fu-.  Thus  we  have — 

1.  The  present  perfect  or  aorist,  fui,  fuisti,  &c., 
I  have  been,  &c. 

2.  The  past  perfect,  fueram,  fueras,  &c.,  I  had 
been,  <£c. 

3.  The  future  perfect,  fuero,  fueris,  &c.,  I  shall 
have  been,  &c. 


LESSON  LUV.  [113. 


EXERCISE  115. 

1.  Ye,  who  had  been  the  leaders  of  the  Gauls  in  the  former  war, 
were  the  chiefs  of  that  embassy.  2.  This  woman  was  among  the  pris- 
oners whom  we  had  taken.  3.  You  who  prefer  death  to  slavery  have 
always  been  very-dear  to  me.  4.  The  difficulty  of  that  march,"  which 
had  been  through  woods  and  marshes,  was  very-great  5.  There  have 
been  very-learned  men  in  that  nation,  who  have  discovered  many  use- 
ful things.  6.  "We  were  in  the  city  before  the  beginning  of  the  war, 
which  Caesar  carried-on  in  Gaul 


EXERCISE  116. 

1.  Geometria  in  summo  honore  fuit  apud  Graecos,  quT  omnibus  scientiis 
maxime  studebant.  2.  In  exercitu  L.  Sullae  fueramus,  qul  in  Asia 
maximum  bellum  confecit  3.  Hujus  consilil  principes  fuerant  regis 
f  Ilii,  quos  pater  gravissimo  supplicio  aftecit.  4.  Initio  ejus  belli  dux 
Germanorum  fuit  Ariovistus  qul  multos  menses  Romanls  resistebat 
5.  Apud  Helvetios  longe  nobilissimus  et  ditissimus  fuit  Orgetorix,  qul 
conjurationem  nobilitatis  fecit.  6.  Dictator  fuit  Camillus,  qul  primum 
hostes  vlcit  acie,  deinde  etiam  urbem  .obsedit.  7.  Numa,  rex  Romae 
secundus,  qul  nullum  quidem  bellum  gessit,  non  minus  clvitati  quam 
Romulus  profuit  (1.  prodes-).  8.  Tarquinius,  qul  propter  superb iam 
Superbl  cognomen  accepit,  Septimus  fuit  atque  ultimus  regum. 


LESSON    LXIV. 

In  the  following  exercises  examples  of  the  future  perfect 
tense  will  be  introduced.  The  conjugation  of  this  tense 
is  given  in  §  89. 

113.  It  is  now  necessary  to  say  something  of  the  2d 
class  of  secondary  sentences,  which  (see  §  107)  may  be 
called  adverbial  sentences.  These  are  so  called 
because  their  meaning  defines  the  assertion  made  in  the 
primary  sentence  in  the  same  way  as  an  adverb  defines 
the  meaning  of  a  verb  or  adjective.  These  sentences  may 
be  classified  in  the  following  way : 


LESSON 


Adverbial  sentences  assert, 
1.)  The  place 

2.  The  time 

3.  The  condition 

4.  The  cause 

5.  The  purpose 

6.  The  consequence 

7.  The  manner 


of  the  action  spoken  of  in 
the  primary  sentence. 


114.  The  words  which  introduce  these  adverbial  sen- 
tences, are  called  in  the  grammars  subordinate  conjunc- 
tions. As  we  appropriated  the  name  conjunction 
to  those  which  introduced  sentences  co-ordinately  to  the 
first  sentence,  we  shall  venture  for  shortness  to  name  the 
ones  which  introduce  subordinate  sentences  siilij  unc- 
tions. 

The  following  names  and  examples  may  be  taken  to 
assist  the  pupil  to  remember  and  understand  the  classifi- 
cation given  above  :  though  it  is  by  no  means  expected 
that  it  will  be  fully  comprehended  at  present. 


Primary 
sentence. 


Adverbial  Name  of 

sentence.  adv.  sentence. 

where  he  died.          Local. 

1  16.  (2.)  He  went  home,  when  he  was  cured.  Temporal. 

117.  (3.)  You  make  a  mistake,  if  you  say  that.        Conditional. 
1  1  §.  (4.)  I  love  you,  because  you  are  kind.  Causal. 

119.  (5.)  We  must  eat,  that  we  may  live.    Final. 

1  2O.  (6.1  The  king  was  so  cruel,  that-he  was  hated.   Con§eciltive. 
He  always  speaks,        as  he  thinks.  Modal. 


115.  (l.)He  still  lies, 
.  (2.)  He  went  home, 


.     . 
.  (6.1 

.  (7  .) 


In  the  following  exercises  examples  of  the  first  three  of 
these  classes  will  be  given. 

1  22.  It  has  been  observed  that  the  future  perfect  is 
used  when  an  action  is  spoken  as  finished  at  a  future  time. 
In  the  coming  exercise  those  verbs  which  are  to  be  ren- 
dered by  the  future  perfect  tense  will  have  the  full  mean- 
ing of  the  tense  given  (by  the  words  "shall  have,"  "will 
have")  ;  but  generally  in  English  the  present  imperfect 
or  perfect  tense  is  used  instead  of  this  fuller  form  . 
8* 


90  LESSON  LXY.  [122. 


EXEECISE  117. 

1.  You  will  return  before  I  shall  have  gone  away.  2.  We  shall  easily 
pay  this  tax  when  we  shall  have  sold  the  sheep  and  oxen,  3.  We  will 
nee  into  the  woods  before  the  army  shall  have  come.  4.  When  the 
fourth  legion  shall  have  moved  its  winter-quarters,  the  first  legion  will 
succeed  it.  5.  If  I  shall  have  received-information  about  the  war,  I 
will  report  (it)  to  the  consuls.  6.  If  we  shall  have  performed  all  these- 
things  we  shall  prevail  upon  the  jurymen. 


EXERCISE  118. 

1.  Animi   quum  e  corporibus  excesserint  in  coelum  pervenient. 

2.  Quum  portas  aperueritis,  proditores  ex  urbe  quam  celerrime  fugient. 

3.  Si  praetor  exercitum  ex  periculo  eripuerit,  Senatus  el  gratias  aget. 

4.  Quum  messem  peregeritis,  frumentum  mercatori  vendetis.   5.  Si  ante 
mediam  noctem   adveneris  llteras    scribam.      6.  Antequam  portam 
aperueris,  rex  adveniet.     7.  De  Romanorum  adventu  hostes  nou  ante 
coguoscent  quam  ipse  rem  nuntiavero.     8.  Nostrl  prius  impetum  facient 
quam  hostes  flumen  transierint. 

XOTE. — In  the  7th  and  8th  sentences,  the  subjunctions  antequam  and 
priusquam,  "before,"  are  separated;  the  parts,  ante  and  prius,  being 
placed  in  the  primary  sentence,  and  quam  introducing  the  secondary 
sentence. 


LESSON    LXY. 

In  the  following  exercises  examples  of  all  the  imperfect 
and  perfect  tenses  will  be  introduced. 


EXERCISE  119. 

1.  While  the  soldiers  were  entering  the  city,  the  citizens  were  full  of 
fear.  2.  How  shall  he  (eo-)  govern  (his)  children,  who  does  not  govern 
his-own  passions?  3.  If  you  shall  cultivate  virtue,  all  good  men  will 
love  you.  4.  If  you  shall  have  adorned  (your)  mind  with  virtues,  you 
will  always  be  happy.  5.  As-soon  as  I  shall  have  heard  the  affair,  I 
will  write  to  you.  6.  Before  war  had  consumed  (aor.)  the  resources  of 
our  city,  (it)  was  very  powerful. 


123.] 


LESSON  LXYI. 


91 


EXERCISE  120. 

1.  Gens  Lacedsemoniorum  fortis  fuit,  dum  Lycurgi  leges  vigebant. 
2.  Tamdiu  manebo,  donee  totam  rem  cognovero.  3.  Quamdiu  felix 
eris,  multi  tibi  erunt  amici.  4.  Quum  hostes  agros  devastaverint, 
urbem  ipsam  oppugnabunt.  5.  In  els  potissimum  rebus,  ad  quas  aptis- 
siral  erimus,  elaborabimus.  6.  Multi  nune  pauperriml  sunt,  qul  olirn 
ditissiml  erant  7.  Fueram  liber :  avaritia  me  fecit  servum.  8.  Probis 
hominibus  qui  placuerit,  is  Deo  quoque  placebit. 


LESSON    LXVI. 

The  verb  es-  is  used  with  several  prefixes,  mak- 
ing compound  verbs.  All  of  these  are  conjugated  exactly 
like  the  simple  verb,  except  two,  potes-,  "  be  able,"  and 
prodes-,  "  be  profitable." 

(1.)  Potes-      (a)  changes  t  into  s  before  §. 

tb)  omits  f  after  t. 

(2.)  Prodes-  (a)  omits  d  before  s.  (Really  d  is  in- 
serted before  the  forms  beginning  with  e.) 

(b)  omits  d  before  f. 
The  tenses  therefore  will  be — 

Potes-  Prodes- 

Pres.  imperf.      1.  Possum.  Prosum. 

Sing.     2.  Potes.  Prodes. 

3.  Potest.  Prodest. 

1.  Possumus.  Prosumus. 

2.  Potestis.  Prodestis. 

3.  Possunt.  Prosunt. 

Past  imperf.  Poteram,  &Q.  Proderam,  &c. 

Fut.  imperf.  Potero,  &c.  Prodero,  &c. 

Pres.perf.  Potui,  &c.  Profui,  &c. 

Past  perf.  Potueram,  <fcc.  Profueram,  &c. 

Fat.perf.  Potuero,  &c.  Profuero,  &c. 

In  the  following  exercises  some  of  the  compounds  of  es- 
will  be  introduced — all  these  (except  potes-}  may  have  a 
dative  after  them  in  one  of  the  ordinary  senses  of  that 
case,  as  given  in  §§  44-48. 


92  LESSON  LXYII.  [124. 


EXERCISE  121. 

1 .  You  will  come  to  the  city  to-morrow,  if  yon  can  (fat}.  2.  Te 
were  not  able  longer  to-bear  (ferre)  the  attack  of  our  soldiers,  and 
turned  (your)  backs.  3.  God  is-near  all  places,  and  directs  all  things  by 
his-own  will.  4.  We  despise  those  who  are-profitable  to  no-one.  5. 
Those  who  cultivate  virtue  are-profitable  to  themselves  and  to  the  state. 

6.  I  will  send  the  prisoner  from  the  camp  to-morrow,  if  I  can  (fut.\ 

7.  The  officer,  who  had  recently  conquered  the  enemy,  was-over  the 
larger  fleet. 

EXERCISE  122. 

1.  Noctes  prosunt  furibus  magis  quam  dies.  2.  Quartae  legionis 
hiberna  aberant  ab  Ariovisto  millia  passuum  quindecim.  3.  Dicernus 
Latine,  si  poterinms.  4.  lis  legionibus.  quas  in  Gallia  citeriore  Caesar 
conscripserat,  Labienus  praefui't.  5.  Adfuit  vir  praestantl  eloquentia, 
cujus  oratio  omnibus  principibus  tandem  persuusit.  6.  Yicti  hostes  in 
montem,  qui  proxime  suberat,  quam  maxima  poterant  celeritate  se 
receperunt.  7.  Circiter  millia  hominum  centum  trigirita  superfuCrunt, 
qui  domum  reverterunt.  8.  Llteras  Graecas  uon  didici,  quae  ad  vir- 
tutem  doctoribus  nihil  profuerunt. 


LESSON    LXYII. 

Transitive  verbs,  as  has  been  said,  are  those 
which  admit  an  object  after  them  in  the  accusative  case : 
the  word  transitive  denotes  that  the  action,  which  is 
asserted  of  the  subject,  passes  across  from  the  subject, 
and  in  its  effects  reaches  an  object.  Almost  every  sen- 
tence heretofore  given  in  the  exercises  is  an  example  of 
this.  Verbs  when  so  used  are  said  to  be  in  the  active 
Voice  :  i.  e.,  when  the  action  is  described  as  passing1 
from  the  subject :  and  in  this  case  the  subject  "(or 
doer  of  the  action)  and  the  object  (or  sufferer  of  the  action) 
are  stated  with  equal  prominence.  But  as  in  process  of 
time  it  became  desirable  to  have  the  means  of  making 
the  object  of  the  action  the  more  prominent  notion,  by  a 
peculiar  artifice  of  language  the  object  came  to  be  used 
as  the  subject  of  the  sentence  :  and  then  of  course  it  was 


125.]  LESSON  LXYII.  93 

necessary  that  the  verb  should  describe  the  action  not  as 
passing  from,  but  as  passing  to  the  subject. 

Thus:  the  sentence  "Brutus  killed  Caesar,"  states  the  doer 
and  the  receiver  of  the  action  with  equal  prominence. 
But  the  same  general  notion  may  be  thus  expressed: 
"  Caesar  was  killed  by  Brutus,"  and  here  the  subject 
of  the  sentence  is  the  sufferer,  not  the  doer  of  the 
action,  and  the  sufferer  is  in  this  way  made  the  more 
prominent  notion.  When  the  verb  is  used  in  this  way, 
it  is  said  to  be  in  the  passive  voice. 

In  English  the  passive  voice  is  made  by  the  past  parti- 
ciple of  the  verb,  in  combination  with  the  different  tenses 
of  the  verb  "  to  be." 


In  Latin  the  passive  voice  in  the  imperfect  tenses 
is  distinguished  from  the  active  only  by  a  distinct  set  of 
person-endings,  the  tense-stems  being  in  all  cases  the  same 
both  for  the  passive  and  active  voices.  These  person-end- 
ing are  here  given  as  those  of  the  active  voice  were  stated 
in  Lesson  VII. 


For  stems  For  stems  in 

ending  in  a,  c,  i.  11  or  a  coii§oiiant. 


1.    r  or. 


i  i.    r  or. 

Sing.  1  2.  -ri§  or  re,  eris  or  ere. 

(3.  -Uir,  itiir. 

•I 


•tur, 

1.  -iiiur,  imiir. 

riur.  <J  2.  -mini,  imiiii. 

iitur,  imtur. 


The  present  imperfect  passive  is  thus  conjugated  : 

ama-,  love,  mone-,  advise,  audi-,  hear,  reg-,  rule. 


f1- 

amor, 

moneor, 

audior, 

regor, 

I  am  ruled. 

II* 

CO 

(  amaris, 
(  amare, 

moneris, 
monere, 

audiris, 
audire, 

regeris,  { 
regere,  j" 

thou  art 

a 

u 

amatur  ; 

monetur  ; 

audltur  ; 

regitur; 

he  is 

<( 

lit 

amamur, 
amamini, 
amantur. 

monemur, 
moneminl, 
monentur. 

audlmur, 
audlmini, 
audiuntur. 

regimur, 
regimini, 
reguntur. 

we  are 
ye  are 
they  are 

u 
u 
u 

94  LESSON  LXYIL  [126. 

The  past  imperfect  passive  is  thus  conjugated : 

1.  amabar,         monebar,  audiebar,      regebar,        /  was  ruled. 

9    (  amabaris,  monebaris,  audiebaris,    regebaris,  )  ., 

1  }  amabare,    rconebare,  audiebare,     regebafe,    J 

3.  amabatur,      mouebatur;  audiebatur;  regebatur.    he  was      " 

.  amabamur,    monebamur,  audiebamur,  regebamur,  we  were     " 


2.  amabamini,  monebamini,  audiebamin^regebamini,  ye  were 

3.  amabantur.  monebantxir.  audiebantur.regebantur.  they  were  " 


The  future  imperfect  passive  is  thus  conjugated: 


f 
I 

(^ 


1.  amabor,  monebor,  audiar,        regar,  I  shall  be  ruled, 

(amaberis,  moneberis,  audieris,     regeris,  )  thouwatbe  „ 

"   (  amabere,  monebere,  audiere,      regere,  ) 

3.  amabitur ;  monebitur ;  audietur.    regetur ;  he  will  be      " 

1.  amabimur,  monebimur,  audiemur,  regemur,  we  shall  be  " 

2.  amabiuiini,  monebimuai,  audiemini,  regemini,  you  utitt  be   " 

3.  amabuntur.  monebuntur.  audientur.  regentur.  they  will  be  " 


NOTE. — 1st.  To  save  space,  the  English  of  reg-  only  is  given ;  but  the 
other  three  examples  can,  of  course,  be  translated  by  substituting 
the  participles  "loved,"  "advised,"  heard,"  for  "ruled,"  in  the  above 
places. 

2d.  As  o  is  the  ending  for  all  verbs  in  the  1st  person  of  the  pres. 
imperf.  active,  so  is  or  for  the  passive :  and  verbs  with  i-stems  take 
lint ur  from  the  2d  coftimn. 

3d.  The  ending  or  contracts  with  the  a  of  the  stem  of  the  1st 
conjugation. 

4th.  The  future  tense- ending  e  is  changed  to  a  in  the  1st  person 
sing. 

5th.  All  the  passive  imperfect  person-endings  contain  the  letter  r, 
except  the  2d  person  plur. 


In  the  following  exercises,  sentences  are  given  first  with 
the  verbs  in  the  active  voice,  and  are  then  repeated  in  the 
passive  form  ;  but  it  must  be  particularly  noted  that  : 

The  subject  of  the  active  verb,  if  a  living  agent, 


is  expressed  in  the  ^Kissive  construction  by  the  ablative 
case  with  the  preposition  a,  or  ab.  Call  this  "  the 
ablative  of  the  agciit." 


127.]  LESSON  LXVIII.  95 


EXERCISE   123. 

1.  Brutus  kills  Caesar  with  a  sword.  2.  Caesar  is  killed  by  Bru- 
tus with  a  sword.  3.  You  praised  the  conqueror  on-account-of  his 
clemency.  4.  The  conqueror  was  praised  by  you  on  account  of  his 
clemency.  5.  The  general  will  not  prevail-upon  me  by  all  (his)  threats. 
6.  I  shall  not  be  prevailed-upon  by  the  general  by  all  (his)  threats. 


EXERCISE  124. 

1.  Agros  hostium  late  ferro  et  igne  vastamus.  2.  Agri  hostium  late 
ferro  et  igne  a  nobls  vastantur.  8.  Si  semper  bene  vixeris,  omnes 
te  diligent.  4.  Si  semper  bene  vixeris,  ab  omnibus  dlligere.  5.  Urbem 
hostes  oppugnabant,  elves  acriter  defendebant.  5.  Urbs  ab  hostibus 
oppugnabatur,  a  civibus  acriter  defendebatur.  7.  Exploratores  earn 
rem  nobls  statim  nuntiant.  8.  Ea  res  ab  exploratoribus  nobls  statim 
nuntiatur. 


LESSON    LXVIII. 

r.  Verbs  like  cap(i}-  are  thus  conjugated  in  the 
present  imperfect  tense  passive. 

SI.  Capior,  (  1.  Capimur, 

2.  Caperis  or  capere,      Plur.  \  2.  Capimini, 
3.  Capitur,  (  3.  Capiuntur. 

EXERCISE  125. 

1.  You  were  collecting  as  large  forces  as  possible  of  infantry  and 
cavalry.  2.  As  large  forces  as  possible  of  infantry  and  cavalry  were 
being  collected  by  you.  3.  The  scout  carried-down  (imperf)  this  mes- 
sage to  the  miserable  townsmen,  and  affected  them  all  with-very-great 
joy.  4.  This  message  was  carried-down  by  the  scout  to  the  miserable 
townsmen,  and  they-all  were  affected  with-very-great  joy.  5.  At  the 
setting  of  the  sun  Ariovistus  leads  back  (his)  forces  into  the  camp.  6.  At 
the  setting  of  the  sun  the  forces  are  led  back  into  the  camp. 


EXERCISE    126. 

1.  Neque  fortunae  impetu,  nee  multitudinis  opmione,  nee  dolore  neque 
paupertate  terreor.     2.  Eodem  tempore  haec  mihi  mandata  referebantur, 


96  LESSON  LXIX.  [128,  129. 

et  logati  ab  Aeduls  veniebant.  3.  Omnes  amlci  consulum  coguntur  in 
senatum :  eorum  vocibus  et  concursu  potestas  libere  decernendi  plurimls 
eripitur.  4.  Rel  mllitaris  perltissiml  habemur :  atque  cum  explGrator- 
ibus  praemittemur .  5.  Defensores  oppido  idonei  a  nobis  deliguntur. 
6.  Xova  legio  in  Gallia  citeriore  ab  imperatore  conscribitur.  7.  Horum 
vocibus  ac  timore  paulatim  etiam  tu  perturbabaris.  8.  Fossae  circum 
urbem  uoctu  a  nobis  perficientur. 


LESSON    LXIX. 

We  now  come  to  speak  of  participles. 

128.  Participles  are  verbal  adjectives;  that 
is,  they  are  adjectives  formed  from  verbs,  which  express 
the  action  of  the  verb  as  a  property  belonging  to  a  person 
or  thing. 

Some  languages  have  more  participles  than  others.  In 
Latin  there  are  only  three  ;  two  belonging  to  the  active 
voice  of  the  verb,  and  one  belonging  to  the  passive  voice. 
At  present  we  shall  only  speak  of  the  last :  the  periect 
participle  passive. 

129.  What  has  been  hitherto  learned  as  the  3d  stem 
of  the  verb  is  really  the  perfect  participle  passive  ;  and 
as  this  is  always  given  in  the  vocabulary,  nothing  more 
will  be  said  about  its  formation  than  that  it  is  nearly  al- 
ways made  by  adding  to  the  verb-stem  the  ending  so-  or 
to-9  and  the  adjective  thus  formed  is  declined  like  any  ad- 
jective ending  in  o-. 

The  perfect  part,  passive  may  be  translated  in  English, 
according  to  circumstances,  in  three  ways.  Thus,  from 
duo,  "  lead,"  we  have  3.  ducto-, 

which  may  be  translated  (1)  •"  having  been  led," 

(2)  "being  led," 

(3)  "led." 

The  first,  however,  is  the  proper  full  meaning  of  the 
form. 


130.]  LESSON  LXX.  97 


EXERCISE  12T. 

1.  Being  alarmed'by  the  sudden  arrival  of  the  array,  the  enemy  retired 
within  their  fortifications.  2.  -£his  village,  being  situated  in  a  valley,  is  hem- 
med in  on-every-side  by-very-lofty  mountains.  3.  The  soldiers,  liaving- 
been  driven  back  by-the-missiles  of  the  enemy,  were  fleeing  in-all-direc- 
tions. 4.  Having-been-overcome,  ye  were  seeking  safety  in-flight.  5.  The 
town  having-been-taken  will-be-set-on-fire.  6.  The  javelin  thrown  down 
from  the  higher  ramparts  pierced  the  soldier's  thigh. 


EXERCISE  128. 

1.  Arma  dejecta  de^muro  in  fossam,  quae  erat  ante  oppidum,  altitu- 
dinem  aggeris  paene  adaequaverunt.  2.  Mulier,  hujus  rel  a  me  certior 
facta,  sub  tectum  properaverat.  3.  Alteram  ejus  vlcl  partem  Galll3 
concessi:  alteram  ab  illls  vacuam  relictam  cohortibus  attribul.  4. 
Funditores  perterritos  in  fugam  dedistis.  5.  Servus,  spe  llbertatis  ad- 
ductus,  iu  castra  quam  citissime  redibit.  6.  Naves,  quae  a  vobls 
aedificabantur,  tandem  perfectae  ad  novum  portum  convenient.  7. 
Diu  et  acriter  pugnavistis :  tandem  vulneribus  confecti  terga  vertistis. 
8.  Scuta  ictu  plloruin  transfixa  manibus  emisimus. 


LESSON    LXX. 

13O.  A  very  common  use  of  the  perf.  partic.  pass,  is 
in  the  construction  called  ablative  absolute.  The 

word  "  absolute"  means  "  loosed  from,"  and  words  are 
said  to  be  used  absolutely,  when  they  may  be  taken  out 
of  a  sentence  without  affecting  its  construction.  Thus  : 
"  Nature  being-  our  guide,  we  cannot  go  wrong ;"  in  this 
sentence  the  words  marked  by  italics  could  be  omitted 
without  damaging  the  construction  of  the  remainder. 

Let  the  following  sentences  be  examined. 

(1.)  This  battle  having  been  fought,  CsBsar  led  back  his 
army. 

(2.)  The  javelins  being  hurled,  they  broke  through  the 
enemy. 

(3.)  The  javelins  being  thrown  away,  they  fought  hand 
to  hand. 


98  LESSON  LXX.  [131,  133. 

It  is  clear  that  the  words  marked  by  italics  denote  in  the 

131.  1st  sentence  the  time  when  the  main  action 
occurred. 

1 32.  2d  sentence  the  means  by  which  the  main 
action  occurred. 

133.  3d  sentence  the  circumstances  under 
Which  the  main  action  occurred. 

Such  expressions,  denoting  these  particulars  about  the 
main  action,  are  in  Latin  generally  put  in  the  ablative  case, 
and  are  said  to  be  in  the  ablative  absolute.  A 
reference  to  what  has  been  said  (in  §§  54,  56,  61)  about 
the  uses  of  the  ablative  case  in  Latin,  will  show  the  rea- 
son why  this  case  was  preferred  for  the  absolute  construc- 
tion. 

In  general  then:  the  ablative  absolute  is  the 
name  used  when  the  ablative  of  a  noun  is  accompanied 
by  an  adjective,  or  a  participle,  or  another  noun,  to  denote 
the  time  when,  the  means  by  which,  or 
any  attending  circumstances  under  which  the 
principal  action  occurs.  Let  this  be  learned  by  heart. 
More  particular  information  about  the  matter  will  be 
given  subsequently  ;  at  present  it  is  only  necessary  to  say 
that  very  often  in  English  suhjunctions  are  used  introduc- 
ing secondary  sentences,  when  the  ablative  absolute  would 
be  employed  in  Latin. 


EXEKCISE  129. 

1.  The  hostages  having  been  deliver -ed-up,  Caesar  hastened  into  the 
territories  of  the  Aedui.  2.  Caesar,  his-army  having  been  landed, 
hastened  towards  the  enemy.  3.  Caesar,  the  horses  of  all  having 
been  removed  out  of  sight,  joined  battle.  4.  The  soldiers,  (their)  javelins 
having  been  hurled  from  the  higher  ground,  easily  broke-through  the 
phalanx  of  the  enemy.  5.  This  (phalanx)  having  been  broken-apart. 
they  made  an  attack  upon  them  (to-)  with-drawn-swords.  6.  The  Hel- 
vetii.  a  phalanx  having  been  made,  mounted-up  to-meet  (sub)  our  first 
line. 

NOTE. — In  these  sentences  the  literal  English  of  the  Latin  expressions 
has  been  given.  But  the  teacher  should  by  all  means  see  that  his 
pupils  understand  what  would  be  the  idiomatic  English  in  each  case ; 


134,  135.]  LESSON  LXXI.  99 

and  in  translating  the  subsequent  exercises,  they  should  always  be  re- 
quired to  render  absolute  sentences  with  the  proper  subjunction. 


EXERCISE  130. 

1.  Nullam  partera  noctis  itinere  intermisso,  die  quarto  in  fines  Lin- 
gonura  pervenerunt.  2.  Helvetii  omnium  rerum  inopia  adductl  legates 
de  deditione  ad  eum  mlserunt.  3.  Reliquos  omnes  obsidibus,  armls, 
perfugls  traditls,  in  deditionem  accepit.  4.  Helvetii  omnibus  fructibus 
amissls  domi  nihil  habuerunt.  5.  Bello  Helvetiorum  confecto  totlus 
fere  G-alliae  legatl,  principes  civitatum,  ad  Caesarem  convenerunt  6. 
Helvetii  jidrentissimls  rebus  domos  rellqueraut.  7.  Ea  re  permissa, 
diem  consilio  constituerunt.  8.  Ed  consilio  dlmisso  principes  civitatum 
ad  Caesarem  reverterunt. 


LESSON    LXXI. 

134:.  The  commonest  nse  however  of  the  perfect 
partic.  pass,  is  in  the  formation  of  the  perfect  pas- 
sive tenses.  These  are  formed  by  the  union  of  the 
imperfect  tenses  of  es-  with  the  perfect  pass,  partic. 
Thus :  "  The  town  has  been  taken"  is  oppidum  captum 
est  /  literally  :  the  town  is  (in  the  condition  called)  taken. 

130.  Occasionally,  when  the  completeness  of  the  ac- 
tion is  to  be  made  very  prominent,  the  perfect  tenses  of 
es-  are  used  with  the  perfect  partic.  pass,  instead  of  the 
imperfect  tenses. 

In  the  example  given,  it  will  be  seen  that  in  all  these 
tenses  the  perfect  partic.  completes  the  mean- 
ing" Of  the  verh  es-,  and  it  must  therefore,  as  said'in 
§  79,  agree  with  the  subject  of  it  in  gender  and  number. 

Frequently  in  poetry  as  well  as  in  prose,  the  verb  es-, 
with  the  perfect  participle  pass,  is  omitted,  when  it  is 
quite  clear  from  the  sense  which  tense  of  it  is  to  be  sup- 
plied. 

As  the  perfect  tenses  of  all  passive  verbs  are  conju- 
gated alike,  it  is  sufficient  to  give  here  an  example  in  each 
gender. 


100 


LESSON  LXXI. 


[135. 


Present  perfect  or 
aorist. 
masc. 

51.  rectus  sum 
2.  rectus  es 
3.  rectus  est 
1.  recti  sumus 
Plur.  •   2.  recti  estis 
3.  recti  sunt 


.  —  The  English  of  the 
Present  perfect  or  aorist 
Past  perfect 
Future  perfect 


Past  perfect. 

Future  per- 

fect. 

fern. 

neut. 

recta  eram 

rectum  ero 

recta  eras 

rectum  eris 

recta  erat 

rectum  erit 

rectae  eramus 

recta  erimus 

rectae  eratis 

recta  eritis 

rectae  erant 

recta  erunt 

is,    I  have  been,  or  /  was,  &c. 

is,    /  had  been,  &c. 

is,    I  shall  have  been,  &c. 


The  teacher  had  best  make  the  pupils  conjugate  the 
perfect  tenses  of  several  verbs,  in  order  to  impress  these 
meanings  upon  their  minds,  that  they  may  not  translate 
"  was  written"  by  scriptum  erat,  cfec.,  &c. 

EXERCISE  131. 

1.  By  this  victory  the  war  of  the  whole  sea  (maritima-,  adj.)  coast 
was  finished.  2.  I  hold  the  chief-power  over-all  those  states  (gen.) 
from  which  the  forces  have  been  collected.  3.  We,  who  had  made  a 
sally,  were  driven  back  into  the  town.  4.  You  had  been  sent  (as)  am- 
bassadors to  those  states  which  are  (a  part)  of  hither  Spain.  5.  Very 
many  severe  wounds  were  received  by  those  who  were  defending  the 
camp.  6.  Leaders  have  been  sent-for  from  Britain,  on  whose  arrival 
the  contest  will  be  carried  on  against  the  Komans. 


EXERCISE  132. 

1.  Nos,  qui  nuper  in  Galliam  transportati  sumus,  fines  sociorum  ves- 
trorum  longe  lateque  vastamus.  2.  MorinI,  spe  praedae  adducti,  nos, 
qui  ex  navibus  onerarils  expositi  eramus,  magno  suorum  numero  cir- 
cumsteterunt.  3.  Omnia  quae  imperaveras  a  principibus  dlligenter  ad 
diem  facta  sunt.  4.  Quadraginta  naves  quae  in  Meldls  factae  erant, 
tempestate  rejectae.  cursum  non  tenuerunt.  5.  AdventQ  P.  Sullae, 
quern  castris  praefeceram,  facile  repulsl  estis.  6.  Quamquam  periculoso 
genere  proelil  locoque  inlquo  pressus  eras,  tamen  omnia  paratissimo 
animo  sustinueras.  7.  Bellum  quod  Carthaginienses  cum  populo  Ro- 
mano gessere  maxime  memorabile  est  omnium  quae  unquam  gesta 
sunt.  8.  Magna  pars  diel  consumpta  erat,  neque  munitioni  castrorum 
tempus  relinquebatur. 


136.]  LESSON  LXXIII.  101 

LESSON    LXXII. 

EXERCISE  133. 

1.  We  will  not  sleep  before  your  affairs  shall  have  been  finished.  2. 
Ye  will  not  be  happy,  unless  your  passions  shall  have  been  confined  by 
you.  3.  Ye  have  been  overcome  by-the-multitude  of  the  enemy.  4.  I 
had  been  detained  by  a  very  rich  merchant.  5.  Ye  had  been  routed 
by  the  first  attack.  6.  Ye  will  not  be  rich,  unless  riches  shall  have 
been  despised  by  you. 

EXERCISE  134. 

1.  Laetae  mulieres  de  adventu  filiorum,  qui  in  exsilium  Slim  abie- 
rant,  certiores  factae  sunt.  2.  Simulac  castra  munita  erunt,  milites  se 
ad  pugnam  expedient.  3.  Legio,  cul  praefectus  sum,  apud  Nervios 
hiemabit.  4.  Ibi  turres  cum  ternls  tabulatis  erectae,  multlsque  tor- 
mentis  et  omnl  genere  telorum  completae  erant.  5.  Hostes  cum 
fugientibus  permixti,  quos  silvae  montesque  texerunt,  ab  equitatu  in- 
terfectl  sunt.  6.  Eodem  fere  tempore  classis  a  Carthagine  in  Sardinian! 
missa  ad  Baleares  insulas  ejecta  est.  7.  Proelium  adversum  equestre 
paucls  ante  diebus  erat  factum.  8.  Vos,  qui  ex  veteribus  legionibus 
eratis  relict!  praesidio  navibus,  naves  conscendistis  et  a  terra  solvistis. 


LESSON    LXXIII. 

136.  There  are  many  verbs  in  Latin  which,  though 
they  have  a  passive  form,  have  an  active  meaning.  These 
verbs  probably  had  a  reflective  signification  originally  ; 
i.  e.,  they  described  the  agent  as  acting  upon  himself;  and 
many  of  these  retain  that  meaning  throughout  all  periods 
of  the  language.  But  most  of  them  have  a  simple  active 
meaning,  transitive  or  intransitive.  These  verbs  are  called 
in  the  grammars  Deponeilts,  from  the  fact  that  they 
lay  aside  the  passive  meaning,  though  they  retain  the 
passive  endings.  Deponent  verbs  may  always  be  known 
in  the  vocabularies,  by  their  having  only  the  1st  and  3d 
stems  given  ;  for  of  course  as  the  deponent  verbs  have  the 
active  meaning  themselves,  they  require  no  active  voice, 
and  therefore  no  perfect  active,  and  therefore  no  2d  stem, 
9* 


102  LESSOX  LXXIIL  [136. 

which  is  used  only  for  the  perfect  active  tenses.  Deponent 
verbs  therefore  will  be  given  thus  :  laeta-,  rejoice,  3. 
laetato-. 

Deponent  verbs  are  conjugated  exactly 
like  passive  ones,  except  in  the  respects  to  be  men- 
tioned hereafter. 

It  is  particularly  recommended  that  the  pupils  be  taught 
to  recollect  which  are  the  deponent  verbs,  by  the  fact 
that  they  have  only  1st  and  3d  stems. 

In  the  following  exercises  imperfect  and  perfect  tenses 
of  deponent  verbs  will  be  used  in  alternate  sentences. 


EXERCISE  135. 

1.  Ye  were  wandering  beyond  your-own  territories.  2.  The  island 
had  used  its-own  laws.  3.  In  this  matter  you  are  avenging  not  only 
public  but  private  wrongs.  4.  Ye  have  not-yet  overtaken  the  mer- 
chant who  is  waitiug-for  you.  5.  "We  will  encourage  the  weary  soldiers, 
who  will  presently  earn  the  great  reward  of  their  labor.  6.  I  shall 
have  measured-out  the  corn  to  the  slaves  before  the  return  of  the  mes- 
senger whom  I  have  sent  to  the  town. 


EXERCISE  136. 

1.  Ex  castris  egredior,  loco  potior,  duas  ibi  legiones  colloco.  2. 
Tandem  a  dextro  latere  summum  jugum  nacti  suruus,  hostesque  loco 
depulimus.  3.  In  Africam  ex  Sicilia  proficiscere,  et  duas  legiones,  ex 
quattuor,  quas  a  nobis  accepistl,  et  quingentos  equites  transportabis. 
4.  Simulac  sol  ortus  erit,  proficiscemur.  5.  De  fratris  morte  quereris, 
communemque  Galliae  fortunam  miseraris.  6.  a  me  facile 'adept!  eratis. 
quae  petebatis.  7.  Quarta  circiter  vigilia  de  muro  cum  custodibus 
colloquar.  8.  In  Carnutibus  summo  loco  natus  erat  Tasgetius,  cijus 
majores  in  sua  clvitate  regnum  obtiuuerant. 


136.  J  LESSON  LXXIV.  103 


LESSON    LXXIY. 

In  the  following  exercises  passive  verbs  as  well  as  de- 
ponents will  be  introduced,  and  the  pupils  must  use  all 
care  to  note  the  difference  in  meaning. 


EXERCISE  137. 

1.  The  king  promises  a  great  number  of  ships,  which  have  been 
built  in  yonder  harbor.  2.  A  war  had  unexpectedly  arisen  in  hither 
Gaul,  which  had  been  lately  subdued.  3.  The  soldiers,  who  had  been 
put  to  (in)  flight,  were  returning  home.  4.  "We  have  not  forgotten  the 
former  victory  of  the  Carthaginians,  in  which  the  most-powerful 
enemies  had  been  overcome.  5.  The  colonists  are  gaining-possession- 
of  the  whole  island,  which  has  been  assigned  to  them.  6.  Ye  had 
gained-possession-of  the  town,  in  which  the  baggage  of  the  enemy  had 
been  deposited. 

EXERCISE  138. 

1.  Naviculam  deligatam  ad  rlpam  nancisceris,  eaque  profugies.  2. 
Initium  repentinl  tumultus  ac  defectionis  ortum  erat  ab  Ambiorige,  qul 
apud  Eburones  rex  creatus  erat.  3.  Noctu  progressus  mlllia  passuum 
circiter  duodecim,  hostium  copias  conspicatus  sum,  qul  paulo  ante  fusl 
erant.  -4.  Legio,  cui  praefectus  eras,  aedificia  vlcosque  barbarorum  in- 
cendit,  magnoque  pecoris  atque  hominum  numero  potlta  est.  5.  Aliae 
naves  eodem  unde  erant  protectae,  relatae  sunt;  aliae  inferiorem  partem 
insulae  magno  cum  periculo  dejectae  sunt.  6.  TJrbem  Romam  condidere 
atque  habuere  initio  Trojani,  qul  Aenea  duce,  iucertis  sedibus  vagaban- 
tur.  7.  Turn  demum  beatus  eris,  quum  aspernatus  eris  voluptatem. 
8.  Dum  exercitus  hostilis  urbis  domos  prlvatas  publicasque  demolieba- 
tur,  elves  maximo  moerore  afficiebantur. 


104  LESSON  LXXVI.  [137. 

LESSON    LXXV. 

EXERCISE  139. 

1.  At  daybreak  all  our  men  had  been  carried  across,  and  the  line  of 
the  enemy  was  distinctly -seen  (imperf.).  2.  Labienus  having  exhorted 
the  soldiers,  gave  the  signal  of  battle.  3.  At  the  first  onset,  on  (al) 
the  right  side,  where  the  seventh  legion  had  taken-its-station,  the 
enemy  are  beaten.  4.  The  leader  of  the  enemy  himself  was-near  his- 
own-(men),  and  kept-exhorting  (past.. imp.)  them.  5.  This  business 
having  been  finished,  Labienus  returned  (pres.  imp)  to-Agedicum, 
where  the  baggage  of  the  whole  army  had  been  left.  6.  He-himself 
having  gone  out  a  little  after  in-silence  with  three  legions  went-to 
(pres.  imp.)  that  place. 

EXERCISE  140. 

1.  Ab  hoc  concilio  Remi,  Lingones,  Treveri  abfuerunt :  illi,  quod  aml- 
citiam  Romanorum  sequebantur:  Treveri  quod  aberarit  longius,  et  a 
Germanls  premebantur.  2.  Allobroges  crebris  ad  Rhodanum  disposing 
praesidiis,  magna  cum  cura  et  diligentia  suos  fines  tuentur.  3.  Tandem 
a  Germanls  summum  jugum  nactis  hostes  loco  depelluntur.  4.  Caesar, 
impedimetitis  in  proximum  collem  deductls,  duabus  legionibus  praesidio 
relictis,  circiter  tribus  millibus  hostium  ex  novissimo  agmine  interfectls, 
altero  die  ad  Alesiam  progressus  castra  fecit.  5.  Dux  ex  arce  Alesiae 
suos  conspicatus,  ex  oppido  egreditur  et  eas  res,  quae  eruptionis  causa 
paratae  erant,  expedit.  6.  Restitute  proelio  equites  ab  tergo  hostes 
adoriuntur.  7.  De  media  nocte  missus  equitatus  novissimum  agmeii 
consequitur:  magnus  numerus  capitur  atque  interficitur:  reliqui  in 
clvitates  discedunt.  8.  His  rebus  confectis  in  Aeduos  proficiscitur. 


LESSON    LXXYI. 

137.  In  the  5th  and  6th  sentences  of  Ex.  139,  and  in 
several  in  Ex.  140,  it  will  be  observed  that  the  pres.  imp.  is 
used  in  speaking  of  actions  really  past.  This  is  a  very 
common  usage  in  the  Roman  historians  ;  and  is  said  to 
have  arisen  from  the  desire  of  giving  to  their  narrative  a 
kind  of  dramatic  liveliness.  But  as  the  idiom  of  the  Eng- 
lish language  does  not  tolerate  so  frequent  a  use  of  this 
interchange  of  tense,  it  is  best  to  translate  the  present  in 
such  cases  by  the  aorist.  From  its  use  by  the  historicuis. 


138,  139.]  LESSON  LXXYI.  105 

the  tense  is  called  the  "historic  present;"  and 

verbs  which  have  to  be  rendered  by  this  tense  in  Latin 
will  be  marked  thus  (p.  A.)  in  the  English  exercises. 

138.  In  §  124  it  was  said  that  the  object  of  an  active 
transitive  verb  becomes  the  subject  of  a  passive  verb.  It 
follows  from  this  that  if  the  verb  be  not  transitive  (or  do 
not  admit  an  object  after  it)  it  cannot  be  used  with  a 
subject  in  the  passive.  But  it  is  very  common  in  Latin 
for  intransitive  verbs  to  be  used  in  the  passive  form  im- 
personally. An  impersonal  verb  is  one  which 
makes  an  assertion  like  any  other  verb,  but  does  not  make 
it  of  any  particular  subject.  There  are  several  verbs 
which  are  only  used  in  this  way.  But  at  present  we  shall 
only  speak  of  passive  forms  used  impersonally.  The  sub- 
ject will  best  be  understood  by  examples.  The  folio  wing 
active  expressions  become  impersonal  in  the  passive. 

Active.  Passive. 

Films  mini  resistit.  mini  a  f  ilio  resistitur. 

My  son  resists  me.  I  am  resisted  by  my  son. 

Filius  tibi  persuadet.  tibi  a  f  ilio  persuadetur.  [son. 

Your  son  persuades  you.     You  are  persuaded  by  your 
milites  fortiter  pugnave-        a  militibus  fortiter  pugnatum 
[runt.  [est. 

The  soldiers  fought  bravely,  (the  battle)  was  fought 

[bravely  by  the  soldiers. 

It  will  be  observed  that — 

130.  (1.)  Impersonal  verbs  are  always  in  the  3d  per- 
son singular,  and  if  possible  in  the  neuter  gender. 

(2.)  When  the  dative  case  follows  the  active  verb,  it 
remains  with  the  passive  impersonal  verb. 

(3.)  The  living  subject  of  the  active  verb  is  expressed 
by  a  with  the  ablative  case  with  the  passive  construction. 

(4.)  The  tense  of  the  passive  impersonal  verb  is  the 
same  as  that  of  the  active  verb. 

In  the  following  exercises  sentences  will  be  given  first 
with  the  active  construction,  and  then  with  that  of  the 
passive. 


30G  LESSON  LXXYII.  [14O,  141. 


EXERCISE  141. 

1.  Men  generally  envy  great  fortune.  2.  Envy- is- felt  (lit.  it  is  en- 
vied) generally  to-great  fortune  by  men.  3.  The  general  will  not 
spare  all  the  prisoners.  4.  Mercy-will  not  be  shown  (lit.  it  will  not  be 
spared)  to  all  the  prisoners  by  the  general.  5.  The  soldiers  fought  very 
bravely  at-one  time  in-all  places.  6.  The-battle- was- fought  (lit.  it  was 
fought)  very  bravely  by  the  soldiers  at-one  time  in-all  places. 


EXERCISE  142. 

1.  Mllites  maxime  ad  superiores  mumtiones  laborant.  2.  a  rrnlitibua 
maxime  ad  superiores  mumtiones  laboratur.  3.  Caesar  ad  Britanuiam 
omnibus  navibus  meridiano  fere  tempore  accessit.  4.  a  Caesare  ad 
Britanniam  omnibus  navibus  meridiano  fere  tempore  accessum  est.  5. 
Principes  ex  consilio  consurarunt.  6.  a  principibus  ex  consilio  consurgitur. 
7.  Milites  totis  castris  trepidanL  8.  a  militibus  totls  castris  trepidatur. 


LESSON    LXXYII. 

It  was  said  in  §  128,  that  the  Latin  verb  has  only  three 
participles.  One  of  these,  the  perfect  partic.  passive,  has 
been  already  spoken  of.  The  other  two  belong  to  the  ac- 
tive voice. 

14:0.  The  imperfect  participle  active  answers  to  the 
English  participle  ending  in  -ing,  as  fearing,  loving.  It  is 
made  by  adding 

to  a-stems  and  e-stems  the  ending  nt(i)-. 

to  all  others,  "        "     ent(i)-. 

Thus,  from 

ama~  we  have  the  imperf.  part,  act  amant(i)-,  "  loving." 
mone-       "  monent(i)-,  "advising." 

audi-        "          "          "          "          audient(i)-,  "hearing." 
reg-  "          "         regent(i)~,  "  ruling." 

141.  NOTE. — 1st.  The  verb*-,  "go,"  and  all  its  compounds,  makes 
the  nom.  sing,  iens,  and  takes  eunt-  in  all  the  other  cases. 

2d.  Deponent  verbs  have  this  participle  like  ordinary  active  verbs. 

3d.  Of  course  these  participles  govern  the  same  cases  as  the  verbs 
from  which  they  are  formed. 


142.]  LESSON  LXXYIII.  lOt 


EXERCISE  143. 

1.  Our-men,  guarding  the  gates  with-difficulty,  are  hard-pressed  by 
the  multitude.  2.  We  beheld  the  legion  fighting  bravely.  3.  The  bar- 
barians crossing  the  river  in-ships  and  on-rafts,  will  march  into  our 
territories.  4.  I  will  grant  the  land  to  the  Aedui  asking  (it).  5.  The 
enemy  had  killed  three  thousand  of  our  men  resisting  bravely.  6.  The 
stag,  admiring  its  horns  (reflected)  in  the  water,  is  beheld  by  the  dogs. 


EXERCISE  144. 

1.  Oppido  timens,  diurnis  eo  nocturnisque  itineribus  contendisti.  2. 
InterfectI  sunt  fortissime  pugnantes  duo  consules :  neque  id  fuit  falsum, 
quod  illl  in  pugnam  proficiscentes  dixerant.  3.  Dux  ex  castrls  in  mon- 
tem  refugiens  ab  equitibus  est  interfectus.  4.  Discedens  ab  hibernis 
in  Italiam  te  fratremque  tuum  legionibus  praefecl.  5.  Novissimos 
adortl,  et  multa  millia  passuum  prosecuti,  magnam  multitudinem  eorum 
fugieritium  occldimus.  6.  Peritus  nauta  mare  refluehtibus  undls  strl- 
dens  non  timet.  7.  Equestribus  proelils  GermanI  ex  equls  desilientes, 
pedibus  saepe  pugnabant  8.  Redeuntes  aggredimur  quos  possumus  et 
interficimus. 


LESSON    LXXYIII. 

.  The  last  participle  to  be  spoken  of  is  that  com- 
monly called  the  future  participle  active.  This  may  be 
most  conveniently  formed  as  a  general  rule  by  changing 
the  o-  of  the  3d  stem  into  uro-.  Thus 

stem.  fut.  partic.  act.  meaning. 

3.  ducto-  ducturo-  about  to  lead. 

3.  arato-  araturo-  intending  to  plough. 

3.  caso-  casuro-  doomed  to  fall. 

The  future  partic.  of  es-9  "be"  is  futuro-. 

NOTE. — 1st.  Deponent  verbs  have  this  participle  as  well  as  simple 
active  verbs. 

2d.  From  eight  verbs  the  fut.  partic.  is  not  made  precisely  in  this 
way.  Of  these  the  commonest  are  the  two  deponents  or(i)-,  "arise," 
andmor(i)-,  "die." 

1.  mor(i)-,     3.  mortuo-,     fut.  part,   morituro-,    "destined  to  die." 
1.  or(i)-,       3.  orto-,          "      "        oritiiro-,      "about  to  arise." 


108 


LESSON  LXXYIII. 


[143. 


143.  Though  this  participle  is  called  the  future  partic., 
it  does  not  so  much  denote  futurity  as  intention  and 
destiny,  and  it  is  most  commonly  used  in  connection 
with  the  tenses  of  es-  in  just  the  same  way  as  the  perfect 
partic.  pass.  So  we  have — 


moriturus  sum, 
casiiri  eramus, 
araturl  erunt, 


I  am  doomed  to  die. 

we  were  destined  to  fall. 

they  will  be  intending  to  plough. 


Actions  may  be  regarded  in  three  ways 
1.  As  begun  and  not  finished, 

finished, 


2.  As    begun     and 
(Perfect) 


3.  As  not  yet  begun,  but  only 
Intended 


in  present 
in  past 
in  future 
in  present 
in  past 
in  future 


scribo. 
scribebam. 
seribam. 
scrips!, 
scripseram. 
scripsero. 
scripturus  sum. 
scripturus  eram. 
scripturus  ero. 


As  we  have  hitherto  called  the  first  six  tenses  by  a 
double  name  as  present  imperfect,  &c.,  so  it  is  recommended 
that  the  last  three  be  called pre sen t  intended,  &c. :  though 
in  some  grammars  they  are  called  the  present  &c.  of  the  peri- 
phrastic future.  But  these  can  with  no  more  propriety  be 
called  periphrastic  expressions,  than  scriptus  sum  <fcc.  can 
be  so  called. 

NOTE. — The  imperfect  tenses  are  made  from  the  1st  stem,  the  perfect 
from  the  2d  stem,  and  the  intended  from  the  3d  stem. 


EXERCISE  145. 

1.  The  workmen,  to  whom  the  affair  has  been  intrusted,  are  going- 
to-do  nothing.  2.  The  ships  on  (in  ace.)  which  the  young  men  have  em- 
barked, are  destiaed-to-perish.  3.  I  was  inten ding-to-hold  the  military- 
command  of  the  neighboring  state.  4.  These  legions  were  inteuding-to- 
cross  the  river,  which  flows  (influ-}  into  the  lake  Lemaunus.  5.  You 
were  about-to-land  the  soldiers  on  (in)  the  island.  6.  The  mothers  will 
intend-to-leave  then-  daughters  in  the  city  hi  which  they  were  born. 


143.]  LESSON  LXXIX.  109 


EXERCISE  146. 

1.  Imperatori,  quern  multos  annos  secQti  sumus,  omnes  res  nostras 
reote  commissuri  sumus.  2.  Nationes,  quae  trans  Rhenum  incolebant 
obsides  tibi  daturae  erant,  et  imperata  tua  facturae.  3.  Nuntios  ad 
Pompeium  missurl  eratis,  atque  ille  reliqua  per  se  acturus  erat.  4.  Fru- 
mentum  omne,  praeterquam  quod  secum  portaturl  erant,  Helvetil  com- 
burunt.  5.  De  mels  in  vos  meritls  non  sum  praedicaturus,  quae  sunt 
adhuc  et  mea  voluntate  et  vestra  expectatione  leviora.  6.  Et  exprox- 
irms  hibernis  et  a  Caesare  subsidia  conventura  sunt.  7.  Alexander 
ille  magnus  imperio  totlus  orbis  terrarum  potiturus  erat.  8.  Malus  sane 
est  medicus,  qui  morbl  causam  ignorans,  morbum  ipsum  est  curaturus. 


LESSON    LXXIX. 

EXERCISE  147. 

1.  As  the  eye,  so  the  mind,  (though)  not  seeing  itself)  sees  other 
things.  2.  Scipio,  when  once-on-a-time  (aliquando)  he  intended-to-visit 
Ennius  the  poet,  was  not  admitted  by  him.  3.  Darius,  king  of  the 
Persians,  put-to-death  (neca-)  his  friend,  (when)  advising  the  best-things. 
4.  Pliny  the-elder,  intending-to-examine  the  eruption  of  Mount  Vesu- 
vius, was  overwhelmed  by  the  smoke  and  ashes.  5.  Darius  saw  the 
camp  of  Alexander  shining  with-great  brightness.  6.  The  Helvetii,  in- 
tending-to-seek  new  abodes,  burnt  all  their  towns  and  villages. 


EXERCISE  148. 

1.  Praeceptor  in  scholam  venit  discipulos  Srudlturus,  puer  attente 
audlturus.  2.  Darium  agitabant  pej  somnia  species  imminentium 
rerum.  3.  BellovacI  ad  consilium  non  venerunt,  quod  suo  nomine 
atque  arbitrio  cum  Romanis  bellum  gesturl  erant.  4.  Caesar  in  provin- 
ciam  rediturus  erat  atque  delectum  habiturus.  5.  Pompeius  per  illam 
regionem  cum  legionibus  iter  facit,  et  in  Hispaniam  confestim  est  ven- 
turus.  6.  Hoc  sperans  Caesar  tres  legiones  ex  castris  educturus  erat. 
7.  Nonae  legionis  mllites,  temere  insecutl  longius  fugientes,  in  locum 
iniquum  progrediuntur.  8.  Pugnatum  est  utrimque  fortissime  et  acer- 
rime. 

10 


110  LESSOR  LXXX.  [144,  145. 


LESSON    LXXX. 

We  have  now  spoken  of  the  three  Latin  participles 
which  were  said  to  be  verbal  adjectives.  We  must  here 
treat  of  the  infinitive  mood,  which  is  really  a 
verbal  substantive. 

14rA.  The  word  infinitive  means  unlimited,  and  those 
forms  of  the  verb  are  so  called  which  express  the  action 
of  the  verb  without  any  person-endinys. 

In  Latin  the  infinitive  mood  also  expresses  the  action  of 
the  verb  without  any  limitation  as  to  tune,  though  the 
names  given  in  the  grammars  to  the  forms  of  this  mood 
would  seem  to  imply  the  contrary.  But  the  infinitive 
mood  has  distinct  forms  or  modes  of  expression  to  denote 
whether  the  action  is  unfinished,  finished,  or 
intended,  and  we  find  therefore  in  Latin  an  imper- 
fect, a  perfect,  and  a  future  (or  intended)  infinitive 
in  the  active  and  passive  voices. 

1 45.  The  infinitive  is,  as  was  said,  a  verbal  substantive, 
and  it  is  used  for  the  most  part  only  as  the  object  or 
the  subject  of  another  verb,  and  must  be  regarded 
therefore  as  hi  the  nominative  or  the  accusative  case,  though 
undeclined. 

We  have  then  in  the  active  and  passive  voices  together 
six  simple  or  compound  forms  of  the  infinitive  mood,  di- 
vided into  the  three  classes  of  imperfect,  perfect, 
and  future  (or  intended.)  We  shall  first  give  the  forms 
of  these : 

Imperfect.  Perfect.  Future. 

1.  ama-    act.    aroare    2.  amav-    act.    amavisse      3.  amato-  act.    amuturo-ess« 

**       pass,  amari    3.  amato-  pass,  amato-esse          "         pass,  aniatnm  iri 
1.  mone-ae<.    rnonere  2.  inonu-    act.    monuisse      8.  monito-  act.    monituro-esso 

"       past,  moneri  3.  mon\to-pass.  monito-esse         "         pass,  monitum  iri 
1   audi-   act.    an  dire    2.  audiv-   act.    audivisse      3.  audlto-  a  ct.    audit  uro-esso 

u       pass,  audlri    3.  audlto-  pass,  audito-esse          "         pans  audit  um  iri 
1.  reg-     act.    regere    2.  rex-       act.    rexisse         8.  recto-     act.    rccturo-osse 

"      pass,  regi       8.  recto-   pass,  recto-esse  "         pass,  rectum  iri 

1.  c»p(i)-  act.    capere    2.  eep-       act.    cepisse         8.capto-    act.    capturo-csse 

*      pa&s.  capi       8.  capio-  pass,  capto-esse  "        pass,  captum  iri 


146.]  LESSON  LXXX.  Ill 

NOTE. — 1st.   The  imperf.  infin.  of  es-  is  esse,  and  of  potes-  is  posse. 

2d.  The  first,  second  and  fourth  conjugations  make  the  imperf.  infin. 
active  by  the  ending-re,  and  passive  by  the  ending -rl. 

3d.  The  third  conjugation  makes  the  imperf.  infin.  act.  by  the  ending 
ere,  and  passive  by  the  ending  I. 

4th.  The  imperf.  intin.  of  verbs  like  cap(i}-  is  made  from  the  consonant- 
stem,  like  the  third  conjugation. 

5th.  The  pcrf.  in/in,  active  of  all  verbs  is  made  by  adding  i§se  to 
the  2d  stem. 

6th.  The  perf.  infin.  passive  of  all  verbs  is  made  by  combining  the 
perfect  part.  pass,  with  the  infin.  of  es-. 

7th.  Thefut.  infin.  active  of  all  verbs  is  made  by  combining  the  future 
part.  act.  with  the  infin.  of  es-. 

8th.  The  fut.  infin.  passive  of  all  verbs  is  made  by  combining  the  ac- 
cusative supine  with  the  imperf  infin.  pass,  of  i-.  As  the  supines  have 
not  yet  been  spoken  of,  this  expression  cannot,  of  course,  be  under- 
stood at  present. 

9th.  In  the  expressions  composed  of  the  participle  and  the  infin.  of 
es-,  of  course  the  participle  completes  the  meaning  of  es-,  and  therefore 
must  agree  with  its  subject. 

As  in  the  exercises  these  infinitives  will  not  all  be  in- 
troduced at  once  there  is  no  need  that  they  should  all  be 
perfectly  learned  now.  It  is  only  thought  best  to  put  all 
the  forms  together. 

14:6.  The  infinitive  mood  is  used  simply  (as  the  accu- 
sative case)  as  the  object  of  the  following  classes  of 
verbs,  namely,  verbs  which  denote, 

1 .  \Vish,  as  cupio  Tre,  I  desire  to  go. 

2.  Power,  "  possum  ire,  I  can  go. 

3.  Intention,  "  cogito  ire,  I  intend  to  go. 

4.  Duty,  "  debeo  ire,  I  ought  to  go. 

5.  Habit,  "  soleo  ire,  I  am  wont  to  go. 

6.  Commencement, "  incipio  ire,  I  begin  to  go. 
V.  Cessation,  "  desino  ire,  I  cease  to  go. 

This  is  not  a  complete  enumeration,  but  it  is  sufficiently 
so  for  our  purpose. 

In  the  following  exercises,  the  imperf.  infin.  active,  will 
alone  be  employed.  Generally  the  infin.  is  placed  imme- 
diately before  the  verb  whose  object  it  is. 


112  LESSON  LXXXT.  [147. 

EXERCISE  149. 

1.  TVe  had  determined  to  lead  the  array  across  the  Rhine.  2.  I  was 
not  able  to  discover  ports  suitable  for  larger  ships.  3.  "We  will  en- 
deavor to  persuade  the  foolish  woman.  4.  You  had  begun  to  distribute 
the  corn  to  the  army.  5.  The  barbarians  were  not  able  to  burst-through 
the  fortification.  6.  "We  desired  to  reach  the  lower  part  of  the  island. 


EXERCISE  150. 

1.  Conatus  sum  reficere  pontes.  2.  Helvetii  quam  maximum  numerum 
jumentorum  et  carrorum  coemere  constituerunt.  3.  Cum  proximls 
clvitatibus  pacem  et  amicitiam  confirmare  debemus.  4.  Veneti  in 
Britanniam  uavibus  translre  consuerunt.  5.  Per  medios  hostes  per- 
rumpere  potuistis,  incolumesque  ad  uuum  in  castra  pervenistis  omnes. 
6.  Equites  lapides  telaque  in  nostros  conjicere  coepSrunt.  7.  In 
scientia  excellere  pulcrum  putamus.  8.  In  Galh'am  Caesar  contendere 
instituit. 


LESSON    LXXXI. 

147.  We  have  seen  that  there  are  three  forms  (or 
tenses)  of  the  infinitive  mood,  the  imperfect,  perfect,  and 
future.  The  following  rules  with  regard  to  the  choice  of 
one  of  them  to  suit  each  case  must  be  particularly  at- 
tended to. 

We  must  employ 

(1.)  The  imperfect  infinitive  for  actions  unfinished  \  at  the  time  de- 
(2.)  The  perfect  infinitive  finished       >     noted  by  the 

(3.)  The  future  infinitive  "  intended     )   principal  verb. 

It  will  be  seen,  accordingly,  that  the  form  of  the  infini- 
tive mood  is  wholly  independent  of  the  tense  of  the  prin- 
cipal verb.  Thus  we  may  use  with  any  tense 

I.  The  imperfect  infinitive,  as 

(1.)  Gaudeo  te  videre.        lam  glad  (to-day)  to  see  you. 
(2.)  Gaudebam  te  videre.  /  was  glad  (yesterday)  to  see  you. 
(3.)  Gaudebo  te  videre.      /  shall  be  glad  (to-morrow)  to  see  you. 


148.J  LESSON 

II.  The  perfect  infinitive,  as 

(1.)  Audit  te  Ivisse.          He  hears  (to-day)  that  you  have  gone. 

(2.)  Audiebat  te  Ivisse.    He  fteard  (yesterday)  that  you  had  gone. 

(3.)  Audiet  te  Ivisse.        He  will  hear  (to-morrow)  that  you  have  gone. 

HI.  The  future  infinitive,  as 

(1.)  Speras  me  venturum  esse.     You  hope  (to-day)  that  I  shall  come. 

(2.)  Sperabas  me  venturum  esse.  You  hoped  (yesterday)  that  I  should 
come. 

(3.)  Sperabis  me  venturum  esse.  You  will  hope  (to-morrow)  that  I 
shall  come. 

In  the  following  exercises  the  perfect  and  future  infini- 
tive active  will  be  employed  as  well  as  the  imperfect. 

14§.  NOTE. — The  four  following  verbs  are  called  semi-deponents, 
because  the  imperfect  tenses  are  conjugated  with  the  active  person-endings, 
and  the  perfect  tenses  are  made  like  the  passive.  They  have,  therefore, 
only  the  1st  and  3d  stems. 

1.  aude-  3.  auso-,  dare. 

1.  fid-  3.  flso-,  trust. 

1.  gaude-  3.  gaviso-,  rejoice. 

1  sole-  3.  solito-,  le  accustomed. 


EXERCISE  151. 

1.  The  enemy  do  not  dare  (to-day}  to  join  battle.  2.  The  horse- 
soldiers  did  not  dare  (yesterday)  to  leap-down  from  their  horses.  3.  The 
cowardly  sailors  will  not  dare  (to-morrow)  to  sail,  even  (vel)  with-a-favor- 
able  wind.  4.  The  orator  is-accustomed  to  defend  the  causes  of  the 
poor.  5.  Caesar  was  accustomed  to  finish  all  things  with-the-greatest 
quickness.  6.  The  old-man  rejoiced  to  narrate  very  long  stories. 


EXERCISE  152. 

1.  Helvetil  dicuntur  omnia  sua  aedificia  incendisse.  2.  Helvetil 
dlcuntur  omnia  sua  aedificia  incendere.  3.  Helvetil  dicuntur  omnia 
sua  aedificia  incensurl  esse.  4.  Hostes  locls  superioribus  occupatls 
itinere  exercitum  prohibere  conatl  sunt.  5.  Narratur  hie  pagus  unus, 
patrum  nostrorum  memoria,  dorno  exisse,  et  consulem  exercitumque 
ejus  interfecisse.  6.  Consueverunt  dl  immortales  nonnullls  secundiores 
10* 


114                                   LESSON  LXXXTT.  [149,  15O. 

interdum  r6s  et  diiiturmorem  impumtatem  concedere.  7.  Hostes  cas- 

tris  exire  et  proelium  committere  non  ausl  sunt.     8.  Amicos  rebus 
angustls  deserere  non  soliti  sumus. 


LESSON    LXXXII. 

149.  We  have  seen  that  some  kinds  of  compound 
sentences  are  made  by  attaching  secondary  sentences  to 
primary  ones  by  the  help  of  the  relative  pronoun  (ad- 
jectival sentences),  or  by  subjunctions  (adverbial 
sentences);  see  §  108  and  §  113.  But  compound  sen- 
tences may  also  be  made  by  joining  one  primary  sentence  to 
another  as  its  object  or  subject :  i.  e.,  one  sentence  may 
be  used  as  a  noun  to  another.  Sentences  so  attached 

in  this  book  will  be  called  nominal  sentences. 

1  oO.  Examine  the  following  sentences. 

(1.)  I  fear  to  die. 

12.)  I  hope  that  Caesar  will  conquer  his  enemies. 

3.)  To  lie  is  disgraceful. 

(4.)  For  a  Christian  to  lie  is  disgraceful. 

In  the  1st  and  3d  sentences  we  have  the  infinitive  mood 
used  by  itself  to  express  (1)  the  object,  and  (3)  the  subject 
of  the  principal  verb,  and  as  it  was  said  that  the  infinitive 
mood  is  a  neuter  noun,  used  either  in  the  nomin.  or  accus. 
case,  it  is  clear  that  in  (1)  it  is  in  the  accus.  case,  and  in 

(3)  it  is  in  the  nomin.  case. 

It  will  be  observed  also  that  in  sentences  (2)  and  (4) 
the  words  marked  by  italics  stand  respectively  for  the  ob- 
ject and  the  subject  of  the  principal  verb  ;  and  on  the  same 
principle  as  before  the  verbs  "  will  conquer"  and  "  to  lie" 
must  be  in  the  infin.  mood.  But  in  these  sentences  the 
subjects  of  those  verbs  also  are  given ;  in  (2)  "  Caesar,"  in 

(4)  "  a  Christian ;"  and  it  is  a  peculiarity  of  the  Latin  lan- 
guage that  the  subject  is  in  such  cases  made 
in  the  accus.  case,  even  though  the  sentence  hi  which 
it  stands  is  used  as  the  subject  of  the  other  verb.     This 
matter  is  of  the  greatest  importance ;  and  it  is  hoped 


151.]  LESSON  LXXXH.  115 

that  in  the  examples  now  to  be  given,  the  teacher  will  be 
very  careful  to  see  that  his  pupils  understand — 

(1.)  Whether  the  infinitive  mood  stands  for  object  or 
subject. 

(2.)  The  reason  of  the  tense  of  the  infinitive  mood. 

(3.)  The  form  which  the  nominal  sentence  would  take 
if  it  were  used  by  itself  as  a  primary  sentence. 

(4.)  That  the  English  word  "that"  is  not  translated 
when  introducing  nominal  sentences. 

(5.)  That  the  English  word  "it"  is  often  used  in  antici- 
pation of  the  subject,  when  the  subject  is  a  nominal  sen- 
tence, and  must  of  course  be  untranslated  in  Latin. 

151.  It  is  particularly  to  be  observed  that  as  the  in- 
finitive mood  has  no  person-endings,  wSen  a  verb,  which 
in  the  indicative  mood  would  have  its  subject  sufficiently 
indicated  by  the  ending,  passes  into  the  infinitive  mood, 
its  subject  must  be  expressed,  in  the  accusative  case;  and 
that  if  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  in  the  3d  person, 
and  Is  the  same  as  the  subject  of  the  principal  verb,  it 
must  be  expressed  by  the  reflective  pronoun  sefor  all  gen- 
ders and  numbers. 


EXAMPLES. 

(1.)  Caesar  said  (that)  he  had  conquered  the  Germans. 
Caesar  dixit  se  Germanos  vicisse. 
(2.)  Caesar  hopes  (that)  he  will  conquer  the  Germans. 
Caesar  sperat  se  Germanos  victurum  esse. 
(3.)  It  is  honorable  (for)  a  soldier  to  meet  death  for  his 
country. 

Decorum  est  militem  pro  patria  mortem  oppetere. 
(4.)  Caesar  forbade  the  soldiers  to  destroy  the  bridge. 
Caesar  vetuit  milites  pontem  rescindere. 

NOTE. — It  will  probably  be  well  for  the  teacher  to  go  over  each  of 
the  coming  English  sentences  witli  his  pupils,  before  they  translate  them, 
pointing  out  the  particulars  above  alluded  to. 


116  LESSON  LXXXIII.  [151. 


EXERCISE  153. 

1.  The  consul  promises  (that)  he  will  not  fail  the  senate  and  common- 
wealth. 2.  The  consul  promised  (that)  he  would  not  fail  the  senate 
and  the  commonwealth.  3.  I  perceive  (that)  the  ships  are  approaching 
the  entrance  of  yonder  harbor.  4.  I  perceive  (that)  the  ships  have  ap- 
proached the  narrow  strait.  5.  It  is  a  great  disaster  (that)  ye  should 
have  thrown-away  (your)  arms.  6.  It  was  reported  to  Caesar  (that) 
the  Helvetifwere  marching  through  the  territories  of  the  Sequani. 


EXERCISE  154. 

1.  Sentimus  calere  ignem,  nivem  esse  albam,  dulce  mel.  2.  Caesar 
respondit,  pads  causa  se  aequo  animo  tulisse  detrlmentum  sui  honoris. 
3.  Mulier  dixit,  se  postero  die  opus  esse  confecturam.  4.  Nonnullae 
geutes  se  angustos  ffnes  habere  arbitrabautur.  5.  Certior  factus  sum 
vos  contra  nos  conjurare,  et  inter  vos  obsides  dare.  6.  Helvetii  moribus 
suis  Orgetorigem  ex  vinculls  causam  dicere  coegerunt.  7.  Hac 
epistola  certiores  fact!  sum  us  hostes  legionem  nobis  auxilio  missam 
reppulisse.  8.  Notum  est  Hannibalem  adversus  Romanos  acerrime 
pugnavisse. 


LESSON    LXXXIII. 

EXERCISE  155. 

1.  There  very  few,  having  trusted-to  their  strength  (pi.),  strove  to 
swim  across.  2.  The  Bclgae  were-indignant(ra0feife/er-)that  the  army 
of  the  Roman  people  should  winter  and  become-firmly-established 
(inveterasc-)  in  Gaul.  3.  The  Remi  say  that  they  intrust  themselves 
and  their  (property)  to  (in  ace.)  the  power  and  protection  of  the  Roman 
people,  and  (that  they)  had  not  (neqtte)  agreed  with  the  rest-of  the 
Belgae.  4.  Caesar  learns  from  the  scouts  that  all  the  rest  of  the  Belgae 
would  soon  be  in  arms.  5.  At  length,  late-in-the-day  (multo  die),  I 
learned  that  the  enemy  had  moved  their  camp,  and  that  you  were  com- 
ing to  me.  6.  The  barbarians  boasted  that  they  had  engaged  with  the 
Romans  in  pitched-battle  (acie-)  and  had  conquered  them. 


EXERCISE   156. 

1.  Negavimus  nos  more  et  exemplo  popull  Romanl  posse  iter  ulli 
per  provinciam  dare.     2.  Videbam  pertculosum  populo  Romano  esse 


152.]  LESSON  LXXXIV.  117 

Germanos  paulatim  consuescere  Rhenum  translre.  3.  Polliciti  estia 
vosobsides  daturosesse,  etimperata  nostra  facturos.  4.  Juravisti  te,  nisi 
victorem,  in  castra  non  reversurura.  5.  Confessus  es  scire  te  ilia  esse  vera. 
6.  Dixl  me  proxima  nocte  de  quafta  vigilia  castra  moturum.  7.  Aperte 
odisse  magis  ingenul  est  quam  fronte  occultare  sententiam.  8.  Sapientis 
est  consilium  explicare  suum  de  maximls  rebus. 


LESSON    LXXXIY. 

1 52.  In  the  last  two  sentences  of  the  preceding  ex- 
ercise there  were  instances  of  a  use  of  the  genitive  case, 
which  could  not  be  conveniently  mentioned  before  the 
introduction  of  the  infinitive  mood ;  though  it  really  falls 
under  the  head  of  the  possessive  genitive,  §  36. 

The  genitive  is  used  constantly  with  the  verb  es-  to  de- 
note that  some  point  of  character  &c.  belongs  to  the  per- 
son represented  by  the  genitive.  Instead  of  the  genitive 
of  personal  pronouns,  the  neuter  sing.  nom.  or  ace.  of  the 
corresponding  possessive  pronouns  is  used. 


EXERCISE  157. 

1.  It  is  (the  duty)  of  a  wise-man  not  to  fear  adversity.  2.  It  is  (the 
part)  of  a  just  judge  to  preserve  the  innocent.  3.  It  is  (a  mark)  of  a 
foolish-man  to  persevere  in  errors.  4.  It  is  (the  duty)  of  a  prophet  to 
see-beforehand  (praevide-)  the  future.  5.  It  is  (a  mark)  of  a  generous 
soul  to  assist  the  wretched.  6.  It  is  (the  duty)  of  a  good  king  to  secure 
the  peace  of  the  state. 

EXERCISE  158. 

1.  Barbarorum  est  in  diem  vivere.  2.  Tuum  est  legibus  patriae 
parere.  3.  Est  boni  oratoris  multa  auribus  accepisse,  multa  vldisse. 
4.  Magnl  animl  est  dlvitias  contemnere.  5.  Non  meum  est  rebus  ad- 
versls  perturbarl.  6.  Parentum  est  alere  liberos ;  llberorum,  parentibua 
obedlre.  7.  Putant  se  id  facere  non  posse  sine  maximo  peiiculo.  8. 
Stultorum  est  aliorum  vitia  cernere,  sua  non  cognovisse. 


118  LESSON  LXXXVL  [152. 


LESSON    LXXXY. 

In  the  following  exercises  the  imperfect  and  perfect  in- 
finitive of  passive  and  deponent  verbs  will  be  introduced. 
For  their  formation  see  the  table  in  Lesson  LXXX. 


EXERCISE  159. 

1.  Towards  (sub  aec.)  evening  I  ordered  the  gates  to  be  shut,  and 
the  soldiers  to  go-out  from  the  town.  2.  The  town,  fortified  by  the 
nature  of  the  place  and  by  art,  cannot  be  stormed.  3.  It  is  (a  mark) 
of  a  constant  man,  not  to  fear  danger  or  reproach.  4.  The  Britons, 
having  followed-closely  with  all  their  forces,  were  hindering  our-men 
from-going-out  (infin.)  from  the  ships.  5.  The  blind  beggar  feels  that 
he  has  been  wounded.  6.  It  is  reported  to  Caesar  that  the  ships  have 
been  set-on-fire. 

EXERCISE   160. 

1.  Tertia  fere  vigilia  solvistL  equitesque  in  ulteriorem  portum  pro- 
gredl  et  naves  conscendere  et  te  sequi  jussisti.  2.  Principes  cognove- 
runt  magnam  partem  senatus  in  urbem  convenisse  et  legates  ad 
Caesarem  de  pace  et  amicitia  missos  esse.  3.  ArbitratI  estis  id  bellum 
celeriter  coufici  posse.  4.  Hoc  tibi  persuasi,  consilium  ab  amicissimo 
homine,  non  ab  hoste,  datum  esse.  5.  Stultl  est  inanibus  rebus  com- 
moveri.  6.  Animadverteras  omnes  oppidi  partes  praeruptissimis  saxis 
esse  munitas.  7.  Caesar  suos  ex  omnibus  partibus  vulnerarl  videbat. 
8.  Illl  nostros  regredl  non  patiebantur,  quod  timore  adducti  locum  re- 
linquere  videbantur. 


LESSON    LXXXYI. 

EXERCISE    161. 

1.  Some-men  asserted  that  Caesar,  constrained  by  want  of  corn,  had 
hastened  into  the  province.  2.  Caesar  saw  that  the-battle-was-being- 
fought  in-a-disadvantageous  place,  and  that  the  enemy's  forces  were 
being  augmented.  3.  Caesar  thought  it-was-injurious  to  depart  from 
the  war  and  the  enemy.  4.  The  chief  assured  (p  h.)  his-men,  that 
the  Romans  would  either  not  endure  want  (of  provisions),  or  with-great 


153,  154.]  LESSON  LXXXVII.  119 

danger,  would  advance  too-far  from  their  camp.  5.  The  townsmen,  a 
shout  having  been  raised,  began  to  take  (their)  arms,  to  shut  the  gates, 
to  man  the  wall.  6.  Caesar  was-sure  that,  if-that-town-were-recovered 
(aU.  absol),  he  would  reduce  the  whole  state  under  (in  ace.)  his  power. 


EXERCISE   162. 

1.  Tertio  die,  missis  ex  oppido  legatis  de  deditione,  arma  comportari, 
jumenta  produci,  obsides  darl  jubet.  2.  Sceleratus  homo  non  intelligit, 
pietate  et  religione  et  justls  precibus  Deorum  mentes,  non  contaminata 
superstitione,  posse  placari.  3.  Omnes  milites  jurant  se  exercitum 
ducesque  non  deserturos,  neque  sibi  separatim  a  reliquls  consilium 
captures.  4.  Dixeras  Aeduos  tecum  et  cum  Sequanls  contentiones  hab- 
uisse.  5.  Centuriones  qul  dlligentiores  viden  volebant,  portas  castrorum 
totam  noctem  custodiebant.  6.  Vidimus  hostes  in  aquam  progresses 
esse.  7.  Senatui  nuntiabitur  foedus  violatum  esse.  8.  Dico  Luculli 
adventu  maximas  regis  copias  omnibus  rebus  ornatas  atque  instructas 
fuisse,  urbemque  Asiae  clarissimam  obsessam  esse  ab  ipso  rege  maxima 
multitudine. 


LESSON    LXXXV  II. 

We  must  now  speak  of  interrogative 
sentences  or  questions. 

Questions  are  of  two  sorts  : 

1st.  Those  which  do  not  assume  the  truth  of  the  fact 
spoken  of  in  the  question,  but  ask  whether  it  be  true  or 
not,  as  :  Did  Brutus  kill  Caesar? 

Call  these  laet-questions. 

2d.  Those  which  do  assume  the  truth  of  the  fact  spoken 
of  in  the  question,  and  ask  for  more  information  about  it, 
as :  Who  killed  Caesar  ? 

Call  these  word-questions. 

We  shall  speak  first  of  the  1st  class. 

1 54L  In  English  such  questions  are  expressed  by 
putting  the  subject  of  the  verb  immediately  after  it,  or 


120  LESSON  LXXXVn.  [154,  157. 

after  its  auxiliary,  as  itf  the  above  example.  But  since  in 
Latin  the  subject  of  the  verb  was  often  omitted  (being 
sufficiently  indicated  by  the  person-ending)  it  was  neces- 
sary to  have  some  other  way  of  pointing  out  the  difference 
between  an  assertion  and  a  question.  For  instance :  the 
three  words,  Brutus  Caesarem  ocndit,  though  commonly 
placed  in  this  order,  may  be  arranged  in  any  way  with- 
out its  being  indicated  by  their  position  that  a  question 
is  asked.  In  Latin  therefore  certain  words  called  inter- 
rogative particles  are  used,  the  presence  of  which  in  a 
sentence  shows  that  a  question  is  asked,  and  not  a  fact 
asserted. 

The  interrogative  particles  used  in  Latin  for  simple 
questions  are : 


155.  (1)  Ne,  enclitic:  i.  e.,  appended,  to  the  most 
emphatic  word :  as,  Brutusne  Caesarem  occidit  ?  Was 
it  Brutus  who  killed  Caesar  f 

1 06.  (2)  Num  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  sen- 
tence, when  the  answer  "  no"  is  expected :  as,  Xum 
Brutus  Caesarem  occidit  ?  Did  Brutus  kill  Caesar  f 
(no.) 

157.  (3)  Nonne  placed  at  the  beginning  of  the  sen- 
tence, when  the  answer  "  yes"  is  expected :  as,  nonne 
Brutus  Caesarem  occidit  ?  Did  not  Brutus  kill  Caesar  f 
(yes.) 

Often  however  the  enclitic  ne  is  used  when  the  sense 
seems  necessarily  to  require  the  answer  "  yes,"  or  "  no."  In 
these  instances  the  question  may  be  supposed  to  be  stated 
with  the  two  possible  alternatives,  as :  potestne  virtus  ser- 
v~ire  f  "  can  or  cannot  virtue  be  a  slave  ?"  In  such  cases 
in  the  exercises  ne  will  be  inserted  in  parentheses ;  and 
the  emphatic  word  to  which  ne  is  to  be  appended  will  be 
marked  by  italics ;  and  the  expected  answer  will  be  in- 
serted when  num  or  nonne  must  be  used. 


15§-160.]  LESSON  LXXXVIII.  121 


EXERCISE  163. 

1.  Does  the  concourse  of  all  good-men  move  thee  not-at-all  (nihit). 
2.  Do  not  poets  wish  to  be  celebrated  after  death  ?  (Yes).  3.  Are  we 
able  to  change  the-past  (pi.  n.)  ?  (No).  4.  Does  (not)  Socrates  appear 
to  place  a  happy  life  in  virtue  alone  (ne)  ?  5.  Do-you-(not)-see  (ne) 
that  this  evil  is  (one)  of-opinion,  not  of-nature  ?  6.  Do  the  remaining 
emotions  of  the  mind  fall  upon  (in)  the  wise  man  ?  (No),  t.  To  this 
(lianccine)  life  will  you  call-back  that  man?  8.  Is  not  a  dog  very-like 
a  wolf?  (Yes). 

EXERCISE  164. 

1.  Egone  has  injurias  diutius  patiar  quam  necesse  est  ?  2.  Nonne 
sensistis  triumphatum  hodie  de  vobls  esse  ?  3.  Num  potes  popular! 
hanc  terram,  quae  te  genuit  atque  aluit  ?  4.  Num  ignavissimos  hostes 
magis  timetis  quam  Deos,  per  quos  jurastis  ?  5.  Verblsne  istls,  frater, 
te  mllitibus  persuasurum  esse  credis  ?  6.  Num  haec  vobls  forma  sanae 
civitatis  videtur?  7.  Deditisne  vos  urbem,  agros,  dlvina  humanaque 
oinnia  in  ditionem  popull  Roman!?  8.  Arbitrarisne  consulem  aut  in 
tempore  pugnam  inlvisse,  aut  firmasse  subsidiis  aciem,  aut  ullo  bonl 
consults  functum  officio  ? 


LESSON    LXXXVIII. 

158.  Word-questions  are  those  which,  while 
they  assume  the  truth  of  the  fact  spoken  of,  demand  more 
information  about  it.     Such  questions  are  asked  by  inter- 
rogative pronouns  or  interrogative  adverbs. 

1 59.  Interrogative  pronouns  form  the  fifth  class  spoken 
of  in  Lesson  XLIX. 

The  principal  pronoun  of  this  class  in  Latin  is  quo-  de- 
clined exactly  like  the  relative  pronoun  except  in  the  nomi- 
native and  accusative  singular.  The  difference  will  be  ob- 
served at  once. 

JHasc.  Fern.  N~eut. 
Nom.  quis  quae  quid. 
Ace.  quern  quam  quid. 

160.  But  it  is  to  be  observed  that  qm  and  quod  are 
also  used  when  a  noun  is  joined  with  the  interrogative ; 

11 


122  LESSOX  LXXXVin.  [161. 

i.  e.  quis  and  quid  are  nearly  always  used  as  substantives, 
qul  and  quod  as  adjectives.     Thus 

Who  calls  me  ?  is  translated  by  quis  me  vocal  ? 

What  slave  calls  me  ?       "          "  "  qul  servus  me  vocatf 

TV  hat  do  you  read?  "          "  "  quid  legist 

What  song  do  you  read  ?"          "  "  quod  canneri  legis  ? 

Besides  quo-,  the  adjectives  quail-  "  of  what  kind," 
quanto-  "  how  great,"  are  used  as  interrogatives  in  word- 
questions;  and  so  also  the  folio  wing  adverbs:  ubi,  "where," 
quo,  "  whither,"  quando,  "when,"  cur,  "why,"  quin9"why 
not,"  and  some  others. 

161.  The  interrogative  quo-  is  made  more  emphatic 
by  the  addition  of  the  syllable  -nam  to  all  its  cases ;  we 
also  find  the  prefixes  ee,  and  num,  used  with  it :  thus 

quisnam,  quaenam,  quidnam,  &c. 
ecquis,  ecquae  (or  ecqua),  ecquid,  &c. 
numquis,  munquae  (or  niunqua),  numquid,  &c. 

But  the  last  (like  num)  is  only  used  when  a  negative 
answer  is  expected. 


EXERCISE  165. 

1.  Who  writes  these  letters?  2.  By  whom  are  these  letters  written? 
3.  Whose  note  is  sweeter  than  the  note  of  the  nightingale  ?  4.  What 
bird  sings  more  sweetly  than  the  nightingale  ?  5.  Who  uttered  that 
famous  opinion?  6.  What  philosopher  uttered  that  famous  opinion? 
7.  Who  (quisnam)  perpetrated  this  crime  ?  8.  0  country  (rus-),  whea 
shall  I  behold  thee  ? 


EXERCISE  166. 

1.  Quis  de  re  tarn  clara  dubitare  potest  ?  2.  Quern  viram  carmine 
celebrabimus  ?  3.  Quivir  a  nobis  carmine  celebrabitur  ?  4.  SI  omnes 
aliena  imperia  perferimus,  quisnam  liber  est  ?  5.  Quis  clarior  in  Grae- 
cia  fuit  Themistocle  ?  6.  Qul  cantus  moderata  oratione  est  dulcior, 
quod  carmen  artificiosa  conclusione  aptius?  7.  Quis  amicior  quam 
frater  fratri  ?  8.  Quis  moitalium  omnibus  horis  sapit  ? 


162.]  LESSON  XG.  123 

LESSON    LXXXIX. 

EXERCISE  167. 

1.  Who  am  I,  and  what  faculty  is-there  in  me  ?  2.  "What  is  more 
sweet  than  to  have  a  true  friend?  3.  Did  old-age  compel  the  chief  of 
philosophers  to  grow-slack  (obmutesc-}  in  their  studies  ?  (No).  4. 
Could  (ne)  so-rgreat  a  mind  (not)  produce  a  pleasant  old-age.  5.  Was 
the  old-age  of  these-men  miserable,  who  delighted  themselves  in-the- 
cultivation  of  the  Held  ?  6.  What  is  more  foolish,  than  to  take  (habe-} 
uncertain-things  for  (pro)  certain,  false-things  for  true  ? 

EXERCISE  168. 

1.  QuI  pavor  hie,  qul  terror,  quae  obllvio  animos  cepit  ?  2.  Mortem 
omnibus  horls  impendentem  timeris  qul  (how)  poterit  animo  consistere  ? 
3.  Nonne  multo  melius  est,  otiosam  aetatem  et  quietam,  'sine  ullo 
labore  et  contentione  transducere  ?  4.  Quern  intelligimus  divitem,  aut 
hoc  Verbum  in  quo  homine  ponimus  ?  5.  Quae  servitus  est,  si  haec 
libertas  existimarl  potest?  6.  Quae  est  civitas?  Omnisne  conventus 
etiam  ferorum  et  immanium?  Omnisne  etiam  fugitivorum  ac  latronum 
congregata  in  unum  locum  multitudo?  7.  QuomodS,  tot  legibus  in 
exsilium  ejectus,  nomen  exsulis  non  perhorrescis?  8.  Ecquando  unam 
urbem,  ecquando  communem  patriam  habebimus  ? 


LESSON    XC. 

The  interrogative  pronoun  to  be  used,  if  only 
two  persons  are  spoken  of,  is  utro-.  This,  as  well  as  the 
adjectives  solo-  "alone,"  toto-  "the  whole,"  olio-  "the 
other,"  alter o-  "the  other  of  two,"  "the  second,"  neutro- 
" neither,"  uno-  "  one,"  nullo-  "none,"  ullo-  "  any,"  takes 
the  ending  -ms  for  the  genit.  sing.,  and  -I  for  the  dat.  sing, 
in  all  genders,  like  the  demonstrative  pronouns  illo-  and 
isto-. 

NOTE. — The-  i  in  the  ending  -lus  is  marked  long.  This  is  the  proper 
quantity,  no  doubt,  as  all  these  genitives  arise  from  the  contraction  of 
-ius  with  the  o  of  the  stem.  But  alterlus  is  incorrectly  said  to  have 
the  i  always  short;  and  allus  has  it  always  long,  as  in  it  there  is  a 
double  contraction  from  alioius.  The  other  words  are  often  found  short 
in  the  poets,  but  tkey  are  pronounced  long  in  prose. 


124  LESSOX  XCL  [163. 

The  declension  of  three  of  these  words  is  here  given  in 
one  of  the  three  genders  in  the  sing. 

utro-  (masc.)  altera-  (fern.)  alio-  (neut.) 

JVom.      uter.  altera.  aliud. 

Ace.        ntruni.  alteram.  " 

Gen.       utrius.  alteiius.  alms. 

Dat.        utrl.  alter!.  alii. 

Abl.        utro.  altera.  alio. 

Observe  that  alio-  has  aliud  in  the  neut.  sing.  nom. 
and  ace.  The  plural  of  all  these  words  is  regular. 

EXERCISE   169. 

1.  "\Vhich  of  these  (two)  is  more  worthy  of  punishment  ?  2.  To 
which  of-us  (two)  shall  the  new  book  be  given  ?  3.  Demosthenes  and 
Cicero  were  most  excellent  orators  :  which  of  them  do  you  prefer  ?  4. 
The  other  cities,  being  worn-out  by  the  long  war,  received  the  army 
within  (their)  walls.  5.  The  other  town,  having  been  plundered  and 
burnt,  was  nothing  profitable  to  the  weary  soldiers.  6.  On  the  second 
day,  the  army  came  to  a  village  abandoned  by  the  enemy. 


EXERCISE  170. 

1.  Xuntil  ad  alias  Aeduoram  clvitates  a  nobis  missl  tandem  adcastra 
reverterant.  2.  uua  urbs,  posita  in  altissimo  rnonte  omnes  aditus  diffi- 
cillimos  habebat.  3.  Certior  a  nobis  factus  fuuditores  trans  pontem 
transducis,  et  ad  hostes  contendis.  4.  Totae  sociorum  copiae  pulsae 
superataeque  passim  fugiunt  5.  Hi  principes,  studio  novarum  rerum 
adducti,  imperium  totlus  Galliae  appetiverunt.  6.  Alter  eorum  Graecus 
fuit,  alter  Romanus.  7.  Tibi  soli  ex  tot  millibus  captivorum  imperator 
parcet.  8.  Alteram  regionis  partem,  penitus  a  miHtibus  vastatam 
hostibus  rehiiquo. 


LESSON    XCI. 

163.  We  have  now  to  speak  of  the  imperative 

mood,  or  the  forms  of  the  verb  used  in  commanding. 


164.] 


LESSON  XCL 


125 


Of  this  mood  there  are  two  tenses,  called  present  and 
future,  the  uses  of  which  will  be  explained  hereafter.  As 
the  forms  of  these  are  very  easily  learned,  it  is  thought 
sufficient  to. present  them  here  in  one  view,  without  call- 
ing attention  particularly  to  the  formation. 

It  will  be  seen  that  of  the  present  imperative  both  ac- 
tive and  passive,  only  the  2d  persons  singular  and  plu- 
ral are  used  ;  while  of  the  future  imperative  we  have  in 
the  active  the  2d  and  3d  persons  singular  and  plural,  and 
in  the  passive  the  2d  and  3d  persons  singular,  and  only 
the  3d  person  plural. 


ama- 


mone- 


audi- 


Active. 

Pres.  Sing.  2.  am  a. 
Plur.  2.  amate. 

mone. 
monete. 

Fut.    Sing.  2.  amato. 
3.      " 

moneto. 

Plur.  2.  amatote. 

monetote. 

3.  amanto. 

monento. 

Pa§sive. 

Pres.  Sing.  2.  amare. 
Plur.  2.  amaminl. 

mone  re. 
monemim. 

Fut.   Sing.  2.  arnator. 
3.        " 

monetor. 
« 

Plur.  3.  amantor. 

monentor. 

reg-         cap(i)- 


audi.  rege.  cape, 

audlte.  regite.  capite. 

audito.  regito.  capito. 

U  U  II 

audltote.  regitote.  capitote. 

audiuuto.  regunto.  capiunto. 

audire.  regere.  capere. 

audlminl.  regimini.  capimini. 

auditor.  regitor.  capitor. 

U  U  U 

audiuntor.  reguntor.  capiuntor. 


164.  The  verbs  die-,  "say,"  due-,  " lead,"  es-,  "  be," 
fae(i)-,  "  make,"  fer-,  "  carry,"  do  not  take  the  ending  e 
in  the  2d  pers.  sing,  of  the  present  imperative  active.  In 
that  person  they  are  therefore  unaltered.  The  imperative 
of  es-  and  its  compounds  is  thus  conjugated. 


Present. 
Future. 


2.  sing. 
2.  plur. 

2.  sing. 

3.  " 

2.  plur. 

3.  " 


es. 

este. 

esto. 

esto. 

estote. 

sunto. 


No  exercises  will  be  given  in  this  lesson,  that  the  time 
may  be  devoted  to  learning  the  above  forms. 
11* 


126  LESSON  XCII.  [165. 


LESSON    XCII. 

165.  The  forms  of  the  present  imperative 

are  used  in  requests  and  directions  of  an  unemphatic  char- 
acter, and  generally  in  relation  to  time  present  or  imme- 
diately succeeding  ;  and  thus  it  has  only  the  2d  person.  It 
is  however  very  rarely  used  in  negative  directions  (/>ro- 
hibitions),  some  forms  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  to  be  spo- 
ken of  hereafter,  being  used  instead  of  it. 

It  is  to  be  particularly  observed  that  in  prohibitions 
the  negative  adverb  is  ne  (not  nori).  Neve  is  the  form 
used  instead  of  et  ne. 

EXERCISE  171. 

1.  Advance  with  a-brave  mind,  Lacedaemonians;  to-day,  perhaps, 
•we  shall  sup  with  (apud)  the  gods-below.  2.  Mother,  I  call-upon  thee, 
arise  and  bury  (thy)  son.  3.  Believe  me.  (dat.)  no-orie  of-you  will  catch 
(conxequ-  dep.)  me,  when  I  have-gone-forth  (exced-fut.perf.)  hence.  4.  Say, 
O  stranger.  at-Sparta,  that  you  have  seen  us  lying  here.  5.  Leap-down, 
fellow-soldiers,  unless  ye-wish  (vultis)  to  betray  the  eagle  to  the  enemy. 
6.  Allow  me,  0  friend,  to  expire  in  this  slaughter  of  my  soldiers. 


EXERCISE  172. 

,1.  AudyJiupiter,  dlqtie  omnes  coelestes,  yosque  terrestres,  Yosque 
iuferni  audjte.. .  2.  Adeste  elves,  adeste  commilitones,  ,  3.  Si  vobLs 
viderur;  tifsced'tle,  Quirite's.  4.  Adeste.  dl  testes  foederis,  et  expetite 
poenas,  debitas  simul  vobis  violaTTs.  noblsqu'e  per  vestrum  nuriien  de- 
ceptis.  5.  Obsecro.  elves,  mihi  misero  atque  innocent!  subvemte.  6. 
Haerete  affixl  contiotoibus.  et  in  foro  vivite.  7.  Praeb^te  vos,  6  elves, 
in  re  tarn  trepida  patribus  obedientes.  8.  avertite  ab  Ira  parumper  ad 
cognitionem  et  cogitatiGnem  animos.  9.  Mel  potius  misereminl,  o  elves, 
filiaeque  meae.  10.  Si  dormls,  expergiscere,  si  stas,  ingredere,  si  in- 
grederis,  curre,  si  curris  advoia. 


166.]  LESSON  XCIII.  127 


LESSON   XCIII. 

166.  The  future  imperative  has,  as  we  have 
seen,  three  forms  in  the  active  and  two  in  the  passive : 

that  of  the  singular  in  each  voice  being  employed  for  the  2d 
and  3d  persons. 

It  is  used  in  giving  more  urgent  commands,  and  has 
reference  to  future  time  generally,  and  it  is  the  mood 
used  in  laws,  wills,  <&c.,  and  corresponds  in  meaning  to 
the  word  "  shall,"  as  used  in  the  commandments :  e.  g., 
"  TliOll  shaft  not  steal."  There  are  a  few  verbs 
however  of  which  the  future  imperative  is  used  with  the 
same  force  as  the  present  imperative  generally  possesses. 
Among  these  are  sci-, "  know,"  and  ha  be-, "  hold."  Though, 
as  has  been  said,  the  present  imperative  is  not  often  used 
in  prohibitions,  in  laws  ne  is  found  with  the  future  impera- 
tive. Thus  the  eighth  commandment,  given  above,  would 
be  in  Latin,  ne  furator. 


EXERCISE  173. 

1.  If  you,  0  friend,  shall  be  able  (per/.)  to-get-hold-of  (assequ-,  dep.) 
me,  bury  (me)  as  shall  seem-fit  to  yourself.  2.  The  vestal  virgins  in  the 
city  shall  guard  the  everlasting  fire  of  the  public  hearth.  3.  The  two 
(men)  shall-be  of-royal  authority  (abl.}  and  they  shall-be-called  consuls. 
4.  My  slave  shall-be  free.  5.  It  is  not  enough  that  poems  should-be 
pretty  ;  (they)  must  be  charming  (dulci-),  and  must-carry  (ag-)  the  mind 
of  the  hearer  whithersoever  they  wish  (/«£).  6.  The  fishermen  must- 
draw-together  the  net. 


EXERCISE  174. 

1.  Bacillum  propter  me  ponitote,  quo  volucrgs  et  canes  abigam.  2. 
Cadavera  prima  luce  sepeliuntor.  3.  Puerl  haec  carmina  ad  verbum 
discunto.  4.  Quum  valetudini  tuae  consulueris,  turn  consulito  naviga- 
tion!. 5.  Rem  vobls  proponam:  vos  earn  suo,  non  nominis  pondere 
penditote.  6.  FabrI  materia  et  aere  navium  afflictarum  utuntor  ad  re- 
liquas  reficiendas.  7.  Latro  statim  comprehenditor  et  in  vincula  con- 
jicitor.  8.  Faucis  diebus  frumentum  militibus  metltor. 


128  LESSOX  XCIY.  [167,  169. 

LESSON    XCIY. 

We  have  seen  that  Participles  are  verbal  adjectives,  and 
that  the  infinitive  mood  is  a  verbal  substantive,  used  in 
the  nomin.  and  accus.  cases  only. 

167.  There  is  besides  these  verbals,  another  partici- 
pial form  made  by  adding 

to  o-stems  and  e-stems         ndo-. 
to  ah1  others  endo-. 

NOTE. — The  connecting  vowel  is  sometimes  u,  making  undo-. 

Thus  from  ania-  is  formed  amando-,  "loving." 

"          mone-  "       "  monendo-,  "advising." 

audi-  "       "  audiendo-,  "  hearing." 

"          reg-  "       "  regendo-,  "ruling." 

"          cap(i)-  "       "  capienda-,  "taking." 

"         i-  "       "  eundo-,  "going." 

168.  This  participial  form  is  used — 

1st.  As  a  noun  in  the  sense  given  above ;  but  only  in 
the  neuter  singular,  and  not  in  the  nominal,  case,  and  is 
then  called  the  Gerund. 

2d.  As  an  adjective  in  the  sense  of  "  to  be  loved"  &c., 
and  is  then  called  the  Oerillldive. 

The  Gerundive  is  sometimes  called  the  future  partici- 
ple passive*  and  has  a  twofold  use : 

1st.  As  a  simple  adjective  in  agreement  with  a  noun, 
like  a  participle. 

2d.  In  a  peculiar  sense  in  connection  with  the  verb  es-. 

We  shall  first  speak  of  the  Gerund. 

169.  As  the  Infinitive  mood  is  a  neuter  noun,  used 
only  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  cases,  the  Oertind 
is  used  as  a  noun  to  supply  the  place  of  the  infinitive  for 
the  other  cases  ;  and  it  may  stand  also  in  the  accusative 
case,  when  following  a  preposition,  as  the  infinitive  is  very 
rarely  found  so  governed. 

The  following  sentences  are  examples  of  the  gerund 
employed  as  a  noun  hi  the  accusative,  genitive,  dative 
and  ablative  cases. 

XOTE. — The  gerund,  like  the  infinitive,  governs  the  same  case  as  the 
verb  from  which  it  is  formed. 


1TO-173.]  LESSON  XCV.  129 

170.  (1).  The  accusative  case  of  the  gerund 
is  for  the  most  part  used  after  the  prepositions  ad  and  in- 
ter.    The  following  examples  will  show  its  meaning  then. 

Mitto  legfitum  ad  inspicien-  /  send  an  ambassador  for  the 
dum.  purpose  of  looking  into  (the 

matter]. 

Bos  ad  arandum  natus  est.       The  ox  was  made  for  ploughing. 
Inter  agendum  caveto.  You  must   be  careful  while 

driving  (the  flock.} 

171.  (2).  The  genitive  case  of  the  gerund  is 
employed  to  limit  the  meaning  of  a  noun,  for  the  most 
part  objectively  (see  §  34). 

Spes  potiundi  castris  milites  The  hope  of  gaining  the  camp 

excitat.  urges  on  the  soldiers. 

Titus  erat  equitandi  peri-  Titus  ivas  skilled  in  horse- 

tus.  manship. 

172.  (3.)  The  dative  case  of  the  gerund  is 
governed  either  by  verbs  or  adjectives,  the  latter  being 
sometimes  understood. 

Multl  regnando  studuerunt.     Many  gave  their  attention  to 

reigning. 

Soli  boni  idonei  sunt  aliis  The  good  alone  are  jit  to 
juste  imperando.  govern  others  justly. 

1 73.  (4.)  The  ablative  case  'of  the  gerund  is 
used  either  as  ablative  of  means  or  after  the  prepositions 
«'»,  a&,  ex,  de. 

Volscus  stando  et  vigiliis  fes-  The  Volscian  was  weary  (of) 
sus  erat.  by  standing  and  watching. 

Summa  voluptas  ex  discendo  The  greatest  pleasure  is  de- 
capitur.  rived  from  learning. 

Virtutescernunturinagendo.  The  manly  virtues  are  seen 

in  action. 

No  exercises  are  given  in  this  lesson,  that  the  form  and 
uses  of  the  gerund  may  be  well  understood,  before  the 
pupils  have  to  translate  any  sentences  containing  it. 


130  LESSOR  XCYI.  [174. 


LESSON    XCY. 


EXERCISE  175. 

1.  While  (inter)  fighting,  thirty  ships  of  the  enemy  were  taken,  thir- 
teen (were)  sunk.  2.  All  burned  with  a  wonderful  passion  for  (gen.} 
regaining  (their)  liberty.  3.  God  made  the  ox  for-the-purpose  -  of 
ploughing.  4.  Few-men  are  fit  for  speaking.  5.  Walls  serve  for- 
defending  against  the  violence  of  enemies.  6.  The  guide  went-forward 
with  horsemen  to  examine. 


EXERCISE    176. 

1.  Omni  occasion  e  recte  utendo  Caesar  potens  factus  est.  2.  Nun- 
quam  ingenium  idem  ad  res  dlversissimas,  parendum  atque  imperandum, 
habilius  fuit.  3.  Hannibal  prlma  luce  equites,  transgresses  flumen,  ob- 
equitare  portls  jubet,  jaculandoque  in  stationes  elicere  ad  pugnam  hostes. 
4.  Hannibal,  advocata  contione,  varie  militum  animos  versat,  castlgando 
adhortandoque.  5.  Omnes  res  satis  comparatae  sunt  ad  trajiciendum  quam 
occultissirce.  6.  Militibus  labore  ac  pugnando  fessls  quies  data  est 
7  Eadem  fortfma,  quae  necessitatem  pugnandi  imponit,  multa  vobls 
praemia  victoribus  proponit.  8.  Alils  timor  hostium  audaciam  ingre- 
diendi  flumen  fecit,  transgressique  in  castra  pervenerunt. 


LESSON  XCYI. 

1 74:.  W  hen  the  Gerund  is  formed  from  a  transitive 
verb,  and  has  its  object  expressed,  (in  the  accusative), 
the  gerundive  **  generally  employed  instead  of  it  with 
the  following  changes  of  construction — 

1.  The  accusative  (the  object)  takes  the  case  of  the  gerund. 

2.  The  gerundive  agrees  with  the  noun  which  was  the  object 
of  the  gerund. 

As  this  is  very  important,  let  the  following  examples 
be  carefully  studied.  The  sentences  in  parentheses  give 
what  would  be  the  construction  of  the  gerund ;  the  others 
the  construction  of  the  gerundive. 


175,  1.76.]  LESSON  XCVI.  131 


1st.  (Gerund  in  the'  accusative.) 

(Puer  aptus  est  ad  Hteras  tractandum).  The  boy  is 
fit  for  handling  literary  matters. 

Puer  aptus  est  ad  literas  tractandas.  The  boy  is  fit 
for  literature  to  be  handled. 

2d.  (Gerund  hi  the  dative.) 

(Asinus  idoneus  est  onera  portando).  The  ass  is  proper 
for  carrying  burdens. 

Asinus  idoneus  est  oneribus  portandls. 

3d.  (Gerund  in  the  genitive.) 

(Ars  civitatem  gubernandi  est  difficillima).  The  art 
of  (fovcrninfj  a  state  is  very  difficult. 

Ars  civitatis  gubernandae  est  difficillima. 

4th.  (Gerund  in  the  ablative.) 

(Literus  tractando  ingenium  acuitur).  The  mind  is 
sharpened  by  handling  literature. 

Liteiis  tractandls  ingenium  acuitur. 

176.  NOTE.  —  1st.  In  the  first  tvfo  of  these  cases  (i.  e.  when  the 
gerund,  if  used,  would  be  in  the  accusative  or  dative  case,) 
the  gerundive  (or  passive)  construction  is  alivays  to  ~be  employed:  and  far 
most  commonly  is  it  found  in  the  last  two  also  ;  i.  e.  when  the  gerund, 
if  used,  would  be  in  the  genitive  or  ablative.  The  exceptions  are  for 
the  most  part  found  in  those  cases  where,  if  the  gerundive  were  used, 
the  gender  of  a  pronoun  (or  adjective  used  as  a  noun,)  would  be  left  in 
doubt  ;  so  we  should  say  cupiditas  plara  habendi,  and  not  cupiditds 
plurium  habendorum. 

2d.  In  English  almost  always  the  gerund  (or  active)  construction  is 
used  ;  and  so,  in  translating  the  above  sentences,  only  one  form  of 
words  has  been  given  for  both  modes  of  expression,  except  in  the  first 
case. 

In  the  following  exercises  the  words  marked  by  italics, 
though  the  verb  may  in  English  be  active,  are  to  be  trans- 
lated by  the  gerundive  (or  passive)  construction. 

EXERCISE   177.       . 

1.  The  art  of  educating  boys  is  difficult.  2.  Ye  were  wasting  time 
in-sending  embassies.  3.  This  nation  is  unskilled  in  (ad)  the  arts  of 
besieging  cities.  4.  I  was  sent  home  (to  treat)  concerning  exchanging 
prisoners.  5.  Time  was  not  given  far-executing  those  things  which  had 
been  determined-upon.  6.  The  Romans  built  (p.  h.)  a  fort  for-the- 
Bake-of  defending  the  bridge. 


132  LESSOR  XCYIL  [177. 

EXERCISE    178. 

1.  Consul  censebat  id  esse  maximum  vinculum  socils  in  fide  conti- 
nendls.  2.  Hannibal  dixit  se  Iberum  trajecisse  ad  delendum  nomen 
Romanorum,  llberandumque  orbem  terrarum.  3.  Hoc  prlmo  proelio 
facile  apparuit  campos  patentes,  quales  sunt  inter  Padum  Alpesque, 
bello  geruudd  Romanis  aptos  non  esse.  4.  YlgintI  naves  ad  depopu- 
landam  oram  Italiae  a  Carthaginiensibus  missae  sunt.  5.  Prudentia 
est  rerum  appetendarum  et  fugiendarum  scientia.  6.  Magnas  copias 
misimus  non  ad  tuendos  tantummodo  veteres  socios  eonciliandosque 
novos,  sed  etiam  ad  pellendum  Hispania  Hasdrubalem.  7.  Hannibal 
quingentos  equites  ad  depopulandos  socioram  popull  Romani  agros 
mittit  8.  Optimi  auctores  traduut,  blduo  vix  locum  rate  jungendo 
flumini  inventum  esse. 

NOTE. — It  will  be  well  for  teachers  to  exercise  their  pupils  in  altering 
the  above  Latin  sentences  into  the  active  (gerund)  construction. 


LESSON    XCVII. 

177.  The  gerundive  is  very  often  used  in  connection 
with  verbs  denoting  to  transfer,  to  let  out,  to  hire,  <£c.,  in 
agreement  with  the  object  of  those  verbs  if  they  be  active, 
and  with  their  subject  if  they  be  passive.  Such  verbs  are 
/oca-,  "  let-out  at  rent,"  comluc-,  "  hire,"  suacipfj)-,  "  un- 
dertake," cura-,  "  take  care,"  <fcc.,  <fcc.  In  this  construc- 
tion it  is  implied,  that  the  purpose  of  the  action  is,  that 
something  should  be  done  to  the  object  or  subject.  This  will 
be  clear  from  the  following  examples. 

Columnam  conduxerat  faciendam.  Lit.,  he  had  hired  a 
{pillar  to  be  made)  i.  e.,  he  had  contracted  to  build  a  pillar. 

Pontem  in  Arari  faciendum  curat.  Lit.,  he  takes  care  of 
a  (bridge  to  be  made^)  i.  e.,  he  has  a  bridge  built  over  the  Saone. 

TJrbs  militibus  dlripienda  data  est.  The  city  was  given 
to  the  soldiers  to  be  plundered.  Lit.,  (a  to  be  plundered  city) 
was  given  to  the  soldiers. 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  above  sentences  that  the  ge- 
rundive, in. agreement  with  the  object  or  subject,  is  in 
reality  nothing  more  than  an  adjective,  and  forms  with 
the  noun  a  compound  object  or  subject. 


ITS,  179.]  LESSON  XCVIIL  133 

EXERCISE  179. 

1.  The  Roman  people  gave  the  war  to  Crassus  to  carry-on.  2  The 
consul  had  (cura-)  the  deserter  led  back  to  the  king.  3.  Conon  had  (cura-) 
the  walls  of  Athens  repaired.  4.  They  contracted  (loca-)  with  him  (dat.) 
to  make  a  monument  of-marble  (adj.).  5.  The  great  king  had  (cura-)  the 
Roman  citizens  in  all  Asia  butchered  in-one  day.  6.  Antigonus  gave 
the  dead  chief  to  his  relations  to  bury. 

EXERCISE  180. 

1.  Posters  die  praetor  vestimenta  exercitui  praebenda  locat.  2.  Mer- 
cator  tabulas  ac  statuas  in  Italiam  portandas  conduxit.  3.  Bonus 
praeceptor  ingeniorum  discrimma  notat  eorum,  quos  erudiendos  susce- 
pit.  4.  Caesar  longls  navibus  exercitum  transportandum  curaverat. 
5.  Caesar  quam  plurimas  naves  hieme  aedificandas  veteresque  reficien- 
das  curat.  6.  Natura  res  domesticas  procurandas  et  administrandas 
mulieribus  dedit.  7.  Caesar  captam  urbem  dlripiendam  militibus  con- 
cessit.  8.  Puerls  bonds  libros  legendos  damus. 


LESSON    XCVIII. 

It  was  said  in  §  168,  that  the  gerundive,  besides  its 
use  as  a  simple  adjective  (or  a  future  participle),  was 
used  in  a  peculiar  sense  in  connection  with  the  verb  es-. 

178.  The  gerundive  being  an  adjective,  can  of  course 
only  be  used  to  complete  the  meaning  of  es-,  (see  §  79)  and 
must  therefore  agree  in  case,  gender,  and  number  with  the 
subject  of  it.     Take  for  example  the  sentence,  epistola  est 
scnbenda :  "  a  letter  is  to  be  written."     This  being  the 
literal  meaning  of  the  words,  from  it  grew  naturally  the 
sense,  "  a  letter  must  be  written." 

1 79.  The  gerundive,  then,  when  used  to  complete 
the  meaning  of  es-,  always  implies  the  notion  of  duty 
or  necessity.     This  notion  however  is  not  to  be  sup- 
posed to  belong  to  the  gerundive  itself,  but  arises  from 
its  connection  with  es-.     It  was  seen  in  §  80,  that  es-, 
when  followed  by  a  dative  case,  denoted  possession :  as, 
est  mihi  liber,  "  I  have  a  book."     So  in  this  case  the  full 

12 


134  LESSOX  XCVIIL  [ISO. 

phrase  would  be  epistola  est  mihi  scribenda :  "  a  letter 
is  to  me  to  be  written,"  or  "  I  have  a  letter  to  write,"  or 
again,  "  I  must  write  a  letter." 

The  following  examples  will  serve  to  illustrate  this  mat- 
ter, and  to  show  some  of  the  modes  of  expression  which 
may  be  used  in  English  in  translating  this  construction  of 
the  gerundive. 

Vir  tibi  non  est  contemnen-  The  man  ought  not  to  be  de- 

dus.  spiscd  by  you. 

Ager  nobis  erat  diligentis-  We  had  to  cultivate  the  field 

sime  colendus.  very  carefully. 

Leges  patriae  nobis  sunt  ob-  We  should  observe  the  laws 

servandae.  of  (our)  country. 

Omnes  vobis  cruciatus  per-  You  will  have  to  endure  all 

ferendi  erunt.  torments. 

Dixit  omnes  vobis  cruciatus  He  said  that  you  would  have 

perferendos  fore.  (fut.  in-  to  endure  all  torments. 

fin.  of  es-) 

1  8O.  If  these  examples  are  carefully  studied,  it  will 
be  seen  that — 

1st.  They  ah*  imply  duty,  necessity,  or  obligation  of  some 
kind. 

2d.  The  person  on  whom  the  obligation  rests  is  put  in 
the  dative  case. 

3d.  The  time  of  the  obligation  is  expressed  by  the 
proper  tense  of  es-. 

Though  in  ah1  the  above  examples  the  dative  case  and 
the  verb  es-  are  expressed,  in  order  to  exhibit  the  full 
construction,  it  will  be  seen  in  the  following  exercises  that 

1st.  The  dative  is  often  omitted,  when  the  person  who 
is  obliged,  &c.,  is  sufficiently  apparent  from  other  con- 
siderations. 

2d.  The  verb  es-  is  also  not  unfrequently  omitted,  when 
the  time  of  the  obligation  is  clearly  known.  This  is  par- 
ticularly the  case  when  es-  would  be  in  the  infinitive  mood ; 
as  then  the  time  is  commonly  marked  by  the  principal 
verb. 


181.]  LESSOX  XCIX.  135 

EXERCISE  181. 

1.  The  arrogance  of  Ariovistus  is  not  to  be  borne.  2.  Ye  ought  not 
to  neglect  our  wrongs.  3.  I  said  that  ye  ought  not  to  neglect  our 
wrongs.  4.  The  long  ships,  which  have  been  most  seriously  shattered, 
will  have  to  be  repaired  by-the-Grallic  workmen.  5.  I  perceive  that  I 
shall  be  (fore)  obliged  to  carry  on  the  war  in  dangerous  places.  6.  We 
must  hold  the  assemblies  of  the  province. 

EXERCISE  182. 

1.  Omnes,  qui  aderant,  conclamabant,  occasionem  non  esse  amitten- 
dam.  2.  Bellum  cum  Saguntlnls  susceptum  cum  Romanls  habendum 
erit.  3.  Ego  censeo  istum  juvenem  dorm  tenendum  esse,  et  sub  legibus, 
sub  magistratibus  docendum  vivere  cum  ceterls  aequo  jQre.  4.  Decre- 
vimus  legiltos  extemplo  Romam  nobis  mittendos  esse.  5.  Harum  omnium 
re  rum  casus  nostrls  navibus  erat  extimescendus.  6.  In  omnibus  negotils 
adhibenda  est  praeparatio  diligens.  7.  Neque  mihi  legates  audiendos 
neque  conditioned  abhostibus  accipiendas  arbitrabar.  8.  Hi  quiturpis- 
simam  servitutem  deditionis  nomine  appellant,  neque  clvium  loco  hab- 
eridl  sunt,  neque  ad  consilium  adhibendl. 


LESSON    XCIX. 

It  was  seen  in  §  138,  that  intransitive  verbs,  though 
they  cannot  have  a  passive  voice  in  any  proper  sense,  are 
yet  used  impersonally  in  the  passive ;  and  it  is  clear  that 
the  construction  of  the  gerundive,  explained  in  the  last 
lesson,  can  only  be  properly  made  use  of  in  the  case  of 
transitive  verbs  ;  for  unless  we  could  say :  scnbo  episto- 
lam,  we  could  not  say  :  epistola  est  mihi  scrlbenda. 

181.  Intransitive  verbs,  however,  have  an  imper- 
sonal gerundive  construction,  i.  e.,  the  neuter 
nom.  or  ace.  sing,  of  the  gerundive  is  employed  with  es- 
and  a  dative  to  imply  that  the  action  of  the  verb  must  be 
done ;  just  as  the  3d  person  sing,  of  intransitive  verbs 
was  seen  to  be  used,  and  in  the  perfect  tenses  in  the  neu- 
ter gender.  See  the  examples  in  §  138. 

Thus  from  the  intransitive  verb  pugna-  we  have 

Pagnatur,  a  battle  is  being  fought. 


136  LESSOX  C. 

Pugnutum  est.,  a  battle  was  fought. 

Pugnandum  est  mini,  a  battle  must  be  fought  by  me  ; 
or,  I  must  fight. 

182.  This  neater  nom.  sing,  of  the  gerundive  is  the 
same  in  form  as  the  gerund,  and  like  the  gerund,  governs 
the  same  ease  as  the  verb  from  which  it  is  made.  Let 
the  following  examples  be  carefully  studied — 

Proficisendum  mihi  est  hoc     This  very  day  I  am  obliged 

ipso  die.  to  set  out. 

Tibi  vlribus  utendum  erit.  You  will  have  to  use  (your) 

strength. 
OblTviscendum  vobls  injuria-     /  think  that  you  ought  tofor- 

rum  esse  censeo.  get  injuries. 

EXERCISE  183. 

1.  TVe  ought  immediately  to  run-to-meet  the  enemy.  2.  Te  had  at- 
the-same-time  to  stand-your-ground  in  the  waves,  and  to  fight  with  the 
enemy.  3.  It  is  the  duty  of  all  men  to  resist  injustice.  4.  We  shall 
be  obliged  to  have  recourse  to  (ad)  force.  5.  I  think  that  the  horse- 
soldiers  ought  to  advance  farther  and  to  retreat  more  quickly.  6.  No- 
one  ought  to  fear  without  cause. 

EXERCISE  184. 

1.  Secundissimis  rebus  consilio  amlcorum  utendum  est.  2.  Omnes 
eonclamamus  nemini  dubitandum  esse  de  vestra  fide.  3.  Cicero  docet 
oratdribus  disputandum  esse  de  omm  re  in  contrarias  partes.  4.  Miserts 
mulieribus  quam  prlmum  ex  insula  fugiendum  erit.  5.  His  rebus 
adductus  statui  non  diutius  expectandum  esse.  6.  Putavimus  nobis 
confligendum  fore  sub  oculis  imperatoris.  7.  Permotus  hominum 
fania,  scribendum  ad  te  existimavi.  8.  Xonnulli  censebant  de  tertia 
vigilia  in  castra  ad  mare  recedendum. 


LESSON   C. 

The  following  exercises  contain  examples  of  the  sev- 
eral uses  of  the  gerund  and  gerundive,  as  explained  in  the 
previous  lessons. 

EXERCISE  185. 

1.  Hannibal  ordered  (p.  h.)  the  officer,  by  kind  words  to  entice  the 
townsmen  to  (ad)  open  (their)  gates,  and  receive  a  garrison.  2.  The 


183,  184.]  LESSON  CI.  137 

dictator  had  gone  to-Rome  for-the-sake  of  taking-again  (repet-)  tlie 
auspices.  3.  The  lieutenant  was  sent  by  the  consul  to  (ad)  receive  the 
old  army,  and  conduct  (it)  thence  into  Sicily.  4.  The  consul  had  (cura-) 
the  new  legion  transported  at-the-earliest-moment  (primo  quoque  tern- 
pore)  into  Sardinia.  5.  The  senate  of  all  the  tribes  came-together 
thither  to  (ad)  deliberate  in-common.  6.  They  thought  that  the  Punic 
alliance  and  friendship  ought-to-be-desired-before  the  Roman. 


EXERCISE  186. 

1.  Ea  pars  concilil  vlcit,  quae  nihil  raptim  nee  temere  agendum,  con- 
sulendumque  de  integro  censuit.  2.  Consul  in  Campaniam  profectus 
est  ad  permutandos  exercitus.  3.  Summus  magistrates  instruendae  fraudl 
intentior  fuit  quam  muniendls  castrls  aut  ulll  mllitari  open.  4.  Pos- 
terum  diem  sepeliendo  utrimque  caesos  in  acie  cousumpserunt.  5.  Ibi, 
nullo  ad  evagandum  spatio,  comminus  consertae  sunt  manus.  6.  Pe- 
cunia  in  stipendium,  vestlmentaque  et  frumentum  exercitui  desuut; 
haec  omnia  ab  Roma  vobis  mittenda  sunt.  7.  Prodeundum  in  con- 
tionem  Fulvio  praetor!  est,  et  publicae  necessitates  populo  indicandae 
sunt.  8.  Ducit  imperator  exercitum  ad  castra  maxima  oppugnanda 
quibus  Hasdrubal  praeerat. 


LESSON    CI. 

183.  There  remains  to  be  treated  of  one  more  verbal 
called  the  supine.     This  is  a  noun  occurring  only  in  the 
accusative  and  ablative  cases  sing.     It  may  be  most  readily 
formed  by  changing  the  o-  of  the  3d  stem  into  u-. 

Thus  from  3.  amatQ-  we  get  the  supine  stem  amatu-. 
And  from  amatu-    we  have  ace.  sing,  amatiun. 

dbl.  sing,  amatu. 

We  will  speak  first  of  the  accusative  supine. 

184.  The  accusative  Supine  is  used  only  after 
verbs  implying  motion,  and  expresses  the  purpose  of  that  mo- 
tion. 

EXAMPLES. 

Ad  Caesarem  congratula-  They  came  to  Caesar  to  cow- 
turn  convenerunt.  aratulate  (him). 

Quinque  cohortes  fr  umenta-  He  sent  five  cohorts  to  get  corn. 
turn  misit. 

12* 


138  LESSON  GIL  [1§5,  1§6. 


EXERCISE  187. 

1 .  "We  came  to  surrender  our  kingdom  and  ourselves  (nosmet  i})sds). 

2.  The  soldiers  had  advanced  farther  from  the  camp  to-provide-foddtr. 

3.  Ambassadors  of  the  Aedui  came  to-compkrin.  concerning  the  arro- 
gance of  Ariovistus.     4.  The   strangers   are-coming   into  the   city  to 
witness  the  games.    5.  I  will  not  go  to-be-a-slave  to  Grecian  matrons.    6. 
Coriolanus  went-away  among  (in  ace),  the  Yolsci  to-live-in-exile. 


EXERCISE  188. 

1.  Camillus,  post  multa  in  patriam  merita,  judicio  populi  damnatus, 
exsulatum  abiit.  2.  Barbari  ad  socios  legatum  mittunt,  subsidium 
rogatum.  3.  Plerique  de  more  salutatum  Ibant  consulem.  4.  Hae 
aves  cum  sole  cubitum  eunt.  5.  Deus  et  diligendus  est  et  timendus. 
6.  Recte  dictum  est,  parcendum  esse  victis.  7.  Non  corpori  soli  sub- 
veniendum  est,  sed  mentl  atque  auimo  multo  magis.  8.  Resistendum 
seuectutl  est,  ejusque  vitia  diligentia  compensanda  sunt.  9.  Is  oppor- 
tunus  visus  est  locus  communiendo  praesidio. 


LESSON    CII. 

1 8d.  The  ablative  supine  is  used  as  an  ablative  of 
limitation  after  some  adjectives.     (See  §  57.) 

EXAMPLES. 

Hoc  factu  turpe  est.  This  is  base  to  do,  (lit.,  in  the 

doing.) 

onttio  sapientium  jucunda  The  talk  of  the  wise  is  pleas- 
est  audStu.  ant  to  hear,  (lit.,  in  the  hear- 

ing.) 

186.  A  common  use  of  the  accusative  su- 
pine is  to  form  a  future  infinitive  passive,  in 

connection  with  ir7,  which  is  the  imperfect  infinitive  pas- 
sive of  *-,  "go,"  and  is  of  course  used  impersonally,  (see  § 
138).  The  "following  are  examples  of  it — 


1§6.]  LESSON  GIL  139 

Spero  causammeam  proba-  I  hope  that  my  cause  will  be 

turn  hi.  approved. 

Spero  consilia  mea  proba-  /  hope  that  my  plans  will  be 

turn  hi.  approved. 

On  this  construction  it  is  to  be  observed  that — 

(1.)  hi  properly  means  people  are  going ,  or  it  is  being 
gone  (by  people). 

(2.)  Probatum  is  the  accus.  supine,  in  its  ordinary  sense, 
expressing  the  purpose  of  the  verb  of  motion  irl. 

(3.)  The  words  causam  and  consilia,  which  seem  to  be 
the  subjects  of  probatum  iri,  are  really  the  objects  of  pro- 
batum. 

(4.)  Probatum  not  being  a  participle,  of  course  does  not 
change  its  form  to  agree  with  the  noun  after  which  it 
stands. 

(5.)  The  supine  with  Iri  can  be  treated  as  if  it  were  a 
regularly  formed  future  infinitive  passive ;  it  is  however 
only  used  when  .the  future  action  spoken  of  is  likely  to  occur 
soon. 

EXERCISE  189. 

1.  That  (isto-)  philosophy  is  easy  to  understand.  2.  Virtue  is  difficult 
to  attain  (invent-)  •  it  wants  a  guide  and  director.  3.  You  will  do  what 
appears  (fut.)  best  to  be  done.  4.  All  hoped  that  the  wicked  deserter 
would  be  slain.  5.  Ye  said  that  an  opportunity  of  fighting  would 
be  given  in  some  place.  6.  We  were  pointing-out  to  the  Gauls  that  they 
would  be  deprived  of-their  liberty  (dbl). 


EXERCISE  190... 

1.  Omnia  praeteribo,  quae  mihi  turpia  dictu  videbuntur.  2.  Consul 
multa  pfoelia  parfa,  haud  ulhim  dignum  memoratu,  fecit.  3.  Nihil 
dictu  visuque  foedum  in  haec  llmina  admittendum  est.  4.  Prodigiura 
visu  mirabile  accidit.  5.  Quo  brevior  narratio  est,  eo  facilior  intellectu, 

6.  Video  hunc  improbura  hominem  a  suo  ipsius  iniraico  occlsum  iri. 

7.  Caesar  longius  bellum  ductum  iri  existimans,  in  provinciam  legatum 
misit  rel  frumentariae  causa.     8.  Hoc  omne  assignatum  Iri  aut  perti- 
naciae  ineae  aut  timorl  videbam. 


140  -LESSON  CITL  [186. 


LESSON    CIII. 


The  following  exercises  will  contain  examples  of  the 
nse  of  all  the  verbals,  nouns  as  well  as  adjectives,  and 
it  is  hoped  that  the  teacher  will  take  this  opportunity  of 
seeing  that  his  pupils  thoroughly  comprehend  the  forma- 
tion and  use  of  each,  by  constant  reference  to  what  has 
before  been  said  in  treating  of  them  separately. 


EXERCISE  191. 

1.  Next  day,  Caesar  having-advanced  a  little  from  the  larger  camp, 
gave  (fac(i)-)  the  enemy  an  opportunity  of  fighting.  2.  "When  he  un- 
derstood that  they  were  not-even-then  (ne  turn  guidem)  coming-forth 
(prodi-)  he  led-baek  his  army  into  the  camp.  3.  At  sunset  Ario- 
vistus  led-back  his  forces,  many  wounds  having  been  given  (infer-) 
and  received.  4.  In  judging,  haste  is  to  be  avoided.  5.  The  women, 
weeping,  with-hands  outspread  (passo-)  encouraged  the  soldiers  setting- 
out  for  (in)  battle.  6.  Swallows  (when)  about-to-fly-away  into  6ther 
lands,  take-their  departure  (emigra-)  in-oneway. 


EXERCISE  192. 

1.  Hostes  terga  verterunt,  neque  prius  fugere  destiterunt,  quam  ad 
flumen  Rhenum  pervenerunt.  2.  Reliquos  omnes  nostri  equitatu  con- 
secuti  ititerfecerunt.  3.  Jucundus  est  auditu  cantus  lusciniae.  4.  Ante 
hiemem  hirundines  e  nostristerris  emigrant,  alibi  habitatum.  5.  Camelus 
non  tantuin  ad  portandum  sedetiam  ad  equitandum  idoneus  est.  6.  Nun- 
tifitum  erat,  castra  postero  die  expugnatum  iri.  7.  Hos  viros  conantes 
dicere  Ariovistus  prohibuit,  et  in  catenas  conjecit.  8.  Imperator  oppi- 
dum  expugnare  conatus,  dCfendentibus  civibus  Romanls  militibusque, 
quos  praesidil  causa  mlserat  Caesar,  triduum  moratus,  paucis  in  oppug- 
uatione  amissls,  re  infecta  inde  discessit. 


187,  188.]  LESSON  CIV.  141 


LESSON    CIV. 


It  is  intended  that  pupils  who  have  advanced  to  this 
point  shall  now  begin  to  read  some  continuous  Latin 
author:  either  the  easy  Roman  history  which  is  given 
immediately  before  the  vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the 
book;  or,  if  they  are  already  quite  familiar  with  the 
forms  and  their  uses  hitherto  treated  of,  the  Commen- 
taries of  Caesar.  But,  whichever  course  be  pursued,  it 
is  necessary  that  the  forms  of  the  subjunctive  mood  be 
first  learned. 

187.  The  subjunctive  mood,  as  its  name  im- 
plies, is  in  strictness  only  to  be  used  in  sentences  sub- 
joined to  primary  sentences:  i.  e.,  in  what  have  been 
called  secondary  sentences.     The  exceptions  to  this  and 
the  various  uses  of  the  subjunctive  mood  will  be  explained 
in  subsequent  lessons.     But  it  is  best  that  the  tenses  of 
it,  which  are  very  easy,  should  be  learned  at  once.     No 
English  meanings  are  assigned  to  them,  as  the  possible 
ones  are  so  various  that  it  is  thought  the  assumption  of 
one  or  two  for  each  tense  would  only  tend  to  render  the 
further  progress  of  the  pupil  more  difficult. 

188.  The   subjunctive   mood  in   Latin   has 
four  tenses,  viz. : 

The  imperfect,  present  and.  past. 
The  perfect,  present  and  past. 

The  following  are  the  general  rules  for  the  formation 
of  these  tenses,  which  are  given  at  length  below : 

I.  For  the  imperfect  tenses  active  and  passive  we 
have  as  tense-endings — 


142 


LESSON  CIY, 


[1§§. 


for  the  present, 

if  the  1st  stem  ends  in  «-,  a  changed  to  e. 
"          "  u     e-,  a-  added. 

u  u  u      ^      u          u 

*~j 

it  it  II          n.          it  tt 

U 


for  the  past, 
-re-  added. 


ere- 


any  consonant,  " 
To  these  tense-forms  the  regular  active  and  passive 
person-endings  are  attached. 

II.  For  the  perfect  tenses  active  we  have  as  tense- 
endings  added  to  the  2d  stem, 

for  the  present,  ;  '  for  the  past, 

eri-  isse- 

m.  The  perfect  tenses  passive  are  made  by  attach- 
ing the  perfect  participle  passive  to  the  present  and  past 
imperfect  subjunctive  tenses  of  the  verb  es-,  in  the  same 
way  as  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative  mood 
are  made.  These  tenses  of  es-  are  given  below. 

The  following  table  exhibits  at  length  the  subjunctive 
tenses  of  the  four  conjugations. 
I.  Imperfect. 


Pre*.  ac#.  S. 


P. 


Pres.  pas.  S. 


P. 


Past  act.  S. 


P. 


1.  ama-. 

1.  mone-. 

1.  audi-. 

1.  reg-. 

1  amem. 

moneara. 

audiam. 

regam. 

2  ames. 

moneas. 

audiaa 

regas. 

3  amet. 

moneat. 

audiat. 

regat. 

1  am  em  us. 

moneamus. 

audiamus. 

regamus. 

2  ametis. 

moneatis. 

audiatis. 

regatis. 

3  ament. 

moneant 

audiant. 

regant. 

1  amer. 

monear. 

audiar. 

regar. 

2  ameris  or 

monearis  or 

audiaris  or 

regaris  or 

amere. 

moneare. 

audiare. 

regare. 

3  ametur. 

moneatur. 

audiatur. 

regatur. 

1  amemur. 

moneamur. 

audiamur. 

regamur. 

2  amemiuL 

moneamiiiL 

audiaminL 

regamini. 

3  amentur. 

moneantur. 

audiantur. 

regantur. 

1  amarem. 

monerem. 

audlrem. 

regerem. 

2  amarCs. 

moneres. 

audires. 

regeres. 

3  amaret. 

moneret. 

audlret. 

regeret. 

1  amaremus. 

moneremus. 

audiremus. 

regeremus. 

2  atnaretis. 

mbneretis 

audlretis. 

regeretis. 

3  amarent. 

monerent. 

audlrent 

regerent 

!§§.] 


LESSON  CTV. 


143 


Past  pass.  S. 


P. 


1  amarer.        monerer.  audirer.  regerer. 

2  amareris  or  monereris  or  audireris  or  regerf  ris  or 
amarere.      mouerere.  audlrere.  regerGre. 

3  amaretur.     moneretur.  audlretur.  regeretur. 

1  amaremur.    moneremur.  audiremur.  regeremur. 

2  amareminl.  moneremini.  audirem'inl.  regeremim. 

3  amarentur.  monerentur.  audlrentur.  regerentur. 


II.  Perfect. 

NOTE. — As  the  perfect  tenses  of  all  Latin  verbs  are  made  alike,  it  will 
be  enough  to  give  one  example  of  each  tense. 


2d  stem,  amav-. 


Pres.  act.  S. 


P. 


1  amaverim. 

2  amaveris. 

3  amaverit. 

1  amaverimus. 

2  amaveritis. 

3  amaverint. 


Past.  act.  S. 


P. 


1  amavissem. 

2  amavisses. 

3  amavisset. 

1  amavissemus. 

2  amavissetis. 

3  amavissent. 


3d  stem,  amato-. 

amatus,  or 

!sim. 

(  amatus  or 

(  essem. 

Pres.  pass.  S. 

amata,  or 

sis. 

Past  pass.  S. 

<  amata,  or 

<  esses. 

amatum 

sit. 

(  amatum 

(  esset. 

amati,  or 

(  simus. 

I  amati,  or 

{essemus. 

p. 

amatae,  or 

•j  sitis. 

P. 

•<  amatae,  or 

essetis. 

amata 

(  sint. 

(  amata 

essent. 

NOTE. — 1st.  The  forms  of  the  present  perf.  active  subjunctive  are  very 
similar  to  those  of  the  future  perfect  indicative,  and  the  quantity  of  the 
i  in  the  2d  pers  sing,  and  the  2dand  3d  pers.  plur.  is  said  to  be  common, 
i.  e.,  long  or  short;  but  it  is  probable  that  properly  the  vowel  is  short 
in  the  fut.perf.  indie,  and  long  in  the  pres.  perf.  subjunc. 

2d.  "When  the  2d  stem  is  made  by  the  ending  -v-,  that  consonant  is 
often  omitted,  and  the  quantity  of  the  preceding  vowel  is  changed,  or 
contraction  takes  place,  as  in  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indicative. 
See  §  91. 


144 


LESSOX  err. 


[1§9. 


3d.  The  conjugation  of  the  imperfect  tenses  subjunctive  of  es-  is  given 
above,  in  showing  the  perfect  passive  tenses  of  other  verbs.  From  poles-, 
"be  able,"  a  contraction  takes  place  and  we  have — 


P. 


Pres.  imperf.  subj. 

1  possim  (for  pot-  sim). 

2  possis. 

3  possit. 

1  posslmus. 

2  possitis. 

3  possint 


Past  imperf.  subj. 
possem  (for  pot-  essem). 
posses. 
posset, 
possemus. 
possetis. 
possent 


4th.  From  verbs  like  cap(i)  the  past  imperf.  subj.  is  made  without  the 
t,  and  therefore  the  connecting  vowel  is  employed.  Thus,  we  have  for 
the  past  imperf.  subjunctive — 


Active. 
(  1  caperem. 
S.  -{  2  caperes. 
3  caperet. 

1  caperemus. 

2  caperetis. 

3  caperent 


P.- 


Passive. 

1  caperer. 

2  capereris. 

3  caperetur. 

1  caperemur. 

2  caperemini. 

3  caperentur. 


5th.  Tlie  perfect  tenses  of  es-  are  made  regularly  from  the  stem  fu-. 
From  potes-  we  have,  as  before,  the  2d  stem  potu~. 

These  tenses  should  now  be  thoroughly  learned ;  and  to  give  oppor- 
tunity for  this  no  exercise  is  here  inserted.  But  if  it  is  judged  best,  a 
reading  lesson  may  be  assigned  from  the  little  history  found  at  the  end 
of  the  book. 


189.]  LESSON  GV. 


LESSON    CY. 


189.  It  was  said  in  §  187,  that  the  subjunctive  mood 
properly  is  employed  only  in  secondary  sentences  ;  i.  e., 
in  sentences  attached  as  adjectives  or  adverbs  to 

primary  sentences.     But  a  more  complete  statement  of 
the  facts  is  now  desirable. 

Ah1  language  consists  in  general  either  of 

(1.)  Assertions,  as:  The  sun  shines^ 

or  (2.)  Questions,  "     Does  the  sun  shine  ? 

"  (3.)  Commands,         "     Stand  still,  O  sun. 
"  (4.)  Adverbial  or  adjective  sentences  attached 
to  any  one  of  these. 

NOTE.— *It  is  clear  that  the  last  class  must  always  be  used  in  connec- 
tion with  other  sentences ;  and  they  are  therefore  called  in  this  book 
secondary  sentences. 

Sentences  which  contain  assertions,  questions  or  commands  may  stand 
either 

(1)  alone  and  independently, 
or  (2)  dependently  as  object  or  subject  of  another  verb. 

In  the  first  case  they  are  called  principal  sentences ;  in  the 
second  they  are  called  nominal  sentences,  as  occupying  the  place 
of  nouns  to  the  principal  verb. 

The  table  given  on  p.  146  presents  these  remarks  in 
one  view;  and  that  on  p.  147  is  a  repetition  of  the  same 
in  its  essential  features,  but  with  the  addition  of  a  gen- 
eral statement  of  the  cases  in  which  the  different  moods 
of  the  Latin  verb  should  be  employed. 
13 


146 


LESSON  CY. 


[189. 


SYNOPSIS   OF   THE   PABTS   OF   SIMPLE   AND   COMPLEX   PBOPOSITIONS. 


either  Primary, 
*.  e.  such  as  can 
stand  indepen- 
dently. These 


either  Principal, 


ather  assertions 


These  can  be 


Or  commands. 


or  Nominal,  i.  e.  C  either  assertions 
now  used    as  the 

object  or  subject  of  •<  or  questions, 
a  verb.     These  can 
be  ^or  commands. 


or  Secondary, 

t.  e.  such  as  can- 
not stand    inde-^ 
pendeutly.  These 
are 


either  Adjectival.^ 

t.   e.   introduced    by 
the  relative  pronoun. 


or  Adverbial,  t.  e. 

introduced  by  some 
subj  unction. 


either  to  Prin- 
cipal sen- 
tences, 


or  to  Nominal 
sentences, 


or  to  other 
Secondary 
sentences. 


189.] 


LESSON  CY. 


147 


SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  EULES  FOB  THE  USE  OF  THE   MOODS  OF  THE   LATIN 
VEEB. 


Primary.   •< 


Principal. 


Nominal. 


(1.)  Assertions.  Indicative. 

(2.)  Questions.  Indicative. 

(3.)  Commands.  Imperative. 

(1.)  Assertions.  Infinitive. 


Subjunctive.  For 

limitations  see  Less. 
CXXXIY.,  §  239. 


(2.)  Questions. 

(3.)  Commands.      Subjunctive 


(1.)  Principal  sentences.  Indicative 
or  Subjunctive,  according  to  the 
relation  existing  between  the  Primary 
and  Secondary. 


Secondary,  attached!  (2.)  Nominal  sentences.   Subjunctive. 


to, 


For  limitations  see  Lesson  CXXXVL, 
§240. 


(3.)  Secondary  sentences.     The    same 

mood  as  occurs  in  the  first  secondary 
sentences.    But  see  Less.  CXXXVL 


148  LESSOX  CVL  [19O. 

It  is  not,  of  course,  expected  that  the  whole  meaning  of  the  above 
tables  will  be  fully  appreciated  at  once.  But  they  may  be  made  somewhat 
familiar  to  the  pupils'  minds  even  now:  and  they  should  be  constantly 
referred  to  during  the  course  of  the  ensuing  lessons,  in  which  the  whole 
subject  will  be  further  elucidated.  Xo  exercises  are  given  in  this  les- 
son, for  the  same  reason  as  that  for  which  they  have  heretofore  been 
occasionally  omitted.  But  one  remark  more  is  made  here. 

The  indicative  mood  is  used  for  the  statement  of 
facts. 

The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  for  the  statement  of 
thought*  or  conception*. 

The  following  sentence  will  serve  for  an  illustration  of 
this: 

Aliis  nocent,  ut  in  alios  liberales  suit. 

They  injure  some,  that  they  may  be  generous  to  others. 

Here  the  injury  is  spoken  of  as  a  lact.  Their  being 
generous  is  not  spoken  of  as  a  fact,  but  as  the  thought 
or  conception  which  is  in  their  minds  when  they  do 
their  acts  of  injustice. 


LESSON    CYI. 

We  shall  speak  first  of  the  subjunctive  mood  as  used  in 
secondary  sentences. 

19O.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  in  all  sec- 
ondary sentences  which  express  the  object  or  purpose  of 
an  action.  These  are  called  final  sentences.  (See  §  1  1  9.) 

Such  final  sentences  are  introduced, 


(1.)  By  the 
(2.)  "  " 
(3.)  "  " 


the  subjunction  ut,  "in  order  that." 

"          7^,"inorderthat—  not,"  "lest." 
quo,.  "  in    order   that,"   when 
there  is  a  comparative  in  the  final  sentence. 
(4.)  By  the  relative  pronoun  quo-. 


191.]  LESSON  CYI.  149 

NOTE. — The  temporal  particles,  dum,  donee,  "  until,"  are  in  the  same 
way  followed  by  the  subjunctive  mood,  when  they  imply  that  the  ac- 
complishment of  a  purpose  is  the  limit  of  the  time. 

EXAMPLES. 

(1.)  Edimus  ut  vivamus.          We  eat  that  we  may  live  (or 

to  live). 

(2.)  In  silvam  aufugit  ne  He  fled  into  the  wood  that  he 
caperetur.  might  not  be  caught  (or 

lest  he  should  be  caught]. 

(3.)  Obducuntur  cortice  Trunks  of  trees  are  sheathed 
trunci,  quo  sint  a  frigo-  with  bark  that  they  may  be 
ribus  tutiores.  safer  from  the  cold. 

(4.)  Caesar  equites  prae-  Caesar  sent  horsemen  before 
misit  qui  viam  explora-  him,  who  were  to  examine 
rent.  the  road  (or  to  examine 

the  road). 

NOTE. — In  examples  1st  and  4th  it  will  be  observed  that  in  English 
we  can  express  purpose  by  the  simple  infinitive  mood.  But  it  must 
be  particularly  remembered  that  this  is  not  the  case  in  Latin  (except 
sometimes  in  poetry),  but  all  such  final  sentences  must  have  the  subjunc- 
tive mood.  ^ 

191.  It  remains  to  state  briefly  the  rules  for  the 
sequence  of  tenses,  which  tell  us  how  we  are  to 

determine  which  of  the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood  is 
to  be  employed  in  each  case. 

As  there  are  only  four  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  mood, 
two  imperfect  and  two  perfect,  the  proper  tense  to  use 
can  be  discovered  by  answering  two  questions : 

I.  Must  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive  be  Imperfect 
or  perfect  ? 

II.  Must  the  verb  in  the  subjunctive  be  present  or 
past? 

In  order  to  answer  these  questions  the  following  rules 
must  be  strictly  heeded : 

13* 


150  LESSON  CYL  [192;  197. 

192.  I.  (i.)  We  must  use  an  imperfect  tense 
of  the  subjunctive  mood  if  the  action  spoken  of 

in  the  secondary  sentence  be  regarded  as  unfinished 
at  the  time  denoted  by  the  verb  in  the  primary  sentence. 

193.  (2.)  We  must  use  a  perfect  tense  of  the 
subjunctive  mood,  if  the  action  spoken  of  in  the 
secondary  sentence  be  regarded  as  finished  at  the. 
time  denoted  by  the  verb  in  the  primary  sentence. 

194.  n.  (i.)  We  must  use  a  present  tense  of 
the  subjunctive  mood,  when  the  verb  in  the  pri- 
mary sentence  is  in  either  a  present  or  a  future 
tense.  • 

19o.  (2.)  We  must  use  a  past  tense  of  the 
subjunctive  mood,  when  the  verb  in  the  primary 
sentence  is  in  a  past  or  the  aorist  tense. 

196.  (3.)  We  may  use  either  a  present  or  a 
past  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  when 
the  verb  in  the  primary  sentence  is  in  the  historical 
present. 

197.  XOTE. — Sometimes  the  present  perfect  subjunctive  is  used  as  an 
£LOri§t  after  a  past  tense  in  the  primary  sentence. 

The  pupils  can  of  course  only  become  familiar  with 
these  rules  by  practice.  But  it  is  recommended  that  the 
teacher  should  go  over  each  of  the  sentences  in  the  ensu- 
ing exercise  with  them,  and  point  out  how  they  should 
apply  the  rules  in  each  case,  in  order  to  determine  the 
proper  mood  and  tense  to  be  employed.  Occasionally 
in  the  exercises  the  verbs  which  are  to  be  in  the  sub- 
junctive mood  will  be  printed  in  italics. 

EXERCISE  193. 

1.  I  shall  send  you  to-Rome,  in-order-that  you  may  secure  peace  and 
friendship  with  the  Roman  people.  2.  Caesar  moved-back  the  horses 
of-all  that  lie  might  take-away  the  hope  of  flight.  3.  Caesar  set-out  with 
all  diligence  lest  such-great  nations  should  be  united.  4.  You  have  sta- 
tioned (dispon-)  garrisons  (in  various  places)  in-order-that  (quo)  you  may 
the-more-easily  keep  off  the  enemy.  5.  "Words  were  invented  to  indicate 
(with  rel.)  the  will.  6.  The  general  will  place  guards  over-you  (dot.) 
in-order-that  he  may  be  able  to  discover  your  plots. 


19§.j  LESSOR  CVIII.  151 

LESSON    CVII. 

EXERCISE  194. 

1.  Caesar  resolved  that  he-ought-to-proceed  against  (in  ace.)  them 
on-tlris-account  (eo)  the  more-severely,  in-order-that  for  (in  ace.)  the 
time  to-come  (reliquo-)the  right  of  ambassadors  might  be  more  carefully 
kept  by  barbarians.  2.  That  foolish  man  makes-up  (fing-)  a  (new)  face 
and  a  (new)  gait  for-himself,  in-order-that  he  may  appear  more-dignified. 
3.  Caesar  sent-forward  (p.  h.)  all  the  cavalry,  to  the  number  of  four 
thousand,  to  (rel.)  see  the  march  of  the  enemy.  4.  The  townsmen  sent 
ambassadors  to  Rome,  who  were-to-ask  aid  from  the  senate.  5.  Themis- 
tocles  persuaded  the  people  that  a  fleet  of  a  hundred  ships  should  be 
built.  6.  Pompey,  alarmed  by  the  words  of  Caesar,  in  order  that  he 
might  the  more  easily  retard  the  attack  of  the  soldiers  blocked  up 
(p.  h.)  the  gates,  lest  immediately-on  (sub  ipsa)  (his)  departure  the  army 
sftould  burst-into  the  town. 


LESSON    CVIII. 

108.  We  have  seen  that  the  subjunctive  mood,  being 
the  mood  of  conceptions,  is  used  in  all  sentences 
which  contain  the  statement  of  a  purpose  (final-scn- 

tences).  But  further :  if  the  action  which  is  performed 
for  a  certain  purpose,  is  continued  successfully  until  the 
purpose  is  attained,  the  purpose  has  become  a  conse- 
quence. 

Take  the  following  examples  : 

(1.)  Curro  ut  sudem.  I  run  that  I  may  sweat. 

(2.)  Ita  cucurrl  ut  suda-    Iran  so  that  I  sweated. 
rem. 

From  a  comparison  of  these  two  sentences  it  will  be 
seen  that  in  both  the  secondary  sentence  stands  in  the  same 
kind  of  relation  to  the  primary  sentence :  i.  e.  the  mind 
conceives  a  connection  as  existing  between  them  and 
the  primary  sentences :  and  so,  though  in  the  second 
example  the  secondary  sentence  contains  the  statement  of 


152  LESSON  CTOL  [199,  20O, 

a  fact  and  not  of  a  mere  thought,  in  Latin  the  subjunc- 
tive mood  is  still  employed,  just  as  if  the  sentence  con- 
tained the  statement  of  a  mere  purpose.  It  is  hoped 
that  this  explanation  will  be  made  intelligible  to  the 
pupils  by  the  teacher ;  at  any  rate  they  can  find  no  diffi- 
culty in  learning  the  following  rule : 

199.  All  secondary  sentences  ichich  contain  the  state- 
ment of  a  consequence  (called  COllSCClltiVC  Senten- 
ces) have  their  verbs  in  the  subjunctive  lUOOd. 

In  such  secondary  sentences  the  consequence  is 

!1.)  Positive  :  introduced  by  ut,  "so  that." 
2.)  Negative  :  "    ut  non^  "  so  that-not." 

EXAMPLES. 

(1.)    Sol   efficit,   ut   oirmia  The  sun  makes  all  things 

floreant.  flourish. 

(2.)     Turn    forte    aegrota-  I  happened  to  be  itt,  so  that 

bam,  ut  ad  tuas  nuptias  I  could  not  come  to  your 

venire  non  possem.  wedding.* 

200.  XOTE. — Sometimes,  when  the  negative  consequence  has  been 
aimed  at,  and  has  been  consciously  intended,  it  is  introduced 
by  ne,  which  is  properly  used  only  to  introduce  a  negative  purpose,  as. 
ne  moriar  efficere  non  potestis,  You  cannot  bring  it  about  that  I  shall  not 
die. 

EXEECISE  195. 

1.  The  city  has  been  so  excellently  fortified  that  ye  cannot  take  it. 
2.  This  nation  has  in  all  time  so  deserved  of  (de)  the  Roman  people, 
that  it  ought  not  to  be  led-away  into  slavery.  3.  This  town  was  so- 
well  (sic)  fortified  by  the  nature  of  the  place,  that  it  afforded  (da-)  great 
means  (sing.)  for  (ad)  prolonging  the  war.  4.  No  one  is  so  mad  as-to 
(ut)  grieve  by  his  own  will.  5.  This  is  a  common  vice  in  great  and  free 
states,  that  envy  is  the  attendant  of  glory.  6.  You-are-distant  so-far 
from  the  completion  of  the  greatest  works,  that  you  have  not-yet  laid 
(jac(i)-)  the  foundations. 


201.]  LESSON  CX.  153 

LESSON    CIX. 

EXERCISE   196. 

1 .  Caesar  demanded  these  things  of  (a)  me :  first,  that  I  should  not 
lead  a  multitude  of  men  across  the  Rhine  into  Gaul;  secondly  that  I 
should  give-back  the  hostages  to-the-Aedui.  2.  So  great  fear  suddenly 
seized  all  the  army,  that  (it)  alarmed  in-no-slight-degree  (nan  mediocriter) 
the  minds  of  all.  3.  Some  (men),  induced  by  shame,  remained,  in-order- 
tliat  they  might  avoid  the  suspicion  of  fear.  4.  So  great  was  the  quick- 
ness of  these  foot-soldiers  by-practice,  that,  raising  themselves  (sublevati) 
by  the  manes  of  the  horses,  they  equalled  (their)  speed  (cursu-).  5. 
Ariovistus  sent  about  sixteen  thousand  men  (genii.}  uriiucumbered,  with 
all  the  cavalry:  which  forces  were-lo-frighten  our-men,  and  hinder  (them) 
from  fortifying  (munition-).  6.  The  enemy  charged-forward  so  suddenly 
and  quickly,  that  room  for-hurliug  (genii.)  the  javelins  against  the  enemy 
was  not  given. 

LESSON    CX. 

20 1.  We  saw  in  §  186  that  the  want  of  a  regularly 
formed  future  infin.  passive  was  commonly  supplied  by 
the  infin.  irl  with  the  accusative  supine.  But  we  find 
very  often  the  future  infin.  both  active  and  passive 
expressed  by  the  combination  of  fore  (or,  less  com- 
monly, faturum  esse),  the  future  infin.  of  es-,  with  an 
infperfect  tense  of  the  subjunctive  mood 
depending  upon  ut  (consecutive) :  as, 

Persuasum  est  Stoicis  fore  Tlie  Stoics  have  believed  that 

aliquando  ut  omnis  hie  one  day  all  this  world 

mundus  ardore  deflagret.  will  be  burnt  with  fire. 

Existimo  ex  hac  re  futurum  I  think  that  in  consequence 

esse,  ut  totms  Galliae  of  this  thing  the  affections 

animi  a  me  avertantur.  of  the  whole  of  Gaul  will 

be  averted  from  me. 

In  the  first  of  these  examples  the  nominal  sentence 
might  have  been  omnem  hunc  mundum  ardore  deflagra- 
turum  esse.  In  the  second  it  might  have  been  animos 
totius  Galliae  a  me  aversum  iri.  But  see  §186  (5.) 


154  LESSON  CXL  [2O2,  2O3. 

2O2.  NOTE. —  Wfon  the  verb  has  no  3d  stem,  and  consequently  no 
future  partic.  active  and  no  supine,  this  circumlocution  must  neces- 
sarily be  employed. 

It  will  be  well  for  the  teacher  to  make  his  pupils  trans- 
late the  future  infin.  in  both  ways  where  it  is  practicable. 


EXERCISE  197. 

1.  I  assert  that  in-a-short-time  (brevi)  he  will  be  torn-in-pieces  by 
dogs.  2.  It  had  formerly  been  foretold  to  Xero  by  astrologers,  that  at- 
some-time  (quandoque)  he  would  be  abandoned.  3.  Some  of  (tx)  the 
prisoners  made-their-way  (perveni-)  to  the  Gauls,  and  assured  (demonatra-) 
them  (dat.)  that  the  remaining  legions  would  not  dare  to  stand-their- 
ground  against  (them).  4.  The  chiefs  of  the  states  thought  that  in-a- 
few  years  they  would  all  be  driven  out  of  Gaul,  and  all  the  Germans 
would  cross  the  Rhine.  5.  I  hope  that  that  distinguished  fortune  may 
happen  (conting-)  to-us.  6,  I  hope  that  you  will  soon  (brevi)  cure  all 
these  troubles. 


LESSON    CXI. 

2O3.  After  verbs  and  phrases  which  denote  hin- 
drance, prevention,  resistance,  &c.,  the  act 
which  is  prevented  is  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  introduced 
by  the  words  quominus  or  ne:  the  former  implying 
merely  the  fact  of  the  prevention,  the  latter,  (for  the  most 
part)  this  besides,  that  the  prevention  was  aimed  at  and 
designed.  But  quominus  may  be  always  used. 

EXAMPLES. 

Rebus  terrenis  multa  exter-  Many  outward  circumstan- 
na  possunt  obsistere,  quo-  ces  can  prevent  earth- 
minus  perficiantur.  ly  things  from  being 

brought  to  perfection. 

Impedior  dolore  animi  ne  I  am  prevented  by  indig- 
de  hujus  miseria  plura  di-  nation  from  saying  more 
cam.  about  this  persons  wretch- 

edness. 


2O4.]  LESSON  CXII.  155 

EXERCISE  198. 

1.  Age  does  not  hinder  us  from  continuing  our  studies  even  (usque) 
to  the  last  period  of  life.  2.  It  was-owing  (sta-)  to  (per)  Trebonius 
that  the  soldiers  did  not  gain-possession-of  the  town.  3.  They  pointed- 
out  that  in-former  battles  it-had-been-owing  (sta-)  to  (per)  the  leaders, 
not  to  the  soldiers,  that-they-did-not  (ne)  conquer.  4.  I  am  prevented 
(interdud-)  by  grief  from  writing  more  (pi.)  to  you.  5.  He  was  hin- 
dered by-weakness  of  voice  from  speaking  in  public.  6.  Death  does 
not  deter  a  wise  man  from  consulting-for-the-interest-of  (consiU-)  the 
state  (dat). 


LESSON    CXII. 

2O  i.  We  have  seen  that  verbs  denoting  hindrance, 
<&c. ,  are  followed  by  quominus.  But  if  the  verb  or  phrase 
which  implies  hindrance,  prevention,  doubt,  be  accompa- 
nied either 

(1.)  By  a  negative  indicating  the  want  of  effectual  hin- 
drance, &c. ;  or  (2.)  By  an  adverb  indicating  the  difficulty 
of  effectual  hindrance,  <&c.  ;  the  following  subjunctive  mood 
is  ordinarily  introduced  by  quin. 

EXAMPLES. 

Facere  non    possum,   quin  I  cannot  help  sending  you  a 

quotidie  literas  ad  te  muV  letter  every  day. 

tarn. 

Milites  aegre  retenti  sunt,  The  soldiers  were  hardly  re- 

quin  in  oppidum  irrumpe-  strained  from  bursting  into 

rent.  the  town. 

!N"6n  dubitari   potest,  quin  There   can  be  no  doubt  that 

fuerint    ante     Homerum  there  were  poets  before  Ho- 

poetae.  mer. 

EXERCISE  199. 

1.  The  barbarians  will  not  restrain  themselves  from  hastening  into 
Italy.  2.  The  soldiers  hardly  restrained  their  passion  (animo-,  pi.) 


156  LESSON"  CXIY.  [2O5,  206. 

from  instantly  making  the  attack.  3.  I  do  not  doubt  that  I  cannot 
avoid  the  offence  of  negligence.  4.  It  is  not  doubtful  that  he  who  is 
called  generous  and  kind  follows  duty,  not  profit.  5.  There  is  nothing 
so  difficult  but-that  it  can  be  investigated  by  inquiry  (ycrund).  6.  Xo- 
thing  is-wanting  (abes-)  for-my-being  (quln  sim)  the  most  wretched 
(of  men). 


LESSON    CXIII. 

2O5.  It  is  to  be  observed  that  a  question  often 
amounts  in  fact  to  a  negative ;  and  therefore  quln  can  be 
used  after  such  sentences  as  if  a  negative  particle  were 
found  In  them :  as, 

Quis  dubitare  potest  quln  in     No  one  can  doubt  that  riches 
virtute  divitiae  suit  ?  are  found  in  virtue. 


EXERCISE  200. 

1.  "Who  doubts  that  advantage  can  never  contend  with  honor?  2. 
"Who  is  there,  but  (qum)  sees- distinctly  that  there  is  great  power  in  the 
senses?  3.  I  will  not  object  that  (quominus)  all  men  should  read  my 
writings.  4.  I  was  not  able  to  manage  (fac(i)-)  not  to  declare  to-you 
my  opinion  and  choice.  5.  He  thought  (he)  ought-not  to-delay  to  (quln) 
fight-it-out  in-a-battle.  6.  "We  cannot  object  that  (quln)  other-people 
should  disagree  with  (a)  us. 


LESSON    CXIY. 

It  was  seen  in  §  190  that  the  purpose  of  an  action  was 
sometimes  expressed  by  an  adjectival  sentence  introduced 
by  quo-  with  its  verb  in  the  subjunctive.  But  adjectival 
sentences  in  many  other  cases  besides  have  their  verbs  in 
the  subjunctive  mood.  Some  of  these  will  be  mentioned. 

2O6.  When  the  adjectival  sentence  is 
consecutive  :  «'.  f.,  expresses  a  quality  naturally  fol- 
lowing upon  and  flowing  out  of  the  constitution  and 
character  of  the  noun  which  it  qualifies,  the  verb  is  in 
the  subjunctive  mood. 


206.]  LESSON  CXY.  157 


EXAMPLES. 

Sapientia  est  una,  quae  mae-  Wisdom   is    the  only   thing 
stitiam  pellat  ex  animis.  which  can  drive  away  sor- 

row from  the  soul. 

Innocentia   est   affectio  tails  Innocence  is  such  a  condition 
animi,  quae  noceat  nemini.      of  the    mind    as    (which) 

hurts  no  one. 

NOTE. — Very  often  in  such  cases  the  antecedent  to  the  relative  pro- 
noun is  accompanied  by  the  adjectives  tali-,  "such,"  tanto-,  "so  great," 
&c.,  or  the  pronouns  illo-  or  eo-,  and  similar  expressions. 


EXERCISE  201. 

1.  "Who  can  be  so  averse  to  (a)  the  truth,  as-to  (quo-}  deny  that  all 
these-things  are  managed  by  the  power  of  the  immortal  gods?  2.  The 
officer  was  a  man  of-vigor  (am-)  and  (one)  who  reposed  no-confidence 
(nihil)  in  the  faith  of  the  Sicilians.  3.  We  want  such  a  consul,  as  (quo-) 
separates  himself  from  the  society  of  impious  citizens.  4.  There  is  no 
state  so  firm,  as-that-it  (qua-)  cannot  be  overthrown  by  hatred  (pi.).  5. 
Nothing  is  so  rough,  so  uncouth,  as  (quo-)  not  to  be  set  off  by  oratory. 
6.  A  good  man  will  not  dare  to  do  or  think  any  thing  (quidquam) 
which  he  dares  not  mention-aloud. 


LESSON    CXY. 

EXERCISE  202. 

1.  Who  is  so  senseless  as-that  (quo-)  those-things  (you  speak  of) 
should  move  (him?)  2.  No  woman  ever,  (her)  children  being  lost,  has 
been  (found)  of  so  weak  a  mind  (abl.)  as-that-she  has  not  made  an  end 
of  mourning  at-some-time  (aliquando).  3:  There  is  nothing  so  great 
and  difficult  which  this  man  cannot  accomplish.  4.  There  is  no  grief 
which  length  of  time  does  not  diminish  and  soften.  5.  The-man  (eo-) 
who  does  not  fear  death,  because  death  has  nothing  (in  it)  which  is 
to-be-shuddered-at,  procures  for  himself  a  great  security  for  (ad)  a  happy 
life.  6.  Those-persons  (eo-)  bear  with-vexation  (inlquo  animo)  that  they 
should-be-opposed-in-argument  (redargu-)who  are  as-it-were  (quasi)  de- 
voted and  consecrated  to  fixed  and  predetermined  (destindto-)  opinions. 
14 


158  LESSON  CXYII.  2O7,  208. 


LESSON    CXVI. 

SOT.  When  an  adjectival  sentence  is  used  to  describe 
the  qualities  of  a  class,  which  is  only  indefinitely  alluded 
to  in  the  primary  sentence,  it  will  have  its  verb  in  the 
subjunctive  mood.  This  may  be  called  a  descriptive 
sentence.  The  primary  sentence  then  often  consists 
of  a  single  verb,  such  as  sunt,  est,  inveniuntur,  &c. 

EXAMPLE. 

Sunt,  qui  discessum  animi  There  are  some  who  think 
a  corpore  putent  esse  mor-  that  death  is  the  depart- 
tem.  ure  of  the  soul  from  the 

body. 


EXERCISE  203. 

1.  Some  philosophers  have  been  found,  who  said  (past  imp.)  that 
pain  was  the  greatest  (summo-)  evil  2.  There  were  (some)  who  be- 
lieved that  Crassus  was  not  ignorant  of  the  conspiracy.  3.  In  all  ages, 
fewer  men  have  been  found  who  (conquered)  their  passions,  than  who 
conquered  (past  imp.)  the  forces  of  the  enemy.  4.  There  have  been 
some,  who  praised  nothing,  except  what  they  were-confident  that  they 
could  imitate.  5.  There  are  some  in  this  body  (ordon-)  who  either  do 
not  see  those-things  which  are-impending,  or  dissemble  those-things 
which  they  do-see.  6.  There  are  philosophers  who  think  that  the 
whole  world  (mundo-)  is  managed  by  the  inind  and  reason  of  the  gods. 


LESSON    CXVII. 

Often  an  adjectival  sentence  is  introduced  to 
state  the  cause  or  ground  of  the  assertion  in  the  primary 
sentence,  or  to  express  the  limitations  with  which  the  latter 
must  be  taken.  In  such  cases  the  relative  pronoun  quo-  is 
frequently  strengthened  by  the  use  of  the  adverbs  utpote^ 
ut,  praesertim,  quippe,  and  is  followed  by  the  subjunctive 
mood.  Such  adjectival  sentences  may  be  called  causal 


209.]  LESSON  CXYHL  159 

sentences  (adjectival);  and  are  only  slightly  different 
in  force  from  the  adverbial  causal  sentences  mentioned  in 
§  118« 

EXAMPLES. 

Magna  culpa  Pelopis,  qui  Great  was  the  fault  of  Pelops 
fllium  non  docuerit.  in  not  teaching  his  son. 

Lit :  since  he  did  not  teach. 

Peccasse  mihi  videor  qui  a  /  think  I  did  wrong  in  leav- 
te  discesserim.  ing  you.  Lit :  since  I  left 

you. 

Solis  candor  illustrior  est,  The  light  of  the  sun  is  bright- 
quam  ullius  ignis,  quippe  er  than  (that)  of  any  fire, 
qui  in  immenso  mundo  since  in  the  boundless  uni- 
tam  longe  lateque  collu-  verse  it  shines  so  far  and 
ceat.  widely. 

EXERCISE  204. 

1.  That  man  was  a  (person)  of  marvellous  wakefulness  (all)  since-he 
(quo-)  in-his- whole  consulship  did  not  see  (aor.  subj.)  sleep.  2.  Thence  the 
consul  kept-advancing  with  compact  line,  as-he  (ut  qui)  saw-clearly  that- 
they-had-come-up  (perf.  infin.  pass,  impers.)  now  near  (ad)  the  enemy. 
3.  Crassus  is  wretched,  since-he  has  lost  (dlmitt-)  by  death  that  (great) 
fortune  (pi):  Pompey  is  wretched,  since-he  has  been  stripped-of  so- 
great-glory  (abl).  All  in-a- word  (denique)  are  wretched  who  are- without 
(care-)  this  light  (abl).  4.  0  fortunate  youth,  since-you  (quo-)  have 
found  Homer  (as)  herald  of  your  virtue.  5.  I  consider  myself  happy 
in  having  found  such  a  friend.  6.  To  roe  indeed  the  power  of  the  tri- 
bunes of  the  common-people  appears  ruinous,  since-it  (quippe  quae)  was- 
produced  (nala  sit)  in  sedition,  and  for  (ad)  sedition. 


LESSON   CXYIIL 

2O9.  In  the  last  lesson  we  saw  that  sometimes  adjec- 
tival sentences  are  used  to  state  the  cause  or  ground  of  an 
assertion.  But  that  notion  is  more  commonly  expressed 
by  an  adverbial  sentence  introduced  by  the  subj  unction 
quum,  which  has  its  verb  in  the  subjunctive.  Sentences  of 
this  class  also  may  be  called  causal  sentences  (ad- 
verbial). (See  §  118.). 


160  LESSON  CXIX.  [21O. 

NOTE. — Other  particles  introducing  causal   sentences    are 

quod,  qufa,  quoniam,  quando.  The  verbs  which  follow  these  particles 
are  usually  in  the  indicative  unless  the  cause  is  given  in  accordance  with 
the  views  of  the  person  spoken  about,  and  not  with  those  of  the  speaker. 


EXERCISE  205. 

1.  Since  life  without  friends  is  full  of  snares  and  fear,  reason  herself 
•warns  (us)  to  procure  friendships.  2.  The  king,  since  he  did  not  dare 
to  take-his-stand  (consist-)  on  the  common  platforms,  was  accustomed 
to  harangue  from  a  high  tower.  3.  Since  you  have  set-out  to- Athens 
as  to  a  mart  of  good  arts,  it  is  very  disgraceful  that  (you)  should  return 
empty.  4.  You  were  often,  no-doubt  (credo)  when  (since)  you  were 
at-Athens,  in  the  schools  of  the  philosophers.  5*  Since  these-things 
are  so,  that  wish  and  opinion  of-yours  I  praise  and  most  earnestly  ap- 
prove. 6.  Since  God  has  given  you  a  soul,  than  which  nothing  is  more 
excellent  nor  more  divine,  will  you  so  (sic)  throw-away  and  prostrate 
yourself,  that  there-may-be-no-difference  (nihil  intersit)  between  you  and 
a  beast? 


LESSON    CXIX. 

21O.  The  events  which  succeed  one  another  in  the 
course  of  any  action,  are  bound  together  by  a  chain  of 
cause  and  effect,  which  connection  is  more  or  less  capable 
of  being  recognized  by  us.  Accordingly,  when  a  series 
of  events  is  being  narrated  historically  in  Latin,  the  sentences 
which  mark  the  time  of  the  principal  action  are  intro- 
duced by  the  subj unction  quum,  and  contain  a  past  tense 
of  the  subjunctive  mood ;  e.  g. — 

Quum  Caesar!  id  nuntiatum  After  this  thing  had  been  told 
esset,  maturat  ex  urbe  to  Caesar,  he  hastened  to 
proficisci.  set  out  from  the  city. 

In  this  case  we  can  perceive  that  it  is  not  only  implied, 
that  the  report  of  the  event  preceded  Caesar's  departure 
in  time,  but  that  it  is  also  represented  as  the  cause  of  his 
departure.  And  as  the  mind  apprehended  this  connection, 
the  subjunctive  mood  (the  mood  of  conceptions)  is 
proper.  But  even  when  the  connection  of  the  antecedent 


211,  212.]  LESSON  CXIX.  161 

event  with  the  principal  one  is  not  so  apparent,  the  Ro- 
mans often  employed  the  subjunctive  mood,  after  the  sub- 
junction  quum,  as  if  to  imply  that,  whether  they  could 
see  the  connection  or  not,  they  believed  that  such  a  con- 
nection was  there  really.  We  have  therefore  this  general 
rule  for  Temporal  sentences. 

311.  The  *lll>  junction  quum,  in  historical 
narration,  is  followed  by  a  past  tense  of  the  sub- 
jlllictive  mood,  when  the  verb  in  the  principal  sentence 
is  in  the  aorist,  the  historical  present,  or  the 
past  iniperiect  (if  the  action  be  continued).  In  these 
cases  quum  before  the  past  imperfect  can  generally  be 
rendered  "  while,"  and  before  the  past  perfect  can  be 
rendered  "  after." 

313.  It  must  be  particularly  remembered  that  quum, 
as  a  temporal  subjunction,  cannot  be  followed  by  the  sub- 
junctive mood,  except  in  the  past  teilSCS.  If  other 
tenses  are  required  the  indicative  mood  must  be  used. 
If  the  temporal  sentence  be  used  merely  to  give  the 
date  as  it  were,  or  the  exact  time  of  the  principal  action, 
the  indicative  mood  in  any  tense  must  be  employed. 

EXAMPLE. 

Quum  acerrime  pugnaretur,  While  the  battle  was  proceed- 
subito  sunt  Aedui  visi  ab  ing  with  the  greatest  spirit, 
latere  nostris  aperto.  the  Aedui  suddenly  ap- 

peared on  the  exposed  flank 
of  our  men. 


EXERCISE  206. 

1.  When  the  line  of  the  enemy  on  (a)  the  left  wing  had  been  turned 
to  (in)  flight,  on  the  right  wing  they  pressed  (past  imp.)  our  line  by  the 
multitude  of  their  (men.)  2,  When  P.  Crassus,  a  young-man,  who  was- 
over  the  cavalry,  had  observed  that,  he  sent  the  third  line  as-aid  (dat.) 
to-our-rnen  in-their-difficulty  (labdrani(i)-).  3.  After  he  had  dispatched 
(dlmitt-)  either  legions  or  auxiliaries  into  all  parts  of  the  territories  of 
Ambiorix,  and  had  laid-waste  all-things  with  slaughter  (pi.)  and  fire 
(pl.\  he  sent  (p.  h.)  Labienus  with  two  legions  against  the  Treviri.  4. 
While  for-some-time  the  battle-went-on  (dimica-,  pass,  impers.)  with- 
14* 


162  LESSON  CXX.  [213,  214. 

the-greatest  earnestness,  the  chief  drew-up  (p.  h.)  a  line,  -which  was-to- 
be  a  protection  (dat.)  to  his  own  cavalry.  5.  When  Caesar  had  come 
into  the  country,  he  ordered  (p.  h.)  the  states  (dat.)  (to  provide)  soldiers, 
and  bade  (p.  h.)  (them)  to  come-together  into  a  fixed  place.  6.  While 
they,  a  circle  having  been  made,  were  defending  themselves,  quickly 
about  six  thousand  men  (gen.)  came-together  to  the  shouting. 


LESSON    CXX. 

213.  In  the  last  sentence  of  the  preceding  exercise, 
it  would  have  been  better  English  to  say,  "when  they, 
having  made  a  circle,"  &c.     But  we  saw  in  treating  of  the 
participles,  §  128,  that  there  was  no  form  in  Latin  an- 
swering to  the  English  perfect  participle  active,  except 
in  the  case  of  deponent  verbs  which  have   the  passive 
forms  but  active  meanings.     Thus,  we  have  in  English, 

"  making"  translated  by  facient(i)-. 

"having  been  made"      "         "  facto-. 

"  having  made"  "         "    no  Latin  form. 

214.  It  was  necessary  therefore  in  order  to  express 
this  last  meaning  to  have  recourse  to  some  different  mode 
of  expression.      When  the  active   perfect  participle  is 
from  a  transitive  verb  and  has  its  object  expressed, 
the  ablative  absolute  construction  with  the  Latin  perfect 
participle  passive  can  be  employed,  as  is  done  in  the 
above  sentence.     But  if  the  verb  be  intransitive, 
and  therefore  without  an  accusative  of  the  object,  no 
passive  construction  of  it  can  be  formed.     In  such  cases  the 
use  of  quum  with  the  past  perfect  subjunctive  spoken  of  in 
the  last  lesson  is  to  be  employed,  unless  the  English 
active  verb  be  represented  by  a  Latin  deponent  verb ;  in 
which  case  the  perfect  participle  may  be  translated  ex- 
actly.    But  the  construction  with  quum  is  often  employed 
when  other  combinations  would  be  possible.     The  follow- 
ing table  presents  some  of  the  ways  in  which  the  dif- 
ferent English  participial  expressions  may  be  represented 
in  Latin : 


21-1.]  LESSON  CXX.  ^          163 

(a)  Imperfect  active  participle  in  English. 

The  tribune  was  killed  while  fighting  with  the  enemy. 
Tribunus,  adversus  hostes  pugnans,  occlsus  est.  (1.) 

"    quum    "  "      pugnaret,       "        "  (2.) 

(b)  Perfect  active  participle  in  English. 

The  tribune,  having  taken  the  camp,  was  killed. 

Tribunus,  cum  castra  cepisset,  occisus  est.  (3.) 

"  castiis  captls,  "        "  (4.) 

"     potltus  (dep.)  "        "  (5.) 

(c)  Imperfect  passive  participle  in  English. 

The  tribune,  being  hard-pressed  by  the  enemy,  was  killed. 
Tribunus,  quum  ab  hostibus  premeretur,  occisus  est.  (6.) 

"  hostibus  eum  prementibus,          "        "  (7.) 

(d)  Perfect  passive  participle  in  English. 

The  tribune,  having  been  taken  by  the  enemy,  was  killed. 
Tribunus,  ab  hostibus  captus,  occisus  est.  (8.) 

"  quum  "         "  captus  esset,  "        "  (9.) 

The  above  modes  of  expression  have  been  numbered,  in 
order  that  by  inserting  the  corresponding  number  after 
participial  expressions  in  the  subsequent  lessons,  the  pupil 
may  be  aided  in  selecting  the  right  form.  This  will  not 
be  done  always :  and  it  is  therefore  hoped  that  the  teacher 
will  keep  his  pupils  long  enough  upon  the  present  lesson 
to  enable  them  to  understand  the  cases  in  which  the  dif- 
ferent modes  of  expression  are  proper  or  possible. 

EXERCISE  207. 

1.  Lentulus  having  come  (3)  to  Rome  for-the-purpose-of  (ad)  open- 
ing (gerundive)  the  treasury,  being  terrified  (8)  by  the  approach  of  Caesar, 
fled  out-of  the  city.  2.  The  soldiers  having  fortified  (3)  the  camp, 
Hannibal  himself,  with  the-light-armed  (expedite-}  hastily  traversed 
(p.  h.)  the  defiles.  3.  The  Helvetii,  observing  (2)  that  Caesar  had- 
crossed  the  river,  sent  ambassadors  to  him.  4.  The  Aedui  not  being 
able  (2)  to  defend  themselves,  sent  to-ask  aid.  5.  The  eagle-bearer 
(aquilifero-)  being  hard-pressed  (6)  by-a-great  multitude  of  the  enemy, 
threw  (projic(i)-)  the  eagle  within  the  rampart.  5.  Having  ascertained  (4) 
these  things,  (and)  seeing  (2)  that  war  was  being-prepared  on-all-sides, 
Caesar  thought  that  he  ought-to-reflect  about  war  more-seasonably 
(maturius).  6?  The  engines  having  cleared  (3)  the  walls  of-defenders 
(abl.)  Hannibal  sent  five-hundred  Africans  to  undermine  the  wall  at 
(ab)  the  bottom. 


164  LESSON  CXXIT.  [215. 

LESSON    CXXI. 

EXERCISE  208. 

1.  Having  ascertained  (4)  the  wish  of  the  citizens,  we  will  set-out 
about  (de)  midnight.  2.  Caesar  having  landed  (4)  the  army,  and  having 
selected  (4)  (cap(i)-)  a  place  suitable  for-a-carnp,  hastened  to  the  enemy. 
3.  The  enemy  having  tarried  (5)  a  little-while  (paulisptr)  near  the  town, 
and  having  laid  waste  (5)  the  lands  of  the  allies,  (and)  having  set-on- 
fire  (4)  all  the  villages  and  buildings,  hastened  to  Caesar's  camp.  4. 
Our  horsemen,  while  retreating  (2)  (se  recip(i)-)  into  the  camp,  ran- 
against  (occur-)  the  enemy  in-front.  5.  The  general,  having  led-across 
(4)  the  army,  halted  near  the  town,  and  pitched  his  camp  close-to 
(juxta)  the  wall.  6.  Having  seen  (3)  that  the  fourth  legion  was  being 
hard  pressed  (urge-)  by  the  enemy,  you  ordered  that  the  legions  should 
gradually  join  themselves. 


LESSON  CXXII. 

We  have  now  spoken  of  the  principal  cases  in  which 
the  subjunctive  mood  is  used  in  secondary  sentences  ;  i.  <?., 
when  it  is  required  by  the  sense  of  the  secondary  sentence. 
We  have  now  to  treat  of  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  in 
primary  sentences.  Let  the  tables  given  in  pp.  146,  147, 
be  again  carefully  examined. 

We  will  speak  first  of  questions  used  as  the  object  or 
subject  of  a  verb ;  i.  e.,  what  we  called  nominal 
questions. 

2  lo.  Let  this  rule  be  perfectly  remembered : 

Nominal  questions  take  their  verbs  in  the  sub- 
junctive mood. 

Nominal  questions  are  introduced  by  the  same  inter- 
rogative pronouns  or  particles  as  principal  questions ;  (see 
§§  154-160.) 

EXAMPLES. 

Deorumne  providentia  mun-    Is  the  world  governed  by  the 
dus  regitur?  providence  of  God? 


216.]  LESSON  CXXIII.  165 

Videamus,  Deorumne  pro-    Let  us  see  whether  the  world 
videntiu  mundus  regatur.         is  governed  by  the  provi- 
dence of  God. 

Quid  pater  t'aus  scripsit?         What  did  your  father  write? 

Die  quid  pater  tuus  scripse-     Tell  (me)  what  your  father 
rit.  wrote. 

It  will  be  seen  that  in  English  the  position  of  the  sub- 
ject after  the  verb  in  a  principal  question  is  not  main- 
tained when  the  question  is  used  nominally  :  since  in  the 
latter  case  an  interrogative  word  (whether,  cfcc.,)  is  always 
employed,  which  distinguishes  sufficiently  a  question  from 
an  assertion. 

In  the  following  exercises  the  questions  adduced  will 
be  first  stated  as  principal  and  then  as  nominal. 

It  will  be  observed  that  sentences  which  would  in  Eng- 
lish be  marked  rather  as  exclamations  than  as  questions, 
have,  when  used  nominally,  the  same  construction  as 
questions. 

EXERCISE  209. 

1.  How  anxious  and  uneasy  is  all  love !  2.  I  am  not  ignorant  how 
anxious  and  uneasy  all  love  is.  3.  What  is  that  force  and  whence  is 
(it)  ?  4.  We  shall  easily  understand  what  that  force  is  and  whence  (it) 
is.  5.  What  do  those-men  say,  what  do  (they)  think  (senti-)  who  are 
of  (ab}  that  system  ?  6.  No-one,  even-moderately  (medlocriier  quidem) 
learned  is  ignorant  what  those  say,  what  (they)  think,  who  aro  of  that 
system. 


LESSON    CXXIII. 

Those  questions  which  involve  one  or  more 
alternatives  are  called  disjunctive :  they  are  such  as 
this :  "  Is  he  deceiving  us,  or  is  he  himself  deceived  ?" 
The  first  member  of  such  questions  is  introduced  by  ne 
(enclitic)  nonne,  or  utrum,  and  the  other  member  or 
members  nearly  always  by  an :  and  these  particles  are 
used  alike  in  principal  and  nominal  questions.  Some- 
times the  first  member  has  no  interrogative  particle. 


166  LESSON  CXXIY.  [217. 

EXERCISE  210. 

1.  Do-you-stud}-,  or  fish,  or  hunt,  or  (do)  all-things  together  ?  2.  I 
desire  to  know  whether  you  study  or  fish,  or  hunt  or  (do)  all-things  to- 
gether. 3.  Did  I  not  sufficiently  understand  you,  or  have  you  changed 
(your)  opinion  ?  4.  It  is  doubtful  whether  I  did  not  sufficiently  under- 
stand 3Tou.  or  whether  your  have  changed  (your)  opinion.  5.  Is  virtue 
sought  (expct-)  on  account  of  its  own  worth,  or  on-account-of  some  (ali- 
quem]  profit  ?  6.  The-question-is-raised  (qweritur)  whether  virtue  is 
sought  on-account-of  its  own  worth,  or  on-account-of  some  profit 


LESSON    CXXIY. 

317".  As  questions  when  asked  nominally  have  their 
verbs  in  the  subjunctive  mood,  so  also  nominal  com- 
mands require  their  verbs  to  be  in  the  subjunctive. 
The  command  when  thus  used  nominally  is  introduced 
by  ut  (positive)  and  by  ne  (negative).  But  ut  is  often 
omitted.  As  commands  have  reference  to  things  not  yet 
finished,  of  course  the  imperfect  tenses  of  the  subjunctive 
must  be  employed  in  nominal  commands. 

There  are  many  expressions  which  fall  most  naturally 
into  this  class  of  nominal  sentences,  which  yet  are  not 
strictly  speaking  commands  :  such  as  those  which  imply 
entreaty,  advice,  permission,  &c. 

EXAMPLES. 

Epistolam  lege.  Read  the  letter. 

Rex  militi  imperat,  ut  epis-  The  king  commands  the  sol- 

tolam  legat.  dier  to  read  the  letter. 

Ne  statuas  mihi  ponitote.  You  must  not  erect  statues 

to  me. 

Imperator  vetuit  ne  statuae  The  Emperor  forbade  statues 

sibi  ponerentur.  to  be  erected  to  him. 

EXERCISE  211. 

1.  Do  not  allow  (imperf.  subj.)  the  town  to  be  taken-by-storm.  2. 
Caesar  had-charged  (manda-)  (his)  lieutenant  not  to  allow  the  town  to 


21§,  219.]  LESSON  CXXV.  167 

be  takeu-by-storm.  3.  Do-not  deliver  (imperf.  sub})  us  to-the  Romans 
for  (in  ace.)  slavery.  4.  The  women,  weeping,  with-outspread  (passa-) 
hands  implored  the  soldiers  setting-out  into  the  battle,  not  (ne)  to  de- 
liver them  to-the  Romans  for  slavery.  5.  Recollect  both  the  old 
disaster  of  the  Roman  people,  and  the  ancient  valor  of  the  Helvetii. 
6.  The  chief  warned  Caesar  to  recollect  the  old  disaster  of  the  Roman 
people,  and  the  ancient  valor  of  the  Helvetii. 


LESSON    CXXV. 

218.  It  was  seen  in  §  163  that  the  present  imperative 
has  forms  only  for  the  second  person  singular  and  plural. 
In  order  to  express  the  same  notion  for  the  first  and  third 
persons,  the  present  imperfect  subjunctive  is  used. 

219.  It  was  said  also  in  §  165  that  in  prohibitions 
the  present  imperative  is  rarely  used:    instead  of  it  we 
find  the  present  imperfect  or  the  present  perfect  subjunctive 
used  with  ne :  most  commonly  the  latter.     It  is  probable 
that  these  uses  of  the  subjunctive  mood  are  to  be  ex- 
plained as  falling  under  the  principle  stated  in  the  last 
lesson :  i.  e.,  that  they  are  really  instances  of  i  llfipcra- 
ative  sentences  used  nominally,  the  govern- 
ing verb  being  omitted.     This  is  undoubtedly  the  case  in 
such  equivalents  for  the  imperative  in  prohibitions,  as, 

Cave  dixeris  :   Take  care,  that  you  do  not  say  it :  say  it  not. 
Noli  me  jocari  putes :  Do  not  think  I  am  jesting. 


EXERCISE   212. 

1.  May  the  gods  avert  the  omen.  2.  In  prosperous  circumstances  let 
us  avoid  (fug(i)-)  pride  and  arrogance.  3.  Let  war  be  so  (ita)  undertaken, 
that  nothing  else  but  (nisi)  peace  may  seem  to-be-sough t-for.  4.  Do 
not  make  (perf)  this  battle  ruinous  (funesta-)  by  the  death  of  the  consul. 
5.  Let-us-love  (our)  country,  let-us-obey  the  senate,  let-us-take- thought 
(consul-)  for-the-good ;  let-us-neglect  present  profit  (pi ),  let-us-be  slaves 
to-the-esteem  (gloria-)  of  posterity.  6.  Do  (perf)  nothing  for-the-sake- 
of  kindness,  be-not  moved  by  pity. 


168  LESSON  CXXYL  [22O-223. 


LESSON    CXXYI. 

Though  it  was  said  (§  187)  that  the  proper  use  of  the 
subjunctive  mood  is  confined  to  subordinate  or  subjoined 
sentences  (whether  primary  or  secondary),  we  have  seen 
in  the  last  lesson  that  it  appears  to  be  used  independently , 
instead  of  an  imperative,  to  supply  the  place  of  the 
missing  forms  of  that  mood. 

22O.  There  are  other  cases  too  in  which  the  subjunc- 
tive is  used  in  sentences  which  stand  independently  ; 
though  it  is  probable  that  all  may  be  explained  by  sup- 
posing that  the  true  principal  sentence  is  omitted,  and  the 
subjunctive  mood  allowed  to  stand  alone  with  the  force  which 
it  would  have  derived  from  that  sentence,  if  expressed. 

The  cases  we  are  now  speaking  of  form  three  main 


1.)  The  potential  use       of  the  subjunctive  mood. 
2.)  The  optative  use          "     "  "  " 

3.)  The  deliberative  use  "    "  " 

221.  (1.)  The  subjunctive  mood  is  said  to  be  used 
potentially  when  it  expresses  an  assertion  as  doubt- 
ful, possible  or  conditional.     It  is  very  often  so  employed 
to  express  a  modest  or  polite  reservation  of  a  positive  state- 
ment.    This  is  particularly  the  case  with  the  present  per- 
fect tense. 

222.  (2.)  The  subjunctive  mood  is  said  to  be  used 
opt  at  i  ye  I V  when  it  expresses  wish  or  desire.     This  is 
closely  allied  to  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  for  the  imper- 
ative spoken  of  in  the  last  lesson. 

223.  The  subjunctive  mood  is  said  to  be  used  de- 
li!>eratively  when  an  inquiry  is  made  as  to  what  is  to 
be  done  or  ought  to  have  been  done..    It  is  generally  implied 
in  these  cases  that  the  correct  thing  either  cannot  be  done 
or  has  not  been  done. 

The  following  maybe  taken  as  examples  of  these  cases — 


223.]  LESSON  CXXVII.  169 

(i.)  Potential. 

Ego  ipse  cum  Platone  non     For  myself  I  should  not  be 
invltus  erraverim,  unwilling    to   be   mistaken 

along  with  Plato. 

(2.)  Optative. 

Valeant  elves  mei :  sint  in-     May   my  fellow    citizens   be 
columes,  sint  beati.  prosperous,   may    they    be 

safe,  may  they  be  happy. 

(3.)  Deliberative. 

Cur  plura  commemorem ?        Why  need  I  mention  more 

cases  ? 


EXERCISE    213. 

1.  The  judgment  of  Brutus,  with-your  good-leave  (pac-)  would-I-say 
(perf.)  (it),  I  far  prefer  to  yours.  2.  In-this-way  (ita)  you-can-find  praise 
without  envy,  and.  procure  friends.  3.  Would-that  (utinam)  I  were  able 
as  (tarn)  easily  to  find  the  true  (pi.  neut.)  as  to  refute  the  false  (pi).  4. 
Am-I-to-fight  with  the  tempest  rather  than  submit  to-it  and  obey  (it)  ? 
5.  This-thing  without  any  hesitation  I-sJiould-be-inclined-io-affirm  (perf.) 
that  eloquence  is  the  most  difficult  thing  of  all.  6.  May  the  gods  pre- 
serve to-you  these  joys  and  this  fame. 


f   LESSON    CXXYII. 

EXERCISE  214. 

1.  Kings  may-keep  (habe-)  (their)  kingdoms  for-themselves,  the  rich 
(their)  riches.  2.  Who,  I-pray  (tandem),  can-blame  me  justly  (jure)1! 
3.  What  need-I-fear  if  I  am  destined-to-be  (futuro-)  either  not  wretched 
after  death  or  even  happy  ?  4.  What  fitter  companions  to-generosity 
can-I-name (perf.)  than  humanity  and  clemency?  5.  You-can-see  more 
with-your-own  eyes,  than  with  those-of-others  (alieno-).  6.  Let  flattery, 
the  helper  of  vices,  be  removed  far-away. 
15 


170  LESSON  CXXTm.  [224. 


LESSON    CXXYIII. 

We  have  now  spoken  of  the  subjunctive  mood  as  used  — 

(1.)  In  several  kinds  of  secondary  sentences,  when 
it  is  required  by  the  nature  of  the  relation  between  the 
secondary  sentence  and  the  primary  one  to  which  it  is 
attached. 

(2.)  In  nominal  questions. 

18.1  In  nominal  commands. 

(4.)  In  principal  sentences;  in  which  it  is 
employed, 

(a.)  To  supply  the  missing  forms  of  the  present  imperor 
tive. 

fb.)  Potentially. 

(c.)    Optatively. 

(d.)  Deliberatively. 


We  have  now  to  speak  of  another  very  impor- 
tant principle  of  Latin  Syntax  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the 
subjunctive  mood. 

The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  in  all  secondary  sentences 
which  are  attached  as  an  integral  part  of  the  thought^ 

!1.)    To  any  nominal  sentence. 
2.)   To  any  secondary  sentence  which  contains    the  sub- 
junctive. 

(3.)  To  any  primary  sentence  which  contains  the  subjunc- 
tive. 

This  is  the  general  rule.  But  it  must  be  understood 
that  it  only  holds  good  when  the  secondary  sentence  forms  an 
integral  part  Of  the  thought  expressed  in  that 
to  which  it  is  attached.  There  are  besides  some  other 
limitations  which  will  be  stated  hereafter. 


225.]  LESSON  CXXIX.  171 

EXAMPLES. 


credo  eum,  qui  sapiens    /  do  not  believe  that  he  who  is 
sit,  raiserum  esse  posse.  wise  can  be  miserable. 

Quis  fidem  habeat  el  qui  am-  Who  can  put  confidence  in  the 
icds  suos  deceperit  ?  man  who  has  deceived  his 

friends  ? 

Eo  simus  animo,  ut  nihil  in  Let  us  be  of  such  a  mind  as 
malls  ducamus,  quod  sit  a  to  regard  nothing  as  evil, 
Deo  constitutum.  which  has  been  appointed  by 

God. 

NOTE.  —  It  is  hoped  that  the  teacher  will  make  his  pupils  see  in  these 
examples,  as  well  as  in  the  sentences  contained  in  the  following  exer- 
cises, to  what  sort  of  sentence  (nominal,  secondary,  or  principal),  the 
secondary  sentence  is  in  each  case  attached. 


EXERCISE  215. 

1.  It  was  the  custom  at  Athens  for-those  (ace.)  to  be  praised  in  the 
public-assembly  (contion-)  who  had  been  slain  in  battles.  2.  Socrates 
was-accustomed-to-say  that  all-persons  were  sufficiently  eloquent  in 
that-subject  (eo-)  which  they  knew.  3.  Who  can-love  that-man  whom 
he  fears  ?  4.  All  agree  that  there  is  something  (aliquid)  which  belongs 
to  the  dead.  5.  It  is  clear  that  souls,  when  they  have  gone-out  from 
the  body,  are-carried  (ferri)  on  high.  6.  Caesar  thought  that  Ariovis- 
tus  was  now  returning  to  good-sense  (sdnitat-),  since  he  of-his-own- 
accord  (ultrd)  promised  that-thing  which  he  had  before  refused  to  (him) 
requesting  (it). 


LESSON    CXXIX. 

We  have  now  spoken  separately  of  the  changes  which 
sentences  of  the  various  kinds  (assertions,  questions,  com- 
mands and  secondary  sentences)  undergo  when  they  are 
affected  by  the  government  of  the  verb  in  another  sen- 
tence. We  must  now  speak  of  all  this  in  combination,  as 
we  have  now  to  treat  of  what  is  called  oratio  ol>li- 
q  ua,  or  "  reported  speech." 


172  LESSON  CXXIX.  [225,  226. 

225.  When  the  sentiments  of  a  speaker  are  reported, 
it  is  possible  for  the  reporter  either — 

1st.  To  give  the  speaker's  exact  words,  precisely  as 
they  were  uttered :  this  is  called  oratio  recta  (direct 
speech);  or, 

2d.  To  give  the  sense  only,  the  form  of  the  words  being 
altered.  This  is  called  oratio  obliqua  (indirect 
speech.) 

The  following  example  will  make  this  distinction  clear : 

1st.  Oratio  recta.  (The  chief  said) :  "I  know  that 
these  statements  are  true,  and  no  one  feels  more  pain  at 
the  circumstance  than  I." 

2d.  Oratio  obliqua.  The  chief  said  that  he  knew 
that  those  statements  were  true,  and  that  no  one  felt 
more  pain  at  the  circumstance  than  himself. 

226.  If  this  subject  be  properly  considered  it  will  be 
observed  that — 

(l.)  The  speech  may  consist  of  assertions,  or  questions, 
or  commands,  or  all  of  these,  with  secondary  sentences  at- 
tached to  any  of  them. 

(2.)  If  the  oratio  recta  be  employed,  the  verb  which  is 
used  to  introduce  the  speech  will  have  no  effect  upon  the 
construction  of  any  of  the  parts  of  the  speech. 

(3.)  If  the  oratio  obliqua  be  employed,  the  verb  which 
is  used  to  introduce  the  speech  will  affect  the  construction 
of  all  the  parts  of  the  speech. 

(4.)  Whatever  the  verb  may  be  which  introduces  the 
speech,  all  the  assertions  in  it  may  be  considered  as  the 
objects  of  the  verb  die-,  "  say ;"  ah1  the  questions  as  the 
objects  of  the  verb  roga-,  "ask;"  and  all  the  commands 
as  the  objects  of  the  verb  jube-,  "  bid,"  whether  these 
verbs  be  expressed  or  have  to  be  understood. 

We  have  therefore  the  following  rules  for  the  changes 
which  the  several  parts  of  a  speech  will  undergo,  when  it 
is  reported  oblique — 


227-233.]  LESSON  CXXIX.  173 

227.  (a.)  The  verbs  in  assertions  will  be  put  in 
the  infinitive  mood,  and  of  course  their  subjects  in 
the  accusative  case.  See  §§  149-151. 

22$.  (b.)  The  verbs  in  questions  will  be  put  in 
the  subjunctive  mood.  See  §  215. 

229.  (c.)  The  verbs  in  commands  will  be  put  in 
the  subjunctive  mood,  and  of  course  in  one  of  the 
imperfect  tenses  of  it.    See  §  217. 

03 O.  (d.)  The  verbs  in  secondary  sentences  will 
be  put  in  the  subjunctive  mood.     See  §  224. 

23 1 .  (e.)  The  verbs  which  are  in  the  subjunctive 
mood  in  the  speech  as  delivered,  will  remain  in  the  sub- 
junctive. 

232.  (f.)  Since  the  speech  is  not  given  as  spoken 
directly  by  any  one  or  to  any  one,  all  pronouns  of 
the  first  and  second  person  (me-  no-  te-  vo-  ho- 
isto-  meo-  tuo-  nostro-  vestro-)  are  excluded  in  strict- 
ness from  the  oratio  obttqua. 

233.  (g.)  Of  course  the  pronouns  se-  suo-  will  prop- 
erly be  used  instead  of  me-  meo-  when  the  speaker  is  rep- 
resented as  talking  of  himself. 

It  is  hoped  that  the  teacher  will  be  sure  that  his  pupils 
understand  that  the  rules  given  above  in  regard  to  the 
verbs  are  not  new  rules,  and  will  therefore  make  them 
refer  to  the  sections  indicated.  The  rule  (b)  in  regard  to 
questions,  and  that  (d)  in  regard  to  secondary  sentences 
will  need  some  limitation  hereafter.  But  it  is  recom- 
mended that  a  great  deal  of  pains  be  taken  to  see  that 
the  rules  as  they  stand  are  thoroughly  mastered;  and 
several  of  the  following  examples  are  given  in  both  the 
forms  that  there  may  be  the  means  at  hand  for  making 
the  requisite  comparison. 


EXERCISE  216. 

1.  By-the-right  of  war  I  take  the  tribute  which  conquerors  are  accus- 
tomed (perf.)  to  impose  on-the  -conquered.     2.  Ariovistus  says  that  by- 
15* 


114  LESSOR  CXXXL  [234. 

the-right  of  war  he  takes  the  tribute  which  conquerors  are  accustomed 
to  impose  upon-the-conquered.  3.  Those  states  which  dissent  from  the 
rest-of  the  Gauls,  I  will  unite  (to  the  league)  by  my  diligence,  and  I  will 
bring-about  (effic(i}-)  one  (united)  plan  of  the  whole-of  Gaul.  4.  The  chief 
said  that  those  states  which  dissented  from  the  rest-of  the  Gauls  he  would 
unite  to  the  league  by  his  diligence,  and  that  he  would  bring  about  one 
(united)  plan  of  the  whole-of  Gaul.  5.  This  nation  has  been  urged  on 
by  its  chiefs,  who  say  that  the  Aedui,  having  been  reduced  by  Caesar 
into  slavery,  suffer  all  indignities  and  insults.  6.  He  pointed  out  that 
that  nation  had  been  urged  on  by  its  chiefs,  who  said  that  the  Aedui, 
having  been  reduced  by  Caesar  into  slavery,  were  suffering  all  indig- 
nities and  insults. 


LESSON    CXXX. 

EXERCISE  217. 

1. 1  neither  dare  to  come  into  those  parts  of  Gaul  which  you  possess, 
nor  can  I,  without  great  effort  and  expense,  draw-together  (my)  army 
into  one  place.  2.  Ariovistus  replied,  that  he  neither  dared  to  come 
into  those  parts  of  Gaul  which  Caesar  possessed,  nor  could  draw-together 
(his)  army  into  one  place  without  great  effort  and  expense.  3.  Why 
sJiould  any  one  (quisquam)  judge  that  Ariovistus  will  so  rashly  depart 
from  his-duty?  4.  Caesar  asked  why  any  one  judged  that  Ariovistus 
would  s/>  rashly  depart  from  his-duty.  5.  Supposing  (si)  Ariovistus, 
being-impelled  by  frenzy  and  madness,  does-bring  (infer-  pres.  perf.) 
war,  what  I-waut-to-know  (tandem)  do  you  dread?  6.  Caesar  said, 
supposing  Ariovistus,  being-impelled  by  frenzy  and  madness,  should- 
bring  (past  perf.)  war,  what,  he  wanted-to-know  (tandem),  did  they 
dread? 


LESSON    CXXXI. 

234.  While  we  continue  the  exercises  upon  the  ora- 
tio  obligua,   we  may  introduce  the  peculiarly  formed 


234.]  LESSON  CXXXL  175 

tenses  of  the  few  irregular  verbs  in  Latin.  These  are 
irregular  only  in  some  of  the  imperfect  tenses.  We  will  give 
first  those  tenses  of  the  three  verbs  vol-  "  wish,"  nol-  "  be 
unwilling"  (contracted  from  nevol-)  and  mal-  "wish 
rather"  (contracted  from  magevol-).  It  is  to  be  under- 
stood that  the  tenses  not  here  given  are  regularly  formed. 

Present  imperfect  indicative. 
vol-  nol-  mal- 

S.       1.  volo  nolo  malo 

2.  vis  nonvis  mavis 

3.  vult  nonvult  mavult 
P.       1.            volumus           nolumus           malumus 

2.  vultis  nonvultis          mavultis 

k     3.  volunt  nolunt  malunt 

Present  imperfect  subjunctive. 

S.        1.  velim  nolim  malim 

2.  veils  noils  malls 

3.  velit  nolit  malit 
P.       1.  velimus  nolimus  malimus 

2.  velitis  nolitis  malitis 

3.  velint  nolint  malint 

Past  imperfect  subjunctive. 

S.        1.  vellem  nollem  mallem 

2.  velles  nolles  malles 

3.  vellet  nollet  mallet 
P.       1.  vellemus  nollemus  mallemus 

2.  velletis  nolletis  malletis 

3.  vellent  nollent  mallent 

Imperf.  infin.   velle  nolle  malle 

Nol-  has  besides  a  present  and  future  imperative. 

Present,    S.  2.  noli.        P.  2.  nolite. 
Future,     S.  2.  nollto.     P.  2.  nolltote. 
3.       "  3.  nolunto. 


176  LESSON  CXXXII.  [235,  236. 

Vol-  and  nol-  have  besides  the  imperfect  participle  reg- 
ularly formed  and  also  the  gerund. 

1ST.  B. — It  should  be  pointed  out  that  the  irregularity 
of  the  past  imperfect  subjunctive  and  the  imperfect  infinitive 
of  these  verbs  consists  in  the  omission  of  the  connecting 
vowel  of  the  ending  ere,  and  the  consequent  assimila- 
tion of  the  two  liquids  1  and  r. 


EXERCISE  218. 

1.  I  wish  to  treat  with  you  about  those  things  which  began  (coeptae 
sunt)  to  be  treated  (about)  between  us,  and  were  not  (neque)  completed. 
2.  The  chief  said  that  he  wished  to  treat  with  Caesar  about  those 
things  which  had  begun  to  be  treated  (about)  between  them  (eo-)  and 
had  not  been  completed.  3.  If  you  do-not  (minus)  wish  to  do  that, 
Bend  an  ambassador  to  me.  4.  Ariovistus  said  if  he  did  not  wish  to  do 
that,  he-might-send  an  ambassador  to  him.  5.  What  do  you  wish  for- 
yourself?  Why  do  you  come  into  my  possessions?  6.  Ariovistua 
asked  Caesar  what  he  wanted  for-himself,  why  he  came  into  his  pos- 
sessions. 

235*  NOTE. — In  the  last  sentence  the  reflexive  pronouns  (se-  and 
suo-)  are  used  to  represent  both  the  "  for  yourself"  and  "  my"  of  the 
oratio  recta.  Properly  the  reflexive  should  only  refer  to  the,  subject  of 
the  principal  verb  (in  this  case  Ariovistus).  But  usage  allowed  it  also  to 
refer  to  the  subject  of  a  secondary  sentence,  when  no  ambiguity  was 
caused  thereby.  This  is  most  commonly  done  in  the  case  of  the  adjective 
(possessive)  suo-.  Kiihner  says,  that  the  use  of  se-  with  such  reference 
is  confined  to  cases  where  the  pronoun  and  the  verb  form  only  one  notion, 
as  in  the  above  case :  quid  tibi  vis  is  nothing  more  than  what  do  you 
want? 


LESSON    CXXXII. 

236.  The  verb  fer-  "bear"  is  irregular  in  some  of 
the  imperfect  tenses,  the  irregularity  consisting  for  the 
most  part  in  the  omission  of  connecting  vowels. 

There  are  many  compounds  of  fer-  which  are  conju- 
gated in  the  same  way  as  the  principal  verb. 


236.]  LESSON  CXXXII.  177 

The  irregular  tenses  active  and  passive  are  here  given : 

ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

Present  imperfect  indicative. 
S.          1.          fero  feror 

2.  fers  ferris  or  ferre 

3.  fert  fertur 
P.         1.           ferimus  ferimur 

2.  fertis  ferimini 

3.  ferunt  feruntur 

Past  imperfect  subjunctive. 
S.          1.          ferrem  ferrer 

2.  ferres  ferrerfs  or  ferrere 

3.  ferret  ferretur 
P.         1.          ferremus                   ferremur 

2.  ferretis  ferremini 

3.  ferrent  ferrentur 

Imperf.  infin.  ferre  ferri 

Present  imperative. 

S.          2.          fer  ferre 

P.         2.          ferte  ferimini 

Future  imperative. 

S.         2.  ferto  fertor 

P.          3.  "  " 

S.         2.  fertote 

P.         3.  fer  unto  feruntor 

EXERCISE  219. 

1.  The  frenzy  (pi.)  of-the-tribunes  (tribunicio-,  adj.)  cannot  be  borne 
any-further  (ultra).  2.  The  consuls  denied  that  the  frenzy  of  the  tri- 
bunes could  be  borne  any-further.  3.  Missiles  are-being-carried-together 
into  the  house  of  the  traitor,  and  he  holds  meetings  at-home.  4. 
The  officer  reports  (refer-)  to  the  senate  that  missiles  are-being-carried- 
together  into  the  house  of  the  traitor,  and  he  (eo-)  holds  meetings  at- 
home.  5.  If  the  consul  chooses  (vol-,  fut.)  to  send  soldiers  with  me,  I 
will  lead  them  by  a  not  difficult  road  (aditu-)  above  the  heads  (sing.)  of 
the  enemy.  6.  The  scout  said  that  if  the  consul  chose  to  send  soldiers 
with  him  he  would  lead  them  by  a  not  difficult  road  above  the  heads 
of  the  enemy. 


178  LESSON  CXXXIH.  [237,  238. 


LESSON    CXXXIII. 

237.  The  verb/<zc(i)-  "make"  is  not  used  in  the  imper- 
fect tenses  passive.  Instead  of  it  the  stem^  is  used,  which 
is  conjugated  with  the  active  person-endings  except  in  the 
infinitive. 

The  following  table  represents  the  common  forms  of  it  : 

Pres.  imperf.  indie.,  f  10,  fls,  fit,         —       —       flunt. 

Past       "    '        "  fiebam,  flebas,  &c. 

Fat.       "  "  flam  f  ies,  &c. 

Pres.  imperf.  sub}.,  flam  flas,  &c. 

Past       "    '        "  fierem,  fieres,  &c. 

Imperf.  infin.,  fieri. 

NOTE.  —  1st.  The  vowel  i  is  short  before  er-. 

2<L  The  gerundive  faciendo  is  regularly  formed  from/oc(z)-. 

3d.  The  compounds  of  fac(i}-  with  verbal  roots  and  adverbs,  like  pate- 
fadfy-  form  their  imperfect  tenses  passive  from  fi-  as  above,  but  the 
compounds  made  with  prepositions  change  a  of  the  stem  into  i  (as 
from  fac(i)-  comes  perfic(i)-)  and  form  the  passive  tenses  regularly. 

4th.  Futuro-  may  be  regarded  aa  the  future  partic.  of  /i-in  the  sense 
of  "  happen,"  "  become." 


The  verb  i-  "go"  with  all  its  compounds  is 
irregular  in  the  imperfect  tenses.  Most  of  these  forms 
have  been  given  before,  but  it  may  be  well  to  repeat  them 
here  altogether. 

Pres.  imperf.  indie.,  eo,  is,  it  ;  imus,  itis,  eunt. 

Past       *'  "  ibam  ibas,  &c. 

Fut.       «  "  ibo,  ibis,  &c. 

Pres.  imperf.  subj.,  earn,  eas,  <fcc. 

Past       "   "        ""  irem  ires,  &c. 

Imperf.  in/in.,  ire. 

Imperf.  partic.j  eunt(i)-  nom.  sing.  iens. 

Gerund,  eundo- 

Fut.  partic.,  ituro. 

Pres.  imperat.,  S.  2.  I.     P.  2.  ite, 

Fut.        "  S.  2.  ito,  3.  !to.     P.  2.  itote,  3.  eunto. 


-c 


^ 

239.] 


NOTE.  —  The  vowel  t  of  the  stem  is  changed  to  e  when  the  ending 
presents  the  letters  a,  o,  w. 

EXERCISE  220. 

1.  I  earnestly  advise  the  people  not  to  condemn  their  own  cause  by 
a  Useless  modesty.  2.  The  plebeian  said  that  he  earnestly  advised 
the  people  not  to  condemn  their  own  cause  by  a  useless  modesty.  3. 
There  is  not  time  Tor-ascertaining  (genit.)  the  causes.  Let  all  the 
younger-men  be  present  to-morrow  (poster  6  die)  at-dawn  in  the  plain. 
4.  The  consuls  said  in  an  assembly  (contion-)  that  there  was  not  time 
for  ascertaining  the  causes  :  (that)  all  the  younger-men  should-be-present 
next  day  at  dawn  in  the  plain.  5.  Are-you  here  going-  to-give-up 
(praebe-}  yourselves  to-the-missiles  of  the  enemy,  undefended,  un- 
avenged? why  (quid),  then  (igitur),  have-you  arms?  why  have  you 
brought  (infer-)  war  aggressively  (uUro)  ?  6.  The  soldier  asked  with- 
a-loud  (clara-)  voice  whether  they  were  going  to-give  up  themselves  to 
the  missiles  of  the  enemy,  undefended,  unavenged  ?  why  they  had  arms  ? 
why  they  had  brought  war  aggressively  ? 


LESSON    CXXXIV. 

239.  It  was  said  in  §  215,  that  the  verbs  in  nominal 
questions  were  found  in  the  subjunctive  mood.  To  this 
we  must  now  state  the  following  veiy  important  excep- 
tion :  When  questiom^aoGur  in  the  oratio  obllyua,  if  the 
subject  in  the  oratio  recta  be  the  secoiiTT  person,  the 
suJbjunctive^&_w.sec?;  but  if  the  subject  be  either 
first  or  third  person,  the  infinitive  is  used  with  the 
subject-accusative.  Thus  we  shall  have, 

In  the  oratio  recta.  In  the  oratio  obliqua. 

2d  person.   Unde  parabitis  Unde  paraturi  essent  socios 

socios  navales.  navales. 

1st  person.  Unde  parabimus  Unde  se  paraturos  esse  so- 

socios  navales.  cios  navales. 

3d  person.  Unde   parabunt  Unde  eos  paraturos  esse  so- 

socios  navales.  cios  navales. 

The  reason  of  this  difference  seems  to  be  that  the  ques- 
tions asked  in  the  1st  or  3d_  persons  are  rather  rhetorical, 


180  LESSON  CXXXY.  [239. 

i.  e.,  are  disguised  assertions,  and  so,  not  differing  much, 
except  in  form,  from  assertions,  are  expressed  in  the  same 
manner  as  nominal  assertions,  the  interrogative  word  being 
retained  to  show  the  distinction ;  while  questions  in  the 
2d  person  are  proposed  rather  with  a  view  to  an  answer, 
and  so  retain  the  proper  construction  of  nominal  questions. 

NOTE. — 1st.  It  will  be  observed  above  that  the  distinction  between 
the  1st  and  3d  persons  in  the  oratio  obfiqua  is  marked  by  the  use  of 
the  pronoun  se-  for  the  1st  person,  and  eo-  (or  illo-)  for  the  3d  person. 

2d.  It  was  said  above  that  primary  sentences  which  have  their  verbs 
in  (he  subjunctive  mood  retain  that  mood  in  tJie  oratio  obllqua;  and  ac- 
cordingly it  will  be  found  that  when  questions  of  the  1st  or  3d  persons 
(in  the  oratio  recta)  are  found  in  the  oratio  obfiqua  with  the  sul>junctive 
mood,  the  subjunctive  would  also  have  been  used  in  the  oratio  recta. 

It  is  hoped  that  great  care  will  be  taken  to  make  the 
pupils  perfectly  understand  these  distinctions. 

EXERCISE  221. 

1.  "Why  (quid)  do  we  live  ?  "Why  are  we  counted  among  (in  parte) 
the  citizens  (genit.)  ?  2.  The  tribune  asked,  why  did  they  live  ?  why 
were  they  counted  among  the  citizens  ?  3.  What  end  do  ye  think  there 
is  of  continued  military  service  ?  4.  The  centurion  asked,  what  end 
did  they  think  there  was  of  continued  military  service  ?  5.  What 
better  hope  (genit.)  is  held-out  (portend-)  to  the  Latins  ?  6.  The  chief 
asked,  what  better  hope  was  held-out  to  the  Latins? 


LESSON    CXXXY. 

EXERCISE  222. 

1.  Can  any  one  (quisquam)  believe  that  such  friends  have  suddenly, 
without  cause,  been  made  enemies?  2.  The  ambassadors  asked,  could 
any  one  believe  that  such  friends  had  suddenly,  without  cause,  been 
made  enemies?  3.  Why  should  the  enemy  hold  the  most  fruitful  land 
(agro-)  of  Italy  rather  than  the  victorious  army  ?  4,  The  consul  asked, 
why  should  the  enemy  hold  the  most  fruitful  land  of  Italy  rather  than 
the  victorious  army  ?  5.  If  I  choose  (vol-)  to  forget  old  insults,  am  I  able 
also  to  lay-aside  the  memory  of  recent  injuries  ?  (No.)  6.  Caesar  asked, 
supposing  he  chose  to  forget  old  insults,  was  he  able  also  to  lay-aside 
the  memory  of  recent  injuries  ? 


240.]  LESSON  CXXXYI.  181 


LESSON    CXXXYI. 

It  was  stated  in  §  224,  that  secondary  sentences  at- 
tached to  nominal  sentences,  or  to  primary  or  secondary 
sentences  which  contain  the  subjunctive  mood,  have  their 
verbs  in  the  subjunctive.  This  is  the  general  rule :  but  it 
is  necessary  now  to  mention  some  limitations  of  it. 

24O.  The  indicative  mood  may  stand  in  these  secon- 
dary sentences  when  they  contain — 

1.)  Thoughts  of  the  narrator,  not  of  the  speaker. 

2.)  Thoughts  of  the  narrator  and  also  of  the  speaker. 

3.)  Statements  of  mere  facts,  or  general  truths. 

'  )  Periphrastic  expressions  for  simple  notions. 

It  often  occurs  that  the  use  of  the  indicative  mood 
shows  that  the  secondary  sentence  is  to  be  regarded  as 
coming  under  one  of  these  heads,  while  the  subjunctive 
would  have  been  equally  proper  with  a  slight  difference 
of  meaning. 

In  the  following  exercise  the  verbs  in  secondary  sen- 
tences must  be  translated  by  the  indicative  mood,  unless 
the  subjunctive  is  indicated  by  italics;  and  the  teacher 
should  help  his  pupils  to  see  under  which  of  the  above 
classes  each  case  falls.  It  will  be  observed  that  these 
remarks  apply  not  only  to  sentences  occurring  in  formal 
oratio  obllqua,  but  to  all  such  as  come  under  the  con- 
ditions stated  at  the  beginning  of  this  lesson. 


EXERCISE  223. 

1.  "Who  can  be  so  averse  to  (a)  the  truth  as  to  (quo-)  deny  that  all 
these  things  which  we  see  are  managed  by  the  power  of  the  immortal 
gods?  2.  Near  that  river  which  flows  into  the  Pontus,  the  philosopher 
says  (ait)  that  certain  (qudsdain)  little-animals  (bestiola-)  are-produced 
(nose-,  dep.)  which  live  (only)  one  day.  3.  The  scouts  report  (refer-}  to 
Caesar  that  among  the  Suevi  there  is  a  wood  of-boundless  size  (all.) 
which  is  called  Bacenis.  4.  Asia  is  so  rich  (oplma-)  and  fertile  that  it  easily 
surpasses  all  lands  in-the-multitude  of  those  things  which  are  exported. 
5.  The  force  of  eloquence  (eloquendo-)  effects  (this)  that  (we  can)  learn 
16 


182  LESSON  CXXXYII.  [241,  242. 

those-things  which  we  do-not-know,  (igndra-)  and  can  teach  those- 
things  which  we  do-know.  6.  It-can  happen  (fi-)  that  a-man  (quis) 
may  feel  rightly,  and  not  be  able  elegantly  to  express  that  which  he^ 
feels. 


LESSON    CXXXVII. 

An  impersonal  verb  was  defined  (§138)  to  be 
one  which,  like  all  other  verbs,  makes  an  assertion,  but  is 
not  attributed  to  any  subject :  and  we  have  seen  that  it 
is  common  to  find  intransitive  verbs  used  impersonally  in 
the  passive.  We  have  now  to  speak  of  impersonal 
Verbs  proper :  i.  e.,  those  which  are  nearly  always 
used  impersonally :  and  we  shall  treat  of  the  most  im- 
portant of  these  in  separate  heads  according  to  their  con- 
struction with  the  rest  of  the  sentence. 

24L 1 .  The  following  Jive  verbs  denote  various  feelings, 
and  are  used  in  the  third  person  sing,  of  the  imperfect 
tenses,  and  form  perfects  also  of  the  active  or  passive 
forms  as  given  below : 

1.  misere-  denoting  pity,        perfect  miserito-. 

2.  pige-  reluctance,     "    pigu-  or  pigito-. 

3.  poenite-      "         repentance,      "     poenitu-. 

4.  pude-  shame,  "     pudu-  or  pudito-. 

5.  taede-         "        weariness,        "    taedu-  or  pertaeso-. 

24:2.  With  these  verbs, 

The  person  feeling  is  put  in  the  accusative. 
The  thing  felt  about  "   "      "     genitive. 

Sometimes  however  instead  of  the  genitive  we  find  an 
infinitive  mood,  and  sometimes  a  neuter  pronoun,  some- 
times a  secondary  sentence  with  quod,  and  sometimes  a 
nominal  question ;  each  of  which  may  be  regarded  as  the 
subject  of  the  verb. 


242.] 


LESSON  cxxxym. 


183 


EXAMPLES. 


Person. 

Thing. 

Miseret 

nos 

eorum. 

Poenitet 

me 

stultitiae. 

Taedebit 

vos 

ignuviae. 

Pudet 

me 

vixisse  tur- 

piter. 

We  pity  them. 
I  repent  of  my  folly. 
Ye  will  be  weary  of  sloth. 
I  am  ashamed  of  having 
lived  dishonorably. 


EXERCISE  224. 

1.  Upright  men  rarely  repent  of  their  actions  and  plans.  2.  There 
are  (some)  who  are  neither  ashamed  of  infamy  nor  are  weary  (of  it).  3. 
Those-men  who  have  lived  otherwise  than  was-right  (decuit)  repent 
most  of  their  sins,  when  they  have  been  visited  by  a  severe  and  deadly 
disease.  4.  I  saw  him  wretched,  and  I  pitied  him.  5.  I  do  not  repent 
of-having-lived  (infin.},  since  (quoniam)  I  have  so  lived,  that  I  think  I 
was  not  born  in- vain.  6.  I  am  not  ashamed  to  confess  (that  I)  do-not- 
know  (nesci-)  (that)  which  I-do-not-know. 


LESSON    CXXXVIII. 


EXERCISE  225. 


1.  All-men  are  ashamed  to  confess  that  they  are  worthy  of-punish- 
ment.  2.  We  have  often  repented  of  speaking,  never  of  keeping-silence 
(tace-).  3.  Do  you  repent  that  (quod)  I  have  led-across  the  army  safe 
(salvo-)  ?  4.  "We  more  pity  those  who  do  not  seek-for  (requir-)  pity 
than  (those)  who  loudly-claim  (efflagita-}  it.  5.  "We  are  absolutely 
(prorsus)  weary  of  life.  6.  We  were  weary  of  the  new  magistrates. 


184  LESSON  CXXXIX.  [243,  244. 

LESSON    CXXXIX. 

243.  The  two  impersonal  verbs  lice-  "be  allowed" 
(perfect  lieu-  or  licito-)  and  libe-  "be  pleasing"  (perfect 
libu-  or  libito-)  have  for  the  most  part  the  following  con- 
struction : 

For  the  person,  For  the  thing, 

The  Dative  case.  (1.)  a  neuter  pronoun. 
(2.)  an  infinitive  mood. 

Lice-  has  also  frequently  the  thing  expressed  by  the 
subjunctive  mood  without  ut.  The  person  with  both 
is  often  omitted. 

EXAMPLES. 

Quantum  liceat  vobls  spec-  You   are   bound  to   see  how 

tare  debetis.  much  is  allowed  you. 

Nemini  licet  contra  patriam  No  one  may  lead  an  army 

ducere  exercitum.  against  his  country. 

Facite  quod  vobls  libet.  Do  what  is  pleasing  to  you. 

Non   libet    mihi    deplorare  /  don't  like  to  complain  of 

vltam.  life. 

Fremant  omnes  licet,  dlcam  Let  the  world  howl,  I  will 

quod  sentio.  still  speak  my  mind. 

Non  mihi  licuit  esse  pigro.  I  was  not  allowed  to  be  lazy. 

244.  NOTE. — 1st.  It  is  from  the  use  of  licet,  as  shown  in  the  last 
sentence  but  one,  that  it  came  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  a  concessive 
subjunction,  meaning  "although." 

245.  2d.  When  lice-,  as  in  the  last  sentence,  has  depending  on  it 
an  infinitive  mood  which  requires  a  noun  or  adjective  with  it  to  com- 
plete its  meaning,  this  noun  or  adjective  must  of  course  (§  79)  be  in  the 
same  case  as  the  noun  which  precedes  the  infinitive  as  its  subject :  i.  e. 
under  these  circumstances  generally  in  the  dative. 

EXERCISE  226. 

1.  Themistocles  was  allowed  to  be  at-leisure  (otidso-).  2.  Why  do 
ye  pursue  this  wretched  and  insignificant  (tenui-)  booty,  who  may  now 
be  most  fortunate.  3.  Let  Pompey,  (now  thai  he  is)  dead,  be  allowed 
to-be-free-from  (care-)  the  charge  of  crime.  4.  It  has  pleased  you  to 
impel  me  to  these-things.  5.  It  shall  be  allowed  (you)  to  be  rich  in 
cattle  and  much  land.  6.  In  this  subject  (genes-)  I  may  not  be  neg- 
ligent. 


246,  247.]  LESSON  CXL.  185 


LESSON    CXL. 

2  IO.  The  two  impersonal  verbs  dece-  "befitting," 
(perfect  decu-)  oporte-  "  be  right,"  (perfect  oportu-)  have 
an  accusative  case  Of  the  person,  and  gen- 
erally an  infinitive  mood  to  express  the  thing.  But  oporte- 
often  has  the  subjunctive  mood  after  it  without  ut,  to  ex- 
press both  person  and  thing. 

247.  As  we  saw  in  the  last  lesson  that  lice-  can  often 
be  translated  by  may  or  might,  so  oporte-  may  frequently 
be  best  rendered  by  ought  or  must.  But  as  these  English 
verbs  have  no  forms  to  express  finished  actions,  we  are  in 
our  language  obliged  to  denote  the  past  existence  of  a  pos- 
sibility or  an  obligation  by  using  the  perfect  infinitive  after 
those  verbs ;  e.  g.,  "  I  might  have  seen  him :"  "  I  ought  to 
have  attended  to  the  matter."  But  in  Latin  the  corre- 
sponding verbs  lice-  and  oporte-  having  all  the  past  and 
perfect  tenses,  must  be  followed  by  the  imperfect 
infinitive,  the  time  of  the  possibility  or  the  obligation  being 
sufficiently  expressed  by  the  tense  of  lice-  or  oporte-.  The 
same  remark  applies  to  the  use  of  the  personal  verbs 
debe-  "  owe"  and  potes-  "  be  able."  It  is  hoped  that  the 
teacher  will  pay  particular  attention  to  this  point,  and 
make  his  pupils  fully  comprehend  the  difference  of  the 
English  and  Latin  modes  of  expression  in  the  following 
examples. 

Oportet  me  ire.  /  ought  to  go. 

Oportuit  me  ire.  /  ought  to  have  gone. 

Decet  me  tacere.  It  is  fitting  I  should  be  silent. 

Decuit  me  tacere.  /  should  have  been  silent. 

Licet  tibi  Ire.  You  may  go. 

Licuit  tibi  Ire.  You  might  have  gone. 

Debet  patriam  defendere.  He  ought  to  defend  his  country. 

Debuit  patriam  defendere.  He  ought  to  have  defended  his 

country. 
16* 


186  LESSON  CXLL  [248,  249. 

EXERCISE  227. 

1.  Ye  see  that  all  that  money  out  of  the  treasury,  which  ought  to 
have  been  given  for  (pro)  the  corn  to-the  states,  has-been  appropriated 
(lucrlfac(i)-)  by  that-man  (into-).  2.  We  ought  not  to  think  that  the  good- 
will of  the  citizens  is  an  insignificant-aid  (mediocre  telum]  for  (ad) 
carrying-on  affairs,  3.  You  ought  to  love  me  myself  (ipso-)  not  my- 
goods  (meo-).  4.  It  is  by-no-means  (minime)  becoming  for  an  orator 
to  be  angry.  5.  Ought  he  not  to  have  shed  his  blood  for  his  country  ? 
6.  By  her  own  charms  virtue  herself  ought  to-attract  (traJi-)  you  to  true 
glory  (decos-). 


LESSON    CXLL 

24:8.  The  two  impersonal  verbs  interes-  and  refer- 
have  nearly  the  same  meaning,  "be  of  importance." 
For  the  construction  of  these  verbs  we  must  notice  three 
particulars — 

1st.  The  thing*  which  is  of  importance  is  expressed 
by    (a)  an  infinitive  mood, 

or  (b)  an  interrogative  word  with  the  subjunctive, 
or  (c)  ut  or  ne  with  the  subjunctive, 
or  (d)  a  neuter  pronoun. 

2d.  The  person  to  whom  it  is  of  importance  is 
expressed 

(a)  by  the  genitive  case  of  a  noun  ;  but 

(b)  the  ablative  singular  feminine  of  the  posses- 

sive pronouns  meo-  tuo-  nostro-  vestro-  suo-  is 
used  instead  of  the  genitive  cases  of  the 
personal  pronouns. 

3d.  The  degree  of  importance  is  expressed  by 

(a)  the  adverbs  multum,  magnopere,  &c. 

(b)  by   the  genitives   of  indefinite  value,  magrii 

parvl,  &c* 

*  249.  It  was  said  in  §  62,  that  the  price  at  which  a  thing  was 
bought  was  expressed  by  the  ablative.  But  if  it  be  only  stated 
ill  general  and  indefinite  terms,  that  the  value  is  large, 
small,  &c.,  a  genitive  case  is  ordinarily  employed,  as:  virtus  volup- 
tatem  minimi  facit.  Virtue  thinks  very  little  of  pleasure. 


249.]  LESSON  CXLII.  18t 

EXAMPLES. 

Interest  omnium  bonam  vi-  It  is  the  interest  of  all  to 
tarn  agere.  lead  a  good  life. 

Mea  refert  magnl  quid  hie  It  is  of  great  moment  to  me 
velit.  what  this  man  means. 

Vestra  interest  ne  impera-  It  is  your  interest  that  the 
torem  pessiml  faciant.  worst  men  should  not  elect 

their  general. 

Illud  tua  nihil  refer  ebat.  That  was  of  no  importance 

to  you. 

Hoc  ego  et  mea  et  re!  pub-  /  think  this  to  be  for  my  in- 
licae  et  maxime  tua  in-  terest,  and  for  the  state's, 
teresse  arbitror.  and  most  of  all  for  yours. 

EXERCISE  228. 

1.  It  is  the  interest  of  an  orator  to  teach,  to  charm,  to  rouse  (per- 
move-)  the  minds  of  those-hearing  (him.)  2.  A  philosopher  is  said, 
when-dying,  to  have  accused  nature,  because  (quod)  (she  had  given)  to 
stags  and  crows  a  long  (diuturna-)  life,  to  whom  that  (id)  was  of  no 
(nihil)  moment,  (while)  she  had  given  to  men,  to  whom  it-would-have- 
made-the-greatest-difference  (maxime  interfuisset)  so  petty  (exigua-)  a 
life.  3.  It  is  of  more  importance  to  none  than  to  yourself,  that  a  bur- 
den should  not  be  imposed  on  your  shoulders  (cervlc-),  under  which  you 
may  sink  (concid-).  4.  Caesar  was-accustomed  to  say  that  it  was  not 
so-much  (tarn)  for  his  own  as  (quam)  for  the  state's  interest,  that  he 
should  be  safe.  5.  I  will  point-out  in-another  place,  how  much  it  is  of 
moment  to  the  common  safety  that-there-should-be  two  consuls  in  the 
republic.  6.  It  is  of  great  importance  to-us-all  (nostrd  omnium)  whether 
men  are  happy  or  wretched. 


LESSON    CXLII. 

-    EXERCISE  229. 

1.  Ariovistus  replied,  that  he  ought  not  to  be  impeded  in-the-exer- 
crcise-of  (in)  his  right  (jus-)  by  the  Roman  people.  2.  I  thought  it-was- 
proper  (dece-)  to  write-out-at-length  (perscrlb-)  one  of  (ex)  the  many 
speeches  of  this  tribune.  3.  He  pointed  out  how-greatly  (quanta  opere) 
it  was  for  the  interest  of  the  common  safety  that  the  bands  of  the  enemy 
should-be-kept-apart  (distine-.)  4.  I  feel  both  shame  and  vexation 
at  the  manners  of  the  state.  5.  Are  not  citizens  allowed  to  send 


188  LESSON  CXLIII.  [25O-252. 

ambassadors  to  citizens  about  peace,  which  has  been  allowed  even  to 
fugitive-slaves  and  brigands?  6.  Was  the  young-man  sorry  for  the 
crime  which  at-your-iustigation  (te  auctore)  he  had  committed  (fac(f)-). 


LESSON    CXLIII. 

95O.  We  have  now  to  speak  of  conditional 
propositions. 

A  conditional  proposition  is  one  which  does  not  assert 
a  fact  absolutely,  but  asserts  its  dependence  upon  another 
fact ;  e.  g.,  "  If  we  are  attacked,  we  will  resist."  In  this 
sentence  (called  a  conditional  or  hypothetical  proposi- 
tion) neither  of  the  facts  spoken  about  is  asserted  abso- 
lutely ;  but  it  is  only  said  that  the  second  depends  upon  the 
first,  in  so  far  as  this,  that  if  the  first  occur  the  second  will. 
The  first  part  of  such  a  sentence,  containing  the  subj unc- 
tion "  if,"  is  called  the  condition ;  the  second  part  is  called 
the  assertion.  It  must  be  perfectly  understood  that  neither 
of  these  parts  is  affirmed  absolutely ;  the  only  thing  declared 
is  the  fact  that  there  is  a  connection  between  the  two. 

It  is  very  important  to  understand  the  modes  in  which 
conditional  propositions  of  different  sorts  are  represented 
in  Latin :  but  it  is  not  possible  in  this  book  fully  to  explain 
them.  We  shall  endeavor  only  to  state  the  rule  for  the 
three  most  important  forms :  and  it  is  hoped  that,  if  these 
are  completely  comprehended,  other  varieties  as  they  oc- 
cur in  reading  may  be  easily  understood. 

25 1 .  It  has  been  stated  that  a  conditional  proposition 
declares  the  connection  of  the  condition  and  the  as- 
sertion.     When  this  is  all  that  is  implied,  of  course 
the  speaker  does  not  indicate  any  doubt  that  the  facts 
spoken  of  may  be  real :  and  consequently  in  Latin,  the  in- 
dicative mood  is  employed  both  in  the  condition  and  the 
assertion,  when  all  that  is  declared  or  implied  is  the  lact 
Of  the  Connection  between  the  two. 

252.  NOTE. — Sometimes  in  place  of  the  assertion  a  command  is 
giveu,  dependent  upon  the  condition ;  in  this  ca. «»,  of  course,  the  im- 
perative mood  is  employed  instead  of  the  indicative. 


203.]  LESSON  CXLY.  189 


EXERCISE   230. 

1.  If  we  leave-off  war,  we  shall  never  enjoy  peace.  2.  There  is 
nothing  which  I  should  fear  if  after  death  I  am  destined-to-be  (futuro-) 
either  not  wretched  or  even  happy.  3.  If  I  see  you,  I  shall  breathe- 
again  (fut.  per/,  in  both  clauses).  4.  If  I  have  (fut.)  you,  I  shall  not 
seem  to  myself  to  have  perished  utterly  (plane).  5.  I  will  speak,  if  I 
can  (fut.)  in-Latin  (Latlne).  6.  If  the  heart,  or  the  blood,  or  the  brain, 
is  the  soul,  it  will  perish  (interi-}  along- with  the  body. 


LESSON  CXLIY 

EXERCISE  231. 

1.  Prove  (export-)  if  you  can,  that  the  souls  remain  after  death.  2. 
If  the  consent  of  all-men  is  the  voice  of  nature,  we  also  ought  to  think 
the  same-thing.  3.  If  you  do  not  see  what  this  is,  at-least  (at)  you  see 
of-what-kind  (qudk)  it-is.  4.  If  I  have  sinned  at-all  (quid)  against  (in) 
you.  pardon-me.  5.  If  you  so  bear  those-things  which  have  happened, 
as  I  hear  (you  do),  I  ought  rather  to  congratulate  your  virtue  than  to 
console  your  sorrow.  6.  If  we  are  able  (fut.)  to  be  together  (Una)  less 
than  we  wish  (fut.)  we  shall  nevertheless  enjoy  communion  of  soul 
(plur.)  and  the  same  pursuits. 


LESSON    CXLY. 

We  have  seen  that  the  indicative  mood  is  regularly 
employed  in  both  the  condition  and  assertion  of  a  condi- 
tional proposition  when  nothing  more  is  implied  than  the 
fact  of  the  connection  between  the  two  clauses. 

25$.  But  if  in  addition  to  this  the  speaker  intends  to 
indicate  that  he  is  distinctly  conscious  of  the 
possibility  that  the  facts  spoken  of  may  be  falsely 
assumed,  while  they  may  yet  possibly  be  truly  stated, 
the  subjunctive  mood  in  one  of  the  present 
tenses  £9  employed  in  both  clauses. 

It  will  be  observed  that  the  meaning  here  assigned  to 


190  LESSON  CXLYI. 

the  present  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  is  such  as  to  im- 
ply, that  the  difference  between  the  import  of  a  condi- 
tional proposition  with  its  verbs  in  the  present  tenses  of 
the  subjunctive,  and  one  which  has  its  verbs  in  the  indic- 
ative is  often  very  slight. 


EXERCISE  232. 

1.  If  your  country  were  to  speak  with  you  thus  (haec)  ought  (debe-j 
she  not  to  gain-her-prayer  (impetra-)  ?  2.  If  a-man  (quis)  should  wish  to 
revile  philosophy  iu  general  (universa-)  he  would  be  able  to  do  it  with-the- 
people  on-his-side  (secundo-).  3.  If  that-man,  who  has  deposited  money 
with  (apud)  you,  should  wage  war  upon-his  country  (dot.)  you  would 
not  give-back  the  deposit  4.  The  da}-  would  fail  me  if  I  should  wish 
to  enumerate  (the  men),  to  whom,  (though)  good,  (fortune)  has  turned- 
out  (eveni-)  ill  (male).  5.  If  a-man  (quis)  should  have  deposited  a  sword 
with  you  (when)  in-a-sound  mind,  and  should  ask-it-again  (repet-)  when- 
insane  (insanient-)  it  would-be  a  sin  to  give-it-back,  a  kindness  not-to- 
give-it-back.  6.  I  should  be-sorry  if  I  thought  that  after  (ad)  ten 
thousand  years  (gen.)  some  (aliqua-)  nation  would  gain-possession  of  our 
city. 


LESSON    CXLYI. 

.  We  have  now  to  mention  the  third  main  class 
of  conditional  propositions. 

When  the  speaker  wishes  not  only  to  affirm  the  con- 
nection between  the  condition  and  the  assertion,  but  also 
to  indicate  his  knowledge  or  belief  of  the  false- 

llOOd  of  the  assumption  made,  he  uses  the  past  tenses 
of  the  subjunctive  mood  in  both  clauses:  the  past  imper- 
fect, if  the  assumption  have  reference  to  present  time ;  the 
past  perfect,  if  it  have  reference  to  past  time. 

NOTE. — Often  the  2d  half  only  (the  assertion)  of  a  conditional  prop- 
osition is  expressed;  but  its  tense  will  always  show  what  kind  of 
condition  is  to  be  supplied. 

The  following  table  may  perhaps  be  useful,  in  fixing  in 
the  pupils'  minds  the  foregoing  distinctions. 


254.] 

There  are 
sitions,  with 
port : 

First  Form. 


Second  Form. 


Third  Form. 


LESSON  CXLYI. 


191 


three  principal  forms  of  conditional  propo- 
the  following  distinctions  of  tense  and  im- 


Tenses. 
any  of  the 
indicative. 


the  present  of  the 
subjunctive. 


the  past  of  the 
subjunctive. 


Import. 

mere    connection 
clauses. 


of 


of 


•  (1)  Connection 

clauses. 

(2)  Suspicion  of   the 
incorrectness  of 

the  assumption  made. 

•  (1)  Connection        of 

clauses. 
(2)  Knowledge        or 
belief  of  the  in- 
correctness      of 
the  assumption  made.  % 


The  foil  owing  exercise  contains  examples  of  the  third 
class. 


EXERCISE  233. 

1.  Hercules  never  would  have  gone-away  to  the  gods,  unless  (nisi), 
when  he  was  among  men,  he  had  made  (muni-)  that  way  for-himself. 
2.  If  your  parents  feared  you,  and  you  could  not  appease  them  by 
any  means  (ration-)  you  would  retire  as  I  think  (oplnor)  from  their 
eyes  somewhither  (aliquo)  3.  If  Ulysses  had  wandered  less  (than 
he  did)  he  would  have  been  less  known  (than  he  is).  4.  Philosophy 
never  would  have  been  in  so-great  honor,  unless  it  had  grown-strong 
(vige-)  by  the  contentions  and  discussions  of  the  most-learued-men.  5. 
If  you  remained  in  your  opinion  (you)  ought-to-be-ashamed  (gerundive) 
more.  6.  If  there  were  nothing  else  in  human  nature,  nothing  would 
be  more  ill-formed  (dtformi-)  than  man. 


192  LESSON  CXLTOL  [255,  256. 

LESSON    CXLYII. 

EXERCISE  234. 

1.  If  Hannibal  were  alive,  we  should  already  have  war  with  the 
Romans.  2.  If  we  wish  to  obtain  a  happy  life,  attention  must  be  given 
to  virtue,  without  which  we  can  reach  neither  friendship  nor  any  thing 
worth -seeking-for  (expetenda-).  3.  If  the  people  were  to  meet  (con- 
gred(i)-)  with  you,  and  if  it  were  able  to  speak  with-one  voice,  it  would 
say  as-follows  (haec).  4.  If  I  had  known  that  you  were  there,  I-myself 
would  have  come  to  you,  5.  If  your  father  were-alive,  he  would  be 
among  (in)  the  chief-men  (princep-)  of  the  state.  6.  If  Pompey  had 
then  been-destroyed,  would  he  have  departed  from  good  circumstances 
or  from  bad-ones  ?  undoubtedly  (certe)  from  wretched-ones ;  for-(then)- 
he-would-not  (non  enim)  have  carried-on  war  with  (his)  father-in-law ; 
he  would  not  without-preparation  (impardto-)  have  taken-up  arms;  he 
would  not  have  left  (his)  home ;  he  would  not  have  fled  out-of  Italy ; 
Ae  would  not,  after-having-lost  (his)  army,  have  fallen  (incid-)  defence- 
less (nudo-}  upon  (in)  the  sword,  and  (into)  the  hands  of  slaves  ;  (his) 
children  would  not  have  been  crushed  (dele-) ;  all  his  fortunes  would 
not  (now)  be  possessed  by  the  conquerors. 


LESSON    CXLYIII. 

In  the  classification  of  pronouns  in  §  93  there  were  six 
sorts  mentioned.  Of  these  we  have  spoken  of  all  but 
the  indefinite,  and  they  must  now  be  treated  of. 

25o.  Indefinite  pronouns  refer  to  objects 
which  the  speaker  either  cannot  or  does  not  choose  to 
specify  distinctly.  There  are  several  of  these  in  Latin, 
each  with  some  difference  of  meaning  or  use.  We  shall 
only  mention  the  principal  ones  here. 

2oG.  The  simplest  of  the  indefinite  pronouns  both  in 
form  and  meaning  is  quo-,  which  is  declined  like  the  rel- 
ative pronoun,  except  partly  in  the  nominative  and  accu- 
sative singular  and  plural,  which  are  as  follows : 
Singular.  Plural. 

m.         f.          n.  m.         f.        n. 

Norn.        quis       qua       quid         qui       quae     qua 

Ace.  quern     quam    quid         quos     quas     qua 


257.J  LESSON  C5LIX.  193 

Besides  these,  we  have  forms  exactly  the  same  as  those 
of  the  relative  when  the  indefinite  pronoun  is  used  adjec- 
tively:  i.  e.,  in  agreement  with  a  noun. 

Quo-  is  always  enclitic :  i.  e.,  always  stands  after  and  is 
attached  in  sound  to  another  word :  and  very  often  after 
the  relative  pronoun  and  si,  nis$,  ne,  num. 

It  generally  represents  such  English  expressions  as  "  a 
man,"  "any  one,"  "any  thing"  when  wholly  unemphatic. 

EXAMPLES. 

Proprium  est  quod  quis  acre     What  a  man  has  bought 

mercatus  est.  with  money  is  his  own. 

Pedites,  si  quid  erat  durius,     The  foot    soldiers    would 
concurrebant.  run  together  if  any  thing 

of  more  than  ordinary 
difficulty  occurred. 

EXERCISE  235. 

1.  If  they  have  reached  any  excellence  of  virtue,  ability,  fortune, 
let  them  impart  it  to-their-own  (friends).  2.  No-one  ought  to  think, 
that  if  Socrates  did  or  spoke  (aor.  subj.)  any-thing  against  the  custom 
and  habit  of-citizens  (clvlli-,  adj.)  the-same  thing  is-allowed  to  him.  3. 
Let  not  a  man  disdain  as  (tanquam)  small  the  elements  of  grammar. 
4.  Does  a  man  feel-anger  (irasc-,  dep.)  with  boys  (dat.)  whose  age  knows 
(novit)  not-yet  the  differences  of  things  ?  (No).  5.  They  have-it  estab- 
lished (sancto-)  by  the  laws,  if  a  man  has  learned  (accip(i)-)  any-thing  from 
the  neighbors  concerning  public  affairs  (sing.},  by  rumor  or  report,  that 
(uti)  he  mention-it  (defer-)  to  a  magistrate.  Q.  When  (ubi)  once  a  man 
has-forsworn-himself  (fut.  perf.)  he  ought  not  afterward  to  be  believed 
(impers.). 


LESSON    CXLIX. 

257.  We  have  said  that  the  enclitic  quo-  is  the  most 
simple  of  the  indefinite  pronouns  in  form  and  meaning. 
From  this  are  derived  the  others  of  which  we  must  now 
speak ;  and  it  will  be  best  to  arrange  these  in  order,  with 
their  differences  stated  generally,  reserving  a  fuller  state- 
ment of  each  for  special  exercises, 
it 


194  LESSON  CXLIX.  [25§,  259 

(1.)  quo-que  implies  that  each  one  of  a  class  is  referred  to  separately. 
{  )  qt   -     e  i     „         „    any  ^^  oj.  a  cjasg  -g  referre(j  ^0,  as  you  please. 

(3.)  quo-dam  "  "  some  particular  one,  known  to  the  speaker  is  re- 
ferred to. 
(4.)  aliquo-  "  "  $0m«  particular  one,  not  necessarily  known,  is 

[referred  to, 
(5.)  quo-quam  "  "  hardly  any  one,  perhaps  notf  a  5tn^2e  o«e,  can  be 

[referred  to. 

From  this  general  statement  it  will  be  seen  that  the 
difference  of  these  indefinite  pronouns  consists  in  the 
latitude  or  range  of*  selection  of  the  indi- 
viduals in  a  class,  which  the  speaker  suggests  as 
possible.  We  will  give  exercises  on  them  in  the  above 
order. 

258.  NOTE. — In  all  these  words  it  is  the  quo-  which  is  declined,  the 
other  part  of  each  word,  whether  coming  before  or  after  quo-  remaining 
unaltered.     The  same  rule  holds  here  which  was  given  for  quo-,  viz., 
that  the  forms  quis,  qua,  quid,  are  for  the  most  part  used  as  nouns,  qul, 
quae,  quod,  as  adjectives. 

259.  QllO-que  can  generally  be  rendered  "  each"  : 
but  it  is  used  in  several  idiomatic  expressions  which  will 
best  be  understood  from  examples. 

1st.  Quam  quisque  norit  Let  each  man  exercise  him- 

artem,  in  hac  se  exer-  self  in  the  art  which  he 

ceat.  knoics. 

Quod  cuique  obtigit,  id  Let  each  man  keep  what  has 

quisque  teneat.  fallen  to  him. 

NOTE. — Tn  this  use  of  quo-que  in  relative  sentences,  it  is  particularly 
to  be  observed  that  quo-que  stands  in  the  secondary  clause,  and  not 
(as  "  each"  does  in  English)  in  the  primary  one,  unless  as  in  the  sec- 
ond example,  it  is  found  in  both. 

2d.  Suum  cuique  tribuen-  His  own  ought  to  be  as- 

dum  est.  signed  to  each  man. 

Suum  quisque  noscat  in-  Let  each  man  learn  his  own 

genium.  capacity. 

NOTE. — "When  quo-que  is  used  with  the  reflexive  pronoan,  it  nearly 
always  stands  immediately  after  it. 


260.]  LESSON  CL.  195 

3d.  Omnes  idem  faciunt,  All  men  do  the  same  thing, 

sed  optiraus  quisque  op-  but  the  best  man  (does  h) 

time.  best. 

Sapientissirrms  quisque  vir-  The  wisest  man  loves  virtue 

tutern  maxime  amat.  most. 

NOTE. — Superlative  adjectives  thus  used  with  quo-que  are  found  for 
the  most  part  in  the  singular,  but  not  unfrequentty  in  the  neuter  plural. 

4th.  Non  omnibus  annis  This  does  not  occur  every 

hoc  fit,  sed  tertio  quo-  year,  but  only  every  third 

que  anno.  year. 

Priino  quoque  tempore  de  At  the  earliest  possible  mo- 

consulis  honore  ad  sena-  ment  a  motion  was  made 

turn  refertur.  to  the  senate  about  the 

honor  of  the  Consul. 


EXERCISE     236. 

1.  Money  has  always  been  despised  by  the  most  distinguished  (amplo-) 
and  illustrious  (man).  2.  I  believe  (it  to  be)  most  foolish  not  to  propose 
the  best  (examples)  for  (ad)  imitation  (gerund).  3.  Posterity  pays-back 
to  each  his  own  (proper)  honor.  4.  Each-man  is  best  known  to-himself, 
and  each-man  perceives-the-truth  (senti-)  about  himself  with-most- 
difficulty.  5.  Each  man  sought  for  himself  the  first  place  in-the-march 
(gen.}  and  hastened  to  reach  (perveni-)  his-home.  6.  They  were  ex- 
cited at-every  third  word  (abl)  and  denied  that  money  had  been  given 
to  the  man. 


LESSON    CL. 

26O.  The  two  indefinite  pronouns  quo-libct  and 

<|11O  VftS  are  really  compounded  of  the  pronoun  quo- 
and  the  impersonal  libet,  or  the  2d  pers.  sing.  pres.  im- 
perf.  indie,  of  vol-,  and  therefore  indicate  that  any  selec- 
tion you  please  may  be  made  of  the  individuals  of  the 
class  referred  to. 

If  the  class  consists  of  two  only,  utro-vis  or  utro-libet 
are  used  instead  of  quo-vis  and  quo-libet. 


196  LESSON  CM.  [261. 


EXAMPLES. 

Qulvls  homo  potest  quem-  Any  man  can  put  forth  any 

vis  turpem  de  qudlibet  disgraceful  report  you 

rumorem  proferre.  please  about  any  one. 

Utrumlibet  elige,  alterum  Choose  which  of  the  two 

incredibile  est,  alterum  you  like:  the  one  is  in- 

nefarium.  credible,  the  other  mon- 
strous. 

NOTE. — The  forms  with  quis  and  qua  do  not  occur. 


EXERCISE  237. 

1.  He  was  accustomed  to  get-up  (fing-}  any  abuse  (pi.)  (you  please) 
against  (in)  any-one.  2.  The  Germans  dare,  however  (quamvls)  few 
(they  may  be)  to  advance  (adi-)  toward  any  number  (you  like)  of  horse- 
soldiers  bn-saddles  (ephippialo-.  adj.).  3.  If  any.  even  (vel)  the  least 
thing  shall  be  discovered,  we  do  not  object  that  (quln)  the  life  of  this 
man  be  surrendered  to  the  lust  of  those-persons.  4.  He  resolved  to 
accomplish  his  undertaking  by  any  means  (sing.).  5.  So  great  was  the 
violence  of  the  injuries  that  men  preferred  (malr)  to  endure  any-thing 
(rather)  than  not  to  lament  and  complain-bitterly  about  the  wickedness 
of  that-man  (isto-).  6.  You  would  be  glad  (gaude-)  to  receive  a  kind- 
ness from  any -body. 


LESSON    CLI. 

2G1.  The  indefinite  pronoun  4JI1O  (lain  implies 
that  the  range  of  selection  among  the  individuals  of  the 
class  referred  to  is  not  unlimited,  but  that  some  one  or 
more  individuals  known  (or  assumed  to  be  known)  to  the 
speaker  are  intended.  It  can  often  be  rendered  in  Eng- 
lish by  the  words  "  a  certain  one,"  <fec.,  and  we  sometimes 
find  in  Latin  "  certus  quldam."  It  is  often  used  to  mod- 
ify some  strong  epithet  or  metaphor. 


262.]  LESSON  CLII. 


EXAMPLES. 

Non  pugnas  narrat,   quod    He  does   not  talk  of  his 
quidam  facit.  battles  as  a  certain  per- 

son (I  could  name)  does. 

In    his    divlnum    quiddam    He  used  to  say  that  in  these 
esse  dlcebat.  there  was  something  di- 

vine. 

NOTE. — The  forms  with  quis  and  qua  are  not  used. 


EXERCISE  238. 

1.  That  man  had  a  kind-of  (qua-darn)  divine  memory  of  facts,  a 
greater  (one)  of  words.  2.  A  certain-one  of  (ex)  the  counsellors,  a  man 
endowed  with-the-highest  virtue,  said  that  he  understood  the  whole 
matter.  3.  There  was  a  certain  time  when  men  wandered  in  the 
fields.  4.  I  discovered  (cognosc-)  that  there  was  in  you  some  distin- 
guished and  illustrious  ability  for  (ad)  speaking  (gerund).  5.  Insult  haa 
a  sort  of  sting  (in  it)  which  men  of-respectability  (bono-,  adj.)  can  with- 
the-greatest-difficulty  bear.  6.  There  are  some-persons  so  unmusical 
in-voice  that  they  can  never  come  into  the  number  of  orators. 


LESSON    CLII. 

262.  AliqilO-  implies  that  some  particular  individ- 
ual of  the  class  referred  to  must  be  selected,  though  it 
may  not  be  known  which.  It  answers  for  the  most  part 
to  the  English  "  some"  when  used  with  emphasis,  in  op- 
position to  "much,"  "all,"  &c.,  in  such  phrases  as  the  fol- 
io whig  :  u  If  we  cannot  gain  much,  we  may  at  least  expect 
some  reward."  The  same  general  meaning  is  found 
in  various  adverbs  compounded  with  the  particle  ali-. 
When  the  words  answering  to  "  all,"  "  much,"  &c.,  are 
not  expressed,  aliquo-  often  has  the  meaning  of  something 
considerable  or  important. 
17* 


198  LESSON  CLIII.  [263,  264. 

QllO-piam  is  another  indefinite  pronoun  which  is 
nearly  the  same  as  aliquo-  in  sense,  though  it  is  not  used 
in  the  same  emphatic  way. 


EXAMPLES. 

Est  hoc  aliquid,  tametsi  non  This  is  something,  yet  not 

est  satis.  enough. 

Vis  me  esse  aliquem.  You  wish  me  to  be  some- 
body. 

Si  pars  aliqua  ceciderit,  at  Suppose  some  part  hasfall- 

reliquos  servarl  posse  con-  en,  yet  they  are  sure  the 

f  idunt.  rest  can  be  saved. 


EXERCISE  239. 

1.  Name  some  one  (man)  (in-particular).  2.  That-(remark)-of-yours 
is  something,  but-by-no-means  (nequaquam)  are  all-things  (included)  in 
it  (isto-).  3.  This  fame  will  bring  to-}rou  some  safety.  4.  I  think  that 
nothing  has-been-passed-by  by  me,  but  that  something-considerable 
has-been-kept-back  for  (ad)  the  last  part  of  the  cause.  5.  It  is  not 
your  fault,  if  some-people  feared  you;  and  on -the -contrary  (contra)  (it 
is)  the  highest  praise  that  (qtwd )  most-men  (plerlque)  judged  (cense-) 
that  you  were  by-no-means  (minime)  to-be-feared.  6.  I  used-to-declaim 
with  Piso,  or  with  Pompey,  or  with  some-one  every-day  (quotldie). 


LESSON    CLIII. 

263.  Quo  qua  ill  implies  that  hardly  any  single 
one,  and  perhaps  none  at  all  of  the  individuals  of  the 
class  can  be  found  to  answer  the  requirements  of  the 
case  spoken  about.     It  follows  from  this  that  it  is  used 
for  the  most  part  in  negative  sentences  or  in  questions 
which  imply  a  negative.      Quo-quam  is  not  used  in  the 
plural,  or  in  the  feminine  of  the  singular,  and  is  always 
used  as  a  noun. 

264.  The  adjective  ullo-  is  used  in  just  the  same 
sense  as  quo-quam. 


265.]  LESSON  CLTIL  199 

EXAMPLES. 

Quamdiu  quisquam  erit,  As  long  as  there  is  a  single 
qui  te  defendere  audeat,  man  found  bold  enough 
vlves.  to  defend  you,  you  shall 

be  allowed  to  live. 

!N"um  censes  ullum  animal,  Do  you  think  that  any  an- 
quod  sanguinem  habeat,  imal  at  all,  which  has 
sine  corde  esse  posse  ?  blood,  can  exist  without 

a  heart  f 

Ueque  ex  castris  Catillnae  Nor  had  any  single  one  of 
quisquam  omnium  exces-  them  all  left  Catiline's 
serat.  camp. 

EXERCISE  240. 

1.  May-T-die,  if  beside  you  I  have  any-single-man  left  (rdiquo-)  in 
whom  I-can  recognize  the  image  of  (our)  ancient  and  national  (ver- 
nacula-)  humor.  2.  You-are-rnistaken  (erra-)  if  you  think  that  I  or 
any-single-one  of  these  expects  from  you  these  daily  works.  3.  The 
Helvetii  said  that  they  would  make  (their)  march  through  the  province 
without  any  wrong-doing  (maleficio-).  4.  The  Bellovaci  said  that  they 
on-their-own  account  (nomen-)  would  carry-on  war  with  the  Romans, 
nor  would  submit  to  the  command  of  any-one-at-all.  5.  The  stability 
of  friendship  can  be  secured,  when  men  shall  control  those  passions  to 
which  others  are-slaves,  nor  shall  demand,  the  one  from  the  other  (alter 
db  altero)  any-thing-at-all  except  (what  is)  honorable  and  right.  6. 
Justice  never  harms  any-single-mau  who  has  it. 


TABLES. 


I.  Endings  of  the  third  declension  for  consonant-stems. 


IVoill.  and  VoC. 
Acc. 
CJen. 


Abl. 


Sing. 

S  (or  none) 
em 


Plur. 
es 

u 

urn 
ibus 


IT.  Examples  of  masculine  and  feminine  nouns  with 
consonant-steins : 


trab-,  beam. 


stirp(i)-,  stock. 


If.  and  T. 
A. 
O. 

Abl. 

Sing. 
trabs 
trabem 
trabia 
trabi 
trabe 

Plur. 
trabes 

trabum 
trabibus 

Sing. 
stirps 
stirpem 
stirpis 
stirpl 
stirpe 

Plur. 
stirpes 

U 

stirpium 

stirpibus 
u 

palud-,  marsh. 

Sing.  Plur. 

If.  and  V.      palus  paludes 
A.               paludem 

O.  paludis  paludum 

1>.  paludi  paludibus 

Abl.         palude  " 


mont(i)-,  mountain. 


Sing. 
monS 
montem 
mentis 
montl 
monte 


Plur. 

montes 

montium 
montibua 


TABLES. 


201 


greg-,  flock.              merc(i)-,  merchandise. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

W.  and  V. 

grex 

greges 

merx 

merces 

A. 

gregem 

N 

mercem 

u 

Ck 

gregis 

gregum 

mereis 

mercium 

I>. 

gregl 

gregibus 

mere! 

mercibus 

Abl. 

grege 

M 

merce 

u 

princep-, 

chief. 

milet-,  soldier. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

W.  and  V. 

princeps 

priucipes 

miles 

milites 

A. 

principem 

M 

militem 

u 

0. 

principis 

principum 

militis 

militum 

I>. 

principi 

principibus 

militl 

mllitibus 

Abl. 

principe 

u 

milite 

u 

homon-,  maw. 

sermon-, 

discourse. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

UT.  and  V. 

homo 

homines 

sermo 

sermones 

A. 

hominern 

M 

sermonem 

u 

0. 

hominis 

hominum 

sermonis 

sermonum 

I> 

hominl 

hominibus 

sermon! 

sennonibus 

Abl. 

homine 

M 

sermone 

u 

flos-,jfl 

'ower.                   patr-,  father. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

•     Plur. 

W.  and  V. 

flos 

flores 

pater 

patres 

A. 

florem 

M 

patrem 

a 

0. 

floris 

florum 

patris 

patrum 

I>. 

flori 

floribus 

patr! 

patribus 

Abl. 

flore 

a 

patre 

tt 

labor-, 

labor. 

exsul-, 

exile. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

W.  and  V. 

labor 

labores 

exsul 

exsules 

A. 

laborem 

u 

exsulem 

« 

0. 

laboris 

laborum 

exsulis 

exsulum 

j) 

labor! 

laboribus 

exsull 

exsulibus 

Abl. 

labore 

« 

exsule 

« 

202 


TABLES. 


HI.  Examples  of  neuter  nouns. 

ones-,  burden.  corpos-,  body. 


If.  and  V. 
A. 
O. 

Abi. 

Sing. 
onus 

a 

oneris 
onerl 
onere 

Plur. 
onera 

onerum 
oneribus 

M 

Sing. 
corpus 

u 

corporis 
corpora 
corpore 

Plur. 
corpora 

M 

corporum 
corporibus 

flumen-,  river. 


calcar(i)-,  spur. 


If.  and  T. 
A. 
0. 

m 

Abl. 

Sing. 
flumen 

M 

fluminis 
flumini 
flumine 

Plur. 

flumina 

it 

fluminum 

fluminibus 
u 

Sing. 
calcar 

u 

calcaris 

calcari 

t< 

Plur. 
calcaria 

calcarium 

calcaribua 
« 

NOTE. — The  abL  sing,  is  made  from  the  stem  calcari-. 


caput-,  head. 

femor-,  thigh. 

Sing.               Plur. 

Sing.               Plur. 

If.  and  T. 

caput               capita 

femur              femora 

A. 

u                      « 

(t                     « 

O. 

capitis             capitmn 

femoris            femorum 

I> 

capitl               capitibus 

femori              femoribus 

Abl. 

capite                    " 

femore                   " 

NOTE. — Cagut-  does  not  omit  the  last  letter  in  the  N.  and  A.  Sing. 


IV.  Examples  of  adjectives,  masculine,  feminine,  and 
neuter,  with  consonant-stems. 

feroc(i)-,  fierce. 

Sing.  Plur. 

Masc.  and  Fern.      Neut,  Masc.  and  Fern.      Neut. 

If.  and  V.             ferox         ferox  feroces               ferocia 

.  A.                      ferocem        "  "                       " 


Abl. 


ferocis 
feroci 
ferocl  or  feroce 


ferocium 
ferocibus 


TABLES.  203 

vetes-,  old. 

Sing.  Plur. 

Masc.  and  Fern.  Neut.  Masc.  and  Fern.        Neut. 

JV.  and  V.  vetua  vetus  veteres  vetera 

A.  veterem  "  "  " 


O.  veteris  veterura 

I>.  veteri  Veteribua 

Abl.  vetere  " 


V.  Endings  of  third  declension  for  z-stems. 

Sing.  Plur. 

W.  and  V.   is  (sometimes  es  or  none)  €s 
A.  em  (sometimes  im)  "  (sometimes  is) 

C3-.  is  iuin 

I>.  i  ibus 

Abl.         e  or  i 

NOTE. — 1st.  These  endings  include  the  stem-vowel. 
2d.  The  ablative  in  I  is  used  for  all  adjectives  and  neuter  nouns  with 
t-stems. 


VI.  Examples  of  masculine  and  feminine  nouns. 

avi-,  bird.  tussi-,  cough. 

Sing.               Plur.  Sing.               Plur. 

N.  and  V.      avis                 aves  tussis              tuss6s 

A.               avem                 "  tussim                 " 

O.               avis                 avium  tussis              tussium 

5>.               avi                  avi  bus  tussi               tussibus 
Abl           ave 

nubi-,  cloud.  lintri-,  wherry. 

Sing.                Plur.  Sing.                Plur. 

W.  and  V.      nubes              nubes  linter               lintrgs 

A.               nubem                 "  lintrem                " 

O.               nubis               nubium  lintris              lintrium 

I>.               nubl                nubibus  lintri               lintribus 

Abl.          nube                   "  lintre                   " 


204  TABLES. 

VII.  Example  of  an  adjective,  exhibiting  the  forms  of 
the  neuter  gender  as  well  as  those  of  the  masculine  and 
feminine. 

NOTE. — All  neuter  nouns  with  i-stems  are  declined  like  the  neuter  of 
this  adjective. 

levi-,  light. 

Sing.  Plur. 

Masc.  and  Fern.      Neut.  Masc.  and  Fern.      Neut. 
If.  and  V.         levis                   leve  leves  levia 

A.  levem  "  "  " 


O.  levis  levium 

1>.  levi  levibus 

AbL  " 


Yin.  The  following  example  is  given  to  exhibit  the 
declension  of  those  adjectives  with  re-stems,  which  have 
distinct  forms  for  the  three  genders  in  the  nom.  sing. 

acri-,  keen. 

Sing.  Plur. 

Masc.          Fern.  Neut.     Masc.  and  FemZ       NeuL 

If.  and  T.      acer  acris  acre  acres  acria 


A.  acrem 


O.  acris  acrium 

J>.  acri  acribus 

AbL 

IX.  Declension  of  a  comparative  adjective, 
acrior-,  acrios-,  more  keen. 

Sing.  Plur. 

Masc.  and  Fern.  Neut.  Masc.  and  Fern.      Neut. 

If.  and  V.          acrior  acrius  acriores         acriora 

A.  acriorem  "  "  " 


O.  acrioris  acriorum 

I>.  acriori  acrioribus 

Abl.  acriore  or  acriori  " 


TABLES.  205 

X.  Endings  of  the  first  declension,  or  of  nouns  with 
a-stems. 

Sing.  Plur. 

W.  and  V.  a  ae 

A.  am  as 

&.  ae  arum 

D.  "  is 

Abl.  a 


XI.  Example  of  a  noun  of  the  first  declension, 
mensa-,  table. 


Sing. 

Plur. 

If.  and  V. 

mensa 

mensae 

A. 

mensam 

mensas 

O. 

mensae 

mensarum 

I>. 

" 

mensis 

Aal.  mensa 

NOTE. — These  endings  include  the  stem-vowel. 


XII.  Endings  of  the  second  declension,  or  of  nouns 
with  o-stems. 

Sing.  Plur. 

Masc.  or  Fern.        Neut.  Masc.  or  Fern.  Neut. 
IV.     US  (rarely  OS)  or  none     um  I  a 


A.     um  (rarely  oiil) 

U                               It                              44 
"                                 OS                          " 

D.                         o 
Abl. 

drum 
is 

44 

NOTE.  —  These  endings  include  the  stem-vowel. 
18 


206 


TABLES. 


XIII.  Examples  of  masculine  or  feminine  nouns  of  the 
second  declension. 


servo-,  slave. 

agro-. 

}fidd. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

W. 

servus 

servi 

ager 

agri 

V. 

serve 

u 

" 

M 

A. 

servum 

servos 

agrum 

agros 

0. 

servi 

servorum 

agri 

agrorum 

I>. 

servo 

servis 

agro 

agris 

Abl. 

The  following  examples  of  adjectives  with  o-stems  are 
given,  as  exhibiting  in  one  view  the  masculine  and  neuter 
forms.  The  feminine  forms  are  also  given,  that  the  com- 
plete declension  of  what  are  called  in  the  grammars 
"  adjectives  of  three  terminations  "  may  be  seen. 


If. 
V. 
A. 

O. 
I>. 

Abl 


bono-,  good. 

Sing.  Plur. 

Most.       Neut.        Fern.            Masc.       Neut.  Fern. 

bonus      bonum     bona            bonl         bona  bonae 

bone            "            "                  "              "  " 

bonum         "          bonam         bonds         "  bonas 


bonl 
bond 
"  bona 


bonorum 
bonis 


bonarum 
bonis 


pulcro-,  beautiful. 


Sing. 
Masc.        Neut 
]¥.        pulcer      pulcrum 

A.       pulcrum        " 

Fern. 
pulcra 

pulcram 
pulcrae 
pulcra 

Plur. 
Masc.       Neut. 

pulcri      pulcra 

u               « 

pulcros        " 

pulcrorum 

pulcris 
u 

Fern. 
pulcrae 
pulcras 
« 

pulcrarum 

pulcris 

i< 

O.                 pulcri 
1>.                 pulcro 
AbL 

XIY.  Endings  of  nouns  of  i\iQ  fourth  declension,  or  of 
nouns  with  w-stems. 


TABLES.  207 

Sing.  Plur. 

Masc.  or  Fern.  Neut.  Masc.  or  Fern.  Neut. 
IV.  and  V.        us                u  us  ua 

A.  um 


G.  its  uuni 

I>.  Ill  (rarely  u)     ubus  or  ibllS 

Abl.  it 

NOTE. — These  endings  include  the  stem-vowel. 

XV.  Examples  of  the  fourth  declension. 

portu-,  harbor.  cornu-  (neut.),  horn. 

Sing.  Plur.  Sing.  Plur. 

If.  and  V.      portus  portus  cornu  cornua 
A.               portura 

G.  portus  portuum  [cornus]  cornuum 

1>.  portul  portibus  cornu  cornibus 

portu  "  cornu  " 


XVI.  Endings  of  the  fifth  declension,  or  of  nouns  with 
e-stems. 

Sing.  Plur. 

IV.  and  V.         es  *  es 
A.                 em 

G.                 el  (sometimes  e)  erum 

D.                  "         "         "  ebus 
Abl.             e 

NOTE. — These  endings  include  the  stem-vowel. 

XVII.  Example  of  the  fifth  declension. 

die-,  day. 

Sing.  Plwr. 

If.  and  V.              dies  dies 

A.                       diem  " 

G.                      die!  dieram 

I>.                        "  diebus 
Abl.                 die 

NOTE.— The  three  words,  re-,  "  thing,"  fide-,  "trust,"  and  spe-,  "hope," 
generally  have  the  e  shortened  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular. 


208  TABLE& 

XVLLL.  Declension  of  domu-  or  domo-,  house. 

Sing.  Plur. 

If.  and  V.          domus  domus 

A.                   doraum  "      or  domes 

O.                   domus  domuum  or  domorum 

I>.                   domui,  or  domo,  locat  doml  domibus 

Abl.              domo  " 


XIX.  Declension  of  vis(i)-,  strength,  and  Deo-,  God. 


W.  and  V. 
A. 
0. 
I> 
Abl. 

Sing. 

VIS 

vim 
via 

VI 

« 

Plur. 
vires 

vlrium 
viribus 

M 

Sing. 
Deus 
Deum 
Dei 

Deo 
ii 

Plur. 
Del,  Dil,  or  Dl 
Deos 
Dedrum  or  Deum 
Deis,  Diis  or  Dis 
«          it 

XIX.  Declension  of  duo-,  two,  and  ambo-,  both. 

duo-,  dua-.  ambo-,  amba-. 

Masc.  Neut.    Fern.          Masc.  Neut.    Fern. 

.  and  V.  duo  duo    duae        ambo  ambo  ambae 

A.  duos  or  duo     "      duas         ambosorambo     "     ambas 


G.  duorum         duarum  amborum          ambarum 

I>.  duobua          duabus  ambobus  ambabus 

Abl. 

NOTE. — All  the  cardinal  numerals  from  four  to  a  hundred,  are  unde- 
clined;  MTIO-,  "  one,"  has  the  genit  and  dative,  lus  and  I  for  all  genders ; 
duo-,  "two,"  is  given  above;  and  tri-,  "  three,"  is  regular. 


OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY 

FROM  THE  EARLIEST  TIMES  TO  THE  EMPERORS. 


NOTE.—  The  numbers  inserted  in  parentheses  refer  to  the  division*  in  the 
preceding  book,  as  marked  in  tfie  margin  and  at  the  head  of  the  pages. 


LIBER   PRIMUS. 

1.  Antiquissimls  temporibus  (54),  Saturnus  in  Italiam 
venisse  (146)  dlcitur.     Ibi  baud  procul  a  Janiculo  arcem 
condidit,  eamque  Saturniam  (79)  appellavit.     Hie  Italos 
primus  agriculturam  (30)  docuit. 

2.  Postea  Latlnus  in  illls  regionibus  imperavit.     Sub 
hoc  rege  Troja  in  Asia  eversa  est.     Hinc  ^Eneas,  Anchi- 
sae  (37)  fllius,  cum  multis  Trojanis,  quibus  (46)  ferrurn 
Graecorum  pepercerat,  aufugit,  et  in  Italiam  (27)  pervenit. 
Ibi  Latmus  rex  e!  benigne  recepto  (128)  filiam  Lavlniam 
in   matrimonium  dedit.     ^Eneas   urbem  condidit,  quam 
(104)  in  honorem  conjugis  (34)  Laviniam  appellavit. 

3.  Post  JEneae  mortem,  Ascanius,  ^Eneae  (37^  fllius, 
regnum  accepit.     Hie  sedem  regni  in  alium  (162)  locurn 
transtulit,  urbemque  condidit  in  monte  Albano  (13),  eam- 
que Albam  longam  nuncupavit.     Eum  (104)  sequutus  est 
Silvius,  qul  post  ^Eneae  mortem  a  Lavlnia  genitus  erat 
(l.  gign-).     ejus  poster!   omnes,  usque   ad  Romam  con- 
ditam,  Albae  (45)  regnaverunt. 

4.  Unus  (162)  horum  regum  (35),  Romulus  Silvius,  se 
(151)  Jove  (83)  majorem  (79)  esse  (149)  dicebat,  et,  quum 
tonaret,  mllitibus   (50)  imperavit,  ut  clipeos  hastls  (61) 
percuterent  (190),  dlcebatque  (17),  hunc  sonum  multo  clari- 
orem  esse  (149)  quam  tonitrum  (82).   Fulmine  ictus  et  in 
Albanum  lacuna  praecipitatus  est. 

18* 


210  OUTLINES  OF   ROMAN  HISTORY. 

5.  Silvius  Procas,  rex  Albanorum,  duos  fllios  reliquit, 
Numitorem  (95)  et  Amulium.     Ilorum  minor  natu  (57), 
Amulius,  fratri  optionem  dedit,   utrum   regnum   habere 
vellet  (215),  an  bona  (97),  quae  pater  rellquisset  (224). 
Numitor    paterna  bona   praetulit  (9) ;  Amulius  regnum 
obtinuit. 

6.  Amulius,  ut  regnum  firmissime  possideret,  Numito- 
ris  flliuni  per  insidias   interemit,  et  flliam  fratris  (37), 
Rheam  Silviam,  Vestalem  virginem  (79)  fecit.     Nam  his 
Vestae   sacerdotibus    (243)    non   licet  viro  (46)  nubere. 
Sed  haec  a  Marte  geminos  fllios,  Romuluin  et  It  em  urn, 
peperit.     Hoc  quinn  Amulius  coniperisset  (211),  matrem 
in  vincula  conjecit,  pueros  (150)  autem  in  Tiberim  abjicl 
(149)  jussit. 

7.  Forte  Tiberis  aqua  ultra  ripam  se  eifuderat,  et  quum 
puerl  in  vrado  essent  (211)  posit!,  aqua  refluens  eos  in  sicco 
(97)  rellquit.     Ad  eoruin  vagltum  lupa   accurrit  (101), 
eosque  uberibus  (61)  suis  aluit.     Quod  (110)  videns  Faus- 
tulus    quidam,  pastor  illlus   regionis,  pueros  sustulit  (1. 
toll-)  et  uxorl  Accae  Laurentiae  nutriendos  (177)  dedit. 

8.  Sic  Romulus  et  Remus  puerltiam  inter  pastores  tran- 
segerunt.     Quum  adolevissent  (211),  et  forte  comperis- 

sent,  quis  (160)  ipsorum  avns,  quae  mater  fuisset 
Ante  (215),  Amulium  interfecerunt,  et  Numitori  avo 
Chr.  regnum  restituerunt.  Turn  urbem  condiderunt  in 
753.  monte  Aventmo,  quam  (104)  Romulus  a  suo  nomine 

Romam  (79)  vocavit.  Haec  quum  moenibus  cir- 
cumdaretur  (25),  Remus  occlsus  est,  dum  fratrem  irrldens 
nioenia  transiliebat. 

9.  Romulus,  ut  civium  numerum  augeret  (192),  asylum 
patefecit  (237),  ad  quod  mult!  ex  clvitatibus  suls  pulsl 
accurrerunt  (1 01).     Sed  novae  urbis  civibus  (47)  conjuges 
deerant.     Festum  itaque  ISTeptuni  et  ludos  instituit.     Ad 
hos  quum  niulti  ex  fiuitimls  populls  cum  mulieribus  et 
liberls  venissent  (211),  Roman!,  inter  ipsos  ludos,  spec- 
tantes  virgines  rapuerunt. 

10.  Popull   illl,   quorum  (104)  virgines  raptae  erant, 


OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY.  211 

bellum  adversus  raptores  susceperunt.  Quum  Romae 
(50)  appropinquarent  (211),  forte  in  Tarpejam  virginem 
inciderunt  (101),  quae  in  arce  sacra  procurabat  (17).  Han# 
rogabant,  ut  viam  in  arcem  monstraret  (195),  elque  per- 
miserunt,  ut  munus  sibi  (235)  posceret.  Ilia  petiit,  ut 
sibi  (48)  darent,  quod  in  sinistrls  manibus  gererent  (230), 
annulos  aureos  et  armillas  significans.  At  hostes,  in  arcem 
ab  ea  (126),  perducti,  scutis  (61)  Tarpejam  obruerunt  ; 
nam  et  ea  in  sinistris  manibus  gerebant 


11.  Turn  Rdmulus  cum  hoste,  qul  montem  Tarpejum 
tenebat,  pugnam  conseruit  in  eo  loco,  ubi  liunc  forum  Ro- 
manum  est.     In  media  caede  raptae  processerunt,  et  hinc 
patres,  hinc  conjuges  et  soceros  complectebantur  et  roga- 
bant, ut  caedis  (34)  fmem  facerent  (190).     Utrique  his 
precibus  cominotl  sunt.     Romulus  foedus  icit,  et  Sabluos 
in  urbem  recepit. 

12.  Postea   civitatem   descripsit.     Centum   Senatores 
legit,  eosque  cum  ob  aetatem,  turn  ob  reverentiam  ils  (46) 
debitam,  Patres  (79)  appellavit.     Plebem  in  trlginta  cu- 
rias distribuit    casque    raptarum   nominibus   nun- 
cupavit.     Anno  (54)  regni  vlcesimo  septimo,  quum     A.  c. 
exercitum   lustraret  (211),  inter  tempestatem  or-      716. 
tarn,  repente  oculls  (51)  hominum  subductus  est. 

Hinc  alii  eum  a  Seriatoribus  interfectum  (79),  alii  ad  Deos 
sublatum  esse  (149)  existimaverunt. 

13.  Post  Rdmull  mortem  unlus  (162)  anm  interregnum 
fuit.     Quo  elapso  (131)  Numa  Pompilius,  Curibus  (49), 
urbe*  in  agro  Sablnorum,  natus,  rex  (79)  creatus   est. 
Hie  vir  bellum  quidem  nullum  gessit  ;  nee  minus  tamen 
clvitati  (46)  profuit.     Nam  et  leges  dedit,  et  sacra  plurima 
instituit,  ut  popull  (36)  barbarl  et  bellicosi  mores  molliret 
(192).     Omnia  autem,  quae  faciebat,  se  (151)  nymphae 

*  When  the  word  urb(i)-  or  oppido-  is  joined  in  apposition  (95)  to  the 
name  of  a  town  in  the  dative  (locative),  it  is  put  in  the  ablative  case 
with  47i,  rarely  without  the  preposition.  See  Andrews'  Lat.  Gr.  §  221. 
Rem.  2  .  If  in  urbe  or  in  oppido  precedes  the  name  of  the  town,  the 
latter  is  put  in  the  ablative  case. 


212  OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY. 

Egeriae,  conjugis  suae,  jussu  facere  (149)  dlcebat.    Morbo 
decessit,  quadragesimo  tertio  imperil  anno  (54). 

14.  Xumae  (50)  successit  Tullus  Hostilius,  cfijus 
A.  c.     avus  se  in  bello  adversus  Sabinos  fortem  et  stre- 

673.  nuum  virum  praestiterat.  Rex  (79)  creutus  bel- 
lum  Albums  (47)  indixit,  idque  trigeminorum,  Ho- 
ratiorum  et  Curiatiorum,  certamine  f  inivit.  Album  prop- 
ter  perfidiam  Metii  Suffetil  diruit.  Quum  triginta  duubus 
annis*  regnasset  (91),  fulmine  ictus  cum  domo  sua  arsit. 

15.  Post  hunc  Ancus  Marcius,  Numae  (37)  ex 
c.     filia  nepos,  suscepit  imperium.     Hie  vir  aequitate 

(57)  et  religione  avo   (44)   similis,  Latinos  bello 
domuit,  urbem  ampliavit,  et  nova  el  (50)  moenia 
circumdedit.     Carcerem  primus  aedificavit.     Ad  Tiberis 
ostia  urbem   condidit,    Ostiamque    vocavit.       Vlcesimo 
quarto  anno  (54)  imperil  morbo  (61)  obiit. 

A.  c.  16.  Deinde  regnum  Lucius  Tarquinius  Priscus 
616.  accepit,  Demarati  filius,  qul  tyrannos  patriae  Co- 
rinthl  (95)  fugiens  in  Etruriam  venerat.  Ipse  Tar- 
quinius, qui  nomen  ab  urbe  Tarquinils  (95)  accepit,  ali- 
quando  Romam  (29)  profectus  erat.  Advenientl  (51) 
aquila  pileum  abstulit,  et,  postquam  alte  eVoluverat,  re- 
posuit.  Hinc  Tanaquil  conjux,  mulier  auguriorum  (34) 
perlta,  regnum  (150)  el  portend!  intellexit. 

17.  Quum  RomaB  (45)  commoraretur,  (211)  Anci  regis 
familiaritatem  consequutus  est,  qul  (104)  emn  filiorum 
(34)  suorum  tutoreni  reliqmt.  Sed  is  (104)  pupillis  (51) 
regnum  intercepit.  Senutoribus,  quos  Romulus  creaverat, 
centum  alios  (162)  addidit,  qul  niinorum  gentium  sunt 
appellati.  Plura  bella  feliciter  gessit,  nee  paucos  agros, 
hostibus  (51)  ademtos,  urbis  (36)  territorio  adjunxit. 
Primus  triuniphans  (128)  urbem  intrust.  Cloucus  fecit; 
Capitolium  inchoavit.  Trlcesimo  octavo  imperil  anno 
(54)  per  And  filios,  quibus  (51)  regnum  eripuerat,  occl- 
sus  est. 

*  The  ablative  case  is  used  to  denote  the  time  within  which  an  event 
occurs. 


OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY.  213 

18.  Post  hunc  Servius  Tullius  suscepit   impe-     A.  c. 
rium,  genitus  ex  nobill  femina,  captiva  (95)  tamen      578. 
et  famula.     Quum  in  domo  Tarquinil  Prisci  educa- 
retur,  (211)    flamma  in  ejus  capite  visa   est.     Hoc  pro- 
digio   (§1)    Tanaquil    el    summam    dignitatem    portend! 
(149)  intellexit,  et  conjug!  (46)  persuasit,  ut  eum  slcuti 
llberos  suds  (94)  educaret  (192).     Quum  adolevisset,  rex 
el  (48)  flliam  in  matrimonium  dedit. 

19.  Quum  Priscus  Tarquinius  occisus  esset,  (211)  Tana- 
quil de  superiore  parte  domus  populum  allocuta  est,  dl- 
cens ;  regem  grave  quidem,  sed  non  letale  vulnus  acce- 
pisse  (22 7)  /  eum,  petere,  ut  populus,  dum  convaluisset 
(231),    Servio    Tullio    (46)    obediret.      Sic   Servius   reg- 
nare    (146)    coepit,    sed   betie    imperium    administravit. 
Monte 3  tres  urbi  (50)  adjunxit.      Primus  omnium  een- 
sum  ordinavit.     Sub  eo  Roma  habuit  capitum  (35)  octo- 
ginta  tria  millia  civium  Romanorum  cum  ils  qui  in  agris 
erant. 

20.  Hie  rex  interfectus  est  scelere  filiae  Tulliae 

(95)  et  Tarquinil  Superb!,  filil  ejus  regis  (37)  cm     A.  c. 
Servius  successerat.     Nam  ab  (126)  ipso  Tarqui-     534. 
nio   de   gradibus  Curiae  dejectus,  quum  domum 
(29)  fugeret  (210),  interfectus  est.     Tiillia  in  forum  pro- 
peravit  et  prlma  conjugem  regem -(79)  salutavit.     Quum 
domum  redlret,  aurlgam  (150)  super  patris  corpus,  in  via 
jacens  (128)  carpentum  agere  (149)  jussit. 

21.  Tarquinius   Superbus   cognomen  moribus  meruit.. 
Bello  (57)  tamen  strenuus  plures  finitimorum  populorum 
(35)  vicit.     Templum  Jovis  in  Capitolio  aedificavit.    Pos- 
tea,  dum  Ardeam  oppugn abat,  urbem  Etruriae  (36),  im- 
perium perdidit.     Nam  quum  filius  ejus  Lucretiae  nobi- 
lissimae  feminae,  conjugi  Tarquinil  Collatml,  vim  fecisset, 
haec  se  (94)  ipsam  occidit  in  conspectu  maritl,  patris  et 
amicorum,  postquam  eos  obtestata  fuerat,  ut  hanc  inju- 
riam  ulciscerentur  (195). 

22.  Hanc   ob  causam  L.    Bratus,  Collatlnus,  alilque 


214  OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY. 

A.  c.  nonnulll  in  exitium  regis  (34)  conjurarunt,  po- 
510.  puldque  persnaserunt,  ut  el  (47)  portas  Urbis  clau- 
deret.  Exercitus  quoque,  qu!  clvitatem  Ardeain 
cum  rege  oppugiiabat  (17),  eum  rellquit.  Fiigit  itaque 
cum  uxore  et  llberls  suis  (94).  Tta  Roma?  (45)  regnatum. 
est  (138)  per  septem  reges,  annos  (43)  ducentos  quad- 
raginta  tres. 

23.  Hinc  consules  coepere  pro  uno  rege  duo  creari,  ut, 
si  unus  mains  esset,  (224)  alter  eum  coerceret.     Annuum 
ils  imperium  tributum  est,  ne  (190)  per  diuturnitatem  po- 
testatis  insolentiores  (84)  redderentur.      Fuerunt  igitur 
anno  (54)  prlmo,  expulsls  regibus  (131)  consules  L.  Ju- 
m'us   Brutus,   acemmus    (71)    llbertatis   vindex,   et   Tar- 
quinius    CollatTnus,    maritus    Lucretiae.       Sed    Collatlno 
(51)  paulo  post  dignitas  sublata  est.     Placuerat  enim,  ne 
quis  (256)  ex  Tarquiniorum  familia  Romae  (45)  maneret. 
Ergo  cum  omni  patrimonio  suo  ex  urbe  migravit,  et  in 
ejus  (102)  locum  Valerius  Publicola  consul  factus  est. 

24.  Commovit  bellnm  urbl  (47)  rex  Tarquinius.     In 
prlma  pugna  Brutus,  consul,  et  Aruns,  Tarquinil  films, 
sese  invicem  occlderunt.     Roman!  tamen  ex  ea  pugna 
victores  recesserunt.     Brutum  Romanae  matronae  quasi 
communem  patrem  per  annum  luxerunt.     Valerius  Pub- 
licola Sp.  Lucretium,  Lucretiae  patrem,  collcgam  (79)  sibi 
fecit;  qul,  quum  morbo  exstinctus  esset(211),  Horatium 
Pulvillum  sibi  collegam  sumsit.    Ita  primus  annus  quinque 
consules  habuit. 

25.  Secundo  quoque  anno  (54)  iterum  Tarqui- 
A.  c.  nius  bellum  Romanls  (50)  intulit,  Porsena  (133), 
508.  rege  Etruscorum,  auxih'um  el  ferente.  In  illo  bello 
Horatius  Codes  solus  pontem  ligneum  defendit  et 
hostes  cohibuit,  donee  pons  a  tergo  ruptus  esset  (190). 
Turn  se  cum  armls  in  Tiberim  conjecit  et  ad  suos  trans- 
navit. 

26.  Dum  Porsena  urbem  obsidebat  (17),  Qu.  Mucius 
Scaevola,  juvenis  fortis  animi  (38),  in  castra  hostis  (36) 
se  contulit,  eo  consilio  (133),  ut  regem  occideret  (195). 


OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY.  215 

At  ibi  scribam  regis  pro  ipso  rege  interfecit.  Turn  a 
regiis  satellitibus  (126)  compreliensus  ot  ad  rGgcm  de- 
ductus,quum  Porsena  eum  ignibus  (132)  allatis  tcrreret, 
dextram  arae  (50)  accensae  imposuit,  donee  fiammls  con- 
sumta  esset  (190).  Hoc  facimis  rex  nilrfitus  juvenem 
dimisit  incolumem.  Turn  hie,  quasi  beneticium  referens, 
ait  trecentos  alios  juvenes  in  eum  conjurasse  (149).  Hue 
re  territus  Porsena  pacem  cum  Romf.ms  fecit,  Tarquinius 
autem  Tusculum  (29)  se  contulit,  ibique  privf.tus  cum 
uxore  consenuit. 

27.  Sexto  decimo  anno  (54)  post  rogos  exartos, 
populus   Romae  seditlonem  fecit,   questns,  quod     A.  c. 
tributis  (61)  et  militia  a  senatu  (120)  exhaunrotur     494. 
(209).     Magna  pars  plebis  (35)  urbcm  reliquit  et 

in  montem  trans  Anienem  amnem  secessit.  Turn  patres 
turbati  (128)  Menenium  Agrippam  misernnt  ad  plebem, 
qul  (190)  earn  senutul  conciiiaret.  Hie  iis  inter  alia  fabu- 
lam  narravit  de  ventre  et  membris  humani  corporis ;  qua 
populus  commotus  est,  tit  in  Urbem  rediret.  Turn  prl- 
mum  Tribuni  plebis  creati  sunt,  qui  plebem  adversum  no- 
bilitatis  (33)  superbiam  defenderent  (190). 

28.  Octavo  decimo  anno  post  exactos  reges,  Qu. 
Marcius,  Coriolanus  dictus  ab  urbe  Volscorum  Co-     A.  c. 
riolis  (95),  quam  bello  ceperat,  plebi  invlsus  (79)     492. 
fieri  coepit.     Quare  urbe  (59)  expulsus  ad  Yolscos, 
acerrimos  (71)  Romanorum  hostes,  contendit,  et  ab  iis 
dux  exercitus  factus  Romanos  saepe  vicit.     Jam  usque 
ad  quintum  milliarium  Urbis  accesserat,  nee  ullis  (264) 
civium   suorum    legationibus   flectT    poterat,   ut   patriae 
(46)    parceret.      Denique   Yeturia    mater    et   Yolumnia 
uxor  (7)  Urbe  ad  eum  venerunt;    quarum  (33)  fletu  et 

recibus  (61)  commotus  est,  ut  exercitum  removeret  (198). 
uo  (110)  facto  a  Yolscls  ut  proditor  occisus  (79)  esse 
dicitur. 

29.  Roman!   quum   adversum   Yejentes   bellum  gere- 
rent    (211),  familia  Fabiorum  sola  hoc  bellum  suscepit. 
Profectl    sunt    trecenti   sex    nobilissiml    homines,    duce 


216  OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY. 

(133)  Fabio  Consule.  Quurn  saepe  hcstes  vi- 
A.  c.  cissent  (211),  apud  Cremeram  fluviura  castra 
479.  posuerunt.  Ibi  Vejentes,  dolo  usi,  eos  in  insidias 

pellexerunt.  In  proelio  ibi  exorto  omnes  perie- 
runt ;  unus  superfuit  ex  tanta  familia,  qul  propter  aeta- 
tera  puerilem  dud  non  potuerat  ad  pugnam.  Hie  genus 
propagavit  ad  Qu.  Fabium  Maximum,  ilium,  qul  Hanni- 
balem  prudent!  (68)  cunctatione  debilitavit. 

30.  Anno  trecentesimd  et  altero  ab  Urbe  condita 
A.  c.     Decemviri  creat!  sunt,  qui  (190)  civitatl  leges  scrl- 
451.      berent  (192).     Hi  primo  anno  bene  egerunt ;  secun- 

do  autem  dominationein  exercere  coeperunt.  Sed 
quum  unus  eorum  (35)  Appius  Claudius  Virginiam,  Vir- 
ginil  Centurionis  filiam,  corrumpere  vellet  (234),  pater 
earn  occidit.  Turn  ad  mllites  profugit,  eosque  ad  seditio- 
nem  commovit.  Sublata  est  decem^ris  (51)  potestas, 
ipsique  omnes  aut  niorte  aut  exilic  pumti  sunt. 

31.  In  bello  contra  Vejentanos  Furius  Camillus 
A.  c.     urbem  Falerios  (95)  obsidebat.     In  qua  (103)  obsi- 
395.      dione  quum  ludl  literaril  magister  principum  filios 

ex  urbe  in  castra  hostium  duxisset,  Camillus  hoc 
donum  non  accepit,  sed  scelestum  hominem,  manibus 
(133)  post  tergtim  -sdnctls,  puerls  Falerios  (29)  reduccn- 
dum  (177)  tradidit;  virgasque  iis  dedit,  quibus  prodi- 
torem  in  urbem  agerent  (190). 

32.  Hac  tanta  animl  nobilitate  commotl  Falisci  urbem 
Romanls  tradiderunt.  Camillo  (47)  autem  apud  Roma- 
nos  crlniin!  (81)  datum  (25)  est,  quod  albis  equls  tri- 
umphasset  (209),  et  praedam  inique  (21)  dlvlsisset ;  dam- 

natusque  ob  earn  causam  et  clvitate  (59)  expulsus 
A.  c.  est.  Paulo  post  Galll  Senones  ad  Urbem  vene- 
390.  runt,  Romanes  apud  flumen  Alh'am  vicerunt,  et 

Urbem  etiam  occuparunt.  Jam  nihil  praeter  Cap- 
itolium  defendl  (146)  potuit.  Sed  jam  praesidium  fame 
laborabat,  et  in  eo  erant,  ut  pacem  a  Gallis  auro  (62)  em- 
erent  (199),  quum  Camillus  cum  manu  mih'tum  superve- 
niens  hostes  magno  proelio  superaret. 


OUTLINES   OF  ROMAN  HISTORY.  217 


LIBER   SECUXDUS. 

1.  Anno   (54)  trecentesimo  nonagesimo   altero 

post  Urbem  conditam  Gall!  iterum  ad  Urbem  ac-  A.  c. 
cesserant,  et  quarto  milliario  (03)  trans  Anienem  361. 
fluviuin  consederant.  Contra  eos  missus  est  T. 
Quinctius.  Ibi  Gallus  quidam,  eximia  corporis  magnitu- 
dine  (64),  fortissimum  Romanorum  (35)  ad  certamen  sin- 
gulare  provocavit.  T.  Manlius,  nobiJissimus  juvenis,  pro- 
vocationem  accepit,  Galluin  occldit,  eumque  torque  (59) 
aureo  spoliavit,  quo  (61)  ornatus  erat.  Hinc  et  ipse  et 
posterl  ejus  Torquatl  (79)  appellat!  siint.  Galll  fugam 
capesslverunt. 

2.  Novo  bello  (131)  cum  Gallls  exorto,  anno  Ur- 

bis  quadringentesimo  quarto,  iterum  Gallus  pro-  A.  c. 
cessit,  robore  atque  ariuls  (57)  insignis,  et  provo-  349. 
cavit  unum  ex  Romanls,  ut  secum  (98)  armls  de- 
cerneret.  Turn  s§  M.  Valerius,  tribunus  mllitum,  obtulit ; 
et,  quum  processisset  armatus,  corvus  el  (46)  supra  dex- 
trum  brachium  sedit.  Mox,  commissa  pugna,  hie  corvus 
alls  (61)  et  unguibus  Galll  oculos  verberavit.  Ita  factum 
est,  ut  Gallus  facill  negotio  a  Valerio  (126)  interficeretur 
(199),  qul  Line  Corvlnl  nomen  accepit. 

3.  Postea  Romanl  bellum  gesserunt  cum  SamnT- 
tibus,  ad  quod  L.  Paplrius  Cursor  cum  honore  die-    A.  c. 
tatoris  profectus  est.     Qul,  quum  negotil  cujusdam      324. 
causa  Romam  (29)  ivisset  (211),  praecepit  Q.  Fabio 
Rulliano,  magistro  equitum,  quern  (104)  apud  exercitum 
rellquit,  ne  pugnam  cum  hoste  committeret  (195).     Sed 
ille,  occasionem  nactus,  fellcissime  (77)  dimicavit  et  Sam- 
nites  delevit.     Ob  hanc  rem  a  dictatore  capitis*  damnatus 
est.     At  ille  in  Urbem  confugit,  et  ingenti  favore  (61) 
mllitum  et  popull  llberatus  est ;  in  Paplrium  autem  tanta 


*  Verbs  denoting  "accuse,"  "condemn,"  "acquit,"  take  a  gtidiice 
of  the  offence  or  the  penalty. 
19 


213  OUTLINES    OF   ROMAN   HISTORY. 

exorta  est  seditio,  u,t  paene  ipse  interficeretur  (237  note 
3d). 

4.  Duobus  annTs  post  T.  Veturius  et  Spurius  Postu- 
mius  Consules  bellum  adversum  SamnTtes  gerGbant.  Ill 
a  Pontio  Theleslno,  duce -hostium,  in  insidias  induct!  sunt. 

Nam  ad  Furctilas  Caudinas  Rjmaiios  pellexit  in 
A.  c.  angustias,  unde  sese  (235)  expedire  non  poterant. 
321.  Ibi  Pontius  patrein  suum  (94)  Herenniuin  rogavit, 

quid  faciendum  (ISO)  putaret  (215).  Ille  ait,  aut 
omnes  occidendos  (178)  esse,  ut  Romanoruni  vires  frange- 
rentur  (196),  aut  omnes  dlmittendos,  ut  beneficid  obligaren- 
tur.  Pontius  ntrumque  consilium  improbavit,  omnesque 
sub  jugum  mlsit.  SamnTtes  denique  post  bellum  uudc- 
quinquagiiita  annoruui  (40)  siipei*ut!  sunt. 

5.  D^victTs  Samnitibus  (131),  TarentTnls  (50)  bel- 
A.  c.  lum  indicium  est,  quia  legatis  (47)  Romanoru  n  in- 
281.  juriam  iecissent  (2-09).  Hi  Pyrrhum,  Epiri  rSgcra 
(95),  contra  Romanos  auxilium  (30)  poposcernnt.  Is 
mox  in  Italiam  venit,  tumque  prlmum  Rumaiil  cum  trans- 
manno  hoste  pugnaverunt.  Missus  est  contra  eum  con- 
sul P.  Valerius  Laevlnus.  Hie,  quum  exploratores  Pyrrhl 
cepisset  (211),  jussit  eos  per  castra  due!  (149),  ostemli 
omnem  exercitum,  tumque  dimittT,  ut  renuntiarent  Pyrrho 
(48),  qusecunque  a  Rouianls  (126)  agerentur  (215). 

6.  Pugna  commissa  (131),  Pyrrhus  anxilio  elephantorum 
vTcit.     Xox  proelio  flnem  dedit.     Laevinus   tamen   per 
noctem  iugit.    Pyrrhus  Romanos  mille  octingentos  cepit, 
eosque  summo  honore  (55)  tractavit.     Quum  eos,  qul  in 
proelio  interfectl  fuerant,  omnes  adversis  vulneiibus  (55) 
et  trucl  vultu  etiam  mortuos  (128)  jacere  vidC-ret,  tulisse 
ad  coelum  man  us  dicitur,  cum  hac  voce :  Ego  cum  tdlibus 
vins  brevl  orbein  terrdrum  subigerem  (254). 

7.  Postea  Pyrrhus  Romam  (29)  perrexit ;  omnia  ferro 
igneque  vastavit;  Campaniam  depopulatus  est,  atque  ad 
Praeneste  voiiit  milliario   (63)   ab  IJrbe  octavo  deciino. 
Mox  terrore  exercitus  (34),  qu!  cum  cousule  sequebatur,  in 


OUTLINES   OF  ROMAN 

w\V 

Campaniam  se  reccpit.  Legf.ti,  ad  Pyrrhum  d3  captlvTs 
redimendls  (174)  miss!,  honorifico  ab  eo  suscepti  simt ; 
captlvos  sine  pretio  reddidit.  ununi  ex  legatls,  Fabricium 
sic  admlratus  est,  nt  el  (46)  quartam  part  em  regn!  (35) 
su!  promitteret  (199),  si  ad  se  translret  (230);  sed  a  Fab- 
ricio  conterntus  est. 

8.  Quum  jam  Pyrrhus  ingent!  Romanorum  admlratione 
tenGretur  (211),  legatum  (79)  mlsit  Clneam,  praestantissi- 
mum  virum  (97),  qul  pacem  peteret  (190),  ea  conditione 
(56),  ut  Pyrrhus  earn  part  em  Italiae,  quam  armls  (61)  oc- 
cupaverat,  obtineret  (190).     Romf.nl  responderunt,  eum 
cum  Romania  pacem  habere  (146)  uon  posse  (149),  nisi  ex 
Italia   recessisset    (230).      Cmeas    quum   rediisset   (211), 
Pyrrho  (48),  eum  interrogantl,  qualis  ipsl   Jloma   visa 
esset  (215)/   respoudit,  «5  (151)  rtgum  patriam  vldisse 
(149.) 

9.  In  alters  proelio  cum  rege  Eplrl  commisso  Pyrrhus 
vulnei'i'tus  est,  elephant!  interfectl,  vigint!  millia  hostium 
(35)   caesa   sunt.     Pyrrhus  Tarentum   (29)   fiigit.     Inter- 
jecto  anno  (131),  Fabricius  contra  eum  missus  est.     Ad 
hunc   medicus    Pyrrhl    nocte    (54)    venit,   promittcns,    se 
Pyrrhum  veneno  (61)  occlsilrum  (147),  si  mi.ntis  sibi  (233) 
daretur  (230).     Hunc  (150)  Fabricius  vinctum  reduc!  jus- 
sit  ad  domiuum.     Tune  rex,  admlratus  ilium,  dixisse  fertur 
(236) ;  file  est  Fabricius,  qul  diffivilius  (77)  ab  konestute 
gnam  sol  a  cursu  sud  avcrtl  potest.      Paulo  post 
Pyrrhus,  tertio  etiam  proelio  tusus  a  Tarento  re-     A.  c. 
cessit,  et  quum  in  Graeciam  rediisset  (211),  apud      2V2. 
Argos,  PeloponnesI  urbem,  interfectus  est. 

10.  Anno    (54)    quadringentesimo    nonagesimo 

post  Urbem  conditam,  Romanorum  exercitus  prl-    A.  c. 
mum  in  Sicilian!  trajectirtint,  regemque  Syracusa-      263. 
rum  Hieronem,  Poeuosque,  qu!  multas  clvitates  in 
ea  insula  occupaverant,  superaverunt.     Quinto  an- 
no hujus  belli,  quod  contra  Poenos  gerebf*tur,  prl-     A.  c. 
mum  Roman!,   C.   Duillio  et  Cn.   Cornelio  Asina      260. 
Coss,  (131),  in  mar!  (68)   dlniicaverunt.     Duiilius 


220  OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY. 

Carthaginienses  vlcit,  trlginta  naves  occupavit,  quatuor- 
decirn  mersit,  septejn  millia  hostium  (35)  cepit,  tria  millia 
occidit.  Xulla  victoria  RomaiiTs  grfitior  fait.  Duillio 
concessum  est  (138),  ut,  qaum  u  coena  redlret  (224),  pueri 
funalia  gestautes  et  tlbicen  eum  comitarentur. 

11.  Panels  armls  interjectis  (131)  bellum  in  Afii- 
A.  c.  cam  translatum  est.  Hamilcar,  Carthuginiensittm 
256.  dux,  pugna  (61)  naval!  superatur ;  nam,  perditls 
sexaginta  quatuor  navibus  (133),  se  recepit ;  Ro- 
mani  vigintl  duas  amlsernnt.  Quum  in  African!  vGnis- 
sent,  Poenos  in  pluribus  proelils  vlcerunt,  magnam  vim 
hominum  ceperunt,  septuaginta  quatuor  clvitates  in  fidem 
acceperunt.  Turn  victl  Carthaginienses  pacem  a  Romanis 
petierunt  (91).  Quam  (110)  quum  M.  Atilius  Regulus, 
llomanorum  dux,  dare  (25)  nollet  (234)  nisi  durissimls 
conditianibus  (56)  Carthaginienses  anxilium  petierunt  a 
Laced aemoniis.  Ill  Xanthippum  misenmt,  qu!  Romanum 
exercitum  magno  proelio  vlcit.  Regulus  ipse  captus  et  in 
vincula  conjectus  est. 

12.  Non  tamen  ublque  fortuna  Carthaginiensibus  (46) 
favit.  Quum  aliquot  proeliis  victl  essent,  Regulum  roga- 
verunt  ut  Romam  (29)  proticisceretur,  et  pacem  captlvo- 
rumque  permutationem  a  RSmanls  obtineret.  Ille  quura 
Romam  venisset,  inductus  in  senatum,  dixit,  se  (151)  de- 
siise  (22V)  Romanum  (79)  esse  ex  itt'i  die,  qua  (54)  in 
potestdtem  Poenorum  vvnisset  (230).  Turn  Romanis  sua- 
sit,  ne  pacem  cum  Carthaginiensibus  facerent  (192) :  illos 
enim,  tot  casibus  fractos,  spem  nullam  nisi  in  pace  habere 
(149) :  tantl  (249)  non  esse  (149),  ut  tot  millia  captivo- 
rum  (35)  propter  se  unum  et  paucos,  qui  ex  Romanis 
captl  essent  (230),  redderentur.  Haec  sententia  obtinuit. 
Regressus  igitur  in  Africam  crudelissimis  supplicils  ex- 
stinctus  est. 

13.   Tandem  C.  Lutatio  Catulo,  A.   Postumio 

A.  c.     Coss.  (131),  anno  bell!  Punic!  v!cesimo  tertio,  mag- 

242.      num  proelium  navale  commissum  est  contra  Lilv- 

baeum,  promontorium  (95)  Siciliae.     In  eo  proelio 


OUTLINES   OP  ROMAN  HISTORY.  221 

septuaginta  tres  Carthaginiensinm  naves  captae,  centum 
vigintl  qninqne  demersae,  trlgintfi  duo  millia  hostium  (35) 
capta,  tredecim  millia  occisa  sunt.  Statim  Carthagini- 
enses  pacem  petierunt  (91),  elsque  pax  tributa  est.  Cap- 
tlv!  Romanorum  (35),  qui  tenebantur  a  Carthaginiensibus 
(126),  redditl  sunt.  Poem  Sicilia  (59),  Sardinia  et  ceterls 
insulls,  quae  inter  Italiam  Africamque  jacent,  decesserunt, 
omnemque  Hispaniam,  quae  citra  Iberuin  est,  Roinunls 
(46)  permlserunt. 


LIBEK    TERTIUS. 

1.  Anno  qningentesimo  duodetricesimo,  ingentes 
Gallorum  copiae  Alpes  transierunt.     Sed  pro  Ro-     A.  o. 
manis  tota  Italia  consensit :  traditumque  est,  octin-     225. 
genta  millia  hominum  ad  id  bellum  parata  (135) 
fuisse.     Res  prospere  gesta  est  apud  Clusium:  quadra- 
gintfi  millia  hominum  interfecta  sunt.     Aliquot  annls  (54) 
post  pugnatum  est  (139)  contra  Gallos  in  agro  Insubrum, 
fmltumque  est  bellum  M.  Claudio  Marcello,  Cn.  Cornolio 
Sclpione  Consulibus  (131).     Turn  Marcellus  regem  Gallo- 
rum, Viridomanun,  manu  (61)  sua  occidit,  et  triumphans 
(128)  spolia  Galll,  stlpitl  (50)  imposita,  liumeris  suls  (94)- 
vexit. 

2.  Paulo  post  Punicum  bellum  renovatum  est  per  Tlan- 
nibalem,  Carthaginiensium  ducem,  quern  pater  Ilamilcar, 
novem  annos  (43)  natum,  arls  (50)  admoverat,  ut  odium 
perenne  in  Romanos  juraret  (190).     Hie  annum  agens 
vicesimum  aetatis,  Saguntum,  Hisp^niae  civitatem,  Ro- 
mums  (46)  amicam,  oppugnare  (146)  aggressus  est 
(136).     HuTc  (48)  Roman!  per  leg^.tos  denuntiavG-     A.  c. 
runt,  ut  bello  abstineret  (195).     Qiil  (1^0)  quura      218. 
legates  admittcre  nollet  (234),  Roman!  Carthagi- 

nem  (29)  miserunt,  ut  mandaretur  (139)  HannibalT,  nS 
bellum  contra  socios  populi  Roman!  gereret  (190).  Dura 
responsa  a  Carthfiginiensibus  reddita.  Saguntinis  interea 
fame  victis  (133),  Romanl  Carthaginiensibus  (47)  bellum 
indixerunt. 

19* 


222  OUTLINES   OF  ROMAN  HISTORY. 

8.  Hannibal,  fratre  Hnsdrnbale  in  Hispilnia  relicto  (133), 
Pyrenaenm  et  Alpes  transiit.  Traditur  in  Italiam  oeto- 
gintii  millia  peditum  (35),  et  vigintl  millia  oquitnm,  sep- . 
teni  et  triginta  elephantos  adduxisse  (146).  Interea  mult! 
Ligures  et  Gall!  Hannibal!  (50)  se  conjunxerunt.  Primus 
el  occurrit  P.  Cornelius  Sclpio,  qui,  proelio  ad  Ticlnum 
commisso,  superatus  est,  et,  vubiere  accepts  (133),  in  cas- 
tra  rediit.  Turn  Senipronius  Gracchus  eonnixit  ad  Tre- 
biam  amnem.  Is  quoque  vin'citur  (137).  Multi  popull  se 
Hanniball  dediderunt.  Inde  in  Tusciam  progressus  (213) 
Flaminium  Cos.  ad  Trasimenura  lacuin  superat  (137). 
Ipse  Flaminius  interemtus,  Romandrum  vlgintl  quinque 
millia  caesa  sunt. 

4.  Quingentesimo  et  tncesimo  septimS  ann^>  post 
A.  c.  TJrbeni  conditam  L.  ^Emilius  Paullus  et  P.  Teren- 
216.  tius  Varro  contra  Hannibalem  mittuntur  (137). 
Quamquam  intellectum  erat,  Hannibalem  non  a!i- 
ter  vine!  posse  (145),  quani  mora,  Varro  tamen,  morae 
(34)  impatiens,  apu  1  vTcum,  qul  Cannae  appelUtur,  in 
Apuli'i  pugnfivit;  ambf)  consules  victT,  Paullus  interemtus 
est.  In  efi  pugnl  consulares  ant  praetoril  vlgintT,  senl- 
toivs  tngintl  captl  ant  occTsi;  militum  (35)  quadragintl 
millia ;  equitum  tria  millia  et  quingentl  perierunt.  In  his 
tantis  malis  (97)  nemo  tamen  pacis  mentionem  facere  di^- 
natiis  est  (136).  Servl,  quod  numquam  ante  factuin  (135), 
manamissl  et  milites  (79)  factl  sunt. 

5.  Post  earn  pugnam  multae  Italiae  clvitates,  quae  Ro- 
manls  (46)  paruerant,  se  ad  Hannibalem  transtulerunt. 
Hannibal  RununTs  obtulit  ut  captlvos  redimerent  (195) ; 
responsumque  est  (139)  a  Senatu,  eos  elves  (150)  non  esse 
necessarios,  qui  armati  cap!  potuissent  (231).  Hos  omnes 
ille  ]>oste"i  varils  suppliciis  interfecit,  et  tiv-s  inodios  aure- 
orum  annulorum  Carthzlginem  (29)  mlsit,  quos  manibus 
(59)  equitum  Rominorum,  senatonim,  et  mllitum  de- 
traxerat.  Interea  in  Ilispania  frater  Ilannibalis,  Hasdru- 
bal,  qui  ibi  remanserat  cum  magno  exercitfi,  a  duobus 
Sclpionibus  vincitur  (137),  perditque  in  pugua  triginta 
qiduque  millia  hominuni. 


OUTLINES   OF  ROMAN   HISTORY.  223 

6.  Arm5  quarto  postqufim   (114)  Hannibal  in  Italiam 
venerat,  M.  Claudius  Marcellus  Cos.  apud  Nolam,  clvita- 
tem  Campfmiae,  contra  Hannibalem  bene  pugnavit.     Illo 
tempore  Philippus,  Demetril  films,  rex  Macedoniae,  ad 
Hannibalem  legiitos  mittit,  elque  auxilia  contra  Romanes 
pollicetur  (137).     Qul  (HO)  legat!  quinn  a  Romams  captl 
essent,  M.  Valerius  Laevlnus  cum  navibus  missus  est,  qul 
regem  irnpedlret  (190),  quominus  copias  in  Italiam  traji- 
ceret  (203).  idem  in  Macedonian!  penetrans  regem  Philip- 
pum  vlcit. 

7.  In  Sicilia  quoque  res  prospere  gesta  est.     Marcellus 
magnam  hfijus  insulae  partem  cepit,  quam  Poem  occupa- 
verant ;  Syracusas,  nobilissimam  urbem,   expugnavit,  et 
ingentem.  inde  praedam  Romam  (29)  misit.     Laevlnus  in 
Macedonia  cum  Philippo  et  multis  Graeciae  populis  ami- 
citiam  fecit;  et  in  Sicilian!  profectus  (213),  Ilannonem, 
Poenorum  (34)  ducem,  apud  Agrigentum  cepit ;  quadra- 
ginta  civitates  in  deditionem  accepit,  vlginti  sex  expug- 
navit.    Ita  omni  Sicilia  recepta  (133),  cum  ingenti  gloriii 
Romam  regressus  est  (136). 

8.  Interea  in  Hispaniam,  ubi  duo  Sclpiones  ab  Hasdru- 
bale  (126)  interfectl  erant,  missus  est  P.  Cornelius  Sclpio, 
vir  Romanorum  (35)  omnium  fere  primus.     Hie  puer  duo- 
devlginti  annorum  (38)  in  pugna  ad  Tlclnum  patrem  sin- 
gularl  virtiite  (55)  servavit.     Deinde  post  cladem  Can- 
nensem  multos  nobilissimorum  juvenum  (41),  Italiam  de- 
serere  cupientium  (128),  auctoritate  (61)  sua  ab  hoc  con- 
silio  deterruit.     Vlginti  quatuor  annorum  (38)  juvenis  in 
Hispaniam  missus,  die,  quo  venit,  Carthaginem  Novam 
cepit,  in  qua  omne  aurum  et  argentum  et  bell!  apparatum 
Poen!  habebant,  nobilissiinos  quoque  obsides,  quos  ab  His- 
panls  acceperant.     Hos  obsides  parentibus  suis  (235)  red- 
didit.     Quare  o nines  fere  Hispaniae  civitates  ad  eum  uno 
animo  (55)  transierunt. 

9.  Ab  eo  inde  tempore  res  Romanorum  in  dies  laeti- 
ores  factae  sunt.      Hasdrubal  a  fratre  ex  Hispania  in 
Italiam  evocatus,  apud  Senam,  Piceni  clvitatem,  in  insid- 


224  OUTLIXES  OF  ROMAX   HISTORY. 

ias  incidit,  et  strenue  pugnans  occTsus  est.  Plurimae 
autem  civitates,  quae  in  Bruttils  ab  Hannibale  tenebantur, 
Romanis  se  tradidOnmt. 

10.  Anno  decimS  quarto  postquam  in  Italiam 
A.  c.     Hannibal  venerat,  Seipio  consul  creatus  et  in  AtH- 
205.      cam   missus    est.     Ibi  contra   Hannonem,  ducein 

Carthaginiensium,  prospere  pugnat  (137)  totumque 
ejus  exercitum  delet.  See-undo  proelio  undeeim  miilia 
hominum  occldit,  et  castra  cepit  cum  quatuor  millibus  et 
quingentls  militibus.  Syphacem,  Numidiae  regem,  qul 
se  (94)  cum  Poems  conjunxerat,  cepit,  eumque  cum  nobi- 
lissimls  Numidls  et  inflnltis  spolils  Romam  (29)  mlsit. 

Qua  (110)  re  audlta,  omnis  fere  Italia  Hannibalem 
A.  c.  deserit.  Ipse  a  Carthaginiensibus  in  African!  re- 
203.  dire  jubutur.  Ita  anno  (54)  decimo  sexto  Italia 

ab  Hannibale  llberata  est. 

11.  Post  plures  pngnas  et  pacem  plus*  semel 
A.  c.     frustra  tentatam,  pugna  ad  Zamam  committitur, 
202.      in  qua   peritissimi   duccs   copias  suas  ad  belluni 

edacebant.  Scipio  victor  recedit  (137) ;  Hannibal 
cum  paucis  equitibus  evadit.  Post  hoc  proelium  pax  cum 
Carthaginiensibus  facta  est.  Scipio,  quum  Romam  re- 
diisset  (214),  ingentl  gloria  (55)  triumphavit,  atque  Afri- 
canus  appellatus  est.  Sic  finem  accepit  secundum  Puni- 
cuin  bellum  post  annum  duodevicesiuiuni  quam  coe- 
peratf 


LIBER    QTTARTUS. 

1.  FinTto  Punico  bello  (131),  sequutum  est  Mace- 

A.  c.     donicum  contra  Philippum  regem.    Superutus  est 

197.      r6x  a  T.  Quinctio  Flaminio  apud  Cynoscephalas, 

paxque  el  data  est  his  legibus  (133) ;  ne   Gmeciae 

clvitatibus,  quas  .Romaiii  contra  eum  dvfenderant  (240), 

*  After  the  comparative  adverbs,  pfO-s,  "  more,"  amplius,  •'  more."  mi- 
rw$,  "less,"  the  word  qtv.im,  "than,"  maybe  either  inserted  or  omitted. 
fi.  e.,  a»/io  duodcvlcesimo  posfyuam  coeperat. 


OUTLINES   OF  ROMAN  HISTORY.  225 

bettum  inferret  (236)  /  ut  crtpflvos,  et  transfugas  redderet; 
qidnqiwginta  solum  navus  hablret ;  reliquas  Romania 
claret  (25)  /  mille  talenta  praestdret,  et  obsidem  daretfd- 
inm  Dcnivtrium.  T.  Quinctius  etiam  Lacedaemonils  in- 
tulit  bellum,  et  clucem  eorum  Nabin  vlcit. 

2.  Finite  bello  Macedonico  sequutum  est  bellum 
Syriacum  contrfi  Antiochum  regem,  cum  quo  (98)     A.  c. 
Hannibal  se  junxerat.     Missus  est  contra  eum  L.      191. 
Cornelius  Sclpio  Cos.,  CUT  frater  ejus  Sclpio  Africa- 
nus  legatus  (79)  est  additns.      Hannibal   navall  proelio 
victus,  Antiochus  autem  ad  Magnesiam,  Asiae  clvitatcm, 
a  Cornelio  Scipione  Cos.  ingenti  proelio  fusus  est.     Turn 
rex  Antiochus  pacem  petit  (13V).     Data  est  el  hac  lege 
(133),  ut  ex  Eurdpa  et  Asia  rectderet,  atque  intrd  Tau- 
rtun  S6  contineret,  decem  millia  talentorum  (35)  et  vigintl 
obsid^s  praebvret,  Hannibalem,  concitorem  belli  dtderet. 
Sclpio  Romam  (29)  rediit  et  ingenti  gloria  (55)  triumpha- 
vit.     Nomen  et  ipse  ad  imitationem  fratris  (34)  Asiatic! 
accepit. 

3.  Philippo,  rege  Macedoniae,  mortuo,  filius  ejus  Per- 
seus rebellayit,  ingentibus  cdpiis  paratls  (133).     Dux  Ro- 
manorum,  P.  Licinius  Consul,  contra  eum  missus,  gravl 
proelio  a  rege  victus  est.     Rex  tamen  pacem  petebat. 
Cui  (110)  Romani  earn  praestare  noluerunt,  nisi  his  con- 
ditionibus  (133),  ut  se   et  suos  (235)  Romanls  dederet 
(195).  Mox  JEmilius  Paullus  Cos.  regem  ad  Pydnam  supe- 
ravit,  et  vigintl  millia  peditum  ejus  (36)  occldit. 
Equitatus  cum  rege  fugit.     Urbes  Macedoniae  om-     A.  c. 
nes,  quas  rex  tenuerat,  Romanls  se   dediderunt.      168. 
Ipse  Perseus  ab  amicis  desertus  in  Paulll  potesta- 

tem  venit.  Hie,  multls  etiam  alils  rebus  gestls,  cum  in- 
genti pompa  Romam  rediit  in  nave  Perse!,  inusitiitae 
magnitudinis  (38) ;  nam  sedecim  remorum  ordines  hab- 
uisse  dicitur.  Triumphavit  magnificentissime  (73)  in 
curru  aureo,  duobus  filils  (133)  utroque  latere  (C3)  ad- 
stantibus.  Ante  currum  inter  captlvos  duo  regis  fllii  et 
ipse  Perseus  duct!  sunt. 

4.  Tertium  deinde  bellum  contra  Carthaginem  suscep- 


226  OUTLINES   OF  ROMAN   HISTORY. 

turn  est,  sexcentesimo  quarto  anno  ab  urbe  condita, 
A.  c.  anno  quinquagesiind  aitero,  postquam  secuiulum 
149.  bell  uni  Punk-urn  transactum  erat.  L.  Manilas 

CensGrmus  et  M.  Manilas  Coss.  in  African!  trr.je- 
cerunt  et  oppugnrivenmt  Carth.iginem.  Malta  ibi  prae- 
clare  gesta  smit  per  ScipHnem,  ScTpionis  African!  nepo- 
tem,  qui  tribunus  in  Africa  mllitabat.  Hujus  npud  omnes 
ingens  met  us  et  reverentia  erat,  neqne  quidquam  (263) 
magis  Carlhfiginiensium  daces  vltfibant,  quam  contra,  earn. 
proeliurn  committere  (145). 

5.  Quum  jam  magnum  esset  Sclpionis   nomen,   terti5 
anno  postquam  Roman!  in  African!  triijecerant,  Consul 

est  creatus  et  contra  Carthaginem  missus.  Is  hanc 
A.  c.  urbem  ,  a  clvibus  acerrime  (Tl)  defensam,  cepit  ac 
146.  diruit.  Ingens  ibi  praedafacta  plarimaque  inventa 

sunt,  quae  multarum  civitatum  excidils  (61)  Car- 
thago collegerat.  Ilnec  omnia  Sclpio  civitatibus  Italiae, 
Siciiiae,  Africae  reddidit,  quae  sua  (235)  recognoscebant. 
Ita  Carthago,  septiiigeiitesimo  anno  postquam  condita 
erat,  deleta  est.  Sclpio  4iomen  African!  junioris  accepit. 

6.  Interim  in  Macedonia  quidam  Pseudophilippus  arma 
movit,  et  P.  Juvencium,  Romanorum  ducem,  ad  interne- 

vicit.     Post  euin  Q.  Caecilius  Metellus  dux  a  Ro- 


manis  contra  Pseudophilippum  mssus  est,  et,  vTgnt! 
qninque  millibus  ex  miiitlbus  ejus  (36)  occ!s!s  (133), 
Macedonian!  recepit:  ipsum  etiam  Pseudophilippum  in 
potestatem  suam  redegit.  Corinthiis  quoque  bellum  in- 
dicturn  est,nobilissimae  Graeciae  clvitat!  (95),  prop- 
A.  c.  ter  injuriam  RomauTs  legatls  (50)  illatam.  Ilanc 

146.  Mummius  consul  cepit  ac  diruit.     Trcs  igitur  R6- 
mae  (45)  simul  celeberrimi  triumph!  fuerunt  ;  Sc!p- 

iohis  ex  Africa,  ante  cujus  currum  ductus  est  Andriscus, 
qui  et  Pseudophilippus  dicitur;  ]MummiI  ex  Corintlio, 
ante  quern  signa  aenea  et  pictae  tabulae  et  alia  urbis  cla- 
rissimae  ornamenta  praelata  sunt. 

7.  Anno  sexcentesimo  sexto  post  Urbem  condi- 
A.  c.     tarn  Viriathus  in  Lusitania  bellum  contra  Romanos 

147.  excitavit.     Pastor  pnnio  fuit',  mox  latronum  dux  ; 


OUTLINES   OF   ROMAN   HISTORY.  227 

postremo  tantos  ad  bellum  populos  concitavit,  ut  vindex 
llbertatis  (34)  Hispaniae  existimaretur  (199).  Denique  a 
snls  (97)  interfectus  est.  Quum  interfectores  ejus  prae- 
mium  a  Caepionc  Cos.  peterent,  responsum  est  (139), 
nunquam  RomfmTs  (46)  placuisse,  imperatorem  a,  mllitibus 
suis  (235)  interticl  (149). 

8.  Delude  bellum  exortum  est  cum  NumantTnTs,  civi- 
tate  (95)  Hispaniae.      Victus  ab  his  Qu.   Pompejus,  et 
post  eum  C.  Ilostllius  Mancmus  Cos.,  qui  pacem  cum  iis  fe- 
cit infamem,  quani  (150)  populus  et  senatus  jussit  infringl, 
atque  ipsum  Mariclnum  hostibus  tradi.     Turn  P.  Scipio 
Airicanus  in  Hispaniam  missus  est.     Is  primum  militem 
ignavum   et  corruptum  correxit ;  turn  multas  Hispaniae 
civitates  partim  bello  cepit,  partim  in  deditionem 
accepit.     Postremo  ipsam  Numantiam  fame  ad  de-     A.  c. 
ditionem  coegit,  urbemque  evertit;  reliquam  pro-      133. 
vinciam  in  fidem  accepit. 

9.  P.    Scipione '  NasTca  et  L.   Calpurnio  Bestia  Coss. 
(131)  Jugurthae,  Numidarum  regi,  bellum  illatum  est, 
quod  Adherbalem  et  Hiempsalem,  Micipsae  fllios,  patru- 
eles  suos,  interemisset  (209).     Missus  adversus  eum  Cos. 
Calpurnius  Bestia,  corruptus  regis   pecunia,  pacem  cum 
eo  flagitiosissimam  fecit,   quae  a  senatu  improbata  est. 
Denique  Qu.  Caecilius  Metellus  Cos.  Jugurtham  varils 
proelils  vlcit,  elephantos  ejus  occldit  vel  cepit,  multas 
clvitates  ipsTus  in  deditionem  accepit.    El  (50)  successit  C. 
Marius,  qui  bello  (48)  terminum  posuit,  ipsumque  Jugur- 
tham  cepit.    Ante  currum  triumphantis  (128)  Marii 
Jugurtha  cum  duobus  fllils  ductus  est  vinctus,  et     A.  c. 
mox  jussu  consulis  in  carcere  strangulatus.  106. 


LIBER    QUINTUS. 

1.  Dum  bellum  in  Numidia  contra  Juguvtham  geritur, 
Cimbrl  et  Teuton!  aliaeque  Germanorum  et  Gallorum  gcn- 
tes  Italiae  minabantur,  atque  Romanorum  exercitus  lu de- 
runt.  Ingens  fuit  Romae  (45)  timor,  ne  iterum  Gall!  Ur- 


228  OUTLINES  OF  ROMAX  HISTORY. 

bem  occuparent.  Ergo  Marius  Cos.  creatus,  elque  bel- 
lum  contra  Cimbros  et  Teutonos  dec-return  cst ;  belloque 
pr.'tracto  (133),  tertius  el  et  qnnrtus  consulatus  delatus 
est.  In  duobns  proelils  cum  Cimbrls  ducenta  millia  hos- 
tium  (35)  cecldil,  octoginta  millia  cGpit,  eorumque  ivgem 
Theutobochtim ;  propter  quod  merit um  absens  quinto 
Consul  (79)  creatus  e>t.  Interea  Cimbri  et  Teuton!  quo- 
rum copia  adhuc  ini'inita  erat,  in  Italian!  transiC-- 
A.  c.  runt  (91).  Iterum  a  C.  Mario  et  Qu.  Catulo  con- 
101.  tra  eos  dlmicatum  est  (139)  ad  Veronam.  Cen- 
tum et  quadraginta  millia  aut  in  pugna  aut  in  fuga 
caesa  sunt ;  sexagintfi  millia  capta.  Tria  et  triginta  Cim- 
brls (51)  signa  siiblata  sunt. 

2.  Sexcentesimo  sexagesimo  tertio  anno  ab  Urbe 
A.  c.     condita    in    Italia    gravissimum    bellum    exarsit. 

90.  Nam  Plcentes,  Mars!  Pelignique,  qu!  multos  an- 
nos  (43)  populo  Romano  (46)  obedierant,  aequa 
cum  illis  jura  sibi  dari  (149)  postulabant.  Perniciosuni 
admodum  hoc  bellum  fuit.  P.  Rutilius  Cos.  in  eo  occisus 
est ;  pliires  exercitus  fusi  fugatique.  Tandem  L.  Corne- 
lius Sulla  cum  alia  egregie  ges  it,  turn  Cluentium,  hostium 
dncem,  cum  magnis  copils  ludit.  Per  biennium  cum  gravl 
utriusque  partis  calamitate  hoc  bellum  tractum  est.  Ter- 
tio demum  anno  L.  Cornelius  Sulla  el  imposuit  finem. 
Roman!  tamen>  id  quod  prius  negaverant,  jus  clvitutis, 
bello  fimto  (131),  sociis  tribuerunt. 

3.  Anno  Urbis  conditae  sexcentesimo  sexagesi- 
A.  c.     mo  quinto  primum  Romae  (49)  bellum  civ!le  exor- 

88.  turn  est ;  eodem  anno  etiam  Mithridaticum.  Cau- 
sam  bello  civill  C.  Marius  dedit.  Nam  quum  Sul- 
lae  bellum  adversus  Mithridatem  regem  Pont!  decretum 
esset  (211),  Marius  e!  (51)  hunc  honorem  eripere  conatus 
est.  (136).  Sed  Sulla,  qu!  adhuc  cum  legionibus  su!s  in 
Italia,  njqrabatur,  cum  exercitu  Rdmam  (29)  venit,  et  ad- 
versariog  cum  interiecit,  turn  fugavit.  Turn  rebus  Ro- 
mae (49)  ut.cumque  compositis,  in  Asiam  profectus  est, 
pluribusque  proeljis  ?ilithridateni  coegit,  ut  pacern  a  Ro- 


OUTLINES   OF   ROMAN   HISTORY.  229 

manis  peteret,  et  Asia,  quam  (104)  invaserat,  relicta,  rcgnl 
su!  flnibus  (61)  contentus  esset. 

4.  Sed  dum  Sulla  in  Graecia  et  Asia  Mithridatem  vin- 
cit,  Marius,  qui  fug-it  us  ftierat,  et  Cornelius  Cinna,  unus  ex 
consulibus,  belium  in  Italia  repararunt,  et  ingress!  Rr>m:im, 
nobilissimos  ex  senatu,  et  consulates  viros  interfecerunt ; 
inultos  proscripserunt ;  ipsTus  Sullae  domo  eversa  (133), 
fllios  et  uxorem  ad  fugaiii  compulerunt.  universus  reli- 
quus  senatus,  ex  Urbe  fugiens,  ad  Sullam  in  Graeciam  ve- 
nit,  orans,  ut  patriae  (50)  subvenlret  (192).  Sulla  in  Ital- 
iam  trajecit,  hostiuin  exercitus  vicit,  mox  etiam  Urbern 
ingressus  est,  quam  caede  (61)  et  sanguine  civium  reple- 
vit.  Quatuor  millia  (150)  inermium,  qui  se  dediderant, 
interficl  (237)  jussit;  duo  millia  equitum  et  senritorurn 
proscripsit.  Turn  de  Mithridate  triumphavit.  Duo  haec 
bella  funestisama,  Italicum,  quod  et  sociale  dictum  est, 
et  civile,  consumserunt  ultra  centum  et  quinquaginta  mil- 
lia hominum,  viros  consulares  vTgintl  quatuor,  praetorius 
septem,  aedllicios  sexaginta,  senutores  fere  ducentos. 


LIBER   SEXTUS. 

1.  Anno  Urbis  conditae  sexcentesimo  septuages- 
imo  nono,  Licinio  Lucullo  et  M.  Aurelio  Cotta  A.  c. 
Coss.,  mortuus  est  Nlcomedes,  rex  Blthyniae  et  74. 
testamento  populum  Romanum  fecit  heredem. 
Mithridates,  pace  rupta  Asiam  rursus  voluit  invadere. 
Adversus  eum  ambo  Consules  miss!  variam  habuere  for- 
tunam.  Cotta,  apud  Chalcedonem  victus  proelio,  a  rege 
etiam  intra  oppidum  obsessus  est.  Sed  quum  se  inde 
Mithridates  Cyzicum  (29)  transtulisset  (214),  ut  hac  urbe 
captd  totam  Asiam  invaderet,  Lucullus  el  alter  consul  oc- 
currit  (101),  ac  dum  Mithridates  in  obsidione  Cyzicl  com- 
moratur,  ipse  eum  a  tergo  obsedit,  fameque  consumtum 
multls  proelils  vicit.  Postremo  Byzantium  (29)  eum  fu- 
gavit;  naval!  quoque  proelio  ejus  duces  oppressit.  Ita 
una  hieme  et  aestate  a  Lucullo  centum  fere  millia  mllitum 
regis  exstincta  sunt. 
20 


230  OUTLINES   OF   ROMAN   HISTORY. 

2.  Anno  Urbis  sexcentesimo  octogesimo  novum 
A.  c.  in  Italia  belluni  conimotum  est.  Septuaginta  enim 
73.  quf.tuor  gladLtores,  ducibus  (133)  Spartaco,  Crixo 
et  Gui.MiiaO  c  ludo  gladiat'trio,  qu!  Capuae  (45) 
er.it,  efFugerunt,  et  per  Italiain  vagantC-s  paene  nou  levins 
bellum,  quani  Hannibal,  moveriint.  Xam  contraxerunt 
exercitum  fere  sexagintl  inillinm  (38)  armatorum  (35), 
multosque  daces  et  duos  Romanos  consules  vicernnt. 
Ipsi  victl  sunt  in  Apulia  a  M.  Licinio  Crasso  (126)  Pro- 
consule,  et,  post  multas  calainitates  Italiae,  tertio  anno 
(54)  hnlc  bello  finis  est  iinpositus.  r, 

3.  Interim  L.  Lucullus,  bellnra  Mithridaticnm  perse- 
quiitus,  regnuin  Mithridatis  invasit,  ipsumque  regera  apud 
Cabira  clvit.ltem  quo  ingentes  copias  ex  omn!  regnu  ad- 
duxerat  Mithridates,  ingenti  proelio  superatum  fugivit,  et 
castra  ejus  dlripuit.     Armenia  quoque  minor,  quain  tene- 
bat,  eidem  (51)  erepta  est.     Susceptus  est  Mithridates  a 
Tigruiie,  Armeniae  rege,  qui  turn  ingenti  gloria  (55)  im- 
perabat;  sed  hujiis  quoque  regnum  Lucullus  est  ingressus 
(136).     Tigranocerta,  nobilissimam  Armeniae  civitatem, 
cepit;  ipsum  regem,  cum  magno  exercitu  venientem,  it  a 
vicit,  ut  robur  militum  Armeniorum  deleret  (199).     Sed 
quum  Lucullus  fmem  bello  imponere  pararet  (211),  suc- 
cessor el  missus  est. 

4.  Per  ilia  tempora  piratae  omnia  maria  infestabant  it  a, 
ut  Romaiils,  toto  orbe  (63)  terrarum  victoribus,  sola  navi- 
gatio  tuta  non  esset  (199).     Quare  id  bellum  Cn.  Pompe- 

jo  decretum  est,  quod  intra  paucos  menses  incredi- 
A.  c.     bill  le  licit  ate  (55)  et  celeritate  confecit.     Mox  el 
66.      delatum  bellum  contra  regem  Mithridatem  et  Tig- 
ranem.     Quo  (110)  suscepto,  Mithridatem  in  Ar- 
menia minore  nocturno  proelio  vieit,  castra  dlripuit,  et 
q  ladraginta  millibus  ejus  (36)  occlsis,  vlgintl  tantum  de 
exercitu  suo  perdidit  et  duos  centuriones.     Mithridates 
fagit  cum  uxore  et  duobus  comitibus,  neque  multo  post, 
Pharnacis  filii   sin   seditione    coactus,    venenum   hausit. 
Hunc  vitae  (33)  finem  habiut  Mithridates,  vir  ingentis  in- 


OUTLINES  OF   ROMAN  HISTORY.  231 

dustriae  atque  consilii  (38).  Regnavit  annls*  sexaginta, 
vixit  septuaginta  du5bus  :  contra  Romanos  beilum  habuit 
annls  quadragintu. 

5.  Tigrfin!  delude  Pompejus  bcllum  intnlit.     Ille  se  el 
dedidit,  et  in  castra  Pompcjl  venit,  ac  diadSma  strain  in 
qjus    mambus    coilocavit,    quod    el    Pomp  jj  us   reposuit. 
Parte  (61)  regn!  eum  multuvit  et  grand!  pecunia.     Tain 
alias  etiam  reges  et  populos  superavit.     Armenian!  mino- 
rem  Deiotaro  (48),  Galatiae  regi,  donavit,  quia  auxiiium 
contra   Mithriaatera  tulerat.      SslencTani,  vlcmam  Anti- 
ochlae  clvitatem,  llbertate  (61)  donavit,  quod  regem  Tig- 
ranein  njn  recepisset  (209).     Inde  in  Judaeam  transgres- 
sus  (213),  Hierosolymani,  caput  gentis,  tertio  mense  (54) 
cepit,  duodecim  millibus  (133)  Jadaeorum  occisls,  ceterls 
in  fidem  receptis.     His  gestls  flnem  antlquissima  bello 
irnposuit.    Ante  triumphantis  currum  duct!  sunt  f  ilil  Mith- 
ridatis,  filius  Tigranis,  et  Aristobulus,  rex  Judaeorum. 
Praelata  ingens  pecunia,  aim  atque  argent!  (35)  inf  mitum. 
Hoc  tempore  nullum  per  orbeni  terrarum  grave  beilum 
erat. 

6.  M.  Tulli5  Cicerone  oratore  (95)  et  C.  Anto- 
nio Coss.  anno  ab  Urbe  condita  sexcentesimo  no-     A.  c. 
n'igesimo  L.  Sergius  Catillna,  nobilissimi  generis       63. 
(38)  vir,  sed  ingenil  pravissimT,  ad  delendam  (176) 
patriam  conjuravit  cum  quibusdam  (261),  clarls  quidem, 
sed  audacibus  virls.     A  Cicerone  urbe  (59)  expulsus  est, 
socil  ejus  deprehensi  et  in  carcere  strangulatl  sunt.     Ab 
Antonio,  altero  consule,  Catilina  ipse  proelio  victus  est  et 
interfectus. 

7.  Anno  urbis  conditae  sexcentesimo  nonagesi- 

mo  quarto  C.  Julius  Caesar  cum  L.  Bibulo  consul  A.  c. 
est  fact  us.  Quum  el  Gallia  decreta  esset,  semper  59. 
vincendo  (173)  usque  ad  Oceanum  Britannicum  pro- 
cessit.  Domuit  autem  annis  novem  fere  omnem_Galliam, 
quae  inter  Alpes,  flujnen  Rhodanum,  Rhenum  et  Oceanura 
est.  Britannls  mox  beilum  intulit,  quibus  ante  eum  ne 

*See  note  on  page  212. 


232  OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY. 

nomen  quidem  Romanorum  cognitum  er.it ;  Germanos 
quoque  trans  RLenum  aggressus  (136),  ingentibus  proe- 
lils  vlcit. 

8.  Circa  eadem  tempora  M.  Licinius  Crassus  contra 

PartLos  misses  cst.     Et  quum  circa  Carras  contra  omina 

et  auspieia  proclium  commisisset,  a  Surena,  Orodis 

A.  c.     regis  duce,  victus  et  interfectus  est  cum  filio,  clf,ris- 

53.      simo  et  praestantissima  juvene.     Reliquiae  exer- 

citus  per  C.  Cassium  quaestorem  servatae  sunt. 

9.  Hinc  jam  bellum  civile  successit,  quo  (61) 
A.  c.  Roman!  nominis  fortuna  mutata  est.  Caesar  cnim, 
49.  victor  e  Gallia  rediens,  absens  coepit  poscere  alte- 
rum  consulatum;  quern  (110)  quum  aliqui  (262) 
sine  dubitatione  duferrent,  contradictum  est  (139)  a  Pomp- 
ejo  et  alils,  jussusque  est,  dlmissis  exercitibus,  in  Urbem 
redire.  Propter  hanc  injuriam  ab  Arimino,  ubi  milites  con- 
gregatos  habebat,  iniesto  exercitu  (55)  Roinam  (29)  con- 
tendit.  Consules  cum  Pompejo,  senatusque  omnis  atque 
universa  nobilitas  ex  urbe  fugit  et  in  Graeciam  transiit ; 
et,  dum  senatus  bellum  contra  Caesarem  parabat,  Lie, 
vacuam  urbem  ingressus,  dictatorem  se  fecit. 

10.  Inde  Hispanias  petit  (137),  ibique  Pompejl  legiones 
superavit ;  turn  in  Graecia  adversum  Pompejuin  ipsmn  dl- 
micavit.  Primo  proelio  victus  est  et  fugatus ;  evasit  ta- 
men,  quia  nocte  interveniente  Pompejus  sequ!  noluit ; 
dixitque  Caesar,  nee  PompC-jum  (150)  scire  vincere  (140), 

et  illo  tantum  die  (54)  se  potuisse  (247)  superait. 

A.  c.     Deinde  in  Thessalia  apud  PLarsalum  ingentibus 

48.      utrimque  copils   commissis  dlmicaverunt.      Nun- 

quam  adhuc  Romanae  copiae  majores,  neque  meli5- 
ribus  ducibus  (133)  convenerant.  Pugnatum  est  (138) 
ingent!  contentione  (55)  victusque  ad  postremum  Pompe- 
jus et  castra  ejus  direpta  sunt.  Ipse  fugatus  Alexandnam 
petit,  ut  a  rege  ^EgyptT,  cui  tutor  a  senatu  datus  fuerat, 
acciperet  (196)  auxilia.  At  Lie  fortunam  magis,  quam 
amicitiaiii  (82),  secutus,  occidit  Pompejum,  caput  ejus  et 
aimulum  Caesarl  mlsit.  Quo  (110)' conspecto,  Caesar 


OUTLINES  OF  ROMA^T  HISTORY.  233 

lacrymas  fudisse  dlcitur,  tantl  virl  intuens  caput,  et  gener! 
quondam  suT. 

11.  Quum  ad  AlexandrTam  vSnisset  (214)  Caesar,  Pto- 
lemaeus  el  insidias  parare  voluit,  qua  do  causa  reg!  bel- 
lum  illatum  est.     Rex  victus  in  Nilo  periit,  inventumquc 
est  corpus  ejus  cum  lorlca  aureu.     Caesar,  Alexandria 
(61)  potltus,  regnum  Cleopatrae  dedit.     Turn  inde  pro- 
feet  us  Pompeianarum  partium  reliquias  est  persequutus, 
belllsque   clvllibus   toto   terrarum   orbe  (63)   compositis 
(131),  Romam  redilt.     Ubi  quum  insolentius  (84)  agere 
coepisset,  conjuratum  est  (139)  in  eum  a  sexaginta  vel 
amplius  senatoribus  equitibusque  RomanTs.      Praecipui 
fuerunt  inter  conjuratos  Brut!  duo,  ex  genere  illlus  Brut!, 
qui,  regibus  expulsls  (131),  primus  Romae  (45)  consul  fu- 
erat,  C.  Cassius  et  Servllius  Casca.     Ergo  Caesar, 
quum  in  curiam  venisset,  vigint!  tribus  vulneribus     A.  c. 
confossus  est.  44. 

12.  Interfecto  Caesare,  anno  Urbis  septingentesimo  no- 
no,  bella  civilia  reparata  sunt.     Senatus  favebat  Caesaris 
jiercussoribus,  Antonius  Cos.  a  Caesaris  partibus  stabat. 
Ergo  turbata  republica  (133),  Antonius,  multls  sceleribus 
commissis,  a  senatu  hostis  judicatus   est.     Fusus  fuga- 
tusque  Antonius,  amisso  exercitu,  confugit  ad  Lepidum, 
qui  Caesar!  (46)  magister  equitum  fuerat,  et  turn  grandes 
copias  militum  habebat ;  a  quo  susceptus  est.     Mox  Oc- 
tavianus  cum  Antonio  pacem  fecit,  et  quasi  vindicaturus 
(143)  patris  sul  mortem,  a  quo  per  testamentum  fuerat 
adoptatus,  Romam  cum  exercitu  profectus  extorsit,   ut 
(199)  sibi  juvenl  vigintl  annorum  (38)  consulutus  daretur 
(25).     Turn  junctus  cum  Antonio  et  Lepido  rempublicam 
armis   tenere  coepit,   senatumque  proscripsit.     Per  hos 
etiam  Cicero   orator   (95)  occisus  est  multlque  all!  no- 
biles. 

13.  Interea  Brutus  et  Cassius,  interfectores  Caesaris, 
ingens  bellum  moverunt.     Profectl  contra  eos  Caesar  Oc- 


tavianus,  qui  postea  Augustus  est  appellatus,  et  M.  Anto- 
nius, apud  Philippos,  Macedoniae  urbem 


(95),  contra  eos 
20* 


234  OUTLINES  OF  ROMAN  HISTORY. 

pugnaverunt.     PrTmo  proelio  victi  snnt  Antoiiius 

A.  c.     et  Caesar;  periit  tamen   dux  nobilitfttis  Cassias; 

42.      secundo   Brutum   et   infmltam   nobilitatem,  qnae 

cum  illls  bellum  susceperat,  victam  interfCcernnt. 

Turn  victores  rempublicam  ita  inter  se  dlvlserunt,  ut  Oc- 

tavianus  Caesar  Hispanias,  Gallias,  Italiam  teneret;  Aii- 

tonius  Orientem,  Lej.idus  Airicam  acciperet. 

14.  Paulo  post  Antonins,  repudiata  sorore  (133)  ( 
ris  OctavianT,  Cleopatram,  reginam  JEgyptT,  uxorem  duxit. 
Ab  hac  incitatus  iugens  bellura  commovit,  dum  Cleopatra 
cupiditate  muliebri  optat  Romae  (49)  regnare.  Vietus  est 
ab  Augusts  naval!  j^ugna  clara  et  illustrT  apud  Ac- 
A.  c.  tium,  qui  locus  in  EpTro  est.  Hinc  fugit  in  ^Egyp- 
31.  turn,  et  dCsperf.tls  rebus,  quum  omnGs  ad  Angus- 
turn  transirent,  se  ipse  interemit.  Cleopatra  quo- 
que  apsidem  sibi  (50)  admisit,  et  veneno  Cjus  exstincta 
est.  Ita  bellis  toto  orbe  (63)  confectls  (133)  Oi-tavL.nus 
Augustus  Romam  (29)  rediit  anno  (54)  duodecimo  quani 
consul  fucrat.  Ex  eo  hide  tempore  rempublicam  per 
quadraginta  et  quatuor  annos  solus  obtinuit.  Ante  enim 
duodecim  annis  cum  Antonio  et  Lepido  tenuerat.  Ita  ab 
initio  principatas  ejus  usque  ad  finem  qmuquagiuta  sex 
annl  fuere. 


VOCABULARY. 


ENGLISH-LATIN. 


Abandon,  (leave  behind)  relinqn-,  2. 

rellqu-,  3.  relielo.  (desert)  desti- 

tu-,  2.  — " —  3.  desiitQto-. 
ability,  ingenio-,  n.  iudoli-,  f.  nom. 

s.  indoles. 

le  able,  poles-,  2.  potu-. 
abode,  sedi-,  f.  nom.  s.  scdes. 
about,  circiter. 
above,  super,  (ncc.  orabl.). 
abuse,  opprobrio-,  n. 
accomplish,  perlic(i)-,  2.  perfec-,  3. 
-  perieeto-. 

on-aocount-of,  propter,  (ace.). 
accuse,  aceusa-,  2.  accusav-,  3.  ae- 

c  iisa  to-. 
"be  accustomed,  sole-  (semi-dep.\  3. 

soli  to-,  consuesc-,  2.  cousuev-,  3. 

consueto-. 
across,  trans,  (ace.), 
action,  facto-,  u. 
active,  gnavo-. 

admire,  adinlra-,  3.  admlrato-. 
admit,    adrnitt-,  2.    admis-,  3.*  ad- 

inisso-. 

ad»rn,  orna-,  2.  ornav-,  3.  ornato-. 
Gdorn-greatty,  exorua-,  2.  exoruav-, 

3.  exornato-. 
advance,    proc3d-,    2.  process-,    3. 

pr.:-cesso-.  perg-,  2.   perrex-,   3. 

perrecio-.  progred(i)-,  3.  progres- 

so-. 

advantage,  utilitat-. 
adverse,  adverxo-. 
adversity,  re-  adversa-,  pi. 
advice,  coasilio-,  n. 


advise,  mone-,  2.  monu-,  3.  moni- 

to-,  suude-,  (dat.)  2.  suas-,  3.  sua- 

so-. 

Aeduan,  Aeduo-. 
afi'air,  re-. 

'•     (business),  negotio-,  n. 
affrct,  affic(i)-,  2.  allcc-,  3.  affecto-. 
ajfii')n.  contirma-,  2.  eontinuav-,  3. 

contirmato-. 
afford,  praebe-,  2.  praebu-,  3.  prae- 

bito-. 

African,  Afro-. 
after,  post,  (ace.), 
afterwards,  posted. 
again,  r units. 

ag.-tinst,  contra,  (ace.)  in,  (ace.) 
age,  attat-. 

"   (a  period)  saeculo-,  n. 
Agedicum,  Agedico-,  n. 
oyree,  consenti-,    2.    consens-,    3. 

consenso-. 

agriculture,  agricultura-. 
aid,  auxilio-.  n. 
alarm,   perrnove-,   2.   permov-,    3. 

permoto-.   perturba-,   2.   pertur- 

blv-,  3.  perturbato-. 
alarmed,  perterrito-. 
be  alive,  vlv-,  2.  vix-,  3..  victo-. 
all,  otnui- 
alliance,  societal-, 
allow,  pat(i)-,  3.  passo-. 
be  allowed,  (impers.)  lice-,  2.  lieu-, 

3.  licito-. 

allure,  allic(i)-,  2.  allex-,  3.  allecto-. 
ally,  aocio-. 


236 


VOCABULARY. 


alone,  soto-,  for  declens.  see  §  162. 

already,  jam. 

also,  etiam. 

alwaj's.  semper. 

ambassador,  legato-. 

among,  apud,  inter  (ace.). 

ample,  amplo-. 

ancient,  antiquo-,  prislino-. 

anger,  Ira-. 

be  angry,  Irasc-,  3.  Irato-. 

animal,  animat(i)-,  n. 

Antigonus,  Anligono-. 

anxious,  anxio-. 

any,  ulbt-,  for  declens.  see  §  162. 

appear,  vide-,  3.  vlso-. 

appearance,  f-pecie-. 

appease,  placa-,  2.  placav-,  3.  pla- 

cato-. 

apple,  porno-,  n. 
approacli,  aslventu-. 
approach,   appropinqna-,    (dat.)   2. 

appropinquiiv-,  3.  appropinqua- 
te-, adi-,  2.  adlv-,  3.  adito-. 
approve,  comproba-,  2.  coruprobav-, 

3.  comprobato-. 
archer,  sayittario-. 
Ariovistus.  Ariovisto-. 
arisr.  surg-,  2.  surrex-,  3.  surrecto-. 

or(i}-,  3.  orto-. 

arm  (of  the  body),  brachio-,  n. 
arms  (of  war),  anno-,  n.  pL 
army,  e&rcitu-. 

"     (in  array),  acie-. 
around,  circum  (ace.), 
arrival,  advtntu-. 
arrogance,  arro'jantia-. 
art,  art(i)-,  f. 
as,  ut. 
ascend,  escend-,  2.  — " —  3.  escen- 

so-. 
ascertain,  cognosc-,  2.  cognov-,  3. 

cognito-. 
be  ashamed,  (impers.)  pude-,  2.  pu- 

du-,  3.  pudito-. 
ashe-s,  cintr-,  m.  nom.  s.  cinis. 
Asia.  .-l5i'«-. 
ask  (for  a  thing)  pet-,  2.  petlv-,  3. 

petlto-. 


osfc  (a  question)  roga-,  2.  rogav-,  3. 

rogato-. 

a«5sembly.  conventu-. 
assert,  affirma-,  2.  afiBrmav-,  3.  af- 

lirmato-. 
assign,  attribu-,   2.  — f; —  3.  attri- 

buto-. 

assist,  juva-,  2.  juv-,  3.  juto-. 
assistance,  aubsidiu-,  n. 
assure,  doce-,  2.  docu-,  3.  docto-. 
astonish,  stupetac(i)-,  2.  stupetec-, 

3.  stnpefacio-. 

astrologer,  mathematico-,  m. 
Athens,  Athena-,  pL 
at  length,  ktndem. 
at  once  (together),  simul. 

"       (instantly),  statim. 
Atticus,  Attico-. 

attack,  invad-,  2.  invas-,  3  invaso-. 
attack,  impetu-. 
attempt,  conatu-. 
attend-to,  stude-  (dat.\  2.  studu-. 
attendant,  comet-,  c. 
attention,  opera-. 

augment,  auge-,  2."aux-,  3.  aucto-. 
auspice,  auspicio-.  n. 
authority,  impcrio-,  n. 
auxiliaries,  uuxilio-,  n.  pL 
avaricious,  avdro-. 
avenge,  ulcisc-,  3,  ulto-. 
averse,  averso-. 

arert.  avert-,  2.  — " —  3.  averse-. 
avoid,  vita-,  2.  vltav-,  3.  vltito-. 


Bacenis,  Baceni-. 

back,  ttrgo-,  n. 

bad,  mitlo-. 

baggage,  impedlmento-,  pi. 

Balbus,  BaUw. 

band,  tnanu-,  f. 

barbarian,  barbaro-. 

bark.  o>rlec-.  c. 

bark;  latra-,  2.  latrav-,  3.  latrato-. 

barking,  (noun)  latrutu-. 

barren,  stcrili-. 


VOCABULARY. 


237 


base,  turpi-. 

base ly,  tarpiter. 

baseness,  tiirpitildon-. 

battle,  proelio-.  n. 

bear,  perfer-,  2.  pertul-,  3.  perlato-. 

P'it(i)-,  3   pa.sso-. 
beast,  quadruped,  c. 

"     of  burden,  jumento-. 
beat  (conquer),  pell-,  2.  pepul-,   3. 

pulso-. 

beautiful,  pulc.ro-. 
beautifully,  pukre. 
because,  quia. 
bee,  api-,  f. 

before,  (prep.)  ante,  (ace.), 
before,  (subjunc.)  antequam,  prius- 

quam. 

beg,  pet-,  2.  petlv-,  3.  petlto-. 
beggar,  men'tlco-. 
fagin,  inc-ip(i)-,  2.  incep-,  3.  incep- 

to-.  (no  1st  stem)    2.  coep-,  3. 

coepto-. 

beginning,  initio-,  n. 
behold,  aspic(i)-,   2.  aspex-,  3.  as- 

pecto-.  conspic(i)-,  2.  conspex-, 

3.  conspecU)-. 
Belgae,  IMga-,  pi. 
believe,  cred-.  2.  credid-,  3.  credito-. 
belong,  pertine-,  2.  pertiuu-. 
beside,  praeter  (ace.). 
besiege,  oppugna-,  2.  oppugnav-,  3. 

oppu°:nato-. 
best.,  optima-, 
betray,  prod-,  2.  prodid-,  3.  prodi- 

to-. 

better,  meli.or-. 
between,  interface.). 
beyond,  ultra,  (ace.). 
bid,  jube-,  2.  juss-,  3  jusso-. 
bind,  vinci-.  2.  vinx-,  3.  viacto-. 
bird,  avi-,  f. 
bite,  morde-,  2.  momord-,  3.  raor- 

so-. 

black,  nigro-. 
blame,  reprehend-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  re- 

preheuso-. 
bliud,  catco-. 


block-up,  obstru-,  2.  obstrux-,  3.  ob- 

siructo-. 
blood,  sanguin-,  m.   nora.  s.   san- 

guis. 

boar,  apro-. 

boast,  gloria-,  3.  gloriato-. 
body,  corpos-. 
bold,  audilc(i)'. 
boldly,  audacter. 
boldness,  audacia-. 
book,  libra-,  m. 
booty,  praeda-. 
be  born,  nasc-.  3.  nato-. 
bottom  (lowest  part),  lino-,  n. 
bough,  ramo-,  in. 
boundless,  inflnlto-. 
bountifully,  Iqrgiter. 
bow,  arcu-. 
boy,  puero-. 
brain,  cerebro-,  n. 
brave,  forti-. 
bravely,  fortiter. 
bread,  pcini-,  m. 
breadth,  latitudon-. 
break,  fra(n)g-.  2.  freg-,  3.  fracto-. 
break-apart,  disjic(i)-,  2.  disjec-,  3. 

disjecto-. 
break-through,    perfring-,     2.    per- 

freg-,  3.  perfrncto-. 
breathe  again,  resplra-,  2.  resplrav-, 

3.  resplrato-. 
bridge,  p<mt(i)-,  m. 
brigand,  praedon-. 
brightness,  splendor-, 
bring-to,  after-,  2.  attul-,  3.  allato-. 
Briton,  Britanno-. 
broad,  lafo-. 
brother,  fratr-. 
Brutus,  Bruto-. 
build,    aeditica-,    2.  aedificav-,   3. 

aedificato-. 

building,  aedificio-,  n. 
burden,  ones-, 
burn,  (set  on  fire)  incend-,  2.  — "— 

3.  inceriso-. 
burn,  (be  hot)  arde-,  2.  ars-,  3.  ar- 

so-. 


238 


VOCABULARY. 


burxf-in,  irrump-,   2.  irrup-,  3.  ir- 

riipi.o-. 
burxt-ouf,  erump-,  2.  erup-,  3  erup- 

to-. 
burst-U rough*  perrump-,  2.  pen-up-, 

3.  perrnpto-. 
bury,  sepeli-,  2    sepellv-,  3.  sepul- 

t«H. 

business,  negdtio-,  n. 

but,  sed;  a/item  (never  begins   a 

sentence.), 
but  that,  quin, 
butcher,   truclda-,  2.   trucldav-,  3. 

trucldato-. 

buy.  em-.  2.  em-.  3.  empto-. 
buy-up,  coem-,  2.  coeui-,  3.  coemp- 

t<>-. 

by.  a,  ab  (abl.). 
by-far,  lunge. 
by-night, 


Catt,  voca-,  2.  vocav-,  3.  vocato-. 

'•  (name)  die-.  'J.  dix-,  3.  dicto-, 

call-back,  revoca-,  2.  revocav-,   3. 

revocato-. 
caU-<lotvn,  devoca-,  2.  devocav-,  3. 

devocato-. 
caU-fogctJicr,    convoca-,    2.   convo- 

cav-,  3.  of >n  vocato-. 
cali-upon,  appella-,  2.  appelluv-,  3. 

appellato-. 
calm,  plncvlo-. 
camp,  ctititro-,  n.  pi. 
ca«.  potes-.  2.  potu-. 
capture,  cj«p(i  >-,  2.  cep-,  3.  capto-. 
Capua.  Capua-. 
careful. 
carefully, 
carry,  porta-,  2.  portav-,  3.  porta- 

t<K 

carry-across,  transporta-,  2.  trans- 
portav-.  3.  tnin^port.Ito-. 

carry-back,  reporta-,  2.  reportav-, 
3.  reportato-. 


carry-down,  defer-,  2.  detul-,  3.  d5- 

l.ao-. 
carry-off,   abrip(i)-,   2.    abripu-,    3. 

nl»repto  . 
carry-tm  (as  war),  ger-,  2.  gess-,  3. 

presto-. 
camj-itut,  exporta-,   2.  ex  portav-, 

3.  exjMntato-. 
carry-t"gttker,  confer-,  2.    coiitul-, 

3.  collnto-. 

Cartlia^e.  Curthagon-,  f. 

cask.  cad"-,  m. 

Catiline,  Catillna-. 

cattle,  pews-. 

cavnlry,  tquitaiu-. 

cave,  xp< luttca-. 

cause,  musa-. 

celebrate,  nobilita-,  2.  nobilitav-,  3. 

riohiliiato-. 
centurion,  centurion-. 
certain,  cerio-. 

"     some,  qun-dnm. 
change,  muia-.  2.  mutav-,  3.  muta- 

t<»-. 
chat-ye-forward.  prccurr-.  2.  — " — 

or  prociipurr-,  3.  procurso-. 
charge,  crlmen-. 
charge,  manda-,  (dal.)  2.  mandav-, 

3.  mandato-. 
chariot,  tssrdo-.  n. 
charioteer,  aurlga-. 
charm,  il'cc-bra-. 
charm,  delecta-,  2.  delectav-,  3.  de- 

lectato-. 
dieat,  frauda-,  2.  fraudav-,  3.  frau- 

da  to- 
chief,  princcp-. 
chief-power,  principatu-. 
childivn.  iU>tio-,  m.  pL 
choice,  voluiitat-. 
Cicero,  Cirerdn-. 
circle,  orbi-,  in. 
circumstance,  re-. 
citizen,  civ/-,  c. 
city,  url(i)-,  (. 
clear,  ptrsjxcuo-. 
clear  (*lrij>),  uuda-,   2.  nudav-,   3. 

nudlto-. 


VOCABULARY. 


clemency,  cl'mentin-. 

cli.nb,  ascend-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  ascen- 

SO-. 

cloak,  'paenuti.-. 

dot'iti,  vesti-,  2.  vestiv-,  3.  vestlto. 
clothes,  vsti-.  f. 
cohort,  c<>knrt(i)-,  f. 
cold  (a  //.),  frigido-. 
cold  (no'in).  frlyos-. 
collect,  e3g-.  2.  coeg-.  3.  coacto-. 
colonist,  coldno-. 
com/*,  veui-,  2.  veri-,  3.  vento-. 
CO,  tie-to  jeiher,  coaveui-,  2.  coaven-, 

3.  convetito-. 
coining,  advKfitu-. 
command,  imperio-,  n. 
commander,  praefccto-. 
common,  communi-. 
common-people,  pleb-,  f. 
in-common,  communiter. 
comaion-vveahlj,  re-  publica-. 
communion,  conjunction-. 
compact,  coacto-. 
companion,  comet-,  c. 
compel,  cog-,  2.  coeg-,  3.  coacto-. 
complain,  quer-.  3.  questo-. 
complain-bitterly,  conquer-,  3.  con- 

que-4o-. 
complete,    perfic(i)-,   2.    perfec-,    3. 

perfecto-. 

completion,  perfection-, 
compote,  compon-,  2.  composu-,  3. 

composite-. 

conceal,  cola-,  2.  celav-,  3.  celato-. 
concerning,  de  (abl ). 
concourse,  concursu-, 
condemn,   damna-,  2.  damnav-,  3. 

damnato-. 
contluct,  deduc-,  2.  dedux-,  3.  de- 

ducto-. 

confess,  i'ate-,  3.  fasso-. 
be  confident,  couf  Id-  (semi-dep.\  3. 

conflso-. 
confine,  coerce-,  2.  coe'rcu-,  3.  coer- 

cito-. 

conrtagration,  incendio-,  n. 
congratulate,  gratula-  (dat.),  3.  gra- 

tulalo-. 


Conon,  Conon-. 

conqtir.r,  vine-,  2.  vie-,  3.  victo-. 

conquered.  vi<"t»-. 

conqueror,  victor-. 

conscious,  OftUKtOf. 

consecrate,  consecra-,  2.  consecrav-, 

3.  consecriito-. 
consent,  consensu-. 
consider,  due-.  2.  dux-,  3.  ducto-. 
console,  consola-.  3.  consolato-. 
coi  ispi  ra cy,  co •  jaration-. 
consta n r.,  constan f(i)-. 
constrained,  coacto-. 
consul,  consul-. 
consulship,  coiisuldtu-. 
consume,  absQrn-,   2.   absumps-,   3. 

absumpto-. 
contend,  decerta-,   2.  dccertav-,  3. 

decertato-.   contend-,   2.    — '' — , 

3.  co ri  ten  to-, 
contention,  contention-. 
contest,  certamen-. 
continue,  tene-,  2   tenn-,  3.  tento-. 
con  tin  ued,  conUnuato-. 
contract-with.  (give  out  a  contract), 

loca-,  (dtit)  2.  locav-.  3.  locato-. 
control,  impera-,  (dat.)  2.  imperav-, 

3.  imperato-. 
Coriolanus,  Coriolano-. 
corn,  frumento-,  farr-,  n. 
corpse,  cadaver-,  n. 
cost,  sta-  (dat.),  2.  stet-,  S.stato-. 
conch,  cublli-,  n. 
council,  concilio-,  n. 
counsellor,  advocato-. 
count,  cense-,  2.  censu-,  3.  censo-. 
country,  region-. 

"     ('>pp.  to  town),  rus-,  n. 

"     (native),  patna-. 
cowardice,  ignavia-. 
cowardly,  i/navo-. 
Crassus,  Crasso-. 

critne,  sceles-,  facinos-,  fldgitio-,  n. 
cross,   traiisi-,  2.   trauslv-,  3.  tran- 

sito-. 

crow,  cornlc-,  f. 
cruel,  crud-li-. 
cruelly,  crudeliter. 


240 


VOCABULARY. 


crush,  (prop,  blot  out),  dele-,  2.  de- 
lev-,  3.  deleto-. 

cultivate,  col-,  2.  colu-,  3.  culto-. 

cultivation,  coition-. 

culture,  cultu-. 

cup,  cyatho-.  m. 

curt,  mede-  (dot.),  (deponent,  only 
imperC  tenses). 

custom,  mos-.  m. 

cut-away,  rescind-,  2.  rescid-.  3.  re- 
scisso-. 

Cyrus,  Cyro-. 


Daily,  quofididno. 

danger,  periculo-,  n, 

dangerous,  periculoso-. 

dare,  aude-,  3.  auso-.  (semi-dep.) 

Darius,  Darlo-. 

daughter,  filia-. 

at-dawn,  prlma  luce. 

day.  die-,  m.  also  f.  in  sing. 

at-day-break,  prlma  luce. 

desid,  mortuo-. 

deadly,  mortifero*. 

dear,  caro-. 

death,  mort(i)-,  f. 

deceive,  fall-,  2.  fefell-,  3.  falso-. 

declaim,    declama-,    2.    dtclamav-, 

3.  declamato-. 
declare,  expon-,  2.  exposu-,  3.  ex- 

posito-. 
deep,  alto-, 
defend,  defend-,   2.  — "— ,    3.  de- 

fenso-. 

defender,  defensor-. 
defile,  angtistia-,  pi. 
delay,  cuncta-,  3.  cunctato-. 
delay,  mora-. 
deliberate,  consulta-,  2.  consultav-, 

3.  consultato-. 
delight,   oblecta-,   2.   oblectav-,   3. 

oblectato-. 


deliver-up,  trad-,  2,  tradid-,  3.  tra- 

dlto-. 
demon*/,  postula-^  2.  postulav-,  3. 

postulato-. 

demand-back,  repose-. 
Demosthenes,    Demostheni-,  (nom. 

s.  n<~s). 

deny,  nega-,  2.  negav-,  3.  negato-. 
depart,  disced-,  2.  discess-,  3.  dis- 

cesso-. 

departure,  projection-, 
dejwsit,  depon-,  2.  deposu-,  3.  de- 

po^ito-. 

deposit,  dcposito-,  n. 
deprive,  spolia-,  2.  spoliav-,  3.  ppo- 

liato-. 
desert,  deser-,  2.  dSseru-,  3.  deser- 

to-. 

.deserter,  perfuga-. 
desei-ve,  mere-,  3.  merito-.* 
desire,  cup(i)-,  2.  cupiv-,  3.  cnpito-. 
desire-btfore.    praeopta-,   (dat.)     2. 

praeoptav-.  3.  praeoptato-. 
desirous,  cupido-. 
despise,  contemn-,  2.  contemps-,  3. 

contempto-. 
destroy,  perd-,  2.  perdld-,  3-  per- 

dlto-.   extstingu-,  2.  exstinx-,  3. 

exstincto-. 

destruction,  pernicie-,  exitio-,  n. 
detain,  detine-,  2.  detinu-,   3.  de- 

tento-. 
deter,  deterre-,  2.  deterru-,  3.  de- 

territo-. 
determine,    constitu-,    2.  — " — ,  3. 

constituto-. 
devote,  addle-,  2.  addix-,  3.  addio 

to-. 

devour,  vora-,  2.  vorav-,  3.  vorato-. 
dictator,  dictator-. 
difference,  discrlmen-. 
different,  diverso-. 
diflBcult,  difficili-. 
difficulty,  difficultat-. 
with  difficulty,  aegre. 


*  This  verb  is  also  conjugated  in  the  active  voice,  with  2.  7ncn*% 


VOCABULARY. 


241 


dig,  fodi-,  2.  fod-,  3.  fosso-. 

dignified,  gravi-. 

diligence,  dUigentia-. 

diminish,  minu-,   '2.  — " — ,  3.   mi- 

11  uto-. 
direct,  reg-,  2.  rex-,  3.  recto-,  dlrig-, 

2.  direx-,  3.  dlrecto-. 
in-all-directions,  passim. 
director,  rector-, 
disadvantageous,  inlquo-. 
disagree,   dissenti-,   2.  dissens-,  3. 

dissenso-. 

disaster,  incommodo-,  n. 
discover,  inveni ,  2.  inven-,  3.  in- 

vento-.  reperi-,  2.  repper-,  3.  re- 

perto-. 

discussion,  disputation-, 
disdain,  fastldi-,  2.  fastldlv-,  3.  fas- 

tldlto-. 

disease,  morbo-,  m. 
disgraceful,  turpi-. 
dismiss,  dlmitt-,  2.  dimls-,  3.  dl- 

misso-. 
displease,  displice-,   2.  displicu-,  3. 

displicito-. 
dissemble,   dissimula-,    2.    dissimu- 

lav-,  3.  dissimulate-. 
dissent,  dissenti-,  2.  dissens-,  3.  dis- 
senso-. 

be-distant,  abes-.  2.  abfu-. 
distinguished,  cgregio-,  praeclaro-. 
distribute,   distribu-,    2.    — •' — ,  3. 

distribute', 
ditch,  fossa-. 
divine,  dlvino. 
Divitiacus,  Dlviiinco-. 
do,  ag-,  2.  eg-,  acto-.  fac(i)-,  fee-,  3. 

facto-. 

dog,  cant-,  c. 
doubt,  dubita-,  2.  dubitav-,  3.  dubi- 

tato-. 

doubtftil,  dubio-. 
drag,  trah-,  2.  trax-,  3.  tracto-. 
draw  (as  water),  hauri-,  2.  haus-, 

3.  hausto-. 

draw-together,  contrah-,  2.  contrax-, 
3.  coiitracto-. 
21 


draw-up,  instru-,  2.  instrux-,  3.  in- 

structo-. 
draw  (a  sword)  destring-,  2.  des- 

trinx-,  3.  destricto-. 
drawn  up,  instructo-. 
dread,  vere-,  3  verito-. 
drink,  bib-,  2.  — "— . 
drive,  pell-,  2.  pepul-,  3.  pulso-. 
drive-back,  repell-,  2.  reppul-,  3.  re- 

pulso-. 
drive-out,  expell-,  2.  expul-,  3.  ex- 

pulso-. 

dry,  sicca-,  2.  siccav-,  3.  siccato-. 
Dumnorix,  Dumnorig-. 
duty,  officio-,  n. 
dwell-in,  incol-,  2.  incolu-. 


Each,  quo-que. 

eagerly,  cupide. 

eagle,  aquila-. 

earn,  mere-,  2.  meru-,  3.  merito-. 

earnestly,  magnopere. 

most  earnestly,  vehementer. 

earnestness,  contention: 

earth,  terra-. 

easily,  j^-ile-. 

easy,  facili-. 

eat,  ed-,  2.  ed-,  3.  eso-. 

educa'e,  educa-,  2.  educav-,  3.  edu- 

cato-. 

effect,  effic(i)-,  2.  efi^c-,  3.  efifecto-'. 
effort,  molimento-. 
egg,  ovo-,  n. 
eighth,  octavo-. 
either,  aut. 
elder,  major-. 
elegant,  elegant(i)-. 
elegantly,  polite. 
element,  elemento-. 
eloquence,  eloquentia-. 
eloquent,  eloquent(i)-. 
else,  olio-,  for  declens.  see  §  162. 
embark-on,  conscend-,  2.  — " —  3. 

conscenso-. 
emttassy,  legation-. 
emotion,  perturbation-. 


242 


VOCABULARY. 


empire,  imperio-,  n. 

empty,  inanl-. 

encariip,  consid-,  2.  consed-,  3.  con- 

sesso-. 

encourage,  coliorta-,  3.  oohortato-. 
end,  fini-,  m.  rarely  £ 
endtavor,  cona-,  3.  couato-. 
endowed,  pratdito-. 
endure,  sustiue-,  2.  sustinn-,  3.  sus- 

tentx)-.  perpet(i)-,  3.  perpesso-. 
enemy  (public),  hosti-,  c. 

"     (private),  inimico-,  ra. 
engage,  confllg-,  2.  conflix-,  3.  eon- 

flicto-. 

engine,  tormento-. 
enjoy,  fru-,  (obi),  3.  fructo-  or  fru- 

ito- 

Ennius,  Ennio-. 
enough,  satis. 
enraged,  Irato-. 
enrol,  conscrib-,  2.  conscrips-,   3. 

conscripto-. 
enter,  subi-,  2.  subiv-,  3.  subito-. 

ingred(i)-,  3.  ingresso-. 
entice,  pellic(i)-r  2.  pellex-,  3.  pel- 

lecto-. 

entrance,  introitu-. 
enumerate,  enumera-,  2.  enumerav-, 

3.  enumerato-. 
envy,  invide-,  (dot.)  2.  invid-,  3.  in- 

vlso-. 

envy,  inridta-. 
equal,  adaequa-,  2.   adaequar-,  3. 

adaequftto-. 
error,  error-. 
eruption,  eruption-, 
escape,  effug(i)-,  2.  eflug-. 
especial,  pr^ecipuo-. 
Evander,  Evandro-. 
even,  etiam. 
evening,  vespero-,  m, 
event,  caau-. 
ever,  unquam. 
everlasting,  sempitemo-. 
every,  (all),  omni-. 

"      (each),  quo-que, 
every-day,  quotidie. 
on-e very-side,  undique. 


every -year,  quotannis. 

evidence,  indicio-,  n. 

evil,  molo-,  n. 

examine,  explora-,  2.  explorav-,  3. 

explorato-.   specula-,    3.   specu- 
la to-. 

excellence,  praeslantia-. 
excellent,  excellent(i}-,  praestant(i)-. 
excellently,  egregie. 
except,  nisi;  praeter,  prep.  ace. 
exchange,  commuta-,  2.  couimutav-, 

3  commutato-. 
excite,  excita-,  2.  excitav-,  3.  exci- 

tato-. 
execute,    administra-,    2.    adminis- 

trav-,  3.  administrato-. 
exhort,  cohort-,  3.  cohortato-. 
exile,  exsitio-,  n. 
live- in-exile,  exsula-,  2.  exsulav-,  3. 

exsulato-. 
expect,  exspecta-,  2.  exspectav-,  3. 

exspectato-. 
expense,  commcatu-.    • 
expire,    exsplra-,  2.   exsplrav-,    3. 

ex  pint  to-, 
exploit,  fadnos-. 
export,  exporta-,   2.  exportav-,  3. 

ex  portal  o-. 
expose,  objic(i)-,  2.  objec-,  3.  objec- 

to-. 

express^  eloqu-,  3.  elocuto-. 
eye,  oculo-,  in. 


Face,  vultu-. 

fact,  re-. 

faculty,  facultat-.    • 

fail,  dees-  (dat.),  2.  dt-fu-.  dC-fic(i)-. 

2.  defec-,  3.  defecto-. 
fair,  pulcro-. 
faith,    iifr.. 


faithless,  infidcli-. 
fall-down,  dCcid-,  2.  —  " 
falling,  caduco-. 
false,  fako-. 


VOCABULARY. 


24? 


fame,  fama-. 

famous,  praecld.ro-. 

far,  long.?. 

far  (off),  procul 

fur  and  wide,  l/lte. 

farmer,  agricola-. 

last,  cel<-riti'.r. 

lather,  putt'-. 

father-in-law,  socero-. 

fa.ult,  cidpa-. 

furor,  fave-,  (dat.),  2.  fa,v-,  3.  fauto. 

favoiable.  secundo~. 

tear,  timor-,  metu-. 

fear-,  time-,  2.  tinm-. 

fear-greatly,    pertimesc-,    2.   perti- 

mu-. 

feel,  senti-,  2.  sens-,  3.  senso-. 
fellow-soldier,  comniilitoii-. 
feitile,  fera(c)i-. 
few,  pauco-. 
very  few,  perpnuco-. 
fewness,  paucitat-. 
fidelity,  fide-. 
field,  agro-. 
fierce,  fcroc(i}-. 
fi<-ry,  iyiteo-. 
fight,  pugna-,  2.  pugnav-,  3.  pug- 

nato-. 
fight- it-out,  decerta-,  2.   decertav-, 

3.  deceitato-. 
fill,  com  pie-,  2.  complev-,  3.  com- 

pleto-. 

find,  reperi-,  2.  repper-,  3.  reperto-. 
tin.irer,  diyiio-,  m. 
finish,  contic(i)-,  2.  corifec-,  3.  con- 

fecio-.  fini,  2.  fluiv-,  3.  firuto-. 
fire,  i'jni-,  in. 

"    (conflagration)  incendio-,  n. 
firm,  fir  mo-.  % 

first,  prlmo-. 
fii'st  (ado.\  prlmum. 
fish,  pisca-,  3   piscato-. 
fisherman,  piscator-. 
fir,,  tipto-. 
five,  (i<dnque. 
five-hundred,  quingento-. 
fix,   constitu-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  consti- 

tuto-. 


fixed,  certo-. 

fl  itter}r,  assentation-. 

flee,  fng(i)-,  2.  tug-,  3.  fugito-. 

flee-away,  aufug(i)-,  2.  aufug-. 

fleet,  clatiisi;  f. 

flesli,  caron-,  f.  (o  left  out  except  in 

num.  s.) 
flight,  fuga-. 
flock,  i/reg-,  m. 
flourish,  Ho  re-,  2.  flora-. 
flow-in,  iuflu-,  2.  influx-,  3.  influxo-. 
flower,  y?^-. 

_/?//,  vola-,  2.  volav-,  3.  voliito-. 
fly-away,    avola-,     2.    avolav-,     3. 

avolato-. 
fiy~f)ff,  evola-,   2.  evolav-,   3.  evo- 

lato-. 
fly-tngether,  convola-,  2.  convolav-, 

3.  convolato-. 
foal,  equulo-. 
fudder,  pahuln-.   n. 
get-fvddtr,  pubula-,  3.  pabulato-. 
follow,  sequ-,  3.  seciito-. 
follow-closely,  subsequ-,    3.  subse- 

cuto-. 

food,  cibo-,  m. 
foolish,  stulto-. 
fool  is!  i  ly.  stulte. 
foot,  ped-,  m.  nom.  s.  pcs. 
foot-soldier,  pedet-. 
forbid,  veta-,  2.  vetu-,  3.  vetito-. 
force,  vlx(i)-,  f.  irreg. 
forces,  cOpia-,  pi. 
foresee,    praevide-,   2.   praevld-,  3. 

praevlso-. 
foretell,    praedlc-,    2.  praedix-,    3. 

praedicto-. 

forget,  obllvisc-,  (gen.),  3.  obllto-. 
former,  prior-,  superior-. 

"     (yonder)  illo-. 
formerly,  olim. 
forswear,  pejera-,    2.  pejerav-,    3. 

pejerato-. 
fort,  caslello-,  n. 
fortification,  munition-. 
fortified,  munltn-. 
fortify,  communi-,  2.   communiv-, 

3.  couiiuuiilto-. 


244 


VOCABULARY. 


fortunate,  fortunate-,  fific(i)-. 

fortune,  fo*tuna-. 

forum,  f<>ro-,  n. 

foundation,  fu.ndam.ento-. 

four,  quutuor. 

fourth,  quarto-. 

free,  llbero-. 

frenzy,  furor-. 

friend,  am.co-. 

friendship,  amlcitia-. 

frighten,  terre-,    2.  term-,   3.  ter- 

rito-. 

frightened,  territo-. 
from,  a,  ab  (abl.). 
in -front,  ad  verso-. 
fruit,  fructu-. 
fruitful,  after-, 
fu  gi  1 1  v  e,  /«#  /ftro-. 
full,  plcno-. 
future,  futu.ro-. 


Gabii,  Gabio-,  m.  pi. 
gaii,-possession-(£    poti-,    (g'en.    or 

ofti.)  3.  potito-. 
gait,  inces*u~. 
Gallic,   G<i!U"o-. 
game,  /z?£/o-.  in. 
garden,  horto-,  m. 
garrison,  praesidio-,  n. 
gate,  pftrta-. 
Gaul  (country),  Gattia-. 
Gaul  (people),  Gallo-. 
general,  iinpKrator-. 
generally,  plerunique. 
generosity,  llberalitdt-. 
generous,  liberal i-. 
German,  Germano-. 
get-together,    com  para-,    2.  compa- 

rav-,  3.  comparato-. 
gift,  dono-j  n. 
girl,  puella-. 

g  ve,  da-,  2.  ded-,  3.  dato-. 
give-back,  redd-,  2.  reddid-,  3.  red- 

dito- 


give-up,  prod-,  2.  prodid-,  3.  prod- 

ito-. 

give  (thank*),  ag-}  2.  eg-,  3.  acto-. 
gladly,  liltenter. 


go,  i-,  2.  Iv-,  3.  ito-. 

go-across,    trausi-,    2.    transiv-,    3. 

transito-. 

go-aicay,  abi-,  2.  abiv-,  3.  abito-. 
go-forward,  progred(i)-,  3.  prugres- 

so-. 
go-out,  exced-,  2.  excess-,    3.    ex- 

cesso-.  egredi-,  3.  egresso-.  exi-, 

2.  exiv-,  3.  exito-. 
go-to,  pet-,  2.  petlv-,  3.  petito-. 
goat,  capro-. 
God.  deo-. 

gods-below,  infero-,  m.  pL 
gold,  auro-,  n. 
good,  bono-. 
goods,  bono-,  n.  pi. 
g<x>d-will.  benevolentia-. 
goose,  anser-,  m. 
govern,  reg-,  2.  rex-,  3.  recto-,  im- 

pera-,  (dat.)t  2.  imperav-,  3.   im- 

perato-. 
go\vn,  toga-. 
gradually,  paulatim. 
grammar,  grammalica-. 
grant,  couced-,  2.  coucess-,  3.  con- 

cesso-. 

grass,  gramen-. 
great,  mat/no-. 
greatly,  wide. 
very-greatly,  maxime. 
greatness,    inagnitudon-,   amplilu- 

don-. 

Greece,  Graecia-. 
greedy,  avido-.  * 
Greek.  Grecian,   Graio-. 
green,  viridi-. 
grief,  dolor-. 
grieve,  maere-. 
ground,  humo-,  t 
grove,  nemos-. 
guard,  cust&l-,  c. 
guard,  custodi-,  2.  custodiv-,  3.  cus- 

todito-. 


VOCABULARY. 


2-15 


guest,  hnspet-,  m. 
guide,  due-. 


Habit,  consuetudon-. 

halt,  consist-,  2.  constit-,  3.  consti- 

fcCK 

Hamilcar-,  Ilamilcar-. 
hand,  manu-.  f. 
Hannibal,  Hannibal-, 
happen,  accid-,  2.  — u — . 
happiness,  fdlcitat-. 
happy,  beato-. 
harangue,   contiona-,  3.    contiona- 

to-. 

harbor,  porter. 
hard,  duro-. 
hardly,  vix. 

hare,  lepos-,  tn.  n.  s.  lepus. 
du-harm-to,  noce-,  (e?a£),   2.  nocu-, 

3.  noc-ito-. 
haste,  /extinction-, 
hasten  (go),   contend-,  2.  — " —  3. 

contento. 
make  haste,  propera-,  2.  properav-, 

3.  properaio-.    . 
hasten  (prepare  quickly),  matura-, 

2.   maturav-,  3.   maturate-, 
hastily,  raptim. 
hatred,  odio-,.n. 

have,  habe-,  2.  habu-,  3.  habito-. 
liead,  capul-,  n. 
heaUh,  xalui-. 

heap,  strui-,  f.  nom.  s.  struts, 
hear,  audi-,  2.  audlv-,  3.  audlto-. 
liearer,  auditor-. 
lieart,  cord-,  n. 
hearth,  fucn-,  m. 
heavy,  gravi-, 
lieir,  hered-,  c. 
help,  juva-,  2.  jQv-,  3.  juto-. 
helper,  adj'itrlc-. 
Helvetii,  IMvetio-,  m.  pi. 
hem-in,   contine-,    2.    continu-,    3. 

con  ten  to-, 
heuce,  hinc. 
21* 


herald,  praecon-. 

Hercules,  Hcrculi-,  nom.  s.  Hercu- 
les. 

herd,  armento-. 

here,  hie. 

hesitation,  dubitatidn-. 

hide,  ttrgos-. 

hig'li,  «tto-. 

on-hijfh,  sublime. 

higher,  superior-. 

highest,  fiummo-. 

hill,  colli-,  m. 

hinder,  impedi-,  2.  impedlv-,  3.  im- 
pedito-. 

hinder  (prevent),  prohibe-,  2.  pro- 
hibu-,  3.  prohibito-. 

hither  (adj.),  citeridr-. 

hive,  alveari-,  n. 

7toW,    tene-,    2.    tenu-,    3.    tento-. 
habe-,  2.  habu-,  3.  habito-. 

home,  domu-,  f.  irreg. 

at-home,  cfow*. 

Homer,  Homtro-. 

honey,  r/ieW-,  n. 

honor,  (character)  honestat-. 
"     (glory),  decos-. 

honorable,  honesto-. 

liope,  spe-. 

hope,  spera-,  2.  sperav-,  3.  spera- 
to-. 

horn,  cornu-,  n. 

horse,  equo-. 

horse-soldier,  equet-. 

hostage,  obsed-,  c. 

hostile,  hostlli-. 

hour,  hora-. 

lypuse,  domu-,  f.  irreg. 

how,  quomodo. 

huge,  ingent(i)-. 

human,  hamano-. 

humanity,  humanitdt-. 

humor.  fi'Stlvitdt-. 

hundred,  centum. 

hungry,  jejuno-. 

hunt,  vena-,  3.  venato-. 

hunter,  vendtor-. 

huntress,  vendtrlo. 


246 


VOCABULARY. 


hurl,  conjic(i)-,  2.  conjee-,  3.  con- 
jecto-.  mit(t)-,  2.  mis-,  3.  misso- 
husbanduian,  ayricola-. 


Idle,  ignavo-,  inert(i)-. 

idleness,  inertia-, 

if,  si. 

ignorance,  ignoration-. 

ignorant,  ignaro-. 

bc-ignorani,  ignora-,  2.  ignor&v-,  3. 

ijrnorato- 
iUuminate,  illustra-,  2.  illustrav-,  3. 

illustrate-, 
illustrious,  claro-. 
very- illustrious,  praeclaro-. 
image,  iniagon-.  simulacro-,  n. 
initiate,  imita-,  3.  imitato-. 
immediately,  slatim. 
immortal,  immortali-. 
impart,  imperti-,  2.    impertlv-,    3. 

im  pert!  to-. 
impede,  impedi-,  2.  impedlv-,  3.  im- 

pedlto-. 
impd  impell-,  2.  impul-,  3.  impul- 

so  . 

impend,   immine-. 
impious,  impio-. 
intplire,  implora-,  2.  implorav-,  3. 

implGrato-. 
import,  impoita-,  2.  importuv-,  3. 

imjiortato-. 
impose.,  impon-,  2.  imposu-,  3.  im- 

posito  . 
in,  tn,  (abl.). 

increase,  au?e-,  2.  aux-,  3.  aucto-. 
incredible,  incredilili-, 
indeed,  quidem. 
indicate,  iudica  ,  2.  indicav-.  3.  in- 

dicato-. 

indignity,  indignitat-. 
iudwe,  adduc-,  2.  addux-,   3.  ad- 
due  lo-. 

industrious,  industrio-. 
in tii my,   iiifamia-. 
iufautry,  peditdtu-. 


inform,   certior-fac(\)-t    2.    fee-,    3. 

fncto-. 

inhabitant,  incnla-. 
injure,  uoce-  (dot.},  2.  nocu-,  3.  no- 

cito-. 

injurious  detrlmentdso-. 
injury,  injuria-. 
injustice,  inlquitnt-. 
injiocrent,  initocent(i)-. 
inquire,    quaer-,    2.    quaesiv-,   3. 

quaeslto-. 
instantly,  extemplo. 
insult,  coittumelia-. 
into,  in  (aec.). 
intrust,  committ-,   2.    commis-.    3. 

commisso-.  permitt ,  2.  permls-, 

3.  permisso-. 
invent,  iuveui-,  2.  inven-,  3.  iuven- 

to-. 
investigate,    investlpa-,   2.  investi- 

gav-,  3.  investigaio-. 
island,  insula-. 


Javelin,  p'.lo-,  n. 

join,  conjuug-,  2.  conjunx-,  3.  con- 

juncto-. 
join  (buttle),  committ-,  2.  commis-, 

3.  commisso-. 
joy,  gavdio-,  n. 
joyful,  lueto-. 
judge,  praetor-,  judec-. 
judge,  judica-,  2.  judicav-,  3.  ju- 

dicato-. 

judgment,  jndicio-,  n. 
juiy-man,  judec-. 
just,  ju*to~. 
justice,  justitia-. 


Keen,  fieri-. 

keep,  conserva-,  2.  conservav-,   3. 
conservato-. 


VOCABULARY. 


247 


keep-back,  reserva-,  2.  reservav-,  3. 

reservato-. 
ktep-ojf,  prohibe-,   2.   prolribu-,    3. 

proliibito-. 
keep-possession-of,  obtiue-,  2.   obti- 

nu-,  3.  obtento. 
keep-silence,   tace-,  2.  tacu-,   3.  ta- 

cito-. 

fall,  occld-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  occlso. 
^kind,  beitigno-. 
kindness,  beneficio-,  n.,  officio-,  n., 

gratia-. 
king,  reg-. 
kingdom,  regno-,  n. 
knee,  genu-,  n. 
know,  sci-,  2.  sciv-,  3.  sclto-. 
knowledge,  acientia-. 
known,  noto-. 


Labor,  labor-. 

Lacedaemonian,  Lacedaemonio-. 

lake,  lacu-. 

lament,  deplora-,  2.  deplorav-,    3. 

deplorato-. 
land  (district),  region-. 

"     (the  earth),  tellas-,  C 

"     (field),  d'jro-,  m. 
Za?i«i  (troops),  expon-,  2.  exposu-, 

3.  exposito-. 
large,  amplo-,  magno-. 
last,  ultimo-,  extreme-. 
lately,  nuper. 

Latin,  Latino,  in  Latin,  Laiine. 
latter,  /io-. 
law,  leg-,  f. 
lay-oxide,  dep5n-,  2.  deposu-,  3.  de- 

posito-. 
lay-ivaste,    vasta-,    2.    vastav-,    3. 

vastato-.  depopula-.  3.  depopu- 

lato-. 

lead,  due-,  2.  dux-,  3.  ducto-. 
lead-away,    abduc-,    2.  al^dux-,   3. 

abducto-. 
lead-across,  transduc-,  2.  transdux-, 

3.  transducto-. 


lead-lack,  reduc-,  2.  redux-,  3.  re- 

ducto-. 
lead-down,  dediic-,    2.   dedux-,  3. 

dcducto-. 

lead-out,  edQc-,  2.  edux-,  3.  educto-. 
lead-round,  circumduc-,  2.  circum- 

dux-,  3.  circumducto-. 
lead-together,  conduc-,  2.  condux-, 

3.  conducto-. 
lead-up,  addQc-,  2.  addux-,  3.  ad- 

ducto-. 

leader,  due-,  c. 
leap-down,  desili-,  2.  desilu-,  3.  de- 

BllltO-. 

learn,  disc-,  2.  didic-. 

4<    (ascertain)  cognosc-,   2.  cog- 

nov-,  3.  cognito-. 
learned,  docto-. 
learnedly,  docte. 
least,  (adv ),  minime. 
leave,  relinqu-,  2.  rellqu-,  3.  relicto-. 
leave-off,  omitt-,  2.  omis-,  3.  ouiis- 

so-. 

left,  sinistro-. 
legion,  legion-. 
Lemannus,  Lemanno-. 
length  (of  time],  diuturnitat-. 
Len talus,  Lentulo-. 
less  (adv.),  minus, 
lessen,  miiiu-,  2.  — " —  3.  minute-, 
lest,  ne. 
kt-go,  dlmitt-,  2.  dlmis-,  3.  dlmis- 

so-. 

let-slip,  omitt-,  2.  omis-,  3.  omisso-. 
letter,  epistola-. 
level,  atquo-. 
liberty,  llbertat-. 
lie,  jace-,  2.  jacu-,  3.  jacito-. 
lieutenant,  legato-. 
life,  vita-. 

light  (of  weight]  levi-. 
light,  liic-,  f.,  lumen-. 
like,  simiti-. 

line  (o/  march),  agmen-. 
line  (of  battle)^  acic-. 
lion,  Zeow-. 
little  paulo-,  n 
"    (adv.),  paulo. 


248 


VOCABULARY. 


live,  viv-,  2.  vix-,  3.  victo-. 

load,  ones-. 

lofty,  celso-. 

long,  lungo-. 

long  (of  time),  diuturno-. 

loug      "      (adv.),  din. 

longer  "      (adv.),  diutius. 

loose,  solv-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  soluto-. 

lose,  amitt-,  3.  amis-,  3.  aniisso-. 

loss,  detrlmento-. 

love,  ama-,  2.  amav-,  3.  amato-.  di- 

lig-,  2.  dllex-,  3.  dilecto-. 
love,  amor-. 
lover,  amdtir-. 
lower,  inferior-. 
lust,  libldon-,  f. 
lying,  mendac(i)-. 


Mad, 

madness,  amentia-. 

magistrate,  magistrate-. 

maid-servant,  famida-. 

make,  fac(i)-,  2.  fee-,  3.  facto-. 

make-Jiaste,  propera-,  2.  properav-, 

3.  properato-. 
man,  homon-,c.,  viro-. 
man  (as  a  ship),  comple-,  2.  com- 

plev-,  3.  complete-. 
manage,  administra-,    2.  admiuis- 

trav-,  3.  administrate-, 
mane,  juba-. 

manner,  mos-,  m.,  modo-,  m. 
many,  mvllo-. 
of-marble.  marmoreo-. 
march,    itiner-,  n.   nom.  and   ace. 

sing.  iter. 

march,  itcr  iac(i)-,  2.  fee-,  3.  facto-. 
march-in,  ingred(i)-,  3.  iugresso-. 
mare,  equa-. 
marsh,  palud-,  f. 
mart,  mercdtura-. 
marvellous,  mlrifico-. 
master,  domino-. 
master,  (as  teadier),  magistro-. 
matron,  mdtr-. 


matter  (business),  re-. 
meadow,  prato-,  n. 
meuns,  fucultat-. 

"    (manner),  modo-,  in. 
by-uo-means,  minime. 
meanwhile,  interea. 
measure-out,  meti-,  3.  menso-. 
meeting,  contion-. 
memory,  mtmoria-. 
mend,  resarci-,  2.  none,  3.  resarto-. 
mtution-aluud,  praedica-,  2.  praedi- 

cav-,  3.  praedicato-. 
merchant,  mercator-. 
merciful,  cUment(i)-. 
mercifully,  clfmenter. 
message,  nuntio-,  m. 
messenger,  nuntio-,  m. 
midnight,  media-noct-. 
mild,  nuti-. 

military-command,  imperio-,  n. 
military-service,  militia-. 
milk,  fact-,  n. 

mina  (sum  of  money),  mina-. 
mind,  ment(i)-,  t 
miserable,  mi;>erdbili-. 
missile,  ttlo-,  n. 

mix,  rnisce-,  2.  miscu-,  3.  misto-. 
modesty,  pudor-. 
moisten,    hurnecta-,    2.  hdmeetav-, 

3.  humectato-. 
money,  ptcunia-. 
month,  mensi-,  m. 
monument,  monumento-. 
more,  plus-. 

"    (adv.),  magis. 
in-the-morning,  rudnc. 
mother,  mdtr-. 

move,  move-,  2.  mov-,  3.  moto-. 
more-back,  remove-,  2.  remov-,  3. 

remdto-. 

mountain,  mont(i)-,  m. 
mount-up,  succtd-,  2.  success-,  3, 

succeso-. 

'mourn,  luge-,  2.  lux-,  3.  lucto-. 
much  (adj.)  multo-. 

"     (adv.)  multum. 
multitude,  multtdudon-. 


VOCABULARY. 


249 


Name,  nomina-,  2.  nominav-,  3. 
nominate-,  die-,  2.  dix-,  3.  die- 
to-. 

narrate,  narra-,  2.  narrav-,  3.  nar- 
rato-. 

.  narrow,  angusto-. 

nation,  gent(i}-,  f. 

nature,  itdtura-. 

navigation,  navigation-. 

near,  apud,  ace.,  prope,  ace. 

be-ntar,  ades-,-  2.  adfu-. 

nearest,  proximo-. 

neck,  cervic-,  f. 

neglect,  neglig-,  2.  neglex-.  3.  neg- 
lecto-. 

negligence,  neglig  entia-. 

n  egl  ige n  t,  negiigen  t(i)-. 

neighbor,  flnitimo-. 

neighbor!  \\gjlnitiino-. 

neither,  nee;  neque. 

Nero,  Ntron-. 

net.  ret/,-,  n. 

never,  'iiunquam. 

nevertheless,  tamen. 

new,  novo-. 

next,  posfcro-. 

night,  noc1(i)-,  f. 

nightingale,  luscinia-. 

no  (none),  nullo-. 

no-one,  nemon-,  c. 

noble,  nSbili-. 

noise,  strepitu-. 

none,  nullo-. 

nor,  nee;  negwe. 

not,  wew. 

not-yet.  nondum. 

note,  voc-.  f. 

nothing,  m'/i«7. 

novelty,  novilM-. 

nourish,  al-,  2.  aln-,  3.  alito-. 

now,  nunc,  jam. 

number,  nu/nero-,  m. 

nurse,  nutrlc-. 

nymph,  nympha-. 


Obey,  pare-,  (dai.\  2.  paru-,  3.  pa- 
rito-. 


object,  recusa-,  2.  recusav-,  3.  recu- 

sato-. 
observe,  animadvert-,    2.  — " —  3. 

animadverso-. 
observe-thoroughly,     perspic(i)-,    2. 

perspex-,  3.  perspecto-. 
obtain,  adipisc-,  3.  adepto-. 
oflence,  offemion-. 
officer,  pruefecto-. 
oti'spring,  proli-,  f.  nom.  s.  proles. 
often,  saepe. 
old,  vetes-. 

old-man,  sen-,  nom.  s.  senex. 
old-age,  senectul-. 
omen,  omen-. 
once,  semel. 

one,  uiio-.  for  declens.  see  §  162. 
only,  solum. 
onset,  coacursu-. 

open,  aperi-,  2.  aperu-,  3.  aperto-. 
open,  aperto-. 

opinion,  opinion-,  scntentia-. 
opportunity,  facultat-. 
or,  vel;  aui;  an. 
orator,  orator-. 
oratory,  ord'idn-, 
order,  jube-,  2.  juss-,  3.  jusso-.  im- 

pera-  (dat.),  2.  iinperav-,  3.  im- 

perato-. 

in-order-that,  ut. 
Orgetorix,  Orgttorig-. 
other,  alio  .  see  §  162. 

"    (<>f  two),  altero-.  see  §  162. 
otherwise,  secus. 
our,  nostro-. 
out-of,  e,  ex,  (abl.). 
be-over,  pra-ees-  (dat.\  2.  praefu-. 
overcome,  supera-,   2.  superav-,  3. 

supera  to-. 

overtake,  consequ-,  3.  consecuto-. 
overthrow,  evert-,  2.  — '• —  3.  ever- 

so-. 
overwhelm,  opprim-,  2.  oppress-,  3. 

oppresso-. 

owe,  dGbe-,  2.  debu-,  3.  debito-. 
be-owing-to,  sta-,  2.  stet-,  3.  stato-. 
ox,  bo v-,  nom.  s.  bos. 


250 


VOCABULARY. 


Pain,  dolor-. 

pardon,  iguosc-  (dat.),  2.  ignov-,  3. 

ignoto-. 

parent,  parent(i)-. 
part,  pait(f)-,  f. 
pass-l/y,    praetermitt-,    2.    praeter- 

mis-,  3.  praetermisso-. 
passion,  cupidiiat-. 
past,  praeferito-. 

pay,  pend-,  2.  pepend-,  3.  penso-. 
pay-back,  repeud-,  2.  — " —  3.  re- 

penso-. 

peace,  pac-,  f. 
people,  populo-,  m. 
perceive,  aspic(i)-,  2.  aspex-,  3.  as- 

pecto-.  intellig-,  2.  intellex-,   3. 

intellecto-. 
perform,   perfic(i)-,    2.  perfec-,    3. 

pertecto-. 
perhaps,  fvrtasse. 
period,  tempos-. 

perish,  peri-,  2.  periv-,  3.  perito-. 
perpetrate,  perpetra-,  2.  perpetrav-, 

3.  perpetrate-. 
persevere,    persevera-,   2.   perseve- 

rav-,  3.  perseverato-. 
Persian,    Persa-,    (noun),   Persico-, 

(adj.). 
persuade,   persuade-  (dat),  2.  per- 

suas-,  3.  persuaso-. 
phalanx,  phalany-,  f. 
philosopher,  philosopho-,  m. 
philosopln',  philotsophia-. 
pierce,    transfig-,    2.   transfix-,    3. 

transfixo-. 

pike,  javelin,  pilo-,  n. 
Piso,  Plsdn-. 

pitch,  pon-,  2.  posu-,  3.  posito-. 
pity,  miser icordia-. 
cause-pity,  misere-  (impers.),  2.  mi- 

seru-,  3.  niiserito-. 
place,  faco-,  m.  also  n.  in  pi. 
place,  pon-,  2  posu-,  3.  posito-. 
place-upon,  impou-,  2.  iiuposu-,   3. 

irn  posito-. 
placed,  posito-. 
plain,  campo-,  m. 
plan,  consilio-,  n. 


platform,  suggestu-. 

plead,  ag-,  "2.  eg-,  3.  acto-.  die-,  2. 

dix-,  3.  dicto-. 
plead; ng,  diction-. 
pleasant,  jucundo-. 
please,  delecta-,  2.  delectav-,  3.  de- 

lectato-. 

with  pleasure,  libenter. 
plebeian,  plebcio-. 
Pliny,  Ptinio-. 
plot,  dolo  ,  m. 

plowjh,  ara-,  2.  arav-,  3.  arato-. 
pluck,  carp-,  2.  carps-,  3.  carpto-. 
plunder,  dlrip(i)-,  2.  dlripu-,  3.  di- 

repto-. 

poem,  poemat-,  n. 
poet,  poeta-. 
point-out,  ostend-,  2.  — " —  3.  os- 

tetiso-. 

polish,  poli-,  2.  poliv-,  3.  pollto-. 
Pompey,  Pumpeio-. 
Pontus,  Ponto-,  m. 
poor,  pauper-. 
port,  (harbor),  portu-.    • 
possess,  posside-,  2.  possed-,  3.  pos- 


possession,  possession-. 

posterity,  poster itat-. 

power,  potestat-. 

powerful,  pottnt(i}-. 

practice,  exercitation-. 

praetor,  praetor-. 

praise,  laud-,  f. 

praise,  lauda-,  2.  laudav-,  3.  laud- 
ato-. 

praise-highly,  collauda-,  2.  collau- 
dav-,  3.  collaudato-. 

praiseworth}r,  laudabili-. 

prayer,  prec-,  f. 

prefer,  antepon-,  (dat.  and  ace.).  2. 
anteposu-,  3.  anteposito-.  prae- 
fer-,  (dat.  and  ace.),  2.  praetul-, 
3.  praelato-. 

prejiare,  para-,  2.  parav-,  3.  para- 
to-. 

present,  praesent(i)-. 

be-present,  ades-,  2.  adfu-. 

presently,  mox. 


VOCABULARY. 


251 


preserve,  serva-,  2.  servav-,  3.  ser- 

vato-. 
press-hard,  prem-,  2.  press-,  3.  pres- 

so-. 
press-down,  deprim-,  2.  depress-,  3. 

depresso-. 
prettj'-,  puicro-. 
prevait-with,  permove-,  2.  permov-, 

3.  permoto-. 
price,  pretio-,  n. 
pride,  superbia-. 
priest,  sacerdot-,  c. 
prison,  career-,  in. 
prisoner,  captlvo-,  m. 
private,  private-, 
proceed-ayaiiist,  vindica-,  2.  vindi- 

cav-,  3.  vindicate-. 
procure,   com  para-,    2.  comparav-, 

3.  comparato-. 

produce,  em'c(i)-,  2.  effec-,  3.  effecto-. 
profit,  fructu-. 
be-prq/itable,  prodes-,  (dat.),  2.  pro- 

lu-. 

prolong,  due-,  2.  dux-,  ducto-. 
promise,  promitt-,    2    promls-,     3. 

promisso-.  pollice-,  3.  pollicito-. 
prop,  fulci-,  2.  t'uls-,  3.  fulto-. 
prophet,  vdti-,  c.  uom.  s.vatcs. 
propose,    prorson-,    2.   proposu-,    3. 

proposito-. 
prosperous,  secundo-. 
prostrate,    prostern-,    2.    prostrav-, 

3   prostrato-. 
protection,  praesidio-,  n. 
"          (honor)  fide-, 
provide-for,    prospic(i)-,    (dat.)    2. 

pi-ospex-,  3.  prospecto-. 
province,  prdti/icia-. 
prudent,  priidvnt(i)-. 
public,  pu/iliro-. 
Punic,  Pa/tico: 

punish,  puni-,  2  punlv-,  3.  punito-. 
punisliinent,  svpplicio-,  n. 
for-Uie-purpose,    causa.      (after   a 

genii.) 

pursue,  secta-,  3.  sectato-. 
pursuit,  studio-,  n. 
push,  pell-,  2.  pepul-,  3.  pulso-. 


push-out,  expell-,  2.  expul-,  3.  ex- 

puiso-. 
push-to,   appell-,  2.  appul-,   3.  ap- 

pulso-. 
put,  pon-,  2.  posu-,  3.  posito-. 

"     (to  flight)  da-,  2.  ded-,  3.  datQr. 
put-back,  repon-,  2.  reposu-,  3.  re- 

posito-. 
put-down,    depon-,    2.  deposu-,    3. 

deposito-. 
put-forth,  propon-,  2.  proposu-,  3. 

proposito-. 
put-upon,  impera-,  (dat.)   2.  impe- 

rav-,  3.  imperato-. 


Queen,  reglna-. 
quickly,  celeriter. 
quickness,  celeritat-. 


Raft,  rati-,  f. 

raise,  toll-,  2.  sustul-,  3.  sublato-. 

rampart,  vallo-,  n.  also  m. 

rank,  ordon-,  m. 

rarely,  raro. 

rash,  temerario-. 

rashly,  teutere. 

rather,  potius. 

reach,  atting-,  2.  attig-,  3.  attacto-. 

"     (catch)  consequ-,  3.  cousecu- 

to-. 

read,  leg-,  2.  leg-,  3.  lecto-. 
reason,  ration-, 
receive,  accip(i)-,   2.  accep-,  3.  ac- 

cepto-. 
receivt-information,     cognosc-,     2. 

cognov-,  3.  coguito-. 
recent,  receni(i)-. 
recently,  nuper. 
recognize,  agnosc-,  2.  agnov-,  3.  ag-        ^ 

nito-. 
recollect,  reminisc-,  (dep.  gen.) 


252 


VOCABULARY. 


recover,  recip(i)-,  2.  recep-,  3.  re- 
cepto-. 

have-recourse,  confug(i)-,  2.  confiig-. 

reduce,  redig-,  2.  redeg-,  3.  redacto-. 

reflect,  cogita-,  2.  cogitav-,  3.  cogi- 
tate-. 

refresh,  recrea-,  2.  recreav-.  3.  re- 
create-. 

refuse,  denega-,  2.  deuegav-,  3.  de- 
negato-. 

refute,  convinc-,  2.  convic-,  3.  con- 
victo-. 

regain,  recupera-,  2  recuperav-,  3. 
recuperate-. 

rejoice,  gaude-,  (semi-dep.)  3.  ga- 
viso-. 

relation,  propinquo-,  m. 

remain,  mane-,  2.  mans-,  3.  man- 
so-,  reniane-,  2.  remans-,  3.  re- 
manso-. 

remaining,  reliquo-. 

Rerai,  Remo-,  pL 

remove,  remove-,  2.  remov-,  3.  re- 
mote-, amove-,  2.  amov-,  3.  a- 
moto-. 

repair,  refic(i)-,  2.  refec-,  3.  refecto-. 

repent,  poeuite-,  (imptrs.)  2.  poe- 
uitu-. 

reply,  responde-,  (dat.)  2.  respond-, 
3.  response-. 

report,  uuntia-,  2.  nuntiav-,  3.  nun- 
tiato-. 

report,  fama-. 

repose,  repon-,  2.  reposu-,  3.  re- 
posito-. 

reproach,  contumtlia-. 

republic,  re-  publica-. 

request,  pet-,  2.  petiv-,  3.  petito-. 

resist,  resist-,  (dat.)  2.  restit-,  3.  res- 
tito- 

resolv-,  statu-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  statute-. 

resource,  op-,  f.  pL 

rest,  quiet-,  f. 
"     (remainder)  reliquo-.  n. 

restrain,  tvi  jpera-,  (dat.  or  ace.)  2. 
temp'.  !uv*,  3,  temperate-. 

result, 


retain,  retine-,  2.  retiuu-,  3.  reteu- 
to-. 

retard,  tarda-,  2.  tardav-,  3.  tarda- 
to-. 

retire,  reced-,  2.  recess-,  3.  recesso-. 

retreat,  receptu-. 

rdrtat,  reced-,  2.  recess-,  3.  reces- 
so-. 

return,  redi-,  2.  rediv-,  3.  redito-. 
revert-,  (act.  and  dep  )  2.  — '• — , 
3.  reverse-.  (The  imperf.  lenses 
are  usually  made  iu  the  depon- 
ent form,  the  perfect  ones  in  the 
active.) 

return,  reditu-. 

reverence,  reverentia-. 

revile,  vitupera-,  2.  vituperav-,  3. 
vituperate-. 

revolt,  defic(i)-,  2.  defec-,  3.  defec- 
to-. 

reward,  praemio-,  n. 

Rhine,  Jihino-,  m. 

rich,  dlitt-. 

riches,  dlvitia-,  pi. 

ridge,  jugo-,  u. 

riglit  (adj.),  rtcto-. 
"     (ot  hands)  dextro-. 

right  (noun),  jus-,  n. 

rightly,  rtcte. 

ripe,  maturo-. 

river,  fluvio-,  m.,  flumen-,  amni-, 
m. 

road,  via-. 

robber,  latron-. 

Roman,  Romano-. 

Rome.  Roma-. 

roof,  tecto-,  n. 

room,  spatio-,  n. 

rough,  horrido-. 

round,  (prep.)  circum,  (ace.) 

rouse,  excita-,  2.  excitav-,  3.  exci- 
tato-. 

rout,  profllga-,  2.  profligav-,  3.  pro- 
fligaie-. 

reyal,  regio-. 

ruinous,  pestifero-. 

rule,  imptrio-.  n. 


VOCABULARY. 


253 


rule,   guberna-,   2,   gubernav-,    3. 

gubernato-. 
rumor,  rumor-. 

run,  curr-,  2.  cucurr-,  3.  curso-. 
run-down,  decurr-,  2.  — " —  or  de- 

cucurr-,  3.  decurso-. 
run-together,  concurr-,  2.  — '' —  or 

concucurr-,  3.  concurso-. 
run-to-meet,  occur-  (dat.),  2.  — " — . 

3.  occurso-. 


Sad,  tristi-. 

safe,  salvo-. 

safety,  salut-. 

set-sail,  solv-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  soluto-. 

sailor,  nauta-. 

for-the-sake,  causa  (after  gen.) 

Sal  lust,  Sallustio-. 

sally,  eruption-. 

same,  eo-dtm. 

to-the-same-place,  eod&m. 

Sardinia,  Sardinia-. 

savage,  saevo-. 

say,  die-,  2.  dix-,  3.  dicto-. 

scarcely,  vix. 

scatter,  sparg-,  2.  spars-,  3.  sparse-. 

school,  schola-. 

Scipio,  Sclpion-. 

scout,  expldralor-. 

sea,  mart-,  n. 

sea-coast,  ora-  maritima-. 

seat,  sedlli-,  n. 

second,  alter o-, 

secondly,  ddnde. 

secretly,  clam. 

secure,  coufirma-,  2.  confirmav-,  3. 

confirmato-. 
security,  praesulio-,  n. 
sedition,  sedition-, 
see,  vide-,  2.  vid-,  3.  vlso-. 
ste-diatinctly,  cern-,  2.  crev-,  3.  cre- 

to-. 

seed,  semen-, 
seek,  quaer-,  2.  quaeslv-    3.  quae- 

sito-. 
22 


seek,  (go  to),  pet-,  2.  petiv-,  3.  peti- 

to-. 

seem-jit,  vide-,  3.  vlso-. 
seize  (snatch),  corrip(i)-,  2.  corripu-, 

3.  correpto-. 
seize  (take  possession),  occupa-,   2. 

occupav-,  3.  occupato-. 
select,  delig-,  2.  deleg-,  3.  delecto-. 
sdl,  vend-,  2.  vendid-,  3.  vendito-. 
senate,  senafu-. 
senator,  senator-, 
send,  nni(t)-,  2.  mis-,  3.  misso-. 
send-across,    transmitt-,    2.    trans- 
mis-,  3.  transmisso-. 
send-for,  arcess-,  2.  arcesslv-,  3.  ar- 

cessito-. 
send-forward,  praemitt-,  2.  praemls- 

3.  praemisso-. 
send-out,  emitt-,  2.  einls-,  3.  emis- 

so-. 

sense,  sensu-. 
senseless,  excord-. 
separate,  sejung-,   2.  sejunx-.  3.  se- 

juncto-. 

Sequani,  Scquano-,  pi. 
seriously,  graviter. 
servt-for,  inservi-  (dat.),  2.  inservlv-, 

3   inservito-. 
set-against,  oppon-  (dat.)  2.  opposu-, 

3.  opposito-. 
set-free,  llbera-,  2.  llberav-,  3.  llber- 

ato-. 
set-off,  excol-,  2.  excolu-,  3.  excul- 

to-. 

set-out,  proficisc-,  3.  profecto-. 
set-over,  praetic(i)-  (dat.),  2.  praefec-, 

3.  praefecto-. 
set-on-fire,  incend-,  2.  — " —  3.  in- 

censo-. 
set-up,  constitu-,  2.  — " —  3.  con- 

stituto-. 

setting  (of  the  sun),  occasu-. 
seventh,  sepiimo-. 
severe,  gravi-. 
severely,  graviter. 
shake,  quat(i)-,  2.  none,  3.  quasso-. 
sharne,  pudor-. 
sharp,  acuto-. 


254: 


VOCABULARY. 


shatter,  affllg-,  2.  afflix-,  3.  afflic- 

to-. 

sJiear,  tonde-,  2.  totond-,  3.  tonso-. 
shed,  prufund-,  2.  proiud-,  3.   pro- 

fuso-. 

sheep,  ovi-,  f. 
sheep-told,  ovUi-,  n. 
shtlttr,  teg-,  2.  tex-,  3.  tecto-. 
shepherd,  pastor-. 
shield,  cltpeo-,  m.,  scuto-,  n. 
shine,  colluce-. 
ship,  navi-,  £ 
shore,  lltos-. 
shout,  clamor-, 
show,   monstra-,    2.   monstrav-,  3. 

monstrato-. 
shower,  imbri-,  m. 
shudder,  horre-. 

shut,  claud-,  2.  clans-,  3.  clause-. 
shut-in,  iuclud-,  2.  inclus-,  3.  inclu- 

Sicily,  Sicih'a-. 
Sicilian,  Siado-. 
side,  laies-. 

"     (quarter),  par*®-,  £ 
on-all-sides,  und-qve. 
siejre.  oppugndtion-. 
sight,  consptctu-. 
signal,  signs*-,  n. 
silence,  silentio-,  n. 
silver,  argcuto-. 
similar,  simili-. 
siiuilariu*,  similitudon-. 
sin,  pcccdlo-,  n. 

sm,  pecca-,  2.  peccav-,  3.  peccato-. 
since  (subjunc.),  cwm. 
«t*/5r,  can-,  2.  cecin-,  3.  canto-, 
singular,  singulari-. 
sink,  merg-,  2.  mere-,  3.  merso-. 
sister,  soror-. 
situated,  posito-. 
six.  sex. 

sixteen,  scderim. 
size,  amputation-. 
skilful,  ptr'do-. 
skill,  ptrltia-. 
skin,  pdli-,  f. 


slaughter,  dfidi-,  f.  nom.  s.  duties. 

strugi-,  f.  nom.  s.  stragi-s. 
slave,  strvo-,  m. 
be-a-slavt.  servi-,  (cto^.)  2.  servlv-, 

3.  servito-. 
slavery,  seitilut-. 
slay,  occid-,    2.  — " — ,  3.  OCCIPO-. 

interfic(i)-,  2.  interlec-,  3.  iuter- 

fecto-. 

sleep,  somno-,  m. 
sleep,   dorini-,   2.  dormlv-,   3.  dor- 

mlto-. 

slinger,  funditor-. 
slothful,  pigro-. 
slowness,  tarditat-. 
small,  parvo-. 
smoke,  fumo-,  m. 
snake,  angui-,  c. 
snare,  insidia-,  pi. 
snatch.  rap(i)-,  2.  rapu-,  3.  rapto-. 
so,  sic,  torn,  ita. 
so-far,  tantum. 
so-great,  tanto-. 
society,  socictat-. 

Socrates,  Socrati-.  nom.  s.  Socrates. 
soft,  moUi-. 

soften,  molli-,  2.  molllv-,  3.  mollito-. 
Soldier,  milet-. 
some,  aliquo-. 

"      (opp.  to  "  other"),  oZib-. 

"      (ceitaiu),  quo-dam. 
son,  filio-. 
son-in-law,  genero-. 
song,  cantu-. 
soon,  c»to. 

as-soon- as,  simulatque. 
sorrow,  dolor-, 
be-sorry,  dole-,  2.  dolu-,  3.  dolito-. 

poenite-  (impcrs.),  2.  poenitu-. 
soul,  animo-,  m. 
sound,  (adj )  sano-. 
Spain,  Hispdnia-. 
spare,   pare-  (</a<.),    2.  peperc-,  3. 

pai~so-. 

Sparta.  Sparta-, 
speak,  loqu-,  3.  locuto-. 
spear,  hasta-. 
speecli,  oration-. 


VOCABULARY. 


spike,  cuspid-,  f. 

spur,  caltar(i)-.  n. 

Stability,  stabilitat-. 

stag,  cervo ,  ni. 

stand  one's-yround,  consist-,  2.  con- 

stit-,  3.  constito-. 
state,  clvitut-. 
station   oneself,   consist-,  2.  constit-, 

3.  constito-. 

stay,  mane-,  2.  inans-,  3.  nianso-, 
still,  etiamnum. 
sting,  aculco-,  m. 
stone,  lajrid-,  m. 
storm,  hiem-,  f. 
storm  (a  city),  expugria-,  2.  expug- 

nav-,  3.  expugnato-. 
story  (tale),  kistoria-. 
story  (floor),  tabuldto-. 
strait,  frelo  ,  n. 

stranger,  hospet-,  m.,  pcregrino-,  m. 
strength,  vZi-(i')-,  f.  irreg.  robor-,  n. 
strttch-,  tend  ,  2.  te tenet ,  3.  tento-. 
strictly,  accurate, 
strip,  orba-,  («6/.),  2.  orbav-,  3.  or- 

bato-. 

strive,  contend-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  con- 
ten  to-. 

study,  stude-,  (dat),  2.  studu-. 
subdue,   subig-,  2.  subeg-,  3.  sub- 

acto-. 
submit,  obtempera-,  (dat.),  2.  ob- 

temperav-,  3.  obtemperato-. 
succeed,  succed-,  (uat.\  2.  success-, 

3.  successo-. 
such  (of  quality),  tali-. 

"     (of  size),  tanto-. 
sud  de  1 1 ,  repentino'. 
suddenly,  subito,  repente. 
suffer,  perl'er-,  2.  pertul-,  3.  perla- 

to-. 

sufficiently,  satis. 
suitable,  idonto-. 
sum-ol-money,  pecunia-. 
sun,  sol-,  m. 
sup,  coeria-,  2.  coenav-,  3.  coena- 

to-. 
support,   susj;ine-,    2.   sustinu-,   3. 

sus  tento-. 


be-sure,  confld-  (semi-dep.\  3.  con- 

f'lso-. 

surpass,  antecell-. 
surrender,  ded-,  2.  dedid-,  3.  dedi- 

to-. 
surround,  cing-,  2.  ciux-,  3.  cinc- 

to-. 

suspicion,  suspicion-, 
sustain,    sustine-,    2.    sustinu-,    3. 

sustento-. 

swallow,  hirundon-,  f. 
swan,  cygno-,  m. 
sway,   tempera-,  2.   tempera v-,  3. 

temperiito-. 
sweet,  suavi-,  dulci-. 
sweetly,  suuvittr. 
swift,  veloc(i)-. 
swim -across,  trana-,   2.  trilnav-,  3. 

tranato-. 
sword,  gladio-,  m. 

"     (iron),  ferro-,  n. 
system,  dtscipllna-. 


Take,  cap(i)-,  2.  cep-,  3.  capto-. 

take-away,  toll-,  2.  sustul-,  3.  sub- 
lato-. 

take-by-storm,  expugna-,  2.  expug- 
nav-,  3.  expugnato-. 

take-possession-of,  occupa-,  2.  occu- 
pav-,  3.  occupato-. 

take-one1  S'Stai.ion,  consist-,  2.  con- 
stit-, 3.  constito-. 

tame,  doma-,  2.  domu-,  3.  domito-. 

tarry,  mora-,  3.  morato-. 

tax,  vectlgdl(i)-,  n. 

teach,  doce-,  2.  docu-,  3.  docto-. 

tear,  lacera-,  2.  lacerav-,  3.  lacera- 
to-. 

tear-aftunder,  discind-,  2.  discid-,  3. 
discisso-. 

tear-in-pieces,  dirip(i)-,  2.  diripu-,  3. 
dlrepto-. 

tear-off,  derip(i)-,  2.  deripu-,  3.  de- 
rep  to-. 

tempest,  tempestat-. 


256 


VOCABULARY. 


ten,  decem. 

terrify,  lerre-,  2.  terru-,3.  territo-. 

territories,  flni-,  m.  pL 

than,  quam. 

thanks,  gratia-,  pL 

that,  itlo-,  toto-.  see  p.  76. 

Themistocles,  Theniittodi-,  n.  s.  -les. 

thence,  inde. 

there,  ibi. 

thick,  den  so-. 

tliiet;/Sr-t  c, 

thigh,  fen'tor-,  n. 

tli in,  te)tui-. 

thing,  re-. 

<%»'«<&  (oppose),  puta-,  2.  putav-,  3. 

putato. 
tti«A-  (estimate),  existiraa-,  2.  exis- 

timav-,  3.  existimato-. 
think  (consider),  cogita-,  2.  cogitav-, 

3.  cogitato-. 
third,  tertio-. 
thirteen,  trtdecim. 
thirty,  trig  into,. 
this,  ho-,  see  p.  72. 
thither,  eo. 

thouglitless,  imprudent(i)-. 
thousand,  mittc.  iu  pL  milii-,  n. 
threat,  mina-,  pi. 
three,  ?/•<"-. 
thresliold,  llmen-. 
through,  j>er  (ace). 
throw,  j»c(i)-,  2.  jec-,  3.  jacto-. 
faruw-uway,  abjic(i)-,  2.  abjec-,  3. 

abjecto-. 
throw-down,  dejic(i)-,  2.  dejec-,   3. 

dejecto-. 
tide,  atstu-. 
time,  tempos-. 
at-ilie-same-time,  simuL 
for-soine-iime,  altyuatiuliu. 
timid,  tt-mido-. 
together,  si  mid. 
to-day,  hodie. 
to-morrow,  eras. 
torch,  fac-,  f. 
torment,  crucia-,  2.  cruciav-,  3.  cru- 

ciato-. 
touch,  tang-,  2.  tetig-,  3.  tacto 


touch-ttpon,  atting-,  2.  attig-,  3  at- 

tacto-. 

towards,  ad  (ace.), 
tower,  turri-,  f. 
town,  opjtido-,  n. 
townsman,  oppida.no-. 
traitor,  prodiior-. 
tran*2*trt,    trajic(i)-,  2.   trajec-,    3. 

trajecto-. 
traveller,  viator-, 
tracti-se,   evad-,  (all.),  2.  eras-,  3. 

evaso-. 

treasury,  aerdrio-,  n. 
trtat,  ag-,  2.  eg-,  3.  acto-. 
treaty,  fotdes-. 
tree,  arltor-,  f. 
Treviri,  Treriro-,  pi. 
tribe,  populo-,  m. 
tribune,  tribuno-. 
tribute,  sl'tptrtdio-,  n. 
troop,  turtua-. 
trouble,  incummodo-,  n. 
true,  very-. 
<ru*«f   crtd-    (tfatX    2-   credid-,   3. 

credito-. 
trust  (be  sure),  conf  Id-,  (temi-dep.), 

3.  con  I  Iso-. 
truth,  ftro-,  n. 
turn,    vert-,    2.   — " — ,    3.   verso-. 

convert-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  converso-. 
twenty,  v'lyinti. 
two,  duo-,  (irreg.). 


Ulysses,  Ulyssi-,  nom.  s.  Ulysses. 

unavenged,  iuulto-. 

uuceitain,  inctrto-. 

uncouth,  inndto-. 

undefended,  indefenso-. 

under,  yub  (ace.  or  abl.) 

undermine,    subru-,    2.    — " — ,    3. 

subruto-. 
understand,  intellig-,  2.  intellex-,  3. 

intellects-. 
undertake,  suscip(i)-,  2.  suscep-,  3. 

suscepto-. 


VOCABULARY. 


257 


undertaking,  incepto-,  n. 
uneasy,  sollicito-. 
unencumbered,  expedite-. 
unexpectedly,  imprdvlso. 
unfortunate,  misero-. 
unite,    conjung-,    2.    conjunx-,    3. 

conjuncto-. 
unless,  nisi. 
unmusical,  dbsono-. 
unskilled,  imperlto-. 
unworthy,  indigno-  (abl.). 
upon  (against),  in  (ace.), 
upright,  probo-. 
urge-on,  incita-,  2.  incitav-,  3.  in- 

citato.    impell-,    2.    iuipul-,    3. 

impulse-. 

use,  Qt-,  (abl),  3.  uso-. 
useful,  utilir. 
useless,  inutili-. 
utmost,  ultimo-, 
utter,  pronuntia-,  2.  pronuntiav-,  3. 

prouuutiatc™. 


Valor,  virtut-. 

in-vain,  frustra. 

valle}r,  valli-,  f. 

valuable,  pretidso-. 

verse,  versu-. 

very-few,  perpauco-. 

Vestal,  Vestali-. 

Vesuvius,   Vesiivio-,  m. 

cause-vexation,    pige-,    (impers.)  2. 

pigu-,  3.  pigito-. 
vice,  vitio-,  n. 
victorious,  victor-. 
victory,  victoria-. 
village,  vlco-,  m, 
violence,  vls(i)-,  f.  (Irreg.). 
Virginius,   Virginio-. 
virgin,  virgon-. 
virtue,  virtut-. 
visit  (with\   affic(i)-    2.   afffec-,   3 

aflecto-. 

visit  (see),  vis-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  viso-. 
22* 


voice,  voc-,  f. 
Volscian,  Volsco-. 


Wage,  infer-,  2.  intul-,  3.  illato-. 

wagon,  carro-,  m. 

wait-far,  exspecta-,  2.  exspectav-, 

3.  exspectato-. 
wakefulness,  vigilantia-. 
wall,  muro-,  m. 
wander,  erra-,  2.  errav-,   3.  errato-. 

vaga-,  3.  vagato-. 
want,  desldera-,  2.  deslderav-,   3 

desiderate-, 
want,  inopia-. 
war,  bello-,  n. 
ward-off,  defend-,  2.  — " — ,  3.  de- 

fenso-. 

warlike,  beUicoso-. 
warn,  mone-,  2.  nionu-,  3.  monito-. 
waste  (wear  away),  ter-,  2.  triv-,  3. 

trito-. 

watch,  vigilia-. 
water,  (ti/ua-. 
wave,  fluctu-. 
way,  via-. 
weak,  imbccillo-. 
weakness,  injirmitdt-. 
wealthy,  dlvtt-. 

wear-away,  ter-,  2.  triv-,  3.  trito-. 
wear-out,  connc(i)-,    2.  coiifec-,  3. 

confecto-. 
weary,  fatlga-,   2.  fatlgav-,  3.  fatl- 

gfito-. 

weary,  fesso-. 

cause-weariness,  taede-,  2.  taedu-. 
weep,  tie-,  2.  flev-,  3,  fleto-. 
weight,  pondes-. 
wliat,  quo-. 
when,  quum,  quando. 
whence  unde. 
where,  ubi. 
wherry,  lintri-,  f. 
whether,  utrum. 
which,  quo-. 

"      (of  two),  utro-. 


258 


VOCABULARY. 


•while,  dum. 

whithersoever,  quocunque. 

who.  quo-. 

whole,  toto-.  for  declens.see  §  162. 

why,  ciir. 

wicked,  itnprobo-. 

wickedness,  pravitdt-. 

wide.  lalo-. 

widel}',  kite. 

wife,  uxor-. 

wild-beast,  /era-. 

will,  voluntilt-. 

willingly,  ultra. 

wriud,  vento-,  ra. 

wine,  vino-,  n. 

wing  (of  an  army),  comu-,  n. 

winter-quarters,  Jaberno-,  n.  pi. 

winter,  hierna-,   2.  liiemav-,  3.  hi- 

emato-. 

wise,  sapie.nt(i}-. 
wish,  vol-,  2.  volu-. 
witli  (along:  with),  cum,  (abl.) 
wiihin,  intrd  (ace.), 
without,  sine  (al»L). 
witness  (set),    specta-,    2.  spectav-, 

H.  specta  to-, 
wolf,  /«^>o-,  n. 
woman,  inulier-. 
wonderful,  iiuro-. 
wood,  silvu-. 
wooden,  ligneo-. 
word,  verlto-,  n.  dicto-,  n. 
work,  opes-. 
workman,  fabro-. 


world,  mundo-,  m. 


worth,  prtti'o-,  n. 

"       (merit),  dignitat-. 
worthy,  digiio-,  (abl.). 
wround,  vulnts-. 
wound,   vulnera-,   2.  vulnerSv-,  3. 

vulnerato-. 

wrounded,  vulnerato-,  saucio-. 
wretched,  misej-o-. 
write,  scrll)-.  2.  scrips-,  3.  scripto-. 
writer.  scr>pt</r-. 
writing,  scr.pto-,  n. 
wroug,  iujaria-. 


Tear,  anno-,  ra. 

yoke,  jugo-,  n. 

yoke-toytthtr,  conjnga-,    2.    conju- 

gav-,  3.  coiijugau>-. 
yonder,  illo-.  see  p.  76. 
young,  jurf.ni-. 
younger,  junior-. 
young-man,  adolescent(i)-. 
your,  tuo~. 
youth,  juveni-,  c. 


Zeal,  studio-,  n. 


VOCABULARY. 


LATIN-ENGLISH. 


A.  short  for  Aulo-. 

a,  ab.  abs,  (abl.),  away  from,  by. 

abduc-,  lead  away  ;    2.  ubdux-,   3. 

abducto-.  — 

abes-,  be  away;  2.  abfu-, 
abi-,  go-away;  2.  ablv-,  3.  abifo-. 
abig-,    drive   away;    2.   abeg-,    3. 

aback*-. 
abjic(i)-,  throw  away  ;  2.  abjcc-,  3. 


addiic-,  lead  to  ;  2.  addux-,  3. 


abscind-,  cut  off  ;  2.  abscid-,  3.  a&- 
K&&0-. 

-,  .Keep  away;    2.   abstinu-, 


absent(i)-,  absent. 

absum-,  consume;  2.  dbsumps-,  3. 


absunlc;-,  absurd. 

ac,  art«(. 

A  oca-,  a  woman's  name. 

acccd-,  approacli  ;  2.  access-,  3.  ac- 


accend-,  set  on  fire;    2.  —  "  —  ,  3. 

acctnso-j 

accld-,  happen;  2.  —  "  —  . 
accip(i)-,  receive;  2.  acccp-,  3.  ac- 


accurr-,    run  up  to;   2.  —  "  —  ,   or 

accucurr-,  3.  accurso-. 
aciti-,  ////e  0/  ittW/d. 
acri-,  A;e-ew. 
ac  liter,  keenly. 
acuto-,  altar  p. 
ad,  (ace.)  to,  near  to. 
adaequa-,  be  equal  to  ;  2.  adaequav-, 

3.  adaaqudto-. 
add-,  add  ;  2.  tuMd-,  3.  addilo-. 


ades-,  be  near*  2.  adfu-. 

adhibe-,  apply  ,  invite:  2.  adhibu-, 

3.  adhibito-. 

adhorta-,  encourage;  3  .  adhortato-. 
adhiic,  hitherto. 
ac?/-,  go  to  ;   2.  acZlv-,  3.  adito-. 
adim-,   take   away  ;   2.   adem-,    3. 

odvmpto-. 

adipisc-,  gain  ;  3.  adepto-. 
aditu-,  approach. 
adjunf/-,  unite  ;  2.  adjunx-,  3.  ao*- 


aditiinistra-,  manage;  2.  adminis- 

trav-,  3.  udministrato-. 
aduilra-,  wonder-at:  3.  admlrafo-. 
admiration-,  wonder.  [«o-. 

wlniitt-,  admit;  2.<tdmis-,  3.  adutis- 
admoilura,  exceedingly. 
admov'-,    bring-near;    2.   admov-, 

3.  admoto-. 
adoksc-,  grow  up;    2.  adolev-,    3. 


adopta-,  adopt;  2.  adoptav-,  3.  ao*- 


adori-,  attack;  3  adorto-. 
adst/i-,  stand  near;  2.  adstit-. 
advent-,  arrive;    2.  adoen-,  3.  ao7- 


adventu-,  arrival. 

adversario-,  enemy. 

ad  verso-,  iu-froid;  adverse. 

ad  versus     or     adversurn,      (ace), 

against. 
adeoca-,    call-up;    2.    advocav-,   3. 

advocato-. 


260 


VOCABULARY. 


advola-,  fly  to ;  hasten  ;  2.  advoldv-, 

3.  ad  void  to-. 
aed(ficu~,  build;    2.    aedificav-,    3. 

utdificdto-. 

aediticio-,  n.  luilding. 
aedllicio-,  one  who  has  been  aedile. 
Aeduo-,  Aeduan. 
aegre,  with  difficulty. 
Aemilio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
Aenea-,  Aeneas. 
aeneo-.  of -copper. 
aequitat-,  evenness  ;  justice. 
aequo-,  level,  even. 
aes-,  n.  &>}>per. 
aestu-,  tide. 
aetat-,  aye. 

a/er-.  carry  to ;  2.  attul-,  3.  allato-. 
a/ic(i)-,  aflect ;  2.  offec-,  3.  a/tcto-. 
atlixo-,  constantly-present. 
afflicto-,  damaged. 
Africa-,  Africa. 
ag-,  act ;    spend  (time) ;    conduct ; 

pay  (thanks):  2.  eg-,  3.  acto-. 
agger-,  m.  mound. 
aggrtd(i)-,  attack ;    apply    oneself 

to;  3.  aggrtsso-. 
agmen-,  marching  line, 
agita-,  harass,  agitate;  2.  agitdv-, 

3   wjilato-. 

agricola-,  husbandman. 
agricultura-,  agriculture. 
agro-,  m.  field, 
di-  (defective),  say. 
al ,  nourish ;  2.  alu-,  3.  alito-. 
ala-,  winy. 

All>a-,  a  town  near  Home. 
Albano-,  Alban. 
albo-,  white. 
Alesia-,  Aks?a. 
Alexandria-,  a  city  in  Egypt. 
Alexjindro-.  Alexander. 
alibi,  elsewhere. 
alieno-,  belonging  to  another. 
aliqumido.  once. 
aliquu-,  some. 
aliquot,  some. 
alio-,  oilier ;  some. 
aliter,  otherwise. 


A  Ilia-,  a  river  near  Pome. 

alUc(i)-,  allure;   'l.allex-.  3.  allecto-. 

all«qu-.  address ;  3.  allocuto-. 

Alpi-,  /.  pi.  Aljis. 

alte,  highly,  deeply. 

aliero-,  the  otfu.-r ;  the  second;  the 

one  party. 
altiludon-,  height. 
alto-,  high. 
alveari-,  n.  beehive, 
ama-,  love;   2   amav-,  3.  aniato-. 
amabili-,  lovely. 
ainator-,  lover. 
ambo-,  (irreg.),  both. 
amlco-.  friend ;  friendly. 
amicitia-,  friendslnp. 
amilt-,  lose;  2.  amis-,  3.  amisfo-. 
ainni-,  m.  rittr. 
amor-,  love, 
amplia-,  enlarge;    2.  ampliav-,  3. 

amplidlo-. 
amphtudon-,  size. 
amplius,  more. 
arnplo-,  large. 
Amulio-,  Amulius. 
an  at-,  duck. 
Anchisa-,  Anchises. 
Anco-,  Ancus. 
angui-.  c.  snake. 
angustia-,  pi.  straits. 
angusto-,  narrow. 
Anien-,  m.  the  river  Anio. 
ammadvrrtri    observe;     2.   — " — , 

3.  animadverso-. 
aniinal(i)-.  n.  animaL 
aninio-,  m.  t>ouL 
annulo-,  m.  ring. 
anno-,  m.  year. 
an  DUO-,  yearly. 
ante,  (ace.),  before. 
antequatn,  bejore  that, 
ant-pdn-,    prefer;    2.  anteposu-.  3. 

anttj'osito-. 

Antiochla-,  the  capital  of  St^ria. 
antlquo-,  ancient. 
Antonio-,  Antony. 
aperi-,  open  ;  2.  aperu-,  3.  aptrto-. 
aperte,  openly. 


VOCABULARY. 


2G1 


aperto-,  open. 

api-,  /.  bee. 

apparatu-,  stock;  store. 

appfire-,    appear ;    2.   appdru-,    3. 

(ippdrito-. 
appdla-,  name ;  2  appettdv-,  3.  ap- 

pelldto-. 
appel-,  drive  to;  2.  appul-,  3.  ap- 

appet-,  seek  for ;  2.  appetiv-,  3.  op- 

^t/o-. 
appropinqua-,  approach  ;  2.  appro- 

pinqudv-,  3.  appropinquate-. 
apro-,  ioiid-boar} 
apto-,  _/i^. 

apnd.  riear,  among. 
Apulia-,  Apulia. 
aqua-,  water. 
aquila-,  eagle. 

ara-,  plough  ;  2.  ardv-,  3.  ardto-. 
ara-,  a/<ar. 

arbitra-,  think  ;  3.  arbitrate-. 
arbitrio-,  n.  will,  choice. 
arbos  ,  /.  tree. 
arc>-,  keep  off;  2.  arcu-. 
arc(i)-,  /.  citadel, 
arceas-,   send  for ;  2.  arcesslv-,   3. 


Ardea-,  a  town  near  Rome, 
arde-,  be-on-fire ;  2.  ars-,  3.  arso-. 
arjfento-,  silver. 
Ar^o-,  n.  m.  in  pi  Argon. 
Arlrnino-,  n.  a  town  in  U/nbria. 
armJlto-,  armed. 
Armenia-.  Armenia. 
armento-,  herd. 
arm  ilia-,  armlet. 
armo-,  n.  pi.  arms. 
art(i)-, /.  art. 
artiticioso-,  artistic. 
Arunt-,  a  maris  name. 
Arverno-,  m.  pi.  a  Gallic  tribe. 
Ascanio-,  the  son  of  Aeneas. 
Asia-,  Asia. 

asperna-,  disdain-,  3.  asperndto-. 
aspid-,  /.  viper. 

assigna-,  ascribe;    2.  assigndv-,  3. 
assigndto: 


asylo-,  n.  sanctuary. 

at,  but. 

atque,  and. 

atroc(i)-,  fierce. 

attente,  attentively. 

atter-,  rub,  wear-away ;  2.  attrlv-, 

3.  attrifo-. 
atting-,    touch  upon;    2.  attig-,  3. 

attacto-. 
attribu-,  assign ;  2.  — " — ,  3.  attri- 

buto-. 

auct.or-,  author. 
auctoritat-,  influence. 
audiic(i)-,  bold. 
audricia-,  boldness. 
audacter,  boldly. 

aude-,  (semi-dep.)  dare  :  3.  auso-. 
audi-,  hear ;  2.  audlv-,  3.  audllo-. 
avfer-,  carry-off';  2.  abstul-,  3.  ab- 

IdtO-. 

aufug(i)-,  flee-away ;  2.  aufug-. 

auge-,  increase ;  2.  aux-,  3.  aucto-. 

augurio-,  n.  augury. 

Augusto-,  Augustus. 

Aulo-,  a  Roman  first  name. 

aureo-,  golden. 

Aurelio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 

auriga-,  charioteer. 

auri-,  /.  ear. 

auro-,  n.  gold. 

auspicio-,  n.  auspice. 

aufc,  either,  or. 

autem,  but. 

auxilio-,  n.  help,  aid. 

"        pi.  auxiliary  troops. 
avaritia-,  avarice. 
Aventino-,  Aventine  hill, 
avert-,   turn   away;    2.  — " — ,  3. 

averso-. 
avi-, /.  bird. 
avo-,  grandfather, 
dvola-,    fly   away;    2.   avoldv-,    3. 

dvoldto-. 


Bacillo-.  n.  staff. 
Baleari-,  Balearic. 
barbaro-,  m.  barbarian. 


262 


VOCABULARY. 


bellicose-,  warlike. 

beilo-,  n.  war. 

Bellovaco-,  m.  pi.  a  Gallic  tribe. 

bene,  ?/>//, 

beiifticio-,  n.  kindness. 

benigne,  kindly. 

betiigno-,  kind. 

Id-,  drink  :  2.  — " — . 

blduo-.  n.  iv:o  days'  space. 

bieimio,  n.  twoytars'  sj'ace. 

Bifliynia-,  part  "/Asia  Minor. 

bonu-,  good. 

bono-,  n.  pi.  goods. 

bov-,  c.  ox,  cow. 

brae!  no-,  n.  arm. 

brevi-,  short. 

brevl,  in  a  abort  time. 

Britannia-,  Brilain. 

Britanno-,  m.  pi.  Britons. 

Hruto,  Bruius. 

Brutlio-,  m.  pi.  a  part  of  Italy. 

Byzautio-,  n.  now  Constantinople. 


C.  short  for  C»\o-. 
Cabico-,  •//.  2)1*  a  town  of  Pontus. 
cadaver-,  n.  corpse. 
ca</-,  fall ;  2.  ctcid-,  3.  caso-. 
cado,  ni.  ca#k. 
cadCieo-,  perishable, 
coed-,  Jell,  slay ;  2.  cecid-,  3,'caeso-. 
caedk  /.  n.  s.  caedes,  daughter. 
Caio-,  a  Roman  first  nam*. 
a\  ]  a  i  n  i  la t-,  -m  < -\fvrtune. 
calcTir(i)-,  n.  spur, 
cale-,  be  hot;  2.  calu-. 
Cain rlo-,  c.  ramel. 
Cainillo-.  a  Roinan  general. 
Campania-,  part  of  Italy. 
canipo-,  m.  plain. 
cani-,  c.  dt>g. 

car/-,  sing ;  2.  cecin-,  3.  canto-. 
Canna-,  pi.  a  village  of  Apiuia. 
can tu-,  so ag. 
capro-,  rfli..  goat. . 

caj'tss-,    undertake;    2.  capes-slv~, 
3.  capesslto-. 


cap(i)-,  tfike,  :  2.  ccp-,  3.  capfo- 

Capitulio-,  Capitol. 

cajita-,  catch  at;  2.  captiiv-,  3.  cup- 

ifiio-. 

en  [  >  1  1  v  a  -  ,  a  fern  alt  prisoner. 
capiivo-,  m  pii&ointr. 
Capua-,  n  city  in  Campania. 
capui-.  n.  head  ;  capital;  civil  rights. 
career,  m.  prison. 
cariiat-,  ojjection. 
carmen-,  s»ng. 
CarnQii-,  pi.  the  Carnutts. 
cnr(o)\\-.  f.  flesh. 
car|  ento-,  curriagf. 
carp-,  plnck  ;   2.  carps-,  3.  carptn-. 
Can  a-,  pi.  a  city  of  Mesopotamia. 
carro-,  m.  wagon. 
Cai  tlulgon-,  /  Carthage. 
Caithfiginieiisi-,  Carthaginian. 
ciiro-,  dcur. 
cantiga-,  reprove,  chastise;  2.  cas- 

tlytv-,  3.  cott-guto-. 
cast  ro-,  n.  pi.  <  urnp. 
ftisu-,  occurrence,  -misfortune. 
catena-,  chain. 
Caudlna-,  of-Caud-wn. 
causa-,  lnw-suit'  rta.-vn. 
causa.  ./(.'/•  the  sake,  (alter  a  penit.) 
caie-.   guaid   against;    2.  cue-,    o. 

canto-. 

ccla-,  conceal;   2.  cclav-.  3.  ctlalo-. 
cdtbra-  celebrate  ;  2.  ceicLruv-,  3. 

celtbrato-. 

celebri-,  crowded:  famous. 
celeritat-.  ynirkntss. 
celei  iter,  quickly. 
eel  so-,  lofty. 
cense-,  be  of  opinion  ;   2.  censu-,  3. 

G0MCK 

censu-,  registration. 

centum,  hun/lrtd. 

centurion-,  centurion. 

cent-,   see  distinctly  ;   2.  crev-,   3. 

crtto-. 

certamen-,  contest. 
certior-  fac(i)-,  inform;    2.  fee-,  3. 


cervo-,  w.  stag. 


VOCABULARY. 


2G3 


cf-tero-,  other. 

cibo-,  m.  food. 

Ci  in1  )ro-,  pi.  a  tribe  of  north-  Ger- 

'ina  is. 

Clnea-,  Cinea*. 

dug-,  sin-round;  2.  cinx-,  3.cincto~. 
ciiC.l,  (ace  ),  about. 
circiter,  about. 
cireum,  (ace.),  around. 
circu  nda~.  surround;  2.  circumded-, 

3.  circuiitdido-. 
circunidiic-,  lead   around  ;    2.   cir- 

cumdujc-,  3.  circum<tuct<>-. 
circum-<ta-,  stand  around  ;   2.  cir- 

cumMet-. 

citerior-,  on  the  hither  side. 
cilo,  S'>on. 

citra.  (aec.)  on  this  side. 
clvi-,  c.  citizen. 
civlli-,  cioil. 
civil  at-,  state.   • 
cludi-,  /  wsm.  s.  cladea,  rout. 
clam,  necrttly. 
clamor-,  shout.' 

claro-,  clear,  evident,  illustrious. 
class!-,  /.  fleet. 

da  ad-,  sliut;  2.  daus-,  3.  clauso-. 
Claudio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
clC-monfc(i)-,  mere  fid. 
cleineuter,  mercifully. 
cleuientia-,  clemency. 
Cleopatra-,  a  quetn  of  Egypt. 
clipeo-,  m.  shield. 
cloaca-,  sewer. 
Clasio-,  n.  Glusium. 
Cu.  short  for  Cneio-. 
Cueio-,  a  Roman  first  name. 
Coclet-,  Copies. 
coelesti-,  heavenly. 
coelo-,  n.  m.  in  plur.,  heaven. 
coem-,  buy  up;  2.  coem-,  3.  coemp- 


coer- 


coena-,  dinner. 

2.  c»ep-,  begin  ;   3.  coepto-. 

coerce-,  coniiue ;  2.  coercu-,  3. 

cito-. 

cog-,  constrain;  2.  co^g-,  3.  coaclo-. 
cogitation-,  consideration. 


cognition-,  examination. 

cognomen-,  surname. 

coy  now-,  learn;  2.  cognov-,  3.  cog- 

nito-. 
cohibt-,  check;    2.  cohibu-,    3.  co- 

hil>/w-. 

coliort(i)-,  /  cohort, 
cot-,  cultivate;  '2.  colu-,  3.  cult.n-. 
CollJtlno-,  the  husband  of  Lucrctia. 
collauda-,  praise-highly  ;   2.  codau- 

da»-,  '6.  collauddto-. 
collega-,  m.  colleayue. 
colli-,  m.  hilt, 
coliig-,  collect ;  2.  collcg-,  3.  collec- 

to-. 

colloca-,  place;  2.  coltocav-,  3.  col- 
local  o-. 

colloqu-,  converse  with ;  3.  col'ocuto-. 
colGno-,  colonist, 
combur-,  burn  up ;  2.  combuss-,  3. 

comliusto-. 

comet-,  c.  companion, 
com'ta-,  accompany;  3.  comitdfo-. 
commtmorn-,    mention;      2.    com- 

mtmordv-,  3.  commemorato-. 
corn  men  to-,  Jiction. 
co  i  n  m  i  1  i  t  on  -,  fello  w- soldier. 
C(nnminus,  clo*e  at  hand, 
commiti-,    commit;  commence;  2. 

commls-,  3.  commfeso-. 
commura-,  tarry;  3.  commorato-. 
commove-,  move,   excite ;   2.  com- 

mdv-,  3.  commoto-. 
communi-,  ibrtit'y  strongly;  2.  com- 

mti/ilv-,  3.  cominunUo-. 
communi-,  common, 
compara-,   get   together;    2.  com- 

pardv;  3.  compar&to-. 
compell-,  force,  constrain ;  2.  com- 

pal-,  3.  conipulvo-. 
compensa-,    compensate;    2.   com- 

peiiSdV-,  3.  compensat's-. 
comperi-,  ascertain ;  2.  comper-,  3. 

comptrto-. 
comple-,  till;    2.  complcv-,  3.  com- 

pleto-. 

complect-,  embrace  ;  3.  complexo-. 
complur(i)-,  pi.  several. 


264 


VOCABULARY. 


comport-,  put  together;  settle;    2. 

coinposu-,  3.  composite-. 
comporta-,  carry  together  ;  2.  com- 

portav-,  3.  comportdte-. 
comprehend-,  arrest;  2.  —  "  —  ,  3. 

comprehenso-. 
conn-,  attempt:  3.  condto-. 
coiiatu-,  endeavor. 
conced-,  grant:  2.  concess-,  2.  con- 

cesso-. 
concilia-,  win  over;    2.  conciliav-, 

3.  conciliate-. 
concilio-,  n.  assembly. 
concita-,   arouse  ;    2.    concitav-,   3. 

concitato. 

concitor-,  stirrer  vp. 
conclama-,  shout  together  ;  2.  con- 

clantav-.  3.  concldmate-. 
conclusion-,  rounding. 
coiicurr-,  run  together;   2.  —  "  —  , 

or  concucurr-,  3.  concurso-. 
concursu-,  concourse. 
cond-,  found  ;  2.  condid-,  3.  condiio-. 
condition-,  condition. 
conduc-,  lead  together;  hire;  take 

a   contract  for;    2.    condux-,  3. 

conducto-. 
confer-,   carry  together;    betake; 

2.  coniul-,  3.  collate-. 
contt'Stim,  immediately. 
coiijic(i)-,  finish  ;   wear  out  ;  2.  corc- 

fcc-,  3.  confecto-. 
conjirma-,  establish  ;  2.  confirmav-, 

3.  coiifirmato-. 

ctmfite,-,  confess;  3.  confesso-. 
conjiig-,  engage  in  battle;   2.  con- 

fl'X-,  3.  conflicto-. 
coufod(i)-,  stab;  2.  confod-,  3.  con- 


confug(t)-,  flee  for  refuge  ;  2.  cora- 

/«^-- 
conyrtga-,  assemble  ;  2.  congregdv-, 

3.  congregate-. 
conjlc(i)-,  throw;   2.  conjee-,  3.  corc- 


conjug-,  c.  consort. 

conjuny-,  unite  ;  2.  conjunx-,  3.  COTI- 

.;  w  TIC  to-. 
consctnd-,  embark  in  ;  2.  —  "  —  ,  3. 

conxcenso-. 
comcrlb-,  enroll  ;    2.  conscrips-,  3. 


conseitesc-,  grow  old  ;  2.  consenu-. 
constnti-,  agree;  2.consens-,  3.  co/i 


consequ-,  overtake  ;  3.  consecuto-. 
constr-,  join  together  ;  2.  consent-, 

3.  constrto-. 
conscrca-,  preserve  ;  2.  conservdv-, 

3.  cowseruafo-. 
conservatric-,  preserver. 
conoid-,  sit  down  ;  encamp;  2.  con- 

serf-,  3.  consesso-. 
consilio-,  ?i.  counsel;  meeting  ;  wis- 

dom. 
consist-,  be  at  rest,  be  firm;  2.  con- 

stit-  3.  const  ite-. 
corispectu-,  ^/<<. 
compic(i)-,  behold  ;  2.  conspex-,  3. 


conspica-,  perceive;  3.  conspicdto-. 

constant(i)-,  ./?r?n. 

constitu-,   place  ;    fix  ;  resolve  ;    2. 

—  "  —  ,  3.  constitute-. 
consuesc-,   become  acustomed;    2. 

consuev-,  3.  consucto-. 
consul-,  consul. 

consular!-,  one  who  has  been  consul 
consul-,    (dat.)   take  measures;    2. 

consulu-,  3.  consulto-. 
consum-,  consume,  spend;  2.  co?i- 

sumps-,  3.  consumpto-. 
consurg-,  rise  together;  2.  consur- 

rex-,  3.  consurrecto-. 
contamina-,   pollute  ;    2.    contami- 

nav-,  3.  contaminate-. 
contemn-,  despise;   2.  conkmps-,  3. 


coxjrtra-,    conspire;    2.  conjurav-, 

3.  ccnjurato-. 
conjuration-,  conspiracy. 


contend-,  stretch;  hasten  ;  contend; 

2.  —  "  —  ,  3.  contente-. 
contention-,  exertion;  contest. 
contento-,  contented  (abL) 


VOCABULARY. 


265 


tontine-,   keep  in;    2.  continu-,  3. 

contento-. 

contion-,  assembly. 
contra,  (ace.)  against:  opposite. 
coii'radlc-,  speak  against;   2.  con- 

tradix-i  3.  contradicto-. 
contrah-,   draw   together;    2.  con- 

<roa;-,  3.  contracto-. 
contrario-,  contrary. 
coiivalesc-,   regain  health;  2.  con- 

valu-. 
convdl-,    pluck   up;    2.  —  "  —  ,  3. 

convulao-. 
convtni-,     come    together  ;     meet 

with;    2.  conven-,  3.  convento-. 
conveutu-,  assembly;  assize. 
cotivoca-,  call   together  ;  2.  convo- 

cav-,  3.  convocdto-. 
convola-,  fly-together  ;  2.  convoldv-, 

3.  convolato-. 
copia-,  2>£.  forces. 
co  I'd-,  n.  fteartf. 
Corinthio-,  of-  Corinth. 
Coriutho-,  /.  a  c#y  o/  Greece. 
Coriolo-,  m,  jp/.  a  town  ofLatium. 
Cornelio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
cornu-,  n.  horn;  wing  of  an  army. 
corpos-,  body. 
corrig-,  improve  ;  2.  correx-,  3.  cor- 

recto-. 
corrump-,  corrupt;   2.  corrup-,  3. 

corruptO". 

corrupto-,  corrupted. 
corvo-,  m.  raven. 
cos.  sh  ort  for  consul-,  sing. 
coss.  short  for  consul-,  plur. 
eras,  to-morrow. 
crebro-,  frequent. 
crea-,  create;  elect;  2.  creav-,  3. 

creato-. 
cred-,  trust-,  (dat.)  ;  believe  ;  2.  cre- 

dit-, 3.  credito-. 
Cremera-,  a  river  tn  Etruria. 
crimen-,  charge. 
crucia-,  torture  ;  2.  cructov-,  3.  crzt- 


crudeliter,  cruelly. 

Cuba-,  lie  down ;  2.  cu&w-,  3. 

to-. 

cublli-,  n.  couch. 
cultu-,  culture. 

cum,  (abl.)  along  with.  conj.  both, 
cumula-,  heap  up,  load;  2.  cumu- 

lav-,  3.  cumulate-. 
cunctatiCn-,  detay. 
cup(i)-,  desire;  2.  cttplv-,  3.  cuplto-. 
cnpide,  eagerly. 
cupiditat-,  lust,  passion. 
cupido-,  eager. 
cura-,  care, 
cur  a-,  care  for ;    cure ;    cause  ;  2. 

cwrav-,  3.  curato-. 
Curi-,  m.  joZ.  a  Sabine  town. 
curia-,  ward;  senate-house. 
Curiatio-,  an  Alban  family-name, 
curr-,  run  ;  2.  cucurr-,  3.  cur  so-. 
curru-,  chariot. 
cursu-,  running  ;  course. 
cuspid-,  /.  spike. 
custod-,  c.  guard, 
custodi-,  guard ;  2.  custodlv-,  3.  cus- 

tddlto-. 

cyatho,  m,  cup. 
Cynoscephala-,    pi.    a  village    in 

Thessaly. 
Cyzico-,  m.  a  town  in  Asia  Minor. 


Damna-,  condemn;  2.  damnav-, 
3.  damnato-. 

da-,  give;  put;  2.  ded-,  3.  dato-. 

Dario-,  a  name  of  Persian  kings. 

de,  (abl)  down  from :  about:  con- 
cerning :  agreeably  to. 

de  improviso,  unexpectedly. 

debe-,  owe;  2.  debu, ,  3.  debito-. 

debilita-,  weaken ;  2.  debiliiav-,  3. 
debilitato-. 

deced-,   depart;  die;   2.  decess-,  3. 


cruciatu-,  torment. 
crudeli-, 
23 


decem,  ten. 
decemviro-,  decemvir. 


2G6 


VOCABULARY. 


decern-,    be    convinced  ;    decree; 

contend  ;  2.  decrcv-,  3.  decrtto-. 
decernendo-,  n.  deciding. 
dtcid-,  fall  down;  2.  —  •'  —  . 
decimo-,  tenth. 
dttip(i)-,  deceive  ;  2.  decep-,  3.  de- 

cepto-. 
decurr-,   run   down  ;  2.  —  "  —  ,  or 

decucurr-,  3.  decurso-. 
ded-,  give  up  ;  2.  dedid-,  3.  dediio-. 
dedecos-,  disgrace. 
dedition-,  surrender. 
di'liic-,  lead   down;    conduct;    2. 

dedux-,  3.  deducto-. 
dees-,  be  wanting  (da*.)  ;  2.  rfe/k-. 
defection-,  revolt 
defend-,     defend;     ward    off;     2. 

—  "  —  ,  3.  defense-. 
defensor-,  defender. 
defer-,  confer  ;  2.  detul-,  3.  deldto-. 
deinde,  next,  hereupon. 
dejic(i)-,  throw  down;  drive  down; 

2.  dijec-,  3.  dejecta-. 

dek-,  blot  out;  destroy;  2.  delev-, 

3.  dtfcto-. 

delecta-,  delight;  charm;  2.  delec- 

tdv-,  3.  delectdto-. 
delectu-,  kvy. 
delicia-,  pi.  pleasures. 
drtiy-,  choose;  2.  efe/^-,  $.dcleeto-. 
deliga-,    bind,    fasten;   2.  deligdv-, 

3.  deligdto-. 
demerg-,  sink;    2.   dcmers-,  3.  efe- 


Demetrio-,  a  Macedonian  prince. 

demoli-,  demolish  ;  3.  demollto-. 

demum,  at  length. 

denique,  at  length. 

denso-,  thick. 

dfnuntia-,  announce  ;  2.  denunti&v-, 

3.  denuntiato-. 
depell-.  drive  down  ;  expell  ;  2.  de- 

put-,  3.  depuko-. 
depon-,  put  down  ;  deposit  ;  2.  de- 

posu-,  3.  dcposito-. 
dcpopula-,  pillage  ;  3.  depopuldto-. 
df-prehend-,  seize;  2.  —  "  —  ,  3.  de- 

prthenso-. 


deprim-,  press  down;  2.  dipress-, 

3.  dfpref>so-. 
dcrip(i)-,  snatch  away;  2.  dcripu- 

3.  derepto-. 
descrlb  ,    mark   out;    arrange;    2. 

dcscn'ps-,  3.  descripto-. 
dtser-,  aV^andon  ;  2.  deseru-,  3.  <fc- 


desili-,   leap  down;    2.  desilu-,  3. 


-7'n-,  cease  ;  2.  dmt;-, 
desist-,  leave  off;  2.  dtsM-,  3.  dts~ 

titO: 

despera-,  despair  ;  2.  desperav-,  3. 

dt*pcralo-. 
dettrre-,  deter;  2.  deterru-,  3.  <&- 


detrah-,  draw  down;  tear  off;   2. 

dctrax-.  3.  d&racto-. 
detrimeiito-,  Zt/ss. 
Deo-,  (?orf. 
devasta-,  lay  waste;   2.  dcvastav-, 

3.  devastate-. 
divine-,  conquer  entirely  ;  2.  dcv'ic-, 

3.  devtcto-. 
devoca-,  call  down  ;  2.  dcvocav-,  3. 


devolv-,  roll  down  ;  2.  —  "  —  ,  3. 


dextra-,  right  hand. 

dextro-,  on  the  right  hand. 

diademat-,  n.  diadem. 

die-,  speak;  say;  plead;  call;    2. 

dix-,  3.  dicto-. 
dictator-,  dictator. 
diction-,  pleading. 
dicto-,  n.  ward. 
die-,  m.  (also  f.  in  sing.)  day. 
drfficili-,  difficult. 
difficultat-,  difficulty. 
diffid-  (semi-dep.)  distrust  (rfof.); 

3.  difflso-. 
digito-,  m.  finger. 
digna-,  deern  worthy  (abl.)  3.  dig- 

nato-. 

dignitat-,  dignity. 
digno-,  wirrtity  (abl.) 
dllig-,  love  ;  2.  dllex-,  3.  dlkcto-. 


VOCABULARY. 


267 


dlligent(i)-,  diligent,  careful. 

dlligenter,  carefully. 

dlligentia-,  diligence. 

dimica-,  tight,  struggle;  2.   dlmi- 

cav-,  3.  dlmic&to-. 
dlmitt  ,  send  different  ways;    dis- 

miss; 2.  dlmls-,  3.  dlmitso-. 
dlrip(£)-,  plunder,  pillage;    2.  dl~ 

ripu-,  3.  dlrrplo-. 
dlru-,  demolish  ;  2.  —  "  —  ,  3.  dlru- 

to-. 
disced-,  depart;  2.  discess-,  3.  dis- 

cesso: 
discind-,  tear  asunder;  2.  discid-, 

3.  ditcisao-. 
discipulo-,  m.  /?up^. 
dixc-,  learn  ;  2.  didic-. 
discrlmen-,  d./erence  :  hazard, 
divp6n-,  place  at  intervals  :  arrange  ; 

2.  disposu-,  3.  disposito-. 
dispute-,  discuss;   2.  disputdv-,  3. 


distnbu-,  distribute;  2.  —  "  —  ,  3. 


dition-,  dominion. 

dltior-,  richer. 

dltissimo-,  richest. 

diu,  for  along  time. 

diurno-,  daily. 

diutius,  for  a  longer  time. 

diuturnitat-,  long  duration. 

diuturno-,  long-lasting. 

diverse-,  different. 

dlvet-,  rich. 

divid-,  divide;  2.  divls-,  3.  diviso-. 

dlvlno-,  div.ne. 

dlvitia-,  pi.  riches. 

Dlvitiaco,  a  Gallic  chief. 

doce-,  teach,  inform  ;    2.  docu-,  3. 

docto-. 

docte,  learnedly. 
docto-,  karntd> 
doctor-,  teacher. 
doctrlna-.  teaming. 
dt  »!<>-,  m.  craft,  trick. 
dolor-,  pain,  grief. 
doma~,  subdue,  tame;  2.  domu-,  3. 

doinito-. 


domestico-,  domestic. 

domination-,  dominion. 

domitiatric-,  mistress. 

domino-,  master,  lord. 

domo-,  &  d(»mu-, /.  house. 

dona-,  present;    2.  donav^    3.  do- 

nafo-. 

donee,  until. 
done-,  n.  gift, 
dormi-,  sleep ;  2.  dormlv-,  3.  dor- 

mlto-. 
dubita-,  doubt,  hesitate;    2.  dubi- 

tav-,  3.  dubtlato-. 
dubitation-,  hesiiation. 
due-,  c.  leader. 
due-,  lead;    draw  out;    protract; 

marry  (a  wile) ;  2.  dux-,  3.  duc- 

tO: 

ducento-,  two  hundred. 

Duillio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 

dulcedon-,  sweetness. 

dulci-,  sweet. 

duiu,  while,  until. 

Dumnorig-,  a  Gallic  chief. 

duo-,  two  (irreg.). 

duodecim,  tivelve. 

duodecimo-,  twelfth. 

duodetiicesii 1 10-,  twenty-eighth. 

duodevicesimo-,  eighteenth. 

duodevlgintl,  eighteen. 

duplec-,  double. 

dura-,   last,   continue;    2.  durav-, 

3.  durato*. 
duro-,  hard. 


e,  ex,  (abl.\  out  of,  from. 

Eburon-,  pi.  a  Gallic  tribe. 

ecquando,  when — ever  ? 

ed-,  eat;  2.  ed-,  3.  eso-. 

educ-,  lead  out;  2.  edux-,  3.  educ- 

to-. 
Sduca-,  bring  up;  educate;  2.  cdu- 

Cav-,  3.  educalo-. 
effug(i)-,  flee  away,  escape ;  2.  ef- 

fug-. 


268 


VOCABULARY. 


e/und-,  pour  out ;  2.  fffud-,  3.  ef- 

fuso-. 

Egeria-,  the  name  of  a  nymph. 
e</rn/(i)-,  go  out;  3.  igrtsau-. 
egregie,  txcelitnlly. 
ejic(i)-,  cast  out;  wreck;  2.  ejec-, 

3.  fjtcto-. 

elab-,  slip  away;  3.  elopso-. 
elal&ra-,  labor  earnestly ;  2.  elabo- 

rav-,  3.  ikiborato-. 
eleplianto-,  m.  elephant. 
eltc(i);  entice  out;  2.  ettctt-,  3.  eZt- 

CttO: 

eloqnentia-,  eloquence. 

em-,  buy ;  2.  rra-,  3.  empto-. 

emigia-,  depart  from  ;  '2.  tmigrav-, 

3.  eniigrato-. 
emitt-,   send  out,  let  go;  2.  erols-, 

3.  emisso-. 
gmoluniento-,  profit. 
enini, /o/-.  never  begins  a  sentence, 
eo,  thtlher ;  by  no  much. 
eodem,  to  tht  same  place. 
>;plro-,  /.  a  country  N.  W.  of  Greece. 
epistola-,  letter. 
equH-,  mare. 
equesiri-,  equestrian. 
equet-,  horseman,  knight, 
equifa-,  ride;  2.  tquilav-,  3.  equita- 

1o-. 

equitatu-.  cavalry. 
equo-,  horse. 
eqmilo-.  foal 
ergo,  Uiertfore, 

er/</-,  raise;  2.  erex-,  3.  erecto-. 
enp(i)-,  snatch  out,  tear  away;  2. 

£rtpw-,  3.  irtplo-. 
erudi-,  inform,   teach ;  2.  erudlv-, 

3.  erudlto-. 
trump ,    burst  out;    2.   crflp-,   3. 

erupto-. 

erupLion-,  sally  ;  eruption. 
«,•-, be;  2. fu~. 
esccndr,    climb,  mount;   2.  — " — , 

3.  esctnso-. 

essedo-,  n.  war-chariot, 
et,  and;  both. 
etiam,  also;  even. 


etiamnum,  even  now,  stitt. 
Etriiria-,  a  country  of  Italy. 
evad-,  escape;  2.  ivas-,  3.  (va*o-. 
etagv-,  spread  out;  3.  ivaguto-. 
e-veiitu-,  result. 
evtrt-,  overthrow;  2.  —  "  —  ,  3.  ever- 

so-. 
evoca-,    call  forth;    2.  evocav-,    3. 

evocato-. 
evola-,  fly  off;  2.  evolav-,  3.  evola- 

to-. 
exardesc-,  take  fire,  break  out  ;  2. 

exars-,  3.  txarso-. 
cxcid-,  withdraw  from  ;  2.  excess-, 

3.  cxcesso-. 
exctll-,  surpass;  2.  exccttu-,  3.  ea> 

CC/50-. 

excellent(i)-,  surpassing. 

excidio-,  w.  overt/trow. 

excita-,  rouse;  2.  excitdv-,  3.  exci- 

tato-. 

exemplo-,  n.  example,  precedent. 
extrct-,  practise  ;  2.  exercu-,  3.  ex- 

erdto-. 

exercitu-,  army. 
exhauri-,  exhaust,  weaken  ;  2.  ex- 

it aus-,  3.  exhaust"-. 
exi-,  go  out;  2.  txlv-,  3.  «c/to-. 
#c/</-,  drive  out;  2.  exe^-,  3.  cajoc- 

to-. 

exilio-,  n.  eaife. 
eximio-,  extraordinary. 
exitstima-,  think,  judge;    2.   exis- 

timdv-j  3,  Kcistimato-. 
exitio-,  n.  ruin. 
exori-,  rise  ;  3.  ey&rto-. 
exorna-,  adorn  greatly  ;  2.  exornav-, 

3.  exornato-. 
expedi-,    disengage,    make   ready; 

2.  typed  lv-,  3.  expedlto-. 
expedlto-,  unencumbered. 
expell-,  drive  out  ;  2.  expul-,  3.  ca> 


expcrgisc-,  awake;  3.  experrecto-. 
exptt-,  exact,  demand  ;  2.  expttlv-, 

3.  txpttlto-. 
eyplica-,  unfold  ;  2.  explicu-,  and  <*x- 

plicav-,  3.  explicito-  aud  explicate-. 


VOCABULARY. 


269 


explora-,   examine;    2.   explorav-, 

3.  ex{)ldrato-. 
explorator-,  scout, 
expdii,-,  place  out,  disembark;    2. 

exposu-,  3.  exposito-. 
exporta-,  export  ;    2.  exportav-,  3. 

exp&rtalo-. 
expugna-,  take  by  storm  ;  2.  expug- 

ndi'-,  3.  expugndto-. 
exsilio-,  n.  banishment. 
exsptcta-,  expect,  wait  for;  2.  ex- 

sprctav-,  3.  exspectdto-. 
exspectation-,  expectation. 
exstiugn-,   extinguish,  destroy;   2. 

ex*tirix-,  3.  exslincto-. 
exsul-,  exile. 
exsula-,  be  in  exile  ;  2.  exsulav-,  3. 


extemplo,  forthivith. 

extiinesc-,  fear  greatly  ;  2.  extimu-. 

extorque-,  extort  ;  2.  extors-,  3.  e#- 


extrerno-, 


outermost. 


Fabio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
Fabricio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
fabro-,  workman. 
fabula-,  tale,  story. 
fac(i)-,  niirike ;  2.  fee-,  3.  facto-. 
facile,  easily. 
facili-,  eflwy. 
fnciiios-,  action. 
facto-,  n.  dted. 
ffijro-,  /.  beech  tree. 
Falerio-,  m.  pi.  a  town  in  Etruria. 
Falisco-  pi.  the  people  of  Fal  ril. 
fall.-,  deceive;  2.frftll-,  3.  falso-. 
ialso-,  false. 
fan i a-,  futiie,  report. 
lanii-, /.  n.  s.  fames,  hunger. 
fnmilia-,  family ;  sect. 
farniliaritat-,  intimacy. 
famula-,  handmaid. 
farr-,  n.  corn. 
23* 


fatiga-,   tire,  weary;    2.  fatigav-, 

3.  fallgato-. 

Faustulo-,  a  man's  name. 
fave-,  favor  (dat.),  2.  fav-,  B.fauto-. 
favor-,  good-will. 
ffeli-,  /  «.  s.  teles,  cat. 
ff-llc(i)-,  happy,  fortunate. 
fellcitat-,  happintss. 
fellciter,  happily. 
fernina-,  female,  woman. 
fern  or-,  n.  thigh 
for-,  carry;  bear;  tell;  report;  2. 

tul-,  3.  lato-. 
ferac(i)-,  fruitful. 
fere,  almost. 
fero-,  wild. 
feroc(i)-,  bold,  fierce. 
ferro-,  n.iron;  sword. 
fesso-,  weary. 
festo-,  n.  festival. 
Ji-,  become  ;  liappen  ;  3.  facto-,  see 

§  237. 

fid-,  (semi-dep.)  trust  (<1at.}  3.  fiso-. 
fide-,  faith  ;  c>  edit  ;  protection  ;  sub- 

jection. 

Me\\-,  faiftful. 
fidi-,  /.  pi.  musical  strings. 
fiji'Qra-,  figure,  shape. 
fllia-,  daughter. 
filio-,  son. 

fing-,  contrive;  Z.finx-,  S.ficto-. 
fini-,  finish;  2.  flniv-,  S.flnltu-. 
fini-,  m.  rarely  f.  end,  limit. 

"  m.  pi.  territories. 
finitimo-,  neighboring. 
firma-,  strengthen  ;  2.  firmav-,  3. 

Jirmato-. 
firrne,  Jinnly. 
flayita-,  demand  earnestly;  2.fld- 

yitav-,  3.  flayitaio-. 
flfiffi  tioso-,  infamous. 
Flaminio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 


fleet-,  bend;  persuade;  2.  flex-,  3. 


fletu-,  weeping. 

flu  re  n  t(i  )-,  flourishing. 

flos-,  m.  flower. 


270 


VOCABULARY. 


fiucta-,  wave. 

flumen-,  river. 

fluvio,  m.  river. 

/<*/(*)-,  dip  ;  2.  fod~,  3.  fosso-. 

foedes-,  treaty. 

f«  >edo-,  foul  ;  base. 

forma-,  shape  ;  beauty. 

fort-,  /.  chance,  luck. 

forii-,  brave. 

fortiier.  bravely. 

forth  udou-,  bravery. 

foituna-,  fortune. 

foro-,  n.  forum,  market-place. 

fossa-  ditch. 

fra(n)g-,  break  ;  2.  freg-,  3.  fracto-. 

fratr-,  brotfitr. 

fraud-./,  deceit,  guile. 

frauda-,    cheat;     2.  fraudav-,    3. 


frigido-,  coW. 

front(i)-,  /  forehead;  front  ;  face. 

fructu-,  fruit,  profit. 

frumentario-,  relating  to  corn. 

frumento-,  corn,  grain. 

f  rustra,  in  vain. 

fujfji-,  flight 

fuga-,  put  to  flight  ;  2.  fugav-,  3. 

fugdto-. 
fug(i}-,  flee,  avoid;  2.  fug-,  3.  fu- 

gito-. 

fugient(i)-.  fleeing. 
fujritlvo-,  fugitive. 
fulci',  prop  up  ;  2.  fuls-,  3.  fulto-. 
fulmen-,  1hund&l«>U. 
funali-,  n.  curd;  torch. 
/«(n)rf-,  pour  ;  shed  ;  rout  ;  2.  fud-, 

3.  /ww-. 

funditor-.  sh'nger. 
Jung-,  discharge  (abl);  Z.functo-. 
funesto-,  deudly. 
fur-,  c.  thief. 

fu  rcula-.  //7-A;  ;  narrow  pas*. 
Furio-,  a  Komon  clan-name. 
futuro-,  abmtt  to  be. 
Gabio-,  m.  pi.  a  town  of  Lotium. 
Gjilatia-,  a  country  of  Asia  Minor. 
Pallia-,  Gaul  (the  country). 
Gallo-,  Gaul  (the  people). 


palllna-,  hen. 

gaudt-,  (semi-dep.)  rejoice ;  3.  guvl- 

so-. 

gaudio-,  w.  joy. 
gen  lino-,  twin. 
genero-,  sott-in-law. 
genes-,  race,  kind,  sort. 
geut(i)-, /  clan;  nation. 
genu-,  n.  knee. 
geometria-,  gtometry. 
gtr-,   bear ;  carry  on ;  2.  gess-,  3. 

get>to-. 

Germiino-,  German, 
gesta-,  carry ;  2.  geatav-,  2.  gestato-. 
gesto-,  carried  on ;  ptrformtd. 
gign-,  beget;  bring  forth;  2.  genu-, 

3.  genito-. 

gladiator-,  gladiator. 
gladiatorio-,  gladiatorial. 
gladio-,  m.  sword. 
gloria-,  glory. 
gnavo-,  industrious. 
gradu-.  step. 
gramen-,  grass. 
grammatica-,  grammar. 
grandi-,  great. 
gratia-,  pi.  thanks. 
grato-,  plta*ing. 
gravi-,  weiyhty ;  serious. 
graviter,  heavily,  severely. 
greg-,  m.  flock, 


Habe-,  have,  hold;  consider;  2. 
habu-,  3.  habi'o-. 

hal»ili-,  handy;  t<uitfible. 

habifa-,  dwell ;  2.  habitav-,  3.  hab- 
itato-. 

haere-,  stick,  cling  to ;  2.  hoes-,  3. 
haeso-. 

Plamilear-,  a  Carthaginian  general. 

Hannibal-,  a  Cart/taginian  gtntrai 

hasta-,  t=ptar. 

haud,  not. 

hauri-,  draw  (water,  &c.);  swal- 
low; 2.  haus-,  3.  hausto-. 


VOCABULARY. 


271 


Helve  I  io-,  pi.  tJw people  of  Helvetia, 

(Switzerland), 
lie  red-,  c.  heir. 

Herennio-,  a  Samnite  general. 
liibenio,  n.  pi.  winter-quarters. 
li  ic,  litre. 

liiein-, /.  winter]  storm, 
hiema-,  pass  the  winter;  2.  hiemdv-, 

3.  hieniato-. 

Hierosoljrmo-,  n.  pi.  Jerusalem. 
hinc,   hence ;   on  this  side ;    after 

this. 

hirundon-,/  swallow. 
Hispariia-,  Spain. 
ho-,  titis;  the  latter. 
hodie,  to-day. 
homon-,  c.  man. 
horiestat-,  honor;  character. 
honesto,  honorable. 
honor-,  respect,  honor;  high  office. 
honoritice,  honorably. 
hora-,  hour;  time. 
Horatio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
horto-,  m.  garden. 
hospet-,  m.  stranger. 
hosti-,  c.  enemy. 
hostlli  ,  hostile. 
Hostllio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
hue,  hither. 
humano-,  human, 
humecia-,   moisten;    2.  humectdv-, 

3.  humectdtO'. 
humero-,  m.  shoulder. 
huraili-,  low. 


/-,  go ;  2.  IV-,  3.  i'o-. 

Ibero-,  the  river  Ebro,  in  Spain. 

ibi,  thvre. 

ic*,    strike;    ratify;    2.    — '• — ,    3. 

icto-. 

ictu-,  blow. 
idoneo-,  suitable. 
i<«;itur,  therefore. 
ignaro-,  ignorant. 


ignavo-,  idle. 
ig'neo-,  fiery. 
igni-,  m.fire. 
ignora-.  be  ignorant;  2.  igndrav-, 

3.  ignorato-. 
ignoration-,  ignorance, 
ignosc-,  pardon,  (dal.)  2.  igndv-,  3. 

ignoto-. 

illo-,  that,  yonder;  the  former. 
illustri-,  illustrious. 
imbri-,  m.  shower. 
imitation-,  imitation. 
immani-,  savage, 
immine-,  impend, 
immortali-,  immortal. 
impatient(i)-,  impatient, 
impcdi-,  hinder;    2.  impedlv-,    3. 

impedlto-. 

impedlmento-,  pi.  baggage, 
impell-,  impel;    2.   impul-,  3.   im- 

pulso-. 

impende-,  be  imminent. 
impera-,  put  upon ;  command;  (dat.) 

2.  imperav-,  3.  imperato-. 
imperato-,  n.  command. 
imperator-,  general. 
imperatorio-,  belonging  to  a  general. 
imperio-,  n.  supreme  authority ;  em- 
pire. 

impetu-,  attack, 
impon-,  place  upon ;  impose  (dat.) ; 

2.  imposu-,  3.  imposito-. 
imporla-,  import;  2.  importdv-,  3. 

imporldto-. 
imprim-,  impress;  2.  impress-,  3. 

impresso-. 
improba-,  reject ;  2.  improbdv-,  3. 

improbdto-. 
improbo-,  wicked. 
improviso-,  unforeseen. 
itnprudent(i)-,  imprudent. 
impunitat-,  impunity. 
in,  into  (ace.),  in,  on  (abl.). 
inani-,  empty;  useless, 
incend-,   set  on  tire;  2.  — " — ,  3. 

incenso-. 

incendio-,  n.  conflagration. 
incerto-,  uncertain. 


272 


VOCABULARY. 


inchoa-,  begin  ;  2.  inchodv-,  3.  in- 

chodto-. 
incid-,  fall  in  (with);  2.  —  "—  ,  3. 

incaso-. 
incita-,  urge  on;  2.  incitav-,  3.  tn- 


incitato-, 

includ-,  shut  in;  2.  indus-,    3. 


/-,  dwell  in  ;  2.  incolu-. 
incola-,  inhabitant. 
incolumi-,  *o/e. 
incoramodo-,  w.  Zo.<?.5. 
incredibili-,  incredible. 
inde,  thence. 
indlc-,  declare;    2.  tncfac-,   3.  «n- 

dicto-. 
indica-,  disclose  ;  2.  indicav-,  3.  tV 


in  dies,  daily. 

indue-,  lead  in,  introduce  ;  2.  t'n- 

dwa>,  3.  inducto-. 
industria-,  activity. 
inermi-,  unarmed. 
infanii-,  infamous. 
infant(i)-,  infant. 
infecto-,  unfinished. 
infer-,  bring  in  ;  2.  intul-,  3.  ittato-. 
inferior-,  lower. 
inferno-,  low,  infernal. 
infesta-,  infest;  2.  infestdv-,  3.  in- 

festdto-. 

infesto-,  hostile. 
infideli-,  faithless. 
infimo-,  lowest. 
infinito-,  immense. 
inf  inlto-,  n.  immense  quantity. 
infring-,   break;    enfeeble;    2.  in- 

freg-,  3.  infracto-. 
ingenio-,  n.  character. 
ingent(i)-,  huge. 

ingenuo-,  free-horn  ;  honorable. 
inyrtd(i)-,  enter  ;  advance  ;  3.  in- 

gresso-. 

ini-,  go  into  ;  2.  iriiv-,  3.  inito-. 
iniruico-,  hostile;  memy. 
inique,  untqually,  unjustly. 
inlquo-,  unequal;  disadvantageous. 


initio-,  n.  beginning. 
injuria-,  icrong,  injury. 
injusto-,  unjust. 
innocent(i)-,  harmless. 
inopia-,  want,  indigence, 
insequ-,  follow  upon  ;  3.  insecuto-. 
insidia-,  pi.  amlnt^h;  plots. 
insigni-,  distinguished. 
insipiept(i)-,  unwise. 
insolent(i)-,  arrogant. 
insolenter,  arrogantly. 
insomni-,  without-deep,  sleepless, 
institu-,  resolve ;  appoint ;  2.  — ''-*-. 

3.  instituto-. 
instru-,  arrange;  contrive;    2.  in- 

strux-,  3.  instructo-. 
Insubr-,  Insubrian. 

insula-,  island. 

de  integro,  anew. 

intellig-,    understand;    2.  intelkx-, 

3.  intellecto-. 
in  ten  to-,  attentive. 

inter,  (ace.)  between,  among. 

intercip(i}-,    intercept;    carry  off; 
2.  intercfp-,  3.  intercepto-. 

interdum,  sometimes. 

interea.  meanwhile. 

interl'ectOr-,  murderer. 

inttrfic(i)-,  slay;  2.  interfec-,  3.  in- 
terfecto-. 

interim,  meanwhile. 

interim-,  destroy ;    2.  interim,-,  3. 
inlerempto-. 

interjecto-,  interposed. 

intermitl-,  interrupt,  omit;    2.  in- 
termls-,  3.  intermisso-. 

interneeion-,  extermination. 

interregno-,  n.  interregnum. 

interroga-,    ask;  2.  interrogdv-,  3. 
intcrrogato-. 

interveni-,   come  between,  occur ; 

2.  interval-,  3.  intervento-. 
intra,  within  (ace.). 

intra-,  enter;  2.  ir<trdv-,  3.  intrdto-. 
intue-,  behold  ;  3.  intuito-. 
inusitato-,  unusual 
invdd-,  go  into;  invade;  2. invas-, 

3.  invaso-. 


VOCABULARY. 


273 


inveni-,  discover,   find;    2.  invcn-, 

3.  invento-. 
invicern,  mutually. 
invlso-,  hated. 
ipwo-,  self,  very. 
Ira-,  anger. 
Irato-,  angry, 
irride-,  laugh  at;  2.  irrls-,  3.  irrl- 

so-. 

isto-,  #totf  (near  you). 
ka,  £7iws.  so. 
Italia-,  Itnly. 
Italico-,  Italian  (adj ). 
Italo-,  Italian,  (noun), 
itaque,  therefore. 
itiner-,  n.  road,  march,  n.  and  a.  5. 

iter. 
iterutn,  a  second  time. 


Jure-,  lie;  l.jacu-,  B.jacito-. 
jac(i)-,  tli row;  2.jfc-,  S.jacto-. 
jacula-,  hurl;  B.jaculato-. 
jam,  now. 
Janiculo-,  n.  a  hill  on  the  west  side 

of  Rome. 
j~juno-,  hungry. 

joi-o-,  m.  (also  n.  in  pi.)  joke,  jest. 
Jov-,  Jupiter,  n.  s.  Jupiter. 
jube-,  hid;  2.juw-,3.jusso-. 
jucundo-,  pleasant. 
Judaea-.,  Judea. 
j  udec-,  jury-man ;  judge, 
judica-, judge;  Z.judicav-,  3.  judi- 

cato-. 

judicio-,  n.  judgment. 
jugo-,  n.  yoke. 

Jugurtha-,  a  king  of  Numidia. 
j  amen  to-,  beast  of  burden, 
jung-,  join,  unite;  Z.junoc-,  3.junc- 

to-. 

JQiiio-.  a  Roman  clan-name. 
junior-,  younger. 

jiira-,  swear;  2.jurav-,  S.jurato-. 
jus-,  n.  right,  laio. 
jussu,  by  order. 
justo-,  just,  upright.  « 


juva-,  aid;  2.juv-,  B.juto-. 
juveni-.  young ;  a  youth. 
Juvencio-,  a  Roman  general. 
juxta,  near  to  (ace.)  equally. 


L.  short  for  Lucio-. 

lab-,  slip,  fall;  3.  lapse-. 

Labieno-,  one  of  Caesar's  officers. 

labor-,  labor. 

labora-,    labor;     be   afflicted;    2. 

labdrav-,  3.  labordto-. 
Lacedaemonio-,  Lacedaemonian. 
lacryma-,  tear. 
lact-,  n.  milk. 
lacu-,  m.  lake. 
laeto-,  joyful. 
lapid-,  in.  stone. 
largiter,  in  abundance. 
late,  widely. 
lates-,  side. 

La  tine,  in  a  Latin  way. 
Latino-,  Latin;  Latinus. 
La  tin-,  n.part  of  Italy. 
latitudon-,  breadth. 
lato-,  broad. 
latratu-,  a  barking. 
latron-,  robber. 
land-,  /.  praise, 
lauda-,  praise;  2.  laudav-,  3.  lau- 

ddto- 

laudabili-,  praiseworthy. 
Lavlnia-,  a  woman's  name. 
Lavinio-,  n.  a  town  of  Lalium. 
leg-,  /.  law ;  condition, 
leg-,  gather;  select;  read;  2.  leg-, 

3.  lecto-. 

legation-,  embassy. 
legato-,  lieutenant;  ambassador. 
legion-,  legion. 
legionario-,  legionary. 
lepos-,  m.  worn.  s.  lepus,  hare. 
letali-,  deadly. 
levi-,  light;  insignificant. 
libenter,  willingly, 
llbera-,  set  free;  2.  llberdv-,  3.  H- 

berato-. 


274 


VOCABULARY. 


libere,  freely. 

libero-,  free. 

libero-,  TO  pi.  children. 

llbertat-.  liberty. 

libro-,  m.  book. 

lice-,  be  allowed  ;  (impers.)  2.  lieu-, 

3.  lidto-. 
ligneo-,  of  wood. 
Lijjus-.  Ligurian. 
Lilyhaeo-.  «.  Hie  western  promontory 

of  Sicily. 
limen-,  threshold 
Lingon-,  pi.  a  Gallic  tribe. 
lingua-,  tongue. 
lintri-,/  wherry. 
literario-.  literary. 
litera-,  ;*/.  a  letter;  literature. 
lit  os-,  shore. 
loca-,  give  out  a  contract  for:  2. 

locav-,  3.  locato-. 
loco-,  m.  (also  n.  in  pi.)  place  ;  sta- 

tion. 

longe,/ar. 
longo-,  long. 
lorlca-,  breast-plate. 
luc-,/.  1/0M. 

Lucio-.  a  Roman  first  name. 
Lucretia-,  o  ivoma^s  name. 
Lucullo-,  a  Roman  general. 
liido-,  w.  ^aw«  ;  school. 
liige-,  mourn  ;  2.  lux-,  3. 
lumen-,  Z/^/<<. 
lupa-,  she-wolf. 


luscinia-,  nightingale. 
Lusitania-,  Portugal 
lustra-,  review;  2.  luslrdv-,  3.  lus- 

trato-. 
Lutatio-,  a  Roman  dan-name. 


>1.  short  for  Marco-. 

Macedonia-,    a    country  north    of 

Greece. 

Macedonia)-,  Macedonian. 
maeror-,  sorrow. 
maesto-,  sorrowful. 
magis,  more. 


-,  master. 

magistratu-,  magistrate. 

Magnesia-,  a  city  of  Asia  Minor. 

magnifier*-,  magnificent. 

magnitudon-,  grtatntss. 

magno-,  great. 

magnopere,  exceedingly. 

major-,  greater. 

major-,  m.  pi.  ancestors. 

maledico-,  scurrilous. 

malo-,  bad. 

malo-,  n.  an  evil. 

man  da-,  enjoin  (dat.) ;  2.  mandav-, 
3.  manduto-. 

mandato-.  n,  direction. 

mane,  in  the  morning. 

inane-,  remain ;  2.  mans-,  3.  man- 
so-. 

Man  Ho-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 

manu-, /.  hand;  band. 

inanitmitt-,  emancipate ;  2.  manu- 
mis-,  H.  manumitmo-. 

Ma  reel  lo-,  a  Roman  family  name. 

Marco-,  a  Roman  first  name. 

mari-,  n.  sta. 

Mario-,  a  Roman  dan-name. 

maritima-,  maritime. 

marito-  husband. 

Marso-,  «  mountain-tribe  of  Italy. 

Mart-,  Mars,  god  of  war. 
'  materia-,  timber. 

matr-,  mother. 

matrimonio-,  n.  marriage. 

mairona-,  matron. 

maiura-,  hasten;    2.  maturav-,  3. 
mdturato-. 

mature,  speedily. 

maturo-.  ripe;  speedy. 

medico-,  m.  physician. 

medio,  middle. 

Meld.v,  pi.  Vie  Meldi. 

melior-,  better. 

mell-,  n.  honey. 

membra-,  n.  limb. 

memor-,  mindful. 

memora-,    mention ;    2.  memorav-, 
3.  memorato-. 

memorabili-,  memorable. 


VOCABULARY. 


275 


memona-,  memory. 

mendlco-,  m.  beggar. 

Menenio-,  a  Roman  clan-name,     is 

mensi-,  m.  month. 

nient,(i)-,  /.  mind. 

mention-,  mention. 

mercator-,  merchant. 

mere-,  earn ;  (act.  and  dep.)  2.  me- 

ru-,  3.  merito-. 

merg-.  sink ;  2.  mers-,  3.  merso-. 
merldiano-,  in  mid-day. 
merito-,  n.  merit;  kindness. 
messi-, /.  harvest 
met.i-.  measure;  3.  m,enso-. 
Metio-,  an  Alban  general, 
metu-,  fear ;  2.  — "— ,  3.  metuto-. 
metu-,  fear, 
migra-,  depart ;  2.  migrdv-,  3.  mi- 

ijrdto-. 

mllet-,  soldier, 
inilita-,  serve  as  a  soldier ;  2.  mlli- 

tdv-,  3.  militdto-. 
militari-,  military. 
militia-,  military  service. 
mille(indecl.)  thousand,  milli-,  n.pl. 

thousands. 

milliario-,  n.  milestone. 
v<ina-,  threaten  (dat.) ;  3.  min&to-. 
mi.iistro-,  m.  servant. 
minor-,  less,  smaller,     minus,  less, 
minu-,  lessen ;  2.  — " — ,  3.  minu- 

to-. 

mlra-,  admire ;  3.  mlrdto-. 
mlrabili-,  admirable. 
miro-,  wonderful, 
misce-.  mix ;  2.  miscu-,  3.  mixto-. 
rnistra-,  deplore  ;  3.  miseralo-. 
misere-,  pity ;  (act.   and  dtp.  also 

impers.)  2.  miseru-,  3.  miserito-. 
misero-,  wretched. 
Mitliridati-,  king  of  Pontus.  n.  s. 

— tes. 
miti-,  mild. 

mii(t)-,  send  ;  2.  mis-,  3.  misso-. 
moderftto-,  in  due  measure. 
modio-,  m.  a  measure;  peck. 
modo,  at  one  time — at  another. 
moeui-,  n.  pi.  walls. 


moeror-,  sorrow. 

molli-,  flexible ;  tender. 

molli-,   make  mild;  2.  molllv-,   3. 

molllto-. 
mone-,  warn,  advise;  2.  monu-,  3. 

monito- 
monstra-,  show;    2.  monstrav-,   3. 

monstrato-. 

mont(i)-,  m.  mountain, 
mora-,  delay;  3.  moralo-. 
mora-,  delay. 
rnorbo-,  m.  disease. 
mor(i)-,  die;  3.  mortuo-, 
morde-,  bite ;  annoy ;  2.  momord-, 

3  morso-. 

Morino-,  pi.  a  Gallic  tribe. 
mort(i)-,  /  death. 
mortali-,  mortal. 
mortuo-j  dead. 
mos-,  m.  custom. 
Mosa-,  the  river  Meuse. 
move-,  move  ;  2.  mdv-,  3.  moto-. 
mox,  soon, 

Mucio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
muliebri-,  womanish. 
mulier-,  woman, 
multa-,  punish ;  fine ;    2.  multdv-, 

3.  multato-. 

multitudon-,  multitude. 
multo-,  much;  many. 
multo,  by  much. 
Mummio-,  a  Roman  general. 
munes-,  gift, 
muni-,  fortify;  2.  munlv-,  3.  munl- 

to-. 

munifieo-,  bountiful. 
munition-,  fortification. 
m  unlto-,  fortified. 
murmur-,  n.  a  murmuring. 
muro-,  m.  wall, 
muta-,  change ;  2.  mutav-,  3.  mu- 

tato-. 


Nabi-,    (also  Nabld-)    tyrant    of 
Sparta. 


2T6 


VOCABULARY. 


nam.  for. 

nancisc;  get;  find;  3.  nacto-. 

narra-,  tell ;  2.  narrav-,  3.  narra- 
te-. 

narration-,  narrative. 

nnsc-,  be  born ;  3.  note-. 

nation-,  nation. 

natu,  in  birth. 

natura-,  nature. 

nauta-,  sailor. 

navali-,  naval. 

navi-,  /.  ski}). 

navicula-,  600*. 

navigation-,  voyage. 

ne,  lest,  that — not. 

nee,  neither,  nor. 

necessario-,  necessary. 

neeesse,  necessary. 

neeessitat-,  necessity. 

nega-.  deny,  refuse;  2.  negav-,  3. 
negate-. 

negotio-,  n.  affair,  business. 

ntmon-,  iio  one. 

nemos-,  grove. 

nepot-,  grandson. 

Neptuno-,  Neptune,  god  of  the  sea. 

neque,  neither,  nor. 

Nicomedi-,  king  of  Bitiiynia,  n.  s. 
— des. 

Digro-,  black. 

nihil,  notiiing. 

Kilo-,  the  river  Nile. 

nimium,  too  much. 

nisi,  unless. 

niv-,  /.  nom.  s.  nix,  snow. 

nobili-,  noble. 

nobilitat-,  nobility. 

noce-,  harm  (dot.};  2.  nocu-,  3.  no- 
cito-. 

noct(i)-,  /.  night 

noctu,  by  night. 

nocturno-,  nightly. 

nolr,  be  unwilling;  2.  ntlu-. 

nomen-,  name. 

nomina-,  name;  2.  noininav-,  3. 
nominate-. 

non,  not. 

Honagesimo-,  ninetieth. 


uondnm,  not  yet 

nonnullo-,  some. 

nono-,  ninth. 

nostro-,  our. 

nota-,  note ;  observe ;  2.  notdv-,  3. 

notato-. 
noto-.  knotcn. 
novem,  nine. 
novissimo-,  rearmost 
novo-,  new. 
nub-,  veil ;  marry  (a  husband)  (dat.) ; 

2.  nups-,  3.  nupta-. 
nnllo-,  none. 

Kuma-,  the  second  king  of  Eome. 
Kumantia-,  a  city  in  Spuin. 
Numantino-,  pL  the  people  of  Nu- 

mantia. 

numen-,  divinity. 
numero-,  m.  'number. 
Kumitor-,  Numiter. 
Knmida-,  Numidian. 
Kuuiidia-,  Numidia. 
nunc,  now. 
nuncupa-,  name ;  2.  nuncupdv-,  3. 

nuncupdto-. 
nunquam,  never, 
nuntia-,  report ;  2.  nuntiav-,  3.  nun- 

tiote-. 

nuntio-,  77i.  messenger;  message. 
nuper,  lately, 
nutri-,  nourish;  2.  nutrlv-,  3.  720- 

trite-. 

nutric-,  nurse. 
nympha-,  nymph. 


Ob,  on  account  of  (ace.). 

obidi-,  obey  (dat) ;    2.  obcdlv-,   3 

obedlte-. 

obedient(i)-.  obedient, 
obequita-,  ride  towards ;  2.  obequi- 

tav-,  3.  obequitato-. 
obi-,  go  towards;  encounter;  die; 

2.  oblv;  3.  obite-. 
obliga-,  bind  down ;  oblige ;  2.  06- 

ligav;  3.  obligate-. 


VOCABULARY. 


oUlvisc-,  forget ;  (gen.)  3.  dbllto-. 

oblito-,  forgttfal. 

oblivion-,  forget  fulness. 

obru-,  overwhelm  ;  2.  — " — ,  3.  ob- 

ruto-. 
»       obsecra-,  beseech;  2.  obsecrdv-,    3. 

obsecrdto-. 
obsed-,  c  hostage, 
obside-,  blockade;  2.  obscd-,  3.  ob- 

sesso-. 

obsidion-,  siege. 
oUempera-,  comply  with  (dat.) ;  2. 

obtemperdv-,  3.  obten>perdto-. 
obtesta-,  conjure;  3.  oblesldto-. 
oblitie-,  retain  ;  gain ;  prevail ;  2. 

obtinu-,  3.  obttnlo-. 
obviam,  in  the  way. 
occasion-,  Jit  occasion, 
occlil-,  kill ;  2.  — " — ,  3.  occlso-. 
occulta-,   conceal ;    2.   occultdv-,   3. 

oixultato-. 
occulte,  s-crdly. 
occupa-,  seize ;  take  possession  of; 

2.  occupav-,  3.  occupato-. 
occur-,  run   to  meet,  meet  (dat.)] 

2. — " — ,  oroccucurr-,  3.  occurso-. 
oceano-,  m.  ocean. 
Octaviano-,    the  first  Roman   em~ 

peror. 

octavo-,  eighth. 
oc  tin  gen  to-,  eight  hundred. 
octo,  eight. 
octoginta,  eighty. 
octogesimo-,  eightieth. 
oculo-,  m.  eye. 
2.  6d-,  hate, 
odio-,  n.  hatred. 

o/er-,  offer ;  2.  obtul-,  3.  oblato-. 
officio-.  n.  duty. 

olim,  in  yonder  time;  formerly. 
omen-,  omen, 
omitt-,  leave  off;  2.  omls-,  3.  omis- 

so-. 

omni-,  all. 
omnlno,  wholly. 
onerario-,  fit  for  burden. 
ones-,  burden. 

op-,  /.  power ;  in  plur.  wealth. 
24 


opes-,  work. 

opinion-,  opinion. 

oppidano-,  townsman. 

oppido-,  n.  town. 

oppon-,  set   against  (dat.)  ;    2.  op- 

posu-,  3.  opposite-. 
opportuno-,  opportune,  suitable. 
opprim-.  overwhelm;    2.  oppress-, 

3.  oppr&iso-. 
oppugna-,    assault  ;    2.    oppugnav-, 

3.  oppugnato-. 
oppugnation-,  storming. 
opta-,  desire  ;   2.  optav-,  3.  optdto-. 
optimo-,  best. 
option-,  choice. 
ora-,  coast. 

ora-,  pray  ;  2.  orav-,  3.  ordto-. 
oration-,  speech. 
orator-,  orator. 
orbi-,  m.  world. 
ordina-j   arrange;    2.  ordinav~,   3. 


ordon-,  m.  row,  rank. 

Orgetorig-,  a  Helvetian  chief. 

ori-,  arise;  3.  orto-. 

Orient-,  m.  the  East. 

orna-,  adorn  ;  2.  ornav-.  3.  ornate-. 

ornarnento-,  ornament. 

ostend-,  point  out,  show  ;  2.  —  "  —  , 

3.  ostenso-  or  ostento-. 
Ostia-,  ajpwn  at  the  mouth  of  the 

Tiber. 

ostio-,  n.  entrance;  mouth. 
otioso-,  disengaged,  idle. 
6vi-,  /.  sheep. 
ovlli-,  n.  sheepfold. 
ovo-,  n.  egg. 


P.  short  for  Public-. 

pfibulo-,  n.  fodder. 

pac-,  /.  peace. 

Pado-,  the  river  Po. 

paene,  almost. 

paenula-,  cloak. 

pago-,  m.  canton,  district. 

pani-,  m.  bread. 

Paplrio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 


278 


VOCABULARY. 


para-,  prepare;  provide;  l.parav-, 

'2.  paratit-. 

para  to-,  prepared,  ready. 
pure-,   spare  (<&//.);    2.  peperc-,  3. 

parcitn-  or  parso-. 
pare-,  obey  (dat.)  ;  2.  paru-,  3.  pdr- 

ito-. 

parent(i)-,  parent. 
P'ir(i)-,  bring  forth  ;  2.  peper-,  3. 


pariet-,m.w;aK(of  a  house),  nom.  s. 


part(i)-,  /.  port  ;  side  ;  pi  party. 

partim,  partly. 

parutnper,  a  little  while. 

parvo-,  little. 

passim,  in  various  places. 

passu-,  puce. 

pastor-,  .shepherd. 

pate-,    be   open,  be  plain  ;  2.  pa~ 

tu-. 
paltfac(i)-  throw  open  ;  Z.palefic-, 

3.  ptitejat-to-. 
paterno-,  fatherly. 
pu  t(  i  )-,  su  ft'e  r  ;  3  .  passo-. 
pair-,  fatittr;  senator. 
patria-,  native  country. 
patriinonio-,  n.  patrimony. 
patrueli-,  in.  cousin. 
paucitat-,  fewness. 
PJIUCO-,  few. 
pauliliiin,  by  degrees. 
paulo-,  n.  a  little.     ' 
pauper-,  poor. 
paupertat-,  poverty. 
pavor-.  panic. 
pecutiia-,  sum  of  money. 
peeos-,  small  cuttle. 
ped-,  m.  nom.  .s.  pes,  foot. 
pedi*t-,  foot'Snldier. 
peditatu-,  infantry. 
Ptliirtio-,  pi  a  tribe  in  Italy. 
pdl-,  push  ;  drive  ;  Z.pepul-,  3.  pul- 

SO-. 

pelli-./.  skin. 

ptllic(i)-,  allure  ;  2.  pellex-,  3.  pel- 

lecto-. 
Peloponneso-,  the  Morea. 


pend-,   weigh  ;    pay  ;    2.  pepend-, 

3.  penso-. 
penetra-,  penetrate  ;    2.  penetrav-, 

3.  ptndrdto-. 
pe  1  1  i  t  u  s,  th  orough  ly. 
per.  through  (ace.). 
perug-,  rany  through,   complete; 

2.  pcreg-,  3.  peiacttt-. 
percurr-,   run   through;   2    —  "  —  , 

or  perrucurr-,  3.  ptrcurso-. 
percussor-,  assassin. 
percut(i)-,   strike  ;    2.  percuss-,    3. 

pen/not*-. 
pent-,   destroy;    lose;    2.  perdid-, 

3.  perdito-. 

peiduc-,  lead  through  ;  2.  perdux-, 

3.  perducto-. 
perenni-,  constant. 
pcrfer-,  endure  ;  2.  pertul-,  3.  per- 

lato-. 
perfic(i)-t  finish  ,  2.  perfec-,  3.  per- 

fecto-. 

perri»l:a-,  treachery. 
perluga-,  deserter. 
perg-,  go  on  ;  Z.perrex-,  3.  perrec- 

to-. 
perhorresc-,  fear   greatly;    2. 


peri-,   perish  ;    2.   periv-,    3. 

to-. 

periculo-,  n.  danger. 
perlculoso-,   dangerous. 
peritia-,  skitt. 
peri  to-,  skilled. 
permane-,  remain;  2.  permans-,  3. 

ptrmauso-. 
permisct-,  mix  together;    2.  per- 

misf.u-,  3.  permixto-, 
permiit-,  permit  ;  give  up;  2.  per- 

mis-,  3.  pemnisto-. 
permoto-,  alarmed. 
permove-,  prevail  upon  ;  alarm  :  2 

permov-,  3.  pernioto-. 
permuta-,  exchange  ;  2.  permutdv  , 

3.  permiitdto. 
permutation-  change. 
pernicie-,  destruction. 
pernicioso-,  destructive. 


VOCABULARY. 


279 


perrump-,  burst  through  ;  2.  per- 

rup-,  3.  perrupto-. 
Perseo-,  a  king  of  Macedonia. 
persequ-,  pursue  ;  3.  persecute-. 
perspic(i)-,  observe  thoroughly;  2. 

perspex-.  3.  perspecto-. 
persuade-,  persuade  (dal.)  ;  2.  per- 

6-was-,  3.  persadso-. 
perlerre-,    alarm  ;    2.  perterru-,    3. 


perterrito-,  alarmed. 

pertimesc-,  fear  greatly;  Z.pertimu-. 

pertiniieia-,  obstinacy. 

pertarba-,  disturb  ;  2.  perlurbdv-, 

3.  perturbdior. 
perveni-,  reach  ;  2.  perven-,  3.  jper- 


2>e£-,  go  to  :  seek  ;  beg  ;  2.  petlv-, 

S.petito-. 

Phar.salo-,  /.  a  city  in  Thessaly. 
Phitippo-,  a  king  of  Macedonia. 
Philip  DO-,  m.  pi.  a  city  of  Mace- 

donia. 

philos'iphia-,  philosophy. 
pbtluHOpho*,  m.  philosopher. 
Pieeuo-.  n.  Picenum,  a  part  of  Italy. 
I'Icent(i)-,  pi.  the  people  of  Picenum. 
pit-  Uil-,  piety. 
pigro-,  slothful. 
plleo-,  m.  cap. 
p;lo-,  n.  javelin. 

ping-,  paint;  2.  pinx-,  S.picto-. 
plrilta-,  pirate. 
piscator-,  fisherman. 
pldca-,  „  appease  ;  subdue  ;  2.  pld- 

cdv-,  3.  piacdto-. 
place-,    please    (dat.)',    be    deter- 

mined ;  2.  placu-,  3.  placilo-. 
plaeido-,  calm,  peaceful. 
pleb-,  /.  the  common  people. 
plero-que,  pi.  most  men. 
piGruiuque,  generally. 
plurimo-,  very  many. 
plus-,  more  ;  several. 
poena-,  punishment. 
Poeno-,  Carthaginian. 
poeta-,  poet. 
•yoii-,  polish  ;  2.  pollv-,  3.  pollto-. 


pollice-,  promise ;  3.  pollicito-. 

pom  pa-,  procession. 

Pompeio-,  a  Roman  general. 

pdn-,  place ;  2.  posy-,  3.  posito-. 

pondes-,  weight',  importance. 

pont(i)-,  TO.  bridge. 

Poiitio-,  a  Samuite  general. 

Poii  to-,  m.  a  country  of  Asia  Minor. 

popida-,  lay  waste  ;  3.  populato-. 

populo-,  m.  people. 

Porsena-,  a  king  of  Etruria. 

porta-,  gate. 

porta-,  carry ;  2.  portdv-,    3.  por- 

tdto-. 
portend-,  foretell ;  2.  — " — ,  3.  por- 

tento-. 

portu-,  harbor, 
pose-,  demand;  2.  poposc-. 
posside-,  possess ;  Z.possed-,  B.pos- 


post,  after,  behind,  (ace.) 

postea,  afterwards. 

posthabe-.  esteem  less;  2.posthabu-t 

3.  posthabito-. 
post-qua  in,  after  that. 
postero  ,  next. 
postero-,  m.  pi.  posterity. 
po.streuio-,  last. 
po*tuli-,  demand;  2. postuldv-,  3. 

postulate-. 

Postumio-,  a  Roman  clan-name, 
potes-,  be  able ;  2.  potu-. 
potent(i)-,  powerful. 
potestat-,  power, 
poti-,   become  master  of,  (gen.  or 

aid,};   3.  potito-. 
potius,  rattier. 
potissimum.  chiefly. 
prae,  before  (abl.). 
praeacuto-,  pointed  at  one  end. 
praebe-,  oiler;  furnish;  exhibit;  2. 

praebu-,  3.  praebito-. 
praeced-,  go  before ;  2.  praecess-, 

3.  praecesso-. 

praecepto-,  n.  instruction. 
praeceptor-,  teacher. 
praecip(i)-,  teach;    command;    2, 

praecep-,  3.  praecepto-. 


280 


VOCABULARY. 


praecipita-,  cast  headlong  ;  Z.prae- 

cijiitdv-,  3.  praecipitato-. 
praecipuo-,  especial,  chief. 
praeclare,  exctttentty. 
praeda-,  booty. 
praedica-,  declare  aloud  ;    2.  prae- 

dicav-,  3.  praedicato-. 
praees-,  be  over  (dat.)  ;  2.  praefu-. 
praetecto-,  commander. 
praejtr-,  bear  iu  front;  prefer;    2. 

praetul;  3.  praelato-. 
pntejic(<)~,  'place    over   (dot.)]    2. 

prarftc-,  3.  pratfecto-. 
praemio-,  n.  reward. 
praemitt-,   send   before;    2.  proe- 

witA--,  3.  praem.is.~o-. 
praeparation-,  preparation. 
pruepdn-,    place    over    (dat.)-    2. 

pruepoGu-,  3.  praepositu-. 
praernpto-,  abrupt. 
praesidio-,  n.  protection  ;  garrison  ; 

fort. 
prae*ta-,  show  ;  furnish  ;    2.  prae- 

atit-,  3.  pruestito-. 
praesiaut(i)-,  excellent 
praeier,  beyond,  bcsule  (ace.). 
praeteri-,  jiass  by;  2.  praetetiv-,  3. 


pro,  before,  instead  of,  on  account 


praeterquam,  except. 
praetor-,  praetor,  judge. 
praetGrio-,  of  praetorian  rank. 
praevide-,  see  beforehand;  2.  prae- 

vld-,  3.  praeviao-. 
prato-,  ».  meadow. 
pravo-,  depraved. 
pi-ec-,  /  j»-«yer. 
prem-,  press;  2.  press-,    3.  jpres- 

so-. 

pretio-,  n.  price. 
pretioso-,  valuable, 
primo-,  first. 
primum,  firstly. 

quain  piiminii,  as  soon  aspossibk. 
princep-,  chief. 
pri  nci  patu-,yirs^  place. 
prius,  btfore. 
priusquam,  sooner  than. 
privalo-,  private. 


probe,  icelL 

probiiat-,  if  tegrity. 

probo-,  upright. 

procid-,  go  forward  ;  2.  process-.  3. 


proclivi-,  prone. 

proconsul-,  proconsul. 

procul,  atadistunce. 

prdcura-,  attend  to  ;  2.  procuruv-, 

3  procurdto-. 
prod-,  give  up,  betray;   2.  prddid-, 

3.  prodtto-. 
prOiks-,  be  profitable  to  (oZa/.)  ;  2. 


prodi-,  go  forward  ;  2.  prodlv-,   3. 


prodigio-,  n.  prodigy. 

proditor-,  traitor. 

produc-,  lead  forth  ;  2.  produx-,  3. 


proelio-,  n.  battle. 

prqficisc-,  set  out,  march  ;  3.  pro- 

jecto-. 

profug(i)-,  flee  away  ;  2.  prof  fig-. 
p)ogred(i)-,  go  forward,  advai.ce; 

3.  progre*$o-. 
prohibe-,  keep  off;  check;  2.  pro- 

hibu-,  3.  prohibito-. 
proli-,/.  no/u.  5.  proles,  offspring. 

promise  ;   2.  prOims-,  3. 


promontorio-,  n.  headland. 
propaga-,  propagate;  extend;  2. 

propayav-,  3.  propagato-. 
propera-,  hasten;  2.  properav-,  3. 


propon-,  set  forth,  propose  ;  2. 

posu-,  3.  prdposdo-. 
propter,  n^-ar;  o/i  account  of  (ace.). 
proscrlb-  proscribe  ;  3.  proacrips-, 

3.  proficripto-. 
prostqu-,  pursue,  follow  ;  3.  prose- 

cuto-. 

prospere,  prosperously. 
prot<pic(i)-,  provide  for  (dat.)  ;    2. 

prospex-,  3.  prospecto-. 


VOCABULARY. 


281 


protrah-,  protract,  defer;  2.  pro- 

trax-j  3.  protracto-. 
provincia-,  province, 
provoca-,  challenge ;    2.  prdvocav-, 

3.  provocato-. 
provocation-,  a  challenge. 
proximo-,  nearest,  next. 
prudent(i)-  prudent. 
prudenter,  prudently. 
prudentia-,  prudence. 
publico-,  public. 
Publicola-,   a  man's  name.   prop. 

people's  friend. 
Publio-,  a  Roman  first  name, 
pude-  (impers.),  cause  shame ;    2. 

pudu-,  3.  pudito-. 
pueila-,  girl. 
puerlli-,  boyish. 
puerltia-,  boyhood. 
puero-,  boy. 
pugna-,  battle, 
pugna-,   fight ;  2.  pugnav-,  3.  pug- 

nato. 

pulcre,  beautifully. 
pulcro-,  beautiful, 
puni-,  punish ;  2.  pumv-,  3.  puni- 

to-. 

Punico-,  Carthaginian. 
pupillo-,  a  ward, 
pula-,  suppose;  2. putav-,  S.puid- 

to-. 

Pj'dna-,  a  city  in  Macedonia. 
Pyrenaeo-,  m.  pi.  the  Pyrenees. 
Pyrrho-,  a  king  of  Epirus. 


Q.  short  for  Quinto-. 
quadraj?esimo-,  fortieth. 
quadraginta.  forty. 


quatr-,  seek  ;  2.  quaesiv-,  3.  quae- 

slto-. 

quaestor-,  quaestor. 
quali-,  of  what  kind,  as. 
quam,  how;  as;  than. 
quamdiu,  oniony  as. 
quanquam,  although. 
24* 


quanto-.  how  great;  as. 

quare,  wherefore. 

quarto-,  fourth. 

quasi,  as  if. 

quat(i)-.  shake;  2.  none;  3.  quas- 

so-. 

quatuor,  four.  . 

quiituordeciin,  fourteen. 
que  (enclit.),  and. 
quer-,  complain ;  3.  questo~. 
quia,  because. 
quidern,  indeed. 
quiet-,  /  rest. 
quit-to-,  quiet. 

Quinctio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
quindecim,  fifteen. 
quing-entesiino-,  five-hundredth. 
quiugento-,  five  hundred. 
quinquagesimo-,  fiftieth. 
quinquaginta,  fifty. 
quinque,  five, 
quiuto-,  fifth. 

Quinto-.  a  Roman  first  name. 
quinto,  for  the  fifth  time. 
Quirit(i)-,  m.  Roman. 
quo,  whither ;  by  how  much. 
quo-,  who,  what. 
quocumque,  whithersoever. 
quod,  because. 
quo-dam,  certain;  some. 
quo-nam,  who?  which f 
quo-quam,  any  single  one. 
quomodo,  how. 
quondam,  formerly. 
quo-que,  each. 
quoque,  also. 
quot,  how  many. 
quotannls,  every  year. 
quotldie,  daily. 
quum,  when;  since. 


Eamo-,  m.  bough. 

rap(i)-,  seize ;  2.  rapu-,  3.  rapto-. 

rapido-,  rapid. 

raptim,  hastily. 


282  VOCABULARY. 

raptor-,  robber.  reliquo-,  remaining. 
rati-,/  boat.  remans;    remain   behind;    2.    re- 
re-,  thing,  circumstance;  event.  mans;  3.  renianso-. 
rebella-,    renew  war;    2.  rtbdldv-.  Bemo-,  brother  of  Ruin ulus. 

3.  rtbellatu-.  lU-mo-,  pi.  a  people  of  Gaul. 

recta4-,  retire;  2.  recess-,  3.  recesso-.  re  mo-,  in.  oar. 

recent(i)-,  recent,  fresh,  reviove-,  remove;  2.  remov;  3.  re- 

receptu-,  retreat,  molo-. 

rtdp(i)  ,    Uike  back  ;    betake  ;  re-  rtnwu;  renew ;   2.  renovdv-,  3.  re- 
ceive ;   2.  recfp-,  3.  receplo-.  novdto-. 
recogiiosf;  call  to  niiud;  2.  recog-  renuntia-,  bring  word  back;  2.  ?-g- 

iidV;  3.  re&ignito-.  iiuntidv-,  3.  reiiuntinto-. 

recrea-,  refresh ;  2.  recredv;  3.  r«-  rcpara-,  repair,   retit;    renew;    2. 

credto-.  repardv-,  3.  reparato-. 

recte,  rightly.  repell-,  thrust  back ;    2.  repwZ-,   3. 

redd-,  give  back;  render;  2.  red-  repulso-. 

did-,  3.  reddUo-.  repente,  suddeitly. 

red-;  return;  3.  redlv-,  3.  redito-.  repentlno-,  sudden, 

redig-,  reduce ;  2.  redeg;  3.  redac-  replt;  till ;  2.  rtpltv-,  3.  replcfo-. 

to-.  repon-,  put  back ;  2.  repoau-,  3.  re- 

redim,;  buy  back;    2.  redem-,  3.  pfisito-. 

redempto-.  reporta-,  carry  back ;  2.  reportuv-, 

reduc-,  lead  back ;  2.  redux-,  3.  re-  3.  reportdto-. 

ducto-.  repose-,  demand  back. 

refer-,    bring  back ;    requite ;    re-  re-  pnblica  ,  the  state. 

port;  2   retul-,  3.  rdutv-.  rrpudia-,  divorce;  2.  repudidv-,  3. 

reji>(i);  repair;  2.  re/iec-,  3.  re/e*  repudiate-. 

to-.  repulso-,  driven  back, 

reflu-.  flow  back ;  2.  reflux-,  3.  re-  rtsarci-,  mend ;  2.  none,  3.  resar- 

fluxo-.  to-. 

refug(i);  flee  back ;  2.  reffig-.  rescind-,  break  down  ;    2.  rescid; 

rtg-,  rule ;  2.  7'ea>,  3.  recto-.  3.  rtsciw-. 

reg-,  A-?W^.  resist-,  stand  -etill ;  resist  (dat.)\  2. 

reglna-,  <^»ie^n.  re*tit-,  3.  restito-. 

regio-,  7<n/oZ.  resjionde-,    answer   (cto£);    2.   ras- 

region-,  country;  district.  pond-.  3.  r*sponso-. 

regna-,  reign ;  2.  reynuv-,  3.  re^n5-  response-,  n.  answer. 

to-.  rtttitu;  restore  ;  2.  — " — ,  3.  resti- 

regno-,  n.  kingdom ;  reign.  tuto-. 

rtgrtd(i)-,  stop  back ;  retire ;  3.  re-  reli-.  net. 

grrssv-.  rtliiic;  hold  back,  keep  ;  2.  retinu-, 

Eegulo-.  a  Roman  general  3.  reteato- 

rejic(i}-,  throw  back  ;  2.  rejec-,  3.  reveni-,  come  back ;    2.  revin-,  3. 

rrjecto-.  rtvento-. 

religion-,  religion.  reverentia-,  reverence, 

relinqu;  leave  behind;   2.  reZl^w-,  rtvert-,  return;  2. — "— ,  3.  rever- 

3.  relicto-.  so-. 

reliquia-,  pi.  remnant.  Rheuo-,  Rhine. 


VOCABULARY. 


283 


Rhodano-,  Rhone. 

ripa-,  bank. 

robor-,  n.  oak;  strength. 

roga-,  ask ;  2.  roguv-,  3.  rogaio-. 

Roma-,  Rome. 

Romano-,  Roman. 

Roinulo,  the  founder  of  Rome. 

ru(m,)p-,  burst;  break;  2.  rup-,  3. 

rujito-. 
ru-,  rush ;  2.  — " — ,  3.  ruito-,  or 

ruto-. 

rursus,  again, 
rus-,  n.  the  country. 
rustico,  rural. 


Sabino-,  pi.  an  Italian  tribe. 

sacerdot-,  c.  priest. 

sacro-,  n.  sacrifice. 

saepe,  often. 

saevi-,   act  cruelly;   2.  saevlv-,  3. 

saevlto-. 

saevo-,  cruel,  savage. 
sagiitario-,  archer. 
Saguntlno-,    pi.  the  people  of  Sa- 

gim  um. 

Sati'iinto-,  n.  a  town  in  Spain. 
Balut-.  safety, 
salata-,  pay  one's  respects  to;    2. 

salatdv-,  3.  salatdto-. 
Samult(i)-,  pi.  an  Italian  tribe. 
sane,  in  truth. 

sanguin-.  m.  nom.s.  sanguis,  blood. 
sano-,  sound 

sap(i)~,  be  wise ;  2.  saplv-. 
sapient(i)-  wixe. 

Sardinia-,  the  island  of  Sardinia. 
salellet-,  r.  life-guard. 
satis,  enough. 
S.'itunio-,  a  heaihen  gnd. 
saucio-,  wounded;  damaged. 
saxo-,  n.  rock. 
Scaevola-,    a  man's  name.   prop. 

kft-Jt  anded. 
scelerdto-,  polluted, 
sceles-,  crime. 
Bcelesto-  vicious. 


schola-,  school. 

set-,  know;  2.  sew-,  3.  sclto-. 

scieti  t  ia-,  knowledge. 

ScTpioti-,  a  Roman  family  name. 

scrlb-,  write  ;   2.  scrips-,  3.  scripto-. 

scrlba-,  m.  secretary. 

sciito-,  n.  shield. 

se-.  him  (her,  if)  sdf,  themselves. 

seced-,  withdi'aw  ;  2.  secess-,  3.  se- 

cesso-. 

secuudo-,  second;  favorable. 
seil.  but. 

sede-,  sit  ;  2.  sed-,  3.  sesso-. 
sedecim,  sixteen. 

sedi-,/.  nom.  s.  sedes,  seat;  home. 
sedlli-,  n.  seat. 
sedition-,  insurrection. 
Seleucia-,  a  city  of  Syria. 
semper,  always. 
sen-,  nom.  s.  seriex,  old  man. 
Sena-,  a  town  in  the  N.  E.  of  Italy. 
senator-,  senator. 
senatu-,  sewite. 
senectut-,  old  age. 
senrentia-,  opinion. 
senti-,  feel;  perceive;  2.  sens-,  3. 


separatini,  separately. 

svpdi-,  bury  ;  2.  sepellv-,  3.  sepulto-. 

septein.  seven. 

septimo-,  seventh. 

septingentesimo-,  seven  hundredth. 

septuagesimo-,  seventieth. 

septuagiuta,  seventy. 

se>iu-,  follow;  3.  secuto-. 

Sjquar:o-,  pi.  a  Gallic  tribe. 

sermon-,  discourse. 

Sertono-,  a  Roman  commander. 

serva-,  keep  ;  2.  servav-,  3.  serva- 

to-. 
servi-,    be  a  slave;    2.  servlv-,   3. 

sei'vlto-. 

Servio-,  the  sixth  king  of  Rome. 
servitut-,  slavery. 
servo-,  m.  slave. 

sese,  a  strengthened  form  o/se,  ace. 
sex,  six. 
sexagesimo-,  sixtieth. 


284 


VOCABULARY. 


sexaginta,  sixty. 
sexeentesimo-,  six  hundredth, 

sexto-,  sixth. 

Si,  iff. 

sic,  so,  thus. 

5icm-,  dry  up;  2.  siccav-,  3.  siccdto-. 

sicc<>-,  rfry. 

Sicilia-,  Sicily. 

Siculo,  Sicilian. 

8\c.ml.ju>it  as. 

significa-,  intimate  ;  2.  significav-, 

3.  siynificato-. 
signo-,  ?i.  5/y/i;  standard. 
silva-,  tt'ood. 
siniiii-.  ZiA*:. 
similitudon-,  likeness. 
siuiul,  ai  tf«e  sa/?<e  time. 
siinulac,  a*  soon  as. 
sine,  without  (abl.). 
singular!-,  6t«^fe ;  extraordinary. 
sinistro-,  on  the.  left  hand',  unlucky. 
Siren-,  f  Siren,  n.  s.  Siren. 
siti-,  be  thirsty ;  2.  sifiv-,  3.  sitlto-. 
socero-,  fatlier-in-law. 
social  i-,  social. 
societal-,  alliance. 
socio-,  ally. 
sol-,  ra.  Me  sun. 
swfe-,  (semi-dep.),  be  accustomed; 

3.  5^/iYo-. 
solo-,  alone. 
solum,  only, 
solv-,  loose ;  set  sail ;  2.  — " — ,  3. 

soluto-. 

somnio-,  n.  dream. 
sono-,  m.  sound. 

soror-,  sister.  [name. 

Sp.  s/i0r//0rSpurio-,  a  Roman  first 
spalio-,  n.  space;  course. 
spe-,  h»pe. 

spet-ie-,  view ;  appearance, 
specta-,  l>e  a  spectator  of;  2.  spec- 

tdv-,  Z.spectatu-. 
speluuea-,  cave. 

spera-,  hope ;  2.  sperav-,  3.  sperato-. 
spcrn-,  despise;  2.  sprev-,  3.  spreto-. 
spolia ,  plunder ;  2.  spolidv-,  3. 


spolio-,  n. 

spotidr.-,  engafre,  promise;    2.  spo- 

pond-^  3.  sponso-. 

sta-,  stand;  cost;  2.  sfeJ-,  3.  stato-. 
statim,  immediately. 
station-,  outpost,  guard. 
statu-,  set  up  ;  resolve  ;  2.  —  "  —  , 

3.  slatiiio-. 
statua-,  statue. 
sterili-.  barren. 
stern-,  strew,  spread  ;  2.  strav-,  3. 

strato-. 

stipet-,  m.  s'ake,  pole. 
stipendio-,  n.  pay  for  service. 
strangula-,  strangle  ;  2.  stranguldv-, 

3.  ttrangulato-. 
strenue,  actively. 
strenuo-,  active. 
strepitu-,  noise. 
stride-,  roar,  creak;  2.  strid-. 
strui-,/.  now.  s.  struts,  htap. 
stude-,  be  eager;  pay  attention  to 

(</•/*.)  ;  2.  studu-. 
studio-,  n.  zeal,  study. 
smite,  fontisklg. 
stulto-,  fixilish.     . 
stupefac(i)-,  astound;    2.  stupefec-, 

3.  stuprfacbt-. 
sudde-,  advise  (dot.)-,   2.  suas-,  3. 


suavi-.  sweet. 

sub,  under. 

subdolo-,  crafty. 

suiduc-,  withdraw;  2.  subdux-,  3. 


subes-,  be  near;  2.  subfu-. 

subi  ,  go  under,  enter  ;    2.  sublv-, 

3.  sulnttt-. 
subig-,  subdue;  2.  subcg-,   3.  sub- 

acto-. 

subsidio-,  n.  succor. 
sulivetii-,  succor  (dot.)  ;  2.  subven-, 

3.  sulvento: 
suc-cessor-,  successor. 
suca  d-,  succeed  to  (dat.)  ;  2.  ««> 

cess-,  3.  successo-. 
succumb-,  give  way;    2. 

3.  succubito-. 


VOCABULARY. 


285 


Sulla-,  a  Roman  general. 

sum-,  take  ;  2.  sumps-,  3.  sumpto-. 

summo-,  highest. 

guo-.  his  (her,  its,  their)  own. 

super,  above,  ace.  or  abl. 

superbia-,  pride. 

superbo-,  proud. 

superior-,  higher;  former. 

supera-,  overcome ;  2,  superav-,  3. 
suptrato-. 

supcres-,  be  above ;  remain ;  sur- 
vive (dat.) ;  2.  superfu-. 

superstition-,  superstition. 

superveni-,  come  upon;  2.  super- 
ven-,  3.  supervtnto-. 

supplicio,  n.  punishment. 

suppdn-,  put  beneath ;  2.  supposu-, 
3.  suppusito-. 

suscip(i)-,  undertake ;  receive;  2. 
suscep  ,  3.  suscepto-. 

sustiiie-,  sustain;  2.  sustinu-,  3. 
suslento-. 

Syphac-,  a  king  of  Numidia. 

Syracusa-,  pi.  Syracuse. 

Syriaeo-,  Syrian. 


T.  short  for  Tito-, 
tabula-,  plank ;  picture. 
tabulato-,  n.  floor. 
talento-,  n.  talent. 
tali-,  such. 
tarn,  so. 

tiimdiu,  so  long  a  time. 
tamen,  nevertheless,  yet. 
tandem,  at  length. 
ta{n)g-,  touch  ;  2.  tetig-,  3.  tacto-. 
tanto-,  so  great,  so  much. 
tantum,  only, 
tantummodo,  only. 
tarditat-,  slowness. 
Tarent.ino-,  of-Tarentum. 
Tarento-,  n.  a  city  in  the  S.  of  Italy. 
Tarptia-,  a  woman's  name. 
Tarpeio-mout-,  the  hilt  of  the  Capitol. 
Tarquiuio-,  the  name  of  two  Roman 
kings. 


Tauro-,   m.  a  mountain  range  in 

Asia  Minor. 
tecto-,  n.  roof, 
teg-,  cover;  2.  tex-,  3.  tecto-. 
telo-,  n.  missile. 
tern  ere,  rashly. 

tempestat-,  time;  age;  storm. 
templo-,  n  temple. 
tempos-,  lime, 
tend-,  stretch;  2.  tetend-,  3.  tento- 

or  tenso-. 

tene-,  hold ;  2.  tenu-,  3.  tento-. 
tenero-,  tender, 
tenta-,  try;   examine;    2.  tentav-, 

3.  tentato-. 
tenui-,  thin. 

Terentio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
tergo-,  n.  back. 
tergos-,  hide. 

tennino-,  m.  boundary ;  end. 
terno-,  three  apiece. 
terra-,  earth;  land, 
terre-,  frighten;  2.  terru-,  3.  terrir 

to-. 

terrestri-,  earthly-. 
territorio-,  n.  territory. 
terror-,  fear,  alarm. 
tertio-,  third. 
testamento-,  a  will. 
testi-,  c.  witness. 

Tliessalia-,  a  part  of  northern  Greece. 
Teutono-,  pi.  a  tribe  of  Germans. 
Tiberi-,  the  river  Tiber. 
tlblcen-,  m.  flute-player. 
Tlclno-,  the  river  Ticino. 
Tigraui-,  a  king  of  Armenia,  n.  *. 

-nes. 

time-,  fear;  2.  timu-. 
timido-,  timid. 
timer-,  fear. 

Tito-,  a  Roman  first  name. 
toga-,  robe, 
toll-,  raise  up ;  2.  sustul-,  3.  subla- 

to-. 

tona-,  thunder;  2.  tonu-,  3.  tonito-, 
tonde-,  shear ;  2.  totond-,  3.  tonso-. 
tonitru-,  m.  thunder. 
tormeuto-,  military  engine. 


286 


VOCABULARY. 


torqui-,  c.  collar. 

tot,  so  mony. 

toto-,  whole. 

trab-./  beam. 

tracta-,  treat;  2.  tractav-,  3.  trac- 

tato-. 
trad-,  deliver  up;  relate;   2.   trd- 

did-,  3.  trdd.to-. 
trddfic-,  lead  across;  pass;  2  <ra- 

rfttZ  ,  3.  tradu-'t-f-. 
trah-,  draw;  protract;  2.  <r«x-,  3. 


trC<jic(i)-,  transport;  cross;  2.  frd- 

jfc-,  3.  trojecto: 
trans,  across  (ace.) 
transfer-,  carry  across  ;  2.  transtul-, 

3.  tra/tslatO: 
trantfig-,  pierce;    2.  transfix-,    3. 


transfiijra-.  c.  deserter. 
traiifigred(i)-,  go  across  ;  3. 


iransi-,  go  across;  2.  tfranslt;-,  3. 

transito-. 
transi'y-,  spend,  finish  ;  2.  transeg-, 

3.  transacto~. 
trunstti-,  leap  across  ;  2.  transilu-, 

or  Iransillv-. 

traiismatino-,  beyond  sea. 
tratismitt-,  send  across;    2.  trans- 

mis-.  3.  transniisso-. 
tranana-,    swim  across  ;    2.   fraw$- 

ndu-,  3.  Iransnato-. 
trawpvrta-,  cj«rry  across;  2.  trans- 

portdv-,  3.  transjxtrtato-. 
Trasimeno-,  w.  a  /a^e  in  N.  Italy. 
Trebia-,  a  river  in  N.  Italy. 
trecentesimo-,  three  hundredth. 
trecenUK  three  hundred. 
tredecim,  thirteen. 
trtpida-i  l>e  alarmed;  2.  trepidav-, 

3.  trepidato-. 
trepido-,  fall  of  alarm. 
Troviro-,  pi.  a  Gtrman  tribe. 
tri-,  three. 
tribu-,  bestow  ;  2.  —  "—  ,  3.  tribu- 

to-. 
tribuno-,  77i.  tribune. 


tributo-,  n.  tribute. 

trices! mo-,  thirtieth. 

triduo-,  n.  space-  of  three  days. 

trijjreiniiio-.  thrtt  born  at  a  birth. 

tri<;iiita,  thirty. 

trino-,  in  sets  oj  tJiree. 

triqnetro-,  triangular. 

tristi-,  sad. 

triunipha-,  triumph ;  2.  triumphal)-, 

3.  ti'iuitiptnlto-. 
tri  urn  pi  10-,  TO.  triumph. 
Tn  ja-,  Titty. 
TrCjano-,  Trojan. 
true-.  Ji  rce. 
tue-,  look  at ;  defend ;  3.  tuito-  or 

tilto-. 

Tullio-,  a.  Roman  dan-wine. 
Tullo-,  the  second  king  cf  Home. 
turn,  then;  c<>nj.  and  also. 
tuninlo-,  mound;  toiub. 
tumultu-,  uproar. 
tiio-,  thy,  y»ur. 
turlm.-.  confuse,  alarm  ;  2.  turbdv-, 

3.  turbdto-. 
turma-,  tro»p. 
turpi-,  ugly;  disgraceful. 
turpiter,  busdy. 
turpitudon-,  disgrace. 
turri-.  /.  tower. 
Tuscia-,  Etruria. 
Tusculo-,  n.  a  town  of  Latium. 
tuto-,  sofe. 
tutor-,  guardian. 
tyrauno-,  tyrant. 


fiber-,  n.  breast ;  fertility. 

ubi,  when ;  where. 

Ubio-,  pi.  a  Gallic  tribe. 

ubiqne,  everywhere. 

vl>:isc-,  avenpe ;  punish  ;  3.  ulto-. 

ullo-,  any  single. 

ulterior-,  further. 

ultimo-,  furthest,  last. 

ultra,  beyond  (»cc.). 

ultro,  beyond;  spontaneously. 


VOCABULARY. 


287 


umbroso-,  shady. 

una,  together. 

unda-.  wave. 

unde,  whence. 

undeciiii,  eleven. 

xi  n  de  1 1  Gnajfes  i  m  o,  eigh  ty-n  in  th. 

undOquinqiiaginta,  forty-nine. 

uudetiicesimo-,  twenty-ninth. 

undevicSsimo-,  nineteenth. 

undique,/rurn  (on)  all  sidts. 

ungui-,  m.  nail,  claw,  talon. 

universe-,  whole,  all  together. 

uiio-,  one- 

unquam,  ever. 

uib(i)-.  /.  city  ;  Rome. 

urbario-,  belonging  to  the  city. 

usque,  continually. 

ut,  as.  whan  ;  in,  order  that;  so  that. 

utctinque,  somehow  or  other. 

ut-  help  oneself,  use  (at/.);  3.  uso-. 

Ctili-.  useft.1 

uiiliut-,  profit. 

utrinque.  on  both  sides. 

utro-qae.  both ;  each. 

utrum,  whether. 

uxor-,  wife. 


Vacuo-,  unoccupied. 

vado-,  n.  shoal  water. 

vaga-,  wander  about;  3.  vagato-. 

va>ntu-,  wailing,  cry. 

valde,  very  much. 

Valerio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 

valetudon-,  health. 

valli-,  /.  valley. 

vallo-,  n.  (also  m.)  rampart. 

varie,  variously. 

vario-,  various,  diverse. 

vaata-,    lay  waste;    2.  vastdv-,    3. 

vaslato-, 

vati-,  c.  nom.  s.  vatgs,  prophet. 
veotio:al(i)-,  n.  tax. 
vehementer,  greatly. 


veh-,  carry ;  2.  vex-,  3.  vecto-. 
Veient(i)-,   or  Veientauo-,  pi.    the 

people  of  Veii. 
vel,  either,  or. 
veloc(i)-,  swift. 
veiiatur-,  hunter. 

vend-,  sell ;  2.  vendid-,  3.  vendito-. 
veneno-,  n.  poison. 
Veneto-,  pi.  a  German  tribe, 
veni-,  come;  2.  ven  ,  3.  vtnto-. 
ventr-,  m.  bdly. 
vento-,  m.  wind, 
verbera-,  strike,  whip ;  2.  verberav-, 

3.  verberuto. 
verbo-,  n.  word. 
vero-,  true. 

Verona-,  a  city  of  N.  Italy, 
versa-,   turn   otien;    2.   verav-,    3. 

versato-. 
versn-,  line* 

vert-,  turn  ;  2.  — " — ,  3.  verso. 
vesper  or  vespero-,  m.  evening. 
Vesta-,  a  bealken  goddess. 
Vestali,  Vcvtal,  consecrated  to  Vesta. 
vest!-,  /.  garment, 
vesti-,  clothe ;  2.  vestlv-,  3.  vesllto-. 
vestimento-,  clothing. 
vestfo-,  your. 

vtta-,  forbid ;  2.  vetu-,  3.  vetito-. 
vetes ,  old. 

Veturio-,  a  Roman  clan-name. 
via-,  way,  road. 
viator-,  traveller. 
vicesimo-,  twentieth. 
vlco-,  m.  village. 
victor-,  conqueror. 
victoria-,  victory. 
victo-,  conquered. 

vide-,  see ;  appear ;  2.  vld-,  3.  vlso-. 
vige-,  flourish ;  2.  vigu-. 
vigilia-,  watch. 
vlginti,  twenty, 
vine-,  conquer;    prevail;    2,   vie-, 

3.  victo-. 

vinci-,  bind;  2.  vinx-,  3.  vincto-. 
vincto-,  bound. 
viiiculo-,  n.  bond,  chain. 
viiidec-,  c.  defender. 


288 


VOCABULARY. 


vindica-,  avenge ;  proceed  against ; 

2.  vindicav-,  3.  vindicate-. 
vino-,  n.  wine. 

viola-,  violate,  outrage;  2.  violav-, 

3.  violato-. 
viridi-,  green. 
virga-,  twiy,  rod. 
Yirginio-,  a  Roman  dan-name. 
virgon-,  virgin. 

viro-,  man. 

virtiit-,  manliness;  virtue. 

vis(i)-, /.  (irreg.)  force;  strength;  a 

large  quantity. 
vita-,  life. 

vita-,  avoid ;  2.  vitdv-,  3.  vltdto-. 
vitio-,  n.  fault^  vice, 
vlv-,  live;  2.  vix-t  3.  victo-. 
vivo-,  living. 
vix,  scarcely. 
vOc-,  /.  vr/tc0. 

voca-,  call ;  2.  vocav-,  3.  vocato-. 
vol-,  wish,  be  willing;  2. 


Yol sco-,  pi.  a  Latin  tribe. 

volucri-,  c.  bird. 

Volunntia-,  a  woman's  name. 

voluntat-,  will;  dioice. 

voluptat-,  pleasure. 

vora-,  devour ;  2.  vorav-,  3.  vorato-. 

wlnera-,  wound;    2.  vulnerav-,   3. 

vulnerato-. 

vulnerato-,  wounded. 
v  u  1  n  es-,  wound. 
vultu-,  face. 


Xanthippo,  a  Spartan  commander, 


Zama-,  a  village  of  Numidia. 


289 


CORRIGENDA. 

p.  24,  line  11  from  bottom;  for  15  read  16. 

p.  47,  vocab. ;  for  deprive  read  deliver. 

p  55,  line  4  from  bottom;  for  206  read  204. 

p.  L_'3.  sent.  7  ot  ex    162;  /';r  quomodo  rearf  qnomodo. 

p.  140,  hue  4  of  ex.  191 ;  for  sun-set  mu/sun  .set. 

L;«st  line  ot  ex.  191  ;  for  in-one-day  r^ofl  iu-otie  day. 

p.  143,  line  7  from  bottom;  for  2d  and  3d  read  1st  and  2d. 

p.  177,  line  12  from  top;  for  ferrerls  read  femjria. 

p.  193,  line  6  from  cop ;  fur  uisi  read  iiisi. 

25 


290 


SYNOPSIS    OF    THE    FOUR 


IMPERFECT   TENSES. 


INDICATIVE  MOOD. 


Active  person-endings. 


Sing. 

riur. 

Conju- 

Yerb- 

Tense-           /  — 

*  x 

t  

—*  ^ 

gation. 

si  em. 

stem.              1 

2        3 

1 

2             3 

t. 

r  i 

a  ma-* 

o 

-s        t 

-mus 

-tis         nt 

1  < 

2 

inone- 

" 

tt        ti 

tt 

it           it 

1 

I     3 

audi- 
reg- 



is       it 

imu 

itis          *4 

r  i 

ama- 

aniaba-           m 

-s       t 

-nws 

-tia         nt 

Sa 

!    2 

mone- 

iiiom'ba-          " 

tt       tt 

" 

it 

£ 

\    4 

audi- 

!iu'lir-i»a-          " 

t:         tt 

« 

tt           tt 

I      3 

reg- 

regeba-           " 

it         tt 

it 

It                   it 

^ 

r   i 

ama- 

amab-             o 

is      it 

imus 

itis        unt 

at 

t 

1       2 

uione- 

innneb-            " 

ti        (t 

tt         it 

t-  • 

I      4 

audi- 

audie-|          m 

-s        t 

-mus 

-tis       nt 

Ph 

I     3 

reg- 

rege-f             ** 

ii             U 

u 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Active 

person-endings. 

Sing. 

riur. 

Conju- 

Yerb- 

Trmn 

_j^ 

JL 

gation. 

srem. 

Stem.         1 

2 

3           1 

2            3 

g 

r  i 

ama- 

ame-           m 

-s 

t         -mus 

-tis        nt 

1 

2 

mone- 

monea-       " 

tt 

U                           .4 

44 

8 

4 

audi- 

audia-         " 

« 

to                  It 

« 

fi 

I      3 

reg- 

rega-          " 

u 

tt                 ii 

tt 

r   i 

ama- 

amare-        " 

u 

it                 tt 

tt 

s 

2 

mone- 

monere-     " 

u 

ti                  tt 

it 

ST 

4 

audi- 

audlre-       " 

u 

it                  It 

" 

.      3 

reg- 

regere-       « 

tt 

u           "u 

" 

*  A  of  the  stem  is  lost  in  tho  firs   persons  sing,  before  the  endings  o  and  or. 
t  The  t,  of  thb  t*.-nse-s>teiii  is  changed  to  a  iu  the  first  person  singular,  active 
an,,  passive. 


201 


REGULAR  LATIN  CONJUGATIONS 


Passive  person-endings. 


Sing. 


Plur. 


1 

2 

3                        1 

2 

3 

or 

-ris  or  -re 

-tur                  -mur 

-mini 

ntur 

tt 

it 

it                       tt 

" 

" 

« 

it 

tt                       tt 

« 

untur 

" 

eris  or  ere 

itur                  imur 

iminl 

u 

r 

-ris  or  -re 

-tur                  -mur 

•mini 

ntur 

it 

tt 

tt                              t; 

M 

it 

(( 

u 

it                              it 

it 

u 

« 

u 

u                              tt 

" 

K 

or 

eris  or  ere 

itur                  imur 

imini 

untur 

tt 

it 

tt                       t. 

«' 

»• 

r 

•ris  or  -re 

-tur                  -mur 

-mini 

ntur 

it                      it 

Passive  person-endings. 

Sing. 

Plur. 

1 

2 

3               1 

2 

3 

r 

-ris  or  -re 

-tur        -mur 

-mini 

ntur 

it 

u 

tt             it 

it 

" 

it 

It 

U                      (I 

u 

u 

it 

« 

tl               l( 

it 

" 

u 

«i 

(1          It 

it 

K 

u 

tt 

u               u 

u 

(1 

M 

u 

li                       it 

a 

U 

tt 

u 

U                    M 

u 

U 

202 


SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  FOUR 
MOOD. 


Active  person-endinprs. 

Sing.  Pb/r. 


gatiuu.       si.-m.                       2                          32                        3 
^   C      1           a  ma-                          —  *           >                    -It- 
2           UK  me-                       —  *  '                             " 
g  )      4           audi-                        —  * 
P-i  (^     3          reg-                         e                                  ite 

IP 
lit 

a  ma-                        -to                   -to        -tote 
moiie-                       " 
amli-                         " 
reg-                          ito                   ito        itote 

rto 
unto 

PERFECT    TENSES. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Active:  made  from  the  2d  stem. 

Tense             Siny.                             Plur. 

123               12 

3 

PRESENT 

2  amav-      I       istl     it           imus     istis 

enint 
or  tro 

PAST 

"        amSvera-   m    -s        t          -mus    -tis 

nt 

FUTURE 

"         amaver-     o      is        it          imus    itis 

int 

SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

PRESENT 

2  amav-    amaveri-    m     -sf      t           -musf   -tisf 

nt 

PAST 

"        amavisse-  "      "         "              "        " 

M 

*  The  rlfiMi  ( — 1  ineins  that  the  s  f?n-vi>wi-1  i<  ma-lc  ]<>n^. 

t  These  «-nJin^s  du  not  alicmjs  muke  the  stuui-vowcl  \»n£  in  ibis  tense. 


REGULAR  LATIN    CONJUGATIONS. 


293 


2 
-re 


Passive  person-eudings. 

Sing.  Plur. 

•>• , N        t •> — 

3 


2 
-mini 


ere 

-tor 

it 

itor 


imml 


-tor 
ii 

a 

itor 


ntor 
untor 


XOTE. — The  perfect  tenses  of  all  verbs  being. made  alike,  a  single 
example  will  suffice. 


Passive :  made  with  the  3d  stem. 


Sing. 

P/wr. 

1 

1 
sum 

2 

es 

3 

est 

1 

1 
sumus 

2 

estis 

3 

suut 

«! 

£ 

£ 

c 

cs 

t 

^ 

eram 

eras 

erat 

oT 

erSmus 

eratia 

erant 

& 

1  . 

1—     . 

£ 

ero 

eria 

erit 

• 

erirnus 

eritia 

erunt 

fe 

% 

f 

S 

ICt 

£ 

s 

sim 

sis 

sit 

03 

simus 

sltia 

sint 

essem 

essos 

esset 

essemus 

essetis 

essent 

25* 

294  SYNOPSIS  OF  THE  FOUR 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Conjugation. 

1  1  ama- 


IMPERFECT 

t  ! 

1  uione- 
1  audi- 
1  reg- 

PERFECT 

• 

2  amav- 

FUTURE 

3  amato- 

PARTICIPLES. 

IMPERFECT 

{  ' 

3 

1  ama- 
1  moue- 
1  audi- 
1  reg- 

Active. 

-re 
u 

II 

ere 
-isse 
amaturo-csse 


ent(i)- 
L         3  1  reg- 

PERFECT 

FUTURE        nacually  made  by  changing  o  of  the  3d  stem  to  vro-. 

SUPINES. 

ACCUSATIVE        made  by  changing  the  o  of  the  3d  stem  to  urn. 
ABLATIVE  "  "  "  "         "    u. 

GERUND  AND  GERUNDIVE. 


1  ama- 
1  inone- 
1  audi- 
1  reg- 


.  ndo- 
endo-  or  undo- 

U  tl 


RFGULA'R  LATIN    CONJUGATIONS. 

Passive, 
-rl 
u 

I 

3  amato-  amato-esse 

amutum  Irl 


3d  stem. 


The  preceding  synopsis  of  the  conjugation  of  the  regular  Latin  verb 
is  inserted  here  more  with  a  view  of  assisting  teachers  readily  to  make 
themselves  masters  of  the  system  of  the  book,  than  for  the  sake  of 
pupils,  who  will,  it  is  hoped,  have  learned  thoroughly  all  these  facts 
in  their  proper  places.  It  may,  however,  be  convenient  for  them  too, 
to  see  all  the  parts  of  the  verb  here  put  together. 

It  is  to  be  understood  that  endings  preceded  by  a  dash,  as  -re,  make 
the  stern-vowel,  to  which  they  are  attached,  long. 


U.  C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


YB  00428 


160 

36178         M87S 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


raft 


